3he04240aaactqzza01 v1 Alcatel-Lucent 5620

Alcatel-Lucent 5620
SERVICE AWARE MANAGER | RELEASE 6.1

PARAMETER GUIDE
Alcatel-Lucent Proprietary This document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright 2008-2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice. Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent, the Alcatel-Lucent logo, and TiMetra are registered trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2008-2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel-Lucent products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life-support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel-Lucent, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel-Lucent harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, license or other distribution of the products in such applications. This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel-Lucent products. Please note that this information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel-Lucent tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel-Lucent product and contact the supplier for confirmation. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided about non-Alcatel-Lucent products. However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel-Lucent products, if any, are set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel-Lucent and its customers. This document was originally written in English. If there is any conflict or inconsistency between the English version and any other version of a document, the English version shall prevail.
When printed by Alcatel-Lucent, this document is printed on recycled paper.
Preface
About this document

The 5620 SAM User Guide and 5620 SAM Parameter Guide provide task-based workflows and user documentation to allow you to:
use the GUI to perform tasks and maximize operator efficiency auto-discover and administer the 5620 SAM-managed network configure network devices configure and enable QoS and routing policies configure and enable customer services, such as VLL, IES, VPRN, and VPLS perform network fault management collect accounting and performance statistics
The 5620 SAM User Guide uses a task-based format. Each chapter contains:
overview information about the functionality described in the chapter a workflow that describes the steps for configuring and using the functionality a list of the GUI menus or commands related to the functionality a list of the procedures related to the functionality detailed procedures that list the configurable parameters on the associated forms
The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide provides:
parameter descriptions that include value ranges and default values parameter options and option descriptions parameter and option dependencies parameter mappings to the 5620 SAM-O XML equivalent property names
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide
May 2009
iii
Preface
Procedure 1 To view 5620 SAM Parameter Guide parameter descriptions from the 5620 SAM User Guide
You can click on a parameter name in a 5620 SAM User Guide procedure to open the matching parameter description in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide. Ensure the following conditions are true beforehand:
the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide and 5620 SAM User Guide are located in and opened from the same directory Adobe Reader Release 5.0 or later is installed
To view a parameter description when the 5620 SAM User Guide and the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide are open: i ii iii Open the 5620 SAM User Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Open the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Click on a parameter name in a procedure in the 5620 SAM User Guide. The parameter description is displayed in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.
To view parameter descriptions when only the 5620 SAM User Guide is open: i ii Open the 5620 SAM User Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Click on a parameter name in a procedure in the 5620 SAM User Guide. The 5620 SAM User Guide closes and the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide opens to display the parameter description. Double-click on the Previous View button in Adobe Acrobat to re-open the 5620 SAM User Guide. The 5620 SAM User Guide opens and displays the parameter from step ii. Click on the parameter name from step ii. The parameter description is displayed in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.
iii
iv
iv
May 2009
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Preface
About related documentation

There are several documents that describe the 5620 SAM and the managed devices.
See the 5620 SAM Planning Guide for information about 5620 SAM scalability
and recommended hardware configurations.
See the 5620 SAM | 5650 CPAM Installation and Upgrade Guide for information
about installing the 5620 SAM database, server, and client software. See the 5620 SAM User Guide for information about using the client GUI to perform network management functions. See the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide for definitions, ranges, dependencies, and default values for configurable 5620 SAM client GUI parameters. See the 5620 SAM-O OSS Interface Developer Guide for information about using the XML OSS interface to create OSS applications, for example, to perform alarm monitoring and inventory control. See the 5620 SAM Routine Maintenance Procedures Guide for information about developing and scheduling regular maintenance activities. See the 5620 SAM System Architecture Guide for information about software component interaction. See the 5620 SAM NE Compatibility Guide for release-specific information about the compatibility of managed-device features with different 5620 SAM releases. See the 5620 SAM Statistics Management Guide for information about managing 5620 SAM statistics collection and to view a list of the MIB counters that are available for collection using the 5620 SAM. See the index file in the User_Documentation directory on the application DVD for additional documentation information.
See the 7750 SR, 7450 ESS, 7710 SR, 7705 SAR, 7250 SAS, 7250 SAS-ES, 7250 SAS-ESA, OS 6400, OS 6850, OS 6855, and Telco user documentation for information about device-specific CLI commands, parameters, and installation. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent support representative for information about specific network or facility considerations.
Procedure 2 To find the 5620 SAM user documentation

The user documentation is available from the following sources:
the User_Documentation directory on the product DVD-ROM Help5620 SAM User Documentation in the 5620 SAM client GUI main menu
Multiple PDF document search

You can use Adobe Reader Release 6.0 and later to search multiple PDF files for a common term. Adobe Reader displays the results in a single display panel. The results are grouped by PDF file, and you can expand the entry for each file.
May 2009
Preface
Note The PDF files in which you search must be in the same
folder.
Procedure 3 To search multiple PDF files for a common term

1 2 3 4 5 6 Open Adobe Acrobat Reader. Choose EditSearch from the Acrobat Reader main menu. The Search PDF panel appears. Enter the search criteria. Click on the All PDF Documents In radio button. Select the folder in which to search using the drop-down menu. Click on the Search button. Acrobat Reader displays the search results. You can expand the entries for each document by clicking on the + symbol.
Conventions used in this guide

Table 1 lists the conventions that are used throughout the documentation.
Table 1 Documentation conventions
Convention Key name Italics Key+Key KeyKey Description Press a keyboard key Identifies a variable Type the appropriate consecutive keystroke sequence Type the appropriate simultaneous keystroke sequence Press the Return key An em dash indicates there is no information. Indicates that a cascading submenu results from selecting a menu item Example Delete hostname CTRL+G CTRLG PoliciesAlarm Policies
Procedures with options or substeps

When there are options in a procedure, they are identified by letters. When there are substeps in a procedure, they are identified by roman numerals.
vi
May 2009
Preface
Example of options in a procedure
At step 1, you can choose option a or b. At step 2, you must do what the step indicates.
1 This step offers two options. You must choose one of the following. a b 2 This is one option. This is another option.
You must perform this step.
Example of substeps in a procedure
At step 1, you must perform a series of substeps within a step. At step 2, you must do what the step indicates.
1 This step has a series of substeps that you must perform to complete the step. You must perform the following substeps. i ii iii 2 This is the first substep. This is the second substep. This is the third substep.
You must perform this step.
Important information
The following conventions are used to indicate important information:
Warning Warning indicates that the described activity or situation
may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious performance problems.

Caution Caution indicates that the described activity or situation
may, or will, cause service interruption.
Note Notes provides information that is, or may be, of special
interest.
May 2009
vii
Preface
viii
May 2009
Contents
Preface
iii
About this document .................................................................................. iii Procedure 1 To view 5620 SAM Parameter Guide parameter descriptions from the 5620 SAM User Guide ................................. iv About related documentation......................................................................... v Procedure 2 To find the 5620 SAM user documentation.......................... v Multiple PDF document search........................................................................ v Procedure 3 To search multiple PDF files for a common term ................. vi Conventions used in this guide....................................................................... vi Procedures with options or substeps ................................................ vi Important information................................................................ vii
5620 SAM Parameter Guide overview

68 5620 SAM Parameter Guide overview
68.1
68-1
5620 SAM Parameter Guide overview ............................................... 68-2 Audience.............................................................................. 68-2 5620 SAM Parameter Guide structure ............................................ 68-2 Searching for information.......................................................... 68-3 Procedure 68-1 To view 5620 SAM Parameter Guide parameter descriptions from the 5620 SAM User Guide .............................. 68-3 5620 SAM GUI and 5620 SAM-O OSS parameters ................................ 68-4 Functionality not documented in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide .......... 68-4
May 2009
ix
Contents
Application menu parameters

69 User Preferences parameters
69.1
69-1
User Preferences parameters ........................................................ 69-2 Access Interface Encap Value (Dot1q only) ..................................... 69-2 Apply User Span of Control ........................................................ 69-2 Default Polling Interval (Seconds) ................................................ 69-2 Maximum Data Retention Time (Seconds)....................................... 69-2 Populate Entire Properties Form on Opening ................................... 69-2 Show Alarm Flags.................................................................... 69-3 Show Toolbar ........................................................................ 69-3 Show Correlated Alarms............................................................ 69-3 Specify # of Items Per Page ....................................................... 69-3 Suppress Containing Window Warning ........................................... 69-3 Suppress Template Generation Message......................................... 69-4 Turn on Audible Alarms ............................................................ 69-4
Create menu parameters

70 Create VPLS parameters
70.1
70-1
Create VPLS parameters .............................................................. 70-2 AAL5 Encapsulation ................................................................. 70-2 Accounting Policy ID ................................................................ 70-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 70-2 Administrative ISID (isid)........................................................... 70-2 Address ID (index)................................................................... 70-2 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)....................................................... 70-2 Aggregation .......................................................................... 70-2 Aging Enabled (agingEnabled)..................................................... 70-3 ANCP String .......................................................................... 70-3 ARP Reply Agent (arpReplyAgent) ................................................ 70-3 ARP Timeout (seconds) (arpTimeout) ............................................ 70-4 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling..................................................... 70-4 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 70-4 Automatic SDP Binding Creation .................................................. 70-4 Backbone STP (backbonePipStp) .................................................. 70-4 Auto Select Tunnels................................................................. 70-5 BGP Administrative State (administrativeState) ............................... 70-5 BGP Administrative Status (bgpAdAdminStatus)................................ 70-5 Block On Mesh SDP Failure (blockOnMeshFail).................................. 70-5 Bridge Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay) ....................... 70-5 Bridge Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime)................................ 70-6 Bridge Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge) ...................................... 70-6 Bridge Max Hops (bridgeMaxHops)................................................ 70-6 Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat) ................................. 70-6 Circuit-id Suboption (infoCircuitId) .............................................. 70-6
May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
CCM Messages ........................................................................ 70-7 Clear Forced Switchover ........................................................... 70-7 Collect Accounting Statistics ...................................................... 70-7 Control Word (controlWord) ....................................................... 70-7 Default Gateway IP Address (defaultGatewayIpAddr) ......................... 70-7 Default Gateway MAC Address (defaultGatewayMacAddr).................... 70-8 Default Mesh VC ID.................................................................. 70-8 Description ........................................................................... 70-8 Destination Node ID................................................................. 70-8 Direction.............................................................................. 70-8 Discard Unknown Destinations (discardUnknownDestinations)............... 70-8 Discard Unknown Source (discardUnknownSource) ............................ 70-8 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 70-8 Dynamic Topology Discovery ...................................................... 70-9 Edge Capability Detection (autoEdge) ........................................... 70-9 Edge Port (rapidStart) .............................................................. 70-9 Egress Filter ID....................................................................... 70-9 Egress Label .......................................................................... 70-9 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only ................................................... 70-9 Egress Policy ID ...................................................................... 70-9 Egress Scheduler Name............................................................. 70-9 Enable............................................................................... 70-10 Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter) ........................................... 70-10 Enable DHCP Relay................................................................ 70-10 Enable Lease Populate (leasePopulate) ....................................... 70-10 Fast-leave (fastLeave)............................................................ 70-10 Force L2PT on Managed L2 Access Interface (forceL2Pt) ................... 70-11 Force Switchover .................................................................. 70-11 Force VLAN VC Forwarding (forceVlanVcForwarding) ....................... 70-11 Formatted VSI ID Prefix (vsiIdPrefixIpFormat)................................ 70-11 Formatted VSI ID RD (vsiRdCli) .................................................. 70-11 General query interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) ....................... 70-11 Group Address (grpAddr) ......................................................... 70-12 High Watermark (%)............................................................... 70-12 High Watermark (%) (highWatermark) ......................................... 70-12 High Watermark (%) (mfibTableHighWatermark)............................. 70-12 Hold Multiplier..................................................................... 70-12 ID .................................................................................... 70-12 ID .................................................................................... 70-12 I/F MAC Address (interfaceMacAddress) ....................................... 70-13 IGMP Version (igmpVersion) ..................................................... 70-13 Ignore Standby Signalling (ignoreStandbySignalling)......................... 70-13 Import Policy (importPolicy) .................................................... 70-13 Ingress Filter ID .................................................................... 70-13 Ingress Label ....................................................................... 70-13 Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P ...................................................... 70-13 Ingress Policy ID ................................................................... 70-13 Ingress Scheduler Name .......................................................... 70-14 Inherit Value ....................................................................... 70-14 Inner Encapsulation Value ....................................................... 70-14 Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) ................................................ 70-14 Instance Index (id) ................................................................ 70-14
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 xi
Contents
Interface ID (id) ................................................................... IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ Keep Alive (seconds).............................................................. Learning Enabled (learningEnabled) ........................................... Limit Mac Move (limitMacMove)................................................. Limit Mac Move Level (limitMacMoveLevel)................................... Link Type (linkType) .............................................................. Local Address ...................................................................... Local Age Time (seconds) (localAgeTime)..................................... Low Priority Defect ............................................................... Low Watermark (%) ............................................................... Low Watermark (%) (lowWatermark)........................................... Low Watermark (%) (mfibTableLowWatermark).............................. MAC Address ....................................................................... MAC Flush on fail (macFlushOnFail) ............................................ MAC Monitoring .................................................................... MAC Pinning (macPinning) ....................................................... Maintenance Association ID...................................................... Maintenance Domain ID .......................................................... Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth) .............. Max VLAN ID (maxVlanId) ........................................................ Max Number of Groups (maxGroups) ........................................... Max.number of groups (maxNbrGroups) ....................................... Max. Response interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval) ................ Max. Response interval group queries (tenths of seconds) (lastMemberInterval) ....................................................... Max. VLAN Tag (max) ............................................................. Maximum BPDUs (PDUs/Hello Interval) (stpMaxBPDUs) ..................... Maximum Entries (maxEntries).................................................. Maximum FIB Entries (maxNumOfFibEntries) ................................. Min VLAN ID (minVlanId) ......................................................... Min. VLAN Tag (min) .............................................................. MLD version (mldVersion) ........................................................ Monitor Access Interface Operational State .................................. Move Frequency (macMoveFrequency) ........................................ Mrouter attached (mrouterAttached) .......................................... MRP Admin Status (mrpAdminStatus) .......................................... MRP Attribute-Table-High-Watermark (mrpAttrTblHighWatermark) ...... MRP Attribute-Table-Low-Watermark (mrpAttrTblLowWatermark) ....... MRP Flood Time (seconds) (mrpFloodTime)................................... MRP Join Time (tenths of a second) (mrpJoinTime) ......................... MRP Leave AllTime (tenths of a second) (mrpLeaveAllTime) .............. MRP Leave Time (tenths of a second) (mrpLeaveTime)..................... MRP Max Attributes (mrpMaxAttributes) ...................................... MRP Periodic Enabled (mrpPeriodicEnabled) ................................. MRP Periodic Time (tenths of a second) (mrpPeriodicTime) ............... MTU.................................................................................. Name (displayedName)........................................................... No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit................................................. OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState).................................. Outer Encapsulation Value.......................................................
xii May 2009
70-14 70-14 70-14 70-14 70-15 70-15 70-15 70-15 70-15 70-16 70-16 70-16 70-16 70-16 70-16 70-17 70-17 70-17 70-17 70-17 70-17 70-18 70-18 70-18 70-18 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-19 70-20 70-20 70-20 70-20 70-20 70-20 70-20 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-21 70-22 70-22
Contents
Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) ................................................ Path Cost (pathCost).............................................................. Port.................................................................................. Port Number (portNum) .......................................................... Prefix Length (prefixLength) .................................................... Primary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMovePrimaryPortsCumulativeFactor) .............................. Priority.............................................................................. Priority (priority) .................................................................. Priority (priority) .................................................................. Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp) ................................................ Priority Level for CCM Messages ................................................ Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec)........................................ Priority Type (priorityMarkType) ............................................... Propogate MAC Flush (propagateMacFlush) ................................... Protected Mac Address (protectedMac) ....................................... Query-interval (seconds) (queryInterval)...................................... Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) ................................. Query source address (querySrcAddress) ...................................... Reforwarding Policy (infoAction) ............................................... Region Name (regionName)...................................................... Region Revision (regionRevision) ............................................... Remote Age Time (seconds) (remoteAgeTime)............................... Remote-id Suboption (infoRemoteId) .......................................... Report source address (reportSrcAddress) .................................... Residential (residential) ......................................................... Restrict Protected Source (restrictProtectedSource) ....................... Restrict Protected Source Action (restrictProtectedSourceAction) ....... Restrict Unprotected Destination (restrictUnprotectedDestination)...... Retry Timeout (macMoveRetryTimeout)....................................... Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ........................ Return Tunnel Transport ......................................................... Revert Time (second) (revertTime) ............................................ Root Guard (rootGuard) .......................................................... Robust count (robustCount) ..................................................... Routing Policy Name (policyStatementName) ................................ Secondary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMoveSecondaryPortsCumulativeFactor) ........................... Send queries (sendQueries)...................................................... Send Flush All But Mine (ldpMacFlushNotMine) ............................... Send Flush All From Me (ldpMacFlush) ......................................... Service ID ........................................................................... Service Name ...................................................................... Site ID ............................................................................... Size (entries) (size) ............................................................... Snooping (snooping) .............................................................. Source Address (srcAddr) ........................................................ Source MAC Address (backboneSrcMac)........................................ STP Mode (rstpProtocol) ......................................................... Subscriber ID ....................................................................... Suppress Standby Signalling (suppressStandbySignalling) ................... Table size (entries) (mfibTableSize) ...........................................
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009
70-22 70-22 70-22 70-22 70-22 70-22 70-22 70-23 70-23 70-23 70-23 70-23 70-23 70-23 70-24 70-24 70-24 70-24 70-24 70-25 70-25 70-25 70-25 70-25 70-25 70-26 70-26 70-26 70-26 70-26 70-26 70-27 70-27 70-27 70-27 70-27 70-28 70-28 70-28 70-28 70-28 70-28 70-28 70-29 70-29 70-29 70-29 70-30 70-30 70-30
xiii
Contents
Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ................................. Tunnel Transport .................................................................. Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) .............. Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths ................................................. Use Component Package Policy (useComponentPackagePolicy) ........... Use Shared Queue................................................................. VC ID ................................................................................ VC Type ............................................................................. VLAN VC Tag ....................................................................... VPLS ID (VplsId).................................................................... VPLS Mode (L2 Access Interface) (vplsMode) ................................. VPLS Tag (vplsTag) ................................................................
70-30 70-30 70-30 70-30 70-31 70-31 70-31 70-31 70-31 70-31 70-31 70-31
71 Create VLL parameters

71.1
71-1
Create VLL parameters................................................................ 71-2 AAL5 Encapsulation ................................................................. 71-2 Aal-5 Frame Aware (concatCellAal5Fr) .......................................... 71-2 Accounting Policy ID ................................................................ 71-2 Active Hold Delay (100s of milliseconds) (activeHoldDelay) ................. 71-2 Admin Concat Limit (maxAdminCells) ........................................... 71-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 71-3 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)....................................................... 71-3 Aggregation .......................................................................... 71-3 ANCP String .......................................................................... 71-3 ATM Connection Type (connectionType) ........................................ 71-3 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling..................................................... 71-3 ATM OAM Terminate (atmOamTerminate) ...................................... 71-3 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 71-4 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 71-4 Automatic SDP Binding Creation .................................................. 71-4 Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel ............................................ 71-4 Auto Select Transport Tunnel ..................................................... 71-4 CCM Messages (ccEnable) .......................................................... 71-4 CE IP Address (ceInetAddress)..................................................... 71-4 Clp Change (concatCellClp)........................................................ 71-4 Collect Accounting Statistics ...................................................... 71-5 Control Word (controlWord) ....................................................... 71-5 Default VC ID (defaultVcId)........................................................ 71-5 Description ........................................................................... 71-5 Destination MAC Address (backboneDestMac) .................................. 71-5 Destination Node ID................................................................. 71-5 Direction (direction) ................................................................ 71-5 Disable Revert Time (Infinite)..................................................... 71-5 Egress Filter ID....................................................................... 71-6 Egress Label .......................................................................... 71-6 Egress Policy ID ...................................................................... 71-6 Egress Scheduler Name............................................................. 71-6 Encapsulation Value (End VPI) .................................................... 71-6 Encapsulation Value (Start VPI) ................................................... 71-6 Encapsulation Value (VPI).......................................................... 71-6 ID (mepId) ............................................................................ 71-6
xiv
Contents
Ingress Filter ID ...................................................................... 71-6 Ingress Label ......................................................................... 71-7 Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P.......................................................... 71-7 Ingress Policy ID ..................................................................... 71-7 Ingress Scheduler Name ............................................................ 71-7 Inherit Value ......................................................................... 71-7 Inner Encapsulation Value ......................................................... 71-7 Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) .................................................. 71-7 Inter-Chassis Backup (isIcb) ....................................................... 71-7 Interworking Type (interworking) ................................................ 71-7 ISID (isid) ............................................................................. 71-8 Jitter Buffer (ms) (CemJitterBuffer) ............................................. 71-8 LLF Enabled (llfEnabled) ........................................................... 71-8 Local ECID (cemLocalEcid)......................................................... 71-9 Low-priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect)......................................... 71-9 MAC Address (macAddress) ........................................................ 71-9 MAC Refresh Interval (macRefreshInterval) ..................................... 71-9 Maintenance Association ID (maintenanceAssociationId) ..................... 71-9 Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) ............................. 71-9 Max Concat Delay (maxDelay)..................................................... 71-9 MC Ring Node (ringNodeName).................................................... 71-9 Monitor Access Interface Operational State .................................... 71-9 MTU.................................................................................. 71-10 Name ................................................................................ 71-10 No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit................................................. 71-10 No Revert ........................................................................... 71-10 Outer Encapsulation Value....................................................... 71-10 Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) ................................................ 71-10 Payload Size (octets) (cemPayloadSize) ....................................... 71-10 Peer CE Address (ceInetAddress) ............................................... 71-11 Port.................................................................................. 71-11 Precedence (endpointPrecedence)............................................. 71-11 Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority)........................... 71-11 Remote ECID (cemRemoteEcid)................................................. 71-11 Remote MAC Address (cemRemoteMacAddr).................................. 71-12 Report Alarm (cemReportAlarm) ............................................... 71-12 Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ........................ 71-12 Return Tunnel Transport ......................................................... 71-12 Revert Time (second) (revertTime) ............................................ 71-12 RTP Header (cemUseRtpHeader) ............................................... 71-13 SDP Admin Bandwidth (sdpBindAdminBandwidth) ........................... 71-13 Service ID ........................................................................... 71-15 Site ID ............................................................................... 71-15 Service Name ...................................................................... 71-15 Subscriber Identification ......................................................... 71-15 Transport Type .................................................................... 71-15 Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ................................. 71-16 Tunnel Transport .................................................................. 71-16 Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths ................................................. 71-16 Use Shared Queue................................................................. 71-16 VC Type (vcType) ................................................................. 71-16
May 2009
xv
Contents
VLAN VC Tag ....................................................................... 71-16 VLL Site Type (vllSiteType) ...................................................... 71-17
72 Create VPRN parameters

72.1
72-1
Create VPRN parameters.............................................................. 72-2 AAL5 Encapsulation ................................................................. 72-2 Accounting Policy ID ................................................................ 72-2 Action (action)....................................................................... 72-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 72-2 Administration Status (adminStatus) ............................................. 72-2 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)....................................................... 72-2 Aggregation .......................................................................... 72-2 Allow Directed Broadcasts ......................................................... 72-3 Allow Send Force Renews (allowSendForceRenews) ........................... 72-3 ANCP String .......................................................................... 72-3 Anti-Spoof Mac Address(antiSpoofMacAddr) .................................... 72-3 Application Profile String (appProfileString).................................... 72-3 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling..................................................... 72-3 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 72-3 Autonomous Address Configuration .............................................. 72-3 Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber) ............................. 72-3 Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel ............................................ 72-4 Auto Select Transport Tunnel ..................................................... 72-4 BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ......................................................... 72-4 BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled) ........................................................ 72-4 Broadcast Address Format ......................................................... 72-4 Collect Accounting Statistics ...................................................... 72-4 Client Applications .................................................................. 72-4 Current Hop Limit ................................................................... 72-4 Days (days) ........................................................................... 72-5 Days (maxLeaseDay) ................................................................ 72-5 Days (minLeaseDay)................................................................. 72-5 Description ........................................................................... 72-5 Destination (destination) .......................................................... 72-5 Display Name ........................................................................ 72-5 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 72-6 dot1p (dot1p) ........................................................................ 72-6 DSCP (dscp) .......................................................................... 72-6 Dynamic Topology Discovery ...................................................... 72-7 Echo Interval (bdfEchoInterval)................................................... 72-7 Egress Filter ID....................................................................... 72-7 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only ................................................... 72-7 Egress Policy ID ...................................................................... 72-7 Egress Scheduler Name............................................................. 72-7 Enable DHCP Relay.................................................................. 72-7 Enable Info Option .................................................................. 72-7 Enable Local Proxy .................................................................. 72-7 Enable Local Proxy ARP ............................................................ 72-7 Enable Proxy ARP.................................................................... 72-7 End Address (endAddress) ......................................................... 72-8
xvi
May 2009
Contents
Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) ....................................... 72-8 Enforce Maximum Number Of Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfRoutes)....... 72-8 Export Target AS Value (vrfExportTargetASValue) ............................. 72-8 Export Target Community Value (vrfExportTargetCommunityValue) ....... 72-8 Export Target Extended Community Value (vrfExportTargetExtendedCommunityValue).............................. 72-8 Export Target Format (vrfExportTargetFormat)................................ 72-9 Export Target IP Address (vrfExportTargetIpAddress) ......................... 72-9 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) .............................................. 72-9 Free Addresses Minimum Threshold (minFree) ................................. 72-9 GSMP Administrative State ........................................................ 72-9 Hold Multiplier....................................................................... 72-9 Hours (hours)....................................................................... 72-10 Hours (maxLeaseHour) ........................................................... 72-10 Hours (minLeaseHour) ............................................................ 72-10 ID .................................................................................... 72-10 IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled) .................................................... 72-10 Import Target AS Value (vrfImportTargetASValue) .......................... 72-10 Import Target Community Value (vrfImportTargetCommunityValue)..... 72-10 Import Target Extended Community Value (vrfImportTargetExtendedCommunityValue) ........................... 72-10 Import Target Format (vrfImportTargetFormat) ............................. 72-11 Import Target IP Address (vrfImportTargetIpAddress)....................... 72-11 Ingress Filter ID .................................................................... 72-11 Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P........................................................ 72-11 Ingress Policy ID ................................................................... 72-11 Ingress Scheduler Name .......................................................... 72-11 Inner Encapsulation Value ....................................................... 72-11 Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) ................................................ 72-11 Interface ID ........................................................................ 72-11 Intermediate Destination ID (interDestIdString).............................. 72-12 IP Address .......................................................................... 72-12 IP Address 1 (address1)........................................................... 72-12 IP Address 2 (address2)........................................................... 72-12 IP Address 3 (address3)........................................................... 72-12 IP Address 4 (address4)........................................................... 72-12 IPv6 Prefix.......................................................................... 72-12 Keep Alive .......................................................................... 72-12 L2 Header (l2header) ............................................................. 72-12 Lease Populate .................................................................... 72-13 Lifetime (seconds) ................................................................ 72-13 Local Address ...................................................................... 72-13 Log Only ............................................................................ 72-13 Log Only (ipv6MaxNumRoutesLogOnly) ........................................ 72-13 Log Only (maxNumberOfMcastRoutesLogOnly) ............................... 72-14 Log Only (maxNumberOfRoutesLogOnly) ...................................... 72-14 Loopback Enabled ................................................................. 72-14 MAC Address ....................................................................... 72-14 MAC Monitoring .................................................................... 72-14 Managed Address Config ......................................................... 72-14 Mask (mask) ........................................................................ 72-14
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 xvii
Contents
Mask Reply ......................................................................... Maximum Declined Addresses Stored (maxDeclined) ........................ Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime) ........................................ Maximum Number Of Equal Cost Routes (maxNumberOfEqualCostRoutes) ......................................... Maximum Number Of IPv6 Routes (maxIPv6RouteNumber) ................. Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (maxNumberOfMcastRoutes) ..... Maximum Number Of Routes (maxNumberOfRoutes) ........................ Max Interval (seconds)............................................................ Metric (metric) .................................................................... Minimum Lease Time (minLeaseTime) ......................................... Min Interval (seconds) ............................................................ Minutes (minutes) ................................................................. Minutes (maxLeaseMinute) ...................................................... Minutes (minLeaseMinute) ....................................................... Minutes (offerMinute) ............................................................ Monitor Access Interface Operational State .................................. MTU.................................................................................. Multicast Capable Peers (multicastCapablePeers) ........................... Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)......................................................... Name ................................................................................ Netbios Node Type (netbiosNodeType) ........................................ No Expiry ........................................................................... Number (optionNumber) ......................................................... Number of Packet Too Big ....................................................... Number of Param Problem....................................................... Number of Redirects.............................................................. Number of Time Exceeded....................................................... Number of TTL Expired........................................................... Number of Unreachables ......................................................... OAM Administrative State........................................................ Offer Time (offerTime)........................................................... On-Link Determination ........................................................... Option (option) .................................................................... OSPFv2 Enabled (ospfEnabled) .................................................. OSPFv3 Enabled (ospfv3Enabled) ............................................... Other Stateful Config ............................................................. Outer Encapsulation Value....................................................... Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) ................................................ Packet Too Big ..................................................................... Packet Too Big Time (seconds).................................................. Param Problem .................................................................... Param Problem Time (seconds) ................................................. Physical Address ................................................................... PIM Enabled (pimEnabled) ....................................................... Periodic Atm Oam LoopBack .................................................... Policy 1 ............................................................................. Policy 2 ............................................................................. Policy 3 ............................................................................. Policy 4 ............................................................................. Policy 5 ............................................................................. Pool Name (displayedName).....................................................
xviii May 2009
72-14 72-15 72-15 72-15 72-15 72-15 72-16 72-16 72-16 72-16 72-16 72-16 72-16 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-17 72-18 72-18 72-18 72-18 72-18 72-19 72-19 72-19 72-19 72-19 72-19 72-19 72-20 72-20 72-20 72-20 72-20 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-21 72-22 72-22
Contents
Port.................................................................................. Preference (preference) ......................................................... Prefix Length....................................................................... Primary ............................................................................. Priority Dscp ....................................................................... Priority Precedence............................................................... Priority Type ....................................................................... Proxy Arp Policy 1................................................................. Proxy Arp Policy 2................................................................. Proxy Arp Policy 3................................................................. Proxy Arp Policy 4................................................................. Proxy Arp Policy 5................................................................. Reachable Time (milliseconds).................................................. Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval) ................................................ Redirects ........................................................................... Redirects Time (seconds) ........................................................ Retransmit Time (milliseconds) ................................................. Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ........................ Return Tunnel Transport ......................................................... RIP Enabled (ripEnabled)......................................................... Route Distinguisher Type (routeDistinguisherType).......................... Router ID (routerID)............................................................... Seconds (seconds) ................................................................. Seconds (maxLeaseSecond)...................................................... Seconds (minLeaseSecond) ...................................................... Seconds (offerSecond)............................................................ Send Advertisement .............................................................. Server 1 ............................................................................. Server 2 ............................................................................. Server 3 ............................................................................. Server 4 ............................................................................. Server 5 ............................................................................. Server 6 ............................................................................. Server 7 ............................................................................. Server 8 ............................................................................. Service ID ........................................................................... Sessions Limit (ifSessionLimit) .................................................. Session Limit per SAP (SapSessionLimit) ....................................... Service Name ...................................................................... SNMP Community String (snmpCommunityName) ............................ Source Address Termination (ipOrInterfaceIndex) ........................... Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr)............................................... Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication) .................................. Static Route ID (id)................................................................ Start Address (startAddress)..................................................... Subscriber Identification (subscrIdent) ........................................ Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subscrProfileString) ..................... Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subscrProfileString) ................ Subnet Mask ........................................................................ Subscriber Identification ......................................................... System ID ........................................................................... Tag ..................................................................................
72-22 72-22 72-22 72-22 72-22 72-22 72-22 72-22 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-23 72-24 72-24 72-24 72-24 72-24 72-24 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-25 72-26 72-26 72-26 72-26 72-26 72-26 72-27 72-28 72-28 72-28 72-28 72-28 72-28 72-28 72-28
xix
Contents
Target AS Value (vrfTargetASValue)............................................ Target Community Value (vrfTargetCommunityValue)...................... Target Extended Community Value (vrfTargetExtendedCommunityValue).................................... Target Format (vrfTargetFormat) .............................................. Target IP Address (vrfTargetIpAddress)........................................ Transmit Interval (bfdtxInterval) ............................................... Terminating Port Displayed Name .............................................. Threshold (%) ...................................................................... Threshold (%) (ipv6MaxNumRoutesThresHold) ................................ Threshold (%) (midRouteMcastThreshold) ..................................... Threshold (%) (midRouteThreshold) ............................................ Time Exceeded .................................................................... Time Exceeded Time (seconds) ................................................. Timeout (seconds) ................................................................ Transport (AutoBindTransport) ................................................. Trusted.............................................................................. TTL Expired ........................................................................ TTL Expired Time (seconds) ..................................................... Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ................................. Tunnel Transport .................................................................. Type (type)......................................................................... Type (optionType) ................................................................ Type (vprnType)................................................................... Type 0 Administrative Value (type0AdministrativeValue) .................. Type 0 Assigned Value (type0AssignedValue) ................................. Type 1 Assigned Value (type1AssignedValue) ................................. Type 1 IP Address (type1IpAddress) ............................................ Unreachables ...................................................................... Unreachables Time (seconds) ................................................... Use GI Address (useGiAddress) .................................................. Use Pool From Client (usePoolFromClient).................................... Use Shared Queue................................................................. Value (optionValue)............................................................... Version (version) .................................................................. VRF Target Type (vrfTargetType) ..............................................
72-28 72-29 72-29 72-29 72-29 72-29 72-29 72-29 72-30 72-30 72-30 72-30 72-30 72-30 72-31 72-31 72-31 72-31 72-31 72-31 72-32 72-32 72-32 72-33 72-33 72-33 72-33 72-33 72-33 72-33 72-34 72-34 72-34 72-34 72-34
73 Create IES parameters

73.1
73-1
Create IES parameters................................................................. 73-2 AAL5 Encapsulation ................................................................. 73-2 Accounting Policy ID ................................................................ 73-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 73-2 Administration Status (adminStatus) ............................................. 73-2 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)....................................................... 73-2 Aggregation .......................................................................... 73-2 Allow Directed Broadcasts ......................................................... 73-2 ANCP String .......................................................................... 73-2 Anti-Spoof Mac Address(antiSpoofMacAddr) .................................... 73-3 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling..................................................... 73-3 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 73-3 Autonomous Address Configuration .............................................. 73-3
xx
Contents
Auto Select Transport Tunnel ..................................................... 73-3 Broadcast Address Format ......................................................... 73-3 CCM Messages ........................................................................ 73-3 Collect Accounting Statistics ...................................................... 73-3 Current Hop Limit ................................................................... 73-3 Description ........................................................................... 73-3 Direction.............................................................................. 73-3 Echo Interval (bdfEchoInterval)................................................... 73-4 Egress Filter ID....................................................................... 73-4 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only ................................................... 73-4 Egress Policy ID ...................................................................... 73-4 Egress Scheduler Name............................................................. 73-4 Enable DHCP Relay.................................................................. 73-4 Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState) .................................... 73-4 Enable Info Option .................................................................. 73-4 Enable Local Proxy .................................................................. 73-4 Enable Local Proxy ARP ............................................................ 73-4 Enable Proxy ARP.................................................................... 73-4 High Priority Defect................................................................. 73-5 ID ...................................................................................... 73-5 ID ...................................................................................... 73-5 Ingress Filter ID ...................................................................... 73-5 Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits) .................... 73-5 Ingress Policy ID ..................................................................... 73-5 Ingress Scheduler Name ............................................................ 73-5 Inner Encapsulation Value ......................................................... 73-5 Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) .................................................. 73-6 Interface ID .......................................................................... 73-6 Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption) ........................................... 73-6 Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString) ............................................ 73-6 IP Address ............................................................................ 73-6 IPv6 Prefix............................................................................ 73-6 Lease Populate ...................................................................... 73-6 Lifetime (seconds) .................................................................. 73-6 L2 Header (l2header) ............................................................... 73-6 Loopback Enabled ................................................................... 73-7 Low Priority Defect ................................................................. 73-7 MAC Address ......................................................................... 73-7 MAC Monitoring ...................................................................... 73-7 Maintenance Association ID........................................................ 73-7 Maintenance Domain ID ............................................................ 73-7 Managed Address Config ........................................................... 73-7 Mask Reply ........................................................................... 73-7 Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates)................................. 73-7 Max Interval (seconds).............................................................. 73-7 Min Interval (seconds) .............................................................. 73-7 Monitor Access Interface Operational State .................................... 73-8 Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)........................................................... 73-8 MTU.................................................................................... 73-8 Name .................................................................................. 73-8 Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution) ........................................... 73-8 No Expiry ............................................................................. 73-8
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 xxi
Contents
Number of Packet Too Big ......................................................... 73-8 Number of Param Problem......................................................... 73-8 Number of Redirects................................................................ 73-8 Number of Time Exceeded......................................................... 73-9 Number of TTL Expired............................................................. 73-9 Number of Unreachables ........................................................... 73-9 On-Link Determination ............................................................. 73-9 Other Stateful Config ............................................................... 73-9 Outer Encapsulation Value......................................................... 73-9 Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) .................................................. 73-9 Packet Too Big ....................................................................... 73-9 Packet Too Big Time (seconds).................................................... 73-9 Param Problem ...................................................................... 73-9 Param Problem Time (seconds) ................................................... 73-9 Periodic Atm Oam LoopBack .................................................... 73-10 Physical Address ................................................................... 73-10 Policy 1 ............................................................................. 73-10 Policy 2 ............................................................................. 73-10 Policy 3 ............................................................................. 73-10 Policy 4 ............................................................................. 73-10 Policy 5 ............................................................................. 73-10 Port.................................................................................. 73-10 Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix) ...................................................... 73-10 Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID) ........................................................... 73-10 Prefix IAID (pfxIAID)............................................................... 73-10 Prefix Length....................................................................... 73-10 Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime) ............................... 73-11 Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState) ................................................ 73-11 Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime) ....................... 73-11 Primary ............................................................................. 73-11 Priority Level for CCM Messages ................................................ 73-11 Proxy Arp Policy 1................................................................. 73-11 Proxy Arp Policy 2................................................................. 73-11 Proxy Arp Policy 3................................................................. 73-11 Proxy Arp Policy 4................................................................. 73-11 Proxy Arp Policy 5................................................................. 73-11 Reachable Time (milliseconds).................................................. 73-11 Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval) ................................................ 73-11 Redirects ........................................................................... 73-12 Redirects Time (seconds) ........................................................ 73-12 Retransmit Time................................................................... 73-12 Return Tunnel Transport ......................................................... 73-12 Send Advertisement .............................................................. 73-12 Server 1 ............................................................................. 73-12 Server 1 (server1IpAddress) ..................................................... 73-12 Server 2 ............................................................................. 73-12 Server 2 (server2IpAddress) ..................................................... 73-12 Server 3 ............................................................................. 73-12 Server 3 (server3IpAddress) ..................................................... 73-12 Server 4 ............................................................................. 73-13 Server 4 (server4IpAddress) ..................................................... 73-13 Server 5 ............................................................................. 73-13
xxii May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
Server 5 (server5IpAddress) ..................................................... Server 6 ............................................................................. Server 6 (server6IpAddress) ..................................................... Server 7 ............................................................................. Server 7 (server7IpAddress) ..................................................... Server 8 ............................................................................. Server 8 (server8IpAddress) ..................................................... Service ID ........................................................................... Service Name ...................................................................... Site ID ............................................................................... Session Limit (ifSessionLimit) ................................................... Session Limit per SAP (SapSessionLimit) ....................................... Source IP Address (sourceAddress) ............................................. Subnet Mask ........................................................................ Subscriber Identification ......................................................... System ID ........................................................................... Terminating Port Displayed Name .............................................. Time Exceeded .................................................................... Time Exceeded Time (seconds) ................................................. Timeout............................................................................. Transmit Interval (bfdtxInterval) ............................................... Trusted.............................................................................. TTL Expired ........................................................................ TTL Expired Time (seconds) ..................................................... Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ................................. Tunnel Transport .................................................................. Unreachables ...................................................................... Unreachables Time (seconds) ................................................... Use Shared Queue.................................................................
73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-13 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-14 73-15 73-15 73-15 73-15 73-15 73-15 73-15 73-15
74 Create VLAN parameters

74.1
74-1
Create VLAN parameters.............................................................. 74-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 74-2 Application (servicesSubType) .................................................... 74-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 74-2 Customer VLAN ID (custVlanID) ................................................... 74-3 Customer VLAN Tag (custVlanTag) ............................................... 74-3 Description ........................................................................... 74-3 Enable 1x1 STP (enable1x1Stp) ................................................... 74-3 Enable Authentication (enableAuthentication)................................. 74-3 Enable Flat STP (enableFlatStp) .................................................. 74-3 Enable Mobile-Tag (enableMobileTag) ........................................... 74-3 Enable STP (enableStp) ............................................................ 74-4 Ethernet Service Name (ethernetServiceName)................................ 74-4 Map Type (cVlanMapType) ......................................................... 74-4 Mode .................................................................................. 74-4 Multicast Address (address)........................................................ 74-4 Name .................................................................................. 74-4 Port.................................................................................... 74-4 Query Response Time (seconds) .................................................. 74-5 Service ID ............................................................................. 74-5
May 2009 xxiii
Contents
Service Name ........................................................................ 74-5 Service Access Multi-Point ID (sapId)............................................. 74-5 Subscriber Identification ........................................................... 74-5 System ID ............................................................................. 74-5 VLAN Tagging (tagging)............................................................. 74-5
75 Create Mirror parameters

75.1
75-1
Create Mirror parameters............................................................. 75-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 75-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 75-2 Automatic SDP Binding Creation .................................................. 75-2 Auto Select Transport Tunnel ..................................................... 75-2 Description ........................................................................... 75-2 Destination MAC Address (ipMirrorDestinationMacAddress) .................. 75-2 Egress Aggregate Rate Limit....................................................... 75-2 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only ................................................... 75-2 Enable Egress (egressEnabled) .................................................... 75-3 Enable Ingress (ingressEnabled)................................................... 75-3 Enable Port ID Mirroring (enablePortId) ......................................... 75-3 Encapsulation Type (encapsulationType)........................................ 75-3 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) .............................................. 75-3 Forwarding Classes (forwardingClass)............................................ 75-4 Host IP Address (ipAddress)........................................................ 75-4 Host MAC Address (macAddress) .................................................. 75-4 Ingress Label (ingressLabel) ....................................................... 75-4 Monitor Access Interface Operational State .................................... 75-4 Name .................................................................................. 75-4 Port.................................................................................... 75-5 Remote Site ID (remoteSourceSiteId) ............................................ 75-5 Service ID ............................................................................. 75-5 Service Name ........................................................................ 75-5 Slice Size (sliceSize) ................................................................ 75-5 Source Administrative State (sourceAdministrativeState) .................... 75-5 Source MAC Address (ipMirrorSourceMacAddress).............................. 75-5 Subscriber Identification String (subscriberIdent) ............................. 75-6 System ID ............................................................................. 75-6 Terminating Port Displayed Name ................................................ 75-6 Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference ................................... 75-6
76 Create Service From Template parameters

76.1
76-1 77-1
Create Service From Template parameters........................................ 76-2
77 Create Topology Group parameters

77.1
Create Topology Group parameters ................................................. 77-2 Background Image (backgroundImage) .......................................... 77-2 Description ........................................................................... 77-2 Group Name.......................................................................... 77-2
xxiv
May 2009
Contents
78 Create Physical Link parameters

78.1
78-1
Create Physical Link parameters .................................................... 78-2 Description ........................................................................... 78-2 Endpoint A Type (endPointAType)................................................ 78-2 Endpoint B Type (endPointBType) ................................................ 78-2 Name .................................................................................. 78-2 Notes (notes)......................................................................... 78-2 Unmanaged - Description (unmanagedEndpointBDescription) ............... 78-2 Unmanaged - Management Address (unmanagedEndpointBIPAddr) ......... 78-3 Unmanaged - Name (unmanagedEndpointB) .................................... 78-3
79 Common Create menu parameters

79.1
79-1
Common Create menu parameters .................................................. 79-2 AAL5 Encapsulation (atmEncapsulation)......................................... 79-2 Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId) ...................................... 79-2 Action (action)....................................................................... 79-2 Active State (txActiveState)....................................................... 79-3 Address ID (index)................................................................... 79-3 Administrative State (administrativeState) ..................................... 79-3 Admin Status (adminStatus) ....................................................... 79-3 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)....................................................... 79-4 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit) ............................ 79-4 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit) .................... 79-4 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit).................... 79-4 Aggregation (aggregation) ......................................................... 79-4 Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast) ................................ 79-5 ANCP String (ancpkeyString)....................................................... 79-5 Anti-Spoofing (antiSpoofing)....................................................... 79-5 Anti-Spoof MAC Address (antiSpoofMacAddr) ................................... 79-6 ARP Populate (arpPopulate) ....................................................... 79-6 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling (atmOamAlarmCellHandling) ................. 79-7 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 79-7 Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion) ................. 79-7 Autonomous Address Configuration (autonomous) ............................. 79-7 Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel) ............ 79-8 Auto Select Transport Tunnel (autoSelectTunnel) ............................. 79-8 Auto Select Tunnels (autoSelectTunnel) ........................................ 79-8 BPDU Translation (bpduTranslation) ............................................. 79-8 Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat) ................................. 79-9 CCM Messages (ccEnable) .......................................................... 79-9 Circuit ID (circuitId) ................................................................ 79-9 Class (interfaceClass)............................................................. 79-10 Client Applications (clientApplications) ....................................... 79-11 Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)................................. 79-11 Composite ID (compositeSvcId) ................................................. 79-11 Configured IP MTU (Octets) (ipMtu) ............................................ 79-11 Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit) .......................................... 79-11 Default Mesh VC ID (defaultMeshVcId) ......................................... 79-11 Default Subscriber Id (defSubscriberIdString) ................................ 79-12 Default Subscriber Identification Type (defSubcriberIdType).............. 79-12 Default VC ID (vcId) ............................................................... 79-12
May 2009 xxv
Contents
Description (description)......................................................... Direction (direction) .............................................................. Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. Dynamic Topology Discovery (dynamicTopDiscAdminState) ................ Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId) ................................................. Egress Label (egressLabel) ....................................................... Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only (egressQinqMarkTopBitsOnly) ............ Egress Policy ID (egressPolicyId) ................................................ Egress Scheduler Name (egressSchedulerName) ............................. Emulated Server IP Address (emulatedServerAddr).......................... Enable............................................................................... Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState) ..................................... Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState) .................................. Enable Info Option (informationOption) ....................................... Enable Local Proxy (localProxy) ................................................ Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal) ...................................... Enable Option 82 (informationOption)......................................... Enable Secure SAPs (enableSecureSaps)....................................... Encapsulation Tagging (encapTagging) ........................................ Frame Base Accounting (egressFrameBaseAccounting) ..................... Gateway IP Address (gatewayIpAddress) ...................................... GSMP Administrative State (gsmpAdministrativeState) ..................... Hold Multiplier (holdMultiplier) ................................................. ID .................................................................................... ID (id) ............................................................................... ID (mepId) .......................................................................... ID (subscriberId) ................................................................... ID (tunnelID) ....................................................................... Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId)................................................ Ingress Label (ingressLabel) ..................................................... Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits) .................... Ingress Policy ID (ingressPolicyId) .............................................. Ingress Scheduler Name (ingressSchedulerName) ............................ Inherit Service ID Value .......................................................... Inherit Value (inheritanceMask)................................................. Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue) ................................ Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) (vci) .......................................... Interface ID (id) ................................................................... Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption) ......................................... Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString) .......................................... Interface Name (unnumberedInterfaceName) ................................ Intermediate Destination ID (intermediateDestId)........................... Interworking Type (interworking) .............................................. IP Address .......................................................................... IP address (giIpAddress) .......................................................... IP Address (ipAddr)................................................................ IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ IP Address (targetIpAddress) .................................................... IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ IP Address (unnumberedIpAddress)............................................. IPv6 Allowed (ipv6Allowed)...................................................... IPv6 Prefix (prefix)................................................................
xxvi May 2009
79-12 79-12 79-13 79-13 79-13 79-13 79-13 79-14 79-14 79-14 79-14 79-14 79-15 79-15 79-15 79-15 79-16 79-16 79-16 79-17 79-17 79-17 79-17 79-17 79-17 79-18 79-18 79-18 79-18 79-18 79-18 79-18 79-19 79-19 79-19 79-19 79-19 79-19 79-19 79-20 79-20 79-20 79-20 79-21 79-21 79-21 79-21 79-21 79-22 79-22 79-22 79-22
Contents
Keep-Alive (seconds) ............................................................. L2 Header (l2header) ............................................................. L2 Protocol Termination (l2ptTermination)................................... LAG link selection (macDestAddrHashing)..................................... Lease Populate (leasePopulate) ................................................ Lease Time (leaseTime) .......................................................... Lease Time RADIUS Override (proxyLTRadiusOverride) ..................... Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime) .......................................... Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime)........................................ Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) ............................................. Local Address (localAddress) .................................................... Loopback Enabled ................................................................. Low-priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect)....................................... MAC Address ....................................................................... MAC Address (macAddr) .......................................................... MAC Address (macAddress) ...................................................... MAC Address (physicalAddress) ................................................. MAC Monitoring (macMonitoring) ............................................... Maintenance Association ID (maintenanceAssociationId) ................... Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) ........................... Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag) ......................... Mask Reply (maskReply).......................................................... Match Circuit ID (matchCircuitId) .............................................. Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates)............................... Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval) .......................................... Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval) ........................................... Monitor Access Interface Operational State (monitorAccessInterfaceOper) ............................................ MTU (mtu) .......................................................................... MTU (mtuValue) ................................................................... Name ................................................................................ Name (displayedName)........................................................... Name (subscriberName).......................................................... Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution) ......................................... No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit................................................. No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) ........................................ No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry).............................................. Non-Subscriber Traffic Identification (nonSubTrafficIdent) ................ Number of Days (leaseTimeDays) ............................................... Number of Hours (leaseTimeHours) ............................................ Number of Minutes (leaseTimeMinutes) ....................................... Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig)........................ Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem)...................... Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) ................................... Number of Seconds (leaseTimeSeconds)....................................... Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) ...................... Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) ............................... Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) ......................... OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState).................................. OLC State (olcState) .............................................................. On-Link Determination (onLink) ................................................ Operational State UP While Empty (operationalStateWhileEmpty) .......
79-22 79-22 79-23 79-23 79-23 79-23 79-24 79-24 79-24 79-24 79-24 79-24 79-25 79-25 79-25 79-25 79-25 79-26 79-26 79-26 79-26 79-26 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-27 79-28 79-28 79-28 79-29 79-29 79-29 79-29 79-29 79-29 79-30 79-30 79-30 79-30 79-30 79-30 79-31 79-31 79-31 79-31 79-31 79-32
xxvii
Contents
Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag) ............................. Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue) ............................... Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) (vpi) ......................................... Packet Too Big (packetTooBig).................................................. Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) ........................ Param Problem (paramProblem)................................................ Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) ...................... Path ID (sdpBindingPathId) ...................................................... Peer Address(peerAddress) ...................................................... Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack).................. Physical Address (physicalAddress) ............................................. PIM Snooping Enabled (pimSnpgEnabled)...................................... Policy 1 (policy1) .................................................................. Policy 2 (policy2) .................................................................. Policy 3 (policy3) .................................................................. Policy 4 (policy4) .................................................................. Policy 5 (policy5) .................................................................. Port (portId) ....................................................................... Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix) ...................................................... Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID) ........................................................... Prefix IAID (pfxIAID)............................................................... Prefix Length (pfxdPrefLen) ..................................................... Prefix Length (prefixLength) .................................................... Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime) ............................... Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState) ................................................ Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime) ....................... Primary (isPrimary) ............................................................... Primary DNS IP Address (primaryDnsAddress)................................. Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority)........................... Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp) ................................................ Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec)........................................ Priority Type (priorityMarkType) ............................................... Profiled Traffic only (profiledTrafficOnly) .................................... Proxy ARP Policy 1 (policy1)..................................................... Proxy ARP Policy 2 (policy2)..................................................... Proxy ARP Policy 3 (policy3)..................................................... Proxy ARP Policy 4 (policy4)..................................................... Proxy ARP Policy 5 (policy5)..................................................... Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime)............................. Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval) ................................................ Redirects (redirects).............................................................. Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) .................................... Remote ID (infoRemoteId) ....................................................... Remote ID String (remoteIdString) ............................................. Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp)................................................... Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime) ........................... Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)............. Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)............. SAP Administrative State......................................................... SAP Description ....................................................................
xxviii May 2009
79-32 79-32 79-32 79-33 79-33 79-33 79-33 79-33 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-34 79-35 79-35 79-35 79-35 79-35 79-35 79-35 79-36 79-36 79-36 79-36 79-36 79-36 79-36 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-37 79-38 79-38 79-38 79-38 79-38 79-39 79-39 79-39 79-39 79-40 79-40
Contents
SAP or Binding (sapOrBinding)................................................... Secondary DNS IP Address (secondaryDnsAddress) ........................... Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement) .................................... Server 1 (server1) ................................................................. Server 2 (server2) ................................................................. Server 3 (server3) ................................................................. Server 4 (server4) ................................................................. Server 5 (server5) ................................................................. Server 6 (server6) ................................................................. Server 7 (server7) ................................................................. Server 8 (server8) ................................................................. Server Name (displayedName) .................................................. Service ID (serviceID) ............................................................. Service Model (serviceModel) ................................................... Service Name (serviceName) .................................................... Service Tier (tier) ................................................................. Set Default VLAN to VPLS Tag (defaultVlan) .................................. SHCV Action (shcvAction) ........................................................ SHCV Enabled ...................................................................... SHCV Interval (minutes) (shcvInterval) ........................................ SHCV Source (shcvSource) ....................................................... SHCV Source IP Address (shcvSourceIpAddress) .............................. SHCV Source MAC Address (shcvSourceMacAddress) ......................... Site ID (siteID) ..................................................................... Snooping (snooping) .............................................................. Source IP Address (sourceAddress) ............................................. Subnet Mask (netMaskInt) ........................................................ Subscriber Authentication Policy (subscrAuthPolicyPointer) ............... Subscriber Identification (subscriberIdent) ................................... Subscriber Limit (subscriberLimit).............................................. System ID (siteID) ................................................................. Template Description............................................................. Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName) ..... Terminating Port ID (terminatingPortId) ...................................... Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) ................................................ Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) ....................... Timeout (seconds) (timeOut).................................................... Translation (vlanTranslation).................................................... Translation ID (vlanTranslationId) .............................................. Transport Type (transportPreference) ......................................... Transmit Interval (bfdtxInterval) ............................................... Trusted (isTrusted)................................................................ Trusted (trusted) .................................................................. TTL Expired (ttlExpired) ......................................................... TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) ................................ Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference) ..................... Tunnel Termination Site (tunnelSelectionTerminationSiteId).............. Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference) ..... Unnumbered Type (unnumberedReferenceType) ............................ Unreachables (unreachables) ................................................... Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) ..........................
79-40 79-40 79-40 79-40 79-40 79-40 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-41 79-42 79-42 79-42 79-42 79-43 79-43 79-43 79-44 79-44 79-44 79-44 79-44 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-45 79-46 79-46 79-46 79-46 79-46 79-47 79-47 79-47 79-47 79-48 79-48 79-48 79-48 79-49 79-49 79-49 79-50
xxix
Contents
Use as source (giIpAddressAsSrc) ............................................... Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (useBwReservedPath) ...................... Use Multipoint Shared Queue (usesMultipointShared) ....................... Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID (subIdIsSapId) .................................... Use Shared Queue (sharedQueueOn)........................................... VC ID (vcId)......................................................................... VC Type (svcVcType) ............................................................. VC Type (vcType) ................................................................. Vendor Specific Options (vendorIncludeOptions) ............................ Vendor String (vendorOptionString) ............................................ VLAN VC Tag .......................................................................
79-50 79-50 79-50 79-50 79-51 79-51 79-51 79-51 79-51 79-52 79-52
Manage menu parameters

80 Manage Services parameters
80.1
80-1
Manage Services parameters ......................................................... 80-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) ..................................... 80-2 Age (seconds) (age) ................................................................. 80-2 Inhibit Learning (inhibitLearning) ................................................ 80-2 Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl).................................................... 80-2 Multicast Group IP Address (groupAddress) ..................................... 80-2 Protocol Version (igmpVersion) ................................................... 80-3 Proxying (igmpProxying) ........................................................... 80-3 Querier Forwarding (igmpQuerierForwarding).................................. 80-3 Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) ................................... 80-3 Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl)..................................................... 80-3 Querying (igmpQuerying) .......................................................... 80-4 Robust Count (genRobustCount) .................................................. 80-4 Router Timeout (seconds) (igmpRouterTimeout) .............................. 80-4 Source Timeout (seconds) (igmpSourceTimeout) .............................. 80-4 Spoofing (igmpSpoofing) ........................................................... 80-4 Target MAC Address (targetMacAddress) ........................................ 80-5 Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName) ....... 80-5 Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) (igmpUnsolicitedReportInterval) ............................................ 80-5 What type of interface would you like to create? ............................. 80-5 Zapping (igmpZapping) ............................................................. 80-5
81 Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters

81.1
81-1
Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters..................................... 81-2 Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Customer ............ 81-2 Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion) ................. 81-2 Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)................................... 81-2 Customer ID (subscriberId) ........................................................ 81-2
xxx
May 2009
Contents
Default Number Of Bound Templated Objects To Pre-create (childTemplateDefaultUsages) .............................................. 81-2 Description ........................................................................... 81-2 Encapsulation Type (encapsulationType)........................................ 81-3 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) .............................................. 81-3 ID ...................................................................................... 81-3 Inner Encap Value (innerEncapValue)............................................ 81-4 Name .................................................................................. 81-4 Outer Encap Value (outerEncapValue)........................................... 81-4 Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)............... 81-4 Service Description ................................................................. 81-4 Service Name (displayedName) ................................................... 81-4 Site ID (siteId) ....................................................................... 81-4 Site Type (mirrorSiteType) ........................................................ 81-5 Slice Size (sliceSize) ................................................................ 81-5 Source Administrative State (sourceAdministrativeState) .................... 81-5 Template Description............................................................... 81-5 Terminating Port ID ................................................................. 81-5 Transport Type (transportPreference) ........................................... 81-5 Tunnel Source Site ID (fromNodeId).............................................. 81-6 Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference) ....... 81-6 Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (topologyAutoCompletion) .................. 81-6
82 Manage Customers parameters

82.1
82-1
Manage Customers parameters ...................................................... 82-2 Address (address) ................................................................... 82-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 82-2 Contact (contact) ................................................................... 82-2 Description ........................................................................... 82-2 Email (email)......................................................................... 82-2 ID (subscriberId) ..................................................................... 82-2 Name (subscriberName)............................................................ 82-2 Phone Number (phoneNumber) ................................................... 82-2 Scheduler Name (aggregationSchedulerName) ................................. 82-2 Select Assignment Scope (scope) ................................................. 82-3
83 Manage MPLS Paths parameters

83.1
83-1
Manage MPLS Paths parameters...................................................... 83-2 Administrative ....................................................................... 83-2 Description ........................................................................... 83-2 Hop Type (type) ..................................................................... 83-2 Insert Hop ............................................................................ 83-2 IP Address (destinationIpAddress) ................................................ 83-2 IP Address (ipAddress) .............................................................. 83-2 IP Address (interfacePointer) ..................................................... 83-3 Name .................................................................................. 83-3 Network Element (ipAddressPointer) ............................................ 83-3 Specify Site........................................................................... 83-3 Starting Network Element ......................................................... 83-3
May 2009 xxxi
Contents
84 Manage LSPs parameters

84.1
84-1
Manage LSPs parameters .............................................................. 84-2 Administrative ....................................................................... 84-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 84-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 84-2 Auto Select Hop-less Path ......................................................... 84-2 Backup Hold Priority (backupHoldPriority)...................................... 84-2 Backup Setup Priority (backupSetupPriority) ................................... 84-2 Backup Type (fastRerouteBackupType).......................................... 84-3 Committed Rate (committedRate) ............................................... 84-3 Description (description)........................................................... 84-3 Destination Site ID (destinationNodeId) ......................................... 84-3 Dynamic Bypass (dynamicBypass)................................................. 84-3 Egress Label (egressLabel) ......................................................... 84-3 Enable CSPF (cspfEnabled) ........................................................ 84-4 Enable SRLG (enableSrlg) .......................................................... 84-4 Fast Reroute (fastRerouteEnabled)............................................... 84-4 Guarded Destination (guardingDestinationAddress) ........................... 84-4 Guarding Lsp (guardingLsp)........................................................ 84-5 Hold Priority (holdPriority) ........................................................ 84-5 Hop Index (index) ................................................................... 84-5 Hop Limit ............................................................................. 84-5 Hop Limit (fastRerouteHopLimit) ................................................. 84-5 Hop Limit (hopLimit) ............................................................... 84-5 Ingress Label (ingressLabel) ....................................................... 84-6 Inherit Value (propertyInheritance) .............................................. 84-6 ID ...................................................................................... 84-6 Include ADSPEC in RSVP (addSpec) ............................................... 84-6 Interface Name (interfaceName) ................................................. 84-6 Label Action (labelAction) ......................................................... 84-6 Make before Break (adaptive)..................................................... 84-7 Metric (metric) ...................................................................... 84-7 Name (displayedName)............................................................. 84-7 Next Hop (nextHopAddr) ........................................................... 84-7 Node Protect (nodeProtect) ....................................................... 84-7 Path Destination Matching (TunnelDestinationMatching) ..................... 84-7 Peak Rate (peakRate) .............................................................. 84-8 Permit Merge (permitMerge) ...................................................... 84-8 Persistent (persistent).............................................................. 84-8 Preference (preference) ........................................................... 84-8 Record Actual Path (record)....................................................... 84-8 Record Actual Route (recordRoute) .............................................. 84-9 Record Label (recordLabel)........................................................ 84-9 Resignal (resignal) .................................................................. 84-9 Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) (fastRerouteBandwidth) ......................... 84-9 Retry Limit (retryLimit) ............................................................ 84-9 Retry Timer (seconds) (retryTimer) .............................................. 84-9 RSVP Reserve Style (rsvpStyle) .................................................... 84-9 Setup Priority (setupPriority) ................................................... 84-10 Site ID (nodeId) .................................................................... 84-10 Source IP Address (sourceIpAddress) ........................................... 84-10 Source Site ID (sourceNodeId)................................................... 84-10
xxxii
Contents
Type (type)......................................................................... 84-10 View the newly created Bypass Only Lsp ...................................... 84-11 View the newly created Dynamic LSP.......................................... 84-11
85 Manage Service Tunnels parameters

85.1
85-1
Manage Service Tunnels parameters ................................................ 85-2 Administrative ....................................................................... 85-2 Administrative MTU (pathMtu) .................................................... 85-2 Advertised MTU Override (advertisedMtuOverride)............................ 85-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 85-2 BW (Mbps) (defaultLspBw) ......................................................... 85-2 Description ........................................................................... 85-2 Destination Site ID (destinationNodeId) ......................................... 85-2 FRR (defaultLspFrr) ................................................................. 85-3 Group Name.......................................................................... 85-3 Hello Message Length (helloMessageLength).................................... 85-3 Hello Request Timeout (helloRequestTimeout) ................................ 85-3 Hello Time (helloTime)............................................................. 85-3 Hold Down Time (holdDownTime) ................................................ 85-3 ID (pathID)............................................................................ 85-3 Keep-alive Enabled (keepAliveOn) ............................................... 85-4 Ldp Enabled (ldpEnabled).......................................................... 85-4 Max Drop Count (maxDropCount) ................................................. 85-4 Metric (metric) ...................................................................... 85-4 Name .................................................................................. 85-4 Order .................................................................................. 85-4 SDP Bandwidth Booking Factor (%) (bookingFactor) ........................... 85-5 Signaling (signallingType) .......................................................... 85-5 Source Site ID (siteId) .............................................................. 85-5 Tunnel Type (tunnelType) ......................................................... 85-5 Underlying Transport (underlyingTransport).................................... 85-5 VC Type (VcType) ................................................................... 85-6 View the newly created tunnel ................................................... 85-6 VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag) .......................................................... 85-6
86 Manage Service Templates parameters

86.1
86-1
Manage Service Templates parameters............................................. 86-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 86-2 Description ........................................................................... 86-2 Generate First (Base) Version ..................................................... 86-2 Generate Velocity Properties ..................................................... 86-2 Name (scriptName) ................................................................. 86-2 Script ID (id) ......................................................................... 86-2 Show created object................................................................ 86-2 State (state) ......................................................................... 86-3 Templated Object Categories (configuredClassCategories) .................. 86-3 Templated Object Class Name (configuredClass) .............................. 86-3 Type ................................................................................... 86-3
May 2009
xxxiii
Contents
87 Manage node redundancy parameters

87.1
87-1
Manage node redundancy parameters .............................................. 87-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) ..................................... 87-2 Advertise Interval (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisAdvertiseInterval) ............................................. 87-2 Authentication Key (authenticationKey) ........................................ 87-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 87-2 Description (description)........................................................... 87-2 Destination IP Address (ibrccDestinationIpAddr) ............................... 87-2 Destination IP Address (rncvDestinationIpAddr) ................................ 87-2 Encap Type (Type) .................................................................. 87-3 End VLAN Value (endVlan) ......................................................... 87-3 First Network Element (nodeIdLow).............................................. 87-3 First Site ID (firstSiteId) ............................................................ 87-3 Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisHoldTime).................... 87-3 Interface Name (ibrccInterfaceName) ........................................... 87-3 Interval (minutes) (rncvInterval) ................................................. 87-3 Keepalive Interval (deciseconds) (keepAliveInterval) ......................... 87-3 LACP Key (lacpKey) ................................................................. 87-4 LACP Transmit Interval (lacpTransmitInterval)................................. 87-4 LACP Transmit Standby (lacpXmitStdby) ........................................ 87-4 LAG ID................................................................................. 87-4 LAG ID (lagId) ........................................................................ 87-4 LAG ID (firstLagId) .................................................................. 87-5 LAG ID (secondLagId) ............................................................... 87-5 Lost Connection Wait Interval (holdOnNeighborFailure) ...................... 87-5 Maximum Inner Encap Value (maxInnerEncapValue) .......................... 87-5 Maximum Outer Encap Value (maxOuterEncapValue) ......................... 87-5 Minimum Inner Encap Value (minInnerEncapValue) ........................... 87-5 Minimum Outer Encap Value (minOuterEncapValue) .......................... 87-5 Name (ringName) ................................................................... 87-5 Neighbor Address (multiChassisNeighborAddress).............................. 87-6 Port/LAG Name...................................................................... 87-6 Port Name ............................................................................ 87-6 SAP Encapsulation Value (rncvEncapValue) ..................................... 87-6 SAP Service ID (rncvServiceId) .................................................... 87-6 Second Network Element (nodeIdHigh) .......................................... 87-6 Second Site ID (secondSiteId) ..................................................... 87-6 Service ID (ibrccServiceId) ......................................................... 87-6 Site ID (firstSiteId) .................................................................. 87-7 Site ID (secondSiteId) ............................................................... 87-7 Source Address (sourceIpAddress) ................................................ 87-7 Source IP Address ................................................................... 87-7 Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress) ................................... 87-7 Source IP Address (rncvSourceIpAddr) ........................................... 87-7 Source IP Address (secondSitesourceIpAddress) ................................ 87-7 Source MAC Address (rncvSourceMacAddr) ...................................... 87-8 Start VLAN Value (startVlan) ...................................................... 87-8 Sync Tag Config Level .............................................................. 87-8 Sync Tag Config Level (firstSiteSyncTagConfigLevel).......................... 87-8 Sync Tag Config Level (secondSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) ...................... 87-8 Synchronization Tag (tag).......................................................... 87-8
xxxiv
Contents
Synchronize IGMP (igmp)........................................................... 87-9 Synchronize IGMP-Snooping (igmpSnooping) .................................... 87-9 Synchronize MC Ring (mcRing) .................................................... 87-9 Synchronize MLD Snooping (mldSnooping)....................................... 87-9 Synchronize SRRP (srrp) ............................................................ 87-9 Synchronize Subscriber Management (subscriberManagement) ............ 87-10 Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress) ................................. 87-10 Source IP Address (secondSitesourceIpAddress) .............................. 87-10 System ID (systemId).............................................................. 87-10 System Priority (systemPriority) ................................................ 87-10
88 Routing Instance parameters

88.1
88-1
Routing Instance parameters ......................................................... 88-2 Action ................................................................................. 88-2 Allow Directed Broadcasts ......................................................... 88-2 Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber) ............................. 88-2 BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled) ........................................................ 88-2 Broadcast ............................................................................. 88-2 Broadcast Address Format ......................................................... 88-2 Cflowd Type.......................................................................... 88-2 Circuit ID ............................................................................. 88-3 Class................................................................................... 88-3 Confederation Autonomous System (confederationAutonomousSystemNumber) ............................... 88-3 Description ........................................................................... 88-3 Edit Routing Policies ................................................................ 88-3 Egress Filter ID....................................................................... 88-3 Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter) ............................................. 88-3 Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState) ....................................... 88-3 Enable Info Option (informationOption) ......................................... 88-4 Enable Option 82 (informationOption)........................................... 88-4 Exclusive (exclusive)................................................................ 88-4 IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled) ...................................................... 88-4 IGP Inhibit ............................................................................ 88-5 Ingress Filter ID ...................................................................... 88-5 Interface ID (interfaceID) .......................................................... 88-5 IP Address ............................................................................ 88-5 IS-IS Enabled (isisEnabled) ......................................................... 88-5 LDP Enabled (ldpEnabled) ......................................................... 88-5 Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled) ........................................... 88-6 MAC Address ......................................................................... 88-6 Mask Reply ........................................................................... 88-6 Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes ......................................... 88-6 Member AS (memberAS)............................................................ 88-6 MPLS Enabled (mplsEnabled) ...................................................... 88-6 Name .................................................................................. 88-7 Network Policy ID ................................................................... 88-7 Number of Redirects................................................................ 88-7 Number of TTL Expired............................................................. 88-7 Number of Unreachables ........................................................... 88-7 OSPFv2 Enabled (ospfEnabled) .................................................... 88-7
May 2009 xxxv
Contents
OSPFv3 Enabled (ospfv3Enabled) ................................................. 88-7 PIM Enabled (pimEnabled) ......................................................... 88-7 Physical Address ..................................................................... 88-8 Prefix Length (prefixLength) ...................................................... 88-8 Primary ............................................................................... 88-8 Redirects ............................................................................. 88-8 Redirects Time ...................................................................... 88-8 Remote ID ............................................................................ 88-8 RIP Enabled (ripEnabled)........................................................... 88-8 Router ID ............................................................................. 88-9 RSVP Enabled (rsvpEnabled)....................................................... 88-9 Server 1 (server1) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 2 (server2) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 3 (server3) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 4 (server4) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 5 (server5) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 6 (server6) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 7 (server7) ................................................................... 88-9 Server 8 (server8) ................................................................... 88-9 Snooping (snooping) ................................................................ 88-9 Source Address Termination (ipOrInterfaceIndex) ........................... 88-10 Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr)............................................... 88-10 Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication) .................................. 88-10 Subnet Mask ........................................................................ 88-11 Timeout............................................................................. 88-11 Trusted (isTrusted)................................................................ 88-11 Trusted (Trusted) ................................................................. 88-11 TTL Expired ........................................................................ 88-11 TTL Expired Time (seconds) ..................................................... 88-11 Unreachables ...................................................................... 88-11 Unreachables Time (seconds) ................................................... 88-12
89 VRRP parameters
89.1
89-1
VRRP parameters....................................................................... 89-2 Administrative State ................................................................ 89-2 Backup Address (backUpAddress)................................................. 89-2 Base Priority (priority) ............................................................. 89-2 Description ........................................................................... 89-2 Init Delay (seconds) (initDelay) ................................................... 89-2 Key (authenticationKey) ........................................................... 89-2 MAC Address (macAddress) ........................................................ 89-3 Master Inherit Interval (masterIntervalInherit)................................. 89-3 Message Interval (seconds) (messageInterval) .................................. 89-3 Message Interval (milliseconds) (messageIntervalMilSec) ..................... 89-3 Name .................................................................................. 89-4 Owner (owner)....................................................................... 89-4 Ping Reply (pingReply) ............................................................. 89-4 Preempt Mode (preempt) .......................................................... 89-4 SSH Reply (sshReply)................................................................ 89-5 Standby Forwarding (standByFwding) ............................................ 89-5 Subnet Mask (subNetMask)......................................................... 89-5
xxxvi
Contents
Telnet Reply (telnetReply) ........................................................ 89-5 Traceroute Reply (traceRouteReply)............................................. 89-5 Type (authenticationType) ........................................................ 89-6 Virtual Router ID (vrId) ............................................................. 89-6 VRRP Type (vrrpType) .............................................................. 89-6
90 Virtual Anycast RP parameters

90.1
90-1
Virtual Anycast RP parameters....................................................... 90-2 Anycast RP Type (anyCastRPType) ............................................... 90-2 Anycast RP Address (anycastRpIPAddress) ...................................... 90-2 Auto Created Interface Name (interfaceName) ................................ 90-2 Description ........................................................................... 90-2 Name .................................................................................. 90-2 Static Group IP Address (staticGroupIPAddress)................................ 90-3 Static Group Mask (staticGroupMask) ............................................ 90-3
91 Manage FIB Entries parameters

91.1
91-1
Manage FIB Entries parameters ...................................................... 91-2 Auto Complete (forceAutoComplete) ............................................ 91-2 Force Autocompletion... button .................................................. 91-2 MAC Address ......................................................................... 91-2 Make FIB Entry Static... button ................................................... 91-2
92 Common Manage menu parameters

92.1
92-1
Common Manage menu parameters ................................................. 92-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) ..................................... 92-2 Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Subscriber ........... 92-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 92-2 Description (description)........................................................... 92-2 Gateway MAC Address (macAddress)............................................. 92-2 ID (id) ................................................................................. 92-3 Keep Alive Interval (interval) ..................................................... 92-3 MAC Address (macAddress) ........................................................ 92-3 Name (displayedName)............................................................. 92-3 Next Hop.............................................................................. 92-3 Priority (priority) .................................................................... 92-3 Remote IP Address (remoteIpAddress) ........................................... 92-3 Service Description ................................................................. 92-3 SRRP ID (srrpId)...................................................................... 92-4 Subscriber ID (subscriberID) ....................................................... 92-4 Trusted................................................................................ 92-4 VC ID (vcId)........................................................................... 92-4 VC Type ............................................................................... 92-4 VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag) .......................................................... 92-4
May 2009
xxxvii
Contents
Policies menu parameters

93 Access Ingress parameters
93.1
93-1
Access Ingress parameters ............................................................ 93-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 93-2 Broadcast Queue ID (broadcastQueueId) ........................................ 93-2 Cir (kbps) ............................................................................. 93-2 Cir Adaptation ....................................................................... 93-2 Committed Burst Size (KB)......................................................... 93-2 Default FC ............................................................................ 93-2 Default FC HSMDA Counter Override (bytes) (defaultFCHsmdaCntrOvr) ................................................... 93-2 Description ........................................................................... 93-2 Destination IP ........................................................................ 93-2 Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) ...................................... 93-3 Destination Port ..................................................................... 93-3 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 93-3 Distribute ............................................................................. 93-3 Dot1p.................................................................................. 93-3 Dot1p (dot1p) ........................................................................ 93-3 Dot1p (dot1pValue) ................................................................. 93-4 DSCP................................................................................... 93-4 Dst Mask .............................................................................. 93-4 Ether Type (ethernetType) ........................................................ 93-4 Expedite .............................................................................. 93-4 Forwarding Class .................................................................... 93-4 Fragment ............................................................................. 93-4 Frame Type .......................................................................... 93-4 High Priority Reserved.............................................................. 93-4 HSMDA Broadcast Queue ID (hsmdaBroadcastQueueId) ....................... 93-5 HSMDA Multicast Queue ID (hsmdaMulticastQueueId) ......................... 93-5 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaPacketOffset) ..................... 93-5 HSMDA Queue ID (hsmdaQueueId) ................................................ 93-5 ID ...................................................................................... 93-5 ID (id) ................................................................................. 93-5 ID (queueId) .......................................................................... 93-6 In DSCP (inDscp) ..................................................................... 93-6 In Precedence (inPrecedence) .................................................... 93-6 In Remark (inRemark) .............................................................. 93-6 Mark DE bit1 as Out of Profile (de1OutOfProfile) .............................. 93-7 Mask ................................................................................... 93-7 Mask (destinationMacAddressMask)............................................... 93-7 Mask (dot1pMask) ................................................................... 93-7 Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) .................................................... 93-8 Maximum Burst Size (kb) ........................................................... 93-8 Mode (mode) ......................................................................... 93-8 Multicast (multicast)................................................................ 93-8 Multicast Queue ID (multicastQueueId).......................................... 93-9 Out DSCP (outDscp) ................................................................. 93-9 Out Precedence (outPrecedence) ................................................ 93-9
xxxviii
Contents
Out Remark (outRemark) .......................................................... 93-9 Pir (kbps) ............................................................................. 93-9 Pir Adaptation ....................................................................... 93-9 Policed (policed) .................................................................. 93-10 Precedence......................................................................... 93-10 Priority.............................................................................. 93-10 Priority (defaultFcPriority) ...................................................... 93-10 Priority (priority) .................................................................. 93-10 Profile (profile) .................................................................... 93-11 Protocol............................................................................. 93-11 Queue ID ............................................................................ 93-11 Scheduler ........................................................................... 93-11 SNAP OUI (snapOui) ............................................................... 93-11 SNAP PID (snapPid)................................................................ 93-11 Source IP............................................................................ 93-12 Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) ................................................ 93-12 Source Port......................................................................... 93-12 Src Mask ............................................................................ 93-12 Synchronize ........................................................................ 93-12 Unknown Queue ID (unknownQueueId) ........................................ 93-12
94 Access Egress parameters

94.1
94-1
Access Egress parameters............................................................. 94-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 94-2 CIR (kb/s)............................................................................. 94-2 CIR Level.............................................................................. 94-2 CIR Weight............................................................................ 94-2 CIR Adaptation....................................................................... 94-2 Committed Burst Size (kb) ......................................................... 94-2 Description ........................................................................... 94-2 Destination IP ........................................................................ 94-2 Destination Port ..................................................................... 94-2 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 94-2 Distribute ............................................................................. 94-3 dot1p (dot1p) ........................................................................ 94-3 DSCP................................................................................... 94-3 Dst Mask .............................................................................. 94-3 Expedite .............................................................................. 94-3 Force DE value (forceDeValue).................................................... 94-3 Forwarding Class .................................................................... 94-3 Fragment ............................................................................. 94-3 High Priority Reserved.............................................................. 94-3 HSMDA Egress Profiling ............................................................. 94-4 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaPerPacketOffset) ................. 94-4 HSMDA Queue ID (hsmdaQueueId) ................................................ 94-4 ID ...................................................................................... 94-4 ID (id) ................................................................................. 94-4 ID (queueId) .......................................................................... 94-4 In DSCP (inDscp) ..................................................................... 94-4 In Profile (inDot1p) ................................................................. 94-5 In Precedence (inPrecedence) .................................................... 94-5
May 2009 xxxix
Contents
Level .................................................................................. 94-5 Mark DE bit (deMark) ............................................................... 94-5 Maximum Burst Size (kb) ........................................................... 94-5 Out DSCP (outDscp) ................................................................. 94-5 Out Profile (outDot1p) ............................................................. 94-5 Out Precedence (outPrecedence) ................................................ 94-5 PIR (kb/s)............................................................................. 94-6 PIR Adaptation....................................................................... 94-6 Priority (priority) .................................................................... 94-6 Port Average Overhead (%) ........................................................ 94-6 Port Parent ........................................................................... 94-6 Precedence........................................................................... 94-6 Protocol............................................................................... 94-6 Queue ID .............................................................................. 94-6 Scheduler ............................................................................. 94-6 Source IP.............................................................................. 94-6 Source Port........................................................................... 94-6 Src Mask .............................................................................. 94-6 Synchronize .......................................................................... 94-7 Weight ................................................................................ 94-7
95 ATM QoS parameters

95.1
95-1
ATM QoS parameters .................................................................. 95-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 95-2 CDVT (cdvt) .......................................................................... 95-2 CLP Tagging (clpTagging) .......................................................... 95-2 Description ........................................................................... 95-2 Descriptor Type (descriptorType) ................................................ 95-2 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 95-3 MBS (cells) (mbs) .................................................................... 95-3 MIR (kbps) (mdcr) ................................................................... 95-3 PIR (kbps) (pcr) ...................................................................... 95-3 Policing (policing) ................................................................... 95-3 Service Category (ServiceCategory) .............................................. 95-4 Shaping (shaping) ................................................................... 95-4 SIR (kbps) (sir) ....................................................................... 95-5
96 MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters

96.1
96-1
MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters.............................................. 96-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 96-2 Description ........................................................................... 96-2 Profile ID (id) ........................................................................ 96-2 Reassembly Timeout (msec) (reassemblyTimeout) ............................ 96-2
97 MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters

97.1
97-1
MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters .............................................. 97-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 97-2 Description ........................................................................... 97-2 Maximum Queue Size (msec) (maxQueueSize) ................................. 97-2
xl
Contents
MIR (%) (mir) ......................................................................... 97-2 MLPPP Class (mlpppClass).......................................................... 97-2 Profile ID (id) ........................................................................ 97-3 Weight (%) (weight) ................................................................. 97-3
98 Network parameters
98.1
98-1
Network parameters ................................................................... 98-2 Auto-Assign ID........................................................................ 98-2 Default FC ............................................................................ 98-2 Default FC Profile (defaultProfile) ............................................... 98-2 Description ........................................................................... 98-2 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 98-2 Distribute ............................................................................. 98-2 Dot1p (dot1p) ........................................................................ 98-3 Dot1p In Profile (dot1pInProfile) ................................................. 98-3 Dot1p Out Profile (dot1pOutProfile) ............................................. 98-3 DSCP (dscp) .......................................................................... 98-3 DSCP In Profile (dscpInProfile) .................................................... 98-4 DSCP Out Profile (dscpOutProfile)................................................ 98-5 Force DE value (forceDeValue).................................................... 98-5 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) .............................................. 98-5 ID (id) ................................................................................. 98-6 LER Use DSCP (lerUseDscp) ........................................................ 98-6 LSP Exp (lspExp) ..................................................................... 98-6 LSP EXP In Profile (lspExpInProfile) .............................................. 98-6 LSP EXP Out Profile (lspExpOutProfile) .......................................... 98-6 Mark DE bit (deMark) ............................................................... 98-7 Profile (profile) ...................................................................... 98-7 Remark (egressRemark) ............................................................ 98-7 Synchronize .......................................................................... 98-7
99 Network Queue parameters

99.1
99-1
Network Queue parameters .......................................................... 99-2 CIR (%) (cir) .......................................................................... 99-2 CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) ................................................... 99-2 CIR Level.............................................................................. 99-2 CIR Weight............................................................................ 99-2 Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs) ................................................... 99-2 Description ........................................................................... 99-3 Displayed Name ..................................................................... 99-3 Distribute ............................................................................. 99-3 Forwarding Class .................................................................... 99-3 High Priority Reserved (%) (highPriority) ........................................ 99-3 Level .................................................................................. 99-3 Maximum Burst Size (%) (mbs) .................................................... 99-3 Multicast .............................................................................. 99-4 Multicast Queue ID (multicastQueueId).......................................... 99-4 PIR (%) (pir) .......................................................................... 99-4 Queue ID (queueId) ................................................................. 99-4 PIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) ................................................... 99-4
May 2009 xli
Contents
Port Average Overhead (%) ........................................................ 99-5 Port Parent ........................................................................... 99-5 Synchronize .......................................................................... 99-5 Weight ................................................................................ 99-5
100 Shared Queue parameters

100.1
100-1
100-2 100-2 100-2 100-2 100-3 100-3 100-3
Shared Queue parameters .......................................................... CIR (%) (cir) ........................................................................ Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs) ................................................. Description ......................................................................... High Priority Reserved (%) (highPriority) ...................................... Maximum Burst Size (%) (mbs) .................................................. PIR (%) (pir) ........................................................................
101 WRED Slope parameters

101.1
101-1
101-2 101-2 101-2 101-2 101-2 101-2 101-3 101-3 101-3 101-3 101-4
WRED Slope parameters............................................................. Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ High Slope .......................................................................... Low Slope........................................................................... Max Avg. (maxAverage) .......................................................... Max Prob. (maxProbability)...................................................... Start Avg. (startAverage) ........................................................ Synchronize ........................................................................ Time Average Factor (weight) (timeAverageFactor) ........................
102 HSMDA WRED Slope parameters

102.1
102-1
102-2 102-2 102-2 102-2 102-2 102-2 102-2 102-3 102-3 102-3 102-3 102-3
HSMDA WRED Slope parameters ................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ HSMDA High Slope ................................................................. HSMDA Low Slope ................................................................. Max Depth (maxDepth) ........................................................... Max Prob. (maxProbability)...................................................... Queue MBS (bytes) (queueMbs) ................................................. Start Depth (startDepth) ......................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................
103 Scheduler parameters

103.1
103-1
103-2 103-2 103-2 103-2 103-2 103-2
Scheduler parameters ............................................................... CIR (kbps) (cir)..................................................................... CIR Level............................................................................ CIR Weight.......................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ...................................................................
May 2009
xlii
Contents
Distribute ........................................................................... Frame Base Accounting (schedulerPolicyFrameBasedAccnt) ............... Level ................................................................................ Parent Scheduler (nextSchedulerName) ....................................... PIR (kbps) (pir) .................................................................... Port Parent ......................................................................... Summed CIR (summedCir) ....................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................ Tier (tier)........................................................................... Weight ..............................................................................
103-3 103-3 103-3 103-3 103-3 103-4 103-4 103-4 103-4 103-4
104 BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters

104.1
104-1
104-2 104-2 104-2 104-2 104-2 104-2 104-2 104-2 104-3 104-3 104-3 104-3 104-3 104-3 104-3 104-4 104-4 104-4 104-4 104-4 104-4 104-5 104-5 104-5 104-5 104-5 104-5 104-5
BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters ........................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Collect Stats (collectAcctStats) ................................................. Description (shgDescription)..................................................... Discard Unknown Source (discardUnknownSource) .......................... Egress Filter Type ................................................................. IGMP Fast Leave (igmpFastLeave) .............................................. IGMP General Query Interval (seconds) (igmpGenQueryIntvl).............. IGMP Import Policy (igmpImportPlcy) .......................................... IGMP Last Member Interval (deciseconds) (igmpLastMembIntvl) .......... IGMP Max Neighbor Groups (igmpMaxNbrGrps) ............................... IGMP Query Response Interval (seconds) (igmpQueryRespIntvl) ........... IGMP Robust Count (igmpRobustCount)........................................ IGMP Sent Queries (igmpSendQueries)......................................... IGMP Version (igmpVersion) ..................................................... Ingress Filter Type ................................................................ Limit MAC Move (limitMacMove) ................................................ MAC Address Limit (macAddressLimit) ......................................... MAC Aging (macAgeing) .......................................................... MAC Learning (macLearning) .................................................... Mac Pinning (macPinning)........................................................ Name (shgName) .................................................................. Policy Id (policyId) ................................................................ Restrict Protected Source (shgRestProtSrcMac) .............................. Restrict Unprotected Destination (shgRestUnprotDstMac).................. Use Provisioned SDP (useProvisionedSdp) ..................................... VC Type (vcType) ................................................................. VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag) ........................................................
105 Port scheduler parameters

105.1
105-1
105-2 105-2 105-2 105-2 105-2 105-2 105-2 105-2
xliii
Port scheduler parameters ......................................................... CIR (kbps) (lvl1Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl2Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl3Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl4Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl5Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl6Cir) ................................................................ CIR (kbps) (lvl7Cir) ................................................................
May 2009
Contents
CIR (kbps) (lvl8Cir) ................................................................ CIR Level (orphanCirLevel) ...................................................... CIR Weight (orphanCirWeight) .................................................. Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Level (orphanLevel)............................................................... Maximum Rate (kbps) (maxRate) ............................................... PIR (kbps) (lvl1Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl2Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl3Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl4Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl5Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl6Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl7Pir) ................................................................ PIR (kbps) (lvl8Pir) ................................................................ Synchronize ........................................................................ Weight (orphanWeight)...........................................................
105-3 105-3 105-3 105-3 105-3 105-3 105-3 105-4 105-4 105-4 105-4 105-4 105-4 105-5 105-5 105-5 105-5 105-5
106 HSMDA Scheduler parameters

106.1
106-1
106-2 106-2 106-2 106-2 106-2 106-2 106-3 106-3 106-3 106-3 106-3 106-4 106-4 106-4 106-4 106-5 106-5 106-5 106-5 106-5 106-5 106-6 106-6 106-6 106-6 106-6 106-6 106-7 106-7 106-7 106-7
HSMDA Scheduler parameters ...................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Group ............................................................................... Group (level1Group) .............................................................. Group (level2Group) .............................................................. Group (level3Group) .............................................................. Group (level4Group) .............................................................. Group (level5Group) .............................................................. Group (level6Group) .............................................................. Group (level7Group) .............................................................. Group (level8Group) .............................................................. Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schedulerMaxRate) ................................... Rate (Mbps) ........................................................................ Rate (Mbps) (group1Rate)........................................................ Rate (Mbps) (group2Rate)........................................................ Rate (Mbps) (level1Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level2Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level3Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level4Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level5Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level6Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level7Rate)......................................................... Rate (Mbps) (level8Rate)......................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................ Weight .............................................................................. Weight (level1Weight)............................................................ Weight (level2Weight)............................................................ Weight (level3Weight)............................................................ Weight (level4Weight)............................................................
May 2009
xliv
Contents
Weight Weight Weight Weight
(level5Weight)............................................................ (level6Weight)............................................................ (level7Weight)............................................................ (level8Weight)............................................................
106-7 106-7 106-8 106-8
107 HSMDA Pool parameters

107.1
107-1
107-2 107-2 107-2 107-2 107-3 107-3 107-3 107-3 107-3 107-4 107-4 107-4 107-4 107-5 107-5 107-5 107-5 107-5 107-6 107-6 107-6 107-6 107-6 107-6 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7 107-7
HSMDA pool parameters............................................................. Allocation Percent ................................................................ Allocation Percent (poolClass1AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass2AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass3AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass4AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass5AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass6AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass7AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Percent (poolClass8AllocPercent) ................................. Allocation Weight ................................................................. Allocation Weight (poolRoot1AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot2AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot3AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot4AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot5AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot6AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot7AllocWeight).................................... Allocation Weight (poolRoot8AllocWeight).................................... Default .............................................................................. Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Root Parent ........................................................................ Root Parent (poolClass1Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass2Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass3Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass4Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass5Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass6Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass7Parent)................................................. Root Parent (poolClass8Parent)................................................. Synchronize ........................................................................ System Reserve (%) (poolSystemReserve) .....................................
108 Named Buffer Pool parameters

108.1
108-1
108-2 108-2 108-2 108-2 108-2 108-2 108-2
Named buffer pool parameters .................................................... Access Weight (accessAllocationWeight) ...................................... Default Reserved CBS............................................................. Default Weight (defaultWeight) ................................................ MDA Weight (mdaWeight)........................................................ Network Weight (networkAllocationWeight).................................. Pool Name (poolName) ...........................................................
May 2009
xlv
Contents
Port Weight (portWeight) ........................................................ 108-2 Reserved CBS (%) (reservedCBS) ................................................ 108-3
109 7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters

109.1
109-1
109-2 109-2 109-2 109-2 109-2 109-2 109-3 109-3 109-3 109-3 109-3 109-4 109-4 109-4 109-4 109-5 109-5 109-5 109-5 109-5 109-5
7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters .............................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Color (conformanceLevelType) ................................................. Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Drop Algorithm (transmitXType) ................................................ DSCP (dscp) ........................................................................ DSCP Value (dscpValue) .......................................................... Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ Priority (priority) .................................................................. Queue Algorithm (queueAlgorithmType) ...................................... Shaper Rate (shaperRate)........................................................ Traffic Class (QosTrafficClassEntry) ............................................ Txq 0 (txq0) ........................................................................ Txq 1 (txq1) ........................................................................ Txq 2 (txq2) ........................................................................ Txq 3 (txq3) ........................................................................ Txq 4 (txq4) ........................................................................ Txq 5 (txq5) ........................................................................ Txq 6 (txq6) ........................................................................ Txq 7 (txq7) ........................................................................
110 AOS QoS Policies parameters

110.1
110-1
110-2 110-2 110-2 110-2 110-2 110-3 110-3 110-3 110-3 110-3 110-3 110-3 110-4 110-4 110-4 110-4 110-6 110-6 110-6 110-6 110-6 110-6 110-7
AOS QoS Policies parameters ....................................................... Action (actionDisposition) ....................................................... Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... Destination IP Port (End) (destinationIpPortEnd) ............................ Destination IP Port (Start) (destinationIpPortStart) ......................... Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) .................................... Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ................................ Destination Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) .............................. Destination Net Mask (destinationIpAddressFullMask)....................... Destination Port (destinationPort) ............................................. Destination Slot (destinationSlot) .............................................. Differentiated Services Code Point (dscp) .................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. ICMP Code (icmpCode) ........................................................... ICMP Type (icmpType)............................................................ IP Protocol (protocol)............................................................. Mask ................................................................................. Mask (dscpMask) ................................................................... Mask (tosValueMask) .............................................................. Match Destination IP Port Range (matchDestinationIpPort) ................ Match Destination Port (matchDestinationPort).............................. Match Source IP Port Range (matchSourceIpPort) ........................... Match Source Port (matchSourcePort) .........................................
May 2009
xlvi
Contents
Maximum Bandwidth (Kbps) (maxBandwidth) ................................ Policy Status (enabled)........................................................... Precedence (precedence)........................................................ Priority (actionPriority) .......................................................... Priority (dot1pValue) ............................................................. Share Resources (shared) ........................................................ Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... Source IP Port (End) (sourceIpPortEnd)........................................ Source IP Port (Start) (sourceIpPortStart)..................................... Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) ................................................ Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)............................................ Source Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) ......................................... Source Net Mask (sourceIpAddressFullMask) .................................. Source Port (sourcePort) ......................................................... Source Slot (sourceSlot) .......................................................... Source VLAN (sourceVlan) ....................................................... ToS Precedence (tosValue) ...................................................... Type of Service (tosValue).......................................................
110-7 110-7 110-7 110-7 110-7 110-7 110-8 110-8 110-8 110-8 110-8 110-8 110-9 110-9 110-9 110-9 110-9 110-9
111 ACL MAC Filter parameters

111.1
111-1
111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-2 111-3 111-3 111-3 111-3 111-3 111-3 111-3 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4 111-4
ACL MAC Filter parameters ......................................................... Action ............................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Default Action (action) ........................................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) .................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Dot1p (dot1pValue) ............................................................... Dot1p Mask (dot1pMask) ......................................................... Dst Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) ........................................ Entry ID ............................................................................. Ether Type (ethernetType) ...................................................... Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ Frame Type (frameType) ........................................................ Inner Encap Value ................................................................. Outer Encap Value ................................................................ Path ID .............................................................................. Port Name .......................................................................... Snap Oui (snapOui)................................................................ Snap Pid (snapPid) ................................................................ Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) ................................................ Src Mask (sourceMacAddressMask).............................................. Synchronize ........................................................................ VC ID ................................................................................
May 2009
xlvii
Contents
112 ACL IP Filter parameters

112.1
112-1
ACL IP Filter parameters ............................................................ 112-2 Action ............................................................................... 112-2 Administrative State .............................................................. 112-2 Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... 112-2 Cflowd If Sample (cflowdIfSample)............................................. 112-2 Cflowd Sample (cflowdSample) ................................................. 112-2 Default Action (action) ........................................................... 112-3 Description ......................................................................... 112-3 Dest Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2) .... 112-3 Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... 112-3 Displayed Name ................................................................... 112-3 Distribute ........................................................................... 112-3 DSCP (dscp) ........................................................................ 112-3 Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) .......................................... 112-4 Entry ID ............................................................................. 112-4 Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ 112-4 Forward NH (nextHop)............................................................ 112-4 Forward NH Interface (nextHopInterfaceName) ............................. 112-4 Fragment (fragment) ............................................................. 112-5 ICMP Code (icmpCode) ........................................................... 112-5 ICMP Type (icmpType)............................................................ 112-5 Inner Encap Value ................................................................. 112-5 IP Opt Mask (ipOptionMask)...................................................... 112-5 IP Option (ipOptionValue) ....................................................... 112-5 Is Indirect (nextHopIndirectlyReachable) ..................................... 112-6 Log ID ............................................................................... 112-7 Multiple Option (multipleOption) ............................................... 112-7 Option Present (optionPresent) ................................................. 112-7 Outer Encap Value ................................................................ 112-7 Path ID .............................................................................. 112-7 Port Name .......................................................................... 112-8 Protocol (protocol)................................................................ 112-8 Remark Dot1p (remarkDot1p) ................................................... 112-9 Remark DSCP (remarkDscp)...................................................... 112-9 Remark DSCP Mask (remarkDscpMask) ......................................... 112-9 Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... 112-9 Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2) .................. 112-9 Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) ............................................... 112-10 Synchronize ....................................................................... 112-10 TCP Ack (tcpAck) ................................................................. 112-10 TCP Syn (tcpSyn) ................................................................. 112-10 VC ID ............................................................................... 112-11
113 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters 113-1
113.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters ........................ Action (defaultAction)............................................................ Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ Loggable ............................................................................
May 2009
113-2 113-2 113-2 113-2 113-2 113-2
xlviii
Contents
Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... 113-2 Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) ................................................ 113-2 VLAN Priority Tag ................................................................. 113-3
114 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters 114-1
114.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters ....................... Action (defaultAction)............................................................ Description ......................................................................... Dest Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ......................................... Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ Loggable ............................................................................ Precedence (precedence)........................................................ Protocol (protocol)................................................................ Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) ................................................ TOS (tos)............................................................................ VLAN Priority Tag (vpt)........................................................... 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-2 114-3 114-3 114-4 114-4 114-4 114-5
115 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter parameters

115.1
115-1
115-2 115-2 115-2 115-2 115-2 115-2 115-2 115-2 115-3 115-3 115-3 115-3 115-3 115-3 115-4
7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter parameters ................................ Action (action)..................................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Dest Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ......................................... Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ IGMP Option (igmpOption) ....................................................... Loggable (loggable) ............................................................... Name (packagePolicyPointer) ................................................... Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) ................................................ Synchronize ........................................................................
116 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter parameters

116.1
116-1
116-2 116-2 116-2 116-2 116-2 116-2 116-2 116-3 116-3 116-3
7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter parameters................................. Action (action)..................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) .................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Dst Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) ........................................ Filter ID (id) ........................................................................ Loggable ............................................................................ Pattern (pattern).................................................................. Pattern Mask (patternMask) .....................................................
May 2009
xlix
Contents
Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) ................................................ 116-3 Src Mask (sourceMacAddressMask).............................................. 116-3
117 Multicast Package parameters

117.1
117-1
117-2 117-2 117-2 117-2 117-2 117-2 117-2 117-3 117-3 117-3 117-3
Multicast Package parameters ..................................................... Channel (channel)................................................................. Cost (cost).......................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... ID (id) ............................................................................... IGMP Option (igmpOption) ....................................................... Is Root Catalogue (mainChannelCatalogue) ................................... Loggable ............................................................................ Multicast Address (address)...................................................... Name ................................................................................
118 Egress Multicast Group parameters

118.1
118-1
118-2 118-2 118-2 118-2 118-2 118-2
Egress Multicast Group parameters ............................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination Chain Limit (chainLimit)........................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Dot1 Q Ethertype (dot1qEtype) ................................................. Encapsulation Type (encapType) ...............................................
119 Multicast CAC parameters

119.1
119-1
119-2 119-2 119-2 119-2 119-2 119-2 119-3 119-3 119-3 119-3 119-3
Multicast CAC parameters .......................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth) .................................................. Class (channelClass) .............................................................. Default Action (defaultAction) .................................................. Description ......................................................................... End Address (endAddress) ....................................................... Max Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth) ............................................ Name ................................................................................ Start Address (startAddress)..................................................... Type (channelType)...............................................................
120 Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters

120.1
120-1
120-2 120-2 120-2 120-2 120-2 120-3 120-3 120-3 120-3 120-4
Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters ................................ Admin BW Use Threshold (kbps) (adminBwUseThreshold) .................. Admin State (ingrPathMgmtAdminState) ...................................... Administrative BW (kbps) ........................................................ Ancillary Path Limit (mbps) (ancillaryPathLimit) ............................ Black Hole Rate (kbps) ........................................................... BW Decision ........................................................................ BW Policy Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer) ............................ Committed Buffer Space (%) (cbs).............................................. Congestion Priority Threshold (congestPriorityThreshold)..................
May 2009
Contents
Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. ECMP Optimization Threshold (ecmpOptimizationThreshold).............. End Address (endAddress) ....................................................... Explicit Path ....................................................................... Falling Delay (seconds) ........................................................... Falling Percent Reset (%) (fallingPercentReset).............................. High Bandwidth Alarm (mCastAlarm) .......................................... High Bandwidth Multicast Traffic Taps Group (mCastGroup) .............. High Bandwidth Source (mCastSource) ........................................ High Priority Traffic (%) (highPriority) ......................................... Maximum Buffer Space (%) (mbs) ............................................... Name (bundleName) .............................................................. Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer)......................................... Name (ingrPathMgmtPolicyPointer) ............................................ Number of Secondary T2 Paths (numberOfSeondaryT2Paths).............. Path Limit (mbps) (pathLimit) .................................................. Percentage of Total pool (%) (mcastBufferPoolPercentage) ............... Preference Level .................................................................. Primary Path Limit (mbps) (primaryPathLimit)............................... Reserved CBS (%) (mcastBufferPoolResvCbsPercentage).................... Secondary Path Limit (mbps) (secondaryPathLimit) ......................... Source Address (srcAddress)..................................................... Start Address (startAddress).....................................................
120-4 120-4 120-4 120-4 120-4 120-5 120-5 120-5 120-6 120-6 120-6 120-6 120-6 120-7 120-7 120-7 120-7 120-7 120-7 120-8 120-8 120-8 120-8 120-8
121 Time of Day parameters

121.1
121-1
121-2 121-2 121-2 121-2 121-2 121-2 121-3 121-3 121-3
Time of Day parameters ............................................................ End Run Day (frequencySettingTo) ............................................. End Time (endDate) .............................................................. Frequency (frequency) ........................................................... Name ................................................................................ Ongoing (onGoing) ................................................................ Priority.............................................................................. Start Run Day (frequencySettingFrom) ........................................ Start Time (startDate)............................................................
122 Ethernet Services Policies parameters

122.1
122-1
122-2 122-2 122-2 122-2 122-2 122-2 122-3 122-3 122-3 122-3
Ethernet Services Policies parameters............................................ Bandwidth Sharing (bandwidthSharing)........................................ CVLAN Treatment (cVlanTreatment)........................................... Description (description)......................................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. GVRP (gvrpTreatment) ........................................................... Ingress Bandwidth (Mb) (IngressBW) ........................................... Priority (fixedPriority)............................................................ Priority Mapping (priorityMapMode)............................................ STP (stpBpduTreatment) .........................................................
May 2009
li
Contents
123 Routing parameters

123.1
123-1
Routing parameters .................................................................. 123-2 Action (action)..................................................................... 123-2 Advertised Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf)....................................... 123-2 All Instances (isAllInstances) .................................................... 123-3 BGP AS Path Name (asPathName) .............................................. 123-3 Begin Length (beginLength) ..................................................... 123-3 BGP AS Path Action (pathAction) ............................................... 123-3 BGP AS Prepend number (prependAs).......................................... 123-4 BGP Local Preference (localPreference) ...................................... 123-4 Community Action 1 (communityAction1)..................................... 123-4 Community Action 2 (communityAction2)..................................... 123-4 Community List Name (communityName) ..................................... 123-5 Community Member (member).................................................. 123-5 Community Member (members) ................................................ 123-5 Community Name (communityName) .......................................... 123-5 Community Name 1 (communityName1) ...................................... 123-5 Community Name 2 (communityName2) ...................................... 123-5 Damping Name (dampingName) ................................................ 123-6 Damping Profile Name (damping) .............................................. 123-6 Default Action (action) ........................................................... 123-6 Description ......................................................................... 123-6 Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. 123-7 Entry ID (entryId).................................................................. 123-7 Half Life (halfLife) ................................................................ 123-7 IGMP Host Prefix List Name (igmpHostPrefixList) ............................ 123-7 Instance ID (instanceIndex) ...................................................... 123-8 ISIS External Route (isisEnabled)................................................ 123-8 ISIS Route Level (isisRoutes)..................................................... 123-8 Local Preference Set (localPreferenceSet).................................... 123-9 Mask (mask) ........................................................................ 123-9 Max Suppression (maxSuppression) ............................................. 123-9 Metric Action (metricAction) .................................................... 123-9 Metric Value (metricValue) ..................................................... 123-10 Multicast Group Prefix List Name (mcastGroupPrefixList)................. 123-10 Multicast Source IP Address (mcastSourceIpAddress)....................... 123-10 Neighbor IP Address (neighborIpAddress) .................................... 123-10 Neighbor Prefix List (neighborPrefixList)..................................... 123-10 Next Hop (nextHop).............................................................. 123-10 Next Hop Type (nextHopType) ................................................. 123-11 Origin (origin) ..................................................................... 123-11 OSPF Area (area) ................................................................. 123-11 OSPF Area Set (areaSet)......................................................... 123-11 OSPF, RIP, or ISIS Tag (Hex) (tag) ............................................. 123-12 OSPF Route Type (ospfRouteType) ............................................ 123-12 Path Name (pathName) ......................................................... 123-12 Policy Statement Name (policyStatementName)............................ 123-12 Prefix (prefix)..................................................................... 123-13 Prefix List 1 (prefixList1) ....................................................... 123-13 Prefix List 2 (prefixList2) ....................................................... 123-13 Prefix List 3 (prefixList3) ....................................................... 123-13 Prefix List 4 (prefixList4) ....................................................... 123-13
lii
Contents
Prefix List 5 (prefixList5) ....................................................... 123-13 Prefix List Name (prefixListName) ............................................ 123-13 Prepend Count (prependCount)................................................ 123-13 Protocol (protocol)............................................................... 123-14 Regular Expression (regularExpression)....................................... 123-14 Reuse (reuse) ..................................................................... 123-15 Route Origin (origin) ............................................................. 123-15 Route Preference (preference) ................................................ 123-16 Static Route Tag (staticRouteTag)............................................. 123-16 Suppress (suppress) .............................................................. 123-16 Through Length (throughLength) .............................................. 123-16 Trace Tree (LdpTraceTree)..................................................... 123-17 Triggered Re-evaluation of Route Policies (manualPolicyTrigger) ....... 123-17 Type (type)........................................................................ 123-17 Use Next Hop (isNextHopEnabled)............................................. 123-18 Value (value)...................................................................... 123-18
124 MPLS Administration Groups parameters

124.1
124-1
124-2 124-2 124-2 124-2 124-2
MPLS Administration Groups parameters ......................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ Synchronize (syncTo) ............................................................. Value (value).......................................................................
125 VRRP policy parameters

125.1
125-1
125-2 125-2 125-2 125-2 125-2 125-2 125-2 125-3 125-3 125-3 125-3 125-3 125-3 125-3 125-4 125-4 125-4 125-4 125-4
VRRP policy parameters............................................................. Displayed Name ................................................................... Delta in Use Limit (deltaInUseLimit) ........................................... Description ......................................................................... Hold Clear (seconds) (holdClear) ............................................... Hold Set (seconds) (holdSet) .................................................... Hop Address (hopAddress) ....................................................... ID .................................................................................... Interval for Echo Request (seconds) (interval) ............................... IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ LAG ID (lagId) ...................................................................... Less Specific (lessSpecific) ...................................................... Limit of Echo Request Failures (dropCount) .................................. Mask (mask) ........................................................................ Number of Ports Down (numberofPortsDown) ................................ Priority (priority) .................................................................. Priority Type (priorityType) ..................................................... Protocol (protocol)................................................................ Timeout for Echo Request (seconds) (timeout) ..............................
May 2009
liii
Contents
126 CFM 802.1ag parameters

126.1
126-1
126-2 126-2 126-2 126-2
CFM 802.1ag parameters............................................................ ID (id) ............................................................................... Level (maintDomainLevel) ....................................................... Name Type (maintDomainNameType) .........................................
127 802_1x parameters

127.1
127-1
127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-2 127-3 127-3 127-3 127-3 127-3 127-3
802_1x parameters................................................................... Accounting Port (acctPort) ...................................................... Administrative Status............................................................. Authorization Port (authPort) ................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ Password (password).............................................................. Request Timeout (requestTimeout) ............................................ Retry Attempts (retryAttempts) ................................................ Server Index (serverIndex)....................................................... Server Type (serverType) ........................................................ Source Address (sourceAddress) ................................................ Synchronize ........................................................................
128 RADIUS Based Accounting parameters

128.1
128-1
128-2 128-2 128-2 128-2 128-2 128-2 128-3 128-3 128-3 128-3 128-4 128-4 128-4 128-4 128-4 128-5 128-5
RADIUS Based Accounting parameters ............................................ Access Algorithm (accessAlgorithm)............................................ Enable............................................................................... Port (port) .......................................................................... Port Prefix String (nasPortPrefixString)........................................ Port Prefix Type (nasPortPrefixType) .......................................... Port Suffix Type (nasPortSuffixType) .......................................... RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes)........................................... Retry Attempts (retryAttempts) ................................................ Router Instance (routerType) ................................................... Secret Name (secret) ............................................................. Server IP Address (address)...................................................... Session ID Format (sessionIDFormat) ........................................... Source Address (sourceAddress) ................................................ Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds) .......................................... User Standard Account Attribute (useStdAcctAttrib) ........................ Value (minutes) (updateInterval)...............................................
129 Residential Subscriber parameters

129.1
129-1
129-2 129-2 129-2 129-2 129-2 129-2
Residential Subscriber parameters ................................................ Accounting Enabled (accountingOn) ........................................... Administrative State .............................................................. ANCP String (ancpString)......................................................... Application (application)......................................................... Application Profile String (appProfileString)..................................
May 2009
liv
Contents
Circuit ID (circuitId) .............................................................. 129-2 Circuit ID Format (circuitIdFormat) ............................................ 129-2 Custom Option Number (optionID) ............................................. 129-3 Days (days) ......................................................................... 129-3 Description ......................................................................... 129-3 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (dhcpCidMaskPreNum) ................ 129-3 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (dhcpCidMaskPreStr) ................... 129-3 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (dhcpCidMaskSufNum)................. 129-4 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (dhcpCidMaskSufStr) .................... 129-4 DHCP String (dhcpString)......................................................... 129-4 Disable AC Cookies (disableAcCookies) ........................................ 129-4 Disable SHCV (disableSHCV) ..................................................... 129-4 Disable SHCV Hold Time (seconds) (disableSHCVHoldTIme) ................ 129-5 Disable SHCV Notification (disableSHCVNtf) .................................. 129-5 Displayed Name ................................................................... 129-5 Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit).................. 129-5 Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit) .......... 129-5 Enable Reply On PADT (enableReplyOnPadt) ................................. 129-5 Frame Base Accounting (schedulerPolicyFrameBasedAccnt) ............... 129-5 Host Limit (hostLimit) ............................................................ 129-6 Host Name (hostName) ........................................................... 129-6 Hours (hours)....................................................................... 129-6 Ingress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit) ........ 129-6 Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue) ................................ 129-6 Intermediate Destination (intermediateDestId) .............................. 129-6 Intermediate Destination ID (interDestIdString).............................. 129-6 IP Address 1 (address1)........................................................... 129-7 IP Address 2 (address2)........................................................... 129-7 IP Address 3 (address3)........................................................... 129-7 IP Address 4 (address4)........................................................... 129-7 IP Address .......................................................................... 129-7 IP Address Pool Name (poolName).............................................. 129-7 LCP Keep Alive Hold Up Multiplier (lcpKaHoldUpMplier).................... 129-7 LCP Keep Alive Interval (seconds) (lcpKaInterval) ........................... 129-7 MAC Address (clientMacAddress)................................................ 129-7 Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1) ....................................... 129-8 Match Type DHCP 2 (matchTypeDhcp2) ....................................... 129-8 Match Type DHCP 3 (matchTypeDhcp3) ....................................... 129-8 Match Type DHCP 4 (matchTypeDhcp4) ....................................... 129-8 Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1) ..................................... 129-8 Match Type PPPoE 2 (matchTypePppoe2) ..................................... 129-9 Match Type PPPoE 3 (matchTypePppoe3) ..................................... 129-9 Maximum Sessions Per MAC (maxSessionsPerMac) ........................... 129-9 Maximum Host Lost Connectivity Rate (traps per second) (maxHostLostConnectivityRate)........................................... 129-9 Minutes (minutes) ................................................................. 129-9 Monitoring Period (monitoringPeriod) ........................................ 129-10 Netbios Node Type (netbiosNodeType) ....................................... 129-10 New Subscriber Identification (newSubscrIdent) ............................ 129-10 Number (optionNumber) ........................................................ 129-10 Option (option) ................................................................... 129-11 Option 60 (dhcpOption60) ...................................................... 129-11
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 lv
Contents
Option Number (optionNumber) ............................................... 129-11 Option Protocol (protocol)...................................................... 129-11 Option Type (optionType) ...................................................... 129-12 Option Value (optionValue)..................................................... 129-12 Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue) .............................. 129-12 PADO Delay (100s of milliseconds) (padoDelay) ............................ 129-12 Password Type (passwordType) ................................................ 129-12 Password (password)............................................................. 129-13 Polling Interval (pollingInterval) ............................................... 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (pppoeCidMaskPreNum)............. 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (pppoeCidMaskPreStr) ................ 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (pppoeCidMaskSufNum) ............. 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (pppoeCidMaskSufStr) ................ 129-13 PPP MTU (mtu).................................................................... 129-14 Primary Script Administrative State (script1AdministrativeState) ....... 129-14 Primary Script URL (script1Url) ................................................ 129-14 Rate Adjustment (egrRateAdjustment) ....................................... 129-14 Rate Adjustment (ingRateAdjustment) ....................................... 129-14 Rate Modification (egrRateModificationType) ............................... 129-14 Rate Modification (ingRateModificationType) ............................... 129-15 Rate Modification Scheduler (egrRateModSchedObjPointer) .............. 129-15 Rate Modification Scheduler (ingRateModSchedObjPointer) .............. 129-15 Rate Monitor (kbps) (egrRateMonitor) ........................................ 129-15 Rate Monitor (kbps) (ingRateMonitor)......................................... 129-15 Rate Monitor Notification (egrRateMonitorNtf).............................. 129-15 Rate Monitor Notification (ingRateMonitorNtf) .............................. 129-15 Rate Reduction (kbps) (egrRateReduction) .................................. 129-16 Rate Reduction (kbps) (ingRateReduction)................................... 129-16 Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm (rateExceededRaisesAlarm) ................. 129-16 Remote ID (remoteId) ........................................................... 129-16 Remove oldest Subscriber Host (removeOldestHostOn).................... 129-16 SAP ID (sapId) ..................................................................... 129-17 Secondary Script Administrative State (script2AdministrativeState) .... 129-17 Secondary Script URL (script2Url) ............................................. 129-17 Seconds (seconds) ................................................................ 129-17 SLA Profile String (slaProfileString) ........................................... 129-17 SLA Profile String (displayedName) ........................................... 129-17 Service ID (serviceId) ............................................................ 129-17 Strings From Option (stringFromOption)...................................... 129-17 Subscriber ID Alias (subscrAlias) ............................................... 129-18 Subscriber ID (subscriberIdString) ............................................. 129-18 Subscriber Identification (displayedName)................................... 129-18 Subscriber Identification (subscrIdent) ....................................... 129-18 Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subscrProfileString) .................... 129-18 Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subscrProfileString) ............... 129-18 Subscriber Profile String (displayedName) ................................... 129-18 Subscriber Profile String (subscriberProfileString) .......................... 129-18 System ID (systemId)............................................................. 129-19 Tertiary Script Administrative State (script3AdministrativeState) ....... 129-19 Tertiary Script URL (script3Url) ................................................ 129-19 Trap Dropped Raises Alarm (trapDroppedRaisesAlarm) .................... 129-19 Type (optionType) ............................................................... 129-19
lvi May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
Units (units) ....................................................................... 129-19 Use Direct Map as Default (useDirectMapAsDefault)........................ 129-20 Use GI Address (useGiAddress) ................................................. 129-20 Use Multipoint Shared Queue (multipointSharedQueueOn)................ 129-20 Use Shared Queue (sharedQueueOn).......................................... 129-20 User Name (userName) .......................................................... 129-20 User Name Format (userNameFormat)........................................ 129-21 VLAN for all Services (Bridged) (vlanAllServicesBridged) .................. 129-21 VLAN for all Services (Routed) (vlanAllServicesRouted).................... 129-21 VLAN per ISP per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerISPPerServiceBridged) ...... 129-21 VLAN per ISP per Service (Routed) (vlanPerISPPerServiceRouted) ....... 129-21 VLAN per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerServiceBridged) ....................... 129-21 VLAN per Service (Routed) (vlanPerServiceRouted) ........................ 129-21 VLAN per Subscriber (Bridged) (vlanPerSubscrBridged) .................... 129-22 VLAN per Subscriber (Routed) (vlanPerSubscrRouted) ..................... 129-22
130 Remote Network Monitoring parameters

130.1
130-1
130-2 130-2 130-2 130-2 130-2 130-2 130-2 130-3 130-3 130-3 130-3 130-4 130-4 130-4
Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) parameters ............................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Community (community)......................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Falling Threshold (fallingThreshold) ........................................... ID .................................................................................... Interval (seconds) (interval) ..................................................... Monitored Object OID (monitoredObjectId) .................................. Owner (owner)..................................................................... Rising Threshold (risingThreshold).............................................. Sample Type (sampleType) ...................................................... Start Up Alarm (startupAlarm) .................................................. Type (type).........................................................................
131 Size Constraint parameters

131.1
131-1
131-2 131-2 131-2 131-2 131-2 131-2 131-2
Size Constraint parameters ......................................................... Apply Threshold To (thresholdPolicy) .......................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Objects To Be Deleted When Threshold Exceeded (# of objects) (rowsToDelete) .............................................................. Policy Id (policyId) ................................................................ Threshold (# of objects) (rowThreshold) ......................................
132 Application Assurance parameters

132.1
132-1
132-2 132-2 132-2 132-2 132-2 132-3
lvii
Application Assurance parameters ................................................ Administrative State (adminState) ............................................. ASO Characteristic Default Value (asoCharDefValue) ....................... ASO Characteristic Value (asoCharacteristicValue) .......................... Collect Accounting Statistics .................................................... Collect Accounting Statistics (appCollectStats) ..............................
May 2009
Contents
Collect Accounting Statistics (appGrpCollectStats).......................... Collect Accounting Statistics (protCollectStats) ............................. Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppCollectStats) .......................... Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppGrpCollectStats) ..................... Collect Accounting Statistics (subProtCollectStats) ......................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Divert (divert) ..................................................................... Entry ID (id) ........................................................................ Flow Full High Watermark (flowFullHighMark) ............................... Flow Full Low Watermark (flowFullLowMark) ................................ Flow Set-up Direction (flowSetupDir) .......................................... IP Protocol Number (ipProtocolNumber) ...................................... IP Protocol Operator (ipProtocolNumberOperator) .......................... Network Address (networkAddr) ................................................ Network Address Operator (networkAddrOperator) ......................... Network Address Prefix Length (networkAddrPrefixLength) ............... Network Port (networkPort)..................................................... Network Port Operator (networkPortOperator) .............................. Protocol Operator (protocolOperator) ......................................... Subscriber name (displayedName) .............................................
132-3 132-3 132-3 132-3 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-4 132-5 132-6 132-6 132-6 132-7 132-7 132-7 132-7 132-7
133 Common Policies menu parameters

133.1
133-1
Common Policies menu parameters ............................................... 133-2 Action (defaultAction)............................................................ 133-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... 133-2 Alarm All Differences ............................................................. 133-3 Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... 133-3 CIR (kbps) (cir)..................................................................... 133-3 CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) ................................................. 133-4 CIR Level............................................................................ 133-4 CIR Level (cirLevel) ............................................................... 133-4 CIR Level (portParentCirLevel).................................................. 133-5 CIR Weight.......................................................................... 133-5 CIR Weight (cirWeight) ........................................................... 133-5 CIR Weight (portParentCirWeight).............................................. 133-5 Committed Burst Size (kb) (committedBurstSize)............................ 133-6 Configuration Mode (configurationMode)...................................... 133-6 Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... 133-6 Distribution Mode (distributionMode) .......................................... 133-6 DSAP (dsap) ........................................................................ 133-7 DSAP Mask (dsapMask) ............................................................ 133-7 Default .............................................................................. 133-7 Default FC (defaultFc)............................................................ 133-7 Description (description)......................................................... 133-8 Destination Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2)............................................................ 133-8 Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. 133-9 Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ 133-9 DSCP (dscp) ........................................................................ 133-9 Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ......................................... 133-10
lviii
Contents
Entry ID (id) ....................................................................... 133-10 Expedite (expedite).............................................................. 133-10 Filter ID (id) ....................................................................... 133-11 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) ........................................... 133-11 Fragment (fragment) ............................................................ 133-12 High Priority Reserved (highPriorityReserved)............................... 133-12 HSMDA Counter Override (hsmdaCntrOvr).................................... 133-12 HSMDA Egress Profiling (hsmdaDot1pProfile) ................................ 133-12 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes)............................................. 133-12 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaEgrPackByteOff) ............... 133-13 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaIngPackByteOff) ............... 133-13 ID (id) .............................................................................. 133-13 Inner Encap Value (fwdSapInnerEncapValue) ................................ 133-13 IP Address (address) ............................................................. 133-13 LAG ID (lagId) ..................................................................... 133-13 Level ............................................................................... 133-14 Level (level)....................................................................... 133-14 Level (portParentLevel) ......................................................... 133-14 Loggable (loggable) .............................................................. 133-15 Maximum Burst Size (kb) (maximumBurstSize) .............................. 133-15 Name (displayedName).......................................................... 133-15 Outer Encap Value (fwdSapOuterEncapValue)............................... 133-16 Override CIR ...................................................................... 133-16 Override CIR Adaptation ........................................................ 133-16 Override Committed Burst Size ................................................ 133-17 Override High Priority Reserved ............................................... 133-17 Override Maximum Burst Size .................................................. 133-17 Override PIR....................................................................... 133-17 Override PIR Adaptation ........................................................ 133-17 Override Port Average Overhead .............................................. 133-18 Override Summed CIR ........................................................... 133-18 Path ID (fwdSdpBindPathId) .................................................... 133-18 PIR (kbps) (pir) ................................................................... 133-19 PIR Adaptation (pirAdaptation) ................................................ 133-19 Port Average Overhead (%) (portAvgOverhead) ............................. 133-19 Port Name (fwdSapPortName) ................................................. 133-19 Port Parent (portParent) ........................................................ 133-20 Precedence (precedence)....................................................... 133-20 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 133-20 Profile ID (id) ..................................................................... 133-20 Protocol (protocol)............................................................... 133-20 Queue ID (queueId) .............................................................. 133-22 Redirect URL (redirectURL)..................................................... 133-22 Scheduler button ................................................................. 133-22 Scope (scope) ..................................................................... 133-22 Set to Local Edit Only upon finding of differences (localEditDifferences) ..................................................... 133-23 Set to Sync with Global upon finding of no differences (globalSyncNonDifferences) .............................................. 133-23 Source IP (sourceIpAddress) .................................................... 133-23 Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2) ................. 133-23 Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) ............................................... 133-24
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 lix
Contents
SSAP (ssap) ........................................................................ 133-24 SSAP Mask (ssapMask)............................................................ 133-24 Summed CIR (summedCir) ...................................................... 133-24 Synchronize (syncTo) ............................................................ 133-24 VC ID (fwdSdpBindVcId) ......................................................... 133-24 VLAN Priority Tag (vpt).......................................................... 133-24 Weight ............................................................................. 133-25 Weight (weight) .................................................................. 133-25 Weight (portParentWeight) ..................................................... 133-25
Tools menu parameters

134 Manage Tests parameters
134.1
134-1
134-2 134-2 134-2 134-2 134-2 134-2 134-2 134-2 134-3 134-3 134-3 134-3 134-3 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-4 134-5 134-5 134-5 134-5 134-5 134-6 134-6 134-6 134-6 134-6 134-6 134-7 134-7 134-7
Manage Tests parameters........................................................... Add Hop Info (createHopEntries) ............................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Age (seconds) (age) ............................................................... ANCP String (ancpString)......................................................... ATM Interface ID (pvcConnection) .............................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Bypass Routing (bypassRouting)................................................. CCM Interval (ccmInterval) ...................................................... CCM Messages (ccEnable) ........................................................ Clear Alarm on Falling Threshold (clearAlarmOnFalling) ................... Control Plane (sendControl) ..................................................... Count................................................................................ Count (count) ...................................................................... Customer ID ........................................................................ Data Pattern (pattern) ........................................................... Data Size (meptransmitLbmDataTlv)........................................... Description (description)......................................................... Destination Address (destinationIpAddr) ...................................... Destination IP Address (targetIpAddress)...................................... Destination MAC (mepTransmitLbmdestMac) ................................. Destination Path Address (pathDest) ........................................... Destination Type (destinationType) ............................................ DiffServ Field (diffServField) .................................................... Direction (direction) .............................................................. Direction (mepDirectionAccessInterfaces) .................................... Direction (mepDirectionSdpBindings) .......................................... DNS Name (dnsName)............................................................. DNS Server Address (targetIpAddress) ......................................... DNS Server Type (dnsServerType) .............................................. Do Not Fragment (doNotFragment) ............................................ DR IP Address (drIPAddress) ..................................................... Duration (minutes) (timer) ...................................................... Egress Interface Index (egressIfIndex) ......................................... Entity Type (testedEntityType) .................................................
May 2009
lx
Contents
Execute button .................................................................... 134-7 First Run Execution Sequence (firstGroupExecutionSequence) ............ 134-7 Flood (flood) ....................................................................... 134-8 Force OAM (force)................................................................. 134-8 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) ............................................ 134-8 Forwarding Profile (profile) ..................................................... 134-9 From IP Address (originatingNode) ............................................. 134-9 Generate Alarm on Rising Threshold (generateAlarmOnRising)............ 134-9 High-priority Defect (mepHighestPrDefect)................................... 134-9 ID (id) ............................................................................... 134-9 ID (lsp) .............................................................................. 134-9 ID (mepId) .......................................................................... 134-9 Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults) .......................................... 134-10 Include Falling Threshold ....................................................... 134-10 Inhibit Learning (inhibitLearning) ............................................. 134-10 Initial Time to Live............................................................... 134-10 Interval (seconds) ................................................................ 134-10 Interval (seconds) (interval) .................................................... 134-10 IP Address ......................................................................... 134-10 Label TTL (labelTimeout) ....................................................... 134-11 Last Run Execution Sequence (lastGroupExecutionSequence) ............ 134-11 LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix) ........................................................... 134-11 LDP Prefix Length (ldpPrefixLen) .............................................. 134-11 LDP Prefix Length (prefixLen).................................................. 134-11 Lightweight Execution (sla)..................................................... 134-11 Loopback Location (hex) (loopbackLocation) ................................ 134-12 Low-priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect)...................................... 134-12 MA ID (maintenanceAssociationId)............................................. 134-12 MAC Address (macAddress) ..................................................... 134-12 Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) .......................... 134-12 Maximum Concurrent Pings (maxConcurrentPings) ......................... 134-12 Maximum Concurrent Traces (maxConcurrentTraces)...................... 134-13 Maximum Failures ................................................................ 134-13 Maximum Hop..................................................................... 134-13 Maximum Number of Hops (hopCount)........................................ 134-13 Maximum Paths (maxPath) ..................................................... 134-13 Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive) .................................... 134-13 MEP Creation on Access Interface (autoMepCreationAccessInterface) .. 134-13 MEP Creation on all SDP Bindings (autoMepCreationSdpBindings) ........ 134-14 MEP ID (id)......................................................................... 134-14 MHF-Creation (mhfCreation) ................................................... 134-14 MTU End Size (octets) (mtuEndSize) .......................................... 134-14 MTU Start Size (octets) (mtuStartSize) ....................................... 134-14 MTU Step Size (octets) (mtuStepSize) ........................................ 134-15 Multicast Group (groupMcastAddress)......................................... 134-15 Multicast Source (sourceMcastAddress)....................................... 134-15 Name ............................................................................... 134-15 Name (aggregationSchedulerName) ........................................... 134-15 Name (displayedName).......................................................... 134-15 Name (maintAssocName)........................................................ 134-16 Name (siteName)................................................................. 134-16 Name (subscriberName)......................................................... 134-16
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 lxi
Contents
Name (testName) ................................................................ 134-16 Name Format (maintAssocNameType) ........................................ 134-16 NE Persistent (nePersistent).................................................... 134-16 NE Schedulable (neSchedulable)............................................... 134-17 Next Hop Address (nextHopAddr).............................................. 134-17 Next Hop Interface Address (nhAddress) ..................................... 134-17 Next Hop Interface Name (nhIntfName) ...................................... 134-17 Number of Loopback Sent (mepTransmitLbmMessages) ................... 134-17 Number of Test Probes .......................................................... 134-18 Originating MEP(originatingMep)............................................... 134-18 Packet History Size (rows) ...................................................... 134-18 Packet Size ........................................................................ 134-18 Packet Size (octets) (packetSize).............................................. 134-18 Path Change (pathChanged) .................................................... 134-18 Path ID (sdpBindingPathId) ..................................................... 134-18 Path ID (spokeSdpBinding) ...................................................... 134-19 Port ID (sapPortId) ............................................................... 134-19 Positional Data Pattern (positionalPattern).................................. 134-19 Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority).......................... 134-19 Probe Failure ..................................................................... 134-19 Probe Failure Reporting Threshold (probeFailureThreshold).............. 134-19 Probe Failure Threshold......................................................... 134-19 Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows)................................. 134-20 Probe Interval (seconds) ........................................................ 134-20 Probes per Hop (probesPerHop) ............................................... 134-20 Probe Timeout (seconds)........................................................ 134-20 Probes to be Issued (probesToBeIssued)...................................... 134-20 Rapid (rapid) ...................................................................... 134-20 Reply Control (replyControl) ................................................... 134-20 Reply Type (replyType) ......................................................... 134-20 Reply using Control Plane (replyViaControlPlane) .......................... 134-21 Response Address (responseIpAddr) ........................................... 134-21 Retry Counter (retryCount) ..................................................... 134-21 Return LSP (returnLsp) .......................................................... 134-21 Return Tunnel (returnTunnel).................................................. 134-21 SAP or Binding (sapOrBinding).................................................. 134-21 Send using Control Plane (sendControl) ...................................... 134-22 Service ID (serviceId) ............................................................ 134-22 Service Name (serviceName) ................................................... 134-22 Site ID .............................................................................. 134-22 Size (octets) (packetSize)....................................................... 134-22 Source Address (srcAddr) ....................................................... 134-23 Source IP Address (sourceIpAddress) .......................................... 134-23 Source MAC Address (sourceMacAddress)..................................... 134-23 Source Site ID ..................................................................... 134-23 Strategy (generationStrategy).................................................. 134-23 Subscriber Ident String (subscriberIdent)..................................... 134-23 System ID (Loopback Ip Address) (systemAddress) .......................... 134-24 Target IP Address (targetIpAddress)........................................... 134-24 Target MAC (mepTransmitLtmTargetMacAddress) .......................... 134-24 Target MAC Address (targetMacAddress) ..................................... 134-24 Target Type (targetType) ....................................................... 134-24
lxii May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
Test Completion .................................................................. 134-24 Test Failure ....................................................................... 134-24 Test Failure Threshold .......................................................... 134-24 Tested Entity Status Affected by Results (sasValidator) ................... 134-25 Threshold Value (thresholdValue) ............................................. 134-25 Time To Wait (milliseconds) (waitMilliSec) .................................. 134-25 Timeout............................................................................ 134-25 Timeout (seconds) ............................................................... 134-25 Timeout (seconds) ............................................................... 134-26 Timeout (seconds) (timeOut)................................................... 134-26 Timeout (seconds) (timeout) ................................................... 134-26 Time To Live ...................................................................... 134-26 Transport Preference (transportPreference) ................................ 134-26 Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy) ..................................... 134-26 TTL (ltrTtl) ........................................................................ 134-27 Type (type)........................................................................ 134-27 Unlimited Concurrent Pings (unlimitedConcurrentPings) .................. 134-27 Unlimited Concurrent Traces (unlimitedConcurrentTraces)............... 134-27 Update Test Result Status (updateResultStatus) ............................ 134-28 Use Local Tunnel (useLocalTunnel) ........................................... 134-28 Use Remote Tunnel (useRemoteTunnel)...................................... 134-28 VCs Label Time Live (vcLabelTtl)............................................. 134-28 Virtual Router ID (vRtrID) ....................................................... 134-29 VC Type ............................................................................ 134-29 VLAN Drop Enable (mepTransmitLbmVlanDropEnable)..................... 134-29 VLAN ID (vlanId) .................................................................. 134-29 VLAN Priority (mepTransmitLbmVlanPriority) ............................... 134-29 VLAN VC Tag ...................................................................... 134-29
135 Script manager parameters

135.1
135-1
135-2 135-2 135-2 135-2 135-2 135-2 135-2 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-3 135-4 135-4 135-4
Script manager parameters......................................................... Answer .............................................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Comment (comment) ............................................................. Content Type (contentType) .................................................... Continue On Command Failure (continueOnCommandFailure) ............ Default Value ...................................................................... Description (description)......................................................... Label ................................................................................ Name (scriptName) ............................................................... NE Type (neType) ................................................................. NE Version Information (neVersionInformation).............................. Question ............................................................................ Script ID (id) ....................................................................... Script Version (mtosi_version) .................................................. State (state) ....................................................................... Type ................................................................................. Use Latest Version (useLatestVersion) .........................................
May 2009
lxiii
Contents
136 Manage MIB Statistics Policies parameters

136.1
136-1
136-2 136-2 136-2 136-2 136-2 136-2 136-3 136-3
Manage MIB Statistics Policies parameters ....................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Policy ID (id) ....................................................................... Polling Admin State (administrativeState) .................................... Polling Interval (pollingInterval) ................................................ Polling Synchronization Time....................................................
137 File parameters

137.1
137-1
137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-2 137-3 137-3 137-3
File parameters....................................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Distribution Mode ................................................................. Drive (drive)........................................................................ ID .................................................................................... Retention (hours) (retentionInterval) .......................................... Rollover (minutes) (collectionInterval) ........................................ Storage Drive - Backup (backupPath) .......................................... Synchronize ........................................................................
138 Accounting parameters

138.1
138-1
138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-2 138-3 138-3 138-3 138-3 138-3
Accounting parameters.............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Administrative ..................................................................... Collection Interval (m) (collectionInterval) ................................... Default (isDefault) ................................................................ Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Distribution Mode ................................................................. File ID (fileID) ...................................................................... ID (id) ............................................................................... Name (fileName) .................................................................. Synchronize ........................................................................ Type (recordType) ................................................................
139 Server performance statistics parameters

139.1
139-1
139-2 139-2 139-2 139-2 139-2 139-2 139-2 139-3
Server performance statistics parameters ....................................... Accounting Stats Failure Periodic Threshold.................................. Accounting Stats Pending Periodic Threshold................................. Accounting Stats Processed Periodic Threshold .............................. Accounting Stats Total Periodic Threshold .................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Alarm Total Periodic Threshold ................................................. Cleared Periodic Threshold ......................................................
May 2009
lxiv
Contents
Collection Interval (pollingInterval)............................................ Condition Periodic Threshold.................................................... Critical Periodic Threshold ...................................................... Dropped Backpressure Periodic Threshold .................................... Dropped Duplicate Periodic Threshold......................................... Dropped Full Resync Periodic Threshold....................................... Dropped Not Managed Periodic Threshold .................................... Dropped Out Of Sequence Periodic Threshold................................ Incoming Periodic Threshold .................................................... Indeterminate Periodic Threshold .............................................. Info Periodic Threshold........................................................... Major Periodic Threshold ........................................................ Minor Periodic Threshold......................................................... Polling Synchronization Time.................................................... Retention Time (hours)........................................................... SAM-O Events Enabled ............................................................ Scheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold ........................ Scheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold ...................... Scheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold ............................ Scheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold ................................ Scheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold............................. Scheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold .............................. Scheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold................................... Threshold Reporting State ....................................................... Unscheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold ............................. Unscheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold.......................... Unscheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold........................... Used Heap Memory Periodic Threshold ........................................ Used Non Heap Memory Periodic Threshold .................................. Unscheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold ..................... Unscheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold ................... Unscheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold......................... Unscheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold................................ Warning Periodic Threshold .....................................................
139-3 139-3 139-3 139-3 139-3 139-3 139-4 139-4 139-4 139-4 139-4 139-4 139-4 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-5 139-6 139-6 139-6 139-6 139-6 139-6 139-6 139-7 139-7 139-7 139-7 139-7 139-7
140 Statistics Records parameters

140.1
140-1
140-2 140-2 140-2 140-2 140-2 140-2
Statistics Records parameters...................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Statistics Type ..................................................................... Retention Time (hours)........................................................... SAM-O Events Enabled ............................................................ Threshold Reporting State .......................................................
141 Manage Schedules and Scheduled Tasks parameters

141.1
141-1
141-2 141-2 141-2 141-2 141-2 141-2
lxv
Manage Schedules and Scheduled Tasks parameters ........................... Administrative State .............................................................. All Months (runAllMonths)........................................................ All Weekdays (runAllDays) ....................................................... Change Current User To.......................................................... Day (runDay) .......................................................................
May 2009
Contents
Delay Time (seconds) (delayTime) ............................................. 141-2 Description ......................................................................... 141-3 Enable............................................................................... 141-3 End Time (endYear endMonth endDay endHour endMinute) ............... 141-3 Frequency .......................................................................... 141-3 Frequency (frequency) ........................................................... 141-3 Frequency (frequencyType) ..................................................... 141-4 Hour (runHour) .................................................................... 141-5 Hour Alignment Setting (alignmentInHour) ................................... 141-5 Location (scriptHomeDirectory) ................................................ 141-5 Max Log Entries Allowed (maxLogEntries)..................................... 141-5 Max Time Log Entries Kept (seconds) (maxTimeLogEntries) ............... 141-5 Max Time Script Run (seconds) (maxTimeScriptRun) ........................ 141-5 Minute (runMinute) ............................................................... 141-6 Minute Alignment Setting (alignmentInMinute)............................... 141-6 Month (runMonth) ................................................................. 141-6 Name (displayedName)........................................................... 141-6 Ongoing (onGoing) ................................................................ 141-6 Repeated Runs (repeatedRuns) ................................................. 141-6 Result Location (resultHomeDirectory) ........................................ 141-7 Run Every ........................................................................... 141-7 Run Every (runDay) ............................................................... 141-7 Run Every (runMonth) ............................................................ 141-8 Run Every (runWeek) ............................................................. 141-8 Run Every Day (runEveryDay).................................................... 141-8 Run Every Days .................................................................... 141-9 Run Every Days (runEveryDays) ................................................. 141-9 Run Every Hour (runEveryHour) ................................................. 141-9 Run Every Hours ................................................................... 141-9 Run Every Hours (runEveryHours)............................................... 141-9 Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute) ........................................... 141-10 Run Every Minutes................................................................ 141-10 Run Every Minutes (runEveryMinutes)......................................... 141-10 Run Every Month (runEveryMonth)............................................. 141-10 Run Every Months ................................................................ 141-10 Run Every Months (runEveryMonths) .......................................... 141-11 Run Every Second (runEverySecond) .......................................... 141-11 Run Every Seconds ............................................................... 141-11 Run Every Seconds (runEverySeconds) ........................................ 141-11 Run Every Week (runEveryWeek) .............................................. 141-11 Run Every Weeks (runWeek).................................................... 141-12 Scheduled Task Description (description) .................................... 141-12 Scheduled Task Name (displayedName) ...................................... 141-12 Time Alignment Setting ......................................................... 141-12 User End Time (endDate) ....................................................... 141-12 User Start Time (startDate) .................................................... 141-12
lxvi
May 2009
Contents
142 Analyze Profile Assignment parameters

142.1
142-1
142-2 142-2 142-2 142-2
Analyze Profile Assignment parameters .......................................... SLA Profile String.................................................................. Subscriber Identification String ................................................. Subscriber Profile String .........................................................
143 Time Range Entry Assignment parameters

143.1
143-1
143-2 143-2 143-2 143-2 143-2 143-3
Time Range Entry Assignment parameters ....................................... End Date ............................................................................ Search by TIme Of Day Entry Type ............................................. Start Date .......................................................................... Time Of Day Entry Policy Type.................................................. Time Range Entry Container Type ..............................................
144 Copy/Move SAPs menu parameters

144.1
144-1
144-2 144-2 144-2 144-2 144-2 144-2 144-3 144-3 144-3 144-3 144-3
Copy/Move SAPs menu parameters................................................ Action Type (isMoving) ........................................................... Continue on individual Failure .................................................. Current Mode (targetType) ...................................................... Inner Encap Value End............................................................ Inner Encap Value Offset (innerEncapShiftOffset) ........................... Inner Encap Value Start .......................................................... Outer Encap Value End ........................................................... Outer Encap Value Offset (outerEncapShiftOffset) .......................... Outer Encap Value Start ......................................................... Service Type .......................................................................
145 Common Tools menu parameters

145.1
145-1
145-2 145-2 145-2 145-2 145-2 145-2 145-2 145-3 145-3 145-4 145-4 145-4 145-4 145-4 145-5 145-5 145-5 145-5 145-6 145-6 145-6
lxvii
Common Tools menu parameters.................................................. Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... Auto-Assign ID (id) ................................................................ Description (description)......................................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ Distribution Mode (distributionMode) .......................................... Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) ............................................ ID (id) ............................................................................... Forwarding Profile (profile) ..................................................... ID (logid)............................................................................ Initial Time to Live (initialTimeToLive)........................................ Maximum Failures (maxFailures) ............................................... Number of Test Probes (packetsToSend) ...................................... Path Change (pathChanged) ..................................................... Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime) ............................. Probe Failure Threshold (packetFailureThreshold) .......................... Probe Failure (probeFailure) .................................................... Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows).................................. Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval)..................................... Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout) ...................................
May 2009
Contents
Retention Time (hours)........................................................... SAM-O Events Enabled ............................................................ Site ID (siteID) ..................................................................... Synchronize (syncTo) ............................................................. Target Type (testTargetType)................................................... Test Completion (trapGenerationPolicy) ...................................... Test Failure (trapGenerationPolicy)............................................ Test Failure Threshold (testFailureThreshold) ............................... Threshold Reporting State (thresholdReportingState) ...................... Time To Live (timeToLive).......................................................
145-6 145-7 145-7 145-7 145-7 145-8 145-8 145-8 145-9 145-9
Administration menu parameters

146 Database parameters
146.1
146-1
146-2 146-2 146-2 146-2 146-2 146-2 146-2 146-3 146-3 146-3 146-3 146-3 146-3 146-4 146-4 146-4
Database parameters ................................................................ Accounting Statistic Data Retention Period (Days) (accStatsDataPartInt) ....................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Backup Interval (backupFrequency)............................................ Backup Type (scheduledBackupType).......................................... Description ......................................................................... Interval Unit (backupFrequencyUnit) .......................................... Manual Backup Directory (manualBackupDest) ............................... Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) (maxSize)...................................... Number of Archives (numArchives)............................................. Number to Keep (backupNumberOfSets) ...................................... Policy ID (policyId) ................................................................ Purge Mode (purgeMode)......................................................... Scheduled Backup Directory (schedBackupDest) ............................. Schedule Enabled (isScheduleEnabled) ........................................ Start Time (backupStartTime) ..................................................
147 Alarm Settings parameters

147.1
147-1
147-2 147-2 147-2 147-2 147-2 147-2 147-3 147-3 147-3 147-4 147-4 147-4 147-4
Alarm Settings parameters ......................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Alarm deletion (isAlarmDeletionEnabled) ..................................... Attribute Name (attributeName) ............................................... auto (implicitDeletionRule)...................................................... automatic severity alterations (isSeverityAutoAlterable) .................. Automatically Assigned Urgency (autoAssignedUrgency) ................... clearing (if self-clearing alarm) (isSeverityManualClearingEnabled) ...... De-escalation ...................................................................... De-escalation (deEscalationEnabled) .......................................... de-escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityDeEscalationEnabled) .......................................... Description ......................................................................... Detailed Text ......................................................................
May 2009
lxviii
Contents
Domain (domain) .................................................................. 147-4 Escalation .......................................................................... 147-4 Escalation (escalationEnabled).................................................. 147-5 escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityEscalationEnabled).... 147-5 Frequency (frequencyThreshold) ............................................... 147-5 Group Tag (groupTag) ............................................................ 147-5 History Enabled (historyEnabled) ............................................... 147-5 implicit severity demotion (isSeverityImplicitDemotionEnabled) ......... 147-6 implicit severity promotion (isSeverityImplicitPromotionEnabled) ....... 147-6 Initial Severity Assignment (autoAssignedSeverity) .......................... 147-6 Interval (collectionInterval) ..................................................... 147-6 Log On Change (logOnChange) .................................................. 147-7 Log On Deletion (logOnDeletion) ............................................... 147-7 manual (manualDeletionRule)................................................... 147-7 manual severity alterations (isSeverityManuallyAlterable) ................. 147-7 Max Log Size (records) (maxLogSize)........................................... 147-7 Object Type ........................................................................ 147-8 Order (order) ...................................................................... 147-8 Overwrite existing (overwrite) .................................................. 147-8 Reason for change................................................................. 147-8 Severity (associatedSeverity).................................................... 147-8 Severity Alterable (isSeverityAlterable) ....................................... 147-9 severity demotion (isSeverityManualDemotionEnabled) .................... 147-9 severity promotion (isSeverityManualPromotionEnabled) ................. 147-10 Squelch (isSquelched) ........................................................... 147-10
148 Discovery Manager parameters

148.1
148-1
148-2 148-2 148-2 148-2 148-2 148-2 148-2 148-2 148-3 148-3 148-3 148-3
Discovery Manager parameters .................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... ID (id) ............................................................................... Ignore Timestamps ................................................................ IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ Mask Bits (maskBits) .............................................................. OLC State (olcState) .............................................................. Read Policy ID (readMediationPolicyId)........................................ Usage (usage) ...................................................................... Write Policy ID (writeMediationPolicyId) ......................................
149 Mediation parameters

149.1
149-1
149-2 149-2 149-2 149-2 149-2 149-2 149-2 149-3 149-3
lxix
Mediation parameters ............................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Connect Timeout (sec) (ftpReadTimeout)..................................... Communication Protocol (cliCommunicationProtocol) ...................... Community String (community) ................................................. Description (description)......................................................... Discovery Rule Scan Interval (topologyScanInterval) ........................ Displayed Name (displayedName) ..............................................
May 2009
Contents
File Transfer Type (fileTransferType).......................................... Network Element Type (neType) ............................................... Number of Varbind per PDU (numberOfVarPerPdu) ......................... Ping Command Timeout (seconds) (maxOSCommandExecutionTimeSeconds) ............................... Ping Interval (minutes) (pingScheduleMinutes)............................... Ping Interval (seconds) (pingScheduleSeconds) .............................. Policy ID (id) ....................................................................... Polling Admin State (administrativeState) .................................... Polling Interval (pollingInterval) ................................................ Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime) ............................. Read Timeout (sec) (ftpReadTimeout)......................................... Retry (snmpRetry)................................................................. Schedule Enabled (pingScheduleEnabled) ..................................... Security Model (SnmpSecurityModel) .......................................... SSH2 Server Port (sshCommunicationPort) .................................... Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) (trapLossResyncToleranceTime) .......................................... Stand-down Duration Multiplier (trapLossStandDownPeriod) .............. Timeout (milliseconds) (snmpTimeout)........................................ User Name (userName) ........................................................... User Password (cliPassword) ....................................................
149-3 149-3 149-4 149-4 149-4 149-4 149-4 149-4 149-5 149-5 149-5 149-5 149-5 149-6 149-6 149-6 149-7 149-7 149-7 149-8
150 NE Maintenance parameters

150.1
150-1
150-2 150-2 150-2 150-2 150-3 150-3 150-4 150-4 150-4 150-5 150-5 150-5 150-6 150-6 150-6 150-6 150-6 150-7 150-7 150-7 150-7 150-7 150-7 150-8 150-8 150-8 150-8
NE Maintenance parameters........................................................ Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer (isAutoActivate) ............. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Auto-Purge Scheme (purgeMode) ............................................... Auto-Reboot After Successful Upgrade (isAutoReboot) ..................... Auto Backup Scheme (autoBackupScheme) ................................... Auto Backup Threshold (operations) (autoBackupSchemeTreshold) ...... Auto-Reboot After Successful Activation (isAutoReboot) ................... Auto Save Scheme (autoSaveConfigScheme).................................. Auto Save Threshold (autoSaveConfigThreshold) ............................ Boot Option File Mode (bootOptionFileBackupMode)........................ CFlash Backup Root Path (cflashBackupRoot) ................................ CFlash Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot) ................................... CLI Config File Mode (cliConfigFileBackupMode) ............................. CLI Config Save Details (cliConfigSaveDetails)................................ CLI Debug Save Config File Mode (debugConfigFileBackupMode).......... Deployment Mode (DeploymentMode) ......................................... Enable Backup (enableBackup) ................................................. File Compression (compressionMode) .......................................... Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot) ............................................ In Service Software Upgrade (isIssu) ........................................... Maximum Backup Age (days) (maxBackupAge) ............................... Name ................................................................................ Number of Backups (numBackupsToKeep) .................................... Policy ID (policyId) ................................................................ Policy Type (policyType) ......................................................... Retry Interval (retryFrequency).................................................
May 2009
lxx
Contents
Retry Scheme (retryScheme) .................................................... 150-8 Retry Threshold (retryThreshold)............................................... 150-9 Save Certified Directory (saveCertifyDir) ..................................... 150-9 Save Details (saveConfigDetails) ................................................ 150-9 Save Network Directory (saveNetworkDir) .................................... 150-9 Scheduled Backup Interval (scheduledBackupFrequency) ................. 150-10 Scheduled Backup Scheme (scheduledBackupScheme)..................... 150-10 Scheduled Backup Sync Time (scheduledBackupSyncTime) ............... 150-10 Scheduled Backup Threshold (operations) (scheduledBackupTreshold)............................................... 150-11 Scheduled Save Interval (scheduledSaveConfigFrequency)................ 150-11 Scheduled Save Scheme (scheduledSaveConfigScheme) ................... 150-11 Upgrade File Type (upgradeBootFiles) ........................................ 150-11
151 5620 SAM User Security parameters

151.1
151-1
151-2 151-2 151-2 151-2 151-2 151-2 151-2 151-3 151-3 151-3 151-3 151-3 151-3 151-3 151-4 151-4 151-4 151-4 151-4 151-4 151-5 151-5 151-5 151-5 151-6 151-6 151-6 151-6 151-6 151-6 151-6 151-7 151-7 151-7 151-7
lxxi
5620 SAM User Security parameters............................................... Account Expiry (accountExpiryEnabled) ....................................... Account Expiry (days) (accountValidityPeriod) ............................... Administrative State .............................................................. Advance Password Expiry Notification (days) (advancePasswdExpirNotification)........................................ Apply Local Authentication Only (localAuthenticationOnly) ............... Attempts before e-mail (numAuthFailuresBeforeNotification) ............ Attempts before lockout (numAuthFailuresBeforeLockout) ................ Client Timeout (minutes) (guiTimeoutMinutes) .............................. Confirm Password ................................................................. Description ......................................................................... E-mail Address (fromEmailAddress) ............................................ E-mail Subject (authFailureNotificationSubject)............................. E-mail Subject (suspendedNotificationSubject) .............................. E-mail text (authFailureNotificationText)..................................... E-mail text (suspendedNotificationText) ...................................... E-mail User Name (mailUserId) ................................................. E-mail User Password (mailUserPasswd)....................................... Enable IP Address validation (enableClientIpAddressValidation) .......... Enabled (statementEnabled) .................................................... Reserve Administrator Login (reserveAdminEnabled) ....................... First Time Login Password Change ............................................. Max Log Records (maxLogRecords) ............................................. Override Global Timeout (guiTimeoutOverride) ............................. Password Expiry (passwordExpiryEnabled) .................................... Password Expiry (days) (passwordValidityPeriod) ............................ Profile ID (scopeOfCommandProfileId) ........................................ Profile ID (spanOfControlProfileID)............................................. Profile Name (scopeOfCommandProfileName) ............................... Profile Name (spanOfControlProfileName).................................... Retention Time (hours)........................................................... Role Name (roleName) ........................................................... SAM-O Events Enabled ............................................................ Scope of Command Profile ID ................................................... Server Name (outGoingServerMail) .............................................
May 2009
Contents
Span ID (spanId) ................................................................... Span Name (spanName) .......................................................... Span Description (spanDescription) ............................................ Span of Control Profile ID ........................................................ Statement (statement) ........................................................... Test Message (testEmailMessage)............................................... Threshold Reporting State ....................................................... User Group (defaultSystemGroupAttributePtr) ............................... User Group (groupName)......................................................... User Group (groupName)......................................................... User Group State (userGroupPointer) .......................................... User Name (userName) ........................................................... User Password (password) ....................................................... User State (state) ................................................................. Valid Client IP address (validClientIpAddress) ................................
151-7 151-7 151-7 151-7 151-7 151-8 151-8 151-8 151-8 151-8 151-9 151-9 151-9 151-9 151-9
152 Change Password parameters

152.1
152-1
152-2 152-2 152-2 152-2
Change Password parameters ...................................................... Confirm Password ................................................................. New Password (password) ....................................................... Old Password (password).........................................................
153 TCP Key Chains parameters

153.1
153-1
153-2 153-2 153-2 153-2 153-2 153-2 153-2 153-2 153-3 153-3 153-3 153-3 153-4 153-4
TCP Key Chains parameters ........................................................ Admin State (adminState) ....................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Begin Time (beginTime).......................................................... Displayed Name (keyChainName)............................................... Description (chainDescription) .................................................. End Time (endTime) .............................................................. Key (sharedSecret) ................................................................ Key Direction (keyDirection) .................................................... Key ID (keyId) ...................................................................... Receive Option (receiveTcpOptionNumber) .................................. Secret Key Algorithm (algorithm)............................................... Send Option (sendTcpOptionNumber) ......................................... Tolerance (seconds) (tolerance) ................................................
154 5620 SAM RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication parameters

154.1
154-1
154-2 154-2 154-2 154-2 154-2 154-2 154-2 154-3 154-3
5620 SAM RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication parameters ................. Address ............................................................................. Administrative State .............................................................. Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) .......................................... Authentication Order 2 (authOrder2) .......................................... Authentication Order 3 (authOrder3) .......................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Exit On Reject .....................................................................
May 2009
lxxii
Contents
Port.................................................................................. Retry Attempts .................................................................... Secret ............................................................................... Single Connection ................................................................. Timeout (seconds) ................................................................
154-3 154-3 154-3 154-3 154-3
155 NE Management Access Filters parameters

155.1
155-1
155-2 155-2 155-2 155-2 155-2 155-2 155-3 155-3 155-3 155-3 155-3 155-3 155-3 155-4 155-4 155-4 155-4 155-4
NE Management Access Filters parameters ...................................... Action (action)..................................................................... Administrative Status............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Configuration Mode ............................................................... Default Filter Action (defaultAction) .......................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination Port (destinationPort) ............................................. Destination Port Mask (destinationPortMask) ................................. Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... ID .................................................................................... Protocol............................................................................. Source IP............................................................................ Source IP Mask ..................................................................... Source Port ID (sourcePortName)............................................... Source Port Type (portType) .................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................
156 NE User Profiles parameters

156.1
156-1
156-2 156-2 156-2 156-2 156-2 156-3 156-3 156-3 156-3 156-3 156-3 156-4
NE User Profiles parameters........................................................ Action (action)..................................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Configuration Mode ............................................................... Default Profile Action (defaultAction) ......................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... ID .................................................................................... LI Profile (liProfile) ............................................................... Match String (matchString) ...................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................
157 NE User Configuration parameters

157.1
157-1
157-2 157-2 157-2 157-2 157-3 157-3 157-3 157-3
lxxiii
NE User Configuration parameters ................................................ Access (access) .................................................................... Authentication Protocol (snmpAuthProtocol)................................. Configuration Mode ............................................................... Confirm New Auth Password (snmpAuthPassword2) ......................... Confirm New Priv Password (snmpPrivPassword2) ........................... Confirm Password (password2).................................................. Console Cannot Change Password (consoleCannotChangePassword)......
May 2009
Contents
Console Login Exec File (consoleLoginExecFile).............................. Console New Password At Login (consoleNewPasswordAtLogin) ........... Description ......................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Home Directory (homeDirectory) ............................................... New Authentication Password (snmpAuthPassword)......................... New Privacy Password (snmpPrivPassword) ................................... Password (password).............................................................. Privacy Protocol (snmpPrivProtocol) ........................................... Restrict to Home (isRestrictedToHome) ....................................... Synchronize ........................................................................ User Name (displayedName) ....................................................
157-3 157-3 157-3 157-3 157-4 157-4 157-4 157-4 157-4 157-4 157-4 157-5
158 NE Password Policy parameters

158.1
158-1
158-2 158-2 158-2 158-2 158-2 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-3 158-4 158-4 158-4 158-4 158-4 158-4 158-4 158-5 158-5 158-5
NE Password Policy parameters.................................................... Admin Password (adminPassword).............................................. Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) .......................................... Authentication Order 2 (authOrder2) .......................................... Authentication Order 3 (authOrder3) .......................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Complexity (complexity) ......................................................... Configuration Mode ............................................................... Confirm Password ................................................................. Days Before Expiration (aging) .................................................. Description ......................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Exit on Reject...................................................................... Health Check (isPasswordHealthCheck) ....................................... Health Check Interval (passwordHealthCheckInterval) ..................... ID .................................................................................... Lockout Time (minutes) (lockoutMinutes)..................................... Maximum Attempts (attemptsCount) .......................................... Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) (attemptsMinutes)..................... Minimum Length (minLength) ................................................... Name (name) ...................................................................... Password Never Expires (neverExpires)........................................ Synchronize ........................................................................
159 NE RADIUS Authentication parameters

159.1
159-1
159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2 159-2
NE RADIUS Authentication parameters ........................................... Address ............................................................................. Administrative State .............................................................. Configuration Mode ............................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Enable Accounting ................................................................ Enable Authorization ............................................................. ID .................................................................................... Port..................................................................................
May 2009
lxxiv
Contents
Retry Attempts .................................................................... Secret ............................................................................... Source Address .................................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................ Timeout (seconds) ................................................................
159-3 159-3 159-3 159-3 159-3
160 NE TACACS+ Authentication parameters

160.1
160-1
160-2 160-2 160-2 160-2 160-2 160-2 160-2 160-2 160-3 160-3 160-3 160-3 160-3 160-3 160-3 160-3
NE TACACS+ Authentication parameters ......................................... Accounting Type (accountingType)............................................. Address ............................................................................. Administrative State .............................................................. Configuration Mode ............................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... Distribute ........................................................................... Enable Accounting ................................................................ Enable Authorization ............................................................. ID .................................................................................... Secret ............................................................................... Single Connection ................................................................. Source Address .................................................................... Synchronize ........................................................................ Timeout (seconds) ................................................................
161 NE AOS Security Authentication parameters

161.1
161-1
161-2 161-2 161-2 161-2 161-2 161-2 161-2
NE AOS Security Authentication parameters..................................... Account Port (aaasRadAcctPort) ................................................ Authentication Port (aaasRadAuthPort) ....................................... Port (aaasTacacsPort) ............................................................ Retries (aaasRetries) ............................................................. Secret (aaasRadKey) .............................................................. Secret (aaasTacacsKey) ..........................................................
162 NE System Security parameters

162.1
162-1
162-2 162-2 162-2 162-2 162-2 162-2 162-2 162-3 162-3 162-3 162-3
NE System Security parameters.................................................... Access (templateAccess) ......................................................... Console Login Exec File (templateConsoleLoginExecFile) .................. CPM-Per-Peer-Queuing (cpmPerPeerQueuing)................................ Home Directory (templateHomeDirectory) ................................... Link Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtLinkRateLimit) ............................... Port Overall Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtPortOverallRateLimit) ............. Protection Administrative State (cpmProtDropUncfgdProtocolMsg) ...... Restricted to Home Directory (templateRestrictedToHomeDirectory) ... Servers Enabled (enableServers)................................................ SSH (sshServerVersion) ...........................................................
May 2009
lxxv
Contents
163 Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters

163.1
163-1
163-2 163-2 163-2 163-2 163-2 163-2 163-2 163-3 163-3 163-3 163-3 163-3 163-3 163-4 163-4 163-4 163-4 163-5 163-5 163-5 163-5 163-5
Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters ........................ Accept CoA (acceptAuthenticateChange) ..................................... Access Algorithm (accessAlgorithm)............................................ Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Displayed Name ................................................................... ID .................................................................................... Password (password).............................................................. Port.................................................................................. Port Prefix String (nasPortPrefixString)........................................ Port Prefix Type (nasPortPrefixType) .......................................... Port Suffix Type (nasPortSuffixType) .......................................... PPPoE Access Method (pppoeAccessMethod) ................................. RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes)........................................... Re-Authenticate when DHCP lease expired (reAuthenticate) .............. Retry Attempts .................................................................... Router Instance (routerType) ................................................... Secret Key .......................................................................... Server IP Address .................................................................. Source Address (sourceAddress) ................................................ Timeout (seconds) ................................................................ User Name Format (userNameFormat).........................................
164 NE DoS Protection parameters

164.1
164-1
164-2 164-2 164-2 164-2 164-2 164-2 164-2
NE DoS Protection parameters ..................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Description ......................................................................... Overall Rate Limit (pps) (overallRateLimit)................................... Packet Rate Limit (pps) (packetRateLimit) ................................... Policy ID (id) ....................................................................... Receive Notification (polAlarm) ................................................
165 NE CPM Filter parameters

165.1
165-1
165-2 165-2 165-2 165-2 165-2 165-2 165-3 165-3 165-3 165-3 165-3 165-3 165-4 165-4 165-4 165-4
NE CPM Filter parameters .......................................................... Action (action)..................................................................... Administrative Status............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... CIR (kb/s) (cir)..................................................................... Committed Burst Size (KB) (committedBurstSize) ........................... Configuration Mode ............................................................... CFM Opcode (cfmOpCodeOper) ................................................. CFM Val 1 (cfmOpCodeValue1) .................................................. CFM Val 2 (cfmOpCodeValue2) .................................................. Default Filter Action (defaultAction) .......................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination IP (destinationIpAddress).......................................... Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) .................................... Destination Mask .................................................................. Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ................................
May 2009
lxxvi
Contents
Destination Mask (destinationPortMask) ....................................... 165-4 Destination Port (destinationPort) ............................................. 165-4 Displayed Name ................................................................... 165-4 Dot1p (dot1pValue) ............................................................... 165-5 Dot1p Mask (dot1pMask) ......................................................... 165-5 DSCP (dscp) ........................................................................ 165-5 DSAP (dsap) ........................................................................ 165-6 DSAP Mask (dsapMask) ............................................................ 165-6 Dst Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) ........................................ 165-6 Entry ID (id) ........................................................................ 165-6 Ether Type (ethernetType) ...................................................... 165-6 Flow Label (flowLabel) ........................................................... 165-6 Fragment (fragment) ............................................................. 165-7 Frame Type (frameType) ........................................................ 165-7 ICMP Code (icmpCode) ........................................................... 165-7 ICMP Type (icmpType)............................................................ 165-7 ID (id) ............................................................................... 165-8 IP Option (ipOptionValue) ....................................................... 165-8 IP Option Mask (ipOptionMask) .................................................. 165-9 IPv6 Administrative Status (ipv6AdminstrativeStatus)....................... 165-9 MAX .................................................................................. 165-9 Maximum Burst Size (KB) (maximumBurstSize) ............................... 165-9 Multiple Option (multipleOption) ............................................... 165-9 Next Header....................................................................... 165-10 Option Present (optionPresent) ................................................ 165-10 PIR (kb/s) (pir).................................................................... 165-10 Protocol............................................................................ 165-10 Queue ID (id)...................................................................... 165-10 Routing Instance (routingInstanceFor) ........................................ 165-11 Service Id .......................................................................... 165-11 SNAP OUI (snapOui) .............................................................. 165-11 SNAP PID (snapPid)............................................................... 165-11 Source IP........................................................................... 165-11 Source IP Mask .................................................................... 165-11 Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) ............................................... 165-12 Source Mask ....................................................................... 165-12 Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)........................................... 165-12 Source Mask (sourcePortMask) ................................................. 165-12 Source Port (sourcePort) ........................................................ 165-12 Src Mask (sourceMacAddressMask)............................................. 165-12 SSAP (ssap) ........................................................................ 165-13 SSAP Mask (ssapMask)............................................................ 165-13 TCP Ack (tcpAck) ................................................................. 165-13 TCP Syn (tcpSyn) ................................................................. 165-13
166 Generic NE Profiles parameters

166.1
166-1
166-2 166-2 166-2 166-2 166-2
lxxvii
Generic NE Profiles parameters.................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Command Prompt (CommandPrompt) ......................................... Description ......................................................................... Default Element Manager URL (defaultEmUrl) ...............................
May 2009
Contents
Disable Paging Command (disablePagingCommand) ......................... Enable Login Command (writeAccessLoginCommand)....................... Enable Login Prompt (enablingWriteAccessLoginPrompt) .................. Enable Second Login (twoStepsLogin).......................................... Error Indicator (errorIndicator) ................................................. Execution Command Timeout (seconds) (freezeDetectTime) .............. Full Node Resync on Max Trap Gap (fullNodeResyncOnMaxTrapGap) ..... Generic NE Type (productName) ............................................... ID .................................................................................... Idle Session Warning Message (idleSessionWarningMsg) ..................... Login Prompt Optional (isLoginPromptOptional) ............................. Login Timeout (seconds) (loginTimeout) ...................................... Max Number Of Sessions (maxNumSessions) .................................. Maximum PDU Size (maxPduSize)............................................... Minimum Time Interval Between Full Node Resyncs (minTimeIntervalBetweenFullNodeResyncs) ............................ Maximum Trap Gap (maxTrapGap) ............................................. Pre Login Prompt (preLoginPrompt) ........................................... Read Login Prompt (readLoginPrompt) ........................................ Read Password Prompt (readPasswordPrompt)............................... Reset Command (resetCommand) .............................................. Supports Trap Restoration Logs (supportsTrapRestorationLogs) ........... Supports Trap Sequence Number (supportsTrapSeqNumber) .............. Sys Object ID (sysObjectId) ...................................................... Telnet Port (telnetPort).......................................................... Trap Destination Re-enable Time Interval (trapDestinationReenableTimeInterval) ................................. Write Login Prompt (writeLoginPrompt) ...................................... Write Password Prompt (writePasswordPrompt) .............................
166-2 166-2 166-3 166-3 166-3 166-3 166-3 166-3 166-4 166-4 166-4 166-4 166-4 166-4 166-4 166-5 166-5 166-5 166-5 166-5 166-6 166-6 166-6 166-6 166-6 166-6 166-7
167 Common Administration menu parameters

167.1
167-1
167-2 167-2 167-2 167-2 167-2 167-2 167-2 167-3 167-3 167-3 167-3 167-3 167-4 167-4 167-4 167-4 167-5 167-5 167-5 167-5
Common Administration menu parameters ...................................... Accounting Port (accountingPort) .............................................. Address (address) ................................................................. Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... Authentication Port (port) ....................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Configuration Mode (configurationMode)...................................... Confirm Password ................................................................. Description (description)......................................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. Distribute (distribute) ............................................................ Distribution Mode (distributionMode) .......................................... Enable Accounting (isAccountingEnabled)..................................... Enable Authorization (isAuthorizationEnabled) .............................. Enable User Template (templateUsedByTacplus) ............................ Exit On Reject (authExitOnReject) ............................................. ID (id) ............................................................................... Ip Address (aaasIpAddress) ...................................................... Ip Address 2 (aaasIpAddress2) ................................................... Password (password)..............................................................
May 2009
lxxviii
Contents
Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime) ............................. Port (port) .......................................................................... Protocol (protocol)................................................................ Protocol Name (aaasProtocol) .................................................. Retry Attempts (retryAttempts) ................................................ SAM-O Events Enabled ............................................................ Secret Name (secret) ............................................................. Single Connection (singleConnection).......................................... Source Address (sourceAddress) ................................................ Source IP (sourceIpAddress) ..................................................... Source IP Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)......................................... Synchronize (syncTo) ............................................................. Time Out (aaasTimeOut) ......................................................... Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds) ..........................................
167-5 167-5 167-5 167-7 167-7 167-7 167-7 167-7 167-7 167-8 167-8 167-8 167-8 167-8
Equipment navigation tree parameters

168.1
168-1
168-2 168-2 168-2 168-2 168-2 168-2 168-2 168-3 168-3
Network parameters ................................................................. Description (groupDescription).................................................. Enabled (enabled)................................................................. Ethertype (ethertypeValue) ..................................................... Group Name (groupName) ....................................................... Jumbo Frame (jumboFrame) .................................................... Mode ................................................................................ Query Response Time (seconds) (mvrQueryTime)............................ Ring Group Type (groupMode)...................................................
169 Router parameters

169.1
169-1
169-2 169-2 169-2 169-2 169-2 169-3 169-3 169-3 169-3 169-3 169-4 169-4 169-4 169-4 169-5 169-5 169-5 169-5
lxxix
Router parameters ................................................................... Active Management IP (activeManagementIp) ................................ Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... ATM OAM Loopback Location ID (atmOamLoopbackLocationID) ........... ATM OAM Loopback Period (atmOamLoopbackPeriod) ...................... Auto Revert to Preferred (isMgmtIpAutoRevertive).......................... Description ......................................................................... Ignore Timestamps ................................................................ L4 Load Balancing (l4LoadBalancing) .......................................... LACP System Priority (sysLacpSystemPriority)................................ LI Local Save Allowed (liLocalSaveAdmin)..................................... Location (location)................................................................ Management IP Selection (mgmtIpRule) ....................................... Number of Tries for Down State (atmOamRetryDown) ...................... Number of Tries for Up State (atmOamRetryUp)............................. Persistent SNMP Indices (persistentSnmpIndices) ............................ Resync .............................................................................. Redundant Synchronization Mode (redundantSynchronizationMode) .....
May 2009
Contents
Resource Group ID ................................................................ Router ID (routerId)............................................................... Scheduled Polling (resyncState) ................................................ Separate LI Administration (liSeparateAdmin)................................ SSH Session ......................................................................... Slot .................................................................................. System ID (Loopback Ip Address) (systemAddress) ........................... Telnet Session ..................................................................... View Shelf .......................................................................... VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode).................
169-5 169-6 169-6 169-6 169-6 169-7 169-7 169-7 169-7 169-7
170 LAG parameters

170.1
170-1
170-2 170-2 170-2 170-2 170-2 170-3 170-3 170-3 170-3 170-3 170-4 170-4 170-4 170-4 170-4 170-4 170-5 170-5 170-5 170-5 170-6 170-6 170-6 170-7 170-7 170-7 170-7 170-8
LAG parameters ...................................................................... Active Sub-Group Selection Criteria (lacpSelCrit) ........................... Actor Administration Key (actorAdminKey) ................................... Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... Auto-Generate ..................................................................... Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Class................................................................................. Configured Address ............................................................... Description ......................................................................... Dynamic Cost (dynamicCosting)................................................. Encap Type ......................................................................... Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) (lacpHoldTimeDown) ..................... LACP Mode (lacpMode) ........................................................... LACP System Priority (sysLacpSystemPriority)................................ LACP Transmit Interval (lacpTransmitInterval)............................... LACP Transmit Standby (lacpXmitStdby) ...................................... LAG ID (lagId) ...................................................................... Mode ................................................................................ Port Threshold (portThreshold) ................................................. Port Threshold Action (portThresholdAction)................................. Port Type (lagPortType) ......................................................... Priority (priority) .................................................................. QoS Adaptation (adaptQoS)...................................................... Resync .............................................................................. Show Only Compatible Ports .................................................... Slave to Partner (lacpSelCritSlaveToPartner)................................. Sub-Group ID (subGroupId) ...................................................... View the newly created interface ..............................................
171 CCAG parameters

171.1
171-1
171-2 171-2 171-2 171-2 171-2 171-2 171-2 171-2
CCAG parameters .................................................................... Access Adapt QoS (accessAdaptQos) ........................................... Administrative State .............................................................. CCAG ID (ccagId) .................................................................. CCA Rate (kbps) (ccaRate)....................................................... CCA Rate Enabled (ccaRateEnabled) ........................................... CC ID (ccId)......................................................................... Description .........................................................................
May 2009
lxxx
Contents
Egress Reserved CBS (%).......................................................... Egress Slope Policy ................................................................ Ingress Reserved CBS (%) ......................................................... Ingress Slope Policy ............................................................... MTU (octets) (mtuValue)......................................................... Path Rate (Kb/s) (pathRate)..................................................... Path Rate Enabled (pathRateEnabled) ......................................... Path Rate Option (pathRateOption) ............................................ Path Weight (%) (pathWeight)...................................................
171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3 171-3
172 ISA-AA Group parameters

172.1
172-1
172-2 172-2 172-2 172-2 172-2 172-2 172-2 172-3 172-3 172-3
ISA-AA Group parameters ........................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Description ......................................................................... Egress From-Subscriber Reserved CBS % (egressFromSubReservedCbs).............................................. Egress To-Subscriber Reserved % (egressToSubReservedCbs) .............. Forwarding Class Name (fcName) .............................................. Group Number (groupNumber) .................................................. Ingress To-Subscriber Reserved (ingressReservedCbs)....................... ISA-AA MDA Role (aaMdaRole) ................................................... Operation Upon Failure (failToMode) ..........................................
173 IPSEC Group parameters

173.1
173-1
173-2 173-2 173-2 173-2
IPSEC Group parameters ............................................................ Administrative State .............................................................. Description ......................................................................... Group Number (groupNumber) ..................................................
174 Bundles parameters

174.1
174-1
174-2 174-2 174-2 174-2 174-2 174-2 174-3 174-3 174-3 174-3 174-3 174-4 174-4 174-4 174-4 174-4 174-4 174-4 174-4
lxxxi
Bundles parameters.................................................................. Administrative State .............................................................. ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) ...................... ATM Minimum VPI Value (atmInterfaceMinimumVPIValue) ................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... Bundle ID (bundleId) .............................................................. Bundle MRRU (bytes) (bundleMRUU) ........................................... Bundle Number (bundleNumber) ............................................... Bundle Type (bundleType)....................................................... Class Count (mlpppClassCount) ................................................. Clock Source (channelClockSource) ............................................ Configured MAC.................................................................... Daughter Card CLI Name (daughterCardDisplayedName) ................... Description ......................................................................... Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression ..................... Encap Type ......................................................................... End Point Class ID (mlpppEndPointIdClass).................................... End Point ID (mlpppEndPointId) ................................................ First Network Element (apsBundleLowNodeDn) ..............................
May 2009
Contents
Fragment Threshold (bytes) (fragmentThreshold) ........................... IMA Version (imaVersion) ........................................................ Link Activation Timer (linkActivationTimer) .................................. Link Deactivation Timer (linkDeactivationTimer) ............................ Link Fragmentation and Interleaving (bundleLFI) ............................ Maximum Links (maximumLinks)................................................ Minimum Links (minimumLinks)................................................. MTU (bytes) ........................................................................ Protection Type (bundleProtectedType) ...................................... Red Diff Delay (milliseconds) (redDiffDelay).................................. Red Diff Delay Action (redDiffDelayAction) ................................... Second Network Element (apsBundleHighNodeDn) .......................... Short Sequence (shortSequence) ............................................... Show Only Compatible Channels................................................ Test Member (testMember)...................................................... Test Pattern (testPattern) ....................................................... Time Slots .......................................................................... Yellow Diff Delay (milliseconds) (yellowDiffDelay) ..........................
174-4 174-5 174-5 174-5 174-5 174-5 174-6 174-6 174-6 174-6 174-6 174-6 174-7 174-7 174-7 174-7 174-7 174-7
175 Shelf parameters

175.1
175-1
175-2 175-2 175-2 175-3 175-3 175-3 175-3 175-4 175-5 175-5 175-5 175-5 175-5 175-5 175-6 175-6 175-6 175-6 175-6 175-6 175-7 175-7 175-7 175-7 175-7 175-7
Shelf parameters ..................................................................... Active Timeout (activateTimeout) ............................................. Administrative Mode (adminMode) ............................................. Administrative State .............................................................. Alarm Severity (externalAlarmSeverity) ....................................... BITS Administrative State (bitsAdministrativeState) ........................ BITS Interface Type (bitsInterfaceType)....................................... Command to Apply (versionMngt) .............................................. Delayed Activation Timer (delayedActivateTimer) .......................... Description ......................................................................... External Timing Reference Administrative State (externalInIfAdminStatus).................................................. External Timing Reference Impedance Type (externalInputImpedanceType) ........................................... External Timing Reference Input Type (externalInIfType) ................. External Timing Reference Output Type (externalOutIfType) ............. First Timing Reference Administrative State (firstTimingReferenceAdministrativeState) ............................. First Timing Reference Input (firstTimingReferenceInput) ................. First Timing Reference Interface Type (firstTimingRefBitsInterfaceType) ........................................ Force Mode (forceMode) ......................................................... Monitored Status (enableStatus)................................................ Name (dryContactName)......................................................... Polarity (polarity) ................................................................. Primary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (primaryPerMcastPlaneLimit) ...... Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (primaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit) ........................................ Reboot .............................................................................. Reference Input Mode (revertive) (revertive) ................................ Resync ..............................................................................
May 2009
lxxxii
Contents
Second Timing Reference Administrative State (secondTimingReferenceAdministrativeState).......................... Second Timing Reference Input (secondTimingReferenceInput)........... Second Timing Reference Interface Type (secondTimingRefBitsInterfaceType)..................................... Secondary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastPlaneLimit)........................................... Secondary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit) ..................................... Third Timing Reference Input (thirdTimingReferenceInput) ...............
175-8 175-8 175-8 175-8 175-8 175-9
176 Card Slot parameters

176.1
176-1
176-2 176-2 176-2 176-2 176-3 176-3 176-3 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-4 176-5 176-5 176-5
Card Slot parameters ................................................................ Administrative State .............................................................. Assigned Card Type (assignedChildType) ...................................... Command Action (commandAction) ............................................ Enable Power Capacitor Detection (capacitorDetect)....................... Enable Priority Disconnect (priorityDisconnect).............................. Maximum Power (Watts) (maxPower).......................................... Pool Mode (poolMode) ............................................................ Port Maximum Power (MilliWatts) (portMaximumPower) ................... Power State (adminStatus) ...................................................... Reboot .............................................................................. Remove Card button (removeCard) ............................................ Resync .............................................................................. Saved Slot NI Number (savedSlotNINumber) .................................. Shut Down .......................................................................... Slot Priority (slotPriority) ........................................................ Temperature Threshold (Celsius) (temperatureThreshold)................. Turn Up .............................................................................
177 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor parameters
177.1
177-1
177-2 177-2 177-3 177-4 177-4 177-4 177-4 177-5 177-5 177-5 177-5 177-5 177-5 177-5 177-6 177-6
lxxxiii
Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor parameters ................................................ Administrative State .............................................................. Assigned Daughter Card Type (assignedChildType) .......................... Assigned MCM Card Type ......................................................... Channel ID (channelID) ........................................................... Clock Mode (clock) ................................................................ Clock Mode (clockmode) ......................................................... Differential Timestamp Frequency (diffTimestampFrequency)............ Gateway IP Address (gatewayIpAddress) ...................................... In MDA Carrier Module Slot (inMCM)............................................ IP Address (ipAddress) ............................................................ Mask (mask) ........................................................................ Mode (mode) ....................................................................... Policy Name button (networkQueuePolicyName) ............................ Reserved CBS % .................................................................... Resync ..............................................................................
May 2009
Contents
Shut Down .......................................................................... 177-6 Turn Up ............................................................................. 177-6 View Dependencies ............................................................... 177-6
178 Physical Port and APS parameters

178.1
178-1
Physical Port and APS parameters ................................................. 178-2 Accounting Policy ID .............................................................. 178-2 Accounting Enabled ............................................................... 178-2 Administrative State .............................................................. 178-2 Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState) .................................. 178-2 Authenticate (mobilePortAuthenticate) ....................................... 178-3 Auto-negotiate (autoNegotiate) ................................................ 178-3 Backpressure (backPressure) .................................................... 178-3 BER Signal Degradation Threshold (lb2erSd) .................................. 178-3 BER Signal Failure Threshold (lb2erSf)......................................... 178-4 Broadcast Limit (kbps) (broadcastLimit) ...................................... 178-4 Broadcast Limit (Pkts/s) (broadcastLimitInPkt) .............................. 178-4 Cable Length (cableLength) ..................................................... 178-4 Channel Number (channelNumber)............................................. 178-5 Channel Role (apsChannelRole) ................................................. 178-5 Class................................................................................. 178-5 Clock Source (clockSource) ...................................................... 178-6 Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)................................. 178-6 Command Switch (commandSwitch) ........................................... 178-6 Configured MAC.................................................................... 178-7 Controlled Port Control (paeAuthControlledPortControl) .................. 178-7 Db Loss (dbLoss) ................................................................... 178-8 DDM Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) ............................. 178-8 Default 802.1p (qosDefault8021p).............................................. 178-8 Default Classification (qosPortDefaultClassification)........................ 178-8 Default DSCP (qosPortDefaultDSCP) ............................................ 178-8 Default VLAN Enable (defaultVlanEnable)..................................... 178-9 Default VLAN Restore (defaultVlanRestore) .................................. 178-9 Description ......................................................................... 178-9 Detect Remote Faults (remoteFaultDetection)............................... 178-9 Detection (mdiMdixCrossoverDetection) ...................................... 178-9 Dot1 Q Acceptable Frames (dot1qAcceptableFrameTypes) ............... 178-10 Dot1 Q Ethertype (dot1qEtype) ................................................ 178-10 Down When Looped (downWhenLooped) ..................................... 178-10 Duplex (duplex)................................................................... 178-10 Egress Percentage of Rate (%) (portEgrPoolPercentageRate) ............. 178-11 Egress Percentage of Rate (%) (mdaEgrNamedPoolPolicy)................. 178-11 Egress Rate (Kbps) (egressRate) ............................................... 178-11 Enable Admin State (adminEnable) ........................................... 178-11 Enable Multicast Limit Mode (enableMulitcastLimitMode)................. 178-11 Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) ................................... 178-11 Encap Type ........................................................................ 178-12 First Network Element (nodeIdLow)........................................... 178-12 Flow (flowControl) ............................................................... 178-12 Forbid IGMP Snooping (forbidIgmpSnooping)................................. 178-12 Forward All Multicast Traffic (forwardAllMulticast) ........................ 178-12
lxxxiv
Contents
Framing (framing) ................................................................ 178-12 Group Number (groupNumber) ................................................. 178-13 Hold Time Down .................................................................. 178-13 Hold Time Down (seconds) (holdTimeDown)................................. 178-13 Hold Time Down (100s of ms) (holdTimeDown) ............................. 178-13 Hold Time Up ..................................................................... 178-13 Hold Time Up (seconds) (holdTimeUp) ....................................... 178-14 Hold Time Up (100s of ms) (holdTimeUp) .................................... 178-14 Ignore BPDU (mobilePortIgnoreBPDU)......................................... 178-14 Ingress Filtering (mobilePortIngFiltering) .................................... 178-14 Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) (portIngrPoolPercentageRate)............ 178-15 Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) (mdaIngrNamedPoolPolicy) ............... 178-15 Ingress Rate (Mbps) (ingressRate) ............................................. 178-15 Initialize (paePortInitialize) .................................................... 178-15 Inter-Frame Gap (bytes) (interFrameGap) ................................... 178-15 J0 Byte (j0Byte) .................................................................. 178-15 J0 String (j0String) ............................................................... 178-16 Keep Alive Interval (Sec) (keepAliveInterval)................................ 178-16 Line Buildout (lineBuildout) .................................................... 178-16 Line Code (lineCode) ............................................................ 178-16 Line Impedance (lineImpedance) .............................................. 178-17 Line Length (lineLength) ........................................................ 178-17 Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm) ........................... 178-18 Loopback .......................................................................... 178-18 Loopback (loopback)............................................................. 178-18 Loopback (loopback)............................................................. 178-19 MAC Address (lpsL2MacAddress) ............................................... 178-19 Max Egress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxEgrBW) ................................... 178-19 Max Ingress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxIngBW)................................... 178-19 Max Req (paeAuthMaxReq) ..................................................... 178-19 Maximum Power (milliwatt) (powerMaximum) .............................. 178-20 Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schOvrMaxRate)...................................... 178-20 Mode ............................................................................... 178-20 Mode (dot3OamMode) ........................................................... 178-20 Mode (hybridMode)............................................................... 178-20 MTU (bytes) ....................................................................... 178-21 Multiplier (Intervals) (dot3OamMultiplier) ................................... 178-21 Name (displayedName).......................................................... 178-21 Name (slopePolicy) .............................................................. 178-21 Network Queue Policy Name (networkQueuePolicyName) ................ 178-21 Operational State (operationalState) ......................................... 178-21 Port CLI Name (portDisplayedName) .......................................... 178-22 Port Framing (framing) .......................................................... 178-22 Port Type (ds1PortType) ........................................................ 178-22 Power Priority (powerPriority) ................................................. 178-23 Power State (adminStatus) ..................................................... 178-23 Q in Q Ethertype (qinqEtype) .................................................. 178-23 Q0 (qosPortCOS0MaxBW)........................................................ 178-23 Q0 (qosPortCOS0MinBW) ........................................................ 178-23 Q0 (qosPortLowPriorityWeight) ................................................ 178-23 Q1 (qosPortCOS1MaxBW)........................................................ 178-23 Q1 (qosPortCOS1MinBW) ........................................................ 178-23
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 lxxxv
Contents
Q1 (qosPortMediumPriorityWeight) ........................................... 178-24 Q2 (qosPortCOS2MaxBW)........................................................ 178-24 Q2 (qosPortCOS2MinBW) ........................................................ 178-24 Q2 (qosPortHighPriorityWeight)................................................ 178-24 Q3 (qosPortCOS3MaxBW)........................................................ 178-24 Q3 (qosPortCOS3MinBW) ........................................................ 178-24 Q3 (qosPortUrgentPriorityWeight)............................................. 178-24 Q4 (qosPortCOS4MaxBW)........................................................ 178-24 Q4 (qosPortCOS4MinBW) ........................................................ 178-24 Q4 (qosPortQ4PriorityWeight).................................................. 178-24 Q5 (qosPortCOS5MaxBW)........................................................ 178-24 Q5 (qosPortCOS5MinBW) ........................................................ 178-24 Q5 (qosPortQ5PriorityWeight).................................................. 178-25 Q6 (qosPortCOS6MaxBW)........................................................ 178-25 Q6 (qosPortCOS6MinBW) ........................................................ 178-25 Q6 (qosPortQ6PriorityWeight).................................................. 178-25 Q7 (qosPortCOS7MaxBW)........................................................ 178-25 Q7 (qosPortCOS7MinBW) ........................................................ 178-25 Q7 (qosPortQ7PriorityWeight).................................................. 178-25 QoS Status (qosEnabled) ........................................................ 178-25 Quiet Period (paeAuthQuietPeriod) ........................................... 178-25 Rate (Mbps) ....................................................................... 178-25 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass1Rate) ............................................... 178-26 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass2Rate) ............................................... 178-26 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass3Rate) ............................................... 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass4Rate) ............................................... 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass5Rate) ............................................... 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass6Rate) ............................................... 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass7Rate) ............................................... 178-28 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass8Rate) ............................................... 178-28 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp1Rate) ................................................. 178-28 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp2Rate) ................................................. 178-28 Rate (kbps) (portEgrShaperRate) .............................................. 178-28 RADIUS Server Policy Name (radiusServerPolicyName)..................... 178-29 Reauth Enabled (paeAuthReAuthEnabled) ................................... 178-29 Reauth Period (paeAuthReAuthPeriod) ....................................... 178-29 Reauthenticate Control (paePortReauthenticate) .......................... 178-29 Received Remote Loopback Requests (dot3OamLoopbackIgnoreRx)..... 178-29 Report Alarms (reportAlarmBits) .............................................. 178-29 Reserved CBS% .................................................................... 178-30 Resync ............................................................................. 178-30 Retry Timeout (Sec) (retryTimeout) .......................................... 178-31 Revertion Mode (revertMode) .................................................. 178-31 Second Network Element (nodeIdHigh) ....................................... 178-31 Server Timeout (paeAuthServerTimeout) .................................... 178-31 Servicing Mode (qosPortServicingMode) ...................................... 178-31 Set Local Loopback (dot3OamLoopbackLocalStatus) ....................... 178-32 Set Remote Loopback (dot3Actions) .......................................... 178-32 Shut Down ......................................................................... 178-32 Single Fiber (singleFiber) ....................................................... 178-33 SONET Section Trace Mode (sonetSectionTraceMode) ..................... 178-33 Speed............................................................................... 178-33
lxxxvi May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
Supplicant Timeout (paeAuthSuppTimeout) ................................. 178-33 Transmit Interval (dot3OamInterval).......................................... 178-33 Trusted (qosPortTrusted) ....................................................... 178-34 Tunneling (dot3OamTunneling) ................................................ 178-34 Turn Up ............................................................................ 178-34 Tx Period (paeAuthTxPeriod)................................................... 178-34 Type ................................................................................ 178-34 Type (accessType) ............................................................... 178-35 Type (ds3Type) ................................................................... 178-35 Type (nodeCardinality) .......................................................... 178-35 View Dependencies .............................................................. 178-35 Wait To Restore (seconds) (waitToRestore).................................. 178-35 Weight ............................................................................. 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass1WtInGp) .................................................. 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass2WtInGp) .................................................. 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass3WtInGp) .................................................. 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass4WtInGp) .................................................. 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass5WtInGp) .................................................. 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass6WtInGp) .................................................. 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass7WtInGp) .................................................. 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass8WtInGp) .................................................. 178-37 Xgig Mode (networkMode) ...................................................... 178-37
179 Channel parameters

179.1
179-1
179-2 179-2 179-2 179-2 179-2 179-2 179-2 179-2 179-3 179-3 179-3 179-4 179-4 179-4 179-5 179-5 179-5 179-5 179-5 179-5 179-5 179-6 179-6 179-6 179-6 179-6 179-6
lxxxvii
Channel parameters ................................................................. Accounting Policy ID .............................................................. Accounting Enabled ............................................................... Address and Control Field Compression (acfc) ............................... Administrative State .............................................................. Administrative Status (adminStatus) ........................................... ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) ...................... ATM Minimum VPI Value (atmInterfaceMinimumVPIValue) ................. Bit Error Insertion Rate (bitErrorInsertionRate) .............................. C2 Byte (hex) (c2Byte) ........................................................... Channel Framing (channelFraming) ............................................ Channelized (channelized)....................................................... Channel Type (portChannelType)............................................... Class................................................................................. Clock Source (channelClockSource) ............................................ Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)................................. Configured MAC.................................................................... CRC (crc) ........................................................................... CRC Precision (channelCRC) ..................................................... Description ......................................................................... Destination ECID (destinationECID)............................................. Destination IP Address (destinationIpAddress)................................ Destination MAC Address (destinationMacAddress) .......................... Destination Port (destinationPort) ............................................. Down Count (downCount)........................................................ Drop Count (keepAliveDropCount).............................................. Duration (seconds) (bertDuration)..............................................
May 2009
Contents
Edit ATM button ................................................................... 179-6 Edit ILMI Link button.............................................................. 179-6 Edit PPP button.................................................................... 179-6 Egress Traffic Descriptor (egress) .............................................. 179-7 Encap Type ......................................................................... 179-7 Equipment ID Code (channelMDLEicString).................................... 179-7 Error Threshold .................................................................... 179-7 Error Threshold (dceLmiErrorThreshold) ...................................... 179-7 Error Threshold (dteLmiErrorThreshold)....................................... 179-7 Facility ID Code (channelMDLPfiString) ........................................ 179-7 Frame ID Code (channelMDLFicString) ......................................... 179-8 Full Enquiry Interval (dteLmiFullEnquiryInterval)............................ 179-8 Generator Number String (channelMDLGenString) ........................... 179-8 Idle Cycle Flags (idleCycleFlags)................................................ 179-8 ILMI Link Vci (ilmiLinkVci) ....................................................... 179-8 ILMI Link Vpi (ilmiLinkVpi) ....................................................... 179-8 Ime Type (requestedImeType) .................................................. 179-9 Ingress Traffic Descriptor (ingress) ............................................. 179-9 Interface ID (interfaceId) ........................................................ 179-9 Interface Mapping (atmInterfaceMapping) .................................... 179-9 J1 String (j1String) ................................................................ 179-9 Keep Alive (seconds).............................................................. 179-9 Keep-Alive Polling Count (keepAlivePollCount) ............................. 179-10 Keep-Alive Polling Frequency (seconds) (keepAlivePollFreq) ............. 179-10 Keep-Alive Test Frequency (seconds) (keepAliveTestFreq) ............... 179-10 LMI Mode (mode) ................................................................. 179-10 LMI Type (frDlcmiState) ......................................................... 179-10 Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm) ........................... 179-10 Local Channel ID (localChannelId) ............................................. 179-11 Local ECID (localECID) ........................................................... 179-11 Local Port (localPort)............................................................ 179-11 Location ID Code (channelMDLLicString) ..................................... 179-11 Loop Respond (channelFEACLoopRespond)................................... 179-11 Loopback (channelLoopback) .................................................. 179-11 Max Jitter Expected (ms) (maxJitter)......................................... 179-12 MDL Message Type (channelMDLMessageType) .............................. 179-12 Mode ............................................................................... 179-13 Monitored Events ................................................................. 179-13 Monitored Events (dceLmiMonitoredEvents) ................................. 179-14 Monitored Events (dteLmiMonitoredEvents) ................................. 179-14 MTU (bytes) ....................................................................... 179-14 Network Queue Policy Name (queueId)....................................... 179-14 Pattern (bertPattern)............................................................ 179-14 Payload Scrambling Enabled (isPayloadScramblingEnabled) .............. 179-15 Payload Type (payloadType) ................................................... 179-15 Period (keepalivePeriod)........................................................ 179-15 Polling Interval (seconds) ....................................................... 179-15 Polling Interval (seconds) (dceLmiPollingInterval) .......................... 179-15 Polling Interval (seconds) (dteLmiPollingInterval) .......................... 179-16 Port Number String (channelMDLPortString) ................................. 179-16 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 179-16 Protocol (protocol)............................................................... 179-16
lxxxviii May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
Protocol Field Compression (pfc) .............................................. 179-16 Protocol Version (requestedVersion) .......................................... 179-17 Report Alarms (reportAlarmBits) .............................................. 179-17 Reserved CBS% .................................................................... 179-17 Restore Keep-Alive Defaults .................................................... 179-18 Respond to Remote Loop Signal (remoteLoopRespondConfig) ............ 179-18 Resync ............................................................................. 179-18 Samples Aggregation (samplesAggregation).................................. 179-18 Scramble (scramble) ............................................................. 179-18 Shut Down ......................................................................... 179-18 Signal Mode (signalMode) ....................................................... 179-18 Speed............................................................................... 179-18 Subrate CSU Mode (subrateCSUMode)......................................... 179-18 Subrate Range (subrateRange) ................................................. 179-19 Time Slots ......................................................................... 179-19 Turn Up ............................................................................ 179-19 Unit ID Code (channelMDLUnitString) ......................................... 179-19 Up Count (upCount).............................................................. 179-19
180 Common equipment navigation tree parameters

180.1
180-1
Common equipment navigation tree parameters ............................... 180-2 Accounting Enabled (accounting)............................................... 180-2 Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId) .................................... 180-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... 180-2 ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) ...................... 180-2 Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... 180-2 Class (PortClass)................................................................... 180-3 Configured MAC (macAddress) .................................................. 180-3 Default VLAN (vlan) ............................................................... 180-3 Description (description)......................................................... 180-3 Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) .................................................... 180-3 Encap Type (encapType) ......................................................... 180-4 Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm) ............................ 180-5 Mode (mode) ....................................................................... 180-6 MTU (bytes) (mtuValue).......................................................... 180-6 OLC State (olcState) .............................................................. 180-8 Reboot button (reboot) .......................................................... 180-8 Reserved CBS% (reservedCbs) ................................................... 180-8 Resync button (triggerResync) .................................................. 180-8 Shut Down button (shutDown) .................................................. 180-8 Slope Policy (slope) ............................................................... 180-9 Speed (speed)...................................................................... 180-9 Telnet Session button ............................................................ 180-9 Time Slots (timeSlotBits)........................................................ 180-10 Turn Up button (turnUp) ........................................................ 180-10 View Dependencies button (getDependencyCount)......................... 180-10
May 2009
lxxxix
Contents
OSPF navigation tree parameters

181 OSPF navigation tree parameters
181.1
181-1
OSPF navigation tree parameters.................................................. 181-2
IS-IS navigation tree parameters

182 IS-IS navigation tree parameters
182.1
182-1
IS-IS navigation tree parameters................................................... 182-2
Network navigation tree parameters

183.1
183-1 184-1
184-2 184-2 184-2 184-2 184-2 184-2 184-2 184-3 184-3 184-3 184-3 184-3 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-4 184-5 184-5 184-5 184-5
Router parameters ................................................................... 183-2

184.1
Routing Instance parameters ....................................................... Action (action)..................................................................... Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... Aggregator (aggregator).......................................................... Aggregator AS (aggregatorAS) ................................................... Aggregator IP Address (aggregatorIPAddress)................................. Allow Directed Broadcasts ....................................................... Allow Send Force Renews (allowSendForceRenews) ......................... As Set (asSet) ...................................................................... Autonomous Address Creation (autonomous) ................................. Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber) ........................... BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled) ...................................................... Broadcast ........................................................................... Broadcast Address Format ....................................................... Cflowd Type........................................................................ Class................................................................................. Confederation Autonomous System (confederationAutonomousSystemNumber) ............................. Configured Primary Status (configPrimaryStatus)............................ Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit) .......................................... Days (maxLeaseDay) .............................................................. Days (minLeaseDay)............................................................... Days (days) ......................................................................... Displayed Name (displayedName) .............................................. Dot1p (dot1p) ......................................................................
May 2009
xc
Contents
DSCP (dscp) ........................................................................ 184-5 Description ......................................................................... 184-6 Edit Routing Policies .............................................................. 184-6 Egress Filter ID..................................................................... 184-6 Enable (ldpSyncTimerEnabled).................................................. 184-6 Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter) ........................................... 184-6 Enable Forwarding (enableForwarding)........................................ 184-7 Encap Type (encapsulationType) ............................................... 184-7 Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) ..................................... 184-7 End Address (endAddress) ....................................................... 184-7 Exclusive (exclusive).............................................................. 184-7 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) ............................................ 184-8 Free Addresses Minimum Threshold (minFree) ............................... 184-8 Hours (maxLeaseHour) ........................................................... 184-8 Hours (minLeaseHour) ............................................................ 184-8 Hours (hours)....................................................................... 184-8 IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled) .................................................... 184-8 IGP Inhibit .......................................................................... 184-9 Ingress Filter ID .................................................................... 184-9 Interface ID (interfaceID) ........................................................ 184-9 IP Address .......................................................................... 184-9 IP Address 1 (address1)........................................................... 184-9 IP Address 2 (address2)........................................................... 184-9 IP Address 3 (address3)........................................................... 184-9 IP Address 4 (address4)........................................................... 184-9 IP Address Prefix (ipAddrPrefix) ............................................... 184-10 IPv6 Prefix (prefix)............................................................... 184-10 IS-IS Enabled (isisEnabled) ...................................................... 184-10 LDP Synchronization Timer (ldpSyncTimer) .................................. 184-10 LDP Enabled (ldpEnabled) ...................................................... 184-10 Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime) ......................................... 184-11 Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled) ........................................ 184-11 MAC Address ...................................................................... 184-11 Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag) ........................ 184-11 Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval) ......................................... 184-11 Mask ................................................................................ 184-11 Mask Reply ........................................................................ 184-11 Maximum Declined Addresses Stored (maxDeclined) ....................... 184-11 Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime) ....................................... 184-12 Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes ...................................... 184-12 Member AS (memberAS)......................................................... 184-12 Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval) .......................................... 184-12 Minimum Lease Time (minLeaseTime) ........................................ 184-12 Minutes (maxLeaseMinute) ..................................................... 184-13 Minutes (minLeaseMinute) ...................................................... 184-13 Minutes (minutes) ................................................................ 184-13 Minutes (offerMinute) ........................................................... 184-13 MLD Enabled (mldEnabled) ..................................................... 184-13 MPLS Enabled (mplsEnabled) ................................................... 184-13 MSDP Enabled (msdpEnabled) .................................................. 184-14 MTU (mtu) ......................................................................... 184-14
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 xci
Contents
Name ............................................................................... 184-14 Netbios Node Type (netbiosNodeType) ....................................... 184-14 Network Policy ID ................................................................ 184-14 Number (optionNumber) ........................................................ 184-15 Number of Redirects............................................................. 184-15 Number of TTL Expired.......................................................... 184-15 Number of Unreachables ........................................................ 184-15 Offer Time (offerTime).......................................................... 184-15 On-Link Determination (onLink) ............................................... 184-15 Option (option) ................................................................... 184-15 OSPFv2 Enabled (ospfEnabled) ................................................. 184-16 OSPFv3 Enabled (ospfv3Enabled) .............................................. 184-16 Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag) ............................ 184-16 PIM Enabled (pimEnabled) ...................................................... 184-16 Physical Address .................................................................. 184-17 Pool Name (displayedName).................................................... 184-17 Prefix Length...................................................................... 184-17 Primary ............................................................................ 184-17 Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime)............................ 184-17 Redirects .......................................................................... 184-17 Redirects Time ................................................................... 184-17 Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime) .......................... 184-17 RIP Enabled (ripEnabled)........................................................ 184-18 Router ID .......................................................................... 184-18 RSVP Enabled (rsvpEnabled).................................................... 184-18 Seconds (maxLeaseSecond)..................................................... 184-18 Seconds (minLeaseSecond) ..................................................... 184-18 Seconds (offerSecond)........................................................... 184-18 Seconds (seconds) ................................................................ 184-18 Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement) ................................... 184-18 Server Name (displayedName) ................................................. 184-19 Source Address Termination (ipOrInterfaceIndex) .......................... 184-19 Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr).............................................. 184-19 Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication) ................................. 184-19 Start Address (startAddress).................................................... 184-20 Strip Label (stripLabel).......................................................... 184-21 Subnet Mask ....................................................................... 184-21 Summary Only (summaryOnly) ................................................. 184-21 Timeout............................................................................ 184-21 Trusted (isTrusted)............................................................... 184-21 TTL Expired ....................................................................... 184-21 TTL Expired Time (seconds) .................................................... 184-21 Type (optionType) ............................................................... 184-22 Unreachables ..................................................................... 184-22 Unreachables Time (seconds) .................................................. 184-22 Use GI Address (useGiAddress) ................................................. 184-22 Value (optionValue).............................................................. 184-22
xcii
May 2009
Contents
185 Bridge Instance parameters

185.1
185-1
Bridge Instance parameters ........................................................ 185-2 Admin Edge (portAdminEdge) ................................................... 185-2 Administrative State (lpsAdminStatus) ........................................ 185-2 Auto Edge (portAutoEdge) ....................................................... 185-2 Auto VLAN Containment (stpBridgeAutoVlanContainment)................. 185-2 Bridge Max Hops (bridgeMaxHops).............................................. 185-3 CLI Name ........................................................................... 185-3 Connection Type (portAdminConnectionType) ............................... 185-3 Default Bridged Disposition (defaultBridgeDisposition) ..................... 185-3 Default IGMP Disposition (defaultMulticastDisposition) ..................... 185-4 Default Routed Disposition (defaultRoutedDisposition) ..................... 185-4 Default Servicing Mode (servicingMode) ....................................... 185-5 Description ......................................................................... 185-5 Displayed Name ................................................................... 185-5 Ethertype (ethertypeValue) ..................................................... 185-5 Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay).............................. 185-5 Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime) ...................................... 185-5 High MAC Range (lpsHiMacRange) .............................................. 185-6 IGMP Snooping (igmpSnoopEnable) ............................................. 185-6 Instance BPDU Switching (insBpduSwitching) ................................. 185-6 Instance Index (id) ................................................................ 185-6 Instance Name (mstInstanceName)............................................. 185-6 Jumbo Frame (jumboFrame) .................................................... 185-7 Last-Member Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopLastMember) .................. 185-7 Learning Time Window (minutes) (lpsLearningWindowTime) .............. 185-7 Low MAC Range (lpsLoMacRange)............................................... 185-8 MAC Address ....................................................................... 185-8 MAC Address (lpsL2MacAddress) ................................................ 185-8 Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge)............................................. 185-8 Max. Filtered MACs to Learn (lpsMaxFilteredMacNum)...................... 185-8 Max. MAC Addresses to Learn (lpsMaxMacNum) .............................. 185-8 Mode ................................................................................ 185-8 Mode (mvrMode)................................................................... 185-9 Mode (portManualMode).......................................................... 185-9 MVR Admin Status (mvrEnable) ................................................. 185-9 MVR Source Interface (mvrSource) ............................................. 185-9 Path Cost ........................................................................... 185-9 Path Cost (portPathCost) ....................................................... 185-10 Path Cost (stpBridgePathCostMode)........................................... 185-10 Priority............................................................................. 185-10 Priority (portPriority)............................................................ 185-11 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 185-11 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 185-11 Protocol (stpProtocol) ........................................................... 185-11 Q0 (qosConfigLowPriorityWeight) ............................................. 185-11 Q1 (qosConfigMediumPriorityWeight) ......................................... 185-11 Q2 (qosConfigHighPriorityWeight) ............................................. 185-12 Q3 (qosConfigUrgentPriorityWeight) .......................................... 185-12 Q4 (qosConfigQ4PriorityWeight) ............................................... 185-12 Q5 (qosConfigQ5PriorityWeight) ............................................... 185-12 Q6 (qosConfigQ6PriorityWeight) ............................................... 185-12
May 2009 xciii
Contents
Q7 (qosConfigQ7PriorityWeight) ............................................... 185-12 QoS Status (qosEnabled) ........................................................ 185-12 Query Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopQuery) ................................. 185-13 Query Source IP Zero (querySourceIpZero)................................... 185-13 Query Time (seconds) (mvrQuerytime) ....................................... 185-13 Region Name (regionName)..................................................... 185-13 Region Revision (regionRevision) .............................................. 185-14 Response Time (seconds) (igmpSnoopResponse) ............................ 185-14 Restricted Role (portRestrictedRole) ......................................... 185-14 Restricted TCN (portRestrictedTcn)........................................... 185-14 Robustness (packets) (igmpSnoopRobustness) ............................... 185-15 Status (lpsLearningWinTimeWithStaticConversion) ......................... 185-15 STP Mode (stpBridgeMode)...................................................... 185-15 Super VLAN Uplink Interface (superVlanUplink) ............................. 185-16 TLS Admin Status (tlsEnabled) ................................................. 185-16 TLS Mode (tlsMode) .............................................................. 185-16 TLS Uplink Interface (tlsUplink)................................................ 185-16 Trap Threshold (lpsLearnTrapThreshold)..................................... 185-16 Trust Ports (trustPorts).......................................................... 185-17 TX Hold Count (insBridgeTxHoldCount) ....................................... 185-17 Upper Ring Adjacency (adjacentToUpperRing) .............................. 185-17 Violation (lpsViolationOption).................................................. 185-17 VLAN ID (switchingInstanceId).................................................. 185-17
186 Interface and interface IP address parameters

186.1
186-1
186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-2 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-3 186-4 186-4 186-4 186-4 186-4 186-4 186-4 186-4
Interface and interface IP address parameters.................................. Administrative State .............................................................. Administration Status (adminStatus) ........................................... Allow Directed Broadcasts ....................................................... Broadcast ........................................................................... Broadcast Address Format ....................................................... Cflowd Type........................................................................ Class................................................................................. Description ......................................................................... Echo Interval (bdfEchoInterval)................................................. Egress Filter ID..................................................................... Enable Local Proxy (localProxy) ................................................ Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal) ...................................... IGP Inhibit .......................................................................... Ingress Filter ID .................................................................... Interface ID (id) ................................................................... IP Address .......................................................................... Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime)........................................ Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) ............................................. MAC Address ....................................................................... Mask Reply ......................................................................... Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)......................................................... Name ................................................................................ Network Policy ID ................................................................. No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) ........................................ No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry)..............................................
May 2009
xciv
Contents
Number of Redirects.............................................................. Number of TTL Expired........................................................... Number of Unreachables ......................................................... Physical Address ................................................................... Policy 1 ............................................................................. Policy 2 ............................................................................. Policy 3 ............................................................................. Policy 4 ............................................................................. Policy 5 ............................................................................. Port (port) .......................................................................... Primary ............................................................................. Proxy Arp Policy 1 (proxyArpPolicy1) .......................................... Proxy Arp Policy 2 (proxyArpPolicy2) .......................................... Proxy Arp Policy 3 (proxyArpPolicy3) .......................................... Proxy Arp Policy 4 (proxyArpPolicy4) .......................................... Proxy Arp Policy 5 (proxyArpPolicy5) .......................................... Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval) ................................................ Redirects ........................................................................... Redirects Time (seconds) ........................................................ Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp)................................................... Router ID ........................................................................... Routing Instance ID ............................................................... Subnet Mask ........................................................................ Transmit Interval (bfdtxInterval) ............................................... Timeout............................................................................. TTL Expired ........................................................................ TTL Expired Time (seconds) ..................................................... Unnumbered Reference (referenceType) ..................................... Unnumbered Type (unnumberedReferenceType) ............................ Unreachables ...................................................................... Unreachables Time (seconds) ................................................... View the newly created Network Interface ................................... What type of interface would you like to create? ...........................
186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-5 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-6 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-7 186-8 186-8 186-8 186-8 186-8
187 BGP parameters

187.1
187-1
187-2 187-2 187-2 187-2 187-2 187-3 187-3 187-4 187-4 187-4 187-4 187-4 187-5 187-5 187-5 187-6
xcv
BGP parameters ...................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Advertise Inactive Routes (advertiseInactiveRts) ............................ Advertise Label (advertiseLabel) ............................................... Aggregator ID Zero (aggregatorIdZero) ........................................ Apply Export Route Policies (vpnApplyExport) ............................... Apply Import Route Policies (vpnApplyImport) ............................... AS Override (overrideAS)......................................................... AS Path Ignore (pathIgnore) ..................................................... Cluster ID (clusterId) ............................................................. Connect Retry Time (seconds) (connectRetryTime) ......................... Damping (damping) ............................................................... Description ......................................................................... Disable Client Reflect (disableClientReflect) ................................. Disable Extended Communities (disableExtComms) ......................... Disable Fast External Failover (fastExtFailover) .............................
May 2009
Contents
Disable Standard Communities (disableComms).............................. 187-6 Disallow IGP ........................................................................ 187-6 Enable Inter AS VPRN (enableInterAsVprn).................................... 187-7 Enable Peer Tracking (enabledPeerTracking)................................. 187-7 Enable Rapid Withdrawal (enableRapidWithdrawal) ........................ 187-7 Graceful Restart................................................................... 187-7 Hold Time (seconds) (holdTime) ................................................ 187-7 IBGP MultiPath (ibgpMultipath) ................................................. 187-8 Inherit Value ....................................................................... 187-8 Keep Alive (seconds) (keepAlive) ............................................... 187-8 Key .................................................................................. 187-8 Local Address (localAddress) .................................................... 187-8 Local AS (localAS) ................................................................. 187-9 Local AS Private (localASPrivate) ............................................... 187-9 Local Preference (localPreference) ............................................ 187-9 Loop Detect (loopDetect) ........................................................ 187-9 MED Compare (medCompare) .................................................. 187-10 MED Source (medSource)........................................................ 187-10 MED Value (medValue) .......................................................... 187-11 Min AS Origination (seconds) (minASOrigination) ........................... 187-11 Min. Route Advertisement (minRouteAdvertisement) ...................... 187-11 Minimum TTL Value .............................................................. 187-11 Multi Hop (multiHop) ............................................................ 187-11 Multi Path (multiPath)........................................................... 187-11 Name (siteName)................................................................. 187-11 Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf).................................................... 187-11 Passive (passive).................................................................. 187-12 Peer Address (peerAddress) .................................................... 187-12 Peer AS (peerAS) ................................................................. 187-12 Peer Type (peerType) ........................................................... 187-12 Policy 1 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 187-13 Policy 2 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 187-13 Policy 3 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 187-13 Policy 4 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 187-13 Policy 5 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 187-13 Preference ........................................................................ 187-13 Prefix Limit (prefixLimit) ....................................................... 187-13 Remove Private AS (removePrivateAS) ....................................... 187-13 Router ID .......................................................................... 187-14 Stale Routes Time (seconds) (staleRoutesTime) ............................ 187-14 Type ................................................................................ 187-14
188 IGMP parameters

188.1
188-1
188-2 188-2 188-2 188-2 188-2 188-2 188-2 188-3
IGMP parameters ..................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Administrative Version (adminVersion) ........................................ Configured Source (configSrcAddr) ............................................. Configured Source Type (srcAddrType) ........................................ Constraint Admin State (mCacConstAdminState) ............................ Description ......................................................................... End Mcast Address (toGrpAddr) .................................................
May 2009
xcvi
Contents
End Mcast Address Type (toGrpAddrType) .................................... Import Policy (importPolicy) .................................................... Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl)......... Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl).................................................. Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) .................................................... Maximum Number of Groups (maxGroups) .................................... Protocol Version (igmpVersion) ................................................. Proxying (igmpProxying) ......................................................... Querier Forwarding (igmpQuerierForwarding)................................ Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) ................................. Query Response Interval (seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl) .............. Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl)................................................... Querying (igmpQuerying) ........................................................ Robust Count (genRobustCount) ................................................ Robust Count (robustCount) ..................................................... Router Timeout (seconds) (igmpRouterTimeout) ............................ Source Timeout (seconds) (igmpSourceTimeout) ............................ Spoofing (igmpSpoofing) ......................................................... Start Mcast Address (frGrpAddr) ................................................ Start Mcast Address Type (frGrpAddrType) ................................... Static Multicast Group (staticGrp).............................................. Static Source (staticSrcGrp) ..................................................... Subnet Check (subnetCheck) .................................................... Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) ............................................... Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) (igmpUnsolicitedReportInterval) .......................................... Zapping (igmpZapping) ...........................................................
188-3 188-3 188-3 188-3 188-3 188-3 188-4 188-4 188-4 188-4 188-4 188-5 188-5 188-5 188-5 188-5 188-5 188-6 188-6 188-6 188-6 188-6 188-6 188-6 188-7 188-7
189 MLD parameters

189.1
189-1
189-2 189-2 189-2 189-2 189-2 189-2 189-2 189-3 189-3 189-3 189-3 189-3 189-3 189-3 189-4 189-4 189-4
MLD parameters ...................................................................... Configured Source (configSrcAddr) ............................................. End Multicast Address (toGrpAddr) ............................................. Group Address (groupAddress) .................................................. Group Address One (groupAddress1) ........................................... Group Address Two (groupAddress2) ........................................... Group Source Address (groupSourceAddress) ................................. Import Policy (importPolicy) .................................................... Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (lastMemberQueryInterval) ....... Maximum Number of Groups (maxGroups) .................................... Maximum Response Time between Group Messages (seconds) (lastMembQueryIntvl)....................................................... Maximum Response Time For MLDv2 (seconds) (queryResponseIntvl) .... Query interval (seconds) (queryInterval) ...................................... Query interval (seconds) (queryInterval) ...................................... Query Response Interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval)............... Robust Count (robustCount) ..................................................... Start Multicast Address (frGrpAddr) ............................................
May 2009
xcvii
Contents
190 MSDP parameters

190.1
190-1
190-2 190-2 190-2 190-2 190-2 190-2 190-2 190-2 190-3 190-3 190-3 190-3 190-3 190-3 190-4 190-4 190-4 190-4
MSDP parameters..................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Data Encapsulation (encapsulation) ............................................ Default Peer (defaultPeer) ...................................................... IP Prefix (ipAddress) .............................................................. Key .................................................................................. Local IP Address (localIpAddress)............................................... Mask (mask) ........................................................................ Mode (mode) ....................................................................... Name ................................................................................ Peer Address (peerAddress) ..................................................... Receive Message Interval (seconds) (receivingRateTime) .................. Receive Message Rate (receivingRate)......................................... Receive Message Threshold (receivingRateThreshold) ...................... RPF Lookup Sequence ............................................................ SA Cache Lifetime (seconds) (sACacheLifetime) ............................. SA Limit (maxActiveSources) .................................................... Type .................................................................................
191 IS-IS parameters

191.1
191-1
191-2 191-2 191-2 191-2 191-2 191-2 191-3 191-3 191-3 191-3 191-3 191-3 191-3 191-4 191-4 191-4 191-4 191-4 191-4 191-4 191-5 191-5 191-5 191-5 191-5 191-6 191-6 191-6 191-6 191-6
IS-IS parameters ...................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Advertise Only Passive Interfaces (passiveOnly) ............................. Area ID (areaId).................................................................... BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... CSNP Authentication (csnpAuthentication) ................................... CSNP Interval (seconds) (csnpInterval) ........................................ Description ......................................................................... Enable Authentication (enableAuthentication)............................... Enable IPv4 (enableIPv4)......................................................... Enable IPv6 (enableIPv6)......................................................... Enable LDP Synchronization ..................................................... External (externalPreference) .................................................. Graceful Restart................................................................... Hello Authentication (helloAuthentication)................................... Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)........................................ Hello Multiplier (helloMultiplier) ............................................... Helper Mode ....................................................................... Internal (preference) ............................................................. IPv6 Routing TLV type (ipv6RoutingTlvType) ................................. IPv6 Unicast Multi-Topology (multiTopoIPv6Ucast) .......................... Isis Default Route Tag (defaultRouteTag) ..................................... Key .................................................................................. Level Capability (levelCapability) .............................................. LSP Initial Wait (seconds) (lspInitialWait) ..................................... LSP Lifetime (seconds) (lspLifetime)........................................... LSP Max Wait (seconds) (lspMaxWait).......................................... LSP Pacing Interval (seconds) (lspPacingInterval)............................ LSP Second Wait (seconds) (lspSecondWait) .................................. Mask (mask) ........................................................................
May 2009
xcviii
Contents
Mesh Group (meshGroup) ........................................................ 191-6 Mesh Group Status (meshGroupStatus) ........................................ 191-7 Metric (metric) .................................................................... 191-7 Multicast Import ................................................................... 191-7 Multi-Topology (multiTopology)................................................. 191-7 Name ................................................................................ 191-7 Network (network) ................................................................ 191-8 Overload (setOverload) .......................................................... 191-8 Overload On Boot (overloadOnBoot) ........................................... 191-8 Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) (overloadOnBootTimeout).......... 191-9 Overload Timeout (seconds) (overloadTimeout) ............................. 191-9 Passive (passive)................................................................... 191-9 Policy 1 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... 191-9 Policy 2 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 191-10 Policy 3 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 191-10 Policy 4 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 191-10 Policy 5 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 191-10 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 191-10 PSNP Authentication (psnpAuthentication) .................................. 191-10 Reference Bandwidth (referenceBandwidth) ................................ 191-10 Remove Key button .............................................................. 191-10 Retransmit Interval (seconds) (retransmitInterval) ......................... 191-11 Route Tag (routeTag)............................................................ 191-11 SPF Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait) .............................. 191-11 SPF Max Wait (seconds) (spfMaxWait) ........................................ 191-11 SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait) ........................... 191-11 Strict Adjacency Check (strictAdjacencyCheck) ............................ 191-12 Summary Level (summaryLevel) ............................................... 191-12 Summary Route Tag (summaryRouteTag) .................................... 191-12 Traffic Engineering (trafficEngineering) ...................................... 191-12 Type ................................................................................ 191-12 Unicast Import .................................................................... 191-13 Wide Metrics Only (wideMetricsOnly) ......................................... 191-13
192 MPLS parameters

192.1
192-1
192-2 192-2 192-2 192-2 192-2 192-3 192-3 192-3 192-3 192-3 192-3 192-3 192-4 192-4
MPLS parameters ..................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Description ......................................................................... Enable (holdTimer) ............................................................... Enable (resignalTimer) ........................................................... Enable SRLG for FRR (enableSrlgFrr) ........................................... Fast Reroute (fastRerouteEnabled)............................................. Groups Included (adminGroupInclude)......................................... Hold Timer (seconds) (holdTimer).............................................. Include Groups Assigned (adminGroupInclude) ............................... Include Groups Unassigned (adminGroupInclude)............................ Resignal Timer (min) (resignalTimer) .......................................... Strict (srlgStrict) .................................................................. View the newly created MPLS path.............................................
May 2009
xcix
Contents
193 OSPF parameters

193.1
193-1
OSPF parameters ..................................................................... 193-2 Administrative State .............................................................. 193-2 Advertise Subnet (advertiseSubnet)............................................ 193-2 Area ID (areaId).................................................................... 193-2 Authentication Type (authenticationType) ................................... 193-2 Autonomous System Border Router (isAutonomousSystemBorderRouter) ..................................... 193-3 BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... 193-3 Blackhole Range (rangeBlackhole).............................................. 193-3 Boot Overload Enabled (bootOverloadAdmininstrativeState) .............. 193-3 Boot Overload Interval (seconds) (bootOverloadInterval) .................. 193-4 Change Password button ......................................................... 193-4 Configured MTU (bytes) (mtu) .................................................. 193-4 Default Cost (metric) ............................................................. 193-4 Description (areaDescription) ................................................... 193-5 Domain ID (domainId) ............................................................ 193-5 Enable LDP Synchronization ..................................................... 193-5 Effect (effect) ..................................................................... 193-5 Exit Overflow Interval (exitOverflowInterval) ................................ 193-5 External LSA Limit (externalLsdbLimit)........................................ 193-6 External (externalPreference) .................................................. 193-6 Graceful Restart................................................................... 193-6 Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)........................................ 193-6 Helper Mode ....................................................................... 193-6 ID .................................................................................... 193-6 Ignore DN Bit (ignorDNBit) ....................................................... 193-6 Initial Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateInitalWait) .......................... 193-7 Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait) .................................... 193-7 Interface Base Reference Cost (kbps) (ifBaseRefCost) ...................... 193-7 Internal (internalPreference) ................................................... 193-8 Instance ID (instanceIndex) ...................................................... 193-8 Key (key) ........................................................................... 193-8 Key Index (keyIndex) ............................................................. 193-8 Link State DB Type (lsdbType) .................................................. 193-8 LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) (lsaArrivalWait).............................. 193-8 LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateMaxWait) ............. 193-9 Metric (metric) .................................................................... 193-9 Multicast Import ................................................................... 193-9 Name ................................................................................ 193-9 Network (network) ............................................................... 193-10 Originate Default Route (originateDefault) .................................. 193-10 OSPF Router ID (ospfRouterId) ................................................. 193-10 Overload Enabled (overloadAdministrativeState) ........................... 193-11 Overload Interval (seconds) (overloadInterval) ............................. 193-11 Overload Stubs (overloadStubs)................................................ 193-11 Passive (isPassive)................................................................ 193-11 Password (authenticationKey) ................................................. 193-12 Policy 1 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 193-12 Policy 2 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 193-12 Policy 3 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 193-12 Policy 4 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 193-12
Contents
Policy 5 (inheritanceMask) ...................................................... 193-12 Poll Interval (seconds) (pollInterval) .......................................... 193-12 Prefix Length (prefixLength) ................................................... 193-12 Priority (priority) ................................................................. 193-12 Redistribute External Routes (nssaRedistribute) ............................ 193-13 Re-enter Key (key) ............................................................... 193-13 Re-enter Password (authenticationKey) ...................................... 193-13 Retransmission Interval (seconds) (retransmissionInterval) ............... 193-13 RFC1583 Compatible (isRFC1583Compatible)................................ 193-13 Router Dead Interval (seconds) (routerDeadInterval) ...................... 193-14 Second Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateSecondWait) ..................... 193-14 Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait) ................................ 193-14 SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) (spfMaxWait) ................................... 193-15 Super-Backbone (superBackBone) ............................................. 193-15 Suppress DN Bit (suppressDNBit) ............................................... 193-16 Traffic Engineering Support (trafficEngineeringSupport) .................. 193-16 Transit Area (transitAreaId) .................................................... 193-16 Transit Delay (seconds) (transitDelay) ........................................ 193-16 Transmit Interval (transmitInterval) .......................................... 193-16 Type (areaType).................................................................. 193-16 Unicast Import .................................................................... 193-17 Version (version) ................................................................. 193-17 Virtual Neighbor Router (Site) ID (virtualNeighborRouterId) .............. 193-18 VPN Domain ID (hex) (vpnDomainId) .......................................... 193-18 VPN Domain Type (vpnDomainType) .......................................... 193-18 VPN Tag (vpnTag) ................................................................ 193-19
194 PIM parameters

194.1
194-1
194-2 194-2 194-2 194-2 194-2 194-2 194-3 194-3 194-3 194-3 194-3 194-3 194-3 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-4 194-5 194-5
ci
PIM parameters ....................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Administrative State IPv4 (administrativeStateIpV4) ........................ Administrative State IPv6 (administrativeStateIpV6) ........................ Apply To (applyTo)................................................................ Assert Period (assertPeriod) ..................................................... Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth) .................................................. BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... BSM Check Router Alert (bsmCheckRouterAlert) ............................. CBSR Address (bsrCandidateAddress) .......................................... CBSR Admin State (bsrCandidateAdminState) ................................ CBSR Hash Mask Length (bsrCandidateHashMaskLength).................... CBSR Priority (bsrPriority) ....................................................... C-RP Address (crpAddress)....................................................... C-RP Hold Time (seconds) (crpHoldTime) ..................................... C-RP Priority (crpPriority) ....................................................... Data MDT Delay Interval (dataMdtDelayInterval) ............................ Data MDT Prefix (dataMdtPrefix) ............................................... Data MDT Prefix Length (dataMdtPrefixLength) .............................. Description ......................................................................... DR Priority (drPriority) ........................................................... ECMP Balancing Enabled (ecmpBalance) ...................................... Group IP Address (groupAddress) ...............................................
May 2009
Contents
Group Prefix Length (groupPrefixLength) ..................................... 194-5 Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)........................................ 194-5 Hello Multiplier (helloMultiplier) ............................................... 194-5 Hold Time (minutes) (ecmpBalanceHoldTime) ............................... 194-5 Improved assert (improvedAssert).............................................. 194-6 Infinity For Threshold (infinityForThreshold) ................................. 194-6 IPv4 Administrative State (administrativeStateIpV4) ........................ 194-6 IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence....................................................... 194-6 IPv6 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequenceIpV6)....................... 194-6 Lag Usage Optimization (lagUsageOptimize) ................................. 194-7 Level ID (levelId) .................................................................. 194-7 Level (level)........................................................................ 194-7 Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) .................................................... 194-7 Mask (mask) ........................................................................ 194-7 Max Groups (maxGroups) ........................................................ 194-7 MDT Default Group Address (mdtGroupIPAddress)........................... 194-7 Multicast Senders (multiCastSenders).......................................... 194-8 Non DR Attract Traffic (nonDrAttractTraffic)................................. 194-8 Number of Ports Down (numberOfPortsDown)................................ 194-8 Operational DR Priority (stickyDRPriority) .................................... 194-8 Pack Data MDT Join Tlv (dataMdtJoinTlvPack) ............................... 194-8 Peer IP Address (peerIPAddress) ................................................ 194-9 Policy 1 (policy1) .................................................................. 194-9 Policy 2 (policy2) .................................................................. 194-9 Policy 3 (policy3) .................................................................. 194-9 Policy 4 (policy4) .................................................................. 194-9 Policy 5 (policy5) .................................................................. 194-9 RP IP Address (anycastRpIPAddress)............................................ 194-9 RP Override (rpOverride) ........................................................ 194-9 SSM Group IP Address (ssmGroupIPAddress) ................................. 194-10 SSM Group Mask (ssmGroupMask) .............................................. 194-10 Static Group IP Address (staticGroupIPAddress)............................. 194-10 Static Group Mask (staticGroupMask) ......................................... 194-10 Static RP IP Address (staticRPIPAddress) ..................................... 194-10 Sticky DR (stickyDR) ............................................................. 194-10 Three Way Hello (threeWayHello) ............................................. 194-10 Threshold (threshold)............................................................ 194-11 Tracking Support (trackingSupport) ........................................... 194-11 Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) .............................................. 194-11
195 RIP parameters

195.1
195-1
195-2 195-2 195-2 195-2 195-2 195-2 195-2 195-3 195-3 195-3
RIP parameters ....................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Check Zero (checkZero) .......................................................... Description ......................................................................... Flush (timerFlush)................................................................. Inherit Value ....................................................................... Key .................................................................................. Message Size (messageSize) ..................................................... Metric In (metricIn) ............................................................... Metric Out (metricOut)...........................................................
May 2009
cii
Contents
Name ................................................................................ Policy 1 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 2 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 3 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 4 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 5 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Preference ......................................................................... Propagate RIP Metric (propagateRipMetric)................................... Receive (receive).................................................................. Select Locale (domain) ........................................................... Send (send)......................................................................... Split Horizon (splitHorizon) ...................................................... Timeout (timerTimeout) ......................................................... Type (inheritanceMask) .......................................................... Update (timerUpdate)............................................................
195-3 195-3 195-3 195-4 195-4 195-4 195-4 195-4 195-4 195-5 195-5 195-5 195-6 195-6 195-6
196 RSVP parameters

196.1
196-1
196-2 196-2 196-2 196-2 196-2 196-2 196-2 196-3 196-3 196-3 196-3 196-3 196-3 196-3 196-4 196-4 196-4
RSVP parameters ..................................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... Description ......................................................................... Enable Refresh Bypass (enableRefreshBypass) ............................... Enable Refresh Reduction (enableRefreshReduction) ....................... Enable Reliable Delivery (enableReliableDelivery) .......................... Hello Interval (milliseconds) (helloInterval) .................................. Keep Multiplier (keepMultiplier) ................................................ Key .................................................................................. Max Burst (maxBurst) ............................................................. Message Pacing (msgPacing)..................................................... Period (milliseconds) (period)................................................... Rapid Retransmit Time (hundred-milliseconds) (rapidRetransmitTime) ..................................................... Rapid Retry Limit (rapidRetryLimit)............................................ Refresh Time (refreshTime) ..................................................... Subscription Ratio (subscriptionRatio) .........................................
197 Static Routes parameters

197.1
197-1
197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-2 197-3 197-3 197-3 197-3
ciii
Static Routes parameters ........................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Auto-Assign ID...................................................................... BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... Destination (destination) ........................................................ Disallow IGP ........................................................................ Drop Count (cpeDropCount) ..................................................... Enable CPE Check (enableCpe) ................................................. Interval (seconds) (cpeInterval) ................................................ IP Address (targetIpAddress) .................................................... Log (cpeEnableLog) ............................................................... Mask (mask) ........................................................................ Metric (metric) ....................................................................
May 2009
Contents
Multicast Capable Peers (multicastCapablePeers) ........................... Preference ......................................................................... Prefix Length....................................................................... Static Route ID (id)................................................................ Target IP Address (cpeAddress) ................................................. Type (type)......................................................................... Unnumbered Interface (interfaceName) ......................................
197-3 197-3 197-4 197-4 197-4 197-4 197-4
198 LDP parameters

198.1
198-1
198-2 198-2 198-2 198-2 198-2 198-2 198-3 198-3 198-3 198-3 198-3 198-3 198-3 198-4 198-4 198-4 198-4 198-5 198-5 198-5 198-5 198-5 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-6 198-7 198-7 198-7 198-7 198-7 198-7 198-7 198-8 198-8 198-8 198-8 198-8
LDP parameters ...................................................................... Address Type (addressType)..................................................... Administrative State .............................................................. Administrative State (autoAdminState)........................................ Advertised Label (advertisedLabel) ............................................ Description ......................................................................... Discovery Interval (Minutes) (autoDiscIntvl) .................................. Discovery Timeout (Seconds) (autoTrTimeOut) .............................. Enforce Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart) ................................... Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) ............................................ Hello Factor (helloFactor) ....................................................... Hello Factor (targettedHelloFactor) ........................................... Hello Timeout (seconds) (helloTimeout) ...................................... Hello Timeout (seconds) (targettedHelloTimeout) .......................... IP Prefix (ipPrefix) ................................................................ Keep-Alive Factor (keepAliveFactor)........................................... Keep-Alive Factor (targettedKeepAliveFactor) ............................... Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) (keepAliveTimeout).......................... Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) (targettedKeepAliveTimeout) .............. Key .................................................................................. LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix) ............................................................ LDP Prefix Length (prefixLen)................................................... Maximum Failures (maxFailures) ............................................... Maximum Paths (autoMaxPaths) ................................................ Maximum Paths (maxPaths) ..................................................... Maximum Recovery Time (seconds) (maximumRecoveryTime) ............ Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive) ..................................... Minimum TTL Value ............................................................... Maximum TTL (autoTrMaxTtl) ................................................... Neighbor Liveness Time (seconds) (neighborLivenessTime) ................ NE Persistent (nePersistent)..................................................... Next Hop (nextHopAddr) ......................................................... Next Hop Type (nextHopType) .................................................. Number of Test Packets (packetsToSend)..................................... Packet History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows) ................................ Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval)..................................... Peer Address (peerAddress) ..................................................... Policy 1 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 2 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 3 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 4 (inheritanceMask) ....................................................... Policy 5 (inheritanceMask) .......................................................
May 2009
civ
Contents
Prefer Tunnel-in-Tunnel (preferTunnelInTunnel) ............................ 198-8 Prefix Length (prefixLength) .................................................... 198-8 Probe Interval (Minutes) (autoProbeIntvl)..................................... 198-8 Probe Timeout (Seconds) (packetTimeout) ................................... 198-8 Probe Timeout (Minutes) (autoPrTimeOut) ................................... 198-8 Profile (profile) .................................................................... 198-9 Remote Peer (peerAddress) ..................................................... 198-9 Retry Count (autoPrMaxFailures) ............................................... 198-9 Retry Count (autoTrMaxFailures) ............................................... 198-9 Return Code(returnCode) ........................................................ 198-9 Retry Counter(retryCount)....................................................... 198-9 Swap Label (swapLabel).......................................................... 198-9 Targeted Sessions Allowed (targettedSessions) .............................. 198-9 Timeout (seconds) (timeOut)................................................... 198-10 Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy) ..................................... 198-10 Tree Trace (autoRowStatus).................................................... 198-10 Tunnel Down Damp Time (seconds) (tunnelDownDampTime) ............. 198-10 Tunneling Enabled (tunnelingEnabled) ....................................... 198-10 Type ................................................................................ 198-10
199 Common network navigation tree parameters

199.1
199-1
199-2 199-2 199-2 199-2 199-2 199-3 199-3 199-3 199-3 199-4 199-4 199-4 199-5 199-5 199-5 199-5 199-5 199-6 199-6 199-7 199-7 199-7 199-7 199-8 199-8 199-8 199-8 199-8 199-9 199-9
cv
Common network navigation tree parameters .................................. Action (action)..................................................................... Administrative State (administrativeState) ................................... Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast) .............................. Auto-Assign ID (id) ................................................................ BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) ....................................................... Broadcast (broadcast) ............................................................ Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat) ............................... Cflowd Type (cflowdType)....................................................... Class (rtrInterfaceClass).......................................................... Constraint Admin State (mCacConstAdminState) ............................ Description (description)......................................................... Disallow IGP (disallowIgp) ....................................................... Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId) ................................................. Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState) ..................................... Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync) ................................ Family (family) .................................................................... Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart) ............................................. Group IP Address .................................................................. Group IP Address (groupAddress) ............................................... Group IP Address (groupIPAddress)............................................. Helper Mode (grHelperMode).................................................... IGP Inhibit (igpInhibit)............................................................ IGP Shortcut (igpShortcut) ....................................................... Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId)................................................ Inherit Value ....................................................................... Interface Name (routerName)................................................... IP Address (primaryIpAddress) .................................................. IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence) ............................ IPv6 Allowed (ipv6Allowed)......................................................
May 2009
Contents
Key (key) ........................................................................... 199-9 Lease Populate (leasePopulate) ................................................ 199-9 LDP (ldp)........................................................................... 199-10 LDP Synchronization Timer (ldpSyncTimer) .................................. 199-10 MAC Address (physicalAddress) ................................................ 199-10 Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth) ............. 199-10 Mask Reply (maskReply)......................................................... 199-11 Minimum TTL Value (minTTLValue) ........................................... 199-11 Maximum TTL (autoTrMaxTtl) .................................................. 199-11 Multicast Import (multicastImport)............................................ 199-11 Name (displayedName).......................................................... 199-12 Network Policy ID (networkPolicyId) .......................................... 199-12 Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig)....................... 199-12 Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem)..................... 199-12 Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) .................................. 199-12 Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) ..................... 199-12 Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) .............................. 199-12 Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable).......................... 199-13 Packet Too Big (packetTooBig)................................................. 199-13 Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) ....................... 199-13 Param Problem (paramProblem)............................................... 199-13 Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) ..................... 199-13 Physical Address (physicalAddress) ............................................ 199-14 PIM RP Delayed Up Period (pimRPDelayedUpPeriod) ....................... 199-14 Policy 1 (policy1) ................................................................. 199-14 Policy 2 (policy2) ................................................................. 199-14 Policy 3 (policy3) ................................................................. 199-14 Policy 4 (policy4) ................................................................. 199-14 Policy 5 (policy5) ................................................................. 199-15 Preference (preference) ........................................................ 199-15 Prefix Length (prefixLength) ................................................... 199-15 Primary (isPrimary) .............................................................. 199-16 Redirects (redirects)............................................................. 199-16 Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) ................................... 199-16 Router ID (routingInstanceId) .................................................. 199-16 Server 1 (server1) ................................................................ 199-16 Server 2 (server2) ................................................................ 199-16 Server 3 (server3) ................................................................ 199-17 Server 4 (server4) ................................................................ 199-17 Server 5 (server5) ................................................................ 199-17 Server 6 (server6) ................................................................ 199-17 Server 7 (server7) ................................................................ 199-17 Server 8 (server8) ................................................................ 199-17 Service ID (serviceID) ............................................................ 199-17 Subnet Mask (netMask) .......................................................... 199-17 Tag (staticRouteTag) ............................................................ 199-17 TE Metric (teMetric) ............................................................. 199-18 TE Metric Enabled (teMetricEnabled) ......................................... 199-18 Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) ............................................... 199-18 Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) ...................... 199-18 Timeout (seconds) (timeOut)................................................... 199-18 Trusted (Trusted) ................................................................ 199-18
cvi May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Contents
TTL Expired (ttlExpired) ........................................................ 199-19 TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) ............................... 199-19 Type ................................................................................ 199-19 Type (authenticationType) ..................................................... 199-19 Type (interfaceType) ............................................................ 199-20 Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) ............. 199-20 Unicast Import (unicastImport) ................................................ 199-20 Unreachables (unreachables) .................................................. 199-21 Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) ......................... 199-21
Glossary
Index
May 2009
cvii
Contents
cviii
May 2009
May 2009
May 2009
68.1 5620 SAM Parameter Guide overview
68-2
May 2009
68-1
68.1

The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide provides:
parameter descriptions parameter options and option descriptions parameter and option dependencies
Read-only parameters and child forms where there are no configurable parameters are not documented. See the 5620 SAM User Guide for configuration information about the functionality that is not documented in this guide. The parameter guide also maps 5620 SAM GUI parameter names to their equivalent 5620 SAM-O OSS property names.
Audience
The parameter guide is intended for network planners, administrators, operators, third-party OSS system developers, and technical support staff using the 5620 SAM client GUI and the 5620 SAM-O.
5620 SAM Parameter Guide structure

The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide uses a GUI-based structure based on the main menu and the navigation tree, as shown in Figure 68-1.
Figure 68-1 5620 SAM Parameter Guide structure for the main menu
Volumes
Volume Chapters
Chapters
17549
Each volume maps to a 5620 SAM main menu options or navigation tree view. Each chapter maps to a submenu or a child form option. Chapters describe the
parameters on the submenu or child form, and on the forms that are opened from the submenu or child form. Parameters are in alphabetical order. Parameters are documented in their logical home. For example, even though you can access port configuration parameters from some service creation forms, the port configuration form parameters are documented in the equipment navigation tree volume/Port parameters chapter.
68-2
May 2009
Searching for information

The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide provides several searching mechanisms.
For PDF documentation, search for 5620 SAM GUI or 5620 SAM-O OSS
parameter names using the full text search functionality. Use the index to search for 5620 SAM GUI parameter names in alphabetical order. For InfoPort documentation, search for 5620 SAM GUI or 5620 SAM-O OSS parameter names using the InfoPort search Topic or Title option. Use the index to search for 5620 SAM GUI parameter names in alphabetical order. A standard table of contents is provided with each documentation format.
Procedure 68-1 To view 5620 SAM Parameter Guide parameter descriptions from the 5620 SAM User Guide
You can click on a parameter name in a 5620 SAM User Guide procedure to open the matching parameter description in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide. Ensure the following:
the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide and 5620 SAM User Guide are located and opened from the same directory Adobe Reader Release 5.0 or later is installed
To view parameter descriptions when the 5620 SAM User Guide and the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide are open: i ii iii Open the 5620 SAM User Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Open the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Click on a parameter name in a procedure in the 5620 SAM User Guide. The parameter description is displayed in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.
To view parameter descriptions when only the 5620 SAM User Guide is open: i ii Open the 5620 SAM User Guide PDF using Adobe Acrobat. Click on a parameter name in a procedure in the 5620 SAM User Guide. The 5620 SAM User Guide closes and the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide opens to display the parameter description. Double-click on the Previous View button in Adobe Acrobat to re-open the 5620 SAM User Guide. The 5620 SAM User Guide opens and displays the parameter that you clicked on in step ii. Click on the same parameter name that you click on in step ii. The parameter description is displayed in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide.
iii
iv
May 2009
68-3
5620 SAM GUI and 5620 SAM-O OSS parameters

The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide maps 5620 SAM parameter names to their equivalent 5620 SAM-O OSS XML property names using the following format: 5620 SAM GUI Parameter Name (equivalent OSS property name). The equivalent of 5620 SAM GUI parameters on the 5620 SAM-O OSS are generally called properties. This document does not to provide a detailed mapping of 5620 SAM GUI and equivalent 5620 SAM-O OSS functionality. However, the 5620 SAM GUI functionality generally maps to 5620 SAM-O OSS functionality. Table 68-1 shows an example using the 5620 SAM Collection Interval parameter.
Table 68-1 5620 SAM parameter to 5620 SAM-O property mapping
5620 SAM GUI Policy main menu option/Accounting Policy submenu option Accounting Policy form Collection Interval parameter 5620 SAM-O OSS Accounting package Policy class collectionInterval property
Some XML properties use standard XML schemas for the property value, such as a string or integer. However, some XML properties use other XML schemas, such as bitmasks, to represent property values. These extended property values are not referenced in the parameter guide. See the 5620 SAM-O XML Online Reference for more information about 5620 SAM-O packages, classes, and properties.
Functionality not documented in the 5620 SAM Parameter Guide

The following 5620 SAM main menu options are not documented because there are not configurable parameters:
Window Help
The following buttons are not documented:
Add Apply Cancel Edit OK
Remove Reset Save Select View
When no default value is provided for the parameter, this is not indicated in the parameter description. If a parameter does not list a default value, the parameter most likely does not have a default value. Some parameters that require a percentage (%) input may support non-integer values, such as 48.15. This is generally not indicated in the provided range values.
68-4 May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Application menu parameters
May 2009
May 2009
69.1 User Preferences parameters
69-2
May 2009
69-1
69.1
User Preferences parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the User Preference form and its child forms.
Access Interface Encap Value (Dot1q only)

The Access Interface Encap Value (Dot1q only) parameter specifies whether the Auto-Assign ID parameter is the default parameter for Dot1 Q encapsulation. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Apply User Span of Control

The Apply User Span of Control parameters specifies if the GUI will automatically filter out objects that are not in your span of control when a simple filter list window is displayed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Default Polling Interval (Seconds)

The Default Polling Interval parameter specifies the default interval, in seconds, for the polling interval for real-time statistics in the Statistics Plotter form. The range is 10 to 3600. The default is 10.
Maximum Data Retention Time (Seconds)

The Maximum Data Retention Time (Seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds to keep statistics data in the Statistics Plotter form. The range is 3600 to 86400. The default is 43200.
Populate Entire Properties Form on Opening

The Populate Entire Properties Form on Opening parameter specifies whether all child objects of a service are immediately loaded. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default)

The 5620 SAM client GUI displays the service configuration form more quickly when child objects are not immediately loaded. When you click on a service configuration form tab button, such as Components or Sites, then the most recent information is loaded.
69-2
May 2009
Show Alarm Flags

The Show Alarm Flags parameter specifies whether the monitoring flag panel toolbar at the top of the Dynamic alarm list Alarm Window is displayed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Show Toolbar

The Show Toolbar parameter specifies whether the toolbar at the top of the window is displayed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Show Correlated Alarms

The Show Correlated Alarms parameter specifies whether alarms are correlated. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Specify # of Items Per Page

The Specify # of Items Per Page parameter specifies the number of items per page. Only the first 20 objects associated with the search will be displayed when the list form opens. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Suppress Containing Window Warning

The Show Alarm Flags parameter specifies whether containing window warnings are suppressed. The options are:

When a child object configuration form is launched from a parent object, and the child object configuration is changed, a warning message opens. The warning message indicates that changes to the child form are not committed until they are applied in the parent object. You must acknowledge the message. You can use workspace preferences to turn off the warning message. You continue to receive a warning message that changes must be applied for parent objects before you can close the parent object configuration form.
May 2009
69-3
Suppress Template Generation Message

The Suppress Template Generation Message parameter specifies whether template generation windows are suppressed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Turn on Audible Alarms

The Turn on Audible Alarms parameter specifies whether there is an alarm bell when an incoming alarm is registered. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled
69-4
May 2009
Create menu parameters
70 Create VPLS parameters 71 Create VLL parameters 72 Create VPRN parameters 73 Create IES parameters 74 Create VLAN parameters 75 Create Mirror parameters 76 Create Service From Template parameters 77 Create Topology Group parameters 78 Create Physical Link parameters 79 Common Create menu parameters
May 2009
May 2009
70.1 Create VPLS parameters
70-2
May 2009
70-1
70.1
Create VPLS parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create VPLS service forms.
Note This chapter also describes parameters common to the
Service Template form and child forms. Service templates are intended for use in the 5620 SAM GUI. Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the 5620 SAM-O XML classes and methods associated with service templates.
AAL5 Encapsulation
See AAL5 Encapsulation (atmEncapsulation) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Accounting Policy ID
See Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Administrative State
See Administrative State (administrativeState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Administrative ISID (isid)

The Administrative ISID parameter specifies a 24-bit service instance identifier for this service. As part of the Provider Backbone Bridging frames, it is used at the destination PE as a demultiplexor field. The default value of -1 is used to indicate that the value of this object is unspecified. The range is -1 to 16777215. The default is -1.
Address ID (index)
See Address ID (index) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)

See Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Aggregation
See Aggregation (aggregation) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-2
May 2009
Aging Enabled (agingEnabled)

The Aging Enabled parameter specifies whether learned MAC addresses within a VPLS instance are aged out when no packets are sourced from the MAC address for a specified period of time. The specified time is determined by the Local Age Time (seconds) and the Remote Age Time (seconds) parameters. The options are:
true (default) false ANCP String

See ANCP String (ancpkeyString) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
ARP Reply Agent (arpReplyAgent)

The ARP Reply Agent parameter specifies whether an ARP response mechanism is enabled in the device for ARP requests destined for static or dynamic hosts associated with the SAP. The device responds to each ARP request using the host MAC address as both the source MAC address in the Ethernet header and the destination hardware address in the ARP header. In the event that both a static host and a dynamic host share the same IP address and MAC address, the device retains the host information until both the static and dynamic entries are removed. Enabling the ARP Reply Agent parameter forces all the ARP request and reply messages received on the SAP to be evaluated according to the current anti-spoof filter rules. After you enable the ARP Reply Agent parameter, you can configure only static hosts that have both an IP address and a MAC address. The ARP Reply Agent parameter is configurable when all of the existing static hosts on the SAP have both an IP address and a MAC address specified. Table 70-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 70-1 ARP Reply Agent parameter
Option disabled (default) (1 of 2) Option description Disables the ARP response mechanism. Dependencies
May 2009
70-3
Option enabled
Option description Enables the ARP response mechanism.
Dependencies All existing static hosts on the SAP must have both an IP address and a MAC address specified. The SAP must support Ethernet encapsulation.
Enabled With Subscr Ident
Enables the ARP response mechanism and configures it to discard ARP requests that are targeted for a known host on the same SAP with the same subscriber identification. For DHCP subscriber hosts, the subscriber identification information is parsed from the Option 82 circuit ID and remote ID suboptions. For static subscribers, the subscriber identification is part of the static host configuration.
The SAP must support Ethernet encapsulation.
(2 of 2)
ARP Timeout (seconds) (arpTimeout)

The ARP Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the minimum time, in seconds, that an ARP entry learned on the IP interface is stored in the ARP table. An ARP entry is automatically refreshed when an ARP request or gratuitous ARP is received from an IP host; otherwise the ARP entry is aged from the ARP table then this parameter is set to 0, and APR aging is disabled.The range is 0 to 65535. The default is 14400.
ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling

See ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling (atmOamAlarmCellHandling) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Auto-Assign ID
See Auto-Assign ID in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Automatic SDP Binding Creation

See Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Backbone STP (backbonePipStp)

The Backbone STP parameter specifies whether STP is enabled on this Backbone VPLS site instance. The options are:
Up Down (default)
70-4
May 2009
Auto Select Tunnels

See Auto Select Tunnels (autoSelectTunnel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
BGP Administrative State (administrativeState)

The BGP Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state of the BGP Autodiscovery on this VPLS site instance. The default is Down.
BGP Administrative Status (bgpAdAdminStatus)

The BGP Administrative Status parameter specifies the administrative status of the BGP AD functionality. When this attribute is set to Up, the option to set a BGP AD Service Identification VPLS-ID will be displayed on the service. Note that even when the BGP Administrative Status parameter is set to Up at the service level, you must still enable and configure the individual BGP AD objects that are at the Service Instance (Site) level. The BGP Administrative Status can only be enabled at creation of the service. The default is Down.
Block On Mesh SDP Failure (blockOnMeshFail)

The Block On Mesh SDP Failure parameter specifies that the operational status of this spoke SDP will consider the operational status of associated mesh SDPs on this service site. If there are no mesh SDPs in the service, this parameter is ignored. When this parameter is enabled, then the operational status of this spoke SDP will be Down, until the operational status of at least one mesh SDP in this service is Up. When this parameter is not enabled, the operational status of this spoke SDP does not consider the operational status of any mesh SDPs in the service. The parameter is only displayed when the spoke is not under an endpoint. This functionality cannot be enabled when STP is enabled on the spoke. It is supported on the 7750/7450/7710 6.0 R1 nodes. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Bridge Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay)

The Bridge Forward Delay (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds that a port or a SAP spends in the Listening and Learning states during the transition from the Disabled State to the Forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30. The default is 15. The state transition flow for a SAP from a Disabled state to a point where the SAP is operational is: Disabled > Listening > Learning > Forwarding When the Forward Delay parameter is set to 15 s, the normal operation of the spanning tree state machine stays in the Listening state for 15 s and in the Learning state for 15 s. The Disabled and Forwarding states do not have transition times; they are steady-state conditions of a port or a SAP. This means that when operationally up, a SAP will take 30 s to reach the Forwarding state.
May 2009
70-5
Modifying the bridge-level parameters must be done within the constraints of the following two formulas:
2 (Bridge Forward Delay 1.0 s) >= Bridge Max Age Bridge Max Age >= 2 (Bridge Hello Time + 1.0 s) Bridge Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime)
The Bridge Hello Time (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time between the transmission of configuration BPDUs by the root bridge. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2. Note that modifying the bridge-level parameters must be done within the constraints of the following two formulas:
2 (Bridge Forward Delay 1.0 s) >= Bridge Max Age Bridge Max Age >= 2 (Bridge Hello Time + 1.0 s) Bridge Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge)
The Bridge Max Age (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds that a configuration BPDU is valid. The aging of BPDUs allows detection, at the protocol layer, of removed bridges or logical connectivity loss. The range is 6 to 40. The default is 20. Note that modifying the bridge-level parameters must be done within the constraints of the following two formulas:
2 (Bridge Forward Delay 1.0 s) >= Bridge Max Age Bridge Max Age >= 2 (Bridge Hello Time + 1.0 s) Bridge Max Hops (bridgeMaxHops)
The Bridge Max Hops parameter specifies the maximum number of hops between bridges in the MSTP region before a BDPU times out and the device removes the port information. The range is 1 to 40. The default is 20.
Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat)

See Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Circuit-id Suboption (infoCircuitId)

The Circuit-id Suboption parameter specifies whether the Option 82 circuit ID suboption is included in the DHCP relay packet and what format the suboption must take. The Option 82 circuit ID suboption contains information that uniquely identifies the device from which the packet was received. Table 70-2 describes the parameter options.
70-6
May 2009
70 Create VPLS parameters Table 70-2 Circuit-id Suboption parameter

Option no circuit-id (default) circuit-id Option description The suboption is left blank. Links the following information in a tuple to be sent:
access node ID service ID interface name SAP ID
CCM Messages
See CCM Messages (ccEnable) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Clear Forced Switchover

The Clear Forced Switchover button allows you to clear a manual switchover from a redundant spoke SDP binding back to an active spoke SDP binding that was previously initiated by using the Force Switchover button. You must clear any such manually forced switchovers by using the Clear Forced Switchover button after the active spoke SDP binding has been restored. The system will not be able to switch over automatically to other active spoke SDP bindings if this is not done, even if the redundant spoke SDP binding subsequently goes down. The Active State read-only display will indicate the change in status for the SDP binding when you press the Clear Forced Switchover button.
Collect Accounting Statistics

See Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Control Word (controlWord)

The Control Word parameter specifies the use of a control word to prevent VPLS packet hashing in ECMP-capable networks. The control word is exchanged with the LDP peer during pseudowire negotiation. This function also applies to MVPLS. The options are:
Preferred Not Preferred (default) Default Gateway IP Address (defaultGatewayIpAddr)

The Default Gateway IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the default gateway for this VPLS site. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation. There is no default.
May 2009
70-7
Default Gateway MAC Address (defaultGatewayMacAddr)

The Default Gateway MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the default gateway for this VPLS site. Specify a MAC address in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Default Mesh VC ID
See Default Mesh VC ID (defaultMeshVcId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Description
See Description (description) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Destination Node ID
See Tunnel Termination Site (tunnelSelectionTerminationSiteId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Direction
See Direction (direction)in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Discard Unknown Destinations (discardUnknownDestinations)

The Discard Unknown Destinations parameter specifies whether packets with destination MAC addresses that are not learned are forwarded to all interfaces on the device. When the parameter is enabled, all unknown destination packets are forwarded on all LSPs to the participating devices of the service until the target responds and the MAC address is learned by the router that is associated with the service. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Discard Unknown Source (discardUnknownSource)

The Discard Unknown Source parameter specifies whether a packet with an unknown source MAC address is forwarded to all interfaces on the device. When the parameter is set to true, no unknown source packets are forwarded to the participating devices of the service. The options are:
false (default) true Displayed Name

See Displayed Name (displayedName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Dynamic Topology Discovery

See Dynamic Topology Discovery (dynamicTopDiscAdminState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Edge Capability Detection (autoEdge)

The Edge Capability Detection parameter specifies whether the edge port characteristics of the access interface are automatically detected. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Edge Port (rapidStart)

The Edge Port parameter specifies whether the access interface is an STP edge port. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Egress Filter ID

See Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Label
See Egress Label (egressLabel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only

See Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only (egressQinqMarkTopBitsOnly) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Policy ID
See Egress Policy ID (egressPolicyId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Scheduler Name

See Egress Scheduler Name (egressSchedulerName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
70-9
Enable
The Enable parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the configurability of the Enable Lease Populate parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Snooping parameter is enabled. The options are:
enabled disabled (default)

When the parameter is enabled, you can configure the Enable Lease Populate parameter. Disabling the parameter is equivalent to configuring the Enable Lease Populate parameter with a value of 0.
Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter)

The Enable Auto ACL Filters parameter specifies whether the device can automatically build anti-spoofing filter lists. The range is 0 to 2000. The default is 0. When this parameter is set to non-zero, auto-filtering is enabled and a filter allowing only PPPoE or DHCP traffic is established on the interface. The non-zero value indicates the maximum number of entries that the auto-filter can have. These entries are created by the agent upon snooping a valid DHCP reply packet and are used to allow traffic sourced by the given DHCP-assigned IP address.
Enable DHCP Relay

See Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Lease Populate (leasePopulate)

The Enable Lease Populate parameter specifies the number of DHCP lease state entries allowed for the VPLS SAP. The Enable Lease Populate parameter is configurable when the Snooping parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 8000. There is no default. Setting the parameter to 0 specifies that dynamic host lease state management for the interface is disabled, and renders the parameter unconfigurable by disabling the Enable parameter.
Fast-leave (fastLeave)
The Fast-leave parameter specifies whether the status of IGMP or MLD fast-leave processing is enabled, that is, whether fast-leave is allowed on this SAP. If it is enabled, the system prunes the port on which an IGMP or MLD leave message has been received, without waiting for the Group Specific Query to timeout. The options are:
70-10
May 2009
Force L2PT on Managed L2 Access Interface (forceL2Pt)

The Force L2PT on Managed L2 Access Interface parameter specifies if L2 Protocol Termination is enforced for all the managed SAPs of an L2 Access Interface. Note that this parameter is only applicable to Management-VPLS scenarios. Setting the value of this parameter on an L2 Access Interface to true forces all its managed SAPs to have L2 Protocol Termination enabled. If this access interface already has managed SAPs with L2 Protocol Termination disabled, you can not set the Force L2PT on Managed L2 Access Interface parameter to true. The options are:
false (default) true Force Switchover

The Force Switchover button allows you to force a switchover of the active SDP binding to a redundant SDP binding under an endpoint for the VPLS. When you select this, the redundant SDP binding will become active and the Active State read-only display will indicate the change in status for the SDP binding. A redundant spoke SDP binding must be in the operational up state to be able to perform this action. Note that you must clear any such manually forced switchovers by using the Clear Forced Switchover button after the active spoke SDP binding has been restored. The system will not be able to switch over automatically to other active spoke SDP bindings if this is not done, even if the redundant spoke SDP binding subsequently goes down.
Force VLAN VC Forwarding (forceVlanVcForwarding)

The Force VLAN VC Forwarding parameter specifies whether or not VLAN VC Forwarding is forced in the data path for the SDP for which the VC Type parameter that is set to Ethernet. When it is set to True, then VLAN VC forwarding is enforced. The default is False.
Formatted VSI ID Prefix (vsiIdPrefixIpFormat)

The Formatted VSI ID Prefix parameter is the VSI ID Prefix, but in an IP format for better readability. This is an IPv4 address. If the value is set to 0.0.0.0, this is interpreted by the node as using the System IP Address of the NE. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Formatted VSI ID RD (vsiRdCli)

The Formatted VSI ID RD parameter is the VsiRd parameter, but in a CLI readable format, [ip-addr:comm-val] or [as-number:ext-comm-val]. Setting this to 0:0 means that the node will use the same value as the VPLS ID. The default is 0:0.
General query interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval)

The General query interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval at which the system sends general queries for the SAP or SDP. The range is 2 to 1024. The default is 125.
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 70-11
Group Address (grpAddr)

The Group Address parameter specifies the IP multicast group address. For IGMP snooping this is an IPv4 address and the range is 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. For MLD snooping this is an IPv6 address that is not link-local or node-local. There is no default.
High Watermark (%)

Table 70-3 lists where to find more information about the High Watermark (%) parameter.
Table 70-3 High Watermark (%) parameter
Parameter High Watermark for FIB High Watermark for MFIB See High Watermark (%) (highWatermark) in this section High Watermark (%) (mfibTableHighWatermark) in this section
High Watermark (%) (highWatermark)

The High Watermark (%) parameter specifies the threshold percentage at which an alarm is raised based on whether the FIB reaches the maximum number of MAC addresses that it can contain. The maximum number of addresses for the FIB is determined by the value of the Size (entries) parameter. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 95.
High Watermark (%) (mfibTableHighWatermark)

The High Watermark (%) parameter specifies the threshold percentage at which an alarm is raised based on whether the MFIB reaches the maximum number of MAC addresses that it can contain. The maximum number of addresses for the MFIB is determined by the value of the Table size (entries) parameter. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 95.
Hold Multiplier
See Hold Multiplier (holdMultiplier) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
ID
See ID (mepId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
ID
See ID (tunnelID) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-12
May 2009
I/F MAC Address (interfaceMacAddress)

The I/F MAC Address parameter specifies the 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP in the form aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff or aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. Any non-broadcast, non-multicast MAC addresses and non-IEEE reserved MAC addresses are allowed values. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
IGMP Version (igmpVersion)

The IGMP Version parameter specifies the version of IGMP that is running on the SAP or SDP binding. The options are:
Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.3 (default) Ignore Standby Signalling (ignoreStandbySignalling)

The Ignore Standby Signalling parameter specifies whether or not the node will ignore a standby bit received from an T-LDP peer. This parameter can also be set on a spoke SDP binding in VPLS. However, if the spoke SDP binding is associated with an endpoint, this parameter can only be changed at the endpoint level. You can not add a spoke SDP binding to an endpoint and have this parameter in conflict with its counterpart on the endpoint. Therefore, when you create a spoke SDP binding to an endpoint, this parameter will automatically inherit its value from its endpoint counterpart.
Import Policy (importPolicy)

The Import Policy parameter specifies the IGMP or MLD packet filter policy. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Ingress Filter ID
See Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Label
See Ingress Label (ingressLabel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P

See Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Policy ID
See Ingress Policy ID (ingressPolicyId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
70-13
Ingress Scheduler Name

See Ingress Scheduler Name (ingressSchedulerName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Inherit Value
See Inherit Value (inheritanceMask) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Inner Encapsulation Value

See Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI)

See Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) (vci) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Instance Index (id)

The Instance Index parameter identifies the MST instance. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 0.
Interface ID (id)
See Interface ID (id) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
IP Address (ipAddress)
Table 70-4 lists where to find more information about the IP Address parameter.
Table 70-4 IP Address parameter
Parameter IP Address for L2 management interface IP Address for GSMP neighbor See IP Address (ipAddress) in this section. IP Address (ipAddress) in section 79.1.
The IP Address parameter specifies an IP address for the L2 management interface for VPLS. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation. There is no default.
Keep Alive (seconds)

See Keep-Alive (seconds) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-14
May 2009
Learning Enabled (learningEnabled)

The Learning Enabled parameter specifies whether MAC address learning is enabled. MAC address learning is performed to reduce the amount of unknown destination MAC address flooding. When the parameter is enabled, each router learns the source MAC addresses of traffic that arrives on access and network ports and populates the learned addresses in a FIB for each VPLS instance. The options are:
true (default) false Limit Mac Move (limitMacMove)

The Limit Mac Move parameter specifies whether the MAC relearn rate is blocked on the SAP. When the parameter is set to Blockable, the agent monitors the MAC relearn rate on this SAP, and it blocks it when the relearn rate exceeds the number defined by the Move Frequency parameter. When the value is Non-Blockable, the SAP is not blocked, and another SAP is blocked instead. The options are:
Blockable (default) Non-Blockable Limit Mac Move Level (limitMacMoveLevel)

The Limit Mac Move level parameter specifies the hierarchy in which SAPs are blocked when a MAC move limit is exceeded. The functionality of this parameter works when the parameter value for Limit Mac Move (limitMacMove) on the port is set to blockable. The options are:
Primary Secondary Tertiary (default) Link Type (linkType)

The Link Type parameter specifies the type of link used for the STP. The options are:
Point To Point (default) Shared Local Address

See Local Address (localAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
70-15
Local Age Time (seconds) (localAgeTime)

The Local Age Time (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds to age out FIB entries on access interfaces. Generally, the Remote Age Time (seconds) parameter is set to a longer period than the Local Age Time (seconds) parameter to reduce the amount of flooding required for destination unknown MAC addresses. The range is 60 to 86 400. The default is 300.
Low Priority Defect

See Low-priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Low Watermark (%)

Table 70-5 lists where to find more information about the Low Watermark (%) parameter.
Table 70-5 Low Watermark (%) parameter
Parameter Low Watermark for FIB Low Watermark for MFIB See Low Watermark (%) (lowWatermark) in this section Low Watermark (%) (mfibTableLowWatermark) in this section
Low Watermark (%) (lowWatermark)

The Low Watermark (%) parameter specifies the threshold percentage of the total FIB size limit at which an alarm that was previously raised by a table full condition is cleared by the system. The FIB size limit is specified by the Size (entries) parameter. For example, when an alarm is raised because the number of FIB entries exceeds the percentage set for the High Watermark parameter, and the number of FIB entries in the system drops to a value below the Low Watermark percentage, the alarm is cleared. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 90.
Low Watermark (%) (mfibTableLowWatermark)

The Low Watermark (%) parameter specifies the threshold percentage of the total MFIB size limit at which an alarm that was previously raised by a table full condition is cleared by the system. The MFIB size limit is specified by the Table size (entries) parameter. For example, when an alarm is raised because the number of MFIB entries exceeds the percentage set for the High Watermark parameter, and the number of MFIB entries in the system drops to a value below the Low Watermark percentage, the alarm is cleared. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 90.
MAC Address
See MAC Address (macAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-16
May 2009
MAC Flush on fail (macFlushOnFail)

The MAC Flush on fail parameter determines whether the VPLS site clears MAC entries if an interface fails. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) MAC Monitoring

See MAC Monitoring (macMonitoring) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
MAC Pinning (macPinning)

The MAC Pinning parameter specifies whether or not MAC pinning is active on the SAP, or the mesh or spoke circuit. The options are:
disabled (default) enabled

For a SAP or mesh or spoke circuit that belongs to a residential split horizon group, the value is set to enabled by the 5620 SAM and cannot be changed by the operator. Setting the value to enabled disables the relearning of MAC addresses on other SAPs or mesh or spoke circuits within the same VPLS; the MAC address remains attached to the SAP for the duration of its age timer. This situation only affects the MAC addresses learned through the normal MAC address learning process and not the MAC address entries learned through DHCP.
Maintenance Association ID
See MA ID (maintenanceAssociationId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Maintenance Domain ID
See Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth)

The Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter specifies the bandwidth pre-reserved for mandatory type BTV channels on a given interface. The Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter combines with the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter to establish the bandwidth assigned to traffic on an interface using a multicast CAC policy. Table 70-6 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
70-17
70 Create VPLS parameters Table 70-6 Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter

Mandatory Bandwidth 0 1 Equal to the value in the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter Less than the value in the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter Unconstrained Bandwidth 0 1 Result No channels are allowed. All mandatory and optional channels are allowed. All mandatory channels configured for the multicast CAC policy associated with the interface are allowed. Optional channels are not allowed. All mandatory channels configured for the multicast CAC policy associated with the interface are allowed. Optional channels are allowed depending on bandwidth availability.
The range is 1 to 22 147 483 647. The default is 1. When the Unconstrained Bandwidth parameter is set to either 1 or 0, the Mandatory Bandwidth parameter defaults to the same value. The Mandatory Bandwidth value must be less than or equal to the Unconstrained Bandwidth value.
Max VLAN ID (maxVlanId)

The Max Vlan ID parameter specifies the top end of the VLAN ID range. It specifies the maximum VPLS VC ID that can be associated with and managed by a specific MVPLS SAP. The range is 0 to 4094 or 2 to 4092, depending on the managed device. The 7250 SAS supports a range of 2 to 4092.
Max Number of Groups (maxGroups)

The Max Number of Groups parameter specifies the maximum number of groups for which PIM snooping can have a downstream state based on the received PIM snooping joins on this interface. The range is 0 to 16000. The default is 0. the maximum number of groups that can be statically or dynamically learned. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 0, which means that no limit is imposed.
Max.number of groups (maxNbrGroups)

The Max. number of groups parameter specifies the maximum number of groups that can be statically or dynamically learned. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 0, which means that no limit is imposed.
Max. Response interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval)

The Max. Response interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum time between IGMP or MLD queries. The range is 1 to 1023. The default is 10.
70-18
May 2009
Max. Response interval group queries (tenths of seconds) (lastMemberInterval)

The Max. Response interval group queries (tenths of seconds) parameter specifies the interval at which group-specific query packets are sent. The range is 1 to 50. The default is 10.
Max. VLAN Tag (max)

The Max. VLAN Tag parameter specifies the maximum number of VLANs that can be associated with the MVPLS SAP. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 0, which means that the parameter value is unspecified.
Maximum BPDUs (PDUs/Hello Interval) (stpMaxBPDUs)

The Maximum BPDUs parameter specifies the hold count for the STP. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 6.
Maximum Entries (maxEntries)

The Maximum Entries parameter specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries in the FIB. The range is 0 to 131071 for the 7450 ESS, Release 4.0 or later. The range is 0 to 196607 for the 7750 SR, Release 4.0 or later, in chassis mode C. The default is 0.
Maximum FIB Entries (maxNumOfFibEntries)

The Maximum Entries parameter specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed for this endpoint. The value 0 means no limit for this endpoint. The range is 0 to 196607, When the chassis mode is not 'C', the maximum value is 131071. The default is 0.
Min VLAN ID (minVlanId)

The Min Vlan ID parameter specifies the low end of the VLAN ID range. It specifies the minimum VPLS VC ID that can be associated with and managed by a specific MVPLS SAP. The range is 0 to 4094 or 2 to 4092, depending on the managed device. The 7250 SAS supports a range of 2 to 4092.
Min. VLAN Tag (min)

The Min. VLAN Tag parameter specifies the minimum number of VLANs that can be associated with the MVPLS SAP. This parameter must be set to a value less than or equal to the Max. VLAN Tag parameter value. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 0, which means that the parameter value is unspecified.
MLD version (mldVersion)

The MLD version parameter indicates the version (either 1 or 2) of the MLD protocol that is sent by the active MLD Querier.
Monitor Access Interface Operational State

See Monitor Access Interface Operational State (monitorAccessInterfaceOper) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Move Frequency (macMoveFrequency)

The Move Frequency parameter specifies the maximum rate at which MACs can be relearned in the service, before the SAP is disabled to protect the system against undetected loops or duplicate MACs. The rate is calculated as the maximum number of relearns allowed in a 5-second interval. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2.
Mrouter attached (mrouterAttached)

The Mrouter attached parameter specifies whether the port is connected to a subnet with a multicast router. The parameter is mutually exclusive with the Send queries parameter. When you select the parameter, the Send queries parameter is disabled. When the Send queries parameter is enabled, you cannot select the Mrouter attached parameter. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) MRP Admin Status (mrpAdminStatus)

The MRP Admin Status parameter specifies whether the Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) is enabled in this B-VPLS. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) MRP Attribute-Table-High-Watermark (mrpAttrTblHighWatermark)

The MRP Attribute-Table-High-Watermark parameter specifies the utilization of the MRP attribute table of this B-VPLS at which a Table Full alarm will be raised by the agent. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 95.
MRP Attribute-Table-Low-Watermark (mrpAttrTblLowWatermark)

The MRP Attribute-Table-Low-Watermark parameter specifies the utilization of the MRP attribute table of this B-VPLS at which a Table Full alarm will be cleared by the agent. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 90.
MRP Flood Time (seconds) (mrpFloodTime)

The MRP Flood Time (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time in seconds after a status change in this B-VPLS during which traffic is flooded. Once that time expires, traffic will be delivered according to the MRP registrations which exist in the B-VPLS. The value of 0 indicates that no flooding will occur on state changes in the B-VPLS. The range is 0, 3 to 600. The default is 0.
70-20
May 2009
MRP Join Time (tenths of a second) (mrpJoinTime)

The MRP Join Time (tenths of a second) parameter specifies the amount of time in tenths of a second that is the maximum rate at which attribute join messages can be sent on the SDP. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2.
MRP Leave AllTime (tenths of a second) (mrpLeaveAllTime)

The MRP Leave AllTime (tenths of second) parameter specifies the amount of time in tenths of a second that is the frequency where all attribute declarations on the SDP are refreshed. The range is 60 to 300. The default is 100.
MRP Leave Time (tenths of a second) (mrpLeaveTime)

The MRP Leave Time (tenths of second) parameter specifies the amount of time in tenths of a second that a registered attribute is held in the leave state before the registration is removed. The range is 30 to 60. The default is 30.
MRP Max Attributes (mrpMaxAttributes)

The MRP Max Attributes parameter specifies the maximum number of MRP attributes supported in thisB-VPLS. In most cases, the default value is 2048 MRP attributes. For some platform and chassis types, especially single slot chassis, the default value will be lower due to resource constraints. An Inconsistent Value error is returned if an attempt is made to set this object to a value the platform cannot support. The range is 1 to 2048. The default is 2048.
MRP Periodic Enabled (mrpPeriodicEnabled)

The MRP Periodic Enabled parameter specifies whether re-transmission of attribute declarations is enabled. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled MRP Periodic Time (tenths of a second) (mrpPeriodicTime)

The MRP Periodic Time (tenths of second) parameter specifies the amount of time in tenths of a second that is the frequency of re-transmission of attribute declarations. The range is 10 to 100. The default is 10.
MTU
See MTU (mtuValue) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Name (displayedName)
See Name (displayedName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit

See No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
70-21
OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState)

See OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Outer Encapsulation Value

See Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI)

See Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) (vpi) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Path Cost (pathCost)

The Path Cost parameter specifies the STP cost of the path to the root device as seen from this device. The range is 1 to 200 000 000. The default is 10.
Port
See Port (portId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Port Number (portNum)

The Port Number parameter specifies the value of the port number field which is contained in the least significant 12 bits of the 16-bit Port ID parameter that is associated with the current SAP. The range is 0 to 4094 or 2 to 4092, depending on the managed device. The 7250 SAS supports a range of 2 to 4092. The default is 0.
Prefix Length (prefixLength)

The Prefix Length parameter specifies the IPv4 prefix of the IP address of the L2 management interface. The range is 1 to 128. The default is 24.
Primary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMovePrimaryPortsCumulativeFactor)

The Primary Ports Cumulative Factor parameter specifies the maximum periods at which MACs can be relearned in the service. Periods are used to measure the MAC-relearn rate. This rate must be exceeded during consecutive periods before the corresponding ports (SAP and/or spoke-SDP) are blocked. The value of this parameter must be larger than the Secondary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMoveSecondaryPortsCumulativeFactor) The range is 3 to 10. The default is 3.
Priority
Table 70-7 lists where to find more information about the Priority parameter.
70-22
May 2009
70 Create VPLS parameters Table 70-7 Priority parameter

Parameter Priority for site Priority for SAP See Priority (priority) in this section Priority (priority) in this section
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter applies to site objects and specifies the priority portion of the Bridge ID field within outbound BPDUs. It also determines the best BPDU between sent and received messages. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 32 768.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter applies to SAPs and specifies the value of the port priority field which is contained in the most significant 4 bits of the 16-bit Port ID that is associated with the current SAP. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 128.
Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp)

See Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Level for CCM Messages

See Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec)

See Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Type (priorityMarkType)

See Priority Type (priorityMarkType) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Propogate MAC Flush (propagateMacFlush)

Specifies whether MAC flush messages received from the given LDP are propagated to all spoke SDPs and mesh SDPs within the context of this VPLS or MVPLS service. The propagation will follow the split-horizon principle and any data-path blocking in order to avoid the looping of these messages. The options are:
May 2009
70-23
Protected Mac Address (protectedMac)

The Protected Mac Address parameter specifies a MAC address that is added to the list of protected MAC addresses. Specify a unicast MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Query-interval (seconds) (queryInterval)

The Query-interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval at which the system sends general queries for the site. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 125.
Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval)

The Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the frequency at which the MLD Host-Query packets are transmitted. The range is 2 to 1024. The default is 125.
Query source address (querySrcAddress)

The Query source address parameter specifies the link local source IP address for the generation of MLD queries. Specify an IPv6 address in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hex) and d ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Reforwarding Policy (infoAction)

The Reforwarding Policy parameter specifies DHCP Option 82 processing on the L2 SAP. The parameter indicates to the DHCP relay agent what to do when it receives a DHCP request that already has an information option on the packet. Table 70-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 70-8 Reforwarding Policy parameter
Option Keep (default) Option description The existing information is kept on the packet and the device does not add any additional information. On egress, the information option is not removed and is sent to the downstream node. This setup is similar to not having configured DHCP relay at all. If the gateway IP address of the packet received is the same as the address on the device, the packet is dropped. Drop Replace The packet is dropped. On ingress, the existing information option is replaced with the information option from the device. On egress, the information option is removed.
70-24
May 2009
Region Name (regionName)

The Region Name parameter specifies a name for the MSTP region. An MSTP region consists of at least two bridges that run multiple MSTP instances. The region name, region revision, and VLAN-to-instance assignment define the MSTP region. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Region Revision (regionRevision)

The Region Revision parameter specifies an MSTP region configuration revision number. The region name, region revision, and VLAN-to-instance assignment define the MSTP region. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Remote Age Time (seconds) (remoteAgeTime)

The Remote Age Time (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds to age out FIB entries on access interfaces. Generally, the Remote Age Time (seconds) parameter is set to a longer period than the Local Age Time (seconds) parameter to reduce the amount of flooding required for destination unknown MAC addresses. The range is 60 to 86 400. The default is 900.
Remote-id Suboption (infoRemoteId)

The Remote-id Suboption parameter specifies whether the far-end MAC address is inserted in the remote ID suboption of DHCP Option 82. Inserting the MAC address in the suboption allows MAC-based authentication. The options are:
false (default) true Report source address (reportSrcAddress)

The Report source address parameter specifies the IP address for the generation of IGMP or MLD reports. For IGMP, specify a unicast IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. For MLD, specify an IPv6 address in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hex) and d ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Residential (residential)
The Residential parameter indicates whether the split horizon group is a residential split horizon group. A residential split horizon group supports lightweight SAPs. The options are:
May 2009
70-25
Restrict Protected Source (restrictProtectedSource)

The Restrict Protected Source parameter specifies whether packets that enter a SAP are checked for a protected source MAC address. Packets that contain a protected source MAC address are discarded, a trap is generated, and the SAP is put in an operationally down state. The options are:
true false (default)

All the SAPs that belong to a split horizon group that has the Restrict Protected Source parameter set to True are restricted.
Restrict Protected Source Action (restrictProtectedSourceAction)

The Restrict Protected Source Action parameter specifies the action to be taken when packets that contain a protected source MAC address are detected. The options are:
disable (default) alarm only Restrict Unprotected Destination (restrictUnprotectedDestination)

The Restrict Unprotected Destination parameter specifies whether packets that enter a SAP are checked for an unprotected destination MAC address. Packets that contain an unprotected destination MAC address are discarded. The options are:
true false (default) Retry Timeout (macMoveRetryTimeout)

The Retry Timeout parameter specifies the time in seconds that elapses before a SAP that is disabled after exceeding the maximum relearn rate is re-enabled. A value of zero indicates that the SAP will not be automatically re-enabled after being disabled. If the SAP is disabled again after the SAP is re-enabled, the effective retry timeout is doubled in order to avoid thrashing. The range is 0 to 120. The default is 10.
Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference

See Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Return Tunnel Transport

See Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-26
May 2009
Revert Time (second) (revertTime)

The Revert Time (second) parameter specifies the time to wait before trying to revert to the primary spoke SDP defined on the service endpoint, after having failed over to a backup spoke SDP. The range is -1, or 1 to 600 seconds. The default is 0. Selecting the Disable Revert Time (Infinite) check box means the parameter is set to a value of -1, or disabled.
Root Guard (rootGuard)

The Root Guard parameter specifies whether a port is allowed to become an STP root port. The parameter corresponds to the parameter restrictedRole in 802.1Q. The enabled parameter can affect spanning tree connectivity. The options are:
selected not selected (default) Robust count (robustCount)

The Robust count parameter specifies a variable that allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a SAP, an SDP or a site. If a SAP or an SDP is expected to have high packet loss, increase the Robust count parameter value. Packet loss for IGMP or MLD snooping is calculated by subtracting 1 from the Robust count parameter value. Table lists the parameter ranges for different objects. The default is 2 for all object types. Table 70-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 70-9 Robust count parameter
Object SAP or SDP Service site Range 2 to 7 1 to 255
Routing Policy Name (policyStatementName)

The Routing Policy Name parameter specifies the name of the multicast routing policy associated with a VPLS site. This parameter is enabled if the Use Component Package Policy parameter is disabled. You can enter a multicast routing policy name if no multicast routing policy has been configured. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Secondary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMoveSecondaryPortsCumulativeFactor)

The Secondary Ports Cumulative Factor parameter specifies the maximum periods at which MACs can be relearned in the service. Periods are used to measure the MAC-relearn rate. This rate must be exceeded during consecutive periods before the corresponding ports (SAP and/or spoke-SDP) are blocked. The value of this parameter must be smaller than the Primary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMovePrimaryPortsCumulativeFactor). The range is 2 to 9. The default is 2.
May 2009
70-27
Send queries (sendQueries)

The Send queries parameter specifies whether the generation of queries on the SAP is enabled. The parameter is mutually exclusive with the Mrouter attached parameter. When you enable the parameter, the Mrouter attached parameter is disabled. When the Mrouter attached parameter is enabled, the Send queries parameter is disabled. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Send Flush All But Mine (ldpMacFlushNotMine)

The Send Flush All But Mine parameter specifies whether or not an LDP MAC withdraw all but mine message received in the I-VPLS domain should attempt to generate a new LDP MAC withdraw all but mine message in the B-VPLS domain. The message is generated when the parameter is enabled. The net effect of receiving this message in the B-VPLS domain is to instruct the B-site to flush all the VPLS MACs, except for those learned from the I-VPLS sender. However, the final implementation of such flushing is still governed by the MAC Flush on fail parameter that you set on the B-VPLS service site. This functionality complies with the RFC4762 and its behavior is equivalent to the Topology Change Notification in RSTP. The default is not enabled.
Send Flush All From Me (ldpMacFlush)

The Send Flush All From Me parameter specifies whether or not an LDP MAC withdraw all from me message received in the I-VPLS domain should attempt to generate a new LDP MAC withdraw all from me message in the B-VPLS domain. The message is generated when the parameter is enabled. The net effect of receiving this new message in the B-VPLS domain is to instruct the B-site to flush all the VPLS MACs learned from the I-VPLS sender. However, the final implementation of such flushing is still governed by the MAC Flush on fail parameter that you set on the B-VPLS service site. The default is not enabled.
Service ID
See Service ID (serviceID) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Service Name
See Service Name (serviceName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Site ID
See Site ID (siteID) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Size (entries) (size)

The Size (entries) parameter specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries in the FIB. The range is 0 to 196 607. The default is 250.
Snooping (snooping)
The Snooping parameter specifies whether DHCP snooping is enabled for DHCP messages. The default is determined by the managed device. The options are:

The BSA can copy DHCP packets and inspect them to help secure the system. For example, if malicious user A sends an IP packet requesting a video stream intended for user B, any return packets sent to user B could jam Bs connection. Configure DHCP snooping for two purposes.
Insert Option 82 information when the system is not configured for DHCP relay
by enabling DHCP snooping on the SAP closest to the subscriber.
Build a DHCP lease-state table by enabling snooping on the service tunnel

nearest the network egress and on the SAP closest to the subscriber.
Source Address (srcAddr)

The Source Address parameter specifies the IP address of the multicast traffic source. Specify a unicast IP address. For IGMP snooping this is an IPv4 address and the range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. For MLD snooping this is an IPv6 address. There is no default.
Source MAC Address (backboneSrcMac)

The Source MAC Address parameter specifies the Backbone Source MAC-Address for PBB packets. If not provisioned, it defaults to the loopback chassis MAC-Address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
STP Mode (rstpProtocol)

The STP Mode parameter specifies the STP variant used by the VPLS. Table 70-10 describes the parameter options.
Table 70-10 STP Mode parameter
Option RSTP (default) CompDot1w Dot1w MSTP Option description Specifies compliance with IEEE 802.1D-2004 Specifies that the variant operates as RSTP but is backward compatible with IEEE 802.1w-2001 Specifies that the variant is compliant with IEEE 802.1w-2001 Specifies compliance with IEEE 802.1Q-REV/D3.0-04/2005 Dependencies Configurable for MVPLS only
May 2009
70-29
Subscriber ID
See Subscriber ID (subscriberID) in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
Suppress Standby Signalling (suppressStandbySignalling)

The Suppress Standby Signalling parameter specifies whether or not the pseudowire forwarding standby bit is sent to the LDP peer. When the Suppress Standby Signalling parameter is enabled, the pseudowire standby bit will not be sent to T-LDP peer whenever the given spoke is selected as a standby. This allows faster switchover, as the traffic will be sent over this SDP binding and discarded at blocking side of the connection. This is particularly applicable to multicast traffic.
Table size (entries) (mfibTableSize)

The Table size (entries) parameter specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries in the multicast FIB. The range is 0 to 16 383. A value of 0 specifies that there is no limit to the number of entries.
Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference

See Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Tunnel Transport
See Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth)

The Unconstrained Bandwidth parameter specifies the bandwidth assigned to BTV traffic on an interface using a multicast CAC policy. If the default value of 1 is set, then the value will be set to the physical bandwidth available for the interface. If a value of 0 is set, and if a multicast CAC policy is assigned to the interface, BTV traffic from that policy is not allowed on the interface. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths

See Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (useBwReservedPath) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
70-30
May 2009
Use Component Package Policy (useComponentPackagePolicy)

The Use Component Package Policy parameter specifies whether the multicast package policy configured as part of the VPLS component is associated with the VPLS site. If the parameter is disabled, the user can specify a multicast routing policy to associate with the VPLS site in the Routing Policy Name parameter field. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Use Shared Queue

See Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID (subIdIsSapId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
VC ID
See VC ID (vcId) in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
VC Type
See VC Type (VcType) in section 85.1 for the parameter description.
VLAN VC Tag
See VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag) in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
VPLS ID (VplsId)
The value of the VPLS ID parameter specifies the globally-unique VPLS ID for BGP Auto-Discovery in this VPLS service. The BGP Administrative Status parameter cannot be enabled until a VPLS ID has been assigned which is not all zeros. The default is 0:0.
VPLS Mode (L2 Access Interface) (vplsMode)

The VPLS Mode (L2 Access Interface) parameter, which is applicable only to the 7250 SAS-ES and, Release 3.0 R4 or later, specifies the VPLS mode on an Ethernet port or CES card. The parameter can be configured when there is no other SAP configured on the selected Ethernet port or CES card. The options are:
Qualified (default) Unqualified VPLS Tag (vplsTag)

The VPLS Tag parameter specifies the outer encapsulation value for a VPLS SAP on a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA when the VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode) parameter is set to Qualified for Release 2.0 to Release 3.0 R3.1 inclusive, or Enabled for Release 3.0 R4 or later.
May 2009
70-31
The VPLS Tag parameter is also used to create a VLAN object and bind the SAP to the object on a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA for either of the following conditions:
VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode) parameter is set to

Qualified or Unqualified for a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA Release 2.0, to Release 3.0 R3.1 inclusive VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode) parameter is set to Enabled and the VPLS Mode (L2 Access Interface) (vplsMode) parameter is set to Qualified or Unqualified for a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA, Release 3.0 R4 or later Table 70-11 describes the effect of this parameter on the VPLS SAP outer encapsulation and VLAN ID for Qualified and Unqualified modes.
Table 70-11 Effect of the VPLS Tag parameter value on modes
VPLS component SAP outer encapsulation 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA VLAN ID Qualified mode VPLS Tag parameter value VPLS Tag parameter value Unqualified mode Fixed internal value assigned by the 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA VPLS Tag parameter value
The range is 2 to 4092. The default is 0.
70-32
May 2009
71.1 Create VLL parameters
71-2
May 2009
71-1
71.1
Create VLL parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create VLL service forms.
Service Template forms. Service templates are intended for use in the 5620 SAM GUI. Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the 5620 SAM-O XML classes and methods associated with service templates.
AAL5 Encapsulation
Aal-5 Frame Aware (concatCellAal5Fr)

The Aal-5 Frame Aware parameter specifies whether to complete ATM cell concatenation into MPLS packets based on a AAL5 end of message. The options are:

Concatenation controls how ATM cells terminate into MPLS frames.
Active Hold Delay (100s of milliseconds) (activeHoldDelay)

The Active Hold Delay (100s of milliseconds) parameter specifies the amount of time to hold the active state before switching from active to the standby state after the operational failure of a local MC-LAG SAP or MC-APS SAP. LAG and APS subgroup changes that trigger the switch include:
endpoint changes from active to standby object in the endpoint, for example, SAP,ICB, or regular spoke SDP, changes
operation state The range is 0 to 60. The default is 0.
Admin Concat Limit (maxAdminCells)

The Admin Concat Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of ATM cells that are put into an MPLS packet for transmission. The range is 1 to 128 cells. The default is 1, indicating that no concatenation is done. Concatenation controls how ATM cells terminate into MPLS frames.
71-2
May 2009
You can view the number of ATM cells the far end of the connection in the read-only Peer Concat Limit parameter. When the lesser of the two parameter values is reached, the MPLS packet is ready for transmission. The MPLS packet MTU size always conforms to the service MTU packet size.

Aggregation
ANCP String
ATM Connection Type (connectionType)

The ATM Connection Type parameter specifies the type of ATM connection. This parameter is configurable only when the VC Type parameter for the Apipe service is set to Atm-cell. The options are:
PVT (default) Port

If the VC Type parameter for the Apipe service is set to Atm-sdu or Atm-vcc, the ATM Connection Type parameter is set automatically to PVC and is not configurable. If the VC Type parameter for the Apipe service is set to Atm-vpc, the ATM Connection Type parameter is set automatically to PVP and is not configurable.

ATM OAM Terminate (atmOamTerminate)

The ATM OAM Terminate parameter specifies whether the SAP acts as an OAM termination point. When the parameter is enabled, the SAP does not pass OAM cells. When the parameter is disabled, OAM cells pass into the APIPE service. This object is only configurable for ATM SAPs that are part of an SDU-mode Apipe service. The options are:
Up Down (default)
Auto-Assign ID
Auto-Assign ID
The Auto-Generate ID parameter specifies the value used by each end of a service tunnel to identify the VC. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Automatic SDP Binding Creation

Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel

See Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Auto Select Transport Tunnel

See Auto Select Transport Tunnel (autoSelectTunnel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
CCM Messages (ccEnable)

The CCM Messages parameter specifies whether or not continuity messaging is run on the MEP. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) CE IP Address (ceInetAddress)

The CE IP Address parameter specifies the IPv4 address of the local end host, in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Clp Change (concatCellClp)

The Clp Change parameter specifies whether to complete ATM cell concatenation into MPLS packets based on a change to the CLP value of an ATM traffic descriptor. The options are:

Concatenation controls how ATM cells terminate into MPLS frames.
71-4
May 2009

Control Word (controlWord)

The Control Word parameter specifies the use of a control word for the PW OAM. The control word is negotiated with the peer. The options are:
Preferred Not Preferred (default)

The Preferred setting is required for a multi-hop VCC ping. The Not Preferred setting is required for a single-hop VCC ping.
Default VC ID (defaultVcId)
The Default VC ID parameter specifies the virtual circuit identifier for the spoke SDP binding. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Description
Destination MAC Address (backboneDestMac)

The Destination MAC Address parameter specifies the Backbone Destination MAC-Address for PBB packets. It must be a valid unicast MAC address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Destination Node ID
See Tunnel Termination Site (tunnelSelectionTerminationSiteId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Direction (direction)
The Direction parameter specifies the direction of the MEP. When the direction is up the packet is sent toward the router. When the direction is down the packet is sent to the customer node. The options are:
up (default) down Disable Revert Time (Infinite)

The Disable Revert Time parameter specifies no revert to the primary spoke SDP after a failure to the backup spoke SDP. The default is disabled.
May 2009
71-5
Egress Filter ID
Egress Label
See Egress Label (egressLabel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Policy ID

Encapsulation Value (End VPI)

The Encapsulation Value (End VPI) parameter specifies the encapsulation value for the port. The parameter is equivalent to the VPI of the PVT connection on the port at the end of a hop. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 1024. The default is 0.
Encapsulation Value (Start VPI)

The Encapsulation Value (Start VPI) parameter specifies the encapsulation value for the port. The parameter is equivalent to the VPI of the PVT connection on the port at the start of a hop. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 1024. The default is 0.
Encapsulation Value (VPI)

The Encapsulation Value (VPI) parameter specifies the encapsulation value for the port. The parameter is equivalent to the VPI of the PVP connection on the port. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 1024. The default is 0.
ID (mepId)
The ID parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP being tested. The range is 1-8191. The default is 0.
Ingress Filter ID
71-6
May 2009
Ingress Label
See Ingress Label (ingressLabel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P

Ingress Policy ID

Inherit Value
See Inherit Value (inheritanceMask) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.


Inter-Chassis Backup (isIcb)

The Inter-Chassis Backup specifies the spoke SDP as an inter-chassis backup SDP binding. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Interworking Type (interworking)

The Interworking Type parameter specifies the type of interworking that is required for the endpoints of the VLL to communicate. The options are:
None (default) FR-ATM Network Interworking (Frf-5)
May 2009
71-7
ISID (isid)
The ISID parameter specifies a 24-bit service instance identifier for this service. As part of the Provider Backbone Bridging frames, it is used at the destination PE as a demultiplexor field. The default value of -1 is used to indicate that the value of this object is unspecified. The range is -1 to 16777215. The default is -1.
Jitter Buffer (ms) (CemJitterBuffer)

The Jitter Buffer (ms) parameter specifies the jitter buffer size for Cpipe L2 access interfaces and Epipe L2 access interfaces with CEM encapsulation. The range is 0 to 250. The default value depends on the endpoint type. See Table 71-1 for the default values.
Table 71-1 Jitter Buffer parameter
Endpoint type Unstructured E1 Unstructured T1 Unstructured E3 Unstructured T3 NxDS0 (E1/T1) Default Value (ms) 5 5 5 5 32 16 8 5 NxDS0 with CAS signalling (E1) NxDS0 with CAS signalling (T1) 8 12 Dependencies Timeslot is set to 1 Timeslot is set to between 2 and 4 Timeslot is set to between 5 and 15 Timeslot is set to 16 or higher
LLF Enabled (llfEnabled)

The LLF Enabled parameter specifies whether the link loss forwarding forces the operational status of the port on the L2 access interface to be down when a VLL becomes operationally down. The port must be a null-encapsulated Ethernet port that is used as a SAP for the VLL. The options are:

A read-only Ethernet Down Reason parameter on the port configuration form indicates whether the port is down because of Link Loss Forwarding.
71-8
May 2009
Local ECID (cemLocalEcid)

The Local ECID parameter specifies the 20-bit unsigned binary field which contains an identifier for the circuit that is emulated. The ECID is associated with a specific MAC address. The range is 0 to 1 048 575. The default is 0.
Low-priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect)

MAC Address (macAddress)

MAC Refresh Interval (macRefreshInterval)

The MAC Refresh Interval parameter specifies the amount of time between successive attempts to refresh the MAC address of the CE device associated with an IP VLL (Ipipe) Ethernet SAP. The range is 0 to 65535 s. The default is 14400 s.
Maintenance Association ID (maintenanceAssociationId)

The Maintenance Association ID parameter specifies the ID of the Maintenance Association. This ID must be unique to the Maintenance Domain to protect against accidental association service instances. The range is 1-8191. The default is 1.
Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId)

The Maintenance Domain ID parameter specifies the maintenance domain ID for the MEP. The range is 1-8191. The default is 1.
Max Concat Delay (maxDelay)

The Max Concat Limit parameter specifies the maximum amount of time, in hundreds of microseconds, to wait before transmitting the MPLS packet while ATM cells are concatenated into an MPLS packet. Use the parameter to prevent delays in transmitting MPLS packets. The range is 1 to 400 hundreds of microseconds. The time is rounded up to one of the following numbers: 1, 5, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300, or 400. Concatenation controls how ATM cells terminate into MPLS frames.
MC Ring Node (ringNodeName)

The MC Ring Node parameter specifies the unique name of a multi-chassis ring access node. It only applies to EPIPE services. The name can be up to 32 characters in length. There is no default.

MTU
See MTU (mtuValue) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Name

See No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
No Revert
The No Revert parameter specifies no revert to the primary spoke SDP after a failure to the backup spoke SDP. The default is disabled.


Payload Size (octets) (cemPayloadSize)

The Payload Size (octets) parameter specifies the payload size of traffic transmitted to the Packet Service Network (PSN) by the CEM SAP. The payload size is the size of the data that is transmitted over the service. If the size of the data received is not equal to the payload size, the packet is considered defective. The range is 0 and 16 to 2048. The default value depends on the CEM SAP endpoint type, and if applicable, the number of timeslots. See Table 71-2 for the default values.
Table 71-2 Payload Size parameter
Endpoint type Unstructured E1 Unstructured T1 Unstructured E3 Unstructured T3 (1 of 2) Default Value (ms) 256 192 1024 1024 Dependencies
71-10
May 2009
Endpoint type NxDS0 (E1/T1)
Default Value (ms) 64 16 Timeslot x 168 Timeslot x 8
Dependencies Timeslot is set to 1 Timeslot is set to between 2 and 4 Timeslot is set to between 5 and 15 Timeslot is set to 16 or higher
NxDS0 with CAS signalling (E1) NxDS0 with CAS signalling (T1) (2 of 2)
Timeslot x 16 Timeslot x 24
Peer CE Address (ceInetAddress)

The Peer CE Address parameter specifies the IPv4 address, in dotted-decimal format, of the CE device that is reachable through the IP VLL (Ipipe) SDP binding. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Port
Precedence (endpointPrecedence)
The Precedence parameter specifies the precedence of the SDP binding when there are multiple SDP bindings attached to one service endpoint. The numeric precedence designation controls the SDP binding responsible for forwarding traffic. A value of 0 defines the primary SDP binding and can only be assigned to one binding. In the event of a failure on a binding with a precedence of 0, traffic forwarding responsibilities move to a binding with a precedence of 1. The range is 0 to 4. The default is 4.
Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority)

The Priority Level for CCM Messages parameter specifies the CCM interval for the MEP. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 7.
Remote ECID (cemRemoteEcid)

The Remote ECID parameter specifies the remote ECID for the circuit that is emulated. The ECID is associated with a specific MAC address. The range is 0 to 1 048 575. The default is 0.
May 2009
71-11
Remote MAC Address (cemRemoteMacAddr)

The Remote MAC Address parameter specifies the remote MAC address of the CEM-encapsulated Epipe L2 access interface form aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff where aa, bb, cc, dd, ee, and ff are hexadecimal numbers. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Report Alarm (cemReportAlarm)

The Report Alarms parameter specifies the CEM alarms to monitor and report. A check mark beside the alarm option enables the alarm to be logged. Table 71-3 lists the parameter options.
Table 71-3 Report Alarm parameter
Option Stray Packets Packet Loss Buffer Underrun Malformed Packets Buffer Overrun Remote TDM Fault Remote Packet Loss Remote RDI Alarm not monitored or reported Default Alarm monitored and reported


Revert Time (second) (revertTime)

The Revert Time (second) parameter specifies the time to wait before trying to revert to the primary spoke SDP defined on the service endpoint. The range is -1 to 600 seconds. Setting the parameter to -1 specifies that there is no revert to the primary spoke SDP after a failure to the backup spoke SDP. You can also set the parameter to -1 by selecting the Disable Revert Time (Infinite) check box. The default is 0.
71-12
May 2009
RTP Header (cemUseRtpHeader)

The RTP Header parameter specifies whether an RTP header is used when packets are transmitted to the Packet Service Network (PSN) by the CEM SAP. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) SDP Admin Bandwidth (sdpBindAdminBandwidth)

The SDP Admin Bandwidth parameter specifies the bandwidth that needs to be reserved for this SDP binding in kilo-bits per second. The parameter only applies to the SDP bindings under the Epipe, Apipe, Fpipe, Ipipe and Cpipe services. It is linked to the State Cause indicator named Insufficient Bandwidth to allocate to SDP binding shown in the States tab of the VLL Spoke-SDP Binding form. The range is 0 to 100 000 000. The default is 0. The following conditions on the use of this parameter should be observed:
The SR service manager keeps track of the available bandwidth for each RSVP
SDP. The initial value, and maximum value, is the sum of the bandwidths of all constituent LSPs in the SDP. The SDP available bandwidth is adjusted by the user-configured SDP Bandwidth Booking Factor. The relationship is: Max-SDP-available-bw = Sum(LSP-bw) x SDP-booking-factor If an LSP consists of a primary and many secondary standby LSPs, then the bandwidth used in the maximum SDP available bandwidth is that of the active path. Any change to an LSP active path bandwidth updates the maximum SDP available bandwidth. Note however that a change to any constituent LSP bandwidth (due to re-signaling of the primary LSP path or the activation of a secondary path) that causes overbooking of the maximum SDP available bandwidth causes a warning to be issued. However, the spoke SDPs admitted into this SDP prior to this change are kept in the operational Up state and are unaffected. This means the operational booking level of the SDP may be greater than the administrative one. 5620 SAM will not automatically clear the overbooked alarm when the SDP is no longer overbooked. Note also that the activation of a bypass or detour LSP in the path of the primary LSP does not change the maximum SDP available bandwidth. If a static LSP is added to an MPLS SDP, then the maximum SDP available bandwidth is not modified, since a static LSP does not have a bandwidth parameter. This means that PWs may not be admitted because the sum of bandwidth of the constituent dynamic LSPs is too small while the static LSP is available. The value you assign to the administrative bandwidth of the spoke SDP in a VLL service may or may not reflect the actual traffic offered to this VLL service. When you bind a VLL service to this SDP, the amount of bandwidth (VLL-bw) configured under the spoke SDP is subtracted from the SDP available bandwidth
May 2009
71-13
adjusted by the Booking Factor. If you delete a VLL service binding from this SDP, the amount of bandwidth (VLL-bw) configured under the spoke SDP is added back into the SDP available bandwidth. The relationship is: SDP-Available-bw = Max-SDP-available-bw - Sum(VLL-bw) If you overbook the total SDP available bandwidth when adding a VLL service, a warning is issued and the bandwidth reservation is rejected. This means that the spoke SDP bandwidth does not update the maximum SDP available bandwidth. In this case, the spoke SDP is put in operational Down state and a status message of PW not forwarding is sent to the remote 7x50 PE node. A CAC failure trap is also generated. The local 7x50 PE will also trigger the appropriate OAM actions on the SAP. That is, it will generate an RDI for the ATM SAP and set the Active-bit to zero in the LMI for FR SAP. The same is true for the remote 7x50 PE when it receives the (T-)LDP status message. For spoke termination on IES/VPRN, you can specify bandwidth for the spoke SDP on the VLL side only. T-LDP status bits are not supported on the IES/VPRN PE. Therefore, if CAC fails, the spoke SDP goes down and the label is withdrawn from the VLL PE side. The IES/VPRN PE side brings down the spoke SDP since there is no egress PW label. It also brings down the IP interface and the service. In the case of spoke termination on VPLS, you can specify bandwidth for the spoke SDP on the VLL side only. T-LDP status bits are only supported on the VPLS PE in Release 6.0 or later. Thus, if CAC fails, and the VPLS PE is running pre-R6.0 software, the spoke SDP goes down and the label is withdrawn from the VLL PE side. The VPLS PE brings down the spoke SDP since there is no egress PW label that triggers all the appropriate actions such as flushing the FIB and sending Mac-Flush, and so on. If the VPLS PE is running Release 6.0 or later software, the VLL PE puts the spoke SDP in the operational Down state and sends a status message of "PW not forwarding" VPLS PE. When CAC admission fails, the service manager will not put the spoke SDP back into the operational Up state until you perform one of the following:
A shutdown/no-shutdown of the spoke SDP resulting in a subsequent successful

bandwidth check. The service manager does not automatically audit spoke SDPs after their creation to check if bandwidth is available. An in-service modification of the spoke SDP bandwidth parameter that causes the service manager to re-check admission, resulting in a subsequent successful bandwidth check.
If the VLL service contains an endpoint with multiple redundant spoke SDPs,
each spoke SDP will have its bandwidth checked against the available bandwidth of the corresponding SDP. If bandwidth reservation is rejected for a spoke SDP, that spoke SDP is put into the operationally Down state and a status message of "PW not forwarding" is sent to the remote 7x50 PE node. A trap is also generated for this spoke SDP, not for the endpoint. This status notification is used by both
71-14
May 2009
this 7x50 PE node and the remote 7x50 PE node in determining the Active-tx spoke SDP. The endpoint does not go into the operationally Down state until all constituent spoke SDPs are down. If the VLL service performs a PW switching function, each spoke SDP is separately checked for bandwidth against the corresponding SDP. If any spoke SDP is rejected, it is put into the operationally Down state and a status message of "PW not forwarding" is sent upstream and downstream to the 7x50 T-PE and S-PE nodes attached over a signaled PW segment. If class-forwarding is enabled on the SDP , VLL service packets are forwarded to the SDP LSP that the packet forwarding class maps to, or if this is Down, then to the default LSP. However, the VLL bandwidth is not checked against the selected LSP available bandwidth, but instead, on the total SDP available bandwidth. If there is a single LSP for each SDP, these two figures match. If the same RSVP LSP is part of multiple SDPs, then the bandwidth of this LSP is counted separately in each SDPs available bandwidth. The bandwidth consumption across SDPs is not updated. For multiple RSVP LSPs that are part of the same SDP, load balancing of service packets occurs over the SDP LSPs, based either on service-id or on a hash of the packet header if ingress SAP shared queuing is enabled. In both cases, the VLL bandwidth is not checked against the selected LSP(s) available bandwidth, but instead, on the total SDP available bandwidth. If there is a single LSP for each SDP, these two figures match. If you specify a non-zero bandwidth for a VLL service and attempt to bind the service to an LDP or a GRE SDP, a warning is issued that CAC failed. However, the VLL is established and is operationally Up, assuming no other condition prevents this from occurring.
Service ID
Site ID
See Site ID (siteID)in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Service Name
Subscriber Identification
See Subscriber Identification (subscriberIdent) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Transport Type
See Transport Type (transportPreference) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
71-15

Tunnel Transport
Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths

See Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (useBwReservedPath) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Use Shared Queue

VC Type (vcType)
The VC Type parameter specifies the type of pseudowire signaling for the service. Table 71-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 71-4 VC Type parameter
Option Ethernet VLAN ATM-SDU ATM-cell ATM-VCC ATM-VPC FR-DLCI SAToP E1 SAToP T1 CESoPSN CESoPSNCAS Option description Specifies Ethernet signaling Specifies VLAN signaling Specifies ATM-SDU signaling Specifies ATM-cell signaling Specifies VCC signaling Specifies ATM-VPC signaling Specifies FR-DLCI signaling Specifies SAToP E1 emulation. Specifies SAToP T1 emulation. Specifies CESoPSN emulation. Specifies CESoPSNCAS emulation. Dependencies Applies to Epipe service Applies to Epipe service Applies to Apipe service Applies to Apipe service Applies to Apipe service Applies to Apipe service Applies to Fpipe service Applies to Cpipe service Applies to Cpipe service Applies to Cpipe service Applies to Cpipe service
VLAN VC Tag
71-16
May 2009
VLL Site Type (vllSiteType)

The VLL Site Type parameter specifies whether the VLL site is a PW switching or terminating site. Table 71-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 71-5 VLL Site Type parameter
Option Terminating Switching Option description Specifies a VLL terminating site. Specifies pseudowire switching signaling for the spoke SDPs configured in a VLL service.
May 2009
71-17
71-18
May 2009
72.1 Create VPRN parameters
72-2
May 2009
72-1
72.1
Create VPRN parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create VPRN service forms.
AAL5 Encapsulation
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies whether the IP address range configured in the Start Address parameter and the End Address parameters is included in the subnetworks free IP address pool. The options are:
Included (default) Excluded Administrative State

Administration Status (adminStatus)

The Administration Status parameter specifies whether Bi-directional Forwarding Detection is enabled. This parameter must be configured before BFD parameters are accessible on router interfaces. The options are:
Up Down (default) Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)

Aggregation
72-2
May 2009
Allow Directed Broadcasts

See Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Allow Send Force Renews (allowSendForceRenews)

The Allow Send Force Renews parameter specifies whether the server is allowed to send a DHCP force renew message to DHCP clients. When the value is set to true, the server will send a force renew message to DHCP clients, when the server detects configuration changes that will affect lease configuration. The client must renew their lease to receive the new parameter. The options are:
True False (default) ANCP String

Anti-Spoof Mac Address(antiSpoofMacAddr)

See Anti-Spoof MAC Address (antiSpoofMacAddr) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Application Profile String (appProfileString)

The Application Profile String parameter specifies a string that categorizes an application profile. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.

Auto-Assign ID
Autonomous Address Configuration

See Autonomous Address Configuration (autonomous) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber)

The Autonomous System parameter specifies the CE-to-PE AS. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
May 2009
72-3
Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel

See Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled)

The BFD Enabled parameter specifies whether bi-directional forwarding detection is enabled for the interface. When the value is configured to true, the interface can establish BFD sessions and use a BFD for signaling. When the value is configured to false, the interface cannot use BFD. The options are:
True False (default) BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled)

The BGP Enabled parameter specifies whether BGP is enabled for the device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Broadcast Address Format


Client Applications
See Client Applications (clientApplications) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Current Hop Limit

See Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
72-4
May 2009
Days (days)
The Days parameter specifies the number of days for a lease option. Table 72-1 lists the options that use the timing parameters and the descriptions. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 0.
Table 72-1 Options that require time configuration
Option Lease Time Option description This option is used in a client request (DCHCPDISCOVER or DHCPREQUEST) to allow a client to request a lease time for the IP address. In a DHCPOFFER the DHCP server uses this option to specify the lease time it is willing to offer. This option is used to specify the time interval from address assignment to when the client transitions to the RENEWING state. This option is used to specify the time interval from address assignment to when the client transitions to the REBINDING state.
Lease Renew Time Lease Rebind Time
Days (maxLeaseDay)
The Days parameter specifies the maximum number of days that a leased IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 10.
Days (minLeaseDay)
The Days parameter specifies the minimum number of days that a leased IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 0.
Description
Destination (destination)
The Destination parameter specifies the destination IP address of a static route for an L3 interface. Specify one of the following:
an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format; IPv6 must be enabled
There is no default.
Display Name
May 2009
72-5
Displayed Name
dot1p (dot1p)
The dot1p (dot1p) parameter specifies a dot1p class to self-generated traffic on a VPRN site. When a packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the IEEE 802.1p value specified by the Dot1p parameter. The range is 0 to 7, or default. The default is default. Specifying 0 is equivalent to removing the explicit marking.
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the DiffServ Code Point value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. On a VPRN site, self-generated traffic is assigned a DSCP which is mapped to a forwarding class. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the DSCP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter. Table 72-2 lists the parameter options.
Table 72-2 DSCP parameter
Options be (default) cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
72-6
May 2009
Dynamic Topology Discovery

See Dynamic Topology Discovery (dynamicTopDiscAdminState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Echo Interval (bdfEchoInterval)

The Echo Interval parameter specifies the minimum echo receive interval, in milliseconds, for the BDF session. The range is 100 to 100 000. The default is 100.
Egress Filter ID

Egress Policy ID

Enable DHCP Relay

Enable Info Option

See Enable Info Option (informationOption) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Local Proxy

See Enable Local Proxy (localProxy) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Local Proxy ARP

See Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Proxy ARP

See Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
72-7
End Address (endAddress)

The End Address parameter specifies the last IP address for a range of IP addresses to be configured for a subnetwork. You must also set the Start Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes)

The Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes parameter specifies whether to enforce a maximum number of multicast routes on an interface when you configure routing properties for a service. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Enforce Maximum Number Of Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfRoutes)

The Enforce Maximum Number Of Routes parameter specifies whether to enforce a maximum number of routes on an interface when you configure routing properties for a service. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Export Target AS Value (vrfExportTargetASValue)

The Export Target AS Value parameter specifies the AS value of the default export VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the Target Format parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Export Target Community Value (vrfExportTargetCommunityValue)

The Target Community Value parameter specifies a BGP community to use for the default export VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export and the Import Target Format is set to IP Address. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Export Target Extended Community Value (vrfExportTargetExtendedCommunityValue)

The Target Extended Community Value parameter specifies the extended BGP community of the default export VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
72-8
May 2009
Export Target Format (vrfExportTargetFormat)

The Export Target Format parameter specifies the export target format to use for the default VRF export target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export. The options are:
None (default) AS IP Address Export Target IP Address (vrfExportTargetIpAddress)

The Target IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the default export VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to IP Address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Forwarding Class (forwardingClass)

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets that egress the access interface which uses the policy to a queue and Dot1p value. When a packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the queue specified by the Queue ID parameter, and the Dot1p value specified by the dot1p parameter. The options are:
be (default) l2 af l1
h2 ef h1 nc
Free Addresses Minimum Threshold (minFree)

The Free Addresses Minimum Threshold parameter specifies the minimum number of available IP addresses for a specific subnetwork. These IP addresses can be offered to DHCP clients belonging to the subnetwork. When the value is set to 0, there is no minimum specified. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1.
GSMP Administrative State

See GSMP Administrative State (gsmpAdministrativeState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Hold Multiplier
See Hold Multiplier (holdMultiplier) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
72-9
Hours (hours)
The Hours parameter specifies the number of hours for a lease option. Table 72-1 lists the options that use the timing parameters and the descriptions. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Hours (maxLeaseHour)
The Hours parameter specifies the maximum number of hours that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Hours (minLeaseHour)
The Hours parameter specifies the minimum number of hours that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
ID
See ID (id) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled)

The IGMP Enabled parameter specifies whether IGMP is enabled on the site. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Import Target AS Value (vrfImportTargetASValue)

The Import Target AS Value parameter specifies the AS value for the default import VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Import Target Community Value (vrfImportTargetCommunityValue)

The Target Community Value parameter specifies the BGP community of the default import VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to IP Address. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Import Target Extended Community Value (vrfImportTargetExtendedCommunityValue)

The Target Extended Community Value parameter specifies the extended BGP community of the default import VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Import Target Format (vrfImportTargetFormat)

The Import Target Format parameter specifies the import target format to use for the default VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export. The options are:
None (default) AS IP Address Import Target IP Address (vrfImportTargetIpAddress)

The Target IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the default import VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Import and Export, and the Import Target Format parameter is set to IP Address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Ingress Filter ID
Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P

Ingress Policy ID



Interface ID
May 2009
72-11
Intermediate Destination ID (interDestIdString)

The Intermediate Destination ID parameter specifies a string that identifies an Intermediate Destination. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
IP Address
Parameter IP Address for L3 interface, or IES or VPRN routing-instance neighbor IP Address for destination node of static route See IP Address (ipAddress) in section 79.1 IP Address (targetIpAddress) in section 79.1
IP Address 1 (address1)
The IP Address parameter specifies an IP address for the Subnet Option in dotted-decimal format for an IPv4 address. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0. IP Address 1 parameters is available when the Type (optionType)parameter is set to IP Address
See the IP Address 1 (address1) parameter in this section for more information.
IPv6 Prefix
See IPv6 Prefix (prefix) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Keep Alive
See Keep-Alive (seconds) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
L2 Header (l2header)
See L2 Header (l2header) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Lease Populate
See Lease Populate (leasePopulate) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Lifetime (seconds)
Table 72-4 lists where to find more information about the Lifetime (seconds) parameter.
Table 72-4 Lifetime (seconds) parameter
Parameter Lifetime (seconds) for general router advertisement Lifetime (seconds) to specify preferred routing prefix lifetime Lifetime (seconds) to specify valid routing prefix lifetime See Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime) in section 79.1 Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) in section 79.1 Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) in section 79.1
Local Address
See Local Address (localAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Log Only
Table 72-5 lists where to find more information about the Log Only parameter.
Table 72-5 Log Only parameter
Parameter Log Only in Maximum Number of IPv6 Routes panel Log Only in Maximum Number of Multicast Routes panel Log Only in Maximum Number of Routes panel See Log Only (ipv6MaxNumRoutesLogOnly) in this section Log Only (maxNumberOfMcastRoutesLogOnly) in this section Log Only (maxNumberOfRoutesLogOnly) in this section
Log Only (ipv6MaxNumRoutesLogOnly)

The Log Only parameter specifies whether to disable the learning of new routes when the limit set by the Maximum Number Of IPv6 Routes (maxIPv6RouteNumber) parameter is exceeded. The parameter setting does not affect the logging of events. When the parameter is set to true, the learning of new routes is not disabled. The options are:
false (default) true
May 2009
72-13
Log Only (maxNumberOfMcastRoutesLogOnly)

The Log Only parameter specifies whether to disable the learning of new routes when the limit set by the Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (maxNumberOfMcastRoutes) parameter is exceeded. The parameter setting does not affect the logging of events. When the parameter is set to true, the learning of new routes is not disabled. The options are:
false (default) true Log Only (maxNumberOfRoutesLogOnly)

The Log Only parameter specifies whether to disable the learning of new routes when the limit set by the Maximum Number Of Routes (maxNumberOfRoutes) parameter is exceeded. The parameter setting does not affect the logging of events. When the parameter is set to true, the learning of new routes is not disabled. The options are:
false (default) true Loopback Enabled

See Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled) in section 184.1 for the parameter description.
MAC Address
See MAC Address (physicalAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
MAC Monitoring
Managed Address Config

See Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the IP address subnet mask in dotted decimal notation or as a 32-bit integer.
Mask Reply
See Mask Reply (maskReply) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
72-14
May 2009
Maximum Declined Addresses Stored (maxDeclined)

The Maximum Declined Addresses Stored parameter specifies the maximum number of declined IP address that can be stored. Once the maximum is reached, the oldest declined IP address is moved back to the free IP address pool. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 64.
Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime)

The Maximum Lease Time parameter specifies how long a DHCP client can use an IP address. The minimum lease time is 10, the maximum lease time is 10 years. The default is 10 days. The Maximum Lease Time parameter values must be larger than the Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime) parameter.You can specify how long the DHCP client can use an IP address by configuring the following parameters:
Days Hours Minutes Seconds
Maximum Number Of Equal Cost Routes (maxNumberOfEqualCostRoutes)

The Maximum Number Of Equal Cost Routes parameter specifies the number of equal cost routes to use for path sharing. When there are more equal cost routes than the configured value, routes with the lowest next-hop value are chosen. When you set the parameter value to 1, multipath routing is disabled. In this case, the route with the lowest next-hop IP address is used. The range is 0 to 16. The default is 1.
Maximum Number Of IPv6 Routes (maxIPv6RouteNumber)

The Maximum Number Of IPv6 Routes parameter specifies the maximum number of IPv6 routes in the VRF table. To configure the parameter, you must first deselect the No Maximum check box beside the parameter. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is -1, which specifies that there is no maximum.
Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (maxNumberOfMcastRoutes)

The Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast routes that are held in the VRF. This parameter is configurable when the Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is -1, which specifies that there is no maximum. You must disable the Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) parameter if the Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes parameter is set to the default of -1 on an NE. You must enable the Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) parameter if the Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes parameter is set to a non-default value.
Maximum Number Of Routes (maxNumberOfRoutes)

The Maximum Number Of Routes parameter specifies the maximum number of routes that are held in the VRF. This parameter is configurable when the Enforce Maximum Number Of Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfRoutes) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is -1, which specifies that there is no maximum.
Max Interval (seconds)

See Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Metric (metric)
The Metric parameter specifies the cost metric for the static route. This value is used when the static route is exported to other protocols such as OSPF. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Minimum Lease Time (minLeaseTime)

The Minimum Lease Time parameter specifies how long a DHCP client can use an IP address. The minimum lease time is 10 seconds, the maximum lease time is 10 years. The default is 10 minutes. The Minimum Lease Time parameter values must be smaller than the Maximum Lease Time parameter. You can specify how long the DHCP client can use an IP address by configuring the following parameters:
Days Hours Minutes Seconds
Min Interval (seconds)

See Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Minutes (minutes)
The Minutes parameter specifies the number of minutes for a lease option. Table 72-1 lists the options that use the timing parameters and the descriptions. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 10.
Minutes (maxLeaseMinute)
The Minutes parameter specifies the maximum number of minutes that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
72-16
May 2009
Minutes (minLeaseMinute)
The Minutes parameter specifies the minimum number of minutes that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 10.
Minutes (offerMinute)
The Minutes parameter specifies the number of minutes the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 1.

MTU
See MTU (mtu) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Multicast Capable Peers (multicastCapablePeers)

The Multicast Capable Peers parameter specifies whether multicast capable BGP peers are displayed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)

The Multiplier parameter specifies the number of consecutive BFD messages that must be missed before the BDF session state is changed to the down state. OSPF, IS-IS and PIM are notified of the fault. The range is 3 to 20. The default is 3.
Name
Netbios Node Type (netbiosNodeType)

The Netbios Node Type parameter specifies the order and method to resolve a Netbios name into an IP address. Table 72-6 lists the parameter options and the option numbers.
May 2009
72-17
72 Create VPRN parameters Table 72-6 Netbios parameter options

Option B P M Option Description The DHCP server will use broadcast for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use peer to peer for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use a combination of broadcast and peer to peer. If broadcast cannot resolve the name, it uses peer to peer. The DHCP server will use a combination of peer to peer and broadcast. If peer to peer cannot resolve the name, it uses broadcast.
No Expiry
Table 72-7 lists where to find more information about the No Expiry parameter.
Table 72-7 No Expiry parameter
Parameter No Expiry for preferred routing prefix lifetime No Expiry for valid routing prefix lifetime See No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) in section 79.1 No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry) in section 79.1
Number (optionNumber)
The Number parameter is used to identify options. All other DHCP protocol options are available and can be set by entering the option number, defined in RFC 2131. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 1.
Number of Packet Too Big

See Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Number of Param Problem

See Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Number of Redirects
72-18
May 2009
Number of Time Exceeded

See Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Number of TTL Expired

See Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Number of Unreachables
See Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
OAM Administrative State

See OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Offer Time (offerTime)

The Offer Time parameter specifies how long the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. You can configure the following parameters:
Minutes Seconds On-Link Determination

See On-Link Determination (onLink) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Option (option)
The Option parameter specifies the information the DHCP client will receive from the DHCP server. Depending on the option, the DHCP client can receive network configuration information or information on the available services on the network. If an option is not set the DHCP client is identified by their MAC Address. The following options are available for subnet options:
Custom Option Subnet Mask Default Mask
May 2009
72-19
The following options are available for IP address pools:
Custom Option DNS Server Name Notables Name Server Lease Time Lease Renew Time Lease Rebind Time Domain Name Netbios Node Type
All other DHCP protocol options are available and can be set by entering the option number, defined in RFC 2131. If the parameter value is Custom Option, you must configure the Number (optionNumber) and Type parameters. If the value is Subnet Mask or Default Mask, these parameters are automatically configured.
OSPFv2 Enabled (ospfEnabled)

The OSPFv2 Enabled parameter specifies whether OSPFv2 is enabled on the device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) OSPFv3 Enabled (ospfv3Enabled)

Enabled Disabled (default) Other Stateful Config

See Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.


72-20
May 2009
Packet Too Big

See Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Packet Too Big Time (seconds)

See Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Param Problem
See Param Problem (paramProblem) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Param Problem Time (seconds)

See Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Physical Address
See Physical Address (physicalAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
PIM Enabled (pimEnabled)

The PIM Enabled parameter specifies whether PIM is enabled on the site. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Periodic Atm Oam LoopBack

See Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Policy 1
See Policy 1 (policy1) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Policy 2
Policy 3
Policy 4
May 2009
72-21
Policy 5
Pool Name (displayedName)

The Pool Name parameter specifies the name of an IP address pool. The pool contains IP addresses. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
Port
Preference (preference)
The Preference parameter specifies the preference of the current static route (as opposed to the routes from different sources such as BGP or OSPF), expressed as a decimal integer. When you modify the preference value of an existing static route, unless specified, the metric does not change. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 5. When multiple routes are learned with the same preference using the same protocol, the lowest cost route is used. When multiple routes are learned with the same preference using the same protocol and the costs are equal, the route is determined by ECMP configuration.
Prefix Length
See Prefix Length (prefixLength) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Primary
See Primary (isPrimary) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Dscp
See Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Precedence
See Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Priority Type
See Priority Type (priorityMarkType) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Proxy Arp Policy 1

See Proxy ARP Policy 1 (policy1) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
72-22
May 2009
Proxy Arp Policy 2

Proxy Arp Policy 3

Proxy Arp Policy 4

Proxy Arp Policy 5

Reachable Time (milliseconds)

See Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval)

The Receive Interval parameter specifies the receive interval in milliseconds for the BFD session. The range is 100 to 100 000. The default is 100.
Redirects
See Redirects (redirects) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Redirects Time (seconds)

See Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Retransmit Time (milliseconds)

See Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.


See Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference) in section 79.1for the parameter description.
May 2009
72-23
RIP Enabled (ripEnabled)

The RIP Enabled parameter specifies whether RIP is enabled on the site. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Route Distinguisher Type (routeDistinguisherType)

The Route Distinguisher Type parameter specifies the identifier attached to routes that indicates the VPRN to which it belongs. Each routing instance must have a unique route distinguisher within the carriers domain associated with it. A route distinguisher must be defined for a VPRN to be operationally active. Table 72-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 72-8 Route Distinguisher Type parameter
Option Type 0 Type 1 None (default) Option description Specifies that you want to assign an AS number for the route distinguisher Specifies that you want to assign an IP address for the route distinguisher Specifies that you do not want to assign a route distinguisher
Router ID (routerID)
The Router ID parameter specifies the IP address of the routing instance. The default is the value of the Site ID parameter that you specify when you create a service site. Specify a unicast IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Server 1 parameter. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
Seconds (seconds)
The Seconds parameter specifies the number of seconds for a lease option. Table 72-1 lists the options that use the timing parameters and the descriptions. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 0.
Seconds (maxLeaseSecond)
The Second parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Seconds (minLeaseSecond)
The Seconds parameter specifies the minimum number of seconds that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
72-24
May 2009
Seconds (offerSecond)
The Seconds parameter specifies the number of seconds the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Send Advertisement
See Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Server 1
See Server 1 (server1) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Server 2
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
Server 8
Service ID
Sessions Limit (ifSessionLimit)

The Sessions Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of PPPoE sessions allowed on the interface. The range is 1 to 8 000. The default is 1.
Session Limit per SAP (SapSessionLimit)

The Session Limit per SAP parameter specifies the maximum number of PPPoE sessions allowed on the SAP belonging to the interface. The range is 1 to 8 000. The default is 1.
Service Name
SNMP Community String (snmpCommunityName)

The SNMP Community String parameter specifies an SNMP community string for the mediation of IPv6 objects on the VPRN site. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Source Address Termination (ipOrInterfaceIndex)

The Source Address Termination parameter specifies whether the source address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a managed node is a user-specified IP address or the primary address of the L3 access interface (referred to on the Source Address form as Interface Index). The L3 interface must be created on the routing instance of the selected router for the VPRN before it can be used as the source address. The options are:
IP Address Interface Index Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a node, in dotted-decimal format for IPv4, or colon-hexidecimal format for IPv6. An IPv6 IP address is configurable when:
the Source Address Termination parameter is set to IP Address the IPv6 Allowed parameter is enabled for the L3 Access Interface for the router;
see chapter 31 for information about enabling IPv6. the IPv6 Allowed parameter is enabled for the VPRN service; see chapter 48 for information about enabling IPv6. The range is a valid IPv4 unicast address of 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. or a valid IPv6 unicast address that follows the 0:0:0:0 format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication)

The Source IP Application parameter specifies the application for which the source IP or interface index is specified. Table 72-9 describes the parameter options available depending on whether the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) value is an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
72-26
May 2009
72 Create VPRN parameters Table 72-9 IP Source Application Parameter

Option Telnet FTP SSH RADIUS TACACS+ SNMP Traps Syslog ICMP Ping Trace Route DNS SNTP NTP Telnet IPv6 FTP IPv6 RADIUS IPv6 TACACS+ IPv6 SNMP Traps IPv6 Syslog IPv6 ICMP Ping IPv6 Trace Route IPv6 DNSIPv6 Selectable when the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) is set to an IPv6 address. Dependencies Selectable when the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) is set to an IPv4 address.
You must select an IPv6 Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) to select an IPv6 Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication). In 5620 SAM Release, 3.0, you can configure the source address for RADIUS and TACACS+ policies for the 7710 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7750 SR Release 3.0. In 5620 SAM Release 4.0, the Source Address field on the RADIUS and TACACS+ Policy (Create) form is not usable for any of the Release 4.0 devices even though it remains on the form. Instead, you must use the Source Address form in the Routing Instance of the device.
Static Route ID (id)

The Static Route ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the static route in the service domain. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0.
May 2009
72-27
Start Address (startAddress)

The Start Address parameter specifies the first IP address for a range of IP addresses to be configured for a subnetwork. You must also set the End Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Subscriber Identification (subscrIdent)

The Subscriber Identification parameter specifies an identifier for the subscriber for a PPPoE session. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subscrProfileString)

The Subscriber Mapped Profile String parameter specifies the mapped string to the subscriber profile assigned to the subscriber host. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subscrProfileString)

The Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String parameter specifies the mapped string to the subscriber SLA profile assigned to the subscriber host. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Subnet Mask
See Subnet Mask (netMaskInt) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
System ID
See System ID (siteID) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Tag
See Tag (staticRouteTag) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Target AS Value (vrfTargetASValue)

The Target AS Value parameter specifies the AS number of the default VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
72-28
May 2009
Target Community Value (vrfTargetCommunityValue)

The Target Community Value parameter specifies the BGP community value of the default VRF target for the site.This parameter is configurable when the Target Format parameter is set to IP address. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Target Extended Community Value (vrfTargetExtendedCommunityValue)

The Target Extended Community Value parameter specifies the BGP community value of the default VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the Target Format parameter is set to AS. The range is 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Target Format (vrfTargetFormat)

The Target Format parameter specifies the VRF target format to use. This parameter is configurable when the VRF Target Type parameter is set to Define Default. Table 72-10 describes the parameter options.
Table 72-10 Target Format parameter
Option None (default) AS IP Address Option description Specifies that you want to configure an AS number for the default target Specifies that you want to configure an IP address for the default target
Target IP Address (vrfTargetIpAddress)

The Target IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the default VRF target for the site. This parameter is configurable when the Target Format parameter is set to IP Address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Transmit Interval (bfdtxInterval)

The Transmit Interval parameter specifies the time in milliseconds for the BFD session. The range is 100 to 100 000. The default is 100.
Terminating Port Displayed Name

See Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Threshold (%)
Table 72-11 lists where to find more information about the Threshold (%) parameter.
May 2009
72-29
72 Create VPRN parameters Table 72-11 Threshold (%) parameter

Parameter Threshold (%) in Maximum Number of IPv6 Routes panel Threshold (%) in Maximum Number of Multicast Routes panel Threshold (%) in Maximum Number of Routes panel See Threshold (%) (ipv6MaxNumRoutesThresHold) in this section Threshold (%) (midRouteMcastThreshold) in this section Threshold (%) (midRouteThreshold) in this section
Threshold (%) (ipv6MaxNumRoutesThresHold)

The Threshold (%) parameter specifies the percentage of the value configured for the Maximum Number Of IPv6 Routes (maxIPv6RouteNumber) parameter at which the NE logs a warning message and sends an SNMP trap to the 5620 SAM, which generates an alarm. To configure the parameter, you must first deselect the Infinity check box beside the parameter. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 0, which specifies that the threshold is infinity and no associated threshold-crossing event is generated.
Threshold (%) (midRouteMcastThreshold)

The Threshold (%) parameter specifies the percentage of the value configured for the Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (maxNumberOfMcastRoutes) parameter at which the NE logs a warning message and sends an SNMP trap to the 5620 SAM, which generates an alarm. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 0, which specifies that the threshold is infinity and no associated threshold-crossing event is generated.
Threshold (%) (midRouteThreshold)

The Threshold (%) parameter specifies the percentage of the value configured for the Maximum Number Of Routes (maxNumberOfRoutes) parameter at which the NE logs a warning message and sends an SNMP trap to the 5620 SAM, which generates an alarm. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 0, which specifies that the threshold is infinity and no associated threshold-crossing event is generated.
Time Exceeded
See Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Time Exceeded Time (seconds)

See Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Timeout (seconds)
See Timeout (seconds) (timeOut) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
72-30
May 2009
Transport (AutoBindTransport)
The Transport parameter specifies whether the VPRN sites are to be automatically bound to previously created service tunnels. Table 72-12 describes the parameter options.
Table 72-12 Transport parameter
Option MPLS:LDP GRE None (default) Option description Specifies that you want the service to be automatically bound to MPLS service tunnels Specifies that you want the service to be automatically bound to GRE service tunnels Specifies that you want to manually configure service tunnels and circuits for the service
Trusted
Table 72-13 lists where to find more information about the Trusted parameter.
Table 72-13 Trusted parameter
Parameter Trusted for L3 interface Trusted for DHCP See Trusted (isTrusted) in section 79.1 Trusted (trusted) in section 79.1
TTL Expired
See TTL Expired (ttlExpired) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
TTL Expired Time (seconds)

See TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Tunnel Transport
May 2009
72-31
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies the hop type for the static route. Table 72-14 describes the parameter options.
Table 72-14 Type parameter
Option Next Hop (default) Option description Specifies the directly connected next-hop IP address used to reach the destination. This address must be associated with a network that is directly connected to a network configured on this node. The configured IP address is not directly connected to a network configured on this node. The destination can be reachable using multiple paths. The static route remains valid when the address configured as the indirect address is a valid entry in the routing table. Indirect static routes cannot use an IP prefix and mask to another indirect static route. Specifies a black hole route. This means that if the destination address on a packet matches this static route, it will be discarded without notification.
Indirect
Black Hole
Type (optionType)
The Type parameter specifies the format the DHCP host will send the option to the DHCP client. The options are:
IP Address ASCII String Hex String Type (vprnType)

The Type parameter specifies the type of VPRN instance being configured for a hub and spoke configuration. Table 72-15 describes the parameter options.
Option Regular (default) Hub Option description Specifies a fully meshed VPRN. Specifies a hub VPRN, which allows all traffic from the hub SAPs to be routed to the destination directly, while all traffic from spoke VPRNs or network interfaces can only be routed to a hub SAP. Specifies a subscriber split horizon VPRN, which controls the flow of traffic for wholesale subscriber applications.
Subscriber Split Horizon
72-32
May 2009
Type 0 Administrative Value (type0AdministrativeValue)

The Type 0 Administrative Value parameter specifies the AS number for the RD. You can set the AS number to 0 when you use static routing or RIP between the PE and CE routers. The AS number can also be the AS of the PE router (base router instance). Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you do not use private AS numbers. This parameter is configurable when the Route Distinguisher Type parameter is set to Type 0. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Type 0 Assigned Value (type0AssignedValue)

The Type 0 Assigned Value parameter specifies a 4 byte integer for the route distinguisher. This parameter is configurable when the Route Distinguisher Type parameter is set to Type 0. The range is 1 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Type 1 Assigned Value (type1AssignedValue)

The Type 1 Assigned Value parameter specifies a 2 byte integer of the RD. This parameter is configurable when the Route Distinguisher Type parameter is set to Type 1. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Type 1 IP Address (type1IpAddress)

The Type 1 IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the RD. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you do not use a private IP address. This parameter is configurable when the Route Distinguisher Type parameter is set to Type 1. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Unreachables
See Unreachables (unreachables) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Unreachables Time (seconds)

See Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Use GI Address (useGiAddress)

The Use GI Address parameter specifies whether a gateway IP address is used. When the value is set to true, the IP address is set based on an available gateway IP address. The address is offered even if authentication fails or there is no local user database configured. When the value is set to false, the IP address must be specified and included in the local database. The options are:
True False (default)
May 2009
72-33
Use Pool From Client (usePoolFromClient)

The Use Pool From Client parameter specifies whether the DHCP server is using the pool name in vendor-specific DHCP-attributes. The options are:
True False (default) Use Shared Queue

Value (optionValue)
The Value parameter specifies additional values for the DHCP option. For example Option 42 specifies the list of network time protocol servers available to the DHCP client. Option 12, the host name option, specifies the name of the DHCP client. All DHCP protocol options and values are defined in RFC 2131.
Version (version)
The Version parameter specifies whether the OSPF routing instance uses OSPFv2 or OSPFv3. The options are:
2 (default) 3 VRF Target Type (vrfTargetType)

The VRF Target Type parameter specifies how to configure the VRF target for the site. Table 72-16 describes the parameter options.
Table 72-16 VRF Target Type parameter
Option None (default) Define Default Define Import and Export Option description Specifies that you do not want to configure a VRF target for the site Specifies that you want to configure a default VRF target for the site Specifies that you want to configure import and export VRF targets for the site
72-34
May 2009
73.1 Create IES parameters
73-2
May 2009
73-1
73.1
Create IES parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create IES service forms.
AAL5 Encapsulation

Up Down (default) Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps)

Aggregation

ANCP String
73-2
May 2009
Anti-Spoof Mac Address(antiSpoofMacAddr)

See Anti-Spoof MAC Address (antiSpoofMacAddr) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Auto-Assign ID
Autonomous Address Configuration

See Autonomous Address Configuration (autonomous) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Broadcast Address Format

CCM Messages
See CCM Messages (ccEnable) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.

Current Hop Limit

See Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Description
Direction
See Direction (direction)in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
73-3

Egress Filter ID

Egress Policy ID

Enable DHCP Relay

Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState)

See Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Info Option

See Enable Info Option (informationOption) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Local Proxy

See Enable Local Proxy (localProxy) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Local Proxy ARP

See Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Proxy ARP

See Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
73-4
May 2009
High Priority Defect

See High-priority Defect (mepHighestPrDefect) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
ID
ID
See ID (mepId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Filter ID
Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits)

The Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P parameter specifies which set of 802.1P bits in a Q in Q encapsulated packet are used to match a QoS or MAC filter policy. The parameter is configurable when the Encap Type parameter value for the port is Null, Dot1 Q, or Q in Q, but has affects only Q in Q encapsulated packets. Table 73-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 73-1 Ingress Match Q in Q Dot1P parameter
Option None (default) Bottom Top Option description Uses default 802.1P behavior Uses 802.1P prioritization bits in the inner VLAN tag Uses 802.1P prioritization bits in the outer VLAN tag
Ingress Policy ID


May 2009
73-5

Interface ID
Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption)

See Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString)

See Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
IP Address
See IP Address (ipAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
IPv6 Prefix
See IPv6 Prefix (prefix) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Lease Populate
See Lease Populate (leasePopulate) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Lifetime (seconds)
Table 73-2 lists where to find more information about the Lifetime (seconds) parameter.
Table 73-2 Lifetime (seconds) parameter
Parameter Lifetime (seconds) for general router advertisement Lifetime (seconds) to specify preferred routing prefix lifetime Lifetime (seconds) to specify valid routing prefix lifetime See Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime) in section 79.1 Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) in section 79.1 Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) in section 79.1
See L2 Header (l2header) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
73-6
May 2009
Loopback Enabled
Low Priority Defect

MAC Address
MAC Monitoring
Maintenance Association ID
See MA ID (maintenanceAssociationId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Maintenance Domain ID
See Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Managed Address Config

See Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Mask Reply
Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates)

See Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Max Interval (seconds)

See Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Min Interval (seconds)

See Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)
MTU
See MTU (mtu) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Name
Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution)

See Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
No Expiry
Table 73-3 lists where to find more information about the No Expiry parameter.
Table 73-3 No Expiry parameter
Parameter No Expiry for preferred routing prefix lifetime No Expiry for valid routing prefix lifetime See No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) in section 79.1 No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry) in section 79.1
Number of Packet Too Big

See Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Number of Param Problem

Number of Redirects
73-8
May 2009
Number of Time Exceeded

See Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

See Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
On-Link Determination
See On-Link Determination (onLink) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Other Stateful Config

See Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.


Packet Too Big

See Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Packet Too Big Time (seconds)

See Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Param Problem
See Param Problem (paramProblem) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Param Problem Time (seconds)

See Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
73-9
Periodic Atm Oam LoopBack

See Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Physical Address
Policy 1
Policy 2
Policy 3
Policy 4
Policy 5
Port
Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix)

See Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID)

See Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix IAID (pfxIAID)

See Prefix IAID (pfxIAID) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix Length
73-10
May 2009
Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime)

See Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState)

See Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime)

See Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Primary
Priority Level for CCM Messages

See Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Proxy Arp Policy 1

Proxy Arp Policy 2

Proxy Arp Policy 3

Proxy Arp Policy 4

Proxy Arp Policy 5

Reachable Time (milliseconds)

See Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Redirects

Retransmit Time
See Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Send Advertisement
See Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Server 1
Server 1 (server1IpAddress)
The Server 1 parameter specifies a DHCPv6 server for the interface. The DHCPv6 server stores network addresses and delivers configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Specify an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format for the Server 1 parameter. The default is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0.
Server 2
See Server 1 (server1IpAddress) in this section for more information.
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
Server 8
Service ID
Service Name
Site ID
Session Limit (ifSessionLimit)

The Session Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of PPPoE sessions allowed on the IES interface. The range is 1 to 8 000. The default is 1.
Session Limit per SAP (SapSessionLimit)

The Session Limit per SAP parameter specifies the maximum number of PPPoE sessions allowed on the SAP belonging to IES interface. The range is 1 to 8 000. The default is 1.
Source IP Address (sourceAddress)

See Source IP Address (sourceAddress) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Subnet Mask
See Subnet Mask (netMaskInt) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
System ID

Time Exceeded
See Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Time Exceeded Time (seconds)

See Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Timeout

Trusted
TTL Expired


Tunnel Transport
Unreachables

Use Shared Queue

May 2009
73-15
73-16
May 2009
74.1 Create VLAN parameters
74-2
May 2009
74-1
74.1
Create VLAN parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create VLAN service forms.
Application (servicesSubType)
The Application parameter specifies the type of VLAN. Table 74-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 74-1 Application parameter
Option unspecified (default) Broadcast TV (MVR/IPMV) Option description You must choose a VLAN application. Specifies that the VLAN is used for BTV (7250 SAS, 7250 SAS-ES, 7250 SAS-ESA, and Telco) or IP multicast (OmniSwitch) Specifies that the VLAN is used for TLS (7250 SAS, 7250 SAS-ES, 7250 SAS-ESA, and Telco) or stacked VLANs (OmniSwitch) Dependencies The VLAN ID for the SAP endpoints in the service used to carry the broadcast channels on the 7450 ESS must match the VLAN ID of the VLAN service. TLS must be configured for the ring group for the VLAN. Configure and apply to the Telco devices the appropriate QoS and ACL templates to specify the QoS delivered to subscribers. The 7450 ESS devices that connect to the ring group must have at least two IESs ready, one for internet traffic and one for DHCP relays on each Telco device. End customer devices must be assigned an IP address from the DHCP server. Standard VLAN Standard VLANs can be configured on 7250 SAS, 7250 SAS-ES, 7250 SAS-ESA, Telco, and OmniSwitch Specifies that the VLAN is to be used in conjunction with a ring group You cannot configure a standard VLAN, however an existing standard VLAN on a Telco device, for example a management VLAN, can be resynchronized from the managed device. The 7450 ESS must be part of a management VPLS used to relay SNMP and CLI messages to the Telco devices.
L2-VPN (TLS/VLAN-Stacking)
Internet Access (Super-VLAN)
Specifies that the VLAN is used for Internet access
Management VLAN
Auto-Assign ID
74-2
May 2009
Customer VLAN ID (custVlanID)

The Customer VLAN ID parameter associates a CVLAN service with a service access multipoint. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
Customer VLAN Tag (custVlanTag)

The Customer VLAN Tag parameter specifies the mapping between an IP multicast VLAN and a customer VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 0.
Description
Enable 1x1 STP (enable1x1Stp)

The Enable 1x1 STP parameter specifies whether the STP status for the VLAN applies when the switch is running in the 1x1 spanning tree mode. The options are:
True (default) False Enable Authentication (enableAuthentication)

The Enable Authentication parameter specifies whether authentication is enabled for a VLAN. The options are:
True False (default) Enable Flat STP (enableFlatStp)

The Enable Flat STP parameter whether the STP status for the VLAN applies when the switch is running in the flat spanning tree mode. The options are:
True (default) False Enable Mobile-Tag (enableMobileTag)

The Enable Mobile-Tag parameter specifies whether classification of tagged packets received on mobile ports is enabled or disabled. If a mobile port receives a tagged packet with a VLAN ID that matches the specified VLAN ID, the port and packet are dynamically assigned to the VLAN. If the Enable Mobile-Tag parameter is set to False, when packets are tagged with a VLAN ID that does not match the mobile port default VLAN or a rule VLAN that the traffic qualifies for, the packet is dropped. The options are:

Enable STP (enableStp)

The Enable STP parameter specifies whether the STP for a VLAN is enabled or disabled. The options are:
True (default) False Ethernet Service Name (ethernetServiceName)

The Ethernet Service Name parameter specifies a name for the Ethernet service. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Map Type (cVlanMapType)

The Map Type parameter is applied to frames that are received on all SAP UNI ports of an Ethernet service. The parameter determines the type of customer traffic that is accepted on the UNI ports and processed by the service. Table 74-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 74-2 Map Type parameter
Option Single (default) All Untagged Only Description Applies the SAP profile to frames tagged with one CVLAN value. See Customer VLAN ID (custVlanID). Applies the SAP profile to tagged and untagged frames Applies the SAP profile only to untagged frames Dependencies
Mode
See Mode (mvrMode) in section 185.1 for the parameter description.
Multicast Address (address)

The Multicast Address parameter specifies an IPv4 multicast address for an IP multicast VLAN site. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Name
Port
74-4
May 2009
Query Response Time (seconds)

See Query Response Time (seconds) (mvrQueryTime) in section 168.1 for the parameter description.
Service ID
Service Name
Service Access Multi-Point ID (sapId)

The Service Access Multi-Point ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the service. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 1024. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
System ID
VLAN Tagging (tagging)

The VLAN Tagging parameter specifies the type of encapsulation allowed on a VLAN access port. The options are:
Untagged (default) Tagged

The VLAN Tagging parameter should always be set to Tagged on CES interfaces. See Table 27-5 in section 27.13 for a description of tagged and untagged traffic behavior.
May 2009
74-5
74-6
May 2009
75.1 Create Mirror parameters
75-2
May 2009
75-1
75.1
Create Mirror parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create Mirror service forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Automatic SDP Binding Creation


Description
Destination MAC Address (ipMirrorDestinationMacAddress)

The Destination MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address to be used for the destination MAC Address field in the mirrored packets when using the IP mirror service. An error message is displayed if an attempt is made to set the value of this parameter to other than the default of 00-00-00-00-00-00, if the encapsulation type is not set to IP Only. When the encapsulation type is set to IP Only, all zeroes are not allowed.
Egress Aggregate Rate Limit

See Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Enable Egress (egressEnabled)

The Enable Egress parameter specifies whether to enable the mirroring of packets that egress the selected SAP or port. The options are:
true (default) false Enable Ingress (ingressEnabled)

The Enable Ingress parameter specifies whether to enable the mirroring of packets that ingress the selected SAP or port. The options are:
true (default) false Enable Port ID Mirroring (enablePortId)

The Enable Port ID Mirroring parameter indicates whether a port identifier is included in the mirrored packets. The parameter is only displayed and can only be set when the Encapsulation Type parameter on the mirror site is set to PPP. The options are:
false (default) true Encapsulation Type (encapsulationType)

The Encapsulation Type parameter specifies the type of encapsulation configured on the mirror service site. The encapsulation type must be the same for all the mirror sites associated with a service. The options are:
Ethernet (default) FrameRelay PPP ATM-SDU IP Only

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class that the mirror service assigns to packets that it forwards to the mirror destination. A mirrored packet does not inherit the forwarding class of the original packet. The options are:
h2 ef h1 nc
May 2009
75-3
Forwarding Classes (forwardingClass)

The Forwarding Classes parameter specifies the forwarding classes that are to be used as match criteria for the mirrored subscriber packets. There is no default. The options are:
nc ef l1 l2
h1 h2 af be
Host IP Address (ipAddress)

The Host IP Address parameter specifies an IP address range for subscriber hosts on the SAP as a match criterion for the mirrored subscriber packets. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured and an IP address is not used as a match criterion for the subscriber traffic.
Host MAC Address (macAddress)

The Host MAC Address parameter specifies a MAC address range for subscriber hosts on the SAP as a match criterion for the mirrored subscriber packets. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00, which means that the parameter is not configured and a MAC address is not used as a match criterion for the subscriber traffic.
Ingress Label (ingressLabel)

The Ingress Label parameter specifies the ingress service label. The parameter value identifies a remote source bound to the mirror destination service. The parameter value is obtained manually or through signalling with the far-end device. A parameter value of 0 represents a T-LDP configuration and the label value is obtained from signaling using the LSP. The range is 2048 to 18 431. The default is 0. You must ensure that the configuration of the Ingress Label parameter meets the following configuration criteria:
label must be unique to the service and not previously used label must match the far-end (egress) expected value
See Egress Label (egressLabel) in section 79.1 for more information.

Name
75-4
May 2009
Port
Remote Site ID (remoteSourceSiteId)

The Remote Site ID parameter specifies the service IP address (system IP address) of the remote node sending mirrored traffic to the mirror destination service. A parameter value of 0.0.0.0 configures support for the mirror destination service to receive mirrored traffic from any remote 7750 SR. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Service ID
Service Name
Slice Size (sliceSize)

The Slice Size parameter specifies how much of the mirrored packet, in bytes, to send to the mirror destination. For example, when you specify a parameter value of 256, the first 256 bytes of a packet are sent to the mirror destination. The original packet is not affected. The range is 128 to 9216. The default is 0, which specifies that the entire packet is mirrored and no packet slicing occurs.
Source Administrative State (sourceAdministrativeState)

The Source Administrative State parameter specifies whether mirror sources on the site are enabled. The options are:
Up (default) Down Source MAC Address (ipMirrorSourceMacAddress)

The Destination MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address to be used for the destination MAC Address field in the mirrored packets when using the IP mirror service. This MAC address must not be a broadcast or multicast address. An error message is displayed if an attempt is made to set the value of this parameter to other than the default of 00-00-00-00-00-00, if the encapsulation type is not set to IP Only. When the encapsulation type is set to IP Only, all zeroes are not allowed and multicast/broadcast addresses are not allowed either.
May 2009
75-5
Subscriber Identification String (subscriberIdent)

The Subscriber Identification String parameter specifies the subscriber identification string that identifies the subscriber for which to mirror traffic. If no other match criteria are specified, all of the host packets from all of the SAPs on the NE that belong to the subscriber are mirrored. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
System ID


75-6
May 2009
76.1 Create Service From Template parameters
76-2
May 2009
76-1
76.1
Create Service From Template parameters

See chapters 71 to 92 for descriptions of the parameters that appear on the Service Template and Create Service forms and child forms.
76-2
May 2009
77.1 Create Topology Group parameters
77-2
May 2009
77-1
77.1
Create Topology Group parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create Group property form.
Background Image (backgroundImage)

The Background Image parameter specifies a background map image for a topology group, for example, a map image of North America. You can position device icons and topology group icons in the map of the network to reflect their relative geographic locations. The range is 0 to 254 characters, including the file extension; for example, n_america.gif. The default background image is defaultBackgroundImage.gif. The position of the background image defaults to the upper left corner of the map panel. To view the list of example images provided by 5620 SAM, navigate to the background directory in the 5620 SAM client Installation directory; for example, /nms/images/map/background. When adding your own map image to the directory, ensure that the file type is GIF and that the size is a maximum of 2000 2000 pixels.
Description
Group Name
77-2
May 2009
78.1 Create Physical Link parameters
78-2
May 2009
78-1
78.1
Create Physical Link parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create Physical Link property form.
Description
Endpoint A Type (endPointAType)

The Endpoint A Type parameter specifies the type of physical link for endpoint A. The options are:
Port (default) Network Element Generic NE Interface Endpoint B Type (endPointBType)

The Endpoint B Type parameter specifies the type of physical link for endpoint B. The options are:
Port (default) Network Element Unmanaged NE Generic NE Interface
The Unmanaged NE option specifies that the physical port at endpoint B of the link is not managed by the 5620 SAM.
Name
Notes (notes)
The Notes parameter specifies additional information about the physical link. The range is 0 to 254 characters.
Unmanaged - Description (unmanagedEndpointBDescription)

The Unmanaged - Description parameter specifies a description for the physical port that is not managed by the 5620 SAM and is endpoint B of the link. The range is 0 to 64 characters.
78-2
May 2009
Unmanaged - Management Address (unmanagedEndpointBIPAddr)

The Unmanaged - Management Address parameter specifies the IP address for the location of the physical port that is not managed by the 5620 SAM and is endpoint B of the link. The range is from 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Unmanaged - Name (unmanagedEndpointB)

The Unmanaged - Name parameter specifies a name for the physical port that is not managed by the 5620 SAM and is endpoint B of the link. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
May 2009
78-3
78-4
May 2009
79.1 Common Create menu parameters
79-2
May 2009
79-1
79.1
Common Create menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the 5620 SAM Create menu forms.
AAL5 Encapsulation (atmEncapsulation)

The AAL5 Encapsulation parameter specifies the type of AAL-5 data on the port. AAL-5 supports the conversion of VBR, delay-tolerant, connection-oriented traffic such as signaling and control data and network management data. This traffic requires minimal sequencing and minimal error detection support. Table 79-1 lists the parameter options.
Table 79-1 AAL5 Encapsulation parameter
Parameter Options Interfaces L2 AAL5 Encapsulation L3 A routed IP encapsulation for VC multiplexed circuits as defined in RFC 2684. VC multiplexing creates a binding between an ATM VC and the type of network protocol carried on the VC. As a result, protocol identification is unnecessary in the payload of the AAL5 PDU. An Ethernet bridged encapsulation without frame checksum that is used for bridging by the PVC. A routed IP encapsulation that identifies the protocol type of routed PDUs by prefixing an IEEE 802.2 LLC header to each PDU. In some cases, the LLC header must be followed by an IEEE 802.1a SNAP header. A bridged encapsulation that provides the necessary ARP capability to bind and maintain MAC addresses for the IP nodes on the remote LAN segment. Description
AAL5 mux IP
AAL5 mux bridged ETH no FCS
AAL5 SNAP routed
AAL5 SNAP bridged
Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId)

The Accounting Policy ID parameter specifies the policy to use when you create an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to list and choose an accounting policy.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies DHCP Option 82 processing on the access interface. The parameter tells the DHCP relay agent what to do when it receives a DHCP request that already has an information option on the packet. You can configure the parameter when the Enable Option 82 parameter is set to true. Table 79-2 describes the parameter options.
79-2
May 2009
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-2 Action parameter

Option Keep (default) Option description The existing information is kept on the packet and the device does not add any additional information. On egress, the information option is not removed and is sent to the downstream node. This setup is similar to not having configured DHCP relay at all. If the gateway IP address of the packet received is the same as the address on the device, the packet is dropped. Drop Replace The packet is dropped. On ingress, the existing information option is replaced with the information option from the device. On egress, the information option is removed.
Active State (txActiveState)

The Active State parameter specifies an active or backup mode designation for redundant SDP bindings. The options are:
Active (default) Backup Address ID (index)

The Address ID parameter specifies a numeric identifier for the IP address. The range is 1 to 16. The default is 1, which is reserved for the primary interface address. The Address ID parameter can be configured for the 7705 SAR, but only the default value is allowed. The default is 1.
Administrative State (administrativeState)

The Administrative State parameter specifies whether an object is administratively enabled. The options are:
Up (default) Down Admin Status (adminStatus)

The AdminStatus parameter specifies whether residential subscriber management is enabled on the SAP. The options are:
May 2009
79-3

Table 79-3 lists where to find information about the Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter.
Table 79-3 Aggregate Rate Limit parameter
Parameter Value Aggregation rate limit for egress queues Aggregation rate limit for egress HSMDA queues Aggregation rate limit for ingress HSMDA queues Description See Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit) in this section. See Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit) in this section. See Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit) in this section.
Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit)

The Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate of all egress queues for the access interface. You must select the Assign Aggregate Rate Limit check box before you configure the Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an egress scheduler. When you specify 1, the rate is unlimited or 1 to 40 000 000.
Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit)

The Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate of all HSMDA egress queues for the access interface. You must select the Assign Aggregate Rate Limit check box before you configure the Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an egress scheduler. The range is 1 to 40 000 000. When you specify 1, the rate is unlimited.
Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit)

The Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate of all HSMDA ingress queues for the access interface. You must select the Assign Aggregate Rate Limit check box before you configure the Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an ingress scheduler. The range is 1 to 40 000 000. When you specify 1, the rate is unlimited.
Aggregation (aggregation)
The Aggregation parameter specifies whether aggregation scheduling is used for the access interface. The options are:
on off (default)
79-4
May 2009
Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast)

The Allow Directed Broadcasts parameter specifies whether direct broadcast forwarding from the interface is permitted. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) ANCP String (ancpkeyString)

The ANCP String parameter specifies the ASCII representation of the DSLAM circuit ID. This parameter is associated with an ANCP policy. The range is 1 to 63 characters. There is no default.
Anti-Spoofing (antiSpoofing)
The Anti-Spoofing parameter specifies whether or not anti-spoof filtering is enabled and defines the type of anti-spoof filter to use. Anti-spoof filtering is an automatic filter mechanism that is used to improve network security. Anti-spoof filters guard the managed network against packets generated by an external network to falsely appear as originating from an internal device. When anti-spoof filtering is enabled on a service SAP, the anti-spoof table is populated with all the static and dynamic host information available on the SAP. For the device to be able to forward the IP packets that enter the SAP, the packets must successfully match the entries in the anti-spoof table. Ingress packets that match an anti-spoof filter entry are forwarded by the system and may be subject to additional forwarding criteria. Ingress packets that do not match any entries in the table are discarded. Not all ingress packets are subject to anti-spoof filtering when it is enabled; for example, non-IP packets, such as DHCP and ARP requests and replies, are not subject to anti-spoofing filtering. You can configure anti-spoofing for the following service objects:
VPLS SAPs IES SAP-based IP interfaces VPRN SAP-based IP interfaces

There are three types of anti-spoof filters that the SAP can use to filter packets:
source IP source MAC combination source IP and source MAC

For example, if you want only the incoming source MAC address to be verified, the SAP anti-spoof type must be set to Source Mac Addr, which results in the MAC anti-spoof table being defined and maintained. You can only specify one type of anti-spoofing filter for each SAP, for example, you cannot filter by both source IP address and source MAC address. Table 79-4 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
79-5
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-4 Anti-Spoofing parameter

Option disabled (default) Source Ip Addr Option description Disables anti-spoof filtering on the SAP Configures SAP anti-spoof filtering to use only the source IP address as a match criterion. Dependencies Each static host requires an IP address. The DHCP lease state table must be up and populated. This is the default option for a group interface SAP and cannot be changed. Source Mac Addr Configures SAP anti-spoof filtering to use only the source MAC address as a match criterion. Each static host requires a MAC address. The DHCP lease state table must be up and populated. The SAP must support Ethernet encapsulation. Source Ip And Mac Addr Configures SAP anti-spoof filtering to use both the source IP address and the source MAC address as match criteria. Each static host requires an IP address and a MAC address. The DHCP lease state table must be up and populated. The SAP must support Ethernet encapsulation. Next Hop Ip And Mac Addr Enables a SAP to accept SRRP advertisements when anti-spoofing is enabled for subscriber hosts on the SAP. Required for each SAP on a group IP interface that receives SRRP advertisements. The option is available on VPRN and IES group-interface SAPs. Each static host requires an IP address and a MAC address. This option is supported on the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 6.1 and later, except for the 7750 SR-1.
Anti-Spoof MAC Address (antiSpoofMacAddr)

The Anti-Spoof MAC Address and L2 Header parameters specify the MAC address that is used in anti-spoof configuration for the lease state on the interface.When the L2 Header parameter is set to False, the client hardware address stored in the DHCP server is used. When the L2 Header parameter is set to True and the value of the Anti-Spoof Mac Address parameter value is 0.0.0.0, the source MAC address in the layer 2 header of the DHCP packet is used. When a valid MAC address is entered, the MAC address is used. The default is 00-00-00-00-00.
ARP Populate (arpPopulate)

The ARP Populate parameter specifies whether IP addresses and MAC addresses of the static and dynamic hosts are placed in the ARP cache of the device. Both a MAC address and an IP address are required to populate an ARP entry. In the event that both a static host and a dynamic host share the same IP address and MAC address, the ARP cache retains the host information until both the static and dynamic host information is removed. The options are:
79-6
May 2009
When the ARP Populate parameter is enabled, the system does not send out ARP requests for hosts that are not in the ARP cache. After you enable the ARP Populate parameter, you can configure only static hosts that have both an IP address and a MAC address.
Note Do not enable the ARP Populate parameter for routed ATM
interfaces.
ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling (atmOamAlarmCellHandling)

The ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling parameter specifies whether OAM cells are used to provide ATM network maintenance functions, such as connectivity verification, alarm surveillance, continuity checking, and performance monitoring. The options are:
Up (default) Down Auto-Assign ID

The Auto-Assign ID parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM automatically assigns a unique ID to the created object. The options are:

When you create a VLAN with access ports on a 7250 SAS or Telco device, disable the parameter and use the Service ID parameter to configure the VLAN service ID that matches the VLAN ID that you want to use.
Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion)

The Automatic SDP Binding Creation parameter specifies whether the service that you are creating is automatically bound to previously created service tunnels. The 5620 SAM supports the use of up to 2 site she options are:

Enabling the parameter displays the Transport Type and Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameters.
Autonomous Address Configuration (autonomous)

The Autonomous Address Creation parameter specifies whether the routing prefix is used for stateless autoconfiguration. The options are:
true (default) false

Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel)

The Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel parameter specifies the automatic selection of the transport encapsulation type for the return service tunnel by the 5620 SAM. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the return tunnel to a circuit. The options are:

You must also define the Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference) parameter when you enable the Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel parameter.
Auto Select Transport Tunnel (autoSelectTunnel)

The Auto Select Transport Tunnel parameter specifies the automatic selection of the transport encapsulation type for the service tunnel by the 5620 SAM. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the tunnel to a circuit. The options are:

You must also define the Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference) parameter when you enable the Auto Select Transport Tunnel parameter.
Auto Select Tunnels (autoSelectTunnel)

The Auto Select Tunnels parameter specifies whether the spoke connector is automatically bound to previously created service tunnels. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled BPDU Translation (bpduTranslation)

The BPDU Translation parameter enables BPDU translation to PVST or STP or to a format that is automatically detected, based on the type of BPDU received on a given SAP or spoke SDP binding. The options are:
Auto Disabled (default) PVST STP
BPDU translation is supported only for Ethernet and ATM MDAs on the 7250 SAS, 7750 SR, and 7450 ESS.
79-8
May 2009
Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat)

The Broadcast Address Format parameter overrides the default broadcast address that is used when the IP interface acts as a source of IP broadcasts. Table 79-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-5 Broadcast Address Format parameter
Option Host Ones (default) Option description Specifies that the broadcast address used by the IP interface for this IP address is the subnet broadcast address. This is an IP address that corresponds to the local subnet with all the host bits set to binary one. Specifies that the broadcast address used by the IP interface for this IP address is 255.255.255.255, (also called the local broadcast). Notes
All Ones
This option is not available for IES subscriber interfaces on the 7750 SR. This option is not available for VPLS L2 management interfaces in the Release 5.0 R5 5620 SAM. If the option is configured on a device using CLI, the 5620 SAM displays no value for the parameter.

The CC Messages parameter specifies whether or not continuity messaging is run on the MEP. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Circuit ID (circuitId)

The Circuit ID parameter specifies whether the Option 82 circuit ID suboption is included in the DHCP relay packet and what format the suboption takes. The circuit ID suboption contains information that uniquely identifies the device from which the packet was received. You can configure the parameter when the Enable Option 82 parameter is set to true. Table 79-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-6 Circuit ID parameter
Option For L3 interfaces None (1 of 2) The suboption is left blank. Option description
May 2009
79-9
Option Ascii Tuple (default)
Option description Links the following information in a tuple to be sent:
The format of the tuple for VPRN or IES is system-name|service-ID|interface-name. The format of the tuple for VPLS is system-name|service-ID|SAP-ID. Interface Index Called ifindex on the managed device, this option indicates the index for the IP interface in which the policy is applied. For VPRN, the option is unique only within the VRF. When DHCP relay is performed, the VRF ID is automatically added before the DHCP request is relayed to the DHCP server. SAP ID VLAN ASCII Tuple This option indicates the SAP-id of the interface. Includes the VLAN-id and dot1p bits in addition to the default ASCII tuple information. The format is supported on Dot1 Q- and QinQencapsulated ports only.
For L2 interfaces false (default) true VLAN ASCII Tuple Includes the VLAN-id and dot1p bits in addition to the default ASCII tuple information. The format is supported on Dot1 Q- and QinQencapsulated ports only.
(2 of 2)
When a device is not configured for DHCP relay, and if a VPLS SAP is configured for DHCP snooping, Option 82 information is added.
Note The maximum DHCP relay packet size is 1500 bytes. If
adding option 82 information to the packet causes the packet to exceed 1500 bytes, the DHCP relay request is forwarded without including the Option 82 information.
Class (interfaceClass)
The Class parameter specifies whether the IP interface is a numbered or an unnumbered interface. Table 79-7 describes the parameter options:
Table 79-7 Class parameter
Option Numbered (default) Unnumbered Description The interface is a numbered interface. This option is selectable only when the interface port encapsulation type is routed ATM, FR, or IPCP. Dependencies You must configure the Unnumbered Type parameter.
79-10
May 2009
Client Applications (clientApplications)

The Client Applications parameter specifies the client applications that can use the DHCP relay functionality. The options are:
DHCP (default) PPPoE Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)

The Collect Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of accounting statistics on the interface is enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Composite ID (compositeSvcId)

The Composite ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the composite service. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0, which specifies that the parameter is not set.
Configured IP MTU (Octets) (ipMtu)

The parameter specifies the maximum IP MTU size, in bytes, that the interface transmits. The range is 0, or 512 to 9000. A value of zero specifies that the value is set to the interface default, which is calculated by subtracting the DLC header size from the physical MTU size of the interface. The Operational IP MTU value for the interface is displayed on the interface configuration form after interface creation. This value indicates the size of the largest IP MTU that this interface transmits. It is the lesser of the Configured IP MTU value and the operational MTU value of the physical port to which the interface is bound.
Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit)

The Current Hop Limit parameter specifies the hop limit value that the interface includes in router advertisement messages. The interface informs the nodes on the subnet about the hop limit when it sends IPv6 packets. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 64. A value of zero means that the interface includes no hop limit value in a router advertisement message.
Default Mesh VC ID (defaultMeshVcId)

The Default Mesh VC ID parameter specifies the default virtual circuit identifier used for the mesh SDP bindings for the service. It inherits the value of the Service ID parameter by default. The Default Mesh VC ID parameter is configurable when the Inherit Value parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0, which specifies that the Default Mesh VC ID parameter is set to the same value as the Service ID parameter.
May 2009
79-11
Default Subscriber Id (defSubscriberIdString)

The Default Subscriber Id parameter specifies the default subscriber identification string for each host on the SAP. The parameter is configurable when the Default Subscriber Identification Type (defSubcriberIdType) parameter is set to String. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Default Subscriber Identification Type (defSubcriberIdType)

The Default Subscriber Identification Type parameter specifies the type of information for the default subscriber identification string for hosts on the SAP. The default subscriber identification string is assigned to hosts that cannot be associated with a subscriber in any other way. Table 79-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-8 Default Subscriber Identification Type parameter
Option SAP ID String (default) Description The SAP ID is used as the subscriber identification string. The Default Subscriber Id (defSubscriberIdString) parameter value is used as the subscriber identification string. A default subscriber identifier is not assigned to hosts. Dependencies You must configure the Default Subscriber Id (defSubscriberIdString) parameter.
None
Default VC ID (vcId)
The Default VC ID parameter specifies the virtual circuit identifier for a spoke SDP binding that originates from a 7250 SAS-ES. The parameter is configurable when the Inherit Service ID Value parameter is Disabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0, which specifies that the Default VC ID parameter value is the same as the Service ID (serviceID) value.
Description (description)
The Description parameter specifies a description for the created object. The range is 0 to 80 characters for all objects except topology groups and physical links. For a topology group, the range is 0 to 252 characters. For a physical link, the range is 0 to 254 characters.
up (default) down
Displayed Name (displayedName)

The Displayed Name parameter specifies the name for the created object. The range is 1 to 32.
Dynamic Topology Discovery (dynamicTopDiscAdminState)

The Dynamic Topology Discovery parameter specifies whether the GSMP ANCP dynamic topology discovery capability is negotiated at the startup of the GSMP connection. The options are:
Up (default) Down Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId)

The Egress Filter ID parameter specifies the egress filter to use for a circuit or interface. Click on the Select button to choose an egress ACL IP or ACL MAC filter.
Egress Label (egressLabel)

The Egress Label parameter specifies an MPLS egress label for the SDP binding. A parameter value of 0 represents a T-LDP configuration. The range is 16 to 1 048 575. The default is 0. You must ensure that the configuration of the Egress Label parameter meets the following configuration criteria:
label must be unique to the service and not previously used label must match the ingress label value
See Ingress Label (ingressLabel) in section 75.1 for more information.
Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only (egressQinqMarkTopBitsOnly)

The Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only parameter specifies which 802.1p bits to mark during packet egress when the port encapsulation type for the SAP is set to Q in Q. Table 79-9 describes the parameter options:
Table 79-9 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only parameter
Option disabled (default) enabled Option description The top and bottom 802.1p bits in the Q in Q-encapsulated packet are marked. The top 802.1p bits in the Q in Q-encapsulated packet are marked.
May 2009
79-13
Egress Policy ID (egressPolicyId)

The Egress Policy ID parameter specifies the egress policy to use for an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an egress policy.
Egress Scheduler Name (egressSchedulerName)

The Egress Schedule Name parameter specifies the egress scheduler to use for an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an egress scheduler.
Emulated Server IP Address (emulatedServerAddr)

The Emulated Server IP Address specifies the source address for the emulated DHCP server of the interface. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. The local proxy server is not operational unless you configure the Emulated Server IP Address parameter.
Enable
The Enable parameter specifies whether the Lease Populate parameter is configurable. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState)

The Enable DHCP Relay parameter specifies the administrative state for DHCP relay. DHCP discover messages are broadcast packets that typically do not leave the IP subnet. DHCP relay agents are used to intercept the requests and forward them as unicast messages to a DHCP server. Table 79-10 lists the Enable DHCP Relay parameter options.
Table 79-10 Enable DHCP Relay parameter
Parameter Enable DHCP Relay for IES, VPRN Enable DHCP Relay for VPLS Options
Up (default) Down Enabled Disabled (default)
79-14
May 2009
Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState)

The Enable DHCPv6 Relay parameter specifies the administrative state for DHCPv6 relay. DHCP discover messages are broadcast packets that typically do not leave the IP subnet. DHCP relay agents are used to intercept the requests and forward them as unicast messages to a DHCP server. The options are:
Up (default) Down Enable Info Option (informationOption)

The Enable Info Option parameter specifies if the DHCP relay agent appends information (options) before sending the client request to the server. For example, Option 82 (Relay Information Option) is specified in RFC 3046 [2] and allows the relay agent to append information such as the circuit ID. The options are:

The DHCP relay option allows managed devices to append information to the DHCP request that identifies where the DHCP request originated. You can also independently insert Option 82 information when DHCP snooping is enabled on a VPLS SAP.
Enable Local Proxy (localProxy)

The Enable Local Proxy parameter specifies whether local proxy neighbor discovery can be used on the interface. Proxy neighbor discovery allows an interface, such as an L3 access interface, to respond to neighbor discovery queries that are intended for another interface. The options are:
true false (default) Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal)

The Enable Local Proxy ARP parameter specifies whether local proxy ARP is in effect on the interface. The options are:

Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests intended for another device. This allows a device reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device.
May 2009
79-15
Enable Option 82 (informationOption)

The Enable Option 82 parameter specifies if the DHCP relay agent appends information (options) before sending the client request to the server. For example, Option 82 (Relay Information Option) is specified in RFC 3046 [2] and allows the relay agent to append information such as the circuit ID. The options are:

The DHCP relay option allows managed devices to append information to the DHCP request that identifies where the DHCP request originated. You can also independently insert Option 82 information when DHCP snooping is enabled on a VPLS SAP.
Enable Secure SAPs (enableSecureSaps)

The Enable Secure SAPs parameter specifies that all traffic entering a VPLS from a SAP will be forwarded directly to the Spoke-SDP and is not propagated to the other SAP members of the VPLS. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Encapsulation Tagging (encapTagging)

The Encapsulation Tagging parameter specifies whether a 7250 SAS-ES VPLS SAP is tagged or untagged, which affects how tagged and untagged traffic passes through the SAP. Refer to table 27-5 for more information about tagged and untagged traffic behavior. You can configure the Encapsulation Tagging parameter when the VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode) parameter is set to Qualified. The options are:
Untagged (default) Tagged

Table 79-11 Encapsulation Tagging parameter
Parameter Value Tagged Untagged Description The SAP accepts only traffic that is encapsulated with the VPLS Tag (vplsTag) parameter value. The SAP accepts untagged traffic, or traffic that is encapsulated with the VPLS Tag (vplsTag) parameter value.
79-16
May 2009
Frame Base Accounting (egressFrameBaseAccounting)

The Frame Base Accounting parameter specifies whether or not to use Frame Base Accounting or packet-based accounting. Frame Base Accounting uses inter-frame gap and instructions to calculate overhead. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Gateway IP Address (gatewayIpAddress)

The Gateway IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that the CES module uses as a default gateway. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is the IP Address (ipAddress) parameter value.
GSMP Administrative State (gsmpAdministrativeState)

The GSMP Administrative State parameter specifies whether GSMP is enabled for the site. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Hold Multiplier (holdMultiplier)

The Hold Multiplier parameter specifies the GSMP hold multiplier value. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 3.
ID
Table 79-12 lists where to find more information about the ID parameter.
Table 79-12 ID parameter
Parameter ID for generic object ID for subscriber ID for service tunnel See ID (id) in this section ID (subscriberId) in this section ID (tunnelID) in this section
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the created object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
May 2009
79-17
ID (mepId)
ID (subscriberId)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the subscriber. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0.
ID (tunnelID)
The ID parameter specifies a unique, automatically generated ID for the service tunnel. Click on the Select button to choose a service tunnel for the SDP binding.
Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId)

The Ingress Filter ID parameter specifies an ACL IP or ACL MAC ingress filter to use for a circuit, L2, or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an ingress filter.

The Ingress Label parameter specifies an MPLS ingress label for the SDP binding. The range is 0 to 131 071. The default is 0.
Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits)

The Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P parameter specifies which set of 802.1P bits in a Q in Q encapsulated packet are used to match a QoS or MAC filter policy. The parameter is configurable when the Encap Type parameter value for the port is Null, Dot1 Q, or Q in Q, but affects only Q in Q encapsulated packets. Table 79-13 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-13 Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P parameter
Option None (default) Top Bottom Option description Uses default 802.1P behavior Uses 802.1P prioritization bits in the outer VLAN tag Uses 802.1P prioritization bits in the inner VLAN tag
Ingress Policy ID (ingressPolicyId)

The Ingress Policy ID parameter specifies the ingress policy to use for an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an ingress policy.
79-18
May 2009
Ingress Scheduler Name (ingressSchedulerName)

The Ingress Schedule Name parameter specifies the ingress scheduler to use for an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an ingress scheduler.
Inherit Service ID Value

The Inherit Service ID Value parameter specifies whether the Default VC ID (vcId) value for a VPLS on a 7250 SAS-ESA service site is the same as the Service ID (serviceID) value. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Inherit Value (inheritanceMask)

The Inherit Value parameter specifies whether the default virtual circuit identifier used for the mesh SDP bindings is the same as the Service ID parameter value for the service. If enabled, the Inherit Value parameter specifies that the Default Mesh VC ID parameter is set to the value of the Service ID parameter. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue)

The Inner Encapsulation Value parameter specifies the inner encapsulation value for the port. This parameter is configurable when the Encap Type parameter value for the port is Q in Q. The range is 0 to 4094, or 4095 to indicate *. The default is 0. A value of 4095 is equivalent to * using CLI, which indicates that all tags are accepted, regardless of value. You can also use an asterisk (*). A value of 0 indicates that the port has no tag.
Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) (vci)

The Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) parameter specifies the inner encapsulation value for the port. The parameter is equivalent to the VCI of the PVC connection on the port. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Interface ID (id)
The Interface ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the interface. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 5119. The default is 0.
Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption)

The Interface ID Option parameter specifies the interface ID option that is encoded in the DHCPv6 relay packet. Table 79-14 describes the options.
May 2009
79-19
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-14 Interface ID Option parameter

Option None Interface Index Description Disables the sending of interface ID options in the DHCPv6 relay packet Called ifindex on the managed device, this option indicates the index for the IP interface in which the policy is applied. Links the following information in a tuple to be sent: Dependencies
ASCII Tuple
The format of the tuple for IES is system-name|service-ID|interface-name. SAP-ID String This option indicates the SAP-id of the interface. Specifies an alpha-numeric string that is included in the DHCPv6 relay packet 0 to 32 characters
Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString)

The Interface Id String parameter specifies the alpha-numeric string that is included in the DHCPv6 relay packet. The parameter is configurable when the Interface Id Option parameter is set to String. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Interface Name (unnumberedInterfaceName)

The Interface Name parameter specifies a unique name for the interface. The parameter is configurable when the Unnumbered Type parameter is set to Name. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Intermediate Destination ID (intermediateDestId)

The Intermediate Destination ID parameter specifies the identifier of an intermediate node, such as a DSLAM, between the SAP and the static host. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Interworking Type (interworking)

The Interworking Type parameter specifies the type of interworking function that is applied to packets that ingress or egress the SAPs that are part of the VLL service. The options are:
None FR-ATM Network Interworking (Frf-5)
79-20
May 2009
IP Address
Parameter IP Address for DHCP network gateway IP Address for static subscriber host IP Address for neighbor or numbered L3 interface IP Address for destination node of static route IP Address for GSMP neighbor IP Address for unnumbered L3 interface See IP address (giIpAddress) in this section IP Address (ipAddr) in this section IP Address (ipAddress) in this section IP Address (targetIpAddress) in this section IP Address (ipAddress) in this section IP Address (unnumberedIpAddress) in this section
IP address (giIpAddress)
The IP address parameter specifies the IP address of the network gateway that DHCP relay uses. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
IP Address (ipAddr)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of a static subscriber host. The IP Address parameter must be configured when the Anti-Spoofing parameter is enabled with either the Source Ip Addr or the Source Ip And Mac Addr option, or the ARP Reply Agent parameter is enabled. Only one static host with a given IP address can be configured on the SAP. Defining a static host with the same IP address as a previous static host overwrites the previous static host. The default is 0.0.0.0.
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for an IES or VPRN neighbor, or for a numbered L3 interface. Specify an IP address in dotted-decimal format for IPv4, or in colon-hexadecimal format for IPv6. There is no default.
IP Address (targetIpAddress)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for the destination node of a static route. The parameter is configurable when the Type (type) parameter is set to Next Hop or Indirect. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or, if IPv6 is enabled, an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
May 2009
79-21
The IP Address parameter specifies an IP address for the GSMP neighbor in dotted-decimal format for an IPv4 address, or in colon-hexadecimal format for an IPv6 address. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
IP Address (unnumberedIpAddress)
The IP Address parameter specifies an IP address for the unnumbered L3 interface in dotted decimal notation. The parameter is configurable when the Unnumbered Type parameter is set to IP Address. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
IPv6 Allowed (ipv6Allowed)

The IPv6 Allowed parameter specifies whether an IPv6 addressing scheme is valid for the interface. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) IPv6 Prefix (prefix)

The IPv6 Prefix parameter specifies the IP prefix for router advertisement messages. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 32.
Keep-Alive (seconds)
The Keep-Alive (seconds) parameter specifies the GSMP keep alive timer value. The range is 1 to 25. The default is 10.
The L2 Header and Anti-Spoofing MAC Address parameters specify which MAC address is used in the anti-spoofing configuration for the lease state on the interface. If the parameter value is set to False, the client hardware address stored in the DHCP server is used. When the parameter value is set to True, and the Anti-Spoofing MAC Address is set to 0.0.0.0, the source MAC address in the layer 2 header of the DHCP packet is used. The options are:
79-22
May 2009
L2 Protocol Termination (l2ptTermination)

The L2 Protocol Termination parameter enables L2 protocol termination on a given SAP or spoke SDP binding. L2 protocol termination is only supported for STP BDPUs. All other PDUs are discarded. The options are:

L2 protocol termination is only supported by Ethernet and ATM MDAs on the 7250 SAS, 7750 SR, and 7450 ESS.
LAG link selection (macDestAddrHashing)

The LAG link selection parameter specifies whether subscriber traffic that egresses a LAG SAP chooses an egress LAG link using a function of the MAC destination address or the subscriber ID. The parameter is configurable when the underlying port for the SAP is a LAG. The options are:
Subscriber ID (default) MAC dest addr Lease Populate (leasePopulate)

The Lease Populate parameter specifies the number of DHCP lease state entries that are allowed for the IES or VPRN SAP. Enabling the parameter also enables DHCP snooping. The range is 0 to 8000. There is no default. Setting the parameter to 0 specifies that dynamic host lease state management for the interface is disabled and disables the Enable parameter. DHCP snooping on the SAP obtains the lease state information for a host from a DHCP ACK message that is sent by a DHCP server to the host. Entries in the DHCP lease state table remain valid for the duration of the IP address lease.
Lease Time (leaseTime)

The Lease Time parameter specifies whether the DHCP client can use an IP address. When you set the parameter to disabled, the local proxy server uses the lease time information provided by a RADIUS server or upstream DHCP server. The options are:
Disabled (default) Specified Time Period

When you set the Lease Time parameter to Specified Time Period, you can specify how long the DHCP client can use an IP address by configuring the following parameters:
Number of Days Number of Hours Number of Minutes Number of Seconds

May 2009 79-23
Lease Time RADIUS Override (proxyLTRadiusOverride)

The Lease Time RADIUS Override parameter specifies whether the DHCP client uses the proxy server lease time information provided by the RADIUS server. The options are:
false (default) true Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the router lifetime in seconds. The range is 0 or 4 to 9000. The default is 1800. A value of zero means that the router is not to be a default router.
Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a router advertisement prefix remains preferred. The parameter is configurable when the No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 604 800. The 4 294 967 295 value represents infinity. A preferred lifetime must not be longer than a valid lifetime. See the Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) parameter in this section for more information.
Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time. in seconds, that a router advertisement prefix remains valid. The parameter is configurable when the No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 2 592 000. The 4 294 967 295 value represents infinity. A valid lifetime must be longer than a preferred lifetime. See the Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) parameter in this section for more information.
Local Address (localAddress)

The Local Address parameter specifies the source IP address that is defined in the GSMP group. This parameter is connected to the neighbor that is configured for each group.
Loopback Enabled
79-24
May 2009

The Low-priority Defect parameter specifies the level at which an alarm will be raised by the MEP. The options are:
allDef macRemErrXcon remErrXcon (default) errXcon xon noXon
MAC Address
Table 79-16 lists where to find more information about the MAC Address parameter.
Table 79-16 MAC Address parameter
Parameter MAC Address for static subscriber host MAC Address for IP interface See MAC Address (macAddr) in this section MAC Address (physicalAddress) in this section
MAC Address (macAddr)

The MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of a static subscriber host. The MAC Address parameter must be configured when the Anti-Spoofing parameter is enabled with either the Source Mac Addr or the Source Ip And Mac Addr option, or the ARP Reply Agent parameter is enabled. Multiple static hosts can be configured with the same MAC address, given that each definition is distinguished by a unique IP address. Defining a static host with the same MAC address as but a different IP address from that of an existing host creates a new static host. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.

The MAC Address parameter specifies the unicast MAC address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
MAC Address (physicalAddress)

The MAC Address parameter specifies a 48-bit MAC address for the object in the unicast MAC address format. Only one MAC address can be assigned to an IP interface. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
May 2009
79-25
MAC Monitoring (macMonitoring)

The MAC Monitoring parameter specifies whether the packet rate limit in the NE DoS protection policy is in effect. The parameter is configurable on multiple-slot 7450 ESS and 7750 SR devices, Release 6.0 and later. Table 79-17 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-17 MAC Monitoring parameter
Option disabled (default) enabled Description The interface ignores the packet rate limit specified in the NE DoS protection policy. The interface applies the packet rate limit specified in the NE DoS protection policy.
Maintenance Association ID (maintenanceAssociationId)

The ID parameter specifies the ID of the MA being tested. This ID must be unique to the Maintenance Domain. The range is 1 to 8191. The default is 1.

The Maintenance Domain ID parameter specifies the maintenance domain ID for the MEP. The range is 1 to 8191. The default is 1.
Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag)

The Managed Address Config parameter sets the managed address configuration flag. This flag indicates that DHCPv6 is available for address configuration in addition to any address that has been automatically configured using stateless address autoconfiguration. The options are:
false (default) true Mask Reply (maskReply)

The Mask Reply parameter specifies whether responses to ICMP mask requests are enabled on the interface. The options are:
79-26
May 2009
Match Circuit ID (matchCircuitId)

The Match Circuit ID parameter specifies whether DHCP relay uses the information in the Option 82 circuit ID field to identify a host. The options are:
false (default) true Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates)

The Maximum Number of Leases parameter specifies the maximum number of DHCPv6 lease state entries that are installed by the DHCPv6 server on the IES interface. The range is 0 to 8000. The default is 8000.
Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval)

The Max Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between router advertisement messages sent on the interface. The range is 4 to 1800. The default is 600.
Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval)

The Min Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the minimum interval between router advertisement messages sent on the interface. The range is 3 to 1350. The default is 200.
Monitor Access Interface Operational State (monitorAccessInterfaceOper)

The Monitor Access Interface Operational State parameter specifies whether the service operational flags are affected by the operational state of the service SAPs. Alcatel-Lucent recommends enabling this parameter for VPLS and VPRN services, and disabling this parameter for services with a large number of SAPs, such as BTV multicast configurations.
MTU (mtu)
The MTU parameter specifies the MTU size, in bytes, for nodes on the link. The range is 0 to 9212. The default is 1280. A value of zero means that the interface sends no MTU option information in router advertisements.
MTU (mtuValue)
The MTU parameter specifies the MTU size, in bytes, for a configured service site. The range is 0 to 9194. The default is 1514. The default is 1508 for the VLL Apipe service. The default is 1500 for the VLL Fpipe and Ipipe services.
Name
Table 79-18 lists where to find more information about the Name parameter.
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-18 Name parameter

Parameter Name for generic object Name for subscriber See Name (displayedName) in this section Name (subscriberName) in this section
The Name parameter specifies a name for the object. The range depends on the type of object being configured. Table 79-19 lists the Name parameter ranges for different objects.
Table 79-19 Name parameter
Object Site L2 access interface or SAP on IES group interface L3 access interface Composite service and related objects Topology group Service template Physical link IP mirror interface (must begin with an alphabetic character) Range (characters) 0 to 32 or 0 to 64 0 to 40 1 to 32 1 to 32 1 to 25 1 to 255 1 to 32 1 to 32
Name (subscriberName)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the subscriber. The range is 1 to 32 characters. Click on the Select button to choose a subscriber.
Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution)

The Neighbor Resolution parameter specifies whether neighbor resolution is enabled through the DHCPv6 relay. The options are:
79-28
May 2009

The No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit parameter specifies the rate of all egress queues for the access interface is unlimited. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry)

The No Expiry parameter sets the preferred lifetime of a router advertisement prefix to infinity, which is represented by the 4 294 967 295 value. See the Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) parameter in this section for more information. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry)

The No Expiry parameter sets the valid lifetime of a router advertisement prefix to infinity, which is represented by the 4 294 967 295 value. See the Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) parameter in this section for more information. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Non-Subscriber Traffic Identification (nonSubTrafficIdent)

The Non-Subscriber Traffic Identification parameter specifies a string that identifies a host packet as originating from a non-subscriber host. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Number of Days (leaseTimeDays)

The Number of Days parameter specifies the number of days that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 0. The parameter is configurable only when the Lease Time parameter is set to Specified Time Period.
Number of Hours (leaseTimeHours)

The Number of Hours parameter specifies the number of hours that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0. The parameter is configurable only when the Lease Time parameter is set to Specified Time Period.
May 2009
79-29
Number of Minutes (leaseTimeMinutes)

The Number of Minutes parameter specifies the number of minutes that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0. The parameter is configurable only when the Lease Time parameter is set to Specified Time Period.
Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig)

The Number of Packet Too Big parameter specifies the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem)

The Number of Param Problem parameter specifies the number of ICMP Param Problem messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Param Problem (paramProblem) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects)

The Number of Redirects parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP Redirect messages that the interface issues in the time specified by the Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Redirects (redirects) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Seconds (leaseTimeSeconds)

The Number of Seconds parameter specifies the number of seconds that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0. The parameter is configurable only when the Lease Time parameter is set to Specified Time Period.
Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded)

The Number of Time Exceeded parameter specifies the number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
79-30
May 2009
Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired)

The Number of TTL Expired parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP TTL Expired messages that the interface can issue in the time specified by the TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the TTL Expired (ttlExpired) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables)

The Number of Unreachables parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP Unreachable messages that the interface can issue in the time specified by the Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Unreachables (unreachables) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState)

The OAM Administrative State parameter specifies whether the GSMP ANCP OAM capability is negotiated at the startup of the GSMP connection. The options are:
Up Down (default) OLC State (olcState)

The OLC State parameter specifies whether a service is in a Maintenance or an In Service mode. You can set the OLC state for the following objects and services:
network element card slot daughter card port composite service service site LAG
The default value of the OLC state for network elements can be specified in the discovery rules. The default value of the OLC state for composite services and services can be specified using the nms-server.xml file.
On-Link Determination (onLink)

The On-Link Determination parameter specifies whether the routing prefix is used for on-link determination. The options are:
May 2009
79-31
Operational State UP While Empty (operationalStateWhileEmpty)

The Operational State UP While Empty parameter specifies whether the operational status of the group interface is up when there are no SAPs on the group interface.
true false (default) Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag)

The Other Stateful Config parameter specifies whether DHCPv6lite is available for the autoconfiguration of other non-address information, such as DNS parameters or information about other servers in the network. The options are:
false (default) true Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue)

The Outer Encapsulation Value parameter specifies the outer encapsulation value for the port. This parameter is configurable when the Encap Type for the port is set to Dot1q, Q in Q, BCP Dot 1q, or FR. Table 79-20 lists the Outer Encapsulation Value parameter ranges for different Encap Type parameter values. The default is 0.
Table 79-20 Outer Encapsulation Value parameter
Encapsulation type Dot1q Q in Q BCP Dot1q FR Default SAP Range 0 to 4094 0 to 4094 or 1 to 4094 0 to 4094 16 to 1022 4095 or * Notes
Ethernet ports only Dot1Q ports VPLS and Epipe VLL Null encapsulated port cannot exist on the same port as a default SAP
Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) (vpi)

The Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) parameter specifies the outer encapsulation value for the port. The parameter is equivalent to the VPI of the PVC connection on the port. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
79-32
May 2009
Packet Too Big (packetTooBig)

The Packet Too Big parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Packet Too Big messages is configurable. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) and Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) parameters.
Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime)

The Packet Too Big Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages specified by the Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Param Problem (paramProblem)

The Param Problem parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Packet Too Big messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem) and Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) parameters.
Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime)

The Param Problem Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages specified by the Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Param Problem (paramProblem) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Path ID (sdpBindingPathId)
The Path ID parameter specifies the spoke SDP binding of the VLL service that the OAM diagnostic is testing. Click on the Select button to display a list of SDP bindings. Choose an SDP binding from the list and click on the OK button. The Path ID of the SDP binding is added to the form. Additional information about the SDP binding is displayed on the diagnostic form, including the VC ID, source and destination IP addresses, VLL service name, and VLL service ID. There is no default.
May 2009
79-33
Peer Address(peerAddress)
The Peer Address parameter specifies the IP address that is exchanged by IPCP to configure the remote peers IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack)

The Periodic ATM OAM Loopback parameter specifies whether ATM OAM loopback is enabled on the current L3 access interface using ATM port encapsulation. ATM OAM loopback is configured globally on the 7750 SR. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Physical Address (physicalAddress)

The Physical Address parameter specifies the physical address in MAC address format. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
PIM Snooping Enabled (pimSnpgEnabled)

The PIM Snooping Enabled parameter specifies whether or not PIM snooping will be enabled for this site of the VPLS service. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Policy 1 (policy1)

The Policy 1 to Policy 5 parameters specify the names of routing policies used to determine the interfaces that respond to neighbor discovery queries intended for other interfaces. When you specify multiple policies, the policies are evaluated in the order in which they are specified. The routing instance applies the first policy that matches. Use the Select button next to the parameter to choose a policy.
Policy 2 (policy2)
See Policy 1 (policy1) in this section for the parameter description.
Policy 3 (policy3)
Policy 4 (policy4)
Policy 5 (policy5)
Port (portId)
The Port parameter specifies the port or channel to use on the source or destination node of an L2 or L3 interface. Click on the Select button to choose an access port or channel.
Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix)

The Prefix Address parameter specifies the IPv6 address that is delegated by the router to a requesting DHCP client. Specify an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format.
Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID)

The Prefix DUID parameter specifies the DHCP Unique Identifier of the requesting DHCP client. If you set this parameter to a non-zero value, the prefix that is defined is delegated only to this DHCP client. If you set this parameter to zero, the prefix is delegated to any requesting DHCP client. The range is 0 to 64 characters.
Prefix IAID (pfxIAID)

The Prefix IAID parameter specifies the Identity Association Identification (IAID) from the requesting DHCP client that must be matched on this DHCP client in order to delegate the prefix defined for the entry. If the Prefix IAID is set to 0, no matching on the received IAID is performed. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 characters. The default is 0. The Prefix IAID parameter is configurable only when the Prefix DUID parameter is configured.
Prefix Length (pfxdPrefLen)

The Prefix Length parameter, along with the Prefix Address parameter, specifies the prefix of the IPv6 address that is delegated by the router to a requesting DHCP client. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 0.

When combined with an IP address value, the Prefix Length parameter specifies a local IP prefix. The defined IP prefix must be unique within the context of the routing instance. The prefix must not overlap with other existing IP prefixes that are defined as local subnets on other IP interfaces in the same routing context within the device or service. The range is 1 to 32 for an IPv4 address and 1 to 128 for an IPv6 address. A value of 32 is typically reserved for an IPv4 system address, but is available for general use in IPv6. The IPv4 default is 24; the IPv6 default is 64.
Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime)

The Prefix Life Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time that the prefix is a preferred prefix. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 604 800.
May 2009
79-35
Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState)

The Prefix Option parameter specifies the administrative state of the prefix delegation options for delegating a long-lived prefix from a delegating DHCP client to a requesting DHCP client, where the delegating DHCP client does not require knowledge about the topology of the links in the network to which the prefixes are assigned. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime)

The Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time that the prefix is valid. The range is 60 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 2 592 000.
Primary (isPrimary)
The Primary parameter specifies whether the IP address that is specified for the L3 interface is used as the primary IP address. Only one primary IP address can be associated with an IP interface. A primary IP address must be assigned to an IP interface before a secondary IP address can be assigned. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Primary DNS IP Address (primaryDnsAddress)

The Primary DNS IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that will be exchanged by IPCP to configure the primary DNS IP address on the remote peer. The default is 0.0.0.0.

Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp)

The Priority Dscp parameter specifies whether the Dscp is used when remarking is performed on the in-profile packets. This parameter is configurable when the Priority Type parameter is set to Dscp. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec)

The Priority Precedence parameter specifies the precedence priority marking used when remarking the in profile packets. It is configurable when the Priority Type parameter is set to Precedence. The range is 0 to 7. There is no default.
79-36
May 2009
Priority Type (priorityMarkType)

The Priority Type parameter specifies the remarking type to be used. The options are:
None (default) Dscp Precedence Profiled Traffic only (profiledTrafficOnly)

The Profiled Traffic only parameter specifies whether the SAP allows traffic that is not associated with a subscriber profile. The options are:
true false (default) Proxy ARP Policy 1 (policy1)

The Proxy ARP Policy parameter specifies the name of the proxy ARP policy to use for this device. Enter an appropriate name for the proxy ARP policy. The proxy ARP policies are applied in order, from 1 to 5. Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests intended for another device. This allows a device reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device.
Proxy ARP Policy 2 (policy2)

See Proxy ARP Policy 1 (policy1) in this section for more information.



Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime)

The Reachable Time (milliseconds) parameter specifies how long, in milliseconds, this router should be considered reachable by other nodes on the link after the router receives a reachability confirmation. The range is 0 to 3 600 000. The default is 0.
May 2009
79-37

Redirects (redirects)
The Redirects parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Redirect messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) and Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) parameters.
Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime)

The Redirects Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Redirect messages specified by the Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Redirects (redirects) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Remote ID (infoRemoteId)
The Remote ID parameter specifies whether the far-end MAC address is inserted in the remote ID suboption of DHCP Option 82. Inserting the MAC address in the suboption allows MAC-based authentication by identifying the host at the other end of the service tunnel binding. The options are:
false (default) true Remote IDString

The Remote IDString is not available for DHCPv6. When a device is not configured for DHCP relay, if a VPLS SAP is configured for DHCP snooping, Option 82 information is added.
Note The maximum DHCP relay packet size is 1500 bytes. If
adding Option 82 information to the packet causes the packet to exceed 1500 bytes, the DHCP relay request is forwarded without including the Option 82 information.
Remote ID String (remoteIdString)

The Remote ID String parameter specifies the remote ID of DHCP Option 82. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
79-38
May 2009
The Remote ID String parameter is configurable only when the Remote ID parameter is set to Remote IDString.
Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp)

The Remote Proxy ARP parameter specifies whether remote proxy ARP is in effect on the interface. The options are:

Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests intended for another device. This allows a device to reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device.
Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime)

The Retransmit Time (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the frequency of neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on the interface. The range is 0 to 1 800 000. The default is 0.
Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)

The Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the return service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing service tunnel based on the value of this parameter. A new tunnel is created for GRE and MPLS:LDP encapsulation types if a tunnel does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the return tunnel to a circuit. The options are:
GRE MPLS:RSVP-LSP MPLS:LDP Any (default)
The Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference parameter is configurable when the Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel parameter is enabled.
Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)

The Return Tunnel Transport parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the return service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing service tunnel based on the value of this parameter, or creates a new tunnel when one does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the return tunnel to a circuit. The options are:

May 2009 79-39
The Return Tunnel Transport parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
SAP Administrative State

See Administrative State (administrativeState) in this section for more information.
SAP Description
See Description (description) in this section for more information.
SAP or Binding (sapOrBinding)

The SAP or Binding parameter specifies whether the MEP is associated with a SAP or an SDP binding. The options are:
SAP (default) SdpBinding Secondary DNS IP Address (secondaryDnsAddress)

The Secondary DNS IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that will be exchanged by IPCP to configure the secondary DNS IP address on the remote peer. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement)

The Send Advertisement parameter specifies whether the interface sends routing advertisement messages. The options are:
false (default) true Server 1 (server1)

The Server 1 parameter specifies a DHCP server for the interface. The DHCP server stores network addresses and delivers configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Specify a unicast IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Server 1 parameter. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
Server 2 (server2)
See Server 1 (server1) in this section for more information.
Server 3 (server3)
79-40
May 2009
Server 4 (server4)
Server 5 (server5)
Server 6 (server6)
Server 7 (server7)
Server 8 (server8)
Server Name (displayedName)

The Server Name parameter specifies a name for the local DHCP server instance. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
Service ID (serviceID)
The Service ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the service. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
Service Model (serviceModel)

The Service Model parameter specifies the intended service model for the SAP. Configure the parameter to facilitate 5620 SAM and 5750 SSC comanagement of the SAP. The options are:
Not specified (default) VLAN per Subscriber Routed VLAN per Subscriber Bridged VLAN per Service Routed VLAN per Service Bridged VLAN per Subscriber per Service Routed VLAN per Subscriber per Service Bridged VLAN for all Services Routed VLAN for all Services Bridged
May 2009
79-41
Service Name (serviceName)

The Service Name parameter specifies a name for the service. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The range is 0 to 32 characters for the VLL Apipe, Epipe, Ipipe, and Fpipe services. For VLAN services, the name cannot start with vlan_ or VLAN_. For example, a VLAN service can be named company_x_vlan or companyvlan_x, but it cannot be named vlan_company_x.
Service Tier (tier)

The Service Tier parameter specifies the tier that the service occupies in the composite service hierarchy. The range is 1 to 10. The value is relevant only in the context of service topology map views. Table 79-21 lists the default Service Tier parameter values for different service types.
Table 79-21 Service Tier parameter
Service type IES and VPRN VPLS and MVPLS VLL VLAN Default value 1 2 3 4
Set Default VLAN to VPLS Tag (defaultVlan)

The Set Default VLAN to VPLS Tag parameter specifies whether the default VLAN of the port is the same as the VPLS service tag. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) SHCV Action (shcvAction)

The SHCV Action parameter specifies the action to take for a host on the interface when checking the host indicates a connectivity failure. The parameter is configurable when the SHCV Enabled parameter is selected. Table 79-22 describes the parameter options.
79-42
May 2009
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-22 SHCV Action parameter

Option Raise Event Remove And Raise Event Description The 5620 SAM raises an alarm to indicate that host connectivity on the SAP is lost. The 5620 SAM raises an alarm to indicate that host connectivity on the SAP is lost, removes the DHCP state information, and releases the resources allocated to the host.
SHCV Enabled
The SHCV Enabled parameter specifies whether SHCV is enabled on the interface. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) SHCV Interval (minutes) (shcvInterval)

The SHCV Interval parameter specifies how often, in minutes, the node verifies connectivity for a host on the SAP. The range is 0 to 6000. The default is 0, which specifies that SHCV is disabled.
SHCV Source (shcvSource)

The SHCV Source parameter specifies the source of the source IP and MAC addresses in the unicast ARP packets that SHCV sends to hosts for connectivity verification. Table 79-23 describes the parameter options.
Table 79-23 SHCV Source parameter
Option Interface (default) Description Specifies the L3 interface as the source of the source IP and MAC addresses that SHCV uses Because multiple subnets may exist on the interface, SHCV uses the host subnet. For IES group interfaces, SHCV uses the subscriber interface address. VRRP Specifies the VRRP state as the source of the source IP and MAC addresses that SHCV uses. The IP and MAC address are selected as follows. Configurable on IES and VPRN L3 interfaces Not configurable on IES group interfaces Dependencies Configurable on IES and VPRN L3 interfaces
SHCV packets from a master VRRP IP interface use the VRRP VRID IP and MAC addresses as the source addresses. SHCV packets from a backup VRRP IP interface use the L3 interface IP and MAC addresses as the source addresses to avoid corrupting the host ARP cache.
May 2009
79-43
SHCV Source IP Address (shcvSourceIpAddress)

The SHCV Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that is inserted as the source IP address for the unicast ARP packets that SHCV sends to hosts for connectivity verification. The default is 0.0.0.0, which is valid and specifies that the host does not record the ARP entry in the ARP cache.
SHCV Source MAC Address (shcvSourceMacAddress)

The SHCV Source MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address that is inserted as the source MAC address for the unicast ARP packets that SHCV sends to hosts for connectivity verification. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00, which specifies that the device uses the MAC address of the CPM that issues the packet.
Site ID (siteID)
Table 79-24 describes the parameter options. Click on the Select button to choose a site. You can select filters to view specific sites; for example you can choose the apply span of control filter to view only sites that are in your span of control.
Table 79-24 Site ID parameter
For LSP Ping LSP Trace LDP Tree Trace Multicast Router Information Multicast Trace MEP Option IP address of the MPLS path. Click on the Select button and choose an MPLS path from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the MPLS path. The read-only name parameter is populated with the configured name of the MPLS path. IP address for the VPRN PIM site or the core routing PIM site. IP address for the VPRN or core routing PIM site. IP address for the multicast group. IP address for the MEP.
Snooping (snooping)
The Snooping parameter specifies whether DHCP snooping is enabled for DHCP messages. The default depends on the type of managed device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled Source IP Address (sourceAddress)

The Source IP Address specifies the IPv6 address that is used by the DHCPv6 relay agent as a source IP address in all the DHCPv6 relay messages that are sent to the DHCPv6 servers. The default is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0.
79-44
May 2009
Subnet Mask (netMaskInt)

The Subnet Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask that is used in conjunction with the IP Address parameter to identify an L3 interface. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 24.
Subscriber Authentication Policy (subscrAuthPolicyPointer)

The Subscriber Authentication Policy defines the subscriber authentication policy applied when a DHCP message is received on the interface. The authentication policy must be previously defined. The policy is only applied when the DHCP Lease Populate parameter is set to a non-zero value for this interface.
Subscriber Identification (subscriberIdent)

The Subscriber Identification parameter specifies an identifier with which to identify the static subscriber host. The parameter is configurable when the Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID (subIdIsSapId) parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Limit (subscriberLimit)

The Subscriber Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of subscribers that the SAP allows. The range is 0 to 8000. The default is 1, which can be specified by selecting the Single check box. Selecting the Unlimited check box or setting the parameter to a value of 0 means that no limit.
System ID (siteID)
The System ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the service site. Click on the Select button to choose a site.
Template Description
The Template Description parameter specifies a description for the template type. The range is an interface name of 0 to 80 characters. The default is an empty string.
Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName)

The Terminating Port Displayed Name parameter specifies the terminating port for an L2 or L3 interface.
Terminating Port ID (terminatingPortId)

The Terminating Port ID parameter specifies the automatically generated identifier for the terminating port for an L2 or L3 interface.
May 2009
79-45
Time Exceeded (timeExceeded)

The Time Exceeded parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Time Exceeded messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which ICMP redirects are issued is controlled by the Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) and Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) parameters.
Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime)

The Time Exceeded Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages specified by the Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Timeout (seconds) (timeOut)

The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the minimum time, in seconds, that an ARP entry learned on the IP interface is stored in the ARP table. ARP entries are automatically refreshed when an ARP request or gratuitous ARP is seen from an IP host, otherwise the ARP entry is aged from the ARP table. When the parameter is set to 0, ARP aging is disabled. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 14 400.
Translation (vlanTranslation)
The Translation parameter specifies the desired Ingress VLAN Translation mode. The options are:
VLAN ID: specifies that the value of the Translation ID (vlanTranslationId)

parameter is to be used to overwrite the preserved VLAN ID in a packet. This setting is only applicable to dot1q encapsulated SAPs. Copy Outer: specifies that the outer VLAN ID should be used to overwrite the preserved VLAN ID in the packet. This setting is only applicable to QinQ SAPs. None: specifies that Ingress VLAN Translation is disabled. The default is None.
Translation ID (vlanTranslationId)
The Translation ID parameter specifies the VLAN ID to be used to overwrite the preserved VLAN ID in a packet. The parameter is disabled if Translation (vlanTranslation) is not set to VLAN ID. The range is -1 or 4094. The default is -1.
79-46
May 2009
Transport Type (transportPreference)

The Transport Type parameter specifies the type of transport to use when you configure SDP bindings for a service. The options are:
Any (default) GRE MPLS:RSVP-LSP MPLS:LDP
The Transport Type parameter is configurable when the Automatic SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.

Trusted (isTrusted)
The Trusted parameter specifies whether the ToS bits of packets that ingress an IP interface can be trusted by the system. Packets received on a trusted interface are only remarked at network egress when the network egress Remark function is enabled, except for VPRN packets, which are not affected. A packet that ingresses a non-trusted IP interface is always remarked at egress network interfaces regardless of the Remark parameter value of the egress network interface. The options are:
Trusted (default for VPRN and network IP interfaces) Non-trusted (default for IES IP interfaces) Trusted (trusted)
The Trusted parameter specifies that the router forward the DHCP request even if the request has a giaddr (residential gateway device) value of 0 and attached Option 82 information. Table 79-25 describes the parameter.
Option false true (default) Option description The device discards the DHCP request. The device forwards the DHCP request. The device acting as the DHCP relay agent modifies the giaddr value to be equal to that of the ingress interface. Use this option when the Action parameter is set to Keep and the affected service is IES or VPRN.
May 2009
79-47
TTL Expired (ttlExpired)

The TTL Expired parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues TTL Expired messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) and TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) parameters.
TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime)

The TTL Expired Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP TTL Expired messages specified by the Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the TTL Expired (ttlExpired) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference)

The Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the originating service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing service tunnel based on the value of this parameter. A new tunnel is created for GRE and MPLS:LDP encapsulation types if a tunnel does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the tunnel to a circuit. The options are:
The Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference parameter is configurable when the Auto Select Transport Tunnel parameter is enabled.
Tunnel Termination Site (tunnelSelectionTerminationSiteId)

The Destination Node ID parameter specifies the endpoint for a created circuit. Click the Select button to choose a destination node, or specify a unicast IP address in dotted decimal notation. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.
79-48
May 2009
Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference)

The Tunnel Transport parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing tunnel based on the value of this parameter, or creates a new tunnel when one does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the service tunnel to a circuit. The options are:
The Tunnel Transport parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
Unnumbered Type (unnumberedReferenceType)

The Unnumbered Type parameter specifies the type of information that identifies the unnumbered interface. Table 79-26 describes the parameter options:
Table 79-26 Unnumbered Type parameter
Option System (default for IES) IP Address (default for VPRN) Name Description The interface uses the router system address to identify itself. The interface uses the IP Address specified by the IP Address parameter to identify itself. The interface uses the character string specified by the Interface Name parameter to identify itself. Dependencies You must configure the IP Address parameter. You must configure the Interface Name parameter.
Unreachables (unreachables)
The Unreachables parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Unreachable messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) and Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) parameters.
May 2009
79-49
Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime)

The Unreachables Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Unreachable messages specified by the Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Unreachables (unreachables) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Use as source (giIpAddressAsSrc)

The Use as source parameter specifies whether DHCP relay uses the value specified for the IP address parameter as the source address. The options are:
false (default) true Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (useBwReservedPath)

The Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameter specifies whether to configure bandwidth allocation for an SDP binding when you configure service transport preferences. The options are:
never No Preference (default) always

The Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameter is configurable when the Automatic SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
Use Multipoint Shared Queue (usesMultipointShared)

The Use Multipoint Shared Queue parameter specifies whether the access interface uses a multipoint shared queue on the device. The options are:

The 5620 SAM automatically enables the Use Shared Queue parameter when the Use Multipoint Shared Queue parameter is set to true.
Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID (subIdIsSapId)

The Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID parameter specifies whether the static host uses the SAP ID as the subscriber ID. When the parameter is enabled, the Subscriber Identification (subscriberIdent) parameter is not configurable. The options are:
79-50
May 2009
Use Shared Queue (sharedQueueOn)

The Use Shared Queue parameter specifies whether the access interface uses the shared queue on the device. The options are:

The 5620 SAM automatically enables the Use Shared Queue parameter when the Use Multipoint Shared Queue parameter is set to true.
VC ID (vcId)
The VC ID parameter specifies the value used by each end of a service tunnel to identify the VC. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
VC Type (svcVcType)
The VC Type parameter specifies the type of VC for a VPLS service. The options are:
Ethernet (default) VLAN VC Type (vcType)

The VC Type parameter specifies the default VC type signaled for the circuit-to-service-tunnel binding to the far end of a service tunnel. The actual signaling of the VC type depends on the signaling parameter defined for the service tunnel. The options are:
Ethernet (default) VPLS VLAN Vendor Specific Options (vendorIncludeOptions)

The Vendor Specific Options parameter specifies what is included in the Alcatel-Lucent vendor specific sub-option of DHCP Option 82. Table 79-27 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
79-51
79 Common Create menu parameters Table 79-27 Vendor Specific Options parameter
Option SAP ID Description Specifies that the SAP ID is encoded in the vendor specific sub-option of DHCP Option 82. Specifies that the Service ID is encoded in the vendor specific sub-option of DHCP Option 82. Specifies that the Client MAC address is encoded in the vendor specific sub-option of DHCP Option 82. Specifies that the system ID is encoded in the vendor specific sub-option of DHCP Option 82. Dependencies
Service ID
Client MAC
System ID
Vendor String (vendorOptionString)

The Vendor String parameter specifies the string that is included in the Alcatel-Lucent vendor specific sub-option of the DHCP Option 82.
VLAN VC Tag
79-52
May 2009
Manage menu parameters
80 Manage Services parameters 81 Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters 82 Manage Customers parameters 83 Manage MPLS Paths parameters 84 Manage LSPs parameters 85 Manage Service Tunnels parameters 86 Manage Service Templates parameters 87 Manage node redundancy parameters 88 Routing Instance parameters 89 VRRP parameters 90 Virtual Anycast RP parameters 91 Manage FIB Entries parameters 92 Common Manage menu parameters
May 2009
May 2009
80.1 Manage Services parameters
80-2
May 2009
80-1
80.1
Manage Services parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Services form and its child forms.

The Administrative State parameter specifies the current state of the OAM diagnostic test. The options are:
clear go cleared (read-only) Age (seconds) (age)

The Age (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, that an OAM MAC address is aged. The default is 3600.
Inhibit Learning (inhibitLearning)

The Inhibit Learning parameter specifies whether MAC entries are learned (created in the router table) during an OAM MAC purge diagnostic activity. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl)
The Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) parameter specifies the IGMP last member query interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. The IGMP last member query interval refers to the amount of time to reply to an IGMP query message that has been sent in response to a leave group message. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 10.
Multicast Group IP Address (groupAddress)

The Group IP Address parameter specifies the multicast group IP address. Specify an IPv4 multicast address in dotted-decimal format, or an IPv6 multicast address in colon-hexadecimal format.
80-2
May 2009
Protocol Version (igmpVersion)

The Protocol Version parameter specifies the default version of the IGMP on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. The options are:
Version 1 Version 2 (default) Version 3 Proxying (igmpProxying)

The Proxying parameter specifies whether IGMP proxying is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP proxying refers to the processing of membership information on behalf of client systems and the reporting of the membership on their behalf. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Querier Forwarding (igmpQuerierForwarding)

The Querier Forwarding parameter specifies whether IGMP querier forwarding is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP querier forwarding refers to the promotion of detected IGMP queriers to receive all IP multicast data traffic. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval)

The Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the time period between IGMP query messages. Table 80-1 lists the default and range values for the parameter.
Table 80-1 Query Interval (seconds) parameter
Object OmniSwitch system or VLAN Other Default 125 125 Range 1 to 65 535 2 to 1024
Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl)

The Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) parameter specifies the IGMP query response interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified.
May 2009
80-3
The query response interval refers to the amount of time to wait before replying to an IGMP query message. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 100.
Querying (igmpQuerying)
The Querying parameter specifies whether IGMP querying is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to configure the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. IGMP querying refers to the requesting of the network IGMP group membership information by sending IGMP queries. IGMP querying also involves participation in IGMP querier elections. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Robust Count (genRobustCount)

The Robust Count parameter sets the IGMP robustness variable on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. The robustness variable allows you to fine-tune a network that is expected to have high packet loss. The range is 1 to 7. The default is 2.
Router Timeout (seconds) (igmpRouterTimeout)

The Router Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the expiry time of IP multicast routers on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 90.
Source Timeout (seconds) (igmpSourceTimeout)

The Source Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the expiry time of IP multicast sources on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to configure the parameter. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 30.
Spoofing (igmpSpoofing)
The Spoofing parameter specifies whether IGMP spoofing is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP spoofing refers to replacing a client MAC and IP address with the system MAC and IP address when proxying aggregated IGMP group membership information. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable
80-4
May 2009
Target MAC Address (targetMacAddress)

The Target MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the specified router. By default, this parameter is populated automatically with the configured address.
Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName)

The Terminating Port Displayed Name parameter specifies the terminating port name for an L2 or L3 interface.
Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) (igmpUnsolicitedReportInterval)

The Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) parameter sets the value of the IGMP unsolicited report interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. The unsolicited report interval refers to the amount of time to proxy any changed IGMP membership state. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 1.
What type of interface would you like to create?

The What type of interface would you like to create? parameter specifies the:
type of multicast interface that is added to an existing IES type of protocol that is applied to an existing IES or IES SAP
Table 80-2 describes the objects to which the parameter applies and the options for each object:
Table 80-2 What type of interface would you like to create? parameter
Object IES IES or IES SAP Options
PIM (default) IGMP OSPFv2 (default) OSPFv3 RIP ISIS
Zapping (igmpZapping)
The Zapping parameter specifies whether IGMP zapping is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP zapping refers to processing membership and source filter removals immediately without waiting for the protocol specified time period. This mode facilitates IP TV applications that need to change quickly between IP multicast groups. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled

80-6
May 2009
81.1 Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters
81-2
May 2009
81-1
81.1
Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters

This chapter describes the unique parameters on the Manage Mirror Service Templates form and its child forms.
Note The mirror service templates are intended for use in the 5620 SAM GUI. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you do not use the 5620 SAM-O XML classes and methods that are associated with the service templates.
Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Customer

See Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Subscriber in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion)

The Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter specifies whether the service that you are creating is automatically bound to previously created service tunnels. The options are:

Enabling the parameter displays the Transport Type and Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameters.
Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)

The Collect Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of accounting statistics on the interface is enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Customer ID (subscriberId)

Click on the Select button to specify the subscriber that the template is associated with. The default is 0.
Default Number Of Bound Templated Objects To Pre-create (childTemplateDefaultUsages)

The Default Number Of Bound Templated Objects To Pre-Create parameter specifies the number of objects that is created by the secondary template. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 0.
Description
Encapsulation Type (encapsulationType)

The Encapsulation Type parameter specifies the type of encapsulation configured on the service mirror site. The encapsulation type must be the same for all the mirror sites associated with a service. The options are:
Ethernet (default) Frame Relay PPP Forwarding Class (forwardingClass)

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies a default forwarding class for mirrored packets that are part of the mirrored service. Forwarding classes provide network elements with a method to establish the priority of packets. All packets for a mirrored service use the same forwarding class. For example, when the destination of a mirrored packet is on a SAP, a single egress queue is created using the buffers from the pool of buffers that is associated with the forwarding class. Table 81-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 81-1 Forwarding Class parameter
Option be (default) l2 af l1 Option description Specifies that packets are treated, at best, as out-of-profile assured service packets. There are no delivery guarantees. The best-effort and low-2 options are intended for best effort traffic. Specifies that packets are forwarded or discarded based on the availability of bandwidth on NEs. The assured and low-1 options are intended for assured traffic. Assured forwarding classes provide services with a CIR and PIR. Transmitted packets that are at or below the CIR are marked in-profile. If the core service network has sufficient bandwidth along the path for the assured traffic, all aggregate in-profile service packets will reach the destination. Transmitted packets that are above the CIR are marked out-of-profile. When an assured out-of-profile packet is received at a congestion point in the network, it is discarded before in-profile assured-service packets. h2 ef h1 nc Specifies that packets in the class are always serviced at congestion points over other forwarding classes. These options are intended for high-priority traffic.
The h2 and ef options are intended for delay- or jitter-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video. The h1 option is intended for secondary network control traffic or delay- and jitter-sensitive traffic. The nc option is intended for network control traffic.
With a strict PHB at each network hop, service latency is mainly affected by the amount of high-priority traffic at each hop. When the core network has sufficient bandwidth, delay and jitter characteristics of high-priority traffic can be supported without using traffic-engineered paths, as long as the core treats high-priority traffic with the appropriate PHB.
ID
May 2009
81-3
Inner Encap Value (innerEncapValue)

The Inner Encap Value parameter specifies the inner encapsulation value for the port. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Name
Outer Encap Value (outerEncapValue)

The Outer Encap Value parameter specifies the outer encapsulation value of the port. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTransportPreference)

The Return Tunnel Transport parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the return service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing service tunnel based on the value of this parameter, or creates a new tunnel when one does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the return tunnel to a circuit. The options are:
The Return Tunnel Transport parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
Service Description
See Service Description in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
Service Name (displayedName)

The Service Name parameter specifies a name for the service. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Site ID (siteId)
The Site ID parameter specifies the site on which the terminating port of the L2 access interface mirror service template is located. Click on the Select button to list and choose a site.
81-4
May 2009
Site Type (mirrorSiteType)

The Site Type parameter specifies the type of site in the mirror site service template. The options are:
Source (default) Destination Slice Size (sliceSize)

The Slice Size parameter specifies how much of the mirrored packet, in bytes, to send to the mirror destination. For example, when you specify a parameter value of 256, the first 256 bytes of a packet are sent to the mirror destination. The original packet is not affected. The range is 0 to 9216. The default is 0, which specifies that the entire packet is mirrored and no packet slicing occurs.
Source Administrative State (sourceAdministrativeState)

The Source Administrative State parameter specifies whether mirror sources on the site are enabled. The options are:
Up (default) Down Template Description

The Template Description parameter specifies a description for the template type. The range is an interface name of 0 to 80 characters. The default is an empty string.
Terminating Port ID
The Terminating Port ID parameter specifies the terminating port. Click on the Select button to Select Referenced Terminating Port - Mirror L2 Access Interface Template filter form. Use the filter properties to search for the terminating port.
Transport Type (transportPreference)

The Transport Type parameter specifies the type of transport to use when you configure SDP bindings for a service. The options are:
The Transport Type parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
May 2009
81-5
Tunnel Source Site ID (fromNodeId)

Click on the Select button to list and choose the source site of the tunnel.
Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPreference)

The Tunnel Transport parameter specifies the transport encapsulation type preference for the service tunnel. The 5620 SAM chooses an existing tunnel based on the value of this parameter, or creates a new tunnel when one does not exist. The 5620 SAM automatically binds the service tunnel to a circuit. The options are:
The Tunnel Transport parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (topologyAutoCompletion)

The Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameter specifies whether to configure bandwidth allocation for an SDP binding when you configure service transport preferences. The options are:
never No Preference (default) always

The Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths parameter is configurable when the Automatic Mesh SDP Binding Creation parameter is enabled.
81-6
May 2009
82.1 Manage Customers parameters
82-2
May 2009
82-1
82.1
Manage Customers parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Customers form and its child forms.
Address (address)
The Address parameter specifies the mailing address of the customer.
Auto-Assign ID
Contact (contact)
The Contact parameter specifies the primary point of contact for the customer.
Description
Email (email)
The Email parameter specifies the e-mail address of the primary contact for the customer.
ID (subscriberId)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the customer. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0.
The Name parameter specifies a name of the customer. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Phone Number (phoneNumber)

The Phone Number parameter specifies the phone number for the customer.
Scheduler Name (aggregationSchedulerName)

The Scheduler Name parameter specifies a name for the aggregation scheduler. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
82-2
May 2009
Select Assignment Scope (scope)

The Select Assignment Scope parameter specifies the type of object across which an aggregation scheduler can be applied. The options are:
Port (default) Card
May 2009
82-3
82-4
May 2009
83.1 Manage MPLS Paths parameters
83-2
May 2009
83-1
83.1
Manage MPLS Paths parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create MPLS Path form and child forms.
Administrative
Description
Hop Type (type)

The Hop Type parameter specifies the method used to select the routing path between devices. Table 83-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 83-1 Hop Type parameter
Option loose strict Option description Specifies that the LSP can traverse unspecified devices between configured hop devices in the provisioned MPLS path. Specifies that the LSP must take a direct path between configured hop devices in the provisioned MPLS path. Dependencies
Insert Hop
Click the Insert Hop button to insert a hop in the MPLS provisioned path. A hop can be an interface on an Alcatel-Lucent-managed NE or a third-party device.
IP Address (destinationIpAddress)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for the L3 interface that is associated with the destination site for the MPLS path. The parameter is configurable when you set the Specify Site parameter to By Selection. You can manually enter an IP address for the L3 interface or list and choose an address. You can list and choose an address by clicking the Select button next to the IP Address parameter. The Select button is only enabled after you select a managed device using the Network Element parameter.
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of MPLS path hop. The parameter is configurable when the Specify Site parameter is set to Manually.
83-2
May 2009
IP Address (interfacePointer)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the L3 interface associated with the NE specified for the Network Element parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Specify Site parameter is set to By Selection.
Name
Network Element (ipAddressPointer)

The Network Element parameter specifies the target IP address of the hop. The parameter is configurable when the Specify Site parameter is set to By Selection.
Specify Site
The Specify Site parameter specifies the method for configuring the destination site of the MPLS path. Table 83-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 83-2 Specify Site parameter
Option Manually By Selection Option description Specifies that you must select the destination site for the MPLS path by manually entering the IP address. Specifies that you must select the destination site for the MPLS path by: Dependencies
listing and choosing the network element site ID or IP address using the Select buttons manually entering the IP address
Starting Network Element

Click the Select button to specify the starting network element for the MPLS path.
May 2009
83-3
83-4
May 2009
84.1 Manage LSPs parameters
84-2
May 2009
84-1
84.1
Manage LSPs parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage LSP Paths form and child forms.
Administrative
Auto-Assign ID
Auto Select Hop-less Path

The Auto Select Hop-less Path parameter specifies whether MPLS paths are explicitly specified during LSP creation or the LSP uses a completely loose path and the 5620 SAM selects the MPLS paths for the LSP. The options are:
Table 84-1 Auto Select Hop-less Path parameter
Option Disabled (default) Enabled Option description Specifies that you must manually choose or create the MPLS paths during LSP creation based on the source NE. IGP is used to identify the next hop. Specifies a loose path. The 5620 SAM chooses the MPLS paths for the LSP. If no hopless path to the destination exists, the 5620 SAM creates one.
Backup Hold Priority (backupHoldPriority)

The priority of the backup session with respect to holding resources. The value 0 is the highest priority. Backup Holding Priority is used in deciding whether this session can be preempted by another session. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Backup Setup Priority (backupSetupPriority)

The priority of the backup session with respect to taking resources. The value 0 is the highest priority. The Backup Setup Priority is used in deciding whether this session can preempt another session. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
84-2
May 2009
Backup Type (fastRerouteBackupType)

The Backup Type parameter specifies the type of backup route associated with a failed link or LSP. Table 84-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 84-2 Backup Type parameter
Option One To One Option description Specifies a backup LSP that intersects the original LSP downstream of the point of link or node failure. A separate backup LSP is established for each LSP that is backed up. Specifies that a single backup LSP is used to backup multiple original LSPs. This type of LSP is often called a bypass tunnel. Dependencies The parameter is configurable when the Fast Reroute parameter is set to true.
Many To One
Committed Rate (committedRate)

The Committed Rate parameter specifies the mean traffic rate supported by the LSP. The committed rate is expressed in multiples of 1 Kb/s. The range is 1 to 1,000,000. The default is 100.
Destination Site ID (destinationNodeId)

The Destination Site ID parameter specifies a destination interface for the LSP based on the site ID associated with the interface. The LSP must terminate on the system interface. You can manually configure the parameter or use the Select button to choose an NE.
Dynamic Bypass (dynamicBypass)

The Dynamic Bypass parameter specifies whether dynamic bypass tunnels are enabled. The default is enabled.
Egress Label (egressLabel)

The Egress Label parameter specifies the static hop egress label. The range is 0, and 16 to 1 048 575. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
May 2009
84-3
Enable CSPF (cspfEnabled)

The Enable CSPF parameter specifies the CSPF routing algorithm to find a path that satisfies the constraints for the LSP. The constraints associated with the LSP can be related to bandwidth, class of service, or the number of path hops. The options are:

CSPF also calculates detour routes when you set the Fast Reroute parameter to true. CSPF is not implemented if you define each hop in the LSP.
Enable SRLG (enableSrlg)

The Enable SRLG parameter specifies whether or not the use of SRLG constraint in the computation of a secondary path for an LSP at the head-end Label Edge Router is enabled. When the checkbox is selected, the use of SRLG constraint in the computation of a secondary path is enabled. Note that this parameter is applicable for the standby and secondary paths only. The options are:
true (selected) false (not selected) Fast Reroute (fastRerouteEnabled)

The Fast Reroute parameter specifies a pre-computed detour LSP from each node in the path of the LSP. In case of failure of a link or LSP between two nodes, traffic is immediately rerouted on the pre-computed detour LSP. The immediate reroute of the traffic avoids packet-loss. The options are:
false true (default)

Fast reroute is available only for the primary path. The LSP transit hops do not require configuration. The ingress router signals intermediate routers using RSVP to set up the detour routes. You must set the Enable CSPF parameter to true when you set the Fast Reroute parameter to true.
Guarded Destination (guardingDestinationAddress)

The Guarded Destination parameter specifies the IP address of the destination NE that is being protected by the guarding LSP. All LSPs passing through a node with this address as the last hop IP address will be protected by the guarding LSP. Configure a valid IP address for this parameter.
84-4
May 2009
Guarding Lsp (guardingLsp)

The Guarding Lsp parameter is used to enable an LSP to be used as a guarding LSP. A guarding LSP protects a configurable guarding destination and is used as a bypass LSP by LSPs that have Fast Reroute enabled. The options are:
Enabled Disables (default) Hold Priority (holdPriority)

The priority of the session with respect to holding resources. The value 0 is the highest priority. Holding Priority is used in deciding whether this session can be preempted by another session. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Hop Index (index)

The Hop Index parameter specifies the position of the hop in the ordered hop list. The range is 1 to 1024. There is no default. The value is incremented for each new hop.
Hop Limit
Table 84-3 lists where to find information about the hop limit parameter.
Table 84-3 Hop Limit parameter
Parameter hop limit for LSP path hop limit for fast reroute lsp path See Hop Limit (hopLimit) in this section Hop Limit (fastRerouteHopLimit) in this section
Hop Limit (fastRerouteHopLimit)

The Hop Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of hops for a fast reroute LSP path before it merges with the main LSP path. This parameter controls the number of loose hops associated with MPLS paths. If there is an associated Inherit Value parameter, then the Hop Limit parameter is configurable only when you set the Inherit Value parameter to Disabled. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 6.
Hop Limit (hopLimit)

The Hop Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of hops for the LSP path. An LSP is not set up if the hop limit is exceeded. This parameter controls the number of loose hops associated with MPLS paths. If there is an associated Inherit Value parameter, then the Hop Limit parameter is configurable only when you set the Inherit Value parameter to Disabled. The range is 2 to 255. The default is 255.
May 2009
84-5

The Ingress Label parameter specifies the value of the static hop ingress label. The range is 0, and 32 to 1023. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Inherit Value (propertyInheritance)

The Inherit Value parameter specifies if you want the LSP path to inherit the Hop Limit parameter from the associated LSP. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled ID

Include ADSPEC in RSVP (addSpec)

The Include ADSPEC in RSVP parameter specifies the inclusion of advertising data (ADSPEC) objects in the RSVP messages associated with LSPs. The options are:
false (default) true Interface Name (interfaceName)

The Interface Name parameter specifies the interface of this hop site. Choose an address by clicking on the Select button. There is no default.
Label Action (labelAction)

The Label Action parameter specifies how the static hop treats a received label. The options are:
Table 84-4 Path Destination Matching parameter
Option unspecified (displayed default) Pop (functional default) Swap Description This option is displayed only until the Site ID parameter is configured. The option is not selectable. The site specified by the Site ID parameter is the last hop; the NE removes the label. The Ingress Label value must match the Egress Label value of the previous hop. The site specified by the Site ID parameter is an intermediate hop. The Ingress Label value must match the Egress Label value of the previous hop. The Egress Label value must match the Ingress Label value of the next hop.
84-6
May 2009
Make before Break (adaptive)

The Make before Break parameter specifies the traffic rerouting method when you move traffic between primary and secondary LSP paths. The the make-before-break functionality ensures that the transition to the new path does not cause any traffic disruption. For example, when the parameters of an already-established LSP are changed due to a user configuration modification, when the parameter is set to true the resources of the existing LSP are not released until a new path with the same LSP ID is established and passing the traffic seamlessly handed over from the old LSP. When enabled for the LSP, the make-before-break functionality is implemented for the primary path and all the secondary paths of the LSP. The options are:
false true (default) Metric (metric)

The Metric parameter specifies a value for the LSP that the 5620 SAM uses to select from a set of LSPs that lead to the same egress NE. The 5620 SAM uses the LSP with the lowest metric value. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1.
Next Hop (nextHopAddr)

The Next Hop parameter specifies the IP address of the next hop in dotted-decimal format. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. There is no default.
Node Protect (nodeProtect)

The Node Protect parameter specifies node and link protection on the LSP. Node protection ensures that traffic from an LSP that traverses a neighboring router reaches the required destination. The parameter is configurable when the Fast Reroute parameter is set to true. The options are:
false true (default) Path Destination Matching (TunnelDestinationMatching)

The Path Destination Matching parameter specifies whether the LSP path terminates on the destination NE. Table 84-5 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
84-7
84 Manage LSPs parameters Table 84-5 Path Destination Matching parameter

Option Destination Site (default) Any Description Specifies that the path terminates on the LSP destination. Specifies that the path is loose or hopless and can terminate on any NE
Peak Rate (peakRate)

The Peak Rate parameter specifies the maximum traffic rate supported by the LSP. The peak rate is expressed in multiples of 1 Kb/s. The range is 1 to 1,000,000. The default is 100.
Permit Merge (permitMerge)

The Permit Merge parameter specifies if transit routers can merge this session with other RSVP sessions for the purpose of reducing resource overhead on downstream transit routers. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Persistent (persistent)

The Persistent parameter specifies whether a LSP should be restored automatically after a failure occurs. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Preference (preference)

The Preference parameter specifies the route preference for the LSP. When multiple routes are available to a destination, the LSP uses the route with the lowest preference. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 7. The parameter is used for load balancing between multiple LSPs that may exist between the ingress and egress managed devices. By default, load balancing is equal between all LSPs. To favor one LSP, lower the parameter value. The LSP with the lowest setting is used first.
Record Actual Path (record)

The Record Actual Path parameter specifies if the labels at each node are recorded and displayed for the LSP path, to indicate the hops in the LSP path. The options are:
84-8
May 2009
Record Actual Route (recordRoute)

The Record Actual Route parameter specifies if the LSP path is recorded at each node after it has been signaled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Record Label (recordLabel)

The Record Label parameter enables the recording of all LSP labels at each device that an LSP path traverses. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Resignal (resignal)

The Resignal parameter specifies whether to resignal information about the LSP when make-before-break functionality is enabled. The options are:
Do Action N/A (default) Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) (fastRerouteBandwidth)

The Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) parameter specifies the minimum amount of the MPLS path bandwidth to reserve for the LSP. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Select Hop-less Path parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 100 00. A value of 0 indicates that the parameter is not configured.
Retry Limit (retryLimit)

The Retry Limit parameter specifies how many attempts are made to re-establish the LSP after an LSP failure. The range is 1 to 10 000. The default is 0, indicating an infinite number of retries.
Retry Timer (seconds) (retryTimer)

The Retry Timer (seconds) parameter specifies the time before LSP re-establishment attempts after an LSP failure. The range is 1 to 600. The default is 30.
RSVP Reserve Style (rsvpStyle)

The RSVP Reserve Style parameter specifies the RSVP reservation style. A reservation style is a set of control options that specify a number of supported parameters. The style information is part of the LSP configuration. Table 84-6 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
84-9
84 Manage LSPs parameters Table 84-6 RSVP Reserve Style parameter

Option Shared-Explicit (default) Option description This option specifies a shared reservation environment with an explicit reservation scope. A single reservation is created on a link that is shared by an explicit list of senders. Because each sender is explicitly listed in the RESV message, different labels can be assigned to different sender receiver pairs, thereby creating separate LSPs. Specifies a single reservation with an explicit scope. This reservation style specifies an explicit list of senders and a distinct reservation for each. A specific reservation request is created for data packets from a particular sender. The reservation scope is determined by an explicit list of senders. Dependencies
Fixed-Filter
Setup Priority (setupPriority)

The priority of the session with respect to taking resources. The value 0 is the highest priority. The Setup Priority is used in deciding whether this session can preempt another session. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Site ID (nodeId)
The Site ID specifies the IP address of this hop site. Choose an address by clicking on the Select button. There is no default.
Source IP Address (sourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the source L3 interface on the source NE. The LSP exits the source device from the system interface if you do not specify an L3 interface. You can manually enter a source IP address for the interface or choose an address by clicking on the Select button.
Source Site ID (sourceNodeId)

The Source Site ID parameter specifies the IP address of the LSP source site. Click on the Select button to choose a site.
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies an LSP path type. An LSP path is an LSP which is associated with an MPLS path. Table 84-7 describes the parameter options.
84-10
May 2009
84 Manage LSPs parameters Table 84-7 Type parameter

Option primary Option description Specifies that the path is the preferred route through the network. Each LSP can have only one primary path. Specifies that the LSP can switch to this path if the primary path is unavailable. Standby paths are signaled when they are created and remain in a standby state until needed. Specifies that the LSP can switch to this path if the primary path is unavailable. Secondary path are usually not signaled until the primary path fails. Dependencies This is the only type of path that can be configured when the LSP originates from a 7250 SAS-ES 2.0 NE. Not supported on the 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA.
standby
secondary
On the 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA, a primary path must already exist before you can create a secondary path.
View the newly created Bypass Only Lsp

The View the newly created Bypass Only Lsp parameter specifies whether you want to view the configuration details of the newly created LSP. The Bypass Only LSP child form displays the service tunnel configuration details. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) View the newly created Dynamic LSP

The View the newly created Dynamic LSP parameter specifies whether you want to view the configuration details of the newly created LSP. The Dynamic LSP child form displays the service tunnel configuration details. The options are:
May 2009
84-11
84-12
May 2009
85.1 Manage Service Tunnels parameters
85-2
May 2009
85-1
85.1
Manage Service Tunnels parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Service Tunnels forms and child forms.
Administrative
Administrative MTU (pathMtu)

The Administrative MTU parameter specifies the maximum packet size that is supported by the network interface. The range is 0 or 576 to 9194. The default is 4462. A value of zero indicates that the MTU should be computed dynamically from the corresponding MTU of the tunnel.
Advertised MTU Override (advertisedMtuOverride)

The Advertised MTU Override parameter specifies whether you override the advertised VC-type MTU. The options are:
false (default) true Auto-Assign ID

BW (Mbps) (defaultLspBw)
The BW (Mbps) parameter specifies the minimum amount of the MPLS path bandwidth to reserve for the LSP. The parameter is not configurable for a mesh topology rule. It is configurable for other topology rule types only when the Tunnel Type parameter value or the Underlying Transport parameter value is RSVP-LSP. The range is 0 to 100 000. A value of 0 means that the parameter is not configured.
Description
Destination Site ID (destinationNodeId)

Click on the Select button to list and choose the destination router for the service tunnel.
85-2
May 2009
FRR (defaultLspFrr)
The FRR parameter specifies whether fast reroute is enabled for the service tunnel. The parameter is configurable when the Tunnel Type parameter value or the Underlying Transport parameter value is RSVP-LSP.
Enabled (default) Disabled Group Name

Hello Message Length (helloMessageLength)

The Hello Message Length parameter specifies the length of SDP echo request messages that are transmitted on the SDP. The range is 0, or 40 to 9198. The default is 0. The default value of 0 indicates that the message length should be equal to the MTU, as specified by the Administrative MTU parameter.
Hello Request Timeout (helloRequestTimeout)

The Hello Request Timeout parameter specifies how long, in seconds, to wait for an acknowledgement of the SDP echo request message before a neighbor is declared down. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 5.
Hello Time (helloTime)

The Hello Time parameter specifies how long, in seconds, the SDP echo request messages are transmitted on the SDP. The range is 1 to 3600. The default is 10.
Hold Down Time (holdDownTime)

The Hold Down Time parameter specifies how long, in seconds, the SDP remains in the operationally down state in response to SDP keep-alive monitoring. The range is 1 to 3600. The default is 10.
ID (pathID)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the service tunnel. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 17 407. The default is 0.
May 2009
85-3
Keep-alive Enabled (keepAliveOn)

The Keep-alive Enabled protocol specifies whether SDP echo request and reply messages are used to monitor service tunnel (SDP) connectivity. The operating state of the SDP is affected by the keep-alive state on the SDP ID. SDP echo request messages are only sent when the SDP ID is configured and administratively up. When the SDP ID is administratively down, keep-alive messages for that SDP ID are disabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Ldp Enabled (ldpEnabled)

The Ldp Enabled parameter specifies whether LDP is enabled on the routing instance. The parameter is configurable when the Underlying Transport parameter is set to MPLS. The options are:
false (default) true Max Drop Count (maxDropCount)

The Max Drop Count parameter specifies the number of failed responses to an SDP echo request before the SDP changes to a down state. The range is 1 to 5. The default is 3.
Metric (metric)
The Metric parameter specifies a value used by a tunnel table manager to determine a route. The parameter value helps identify the preferred route when multiple SDPs with the same destination exist. The preferred route is the route with the lowest parameter value. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Name
Order
The Order parameter specifies whether the group is ordered or unordered. The options are:
unordered (default) ordered
85-4
May 2009
SDP Bandwidth Booking Factor (%) (bookingFactor)

The SDP Bandwidth Booking Factor (%) parameter is used to calculate the maximum SDP available bandwidth, specified as the percentage of the SDP maximum available bandwidth for VLL call admission. When the value of the SDP Bandwidth Booking Factor is set to zero, no new VLL spoke SDP bindings with non-zero bandwidth are permitted with this SDP. Overbooking in excess of 100% is allowed. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 100.
Signaling (signallingType)
The Signaling parameter specifies the signaling protocol that is used to obtain the ingress and egress labels in frames transmitted and received on the service tunnel. When the parameter is set none (manual), the labels must be configured when the service tunnel is bound to a service. The signaling value can only be changed when the administrative status of the SDP is down. Table 85-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 85-1 Signaling Type parameter
Option TLDP (default) None (manual) Option description Specifies that the ingress and egress signalling auto labelling is enabled. Specifies that the ingress and egress signal auto-labeling is not enabled. Each service that uses the specified SDP must use configured VPN labels. Dependencies
Source Site ID (siteId)

Click on the Select button to list and choose the source router for the service tunnel.
Tunnel Type (tunnelType)

The Tunnel Type parameter specifies the type of service tunnel to create. The options are:
SDP (default) RSVP-LSP Underlying Transport (underlyingTransport)

The Underlying Transport parameter specifies the underlying transport protocol for the service tunnel. Table 85-2 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
85-5
85 Manage Service Tunnels parameters Table 85-2 Underlying Transport parameter

Option GRE MPLS RSVP-LSP Option description Specifies a service tunnel that uses GRE encapsulation Specifies a service tunnel that uses MPLS encapsulation Specifies a service tunnel that uses RSVP-LSP encapsulation Dependencies
VC Type (VcType)
The VC Type parameter specifies the default VC type signaled for the circuit-to-service-tunnel binding to the far end of a service tunnel. The actual signaling of the VC type depends on the signaling parameter defined for the service tunnel. The options are:
Ethernet (default) VPLS VLAN View the newly created tunnel

The View the newly created Dynamic LSP parameter specifies whether you want to view the configuration details of the newly created LSP. The Dynamic LSP child form displays the service tunnel configuration details. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag)

The VLAN VC Tag parameter specifies a dot1q value for encapsulation to the far end of the service tunnel. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is None.
85-6
May 2009
86.1 Manage Service Templates parameters
86-2
May 2009
86-1
86.1
Manage Service Templates parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Service Templates form and child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Generate First (Base) Version

The Generate First (Base) Version parameter specifies whether a Velocity UI header is generated in the XML API configuration template script at template creation. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Generate Velocity Properties

The Generate Velocity Properties parameter specifies whether a Velocity UI header is generated in the XML API configuration template script. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Name (scriptName)

The Name parameter specifies a name for the s XML API configuration script. The range is 1 to 255 characters.
Script ID (id)
The Script ID parameter specifies a unique numeric identifier for the created XML API configuration template script. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Show created object

The Show created object parameter specifies whether to open the properties form for the object that you are creating from the template. The options are:
86-2
May 2009
State (state)
The State parameter specifies whether the XML API configuration template script appears in the list of templates and can be executed. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Templated Object Categories (configuredClassCategories)

The Templated Object Categories parameter specifies the object categories for which the template is created. Click on the Select button to choose from a list of templatable object categories.
Templated Object Class Name (configuredClass)

The Templated Object Class Name parameter specifies the object class for which the template is created. Click on the Select button to choose from a list of templatable object classes.
Type
The Type parameter specifies a user-defined description of the XML API configuration templated category. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
May 2009
86-3
86-4
May 2009
87.1 Manage node redundancy parameters
87-2
May 2009
87-1
87.1
Manage node redundancy parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the child forms of the Manage Node Redundancy form.

Up Down (default) Advertise Interval (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisAdvertiseInterval)

The Advertise Interval (100s of milliseconds) parameter specifies how often the protection and working channels of neighbor devices in a multi-chassis APS group send messages to each other to indicate that they are operationally up. The range is 10 to 650 in 100s of ms. The default is 10.
Authentication Key (authenticationKey)

The Authentication Key parameter specifies the authentication key used between two multi-chassis peers. Specify any string up to 20 printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters or spaces, you must enclose the entire string in double quotes.
Auto-Assign ID
The Description parameter specifies a description for the created object. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Destination IP Address (ibrccDestinationIpAddr)

The Destination IP Address parameter specifies the destination IP Address used in the in-band control connection. The ring can not be turned up without this property being configured correctly. It should be the IP address of the peer BFD interface. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Destination IP Address (rncvDestinationIpAddr)

The Destination IP Address specifies the destination IP Address used in the Ring Node Connectivity Verification. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
87-2
May 2009
Encap Type (Type)

The Encap Type parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the port in the definition of a VLAN range. The options are:
Dot1 Q (default) Q in Q End VLAN Value (endVlan)

The End VLAN Value parameter specifies the end VLAN value of the VLAN range. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
First Network Element (nodeIdLow)

The First Network Element parameter specifies the near-end device in the MC APS group.
First Site ID (firstSiteId)

The First Site ID parameter specifies the IP address of the first site of Multi Chassis Ring group. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisHoldTime)

The Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) parameter specifies the maximum time that a peer device in a MC APS group waits between successive update messages from its neighbor before considering that the multi-chassis signaling link is operationally down. The range is 10 to 650 in 100s of ms. The default is 30.
Interface Name (ibrccInterfaceName)

The Interface Name parameter specifies the name of the interface which is used for the in-band control connection. The ring can not be turned up without this property being configured correctly. The interface must be either an IES or VPRN interface with BFD enabled. The name can be up to 32 characters in length. There is no default.
Interval (minutes) (rncvInterval)

The Interval (minutes) parameter specifies the polling interval of the Ring Node Connectivity Verification. The range is 1 to 6000. The default is 5.
Keepalive Interval (deciseconds) (keepAliveInterval)

The Keepalive Interval (deciseconds) parameter specifies how often a peer sends keepalive messages to a standby peer in an MC LAG to indicate to the standby peer that it is operationally up. The range is 5 to 500. The default is 10.
May 2009
87-3
LACP Key (lacpKey)

The LACP Key parameter specifies a unique 16-bit key that must be configured identically on both members of the MC LAG in order for the MC LAG to be operational. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
LACP Transmit Interval (lacpTransmitInterval)

The LACP Transmit Interval parameter specifies the speed of the transmission. The options are:
Slow Fast (default) LACP Transmit Standby (lacpXmitStdby)

The LACP Transmit Standby parameter specifies whether LACP message transmission on standby links is enabled. By default, links that are members of a LAG and are in standby mode still receive and transmit LACP messages. The disabling of LACP message transmission on standby links adversely affects switchover times and should only be done to ensure interworking with systems that do not support standby link signaling. The options are:

The parameter is configurable on the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR, Release 4.0 or later, and on the 7710 SR, Release 5.0 or later.
LAG ID
Table 87-1 lists where to find more information about the LAG ID parameter.
Table 87-1 LAG ID parameter
Parameter LAG ID for first peer in MC LAG LAG ID for second peer in MC LAG See LAG ID (firstLagId) LAG ID (secondLagId)
LAG ID (lagId)
The LAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG. The range is 1 to 200 for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 64 for the 7450 ESS-1, 7750 SR-1, and the 7710 SR. The LAG ID is identical for all members of a LAG. The LAG ID creates an association between a logical IP interface and a LAG. An IP interface can be associated with a port or the system loopback address.
87-4
May 2009
LAG ID (firstLagId)
The LAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG on the first peer site of the MC LAG. The range is 1 to 200 for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 64 for the 7450 ESS-1, 7750 SR-1, and the 7710 SR. Click on the Select button to list and choose a LAG.
LAG ID (secondLagId)
The LAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG on the second peer site of the MC LAG. The range is 1 to 200 for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 64 for the 7450 ESS-1, 7750 SR-1, and the 7710 SR. Click on the Select button to list and choose a LAG.
Lost Connection Wait Interval (holdOnNeighborFailure)

The Lost Connection Wait Interval parameter specifies how long a standby peer waits for packets from the active peer before it assumes that the active peer has failed in an MC LAG configuration. When the value of this parameter is reached, the standby peer becomes the active peer, and the active peer becomes the standby peer. The range is 2 to 25. The default is 3.
Maximum Inner Encap Value (maxInnerEncapValue)

The Maximum Inner Encap Value specifies the maximum inner QinQ encapsulation value for the VLAN range on the port. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Maximum Outer Encap Value (maxOuterEncapValue)

The Maximum Outer Encap Value specifies the maximum outer encapsulation value for the VLAN range on the port. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Minimum Inner Encap Value (minInnerEncapValue)

The Minimum Inner Encap Value specifies the minimum inner QinQ encapsulation value for the VLAN range on the port. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Minimum Outer Encap Value (minOuterEncapValue)

The Minimum Outer Encap Value specifies the minimum outer encapsulation value for the VLAN range on the port. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Name (ringName)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the Multi Chassis Ring. This can be up to 32 characters in length.
May 2009
87-5
Neighbor Address (multiChassisNeighborAddress)

The Neighbor Address parameter specifies the IPv4 address of the peer device where either the working or protection channel of the MC APS group channel is located. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Port/LAG Name
The Port/LAG Name parameter specifies the port or LAG that is synchronized with the port or LAG with the same Synchronization Tag parameter on the MC peer. Click on the Select button to list and choose a port or LAG, or enter a port or LAG name.
Port Name
The Port Name parameter specifies the port that is synchronized with the port with the same Synchronization Tag parameter on the MC peer. Click on the Select button to list and choose a port.
SAP Encapsulation Value (rncvEncapValue)

The SAP Encapsulation Value parameter specifies the encapsulation value of the SAP used for the Ring Node Connectivity Verification of this ring node if the Service ID is not zero. The value 0 means that the SAP used for the Ring Node Connectivity Verification of this ring node uses NULL encapsulation. The default is 0.
SAP Service ID (rncvServiceId)

The SAP Service ID parameter specifies the service ID of the SAP used for the Ring Node Connectivity Verification of this ring node. The range is 0 to 2147483647. The default is 0.
Second Network Element (nodeIdHigh)

The Second Network Element parameter specifies the far-end device in the MC APS group.
Second Site ID (secondSiteId)

The Second Site ID parameter specifies the IP address of the second site of Multi Chassis Ring group. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Service ID (ibrccServiceId)
The Service ID parameter specifies the service ID when the interface used for in-band control connection belongs to a VPRN or IES interface. The range is 0 to 2147483647. The default is 0.
87-6
May 2009
Site ID (firstSiteId)
The Site ID parameter specifies the IP address for the system interface of the first MC LAG member. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or click on the Select button to list and choose a site.
Site ID (secondSiteId)
The Site ID parameter specifies the IP address for the system interface of the second MC LAG member. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or click on the Select button to list and choose a site.
Source Address (sourceIpAddress)

The Source Address parameter specifies the source IP address that the MC LAG peer member uses to communicate with the partner MC LAG peer member. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Address
Table 87-2 lists where to find more information about the Source IP Address parameter.
Table 87-2 Source IP Address parameter
For Source IP Address for the first NE in the MC peer group Source IP Address for the second NE in the MC peer group See Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress) Source IP Address (secondSitesourceIpAddress)
Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the first NE in the MC peer group. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Address (rncvSourceIpAddr)

The Source IP Address specifies the source IP Address used in the Ring Node Connectivity Verification. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Address (secondSitesourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the second NE in the MC peer group. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
May 2009
87-7
Source MAC Address (rncvSourceMacAddr)

The Source MAC Address parameter specifies the type of source IP Address used in the Ring Node Connectivity Verification. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Start VLAN Value (startVlan)

The Start VLAN Value parameter specifies the start VLAN value of the VLAN range. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
Sync Tag Config Level

Table 87-3 lists where to find more information about the Sync Tag Config Level parameter.
Table 87-3 Sync Tag Config Level parameter
Parameter Sync Tag Config Level for first site in MC sync group See Sync Tag Config Level (firstSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) in this section Sync Tag Config Level (secondSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) in this section
Sync Tag Config Level for second site in MC sync group
Sync Tag Config Level (firstSiteSyncTagConfigLevel)

The Sync Tag Config Level specifies the context for configuring synchronization tags on a port or LAG for the first site in a MC sync group. The options are:
Port/LAG Level (default) VLAN Range Level Sync Tag Config Level (secondSiteSyncTagConfigLevel)
The Sync Tag Config Level specifies the context for configuring synchronization tags on a port or LAG for the second site in a MC sync group. The options are:
Port/LAG Level (default) VLAN Range Level Synchronization Tag (tag)

The Synchronization Tag parameter specifies the synchronization tag that is used in the synchronization of the port, LAG, or VLAN range with the MC peer. State information is synchronized between two objects with the same synchronization tag. The parameter must be identical for the two MC peers, ports, LAGs, or VLAN ranges. The range is 0 to 32.
87-8
May 2009
Synchronize IGMP (igmp)

The Synchronize IGMP parameter specifies whether IGMP state information is synchronized with the MC peer. IGMP states that are created on L3 access interfaces with the SAP in the configured range of encapsulation values are synchronized with the corresponding MC peer. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Synchronize IGMP-Snooping (igmpSnooping)

The Synchronize IGMP-Snooping parameter specifies whether IGMP snooping state information is synchronized with the MC peer. IGMP snooping states that are created on VPLS SAPs in the configured range of encapsulation values are synchronized with the corresponding MC peer. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Synchronize MC Ring (mcRing)

The Synchronize MC Ring parameter specifies whether the multi-chassis ring information should be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer. When this field is enabled, the information related to the MC Ring will be transferred between two BSA nodes. This information includes IB-RCC source IP address, destination IP address, encapsulation value of the BFD connection and the VLAN ranges configured in the MC Ring Path-b and Exclude paths.The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Synchronize MLD Snooping (mldSnooping)

The Synchronize MLD Snooping parameter specifies whether MLD snooping state information is synchronized with the MC peer. MLD snooping states that are created on VPLS SAPs in the configured range of encapsulation values are synchronized with the corresponding MC peer. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Synchronize SRRP (srrp)

The Synchronize SRRP parameter specifies whether SRRP state information is synchronized with the MC peer. The options are:
May 2009
87-9
Note SRRP is supported on the 7750 SR and the 7710 SR, Release 5.0 R4 or later.
Synchronize Subscriber Management (subscriberManagement)

The Synchronize Subscriber Management parameter specifies whether subscriber management state information is synchronized with the MC peer. Subscriber management states that are created on VPLS SAPs, or on IES or VPRN group interfaces in the configured range of encapsulation values are synchronized with the corresponding MC peer. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the first site in the MC peer group. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Address (secondSitesourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the second site in the MC peer group. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
System ID (systemId)
The System ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the MC LAG. Specify a unicast MAC Address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
System Priority (systemPriority)

The System Priority parameter specifies the priority level of the MC LAG. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
87-10
May 2009
88.1 Routing Instance parameters
88-2
May 2009
88-1
88.1
Routing Instance parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Routing Instance form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for routing instances.
Action
See Action (action) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber)

The Autonomous System parameter specifies the AS number for the device. A device can only belong to one AS. An AS number is a globally unique number with an AS. This number is used to exchange exterior routing information with neighboring ASs and as an identifier of the AS itself. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 1.
BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled)

The BGP Enabled parameter specifies whether BGP is enabled for the device. Table 88-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 88-1 BGP Enabled parameter
Option Enabled Option description Specifies that BGP routing is enabled on the device Dependencies The Autonomous System parameter must be set from the Routing tab button on the Routing Instance form.
Disabled (default)
Specifies that BGP routing is disabled on the device
Broadcast
See Broadcast (broadcast) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.

Cflowd Type
See Cflowd Type (cflowdType) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
88-2
May 2009
Circuit ID
See Circuit ID (circuitId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.
Class
See Class (rtrInterfaceClass) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Confederation Autonomous System (confederationAutonomousSystemNumber)

The Confederation Autonomous System parameter specifies a confederation ID to reduce the IBGP mesh inside an AS. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0. An AS can be logically divided into smaller groupings called subconfederations. To create this division, you can use the parameter to assign the confederation ID. Each subconfederation has fully meshed IBGP and connections to other ASs outside of the confederation.
Description
Edit Routing Policies

The Edit Routing Policies button allows you to configure device routing policies.
Egress Filter ID
Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter)

The Enable Auto ACL Filters parameter specifies whether the device can automatically build anti-spoofing filter lists. The range is 0 to 2000. The default is 0. When this parameter is set to non-zero, auto-filtering is enabled and a filter allowing only PPPoE or DHCP traffic is established on the interface. The non-zero value indicates the maximum number of entries that the auto-filter can have. These entries are created by the agent upon snooping a valid DHCP reply packet and are used to allow traffic sourced by the given DHCP-assigned IP address.
Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState)

The Enable DHCP Relay parameter specifies the administrative state for DHCP relay. DHCP discover messages are broadcast packets that typically do not leave the IP subnet. DHCP relay agents are used to intercept the requests and forward them as unicast messages to a DHCP server.
May 2009
88-3
Enable Info Option (informationOption)

The Enable Info Option parameter specifies if the DHCP relay agent appends information (options) before sending the client request to the server. For example, Option 82 (Relay Information Option) is specified in RFC 3046 [2] and allows the relay agent to append information such as the circuit ID. The options are:

The DHCP relay option allows managed devices to append information to the DHCP request that identifies where the DHCP request originated.
Enable Option 82 (informationOption)

The Enable Option 82 parameter specifies if the DHCP relay agent appends information (options) before sending the client request to the server. For example, Option 82 (Relay Information Option) is specified in RFC 3046 [2] and allows the relay agent to append information such as the circuit ID. The options are:

The DHCP relay option allows managed devices to append information to the DHCP request that identifies where the DHCP request originated.
Exclusive (exclusive)
The Exclusive parameter specifies whether to allow the creation of an IP address range reserved for IESs or VPLSs. This provides a mechanism to reserve one or more address ranges for services. When this parameter is enabled, the configured IP addresses and subnet masks are exclusively used for services and cannot be assigned to network ports. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled)

The IGMP Enabled parameter specifies whether IGMP is enabled for the device. Table 88-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 88-2 IGMP Enabled parameter
Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that IGMP is enabled on the device Specifies that IGMP is disabled on the device Dependencies
88-4
May 2009
IGP Inhibit
See IGP Inhibit (igpInhibit) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Filter ID
Interface ID (interfaceID)
The Interface ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the interface. This parameter is not configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 5119. The default is 0.
IP Address
See IP Address (primaryIpAddress) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
IS-IS Enabled (isisEnabled)

The IS-IS Enabled parameter specifies whether IS-IS is configured for the device. The options are:

When this parameter is enabled, IS-IS routing is enabled on the device.
LDP Enabled (ldpEnabled)

The LDP Enabled parameter specifies whether LDP is enabled for the device. Table 88-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 88-3 LDP Enabled parameter
Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that LDP is enabled on the device Specifies that LDP is disabled on the device Dependencies The Enable MPLS parameter must be set to Enabled.
May 2009
88-5
Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled)

The Loopback Enabled parameter specifies whether or not any ports are associated with the interface. If the Loopback Enabled parameter is selected, no ports are associated with the interface and the interface is in a loopback state. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) MAC Address

Mask Reply
Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes

The Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes parameter specifies the number of routes for path sharing. Table 88-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 88-4 Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes parameter
Option 1 (default) 0 to 16 Option description The maximum number of equal cost routes allowed on this routing table instance, expressed as a number. The default 1 means equal cost routing is not implemented. For example, setting the parameter to 2 means two equal cost routes will be used for cost sharing. Dependencies Can only be used for routes learned with the same preference and protocol.
Member AS (memberAS)
The Member AS parameter specifies the AS number of the BGP confederation member. The range is 1 to 65 535. There is no default. You must configure the parameter to create a BGP confederation.
MPLS Enabled (mplsEnabled)

The MPLS Enabled parameter specifies whether MPLS is enabled for the device. The options are:
88-6
May 2009
Name
Network Policy ID
See Network Policy ID (networkPolicyId) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Number of Redirects

See Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.


Enabled Disabled (default) PIM Enabled (pimEnabled)

The PIM Enabled parameter specifies whether PIM is enabled for the device. Table 88-5 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
88-7
88 Routing Instance parameters Table 88-5 PIM Enabled parameter

Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that PIM is enabled on the device Specifies that PIM is disabled on the device Dependencies
Physical Address

The Prefix Length parameter is the short form of the subnet mask for an IP address. An IP address and a prefix create a local IP prefix. The defined IP prefix must be unique within the context of the routing instance. It cannot overlap with other existing IP prefixes defined as local subnets on other IP interfaces in the same routing context within the device. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 24. Subnet mask 32 is reserved for system IP addresses. You can configure subnet mask 31 for interfaces that are used by routing protocols.
Primary
Redirects
Redirects Time
Remote ID
See Remote ID (infoRemoteId) in section 79.1 for the parameter description.

The RIP Enabled parameter specifies whether RIP is enabled on the device. The options are:
88-8
May 2009
Router ID
See Router ID (routingInstanceId) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
RSVP Enabled (rsvpEnabled)

The RSVP Enabled parameter specifies that RSVP is enabled on the device. The parameter cannot be changed.
Server 1 (server1)
Server 2 (server2)
Server 3 (server3)
Server 4 (server4)
Server 5 (server5)
Server 6 (server6)
Server 7 (server7)
Server 8 (server8)
Snooping (snooping)
The Snooping parameter specifies whether DHCP snooping is enabled for DHCP messages. The default depends on the type of managed device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled

The Source Address Termination parameter specifies whether the source address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a managed node is a user-specified IP address or the primary address of the L3 access interface (referred to on the Source Address form as Interface Index). The options are:

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a node, in dotted-decimal format for IPv4, or colon format for IPv6. The parameter is configurable when the Source Address Termination parameter is set to IP Address. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. or 0:0:0:0 to 255:255:255:255. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Source IP Application parameter specifies the application for which the source IP or interface index is specified. The options are:
Telnet FTP SSH RADIUS TACACS+ SNMP Traps Syslog ICMP Ping Trace Route DNS SNTP NTP CFLOWD
Telnet IPv6 FTP IPv6 RADIUS IPv6 TACACS+ IPv6 SNMP Traps IPv6 Syslog IPv6 ICMP Ping IPv6
You must select an IPv6 Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) to select an IPv6 Source IP Application (sourceIpApplication). In 5620 SAM Release, 3.0, you can configure the source address for RADIUS and TACACS+ policies for the 7710 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7750 SR Release 3.0. In 5620 SAM Release 4.0, the Source Address field on the RADIUS and TACACS+ Policy (Create) form is not usable for any of the Release 4.0 devices even though it remains on the form. Instead, you must use the Source Address form in the Routing Instance of the device.
88-10
May 2009
Subnet Mask
See Subnet Mask (netMask) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Timeout
Trusted (isTrusted)
Trusted (default for VPRN and network IP interfaces) Non-trusted (default for IES IP interfaces)
See Remark (egressRemark) in section 98.1 for more information.
Trusted (Trusted)
Option false true (default) Option description The device discards the DHCP request. The device forwards the DHCP request. The device acting as the DHCP relay agent modifies the giaddr value to be equal to that of the ingress interface. Use this option when the Action parameter is set to Keep and the affected service is IES or VPRN.
TTL Expired

Unreachables
May 2009
88-11

88-12
May 2009
89 VRRP parameters
89.1 VRRP parameters
89-2
May 2009
89-1
89 VRRP parameters
89.1
VRRP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the VRRP forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for VRRP.
Backup Address (backUpAddress)

The Backup Address parameter specifies the IP address on which the backup routers forward traffic if a master router fails in a virtual router. The default is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
Base Priority (priority)

The Base Priority parameter specifies the ranking for backup router failover, so that the backup router configured with the highest priority becomes the master virtual router. The parameter is only configurable for non-owner VRRP instances. The priority value affects the interaction between this VRID and the same VRID of other virtual routers participating in the same LAN. A higher priority value defines a greater priority in becoming the master virtual router for the VRID. The priority value can only be configured when the defined IP address on the IP interface is different from the virtual router IP address (non-owner mode). The parameter value for an owner VRRP instance is 255 and is not configurable. The range for a non-owner VRRP instance is 1 to 254. The default for a non-owner VRRP instance is 100.
Description
Init Delay (seconds) (initDelay)

The Init Delay (seconds) parameter specifies the delay, in seconds, before a VRRP router takes over as the master router for a given VRRP network. This delay allows the router time to converge other IGPs and EGPs before assuming the virtual IP address ownership. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Key (authenticationKey)
The Key parameter specifies a simple text password for authentication. The range is 0 to 8 characters. The default is an empty string. See Type (authenticationType) in this section for information about configuring the type of authentication used.
89-2
May 2009
89 VRRP parameters

The MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the IP interface on which the virtual router sends packets to the LAN. The default value is derived from the VRID. The MAC address can be used instead of an IP address in ARP responses when the VRRP instance is the master. The MAC address configuration must be the same for all participating virtual routers. Otherwise, connectivity with the attached IP hosts may be affected. All VRRP advertisements are transmitted with ieee-mac-addr as the source MAC address. The parameter can be configured in both non-owner and owner modes of VRRP instances.
Master Inherit Interval (masterIntervalInherit)

The Master Inherit Interval parameter specifies that, in non-owner VRRP instances, the current master advertisement interval setting overrides the locally configured advertisement interval setting. If the current master changes, the new master setting is used. If the local virtual router becomes master, the locally configured advertisement interval is enforced. The options are:

The parameter must be set to false when the Message Interval (milliseconds) parameter is set to a value other than 0.
Message Interval (seconds) (messageInterval)

The Message Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in full seconds, that the VRRP instance combines with the Message Interval (milliseconds) value to specify the administrative advertisement timer value. The master VRRP instance uses the combined value as a timer for sending VRRP advertisements; the backup VRRP instance uses it to derive the master down timer value for the VR instance. The value set for the parameter must be the same for every virtual router on the VRID. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 1.
Message Interval (milliseconds) (messageIntervalMilSec)

The Message Interval (milliseconds) parameter specifies the time, in milliseconds, that the VRRP instance adds to the Message Interval (seconds) value to specify the administrative advertisement timer value. The master VRRP instance uses the combined value as a timer for sending VRRP advertisements; the backup VRRP instance uses it to derive the master down timer value for the VR instance. The value set for the parameter must be the same for every virtual router in the VRID. The range is 0 to 900, in increments of 100. The default is 0.
May 2009
89-3
89 VRRP parameters
Name
Owner (owner)
The Owner parameter specifies the name of the router whose IP address is the same as the IP address of the virtual router. In owner mode, the backup IP address must be identical to one of the interface IP addresses. The backup address defines which IP addresses are in the VRRP advertisement IP address list. The options are:
false (default) true Ping Reply (pingReply)

The Ping Reply specifies whether, on non-owner VRRP instances, ICMP echo request messages are prevented from being discarded at the IP interface of the instance when it is in master mode. ICMP echo request messages are always discarded in backup mode. When the non-owner access ping reply is disabled, ICMP echo request messages destined to the non-owner virtual router instance IP addresses are silently discarded in both the master and backup modes. The options are:
false (default) true Preempt Mode (preempt)

The Preempt Mode parameter specifies whether a VRRP instance overrides a non-owner master VRRP instance of a lower priority. The preempt command is only available for non-owner VRRP instances. The owner may not be preempted because the non-owner priority can never be higher than the owner priority. When the Preempt Mode parameter is set to true, the priority of the incoming VRRP advertisement from the current master is compared to the priority configured on the local VRRP non-owner instance. If the local priority is higher, the received VRRP advertisement is discarded, resulting in the eventual expiration of the master down timer. A transition to the master state on the local VRRP non-owner instance therefore occurs. When Preempt Mode parameter is set to false, the backup VRRP instance only becomes master if the master down timer expires before a VRRP advertisement is received from the master VRRP instance. The options are:
false true (default)
89-4
May 2009
89 VRRP parameters
SSH Reply (sshReply)

The SSH Reply parameter specifies whether the non-owner master replies to SSH requests directed at the IP addresses of VRRP instances. When the SSH Reply parameter is not enabled, SSH requests to non-owner master virtual IP addresses are silently discarded. Non-owner backup virtual routers never respond to SSH requests, regardless of the SSH Reply parameter setting. SSH must not have been disabled at the management security level (either on the IP interface or based on the SSH source host address). The options are:
false (default) true Standby Forwarding (standByFwding)

The Standby Forwarding parameter specifies whether the router, when acting as a standby VRRP router, forwards traffic sent to the VRRP router MAC address. The parameter setting does not affect traffic sent to the physical router MAC address. The options are:

The parameter can be configured only in VRRP instance non-owner mode.
Subnet Mask (subNetMask)

The Subnet Mask parameter specifies the subnetwork mask of the backup IP address, in dotted-decimal format. The backup IP addresses must be on the same subnet. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 24.
Telnet Reply (telnetReply)

The Telnet Reply parameter specifies whether the non-owner master replies to TCP port 23 Telnet requests directed at the IP addresses of VRRP instances. When the Telnet Reply parameter is disabled, the Telnet requests that are sent to non-owner master virtual IP addresses are silently discarded. Non-owner backup virtual routers do not respond to Telnet requests, regardless of the Telnet Reply parameter setting. The options are:
false (default) true Traceroute Reply (traceRouteReply)

The Traceroute Reply parameter specifies whether a non-owner master replies to traceroute requests directed to the IP address of a VRRP instance.
May 2009
89-5
89 VRRP parameters
A non-owner backup virtual router never responds to such traceroute requests regardless of the Traceroute Reply status. The options are:
false (default) true Type (authenticationType)

The Type parameter specifies the type of authentication used to generate master VRRP advertisements and to validate VRRP advertisements. Table 89-1 describes the parameter options.
Option none (default) password Option description No authentication is used. A plain text password is used for authentication.
For more information, see Key (authenticationKey) in this section.
Virtual Router ID (vrId)

The Virtual Router ID specifies the VRID. The parameter must have the same value on each virtual router associated with the redundant IP address. The VRID is included in all VRRP advertisements. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
VRRP Type (vrrpType)

The VRRP Type parameter specifies the context of the VRRP instance. The options are:
Network (default) IES VPRN
89-6
May 2009
90.1 Virtual Anycast RP parameters
90-2
May 2009
90-1
90.1
Virtual Anycast RP parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Virtual Anycast RP forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for PIM.
Anycast RP Type (anyCastRPType)

The Anycast RP Type parameter specifies the type of Anycast RP. Table 90-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 90-1 Anycast RP Type parameter
Option Network (default) VPRN Option description Defines a network-based Anycast RP type for base routing instances. Defines a VPRN-based anycast RP type for VRFs of the same VPRN service. The 5620 SAM uses the first discovered type if the anycast RP uses mixed routing instances. You can only mix routing instances in the same anycast RP using the CLI. The 5620 SAM raises an alarm if you add VRFs from different VPRNs to the same anycast RP set. Dependencies
Anycast RP Address (anycastRpIPAddress)

The Anycast RP Address parameter specifies the IP address of a PIM anycast protocol instance for the RP. Anycast enables fast convergence when a PIM RP router fails by allowing receivers and sources to rendezvous at the closest RP. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Auto Created Interface Name (interfaceName)

The Auto Created Interface Name parameter specifies the default value used to name the loopback interface. The parameter value appears in the Enter Interface Name dialog in the 5620 SAM GUI. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Description
Name
90-2
May 2009
Static Group IP Address (staticGroupIPAddress)

The Static Group IP Address parameter combines with the Static Group Mask parameter to specify the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises the static RP address. The value of the Static Group IP Address parameter is sent as the RP address. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Static Group Mask (staticGroupMask)

The Static Group Mask parameter specifies the mask that, combined with the Static Group IP Address parameter value, provides the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises to become the static candidate RP. The range is 4 to 32. The default is 24.
May 2009
90-3
90-4
May 2009
91.1 Manage FIB Entries parameters
91-2
May 2009
91-1
91.1
Manage FIB Entries parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage FIB Entries form and its child forms.
Auto Complete (forceAutoComplete)

The Auto Complete parameter specifies that the MAC address entered for a manually created FIB entry should be automatically created.
Force Autocompletion... button

Click on the Force Autocompletion button to automatically complete a MAC address when you create or edit a FIB entry.
MAC Address
Make FIB Entry Static... button

Click on the Make FIB Entry Static... button to make the FIB entry static.
91-2
May 2009
92.1 Common Manage menu parameters
92-2
May 2009
92-1
92.1
Common Manage menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the 5620 SAM Manage menus forms.
Note This chapter also describes parameters common to the Service Template form and child forms. Service templates are intended for use in the 5620 SAM GUI. Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend using the 5620 SAM-O XML classes and methods associated with service templates.

Up (default) Down Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Subscriber
The Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Subscriber parameter specifies whether you can bind templates even when they do not have a subscriber association. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Auto-Assign ID

Enabled (default) Disabled Description (description)

Gateway MAC Address (macAddress)

The Gateway MAC address parameter specifies the MAC address used by an SRRP instance. Unless specified, the system uses the same base MAC address for all SRRP instances. The same SRRP gateway MAC address should be in use by both the local and remote routers participating in the same SRRP context. The SRRP gateway MAC address can only be changed or removed when the SRRP instance is shutdown. Any MAC address except broadcast or multicast addresses can be used, expressed in normal Ethernet MAC address notation. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the created object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Keep Alive Interval (interval)

The Keep Alive Interval parameter specifies the interval between SRRP advertisement messages sent when operating in the master state. The interval is also the basis for setting the master down timer used to determine when the master is no longer sending. The range is 1 to 100, and the value is in hundreds of milliseconds. The default is 1.

The MAC Address parameter specifies the unicast MAC address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
The Name parameter specifies the name of the object. The range is 1 to 32 characters for most objects. The range is 1 to 80 characters for a virtual Anycast RP. The range is 0 to 32 for a virtual router.
Next Hop
See Next Hop (nextHopAddr) in section 198.1 for the parameter description.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the SRRP instance priority advertised by the SRRP instance to its neighboring NE. The SRRP instance priority is compared to the priority received from the neighboring NE. The NE with the best (highest) priority enters the master state while the other NE enters the backup state. If the priority of each NE is the same, the NE with the lowest source IP address in the SRRP advertisement message assumes the master state. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 100.
Remote IP Address (remoteIpAddress)

The Remote IP Address parameter specifies a remote IP address for the interface. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Service Description
The Service Description parameter specifies a description for the created service. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
May 2009
92-3
SRRP ID (srrpId)
The SRRP ID parameter specifies a 32-bit instance ID that must be unique to the system. The instance ID must also match the instance ID used by the remote router that is participating in the same SRRP context. The range is 1 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Subscriber ID (subscriberID)
The Subscriber ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the subscriber (customer). The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Trusted
VC ID (vcId)
The VC ID parameter specifies the value used by each end of a service tunnel to identify the VC. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
VC Type
See VC Type (VcType) in section 85.1 for the parameter description.
VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag)

The VLAN VC Tag parameter specifies a dot1q value for encapsulation to the far end of the service tunnel. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is None.
92-4
May 2009
Policies menu parameters
93 Access Ingress parameters 94 Access Egress parameters 95 ATM QoS parameters 96 MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters 97 MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters 98 Network parameters 99 Network Queue parameters 100 Shared Queue parameters 101 WRED Slope parameters 102 HSMDA WRED Slope parameters 103 Scheduler parameters 104 BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters 105 Port scheduler parameters 106 HSMDA Scheduler parameters 107 HSMDA Pool parameters 108 Named Buffer Pool parameters
May 2009
109 7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters 110 AOS QoS Policies parameters 111 ACL MAC Filter parameters 112 ACL IP Filter parameters 113 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters 114 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters 115 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter parameters 116 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter parameters 117 Multicast Package parameters 118 Egress Multicast Group parameters 119 Multicast CAC parameters 120 Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters 121 Time of Day parameters 122 Ethernet Services Policies parameters 123 Routing parameters 124 MPLS Administration Groups parameters 125 VRRP policy parameters 126 CFM 802.1ag parameters 127 802_1x parameters 128 RADIUS Based Accounting parameters 129 Residential Subscriber parameters 130 Remote Network Monitoring parameters 131 Size Constraint parameters 132 Application Assurance parameters 133 Common Policies menu parameters
May 2009
93.1 Access Ingress parameters
93-2
May 2009
93-1
93.1
Access Ingress parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Access Ingress Policy form and its child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Broadcast Queue ID (broadcastQueueId)

The Broadcast Queue ID parameter specifies a broadcast queue to be mapped to a forwarding class. Click on the Select button to list and choose a queue. The queue is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping you specify overrides the default forwarding-class-to-queue mapping for broadcast traffic.
Cir (kbps)
See CIR (kbps) (cir) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Cir Adaptation
See CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Committed Burst Size (KB)

See Committed Burst Size (kb) (committedBurstSize) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Default FC
See Default FC (defaultFc) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Default FC HSMDA Counter Override (bytes) (defaultFCHsmdaCntrOvr)

The Default FC HSMDA Counter Override (bytes) parameter specifies the counter override for the default forwarding class. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0.
Description
Destination IP
See Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
93-2
May 2009
Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress)

The Destination MAC parameter specifies the destination MAC address to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. Specify a MAC address for the Destination MAC parameter in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. When a packet contains the destination MAC address specified by the Destination MAC parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
Destination Port
See Destination Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Displayed Name
Distribute
See Distribute (distribute) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Dot1p
Table 93-1 lists where to find information about the Dot1p parameter.
Table 93-1 Dot1p parameter
Parameter Dot1p for forwarding class mapping Dot1p for MAC match/forwarding class mapping See Dot1p (dot1p) in this section Dot1p (dot1pValue) in this section
Dot1p (dot1p)
The Dot1p parameter specifies the IEEE 802.1p value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the Dot1p parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
May 2009
93-3
Dot1p (dot1pValue)
The Dot1p parameter specifies the IEEE 802.1p value to be used as the MAC match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. The range is 0 to 7. The default is default. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the Dot1p parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
DSCP
See DSCP (dscp) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Dst Mask
See Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Ether Type (ethernetType)

The Ether Type parameter specifies an Ethernet type II value as the match criterion. The range is 1536 to 65 535, or -1. The default is -1, indicating that filtering for this parameter is disabled. The Ether Type parameter appears only when the Frame Type parameter value is Ethernet II.
Expedite
See Expedite (expedite) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Forwarding Class
See Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Fragment
See Fragment (fragment) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Frame Type
See Frame Type (frameType) in section 111.1 for the parameter description.
High Priority Reserved

See High Priority Reserved (highPriorityReserved) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
93-4
May 2009
HSMDA Broadcast Queue ID (hsmdaBroadcastQueueId)

The HSMDA Queue ID parameter specifies the broadcast queue to use for packets in the forwarding class. This mapping is used when the SAP is on a HSMDA. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0. A value of 0 means that the default queues should be used.
HSMDA Multicast Queue ID (hsmdaMulticastQueueId)

The HSMDA Queue ID parameter specifies the multicast queue to use for packets in the forwarding class. This mapping is used when the SAP is on a HSMDA. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0. A value of 0 means that the default queues should be used.
HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaPacketOffset)

The HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) parameter specifies the packet byte offset. The range is -32 to 31. The default is 0.
HSMDA Queue ID (hsmdaQueueId)

The HSMDA Queue ID parameter specifies the HSMDA queue to use for packets in the forwarding class. This mapping is used when the SAP is on a HSMDA. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0. A value of 0 means that the default queues should be used.
ID
Table 93-2 lists where to find more information about the ID parameter.
Parameter ID for access ingress policy ID for IP match criteria ID for MAC match criteria ID for queue ID (queueId) in this section See ID (id) in this section
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for an object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 131 072. The default is 0. Table 93-3 describes the parameter.
May 2009
93-5
93 Access Ingress parameters Table 93-3 ID parameter

For Access ingress policy Description Access ingress policy ID 1 is reserved for the default policy. The default access ingress policy is automatically applied to all access interfaces which do not have another access ingress policy assigned. The default policy is not configurable. All access ingress policies have a default queue for unicast traffic, which is identified by queue ID 1, and a default queue for multicast traffic, which is identified by queue ID 11. IP match criteria MAC match criteria
ID (queueId)
The ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for queues. All access ingress policies have a default queue for unicast traffic, which is identified by queue ID 1, and a default queue for multicast traffic, which is identified by queue ID 11. Table 93-4 lists the parameter ranges for different queue types. The default is 0.
Object HSMDA queues Queues (except for HSMDA queues) Range 1 to 8 1 to 32
In DSCP (inDscp)
The In DSCP parameter specifies the packet DSCP value to be set at egress when the In Remark parameter is set to dscp. See Table 133-11 for the DSCP values. The default is default, which indicates that the DSCP value at egress is not to be modified.
In Precedence (inPrecedence)
The In Precedence parameter specifies the packet precedence value to be set at ingress when the In Remark parameter is set to precedence. The range is 0 to 7. The default is default, which indicates that the precedence value at ingress is not to be modified.
In Remark (inRemark)
The In Remark parameter specifies the type of remarking to be performed on ingress packets. Table 93-5 describes the parameter options.
93-6
May 2009
93 Access Ingress parameters Table 93-5 In Remark parameter

Option none (default) dscp precedence Option description Specifies that no remarking is to be performed Specifies that DSCP remarking is to be performed Specifies that IP Precedence remarking is to be performed
Mark DE bit1 as Out of Profile (de1OutOfProfile)

The Mark DE bit 1 as Out Of Profile parameter specifies whether or not to mark traffic with discard eligibility. When the value is set to false, traffic is routed based on the existing configuration. When the value is set to true, the traffic is marked as out of profile. The options are:
false (default) true Mask

Table 93-6 lists where to find information about the Mask parameter.
Table 93-6 Mask parameter
Parameter Mask for Dot1p Mask for source MAC address Mask for destination MAC address See Mask (dot1pMask) in this section Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) in this section Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) in this section
Mask (destinationMacAddressMask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask that is associated with a destination MAC address. The destination MAC address and the associated mask are used to specify a range of MAC addresses as the MAC match criteria for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. Specify a mask for the Mask parameter in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
Mask (dot1pMask)
The Mask parameter specifies the 3-bit mask that is associated with a Dot1p value. The Dot1p value and the associated mask are used to specify a range of Dot1p values as the MAC match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. For example, to specify a range from 4 up to 7 for the Dot1p value, set the Dot1p parameter to 4 and set the Mask parameter to 4. The range for the Mask parameter is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Mask (sourceMacAddressMask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask that is associated with a source MAC address. The source MAC address and the associated mask are used to specify a range of MAC addresses as the MAC match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. Specify a mask for the Mask parameter in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.
Maximum Burst Size (kb)

See Maximum Burst Size (kb) (maximumBurstSize) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Mode (mode)
The mode parameter specifies whether the queue will support color-aware profiling or priority forwarding and real-time rate-limiting functions. Table 93-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 93-7 Mode parameter
Option priority (default) Option description Specifies that the queue is to support the access-ingress priority state for each packet. Packets may be classified by the SAP ingress QoS policy classification commands as either high- or low-priority. High-priority packets receive preferential buffering during queue congestion. Forwarding classes and subclasses configured as in-profile or out-of-profile are not allowed to map to queues configured as priority-mode. Setting the mode parameter to priority is only allowed during queue creation. Real-time rate limiting is supported when the queue is operating in priority mode. profile Specifies that the queue is to support color -aware profiling of the forwarding class and sub-classes mapped to the queue. Color-aware operational behavior is as follows:
Classes defined as in-profile are handled as high priority and are never marked out-of-profile. In-profile packets consume queue CIR bandwidth. Classes defined as out-of-profile are handled as low priority and are never marked in-profile. Out-of-profile packets do not consume queue CIR bandwidth. Classes not set to in-profile or out-of-profile are marked according to the dynamic rate as they are scheduled from the queue. Packets scheduled from the queue when the queue is below or equal to CIR are marked in-profile, and packets scheduled from the queue when the queue is above CIR are marked out-of-profile. Non-profiled packets will consume queue CIR bandwidth. Real-time rate limiting is not allowed on a queue operating in profile mode.
Multicast (multicast)
The Multicast parameter specifies whether a queue applies only to multicast or unicast traffic. The options are:
93-8
May 2009
Multicast Queue ID (multicastQueueId)

The Multicast Queue ID parameter specifies a multicast queue to be mapped to a forwarding class. Click on the Select button to list and choose a queue. The queue is mapped to a specific forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping you specify overrides the default forwarding-classto-queue mapping for multicast traffic.
Out DSCP (outDscp)

The Out DSCP parameter specifies the packet DSCP value to be set at egress when the Out Remark parameter is set to dscp. See Table 133-11 for the DSCP values. The default is default, which indicates that the DSCP value at egress is not to be modified.
Out Precedence (outPrecedence)

The Out Precedence parameter specifies the packet precedence value to be set at egress when the Out Remark parameter is set to precedence. The range is 0 to 7. The default is default, which indicates that the egress precedence value is not to be modified.
Out Remark (outRemark)

The Out Remark parameter specifies the type of remarking to be performed on egress packets. Table 93-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 93-8 Out Remark parameter
Option none (default) dscp precedence Option description Specifies that no remarking is to be performed Specifies that DSCP remarking is to be performed Specifies that IP Precedence remarking is to be performed
Pir (kbps)
See PIR (kbps) (pir) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Pir Adaptation
See PIR Adaptation (pirAdaptation) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
93-9
Policed (policed)
The Policed parameter specifies that the out-of-profile traffic feeding into the physical queue instance should be dropped. The options are:

Setting the parameter to true overrides the bandwidth specified by the SAP ingress queue administrative CIR.
Precedence
See Precedence (precedence) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Priority
Table 93-9 lists where to find information about the Priority parameter.
Table 93-9 Priority parameter
Parameter Priority for policy Priority for Dot1p, DSCP, Precedence, IP, and MAC mapping See Priority (defaultFcPriority) in this section Priority (priority) in this section
Priority (defaultFcPriority)
The Priority parameter specifies the default enqueuing priority for all packets received on an ingress access interface which uses the policy. Ingress enqueuing priority only affects ingress queuing on the access interface. The Priority parameter is not used after the packet is placed in a buffer on an ingress queue. Table 93-10 describes the parameter options.
Option low (default) high Option description Specifies that the probability of enqueuing a packet decreases when the ingress queue is congested Specifies that the probability of enqueuing a packet increases when the ingress queue is congested Dependencies
Priority (priority)
See Priority (priority) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
93-10
May 2009
Profile (profile)
The Profile parameter specifies how a packet is to be considered when associated with an access ingress policy that involves forwarding classes. In-profile packets have a higher transmission priority than out-of-profile packets, which have a higher probability of being discarded if NE bandwidth is limited. Packets that are not explicitly marked as in-profile or out-of-profile have the status assigned by their forwarding class. Table 93-11 describes the parameter options.
Table 93-11 Profile parameter
Option none (default) in out Option description Specifies that the packet forwarding class determines the status Specifies that the NE considers the packet to be in-profile Specifies that the NE considers the packet to be out-of-profile
Protocol
See Protocol (protocol) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Queue ID
See Queue ID (queueId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Scheduler
See Scheduler button in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
SNAP OUI (snapOui)

The SNAP OUI parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC SNAP Ethernet frame OUI value as a match criterion. When enabled, the options are:
off (default) zero Non Zero

The SNAP OUI and SNAP PID parameters appear only when the Frame Type parameter value is e802dot2SNAP.
SNAP PID (snapPid)

The SNAP PID parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC SNAP Ethernet frame PID value as a match criterion. The SNAP OUI and SNAP PID parameters appear only when the Frame Type parameter value is e802dot2SNAP. The parameter is configurable when the SNAP OUI parameter is enabled. The range is -1 to 65 535. The default is -1, indicating that filtering on this parameter is disabled.
May 2009
93-11
Source IP
See Source IP (sourceIpAddress) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Source MAC (sourceMacAddress)

The Source MAC parameter specifies the source MAC address to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. Specify a MAC address for the Source MAC parameter in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. When a packet contains the source MAC address specified by the Source MAC parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
Source Port
See Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Src Mask
See Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Synchronize
See Synchronize (syncTo) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Unknown Queue ID (unknownQueueId)

The Unknown Queue ID parameter specifies a unicast queue to be mapped to unknown forwarding classes. Click on the Select button to list and choose a queue. The queue is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping that you specify overrides the default forwarding-class-to-queue mapping for unknown traffic.
93-12
May 2009
94.1 Access Egress parameters
94-2
May 2009
94-1
94.1
Access Egress parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Access Egress Policy form and its child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
CIR (kb/s)
See CIR (kbps) (cir) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
CIR Level
See CIR Level (portParentCirLevel) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
CIR Weight
See CIR Weight (portParentCirWeight) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
CIR Adaptation
See CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Committed Burst Size (kb)

See Committed Burst Size (kb) (committedBurstSize) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Description
Destination IP
See Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Destination Port
See Destination Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Displayed Name
94-2
May 2009
Distribute
dot1p (dot1p)
The dot1p parameter specifies the forwarding class-to-IEEE 802.1p mapping for 802.1Q or 802.1P encapsulated packets that egress the access interface which uses the access egress policy. When a packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the IEEE 802.1p value specified by the Dot1p parameter. The range is 0 to 7, or default. The default is default. Specifying 0 is equivalent to removing the explicit marking.
DSCP
See DSCP (dscp) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Dst Mask
See Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Expedite
See Expedite (expedite) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Force DE value (forceDeValue)

The Force DE Value parameter specifies whether the Mark DE bit (deMark) value is forced. By default the discard eligible (DE) bit setting depends on whether the packet is in or out of profile. The options are:
default (default) 0 1 Forwarding Class

See Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Fragment
See Fragment (fragment) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
High Priority Reserved

May 2009
94-3
HSMDA Egress Profiling

See HSMDA Egress Profiling (hsmdaDot1pProfile) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaPerPacketOffset)

The HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) parameter specifies the packet byte offset. The range is -32 to 31. The default is 0.
HSMDA Queue ID (hsmdaQueueId)

The HSMDA Queue ID parameter specifies the HSMDA queue to use for packets in the forwarding class. This mapping is used when the SAP is on a HSMDA. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0. A value of 0 means that the default queues should be used.
ID
Table 94-1 lists where to find information about the ID parameter.
Parameter ID for access egress policy ID for queue See ID (id) in this section ID (queueId) in this section
ID (id)
ID (queueId)
The ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for a queue. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 0. All access egress policies have a default queue, which is identified by queue ID 1.
In DSCP (inDscp)
The In DSCP parameter specifies the packet DSCP value to be set at egress when the In Remark parameter is set to dscp. The default is default, which indicates that the DSCP value at egress is not to be modified.
94-4
May 2009
In Profile (inDot1p)
The In Profile parameter specifies which Dot1p should be configured and depends on whether or not traffic is in or out of profile. The range is 0 to 7, or default. The default is default. Specifying 0 is equivalent to removing the explicit marking.
In Precedence (inPrecedence)
The In Precedence parameter specifies the packet precedence value to be set at egress when the In Remark parameter is set to precedence. The range is 0 to 7. The default is default, which indicates that the ingress precedence value is not to be modified.
Level
See Level (portParentLevel) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Mark DE bit (deMark)

The Mark DE parameter specifies whether the Ethernet frame is marked eligible to be dropped when the network traffic is in excess of the committed rate. The values are:
True False (default) Maximum Burst Size (kb)

See Maximum Burst Size (kb) (maximumBurstSize) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Out DSCP (outDscp)

The Out DSCP parameter specifies the packet DSCP value to be set at egress when the Out Remark parameter is set to dscp. The default is default, which indicates that the DSCP value at egress is not to be modified.
Out Profile (outDot1p)

The Out Profile parameter specifies which Dot1p should be configured and depends on whether or not traffic is in or out of profile. The range is 0 to 7, or default. The default is default. Specifying 0 is equivalent to removing the explicit marking.
Out Precedence (outPrecedence)

The Out Precedence parameter specifies the packet precedence value to be set at egress when the Out Remark parameter is set to precedence. The range is 0 to 7. The default is default, which indicates that the egress precedence value is not to be modified.
May 2009
94-5
PIR (kb/s)
See PIR (kbps) (pir) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
PIR Adaptation
See PIR Adaptation (pirAdaptation) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Priority (priority)
See Priority (priority) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Port Average Overhead (%)

See Port Average Overhead (%) (portAvgOverhead) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Port Parent
See Port Parent (portParent) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Precedence
See Precedence (precedence) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Protocol
Queue ID
See Queue ID (queueId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Scheduler
See Scheduler button in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Source IP
Source Port
See Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Src Mask
See Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
94-6
May 2009
Synchronize
Weight
See Weight (portParentWeight) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
94-7
94-8
May 2009
95.1 ATM QoS parameters
95-2
May 2009
95-1
95.1
ATM QoS parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the ATM QoS Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSATM QoS.
Auto-Assign ID
CDVT (cdvt)
The CDVT parameter specifies the cell delay variation tolerance. The parameter appears when the Service Category parameter is set to CBR, rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 ms. The default is 250 ms.
CLP Tagging (clpTagging)

The CLP Tagging parameter specifies whether to enable CLP tagging for ATM cells in a VPRN and IES service. When the value is enabled, cells which exceed the allowed limit are discarded if congestion occurs on the network. The value can be set to enabled on ATM MDAs and ASAP MDAs. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Description

Descriptor Type (descriptorType)

The Descriptor Type parameter specifies the type of ATM traffic descriptor profile, based on ATM Forum Traffic Management Specification Version 4.1. The options are:
clp0And1pcrPlusClp0And1scr clp0And1pcrPlusClp0scr clp0And1pcrPlusClp0And1scr

The descriptor type defines interpretation of traffic parameters that are specified for this profile. Table 95-1 describes the relationship between the parameter and the Service Category parameter.
95-2
May 2009
95 ATM QoS parameters Table 95-1 Descriptor Type and Service Category parameters relationship
Descriptor Type clp0And1pcrPlusClp0A nd1scr clp0And1pcrPlusClp0A nd1scr clp0And1pcrPlusClp0s cr Rates interpretation PIR applies to CLP=0 and CLP=1 cell flows PIR applies to CLP=0 and CLP=1 cell flows SCR applies to CLP=0 and CLP=1 cell flows PIR applies to CLP=0 and CLP=1 cell flows SCR applies to CLP=0 and CLP=0 cell flows Application service categories CBR, UBR, and UBR with MIR rt-VBR and nrt-VBR
Displayed Name
MBS (cells) (mbs)

The MBS (cells) parameter specifies the maximum number of ATM cells in a burst that can be transmitted at the peak rate. The parameter appears when the Service Category parameter is set to rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 cells. The default is 32. When the Service Category parameter is set to rt-VBR and nrt-VBR, ensure that MBS is between 3 to 256 000 cells.
MIR (kbps) (mdcr)

The MIR (kbps) parameter specifies the minimum data transfer rate for a path. The parameter appears when the Service Category parameter is set to UBR. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
PIR (kbps) (pcr)

The PIR (kbps) parameter specifies the cell rate, in kilobits per second, that the endpoint cannot exceed. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Policing (policing)
The Policing option specifies whether ingress traffic is policed. Policing is valid for CBR, RT-VBR and NRT-VBR. The options are:

The parameter applies only to ingress traffic. Similarly, the Shaping parameter applies only to egress traffic. For example, if a traffic descriptor has both options, policing and shaping enabled, the policing option is enforced for the ingress traffic, while the shaping option is enforced for the egress traffic.
May 2009
95-3
Service Category (ServiceCategory)

The Service Category parameter determines the priority a connection receives when requesting network bandwidth. Table 95-2 describes the Service Category parameter options listed from highest to lowest priority.
Table 95-2 Service Category parameter
When the Service Category parameter is set to CBR Traffic descriptor parameters Option description
PIR (kbps) Shaping (enabled)
For applications, such as voice and video, that require high priority and have a known peak transmission rate. CBR guarantees bandwidth for constant bit rate traffic, very low cell loss, and very low delay. For circuit-switched data paths, the Service Category parameter is set to the CBR option and cannot be changed.
rt-VBR
SIR (kbps) MBS (cells) PIR (kbps) Shaping (enabled)
For time-sensitive applications, such as voice and video, that have unpredictable, bursty traffic characteristics. It guarantees very low cell loss and very low delay. The 5620 SAM handles rt-VBR and nrt-VBR identically for routing and rerouting purposes, and uses both to calculate the total VBR bandwidth usage. You cannot exceed the physical speed of the ATM interface when setting the traffic descriptors.
nrt-VBR
Choose nrt-VBR for applications, such as video and frame relay, that have known or predictable traffic characteristics. It guarantees low cell loss and low delay. You cannot exceed the physical speed of the ATM interface when setting the traffic descriptors.
UBR (default)
MDCR (kbps) PCR (kbps) Shaping (disabled)
For applications that do not require guarantees of low cell loss or low delay. UBR paths emulate the connectionless services provided by conventional bridged and routed data networks.
Shaping (shaping)
The Shaping parameter specifies the shaping for egress direction traffic that uses the CBR, nrt-VBR, rt-VBR, and UBR service categories. When the Service Category parameter is set to CBR or rt-VBR the parameter is set to enabled and cannot be changed. When the Service Category parameter is set to UBR, the parameter is set to disabled and cannot be changed. When the Service Category parameter is set to nrt-VBR, the options are enable and disabled. For egress traffic, if the parameter is enabled, the sum of the traffic descriptor rate (PIR for CBR, SIR for rt-VRB or nrt-VBR, MIR for UBR) and the consumed shaped bandwidth on the ATM interface cannot exceed the physical speed of the ATM interface.
95-4
May 2009
SIR (kbps) (sir)

The SIR (kbps) parameter specifies the average cell rate of a traffic source in cells per second. SIR is an upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM connection over time scales which are long, relative to those for which the PCR is defined. The parameter appears when the Service Category parameter is set to rt-VBR or nrt-VBR. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
May 2009
95-5
95-6
May 2009
96.1 MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters
96-2
May 2009
96-1
96.1
MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSSROS QoSMLPPP Ingress QoS Profile.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Profile ID (id)
See Profile ID (id) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Reassembly Timeout (msec) (reassemblyTimeout)

The Reassembly Timeout (msec) parameter specifies the reassembly timeout for a specific MC MLPPP ingress class. Table 96.1 lists the default reassembly timeout value for each MLPPP class. The range is 0 to 1000.
Table 96-1 Reassembly Timeout (msec) parameter
Parameter Reassembly Timeout (msec) Class 0 10 Class 1 10 Class 2 100 Class 3 1000
96-2
May 2009
97.1 MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters
97-2
May 2009
97-1
97.1
MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage MLPPP Egress QoS Profile form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSSROS QoSMLPPP Egress QoS Profile.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Maximum Queue Size (msec) (maxQueueSize)

The Maximum Queue Size (msec) parameter specifies the MLPPP buffer queue size. The default value is determined by the MC MLPPP class. The range is 1 to 1000. Table 97-4 lists the default value for each MC MLPPP class.
Table 97-1 Maximum Queue Size (msec) parameter
Parameter Maximum Queue Size (msec) Class 0 25 Class 1 5 Class 2 200 Class 3 100
MIR (%) (mir)

The MIR(%) parameter specifies the MIR as a percentage of the available bundle rate. The range is 0 to 100. A value of 0 indicates that this parameter is not applicable to the class. The default value is determined by the class. Table 97-2 lists the default values assigned to each MC MLPPP class. The MIR(%) is 100 for Class 0 and cannot be changed.
Table 97-2 MIR (%) parameter
Parameter MIR (%) Class 0 100 Class 1 85 Class 2 Not applicable Class 3 Not applicable
MLPPP Class (mlpppClass)

The MLPP Class parameter specifies the MLPPP class assigned to a forwarding class. The range is 0 to 3. Table 97-3 lists the default MC MLPPP class for each forwarding class.
97-2
May 2009
97 MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters Table 97-3 MLPPP Class parameter
Forwarding class 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Forwarding class name BE L2 AF L1 H2 EF H1 NC MLPPP class 3 2 2 2 2 1 0 0
Profile ID (id)
See Profile ID (id) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Weight (%) (weight)

The Weight (%) parameter specifies the weight assigned to an MLPPP class given as a percentage. The range is 0 to 100. A value of 0 indicates that this parameter is not applicable to the class. Table 97-4 lists the default value for each MC MLPPP class.
Table 97-4 Weight (%) parameter
Parameter Weight (%) Class 0 Not applicable Class 1 Not applicable Class 2 66 Class 3 33
May 2009
97-3
97-4
May 2009
98.1 Network parameters
98-2
May 2009
98-1
98.1
Network parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Network Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSNetwork.
Auto-Assign ID
Default FC
See Default FC (defaultFc) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Default FC Profile (defaultProfile)

The Default FC Profile parameter specifies whether packets that ingress a network interface which uses the network policy are by default considered in-profile or out-of-profile. All packets with undefined DSCP or LSP EXP bits will be mapped to the specified default profile and associated forwarding class. The default forwarding class is specified by the Default FC parameter. Table 98-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 98-1 Default FC Profile parameter
Option out (default) in Option description Specifies that packets are by default out-of-profile. In-profile packets are preferentially queued over out-of-profile packets. Specifies that packets are by default in-profile. In-profile packets are preferentially queued over out-of-profile packets. Dependencies
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
98-2
May 2009
Dot1p (dot1p)
The Dot1p parameter specifies the IEEE 802.1p value to forwarding class and profile mapping of LSP packets that ingress the network interface which uses the policy. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the Dot1p parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the profile specified by the Profile parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Dot1p In Profile (dot1pInProfile)

The Dot1p In Profile parameter specifies the forwarding class to IEEE 802.1p value mapping for in-profile packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an in-profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the IEEE 802.1p value specified by the Dot1p In Profile parameter. The default for the Dot1p In Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. The range is 0 to 7, or default.
Dot1p Out Profile (dot1pOutProfile)

The Dot1p Out Profile parameter specifies the forwarding class to IEEE 802.1p value mapping for out of profile packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an out of profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the IEEE 802.1p value specified by the Dot1p Out Profile parameter. The default for the Dot1p Out Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. The range is 0 to 7, or default.
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the DSCP value to forwarding class and profile mapping for LSP packets that ingress the network interface which uses the network policy. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the DSCP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the profile specified by the Profile parameter. Table 98-2 lists the parameter options.
Options be (default) cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 (1 of 2) ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51
May 2009
98-3
Options cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 (2 of 2) cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
DSCP In Profile (dscpInProfile)

The DSCP In Profile parameter specifies the forwarding-class-to-DCSP mapping for in-profile packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an in-profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the DSCP value specified by the DSCP In Profile parameter. The default for the DSCP In Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. For example, for the ef forwarding class, the default is ef. Table 98-3 lists the parameter options.
Table 98-3 DSCP In Profile parameter
Options default be cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
98-4
May 2009
DSCP Out Profile (dscpOutProfile)

The DSCP Out Profile parameter specifies the forwarding class to DCSP mapping for in-profile packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an out-of-profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the DSCP value specified by the DSCP Out Profile parameter. The default for the DSCP Out Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. For example, for the ef forwarding class, the default is ef. Table 98-3 lists the parameter options.
Force DE value (forceDeValue)

The Force DE Value parameter specifies whether or not the Mark DE bit (deMark) value is forced. By default the value is set to the same value as the node; and the value is not forced. The options are:
default (default) 0 1 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass)

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class to which packets with the specified match criterion are mapped. Table 98-4 describes the parameter options.
Option be (default) l2 af l1 Option description Specifies that packets in the class are treated, at best, as out-of-profile assured service packets. There are no delivery guarantees. The best-effort and low-2 forwarding class options are intended for best effort traffic. Specifies that packets in the class are forwarded or discarded based on the availability of bandwidth on network elements. The assured and low-1 forwarding class options are intended for assured traffic. Packets transmitted that are at or below the committed rate are marked in-profile. Packets transmitted that are above the committed rate will be marked out-of-profile. h2 ef h1 nc Specifies that packets in the class are always serviced at congestion points over other forwarding classes. These options are intended for high-priority traffic. Dependencies
The h2 and ef forwarding class options are intended for delay/jitter sensitive traffic. The h1 forwarding class option is intended for secondary network control traffic or delay/jitter sensitive traffic. The nc forwarding class option is intended for network control traffic.
May 2009
98-5
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the network policy, which is not configurable. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 131 072. The default is 0. Network policy ID 1 is reserved for the default network policy. The default network policy is implicitly applied to all interfaces which do not explicitly have another network policy assigned. For network ingress, the default policy defines the default DSCP-to-forwarding class mapping and MPLS EXP-to-forwarding class mapping. For network egress, the default policy defines six forwarding classes which represent individual queues and the packet marking criteria.
LER Use DSCP (lerUseDscp)

The LER Use DSCP parameter specifies whether the LER in an LSP uses DSCP. The options are:
false (default) true LSP Exp (lspExp)

The LSP Exp parameter specifies the LSP EXP value to forwarding class and profile mapping of LSP packets that ingress the network interface which uses the network policy. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the LSP Exp parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the profile specified by the Profile parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
LSP EXP In Profile (lspExpInProfile)

The LSP EXP In Profile parameter specifies the forwarding class to LSP EXP mapping of in-profile LSP packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an in-profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the LSP EXP value specified by the LSP EXP In Profile parameter. The default for the LSP EXP In Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. The range is 0 to 7, or default.
LSP EXP Out Profile (lspExpOutProfile)

The LSP EXP Out Profile parameter specifies the forwarding class to LSP experimental bit mapping of out-of-profile LSP packets that egress the network interface which uses the network policy. When an out-of-profile packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the LSP experimental bit value specified by the LSP EXP Out Profile parameter. The default for the LSP EXP Out Profile parameter depends on the forwarding class. The range is 0 to 7, or default.
98-6
May 2009
Mark DE bit (deMark)

The Mark DE parameter specifies whether or not the Ethernet frame is marked eligible to be dropped when the network traffic is in excess of the committed rate. The values are:
True False (default) Profile (profile)

The Profile parameter specifies the profile to which packets with the specified match criterion are mapped. Table 98-5 describes the parameter.
Table 98-5 Profile parameter
Option in (default) out de Option description Specifies that packets are by default in-profile. In-profile packets are preferentially queued over out-of-profile packets. Specifies that packets are by default out-of-profile. In-profile packets are preferentially queued over out-of-profile packets. Specifies that packets profile status is derived from the DE bit. Dependencies
Remark (egressRemark)
The Remark parameter specifies whether packets that egress the network interface will be remarked based on the forwarding class to DSCP and LSP EXP bit mapping defined by the network policy. The options are:
false (default) true Synchronize

May 2009
98-7
98-8
May 2009
99.1 Network Queue parameters
99-2
May 2009
99-1
99.1
Network Queue parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Network Queue Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSNetwork Queue.
CIR (%) (cir)

The CIR (%) (kb/s) parameter specifies the committed information rate, as a percentage of available bandwidth, for a queue on a network port or daughter card. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 100. The CIR defines the rate at which the device prioritizes the queue over other queues that are competing for the same bandwidth. On network ingress interfaces, the CIR also defines the rate that packets are considered in-profile by the system.
CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation)

The CIR Adaptation parameter specifies the constraint enforced when adapting the committed information rate defined by the CIR (%) (cir) parameter. Table 99-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 99-1 CIR Adaptation parameter options
Option Closest (default) Min Max Option description Operational CIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified using the CIR (%) (cir) parameter. Operational CIR for the queue is equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified using the CIR (%) (cir) parameter. Operational CIR for the queue is equal to or less than the administrative rate specified using the CIR (%) (cir) parameter.
CIR Level
CIR Weight
Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs)

The Committed Burst Size (%) parameter specifies the the relative amount of reserved buffer pool space for an ingress network daughter card queue or an egress network port queue. The range is 0 to 100. The default depends on the forwarding class mapping to the queue.
99-2
May 2009
The CBS for a queue determines whether it has exhausted its reserved buffer pool space while enqueuing packets. When the queue has exceeds the amount of buffer pool space considered in reserve for the queue, it must contend with other queues for the available shared buffer space in the buffer pool. Access to this shared pool space is controlled by the RED slope, as specified using the Slope Policy Manager.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Forwarding Class
See Forwarding Class in section 93.1 for the parameter description.
High Priority Reserved (%) (highPriority)

The High Priority Reserved (%) parameter specifies the relative amount of queue buffer pool space that is reserved for high priority traffic on an ingress network daughter card queue or an egress network port queue. The range is 0 to 100. The default depends on the forwarding class mapping to the queue. The difference between the MBS for the queue and the high-priority reserve defines the threshold at which low priority traffic is discarded. The result is used on the queue to define a threshold where low priority packets are discarded, leaving the rest of the default MBS size for high priority packets only. For example, if the current MBS for the queue is 10 Mb, a value of 5% for high priority traffic will result in a high priority reserve on the queue of 500 kb. A value of 0 specifies that none of the MBS of the queue is reserved for high-priority traffic. This setting does not affect the RED slope operation for packets attempting to be queued.
Level
Maximum Burst Size (%) (mbs)

The Maximum Burst Size (%) parameter specifies the the relative amount of reserved buffer pool space for the maximum buffer for an ingress network daughter card or an egress network port queue. The range is 0 to 100. The default depends on the forwarding class mapping to the queue.
May 2009
99-3
The MBS for a queue is used to determine whether the queue has exhausted its total allowed buffer space while enqueuing packets. Once the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffer space, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. Even when a queue has not exceeded its MBS size, buffer pool space is not guaranteed. The RED slope may also force the discard of the packet. You must set proper CBS parameter values and control CBS oversubscription to avoid to queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffer space). You must also properly set the RED slope parameters for the needs of the network queues using the Slope Policy Manager.
Multicast
See Multicast (multicast) in section 93.1 for the parameter description.
Multicast Queue ID (multicastQueueId)

The Multicast Queue ID parameter specifies a multicast queue to be mapped to a forwarding class. The queue is mapped to a specific forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping you specify overrides the default forwarding-classto-queue mapping for multicast traffic.
PIR (%) (pir)

The PIR (%) parameter specifies the peak information rate, as a percentage of available bandwidth, for an ingress network MDA queue or an egress network port queue. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 100. On ingress, the PIR defines the maximum rate that the queue can transmit packets through the switch fabric. On egress, the PIR defines the maximum rate that the queue can transmit packets out an egress interface. The specified PIR (%) value does not guarantee that the queue can transmit at the intended rate. The actual rate sustained by the queue can be limited by oversubscription factors or available egress bandwidth.
Queue ID (queueId)
The Queue ID parameter specifies a unicast queue to be mapped to a forwarding class. The queue is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping that you specify overrides the default forwarding class-toqueue mapping for unicast traffic.
PIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation)

The PIR Adaptation parameter specifies the constraint enforced when adapting the peak information rate defined by the PIR (%) (pir) parameter. Table 99-2 describes the parameter options.
99-4
May 2009
99 Network Queue parameters Table 99-2 PIR Adaptation parameter options

Option Closest (default) Min Max Option description Operational PIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified using the PIR (%) (pir) parameter. Operational PIR for the queue is equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified using the PIR (%) (pir) parameter. Operational PIR for the queue is equal to or less than the administrative rate specified using the PIR (%) (pir) parameter.
Port Average Overhead (%)

See Port Average Overhead (%) (portAvgOverhead) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Port Parent
Synchronize
Weight
May 2009
99-5
99-6
May 2009
100.1 Shared Queue parameters
100-2
May 2009
100-1
100.1
Shared Queue parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the QoSShared Queue form and its child forms.
CIR (%) (cir)

The CIR (%) parameter specifies the committed information rate, as a percentage of the maximum rate for the queue, for an ingress or egress daughter card queue to transmit packets through the switch fabric or out an egress interface The range is 0 to 100%. The default depends on the queue ID. For SAP ingress on daughter cards, the CIR defines the rate that packets are considered in-profile by the system. In-profile packets are preferentially queued by the system at egress and at subsequent next-hop devices on which the packet can traverse. To be properly handled as in- or out-of-profile throughout the network, the packets must be marked accordingly for profiling at each hop.
Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs)

The Committed Burst Size (%) parameter specifies the the relative percentage of reserved buffer pool space allotted for a daughter card queue. The range is 0 to 100%. The default depends on the forwarding class mapping to the queue. The committed burst size for a queue determines whether the queue has exhausted its reserved buffer pool space while queuing packets. When the queue has exceeded the amount of buffer pool space considered in reserve for the queue, it must contend with other queues for the available shared buffer space in the buffer pool. Access to this shared pool space is controlled by the RED slope. Two RED slopes are maintained in each buffer pool. A high-priority slope is used by in-profile packets. A low-priority slope is used by out-of-profile packets. All nc forwarding class packets are considered in-profile. Assured packets are handled by their in-profile and out-of-profile markings. All be packets are considered out-of-profile. Premium queues should be configured such that the committed burst size is sufficient to prevent shared buffering of packets. This is handled by the CIR scheduling of premium queues and the overall small amount of traffic on the class. Premium queues in a properly designed system drain before all others, limiting their buffer utilization. The RED slopes detect congestion conditions and work to discard packets and slow down random TCP session flows through the queue. The resultant committed burst size can be larger than the maximum burst size. This results in a portion of the committed burst size for the queue unused and should be avoided.
Description
100-2
May 2009
High Priority Reserved (%) (highPriority)

The High Priority Reserved (%) parameter specifies the relative percentage of queue buffer pool space that is reserved for high-priority traffic in an ingress network daughter card queue or an egress network port queue. The range is 0 to 100%. The default is 10%. The difference between the maximum burst size for the queue and the high-priority reserve defines the threshold at which low-priority traffic is discarded. The result is used on the queue to define a threshold at which low-priority packets are discarded, leaving the rest of the default maximum burst size for high-priority packets only. For example, if the current maximum burst size for the queue is 10 Mb, a value of 5% for high-priority traffic results in a high priority reserve on the queue of 500 kb. A value of 0% specifies that none of the maximum burst size of the queue is reserved for high-priority traffic. This setting does not affect RED slope operation for packets attempting to be queued.
Maximum Burst Size (%) (mbs)

The Maximum Burst Size (%) parameter specifies the the relative percentage of reserved buffer pool space for the maximum buffer allotted for a daughter card queue. The range is 0 to 100%. The default depends on the forwarding class mapping to the queue. The maximum burst size for a queue is used to determine whether the queue has exhausted its total allowed buffer space while queuing packets. When the queue has exceeded its maximum amount of buffer space, all packets are discarded until the queue transmits a packet. Even when a queue has not exceeded its maximum burst size, buffer pool space is not guaranteed. The RED slope may also force the discard of the packet. You must set proper committed burst size parameter values and control committed burst size oversubscription to avoid queue starvation (when a queue does not receive its fair share of buffer space). You must also properly set the RED slope parameters for the needs of the network queues using the Slope Policy Manager. The MBS size can sometimes be smaller than the CBS. This results in a portion of the CBS for the queue to be unused and should be avoided.
PIR (%) (pir)

The PIR (%) parameter specifies the peak information rate, as a percentage of the maximum rate for the queue, for an ingress or egress daughter card queue to transmit packets through the switch fabric or out an egress interface. The range is 0 to 100%. The default is 100%. On ingress, the PIR defines the maximum rate at which the queue can transmit packets through the switch fabric. On egress, the PIR defines the maximum rate at which the queue can transmit packets out an egress interface. The specified PIR value does not guarantee that the queue can transmit at the intended rate. The actual rate sustained by the queue can be limited by oversubscription factors or the available bandwidth.
May 2009
100-3
100-4
May 2009
101.1 WRED Slope parameters
101-2
May 2009
101-1
101.1
WRED Slope parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Slope Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSWRED Slope.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute (distribute)
High Slope
The High Slope parameter specifies how the high-priority packets, also known as in-profile packets, access the shared portion of the buffer pool. The probability of the buffer pools discarding packets is determined by the RED slope. The RED slope is indicated on the client GUI using a graph. The Start Avg., Max Avg., and Max Prob. parameters specify the values of the RED slope. In general, packets that are in-profile fall within the configured CIR and PIR ranges. This means the packets are more likely to gain access to the shared buffer pool, and not be discarded because of a buffer overflow.
Low Slope
The Low Slope parameter specifies how the low-priority packets, also known as out-of-profile packets, access the shared portion of the buffer pool. The probability of the buffer pools discarding packets is determined by the RED slope. The RED slop is indicated on the client GUI using a graph. The Start Avg., Max Avg., and Max Prob. parameters specify the values of the RED slope. In general, packets that are out-of-profile fall outside configured CIR and PIR ranges. This means the packets should not be allowed to cause a buffer overflow in the shared buffer pool, and should be more likely to be discarded because of a buffer overflow.
101-2
May 2009
Max Avg. (maxAverage)

The Max Avg. parameter specifies the maximum average of the RED slope position. The parameter indicates that the packet discard probability has increased to 1, and packets will be discarded. The range is 0 to 100%. The default is 75% buffer pool utilization before the packet discard probability is 100% for the low slope and 90% for the high slope. The parameter must be greater than or equal to the Start Avg. parameter. For example, when out-of-profile packets arrive on an interface configured with a low slope policy that has the parameter set to 75% and the Start Avg. parameter set to 50%, out-of-profile packets may start to be discarded by the buffer when it reaches 50% full, and all packets are dropped when the buffer reaches 75% full. The probability of the packets being discarded before the Max Avg. parameter is reached is determined by the Max Prob. parameter.
Max Prob. (maxProbability)

The Max Prob. parameter specifies the maximum probability that a packet is dropped by the buffer pool The range is 0 to 100%. The default is 80%. The parameter specifies that an in-profile or out-of-profile packet is, by default, 80% likely to be dropped by the buffer pool after the shared buffer size reaches the percentage full conditions, as specified by the Start Avg. and Max Avg. parameters. For example, when out-of-profile packets arrive on an interface configured with a low slope policy that has the Start Avg. parameter set to 50% and the Max. Avg. parameter set to 75%, out-of-profile packets may start to be discarded by the buffer when it reaches 50% full, and all packets are dropped when the buffer reaches 75% full. The probability of the packets being discarded before the Max Avg. parameter is reached is determined by the Max Prob. parameter.
Start Avg. (startAverage)

The Start Avg. parameter specifies the starting average of the RED slope position. The parameter indicates that the packet discard probability has increased above 0 to the percentage specified of the shared buffer size. The range is 0 to 100%. The default is 50% for the low slope and 70% for the high slope. For example, when out-of-profile packets arrive on an interface configured with a low slope policy that has the parameter set to 50%, out-of-profile packets may be discarded by the buffer when it reaches 50% full. When the buffer reaches the Max Avg. parameter, all packets above that percentage value are dropped. The probability of the packets being discarded is determined by the Max Prob. parameter.
Synchronize
May 2009
101-3
Time Average Factor (weight) (timeAverageFactor)

The Time Average Factor (Weight) parameter specifies a weight factor between the previous shared buffer average utilization and current shared buffer instantaneous utilization when a new shared buffer average utilization is calculated. The range is 0 to 15. The default is 7, which indicates an instantaneous shared buffer utilization of 0.8% The Time Average Factor (Weight) parameter must be set to 3 on the 7705 SAR. Weighting occurs when the buffer pool uses a portion of the previous shared buffer average and adds the factor to the instantaneous shared buffer utilization. A low value, such as 3, weights the new shared buffer average utilization more towards the shared buffer instantaneous utilization. A high value, such as 11, weights the new shared buffer average utilization more towards the previous shared buffer average utilization value, rather than the shared buffer instantaneous utilization.
101-4
May 2009
102.1 HSMDA WRED Slope parameters
102-2
May 2009
102-1
102.1
HSMDA WRED Slope parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the HSMDA Slope Policy form and its child forms.
Description
Displayed Name
HSMDA High Slope

The High Slope parameter specifies how the high-priority packets, also known as in-profile packets, access the shared portion of the buffer pool. The probability of the buffer pools discarding packets is determined by the RED slope. The RED slope is indicated on the client GUI in a graph. The Start Depth, Max Depth, and Max Prob. parameters specify the values of the RED slope. In general, packets that are in-profile fall within the configured CIR and PIR ranges. This means that the packets are more likely to gain access to the shared buffer pool, and not be discarded because of a buffer overflow.
HSMDA Low Slope

The Low Slope parameter specifies how the low-priority packets, also known as out-of-profile packets, access the shared portion of the buffer pool. The probability of the buffer pools discarding packets is determined by the RED slope. The RED slop is indicated on the client GUI in a graph. The Start Depth, Max Depth, and Max Prob. parameters specify the values of the RED slope. In general, packets that are out-of-profile fall outside configured CIR and PIR ranges. This means that the packets should not be allowed to cause a buffer overflow in the shared buffer pool, and are more likely to be discarded because of a buffer overflow.
102-2
May 2009
Max Depth (maxDepth)

The Max Depth parameter specifies where (based on MBS utilized) the discard probability rises to 100 percent. The range is .01 to 100%. The default for the HSMDA low slope is 90%. The default for the HSMDA high slope is 100%.
Max Prob. (maxProbability)

The Max Prob. parameter specifies where the discard probability deviates from the slope and rises to 100% The range is .01 to 100 percent. The default for the HSMDA low and high slopes is 100 percent.
Queue MBS (bytes) (queueMbs)

The Queue MBS (bytes) parameter specifies the queue MBS. The range is 0 to 500 000. The default is 16 800.
Start Depth (startDepth)

The Start Depth parameter specifies where the discard probability for the slope starts to rise above 0%. The range is .01 to 100%. The default for the HSMDA low slope is 90%. The default for the HSMDA high slope is 100%.
Synchronize
May 2009
102-3
102-4
May 2009
103.1 Scheduler parameters
103-2
May 2009
103-1
103.1
Scheduler parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Scheduler Policy form and its child forms.
CIR (kbps) (cir)

The CIR (kbps) parameter specifies the committed information rate of the scheduler. Table 103-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 103-1 CIR (kbps) parameter
Option MAX (default) -1, 0 to 100 000 000 Option description The CIR is set to infinity, and is only dependent on the forwarding class of the service access interface. The CIR, in kb/s, for the scheduler. This is shown as MAX on the client GUI. Dependencies Configurable when the Summed CIR parameter is set to false Configurable when the Summed CIR parameter is set to false and the MAX parameter is disabled
The CIR and PIR ranges that are configured for schedulers are used to define its profile marking level and the bandwidth the scheduler receives when schedulers are contending for bandwidth on a congested service interface. The MAX option specifies whether the CIR (kbps) parameter is set to infinity or can be configured. The options are:

When MAX is enabled, you cannot configure the CIR parameter.
CIR Level
CIR Weight
Description
Displayed Name
103-2
May 2009
Distribute
Frame Base Accounting (schedulerPolicyFrameBasedAccnt)

The Frame Base Accounting parameter specifies whether or not to use Frame Base Accounting or packet based accounting. Frame Base Accounting uses inter-frame gap and instructions to calculate overhead.
Level
Parent Scheduler (nextSchedulerName)

The Parent Scheduler specifies the higher-tier scheduler that will be the parent scheduler for a tier 2 or tier 3 scheduler. The parameter is configurable when the Tier parameter is set to the 2 or 3 option. Enter the same name as the Displayed Name parameter, or click on the Select button and choose a parent scheduler from the Select a Parent Scheduler list.
PIR (kbps) (pir)

The PIR parameter specifies the peak information rate of the scheduler. Table 103-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 103-2 PIR (kbps) parameter
Option MAX (default) -1, 1 to 100 000 000 Option description The PIR is set to infinity, and forwards packets at the maximum rate. The PIR, in kb/s, for the scheduler. This is the maximum rate at which the scheduler can forward packets as a peak rate. This is shown as MAX on the client GUI. Dependencies Configurable when the MAX parameter is disabled.
The CIR and PIR ranges that are configured for schedulers are used to define the profile marking level and the bandwidth the scheduler receives when schedulers are contending for bandwidth on a congested service interface. The MAX option specifies whether the PIR (kbps) parameter is set to infinity or can be configured. The options are:

When MAX is enabled, you cannot configure the PIR parameter.
May 2009
103-3
Port Parent
Summed CIR (summedCir)

The Summed CIR parameter specifies whether to define the CIR at which the scheduler will operate or to use the maximum CIR. Table 103-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 103-3 Summed CIR parameter
Option true (default) Option description The CIR is set to infinity, and the rate is only dependent on the forwarding class for the service interface using the scheduler. The CIR rate is defined for the scheduler. Dependencies
false
Configure the CIR parameter and the MAX parameter to specify the CIR rate.
The CIR and PIR ranges that are configured for schedulers are used to define the profile marking level and the bandwidth the scheduler receives when schedulers are contending for bandwidth on a congested service interface.
Synchronize
Tier (tier)
The Tier parameter specifies the hierarchical level that a group of schedulers are associated with. The range is 1 to 3. The default is 1, which represents the highest tier. The parameter defines the hierarchy scheduler within the schedule policy tiers. 1 represents the highest tier, 2 the second highest tier, and 3 the lowest tier. For example, a tier 2 scheduler can be the child of a tier 1 parent. In this case, the child tier 2 scheduler can use bandwidth from the parent tier 1 scheduler. A tier 1 scheduler is considered root, and cannot be the child of another scheduler. However, you can create a tier 2 scheduler without creating a parent tier 1 scheduler and you can create a tier 3 scheduler without creating a tier 2 scheduler. When multiple schedulers share the child status with the parent scheduler, the Weight and Level parameters are used to define how child schedulers contend for the parent schedulers bandwidth.
Weight
103-4
May 2009
104.1 BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters
104-2
May 2009
104-1
104.1
BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the BGP AD Configuration Policy form and child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Collect Stats (collectAcctStats)

The Collect Stats parameter specifies whether the agent collects accounting statistics for the SDP Binding. When the value is set to true, the agent collects accounting statistics on the SDP Binding. The default is false.
Description (shgDescription)
The Description parameter specifies a user-provided description for the split-horizon group on the SDP Binding. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Discard Unknown Source (discardUnknownSource)

The Discard Unknown Source parameter specifies whether or not packets with an unknown source MAC will be dropped. Packets are dropped when the parameter is enabled. The default is disabled.
Egress Filter Type

The Egress Filter Type parameter specifies the type of egress filter to be used. The options are:
No filter defined Egress IP Egress IPv6 Egress MAC
The default is No filter defined.
IGMP Fast Leave (igmpFastLeave)

The IGMP Fast Leave parameter specifies whether or not fast-leave is allowed on the SDP Binding. If it is enabled, the system prunes the port on which an IGMP leave message has been received, without waiting for the Group Specific Query to timeout. The default is disabled.
IGMP General Query Interval (seconds) (igmpGenQueryIntvl)

The IGMP General Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval (in seconds) between two consecutive general queries sent by the system on the SDP. The value of this object is only meaningful when the IGMP Sent Queries parameter is enabled. The range is 2 to 1024. The default is 125.
104-2
May 2009
IGMP Import Policy (igmpImportPlcy)

The IGMP Import Policy parameter specifies a policy statement that must be applied to all incoming IGMP messages on the SDP Binding. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
IGMP Last Member Interval (deciseconds) (igmpLastMembIntvl)

The IGMP Last Member Interval (deciseconds) parameter specifies the maximum response time (in tenths of a second) used in Group-Specific and Group-Source-Specific Queries that are sent in response to leave messages. This is also the amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. This value may be tuned to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group. The range is 1 to 50. The default is 10.
IGMP Max Neighbor Groups (igmpMaxNbrGrps)

The IGMP Max Neighbor Groups parameter specifies how many group addresses are allowed for the SDP Binding. The value 0 means that no limit is imposed. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 0.
IGMP Query Response Interval (seconds) (igmpQueryRespIntvl)

The IGMP Query Response Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum response time (in seconds) advertised in IGMPv2/v3 queries. The value of this object is only meaningful when the IGMP Sent Queries parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 1023. The default is 10.
IGMP Robust Count (igmpRobustCount)

The IGMP Robust Count parameter specifies the value of the Robust count. This object allows tuning for the expected packet loss on the SDP. If an SDP is expected to be lossy, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP snooping is robust to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses. The value of this object is only meaningful when the IGMP Sent Queries parameter is enabled. The range is 2 to 7. The default is 2.
IGMP Sent Queries (igmpSendQueries)

The IGMP Sent Queries parameter specifies whether the system generates General Queries by itself on the SDP. Queries are generated when the parameter is enabled. The default is disabled.
IGMP Version (igmpVersion)

The IGMP Version parameter specifies the version of IGMP for the PW template.
Version 1 Version 2 Version 3

The default is Version 3.
May 2009
104-3
Ingress Filter Type

The Ingress Filter Type parameter specifies the type of ingress filter to be used. The options are:
No filter defined Ingress IP Ingress IPv6 Ingress MAC
The default is No filter defined.
Limit MAC Move (limitMacMove)

The Limit MAC Move parameter specifies the behavior when the re-learn rate specified by the Move Frequency parameter is exceeded. When Limit Mac Move is set to blockable, the MAC re-learn rate on the SDP Binding is monitored. It will be blocked when the re-learn rate specified by the Move Frequency parameter is exceeded. When the parameter is set to non-Blockable, the SDP Binding will not be blocked. Instead, another blockable SDP Binding will be blocked. The default is blockable.
MAC Address Limit (macAddressLimit)

The MAC Address Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of learned and static entries allowed in the FDB for the SDP Binding. The value 0 specifies no limit for the SDP Binding. The command is valid only for spoke SDPs. When the value of the chassis mode is not C or D, the maximum value of the parameter is 131071. The range is 0 to 196607. The default is 0.
MAC Aging (macAgeing)

The MAC Aging parameter specifies whether the MAC aging process is enabled for the SDP Binding. The value is ignored if MAC aging is disabled at the service level. The default is disabled.
MAC Learning (macLearning)

The MAC Learning parameter specifies whether the MAC learning process is enabled for the SDP Binding. The value is ignored if MAC learning is disabled at service level. The default is enabled.
Mac Pinning (macPinning)

The Mac Pinning parameter specifies whether or not MAC address pinning is active on the SDP Binding (mesh or spoke). Setting the parameter to enabled disables re-learning of MAC addresses on other SAPs or SDPs within the same VPLS. The MAC address will hence remain attached to the SDP Binding for the duration of its age-timer. This object has effect only for MAC addresses learned using the normal MAC learning process, and not for entries learned using DHCP. The parameter is set by default to disabled. However for a spoke SDP that belongs to a residential SHG, the value is set to enabled by the system, and cannot be altered by the operator. The default is disabled.
104-4
May 2009
Name (shgName)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the split-horizon group that the spoke SDP Binding belongs to. By default, a spoke SDP Bind does not belong to any split-horizon group. The name specified must correspond to an existing split-horizon group in the TLS service where the spoke SDP Binding is defined. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Policy Id (policyId)
The Policy Id parameter specifies a numeric identifier for the policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Assign ID parameter is disabled. The minimum value is 1. There is no maximum value. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Restrict Protected Source (shgRestProtSrcMac)

The Restrict Protected Source parameter specifies how the agent will handle re-learn requests for protected MAC addresses. When the value of this parameter is true, requests to re-learn a protected MAC address will be ignored. The default is disabled.
Restrict Unprotected Destination (shgRestUnprotDstMac)

The Restrict Unprotected Destination parameter specifies how the system will forward packets destined to an unprotected MAC address. When the value of this parameter is true, packets destined to an unprotected MAC address will be dropped. The default is false.
Use Provisioned SDP (useProvisionedSdp)

The Use Provisioned SDP parameter specifies whether to use an already provisioned SDP. A value of true specifies that the tunnel manager will be consulted for an existing active SDP. Otherwise, a value of false specifies that the default SDP template will be used for instantiation of the SDP. The default is false.
VC Type (vcType)
The VC Type parameter specifies the type of virtual circuit (VC) associated with the SDP Binding. The choices are:
Ethernet VLAN
The default is Ethernet.
VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag)

The VLAN VC Tag parameter specifies the VLAN VC tag for the SDP Binding. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 4095.
May 2009
104-5
104-6
May 2009
105.1 Port scheduler parameters
105-2
May 2009
105-1
105.1
Port scheduler parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Port Scheduler Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSPort Scheduler.
CIR (kbps) (lvl1Cir)

The CIR (kbps) parameter specifies the total committed information rate for priority level 1 of the port scheduler. The range is 0 to 40 000 000, or 1. The default is MAX.






105-2
May 2009

CIR Level (orphanCirLevel)

The CIR Level parameter specifies the CIR priority level of orphan port schedulers and queues in comparison to other orphan port schedulers and queues for within-CIR distribution. The range is Default, 1 to 8. The default is Default. The higher the number, the higher the CIR priority level of the orphan port scheduler within-CIR request from the parent. When two orphan port schedulers or queues have the same CIR Level parameter value, the CIR Weight parameter determines which scheduler first receives the CIR bandwidth.
CIR Weight (orphanCirWeight)

The CIR Weight parameter specifies the default relative importance of an orphan port scheduler in comparison to other schedulers at the same port priority level for within-CIR distribution. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 000. The higher the number, the higher the priority of the orphan port scheduler CIR bandwidth request. A setting of 000 specifies that the orphan port schedulers and queues do not receive bandwidth from the within-CIR distribution. All bandwidth for the orphan port schedulers and queues is allocated from the above-CIR distribution.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Level (orphanLevel)
The Level parameter specifies the port priority level of orphan port schedulers and queues for traffic above the parent scheduler CIR. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1. The higher the number, the higher the port priority level of the orphan port scheduler bandwidth request. Orphan schedulers with the Level parameter set lower than other orphan schedulers do not receive bandwidth until all orphan schedulers with a higher level have reached their maximum bandwidth allocation, or have no packets to pass.
May 2009
105-3
When two orphan port schedulers have the same Level parameter value, the Weight parameter determines which scheduler first receives bandwidth. For example, there are three tier 2 schedulers with the same tier 1 parent scheduler:
orphan port scheduler alpha has its Level parameter set to 3 orphan port scheduler beta has its Level parameter set to 6 orphan scheduler omega has its Level parameter set to 7
When the parent scheduler receives traffic above its CIR, bandwidth is allocated to the orphan schedulers. Orphan scheduler omega receives the bandwidth from the parent scheduler before beta and alpha. When omega reaches its maximum bandwidth requirements, and there is bandwidth remaining, scheduler beta receives the bandwidth before scheduler alpha.
Maximum Rate (kbps) (maxRate)

The Maximum Rate (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum bandwidth for the port scheduler policy. When the port scheduler policy is associated with a port or channel, the bandwidth of the port or channel is limited to the lesser of the port or channel line rate and the value of the Maximum Rate (kbps) parameter. The range is 1 to 40 000 000, or 1. The default is MAX.
PIR (kbps) (lvl1Pir)

The PIR (kbps) parameter specifies the total peak information rate for priority level 1 of the port scheduler. The range is 0 to 40 000 000, or 1. The default is MAX.




105-4
May 2009



Synchronize
Weight (orphanWeight)
The Weight parameter specifies the relative importance of orphan port schedulers and queues in comparison to other orphan port schedulers and queues that have identical Level parameter settings for above-CIR distribution. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 000. The higher the number, the higher the priority of the orphan port scheduler bandwidth request.
May 2009
105-5
105-6
May 2009
106.1 HSMDA Scheduler parameters
106-2
May 2009
106-1
106.1
HSMDA Scheduler parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the HSMDA Scheduler Policy form and its child forms.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Group
Table 106-1 lists where to find information about the Group parameter.
Table 106-1 Group parameter
Parameter Group for class 1 Group for class 2 Group for class 3 Group for class 4 Group for class 5 Group for class 6 Group for class 7 Group for class 8 See See Group (level1Group) in this section See Group (level2Group) in this section See Group (level3Group) in this section See Group (level4Group) in this section See Group (level5Group) in this section See Group (level6Group) in this section See Group (level7Group) in this section See Group (level8Group) in this section
Group (level1Group)
The Group parameter specifies the weighted scheduling of the group that the HSMDA scheduler policy class 1 belongs to. The options are:
None (default) Group 1 Group 2
106-2
May 2009
Group (level2Group)
None (default) Group 1 Group 2 Group (level3Group)




None (default) Group 1 Group 2
May 2009
106-3
Group (level7Group)

None (default) Group 1 Group 2 Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schedulerMaxRate)

The Maximum Rate parameter specifies the explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth for the HSMDA scheduler policy context. The parameter is configurable when the MAX check box is disabled. The range is 1 to 40 000. The default is MAX. MAX means that all instances of the scheduler policy on the egress ports or ingress HSMDAs are allowed at the available line rate.
Rate (Mbps)
Table 106-2 lists where to find information about the Rate (Mbps) parameter.
Table 106-2 Rate (Mbps) parameter
Parameter Rate for group 1 Rate for group 2 Rate for class 1 Rate for class 2 Rate for class 3 Rate for class 4 Rate for class 5 Rate for class 6 (1 of 2) See See Rate (Mbps) (group1Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (group2Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level1Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level2Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level3Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level4Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level5Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level6Rate) in this section
106-4
May 2009
Parameter Rate for class 7 Rate for class 8 (2 of 2)
See See Rate (Mbps) (level7Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (level8Rate) in this section
Rate (Mbps) (group1Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the maximum rate allowed for the scheduling classes mapped to group 1. The parameter is configurable when the MAX check box is disabled. The range is 1 to 40 000. The default is MAX. MAX means that the bandwidth limitation is removed from group 1.
Rate (Mbps) (group2Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the maximum rate allowed for the scheduling classes mapped to group 2. The parameter is configurable when the MAX check box is disabled. The range is 1 to 40 000. The default is MAX. MAX means that the bandwidth limitation is removed from group 2.
Rate (Mbps) (level1Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the maximum rate allowed for scheduling class 1. The parameter is configurable when the MAX check box is disabled. The range is 1 to 40 000. The default is MAX. MAX means that the limit is not enforced for the class.



May 2009
106-5




Synchronize
Weight
Table 106-3 lists where to find information about the Weight parameter.
Table 106-3 Weight parameter
Parameter Weight for class 1 Weight for class 2 Weight for class 3 Weight for class 4 Weight for class 5 (1 of 2) See See Weight (level1Weight) in this section See Weight (level2Weight) in this section See Weight (level3Weight) in this section See Weight (level4Weight) in this section See Weight (level5Weight) in this section
106-6
May 2009
Parameter Weight for class 6 Weight for class 7 Weight for class 8 (2 of 2)
See See Weight (level6Weight) in this section See Weight (level7Weight) in this section See Weight (level8Weight) in this section
Weight (level1Weight)
The Weight parameter specifies the relative weight of class 1 to the other scheduling classes within the group. The parameter is configurable when the Group parameter is set to a value other than None. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 1.
May 2009
106-7
106-8
May 2009
107.1 HSMDA pool parameters
107-2
May 2009
107-1
107.1
HSMDA pool parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the HSMDA Pool Policy form and its child forms.
Allocation Percent
Table 107-1 lists where to find information about the Allocation Percent parameter.
Table 107-1 Allocation Percent parameter
Parameter Allocation Percent for class 1 Allocation Percent for class 2 Allocation Percent for class 3 Allocation Percent for class 4 Allocation Percent for class 5 Allocation Percent for class 6 Allocation Percent for class 7 Allocation Percent for class 8 See See Allocation Percent (poolClass1AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass2AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass3AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass4AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass5AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass6AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass7AllocPercent) in this section See Allocation Percent (poolClass8AllocPercent) in this section
Allocation Percent (poolClass1AllocPercent)

The Allocation Percent parameter specifies, indirectly, the size of the first class pool. The value (in one hundredths of a percentage point) determines the percentage of the root pool with which the first class pool is associated, as specified by Root Parent parameter, will be available to this class. The range is 0.01 to 100. The default is 40. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Percent parameter.

107-2
May 2009





May 2009
107-3

Allocation Weight
Table 107-2 lists where to find information about the Allocation Weight parameter.
Table 107-2 Allocation Weight parameter
Parameter Allocation Weight for class 1 Allocation Weight for class 2 Allocation Weight for class 3 Allocation Weight for class 4 Allocation Weight for class 5 Allocation Weight for class 6 Allocation Weight for class 7 Allocation Weight for class 8 See See Allocation Weight (poolRoot1AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot2AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot3AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot4AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot5AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot6AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot7AllocWeight) in this section See Allocation Weight (poolRoot8AllocWeight) in this section
Allocation Weight (poolRoot1AllocWeight)

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the first root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 75. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the second root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 25.
107-4
May 2009
When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the third root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the fourth root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the fifth root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the sixth root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the seventh root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.
May 2009
107-5

The Allocation Weight parameter specifies the weight that is applied to the eighth root pool. The weight is divided by the sum of all root pool weights to derive the buffer allocation factor of the pool. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. When the Default check box is enabled you cannot configure the Allocation Weight parameter.
Default
See Default in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Root Parent
Table 107-3 lists where to find information about the Root Parent parameter.
Table 107-3 Root Parent parameter
Parameter Root Parent for class 1 Root Parent for class 2 Root Parent for class 3 Root Parent for class 4 Root Parent for class 5 Root Parent for class 6 Root Parent for class 7 Root Parent for class 8 See See Root Parent (poolClass1Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass2Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass3Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass4Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass5Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass6Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass7Parent) in this section See Root Parent (poolClass8Parent) in this section
107-6
May 2009
Root Parent (poolClass1Parent)

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the first class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the second class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the third class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the fourth class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the fifth class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the sixth class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 2.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the seventh class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 2.

The Root Parent parameter specifies the root pool to which the eighth class pool will be associated. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 2.
Synchronize
System Reserve (%) (poolSystemReserve)

The System Reserve (%) parameter specifies the percentage of HSMDA buffers that are reserved for the system root pools. The rest of the buffers are available to the provisioned root pools. The range is 1 to 30. The default is 10.
107-8
May 2009
108.1 Named buffer pool parameters
108-2
May 2009
108-1
108.1
Named buffer pool parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Named Buffer Pool Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoSNamed Buffer Pool.
Access Weight (accessAllocationWeight)

The Access Weight parameter is used to divide the access buffer space available to the pools between each named pool. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 50.
Default Reserved CBS

The Default Reserved CBS parameter specifies whether the default percent for reserved CBS will be used. The options are:
Enabled Disabled Default Weight (defaultWeight)

The Default Weight parameter specifies the weights used to divide the buffers managed by a port into three categories; default, MDA and port. The default category is given to the default named pools. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 50.
MDA Weight (mdaWeight)

The MDA Weight parameter specifies the weights used to divide the buffers managed by a port into three categories; default, MDA and port. The MDA category is given to the MDA named pools. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 50.
Network Weight (networkAllocationWeight)

The Network Weight parameter specifies how the network buffer space available to the pools is divided between each named pool. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 50.
Pool Name (poolName)

The Pool Name parameter specifies the name of the pool. Each named pool must be uniquely named within the policy. MDA named pools must be unique from the port named pools. The same pool name can be created on more than one port on the same MDA.
Port Weight (portWeight)

The Port Weight parameter specifies the weights used to divide the buffers managed by a port into three categories; default, MDA and port. The port category is given to the local port named pools. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 50.
108-2
May 2009
Reserved CBS (%) (reservedCBS)

The Reserved CBS (%) parameter specifies the percent of buffer space within the pool that is not considered shared. The range is 0 to 100 percent. The default is 30 percent.
May 2009
108-3
108-4
May 2009
109.1 7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters
109-2
May 2009
109-1
109.1
7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 7250 SAS and Telco QoS Node Level Policy form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQoS7250 SAS and Telco QoS.
Auto-Assign ID
Color (conformanceLevelType)
The Color parameter specifies the type of color mark that is applied to packets in the traffic class specified by the Traffic Class parameter. The color mark indicates the packet discard priority in congestion conditions within queues. The options are:
Conforming (green) (default) Non-Conforming (red) Partially Conforming (yellow) Description

Displayed Name
Drop Algorithm (transmitXType)

The Drop Algorithm parameter specifies the type of congestion-avoidance mechanism that is used. Table 109-1 lists the parameter options.
Table 109-1 Drop Algorithm parameter
Option None (default) Random Detect Tail Drop Option Description Specifies that no congestion-avoidance mechanism is put into effect Specifies that the WRED congestion-avoidance mechanism is used for the configured interface Specifies that the tail-drop congestion-avoidance mechanism is used for the configured interface
109-2
May 2009
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies whether DSCP remarking is applied to packets in the traffic class specified by the Traffic Class parameter using the DSCP Value parameter. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) DSCP Value (dscpValue)

The DSCP Value parameter specifies the DSCP value that is applied to packets in the traffic class specified by the Traffic Class parameter. The range is 0 to 63. The default is 0.
Filter ID (id)
The Filter ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter. The range is 1 to 1 000 000. The default is 0.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the dot1p value applied to packets in the traffic class that is specified by the Traffic Class parameter. The range is and 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Queue Algorithm (queueAlgorithmType)

The Queue Algorithm parameter specifies how queues are serviced. Table 109-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 109-2 Queue Algorithm parameter
Option Strict Priority (default) Hybrid 1 Option Description Queues are serviced based on the traffic class only. Queue 7 is serviced first, then the remaining queues are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0 through Txq 6 parameter values in the Hybrid 1 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab. Queues 7 and 6 are serviced in descending numerical order, then the remaining queues are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0 through Txq 5 parameter values in the Hybrid 2 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab. Queues 7, 6, and 5 are serviced in descending numerical order, then the remaining queues are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0 through Txq 4 parameter values in the Hybrid 3 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab.
Hybrid 2
Hybrid 3
(1 of 2)
May 2009
109-3
Option Hybrid 4
Option Description Queues 7, 6, 5, and 4 are serviced in descending numerical order, then the remaining queues are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0 through Txq 3 parameter values in the Hybrid 4 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab. Queues 7, 6, 5, 4, and 3 are serviced in descending numerical order, then the remaining queues are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0, Txq 1, and Txq 2 parameter values in the Hybrid 5 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab. Queues 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are serviced in descending numerical order, then queues 1 and 0 are serviced according to the weight values specified by the Txq 0 and Txq 1 parameter values in the Hybrid 6 panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab. Queues are serviced based on the weight values assigned to them by the Txq 0 through Txq 7 parameter values in the Weighted Round-Rob panel of the Scheduling Tx Queue tab.
Hybrid 5
Hybrid 6
Weighted Round-Robin
(2 of 2)
Shaper Rate (shaperRate)

The Shaper Rate parameter specifies the rate for the transmit port or transmit port and queue. Traffic shaping is used to control the rate of outgoing traffic in order to make sure that the traffic conforms to the maximum rate of transmission available for it. Traffic that exceeds the shaping rate is queued and transmitted at the configured rate. If the burst of traffic exceeds the queue size, packets are dropped to maintain transmission at the configured shaping rate. The options are:
None (default) Rate Traffic Class (QosTrafficClassEntry)

The Traffic Class parameter specifies the traffic class to which the DSCP, DSCP Value, Color, and Priority parameter entries apply. The range is 0 to 63. The default is 0.
Txq 0 (txq0)
The Txq 0 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 0 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 0 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is not Strict Priority. The default is 0.
Txq 1 (txq1)
The Txq 1 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 1 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 1 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1, Hybrid 2, Hybrid 3, Hybrid 4, Hybrid 5, Hybrid 6, or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
109-4
May 2009
Txq 2 (txq2)
The Txq 2 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 2 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 2 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1, Hybrid 2, Hybrid 3, Hybrid 4, Hybrid 5, or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
Txq 3 (txq3)
The Txq 3 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 3 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 3 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1, Hybrid 2, Hybrid 3, Hybrid 4, or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
Txq 4 (txq4)
The Txq 4 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 4 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 4 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1, Hybrid 2, Hybrid 3, or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
Txq 5 (txq5)
The Txq 5 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 5 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 5 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1, Hybrid 2, or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
Txq 6 (txq6)
The Txq 6 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 6 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 6 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Hybrid 1 or Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
Txq 7 (txq7)
The Txq 7 parameter specifies a weight value to be assigned to queue 7 for servicing priority. The range is 0 to 100. The weight values assigned to this queue and the other queues must total 10 or 100. The Txq 6 parameter is configurable when the Queue Algorithm parameter value is Weighted Round-Robin. The default is 0.
May 2009
109-5
109-6
May 2009
110.1 AOS QoS Policies parameters
110-2
May 2009
110-1
110.1
AOS QoS Policies parameters

This chapter describes the OmniSwitch QoS policies parameters on the Manage AOS QoS Policies form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesQosAOS QoS Policies.
Action (actionDisposition)
The Action parameter specifies the action to be performed when traffic matches a condition that is defined in a QoS policy. Table 110-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 110-1 Action parameter
Option Accept (default) Drop Deny Option description Specifies that the switch should accept the flow Specifies that the switch should silently drop the flow Specifies that the switch should drop the flow and issue an ICMP message that indicates the flow was dropped for administrative reasons. Currently provides the same result as the drop option.
Destination IP (destinationIpAddress)
The Destination IP parameter specifies a destination IP address for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter.The default is 0.0.0.0.
Destination IP Port (End) (destinationIpPortEnd)

The Destination IP Port (End) parameter specifies the destination IP port range end value, which is used for traffic classification. You must select the check box beside the Match Destination IP Port Range (matchDestinationIpPort) parameter before you can configure the Destination IP Port (End) parameter. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Destination IP Port (Start) (destinationIpPortStart)

The Destination IP Port (Start) parameter specifies the destination IP port range start value, which is used for traffic classification. You must select the check box beside the Match Destination IP Port Range (matchDestinationIpPort) parameter before you can configure the Destination IP Port (Start) parameter. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
110-2
May 2009

The Destination MAC parameter specifies a destination MAC address for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Destination Mask parameter specifies a destination IP address mask for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) parameter before you can configure the Destination Mask parameter. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
Destination Mask (destinationMacAddressMask)

The Destination Mask parameter specifies a destination MAC address mask for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) parameter before you can configure the Destination Mask parameter. The default is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
Destination Net Mask (destinationIpAddressFullMask)

The Destination Net Mask parameter specifies a destination full IP address mask for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) parameter before you can configure the Destination Net Mask parameter. The default is 255.255.255.255.
Destination Port (destinationPort)

The Destination Port parameter specifies a destination port number for a policy condition. The destination port and slot conditions are only applied to bridged, not routed traffic. The parameter is configurable when the Match Destination Port (matchDestinationPort) parameter is selected. The range is 1 to 52. The default is 1.
Destination Slot (destinationSlot)

The Destination Slot parameter specifies a destination slot number for a policy condition. The destination port and slot conditions are only applied to bridged, not routed traffic. The parameter is configurable when the Match Destination Port (matchDestinationPort) parameter is selected. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 1.
Differentiated Services Code Point (dscp)

The Differentiated Services Code Point parameter specifies the DSCP that a QoS policy condition uses to filter incoming traffic, or that a QoS policy action assigns to outgoing traffic that matches a QoS policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The default is be. Table 110-2 lists the parameter options.
May 2009
110-3
110 AOS QoS Policies parameters Table 110-2 Differentiated Services Code Point parameter
Options be cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43

ICMP Code (icmpCode)

The ICMP Code parameter specifies an ICMP code to classify traffic in a QoS policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
ICMP Type (icmpType)

The ICMP Type parameter specifies an ICMP type to classify traffic in a QoS policy condition. You must select the check box beside the ICMP Code (icmpCode) parameter before you can configure the ICMP Type parameter. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
IP Protocol (protocol)
The IP Protocol parameter specifies an IP protocol for a policy condition. Table 110-3 lists the parameter options.
110-4
May 2009
110 AOS QoS Policies parameters Table 110-3 IP Protocol parameter

Options HOPOPT ICMP IGMP GGP IP ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX DCN_MEAS HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 NETBLT MFE_NSP MERIT_INP SEP 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA I_NLSP SWIPE NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_No Nxt any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN RVD any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP TCF EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) GMTP IFMP PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI SMP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE SCTP FC RSVP_E2E_IGNORE
May 2009
110-5
Mask
Table 110-4 lists where to find information about the Mask parameter.
Table 110-4 Mask parameter
Parameter Mask for a DSCP in a policy condition Mask for the ToS precedence bits in a policy condition See Mask (dscpMask) in this section Mask (tosValueMask) in this section
Mask (dscpMask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask for the DSCP in a policy condition. Table 110-2 describes the parameter options. You must select the check box beside the Differentiated Services Code Point (dscp) parameter before you can configure the Mask parameter. The default is cp63.
Mask (tosValueMask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask for the ToS precedence bits in a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the ToS Precedence (tosValue) parameter before you can configure the Mask parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 7.
Match Destination IP Port Range (matchDestinationIpPort)

The Match Destination IP Port Range parameter specifies whether the destination IP port range must match. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the Destination IP Port (Start) (destinationIpPortStart) and Destination IP Port (End) (destinationIpPortEnd) parameters.
Match Destination Port (matchDestinationPort)

The Match Destination Port parameter specifies whether the destination physical slot and port must match. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the Destination Slot (destinationSlot) and Destination Port (destinationPort) parameters.
Match Source IP Port Range (matchSourceIpPort)

The Match Source IP Port Range parameter specifies whether the source IP port range must match. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the Source IP Port (Start) (sourceIpPortStart) and Source IP Port (End) (sourceIpPortEnd) parameters.
110-6
May 2009
Match Source Port (matchSourcePort)

The Match Source Port parameter specifies whether the source physical slot and port must match. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the Source Slot (sourceSlot) and Source Port (sourcePort) parameters.
Maximum Bandwidth (Kbps) (maxBandwidth)

The Maximum Bandwidth parameter specifies the maximum bandwidth for a policy action. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 296. The default is 0.
Policy Status (enabled)

The Policy Status parameter specifies whether a QoS policy is enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Precedence (precedence)

The Precedence parameter specifies the precedence for a QoS policy. The OmniSwitch attempts to classify traffic according to policy precedence. The rule with the highest precedence is applied to the traffic. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Priority (actionPriority)
The Priority parameter specifies the priority for queuing a flow to which the QoS action applies. This priority value is independent of 802.1Q, ToS, or DSCP values. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Priority (dot1pValue)
The Priority parameter specifies the 802.1p that a QoS policy condition uses to filter incoming traffic, or that a QoS policy action assigns to outgoing traffic that matches a QoS policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Share Resources (shared)

The Share Resources parameter specifies whether queues that are created by a specific action can be shared. If multiple rules have the same action, more than one traffic flow may be scheduled on the same queue when the queue is defined as shared; otherwise, a separate queue is created for each flow.
May 2009
110-7
Each traffic flow must be sent over the same virtual port for the traffic flows to share a queue. For example, flows with the same 802.1q tag may share the same queue. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The options are:
No (default) Yes Source IP (sourceIpAddress)

The Source IP parameter specifies a source IP address for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Port (End) (sourceIpPortEnd)

The Source IP Port (End) parameter specifies the source IP port range end value, which is used for traffic classification. You must select the check box beside the Match Source IP Port Range (matchSourceIpPort) parameter before you can configure the Source IP Port (End) parameter. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0
Source IP Port (Start) (sourceIpPortStart)

The Source IP Port (Start) parameter specifies the source IP port range start value, which is used for traffic classification. You must select the check box beside the Match Source IP Port Range (matchSourceIpPort) parameter before you can configure the Source IP Port (Start) parameter. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0

The Source MAC parameter specifies a source MAC address for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)

The Source Mask parameter specifies a source IP address mask for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Source IP (sourceIpAddress) parameter before you can configure the Source Mask parameter. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
Source Mask (sourceMacAddressMask)

The Source Mask parameter specifies the mask for the source MAC address. You must select the check box beside the Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) parameter before you can configure the Source Mask parameter. The default is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
110-8
May 2009
Source Net Mask (sourceIpAddressFullMask)

The Source Net Mask parameter specifies a source full IP address mask for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Source IP (sourceIpAddress) parameter before you can configure the Source Net Mask parameter. The default is 255.255.255.255.
Source Port (sourcePort)

The Source Port parameter specifies a source port number for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Match Source Port (matchSourcePort) parameter before you can configure the Source Port parameter. The range is 1 to 52. The default is 1.
Source Slot (sourceSlot)

The Source Slot parameter specifies a source slot number for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the Match Source Port (matchSourcePort) parameter before you can configure the Source Slot parameter. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 1.
Source VLAN (sourceVlan)

The Source VLAN parameter specifies a source VLAN for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
ToS Precedence (tosValue)

The ToS Precedence parameter specifies a ToS value for a policy condition. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Type of Service (tosValue)

The Type of Service parameter specifies the value of the ToS bits to be applied to packets in outgoing traffic flows to which the specified policy applies. You must select the check box beside the parameter before you can configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
May 2009
110-9
110-10
May 2009
111.1 ACL MAC Filter parameters
111-2
May 2009
111-1
111.1
ACL MAC Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the ACL MAC Filter form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesFilterACL MAC Filter.
Action
See Action (defaultAction) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Auto-Assign ID
Default Action (action)

The Default Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with the packet when no action is specified in the IP filter entries or when the packets do not match the specified criteria. The options are:
drop (default) forward Description


The Destination MAC parameter specifies a unicast MAC address as a match criterion. When enabled, specify a MAC address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Displayed Name
Distribute
Dot1p (dot1pValue)
The Dot1p parameter specifies the IEEE 802.1p value to be used as the match criterion. The range is 0 to 7, or Not Set (-1). The default is Not Set (-1), indicating that filtering for this parameter is disabled.
Dot1p Mask (dot1pMask)

The Dot1p Mask parameter specifies a mask value as match criterion when you filter on a dot1p value. The parameter is configurable when the Dot1p parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 7, or Not Set (-1), indicating that filtering for this parameter is disabled. The default is 7.
Dst Mask (destinationMacAddressMask)

The Dst Mask parameter specifies a mask value to the match criterion when you filter on a destination MAC address. The parameter is configurable when the Destination MAC parameter is enabled. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Entry ID
See Entry ID (id) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.

The Ether Type parameter specifies an Ethernet type II value as the match criterion. The range is 1536 to 65 535, or -1. The default is -1, indicating that filtering for this parameter is disabled. This parameter is configurable only when the Frame Type parameter is set to Ethernet II.
Filter ID (id)
The Filter ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Frame Type (frameType)

The Frame Type parameter specifies an Ethernet frame type used as match criterion. Table 111-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 111-1 Frame Type parameter
Option e802dot3 (default) e802dot2LLC e802dot2SNAP Ethernet II Option description The frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3. The frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC. The frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP. The frame type is Ethernet Type II. Dependencies
Inner Encap Value

See Inner Encap Value (fwdSapInnerEncapValue) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Outer Encap Value

See Outer Encap Value (fwdSapOuterEncapValue) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Path ID
See Path ID (fwdSdpBindPathId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Port Name
See Port Name (fwdSapPortName) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Snap Oui (snapOui)

The Snap Oui parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC SNAP Ethernet frame OUI value as a match criterion. This parameter is configurable only when the Frame Type parameter is set to e802dot2SNAP. When enabled, the options are:
off (default) zero Non Zero Snap Pid (snapPid)

The Snap Pid parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC SNAP Ethernet frame PID value as a match criterion. The parameter is configurable when the Snap Oui parameter is enabled. The range is -1 to 65 535. The default is -1, indicating that filtering on this parameter is disabled.

The Source MAC parameter specifies a unicast MAC address as a match criterion. When enabled, specify a MAC address. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Src Mask (sourceMacAddressMask)

The Src Mask parameter specifies a mask value to use as a match criterion when you filter on a source MAC address. The parameter is configurable when the Source MAC parameter is enabled. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Synchronize
VC ID
See VC ID (fwdSdpBindVcId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
111-4
May 2009
112.1 ACL IP Filter parameters
112-2
May 2009
112-1
112.1
ACL IP Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the ACL IP Filter form, ACL IPv6 Filter form, and the associated child forms. The following are the 5620 SAM menu path:
PoliciesFilterACL IP Filter PoliciesFilterACL IPv6 Filter Action

See Action (defaultAction) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Auto-Assign ID
Cflowd If Sample (cflowdIfSample)

The Cflowd If Sample parameter specifies whether a packet is matched when the packet arrives at an interface that is configured for Cflowd analysis. Cflowd is used for network planning and traffic engineering, capacity planning, security, application and user profiling, performance monitoring, and SLA measurement. When the Cflowd If Sample parameter is enabled, all packets forwarded by the interface are analyzed according to the Cflowd configuration. The options are:
true (default) false Cflowd Sample (cflowdSample)

The Cflowd Sample parameter specifies whether a packet is matched when it is tagged for cflowd analysis. Cflowd is used for network planning and traffic engineering, capacity planning, security, application and user profiling, performance monitoring, usage-based billing, and SLA measurement. When the Cflowd Sample parameter is enabled, only tagged packets are analyzed. The options are:
112-2
May 2009

The Default Action parameter specifies the action to be applied to packets when no action is specified in the IP filter entries or when the packets do not match the specified criteria. The options are:
drop (default) forward Description

Dest Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2)

The Dest Port parameter specifies the destination port match criterion for a packet. This parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is TCP or UDP. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
The Destination IP parameter, combined with the Dst Mask parameter, specifies a destination IP address range as match criterion. When enabled, specify an IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Displayed Name
Distribute
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the mapping of an ingress DSCP name to a forwarding class on the router as the match criterion for the filter. Table 112-1 describes the parameter options.
Options default (default) be cp1 cp5 (1 of 2) ef cp2 cp6 nc1 cp3 cp7 nc2 cp4 cp9
May 2009
112-3
Options cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 (2 of 2) cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Dst Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified destination IP address. The parameter is configurable when the Destination IP parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
Entry ID
See Entry ID (id) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Filter ID (id)
The parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Forward NH (nextHop)
The Forward NH parameter specifies the next hop IP address of the route destination as match criterion. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is forward. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Forward NH Interface (nextHopInterfaceName)

The Forward NH Interface parameter specifies the next hop address, by name, in case the next hop is over an unnumbered interface on this node, as match criterion for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is forward. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
112-4
May 2009
Fragment (fragment)
The Fragment parameter configures fragmented or non-fragmented IP packets as match criterion for an ingress SAP QoS policy. Table 112-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 112-2 Fragment parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description No match criterion is specified. Specifies a match on all non-fragmented IP packets. Non-fragmented IP packets have the MF bit and the Fragment Offset field set to zero. Specifies a match on all fragmented IP packets. A match occurs for all packets that have the MF bit or the Fragment Offset field of the IP header set to a non-zero value. Dependencies

The ICMP Code parameter specifies the ICMP code of a packet as match criterion for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is ICMP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is None, indicating that ICMP code matching is disabled.

The ICMP Type parameter specifies the ICMP type of a packet as match criteria for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is ICMP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is None, indicating that ICMP code matching is disabled.
Inner Encap Value

See Inner Encap Value (fwdSapInnerEncapValue) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
IP Opt Mask (ipOptionMask)

The IP Opt Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the IP Option parameter specified. The parameter is configurable when the Option IP parameter is configured. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
IP Option (ipOptionValue)
The IP Option parameter specifies the optional header field to be included in a packet as match criterion for the filter. Table 112-3 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
112-5
112 ACL IP Filter parameters Table 112-3 IP Option parameter

Option EOOL (000) (default) NOP (001) RR (007) ZSU (010) MTUR (012) MTUP (011) ENCODE (015) TS (068) TR (082) SEC (130) LSR (131) E_SEC (133) CIPSO (134) SID (136) SSR (137) VISA (142) IMITD (144) EIP (145) ADDEXT (147) RTRALT (148) SDB (149) NSAPA (150) DPS (151) UMP (152) FINN (205) Time Stamp Traceroute Security Loose Source Route Extended Security Commercial Security Stream ID Strict Source Route Experimental Access Control IMI Traffic Descriptor Extended Internet Protocol Address Extension Router Alert Selective Directed Broadcast NSAP Addresses Dynamic Packet State Upstream Multicast Packet Experimental Flow Control Option description End of Options List No Operation Record Route Experimental Measure MTU Reply MTU Probe Dependencies
Is Indirect (nextHopIndirectlyReachable)
The Is Indirect parameter specifies whether to match on a packet where the destination node is not directly connected to a network configured on this device but can be reached using multiple paths. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is Forward. The options are:
112-6
May 2009
Log ID
The Log ID parameter specifies an filter log used to manage filter entries. Click on the Select button next to the parameter. Choose a filter from the list of defaults. A default filter with ID 101 is available from each managed device.
Multiple Option (multipleOption)

The Multiple Option parameter specifies whether to perform a match for a packet that contains more than one optional header field. This parameter is configurable when the Option Present parameter is enabled. Table 112-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 112-4 Multiple Option parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains more than one optional header field. Matches when a packet contains more than one optional header field. Dependencies
Option Present (optionPresent)

The Option Present parameter specifies whether to perform a match on a packet that contains an optional header field. Table 112-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 112-5 Option Present parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains an optional header field. Matches when a packet contains an optional header field. Dependencies
Outer Encap Value

See Outer Encap Value (fwdSapOuterEncapValue) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Path ID
See Path ID (fwdSdpBindPathId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
112-7
Port Name
See Port Name (fwdSapPortName) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies an IP protocol as a match criterion for the filter. When you specify ICMP, TCP, or UDP, you must configure additional parameters. Table 112-6 lists the parameter options.
Table 112-6 Protocol parameter
Options ALL HOPOPT ICMP IGMP GGP IP ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX DCN_MEAS HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 (1 of 2) SEP 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IPv6Route IPv6Frag IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA ESP AH I_NLSP SWIPE NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_No Nxt IPPC any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP TCF EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IFMP PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI SMP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP
112-8
May 2009
Options LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 NETBLT MFE_NSP MERIT_INP (2 of 2) IPv6_Opts any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN RVD IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) GMTP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE SCTP FC RSVP_E2E_IGNORE
Remark Dot1p (remarkDot1p)

The Remark Dot1p parameter specifies the remark Dot1p value as match criterion when remarking is applied. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is Forward. When enabled, the range is 0 to 7, or Not Set (-1). The default is Not Set (-1).
Remark DSCP (remarkDscp)

The Remark DSCP parameter specifies the remark DSCP value as match criteria when remarking is applied. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is Forward. When enabled, the range is 0 to 255, or Not Set. The default is Not Set.
Remark DSCP Mask (remarkDscpMask)

The Remark DSCP Mask parameter specifies the remark DSCP mask value as match criteria when remarking is applied. The parameter is configurable when the Action parameter is Forward. The range is 0 to 255, or Not Set. The default is 255.
Source IP (sourceIpAddress)
The Source IP parameter, combined with the Src Mask parameter, specifies a destination IP address range as match criterion. When enabled, specify an IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2)

The Source Port parameter specifies the source port as match criterion for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is TCP or UDP. Table 112-7 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
112-9
112 ACL IP Filter parameters Table 112-7 Source Port parameter

Option NONE (default) EQUAL RANGE LESS_THAN GREATER_THAN Option description No match criterion is specified. Match the value specified in the first field. The second field is not accessible. The range is 0 to 65 535. Match the range configured in the first and second fields. The range is 0 to 65 535. Match a value less than that specified. Enter a value in the first field. The second field is not accessible. The range is 0 to 65 535. Match a value greater than that specified. Enter a value in the first field. The second field is not accessible. The range is 0 to 65 535. Dependencies
Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)

The Src Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion in combination with the Source IP parameter value. This parameter is configurable when the Source IP parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
Synchronize
TCP Ack (tcpAck)

The TCP Ack parameter specifies whether a match occurs for a packet that contains a cumulative acknowledgement, but no data. ACK filtering uses TCP data-driven loss recovery mechanisms. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is TCP. Table 112-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 112-8 TCP Ack parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains a cumulative acknowledgement, but no data. Matches when a packet contains a cumulative acknowledgement, but no data. Dependencies
TCP Syn (tcpSyn)

The TCP Syn parameter specifies whether a match occurs for a packet that contains a cumulative acknowledgement, and also may contain data. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter is TCP. Table 112-9 describes the parameter options.
112 ACL IP Filter parameters Table 112-9 TCP Syn parameter

Option off (default) false Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains a cumulative acknowledgement, and also may contain data. Matches when a packet contains a cumulative acknowledgement, and also may contain data. Dependencies
true
VC ID
See VC ID (fwdSdpBindVcId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
112-11
112-12
May 2009
113 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters
113.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters
113-2
May 2009
113-1
113.1
7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesFilter7250 SAS and Telco ACL Standard IP Filter.
Action (defaultAction)
The Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with a packet when the specified match criteria are met. Table 113-1 describes the parameter options.
Option Deny (default) Permit Option description Discard the packet. Forward the packet.
Description
Displayed Name
Filter ID (id)
The Filter ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter. The range is 1 to 99. The default is 0.
Loggable
See Loggable (loggable) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
The Source IP parameter is combined with the Src Mask parameter to specify a source IP address range as a match criterion. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Src Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion along with the Source IP parameter value. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
113-2
May 2009
VLAN Priority Tag

See VLAN Priority Tag (vpt) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
113-3
113-4
May 2009
114 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters
114.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters
114-2
May 2009
114-1
114.1
7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesFilter7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter.
The Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with a packet when the specified match criteria are met. Table 114-1 describes the parameter options.
Description
Dest Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Dest Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion along with the Destination IP parameter value. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
The Destination IP parameter is combined with the Dest Mask parameter to specify a destination IP address range as a match criterion. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Displayed Name
Filter ID (id)
Loggable
114-2
May 2009
Precedence (precedence)
The Precedence parameter specifies the IP precedence value to be used as a match criterion for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the check box is selected. The options are:
None (default) Routine Priority Immediate Flash
Flash Override Critical Internet Network
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies an IP protocol as a match criterion for the filter. When you specify ICMP, TCP, or UDP, you must configure additional parameters. Table 114-2 lists the parameter options.
Options ALL HOPOPT ICMP IGMP GGP IP (default) ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX (1 of 2) SEP 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IPv6Route IPv6Frag IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA ESP AH I_NLSP IPPC any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP IFMP PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI
May 2009
114-3
Options DCN_MEAS HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 NETBLT MFE_NSP MERIT_INP (2 of 2) SWIPE NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_No Nxt IPv6_Opts any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN RVD TCF EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) GMTP SMP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE SCTP FC RSVP_E2E_IGNORE
The Source IP parameter is combined with the Src Mask parameter to specify a source IP address range as a match criterion. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Src Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion along with the Source IP parameter value. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
TOS (tos)
The TOS parameter specifies the IP TOS value as a match criterion for the filter. The parameter is configurable when the check box is selected. The options are:
None (default) Normal Minimum Monetary Cost Maximum Reliability TOS 3 Maximum Throughput TOS 5 TOS 6 TOS 7
Minimum Delay TOS 9 TOS 10 TOS 11 TOS 12 TOS 13 TOS 14 TOS 15
114-4
May 2009
VLAN Priority Tag (vpt)

See VLAN Priority Tag (vpt) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
114-5
114-6
May 2009
115.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter parameters
115-2
May 2009
115-1
115.1
7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesFilter7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with a packet when the criterion specified in the IGMP filter are met. Table 115-1 describes the parameter options.
Option Deny (default) Permit Option description Do not allow any traffic that matches the filter criterion. Allow traffic that matches the filter criterion. Dependencies
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Dest Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Dest Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified destination IP address in the IGMP filter. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
The Destination IP parameter, combined with the Dest Mask parameter, specifies a destination IP address range as match criterion for the IGMP filter. When used as a match criterion, specify an IP address and mask value. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Displayed Name
Distribute
115-2
May 2009
Filter ID (id)
The Filter ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the ACL IGMP Filter object. The range is 300 to 399. There is no default.
IGMP Option (igmpOption)

The IGMP Option parameter specifies the type of IGMP filter to use to manage how subscribers access multicast broadcast TV streams. You can configure the parameter when the check box is enabled. The default is None. The options are:
Membership Query (017) Membership Report (018) Membership Report v2 (022) Leave Group v2 (023) Membership Report v3 (034)
When you create a 7250 SAS and Telco IGMP ACL filter policy from a multicast package policy, the parameter is set to the same value as the parameter on the mutlicast package policy configuration form.
Loggable (loggable)
The Loggable parameter specifies whether to generate logging information about IGMP filtering. The options are:
None (default) Log Log Input

When you create a 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP filter policy from a multicast package policy, the parameter is set to the same value as the parameter on the multicast package policy configuration form.
Name (packagePolicyPointer)
The Name parameter specifies the name of an IGMP multicast package. Click on the Select button to choose a name from the list of multicast packages.
The Source IP parameter, combined with the Src Mask parameter, specifies a destination IP address range as match criterion for the IGMP filter. When used as a match criterion, specify an IP address and mask value. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Src Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion in combination with the Source IP parameter value. This parameter is configurable when the Source IP parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 32.
Synchronize
115-4
May 2009
116.1 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter parameters
116-2
May 2009
116-1
116.1
7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesFilter7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with the packet when the specified match criteria are met. Table 116-1 describes the parameter options.
Description

The Destination MAC parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC address value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Displayed Name

The Dst Mask parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC mask value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion when you filter on a destination MAC address. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Filter ID (id)
116-2
May 2009
Loggable
Pattern (pattern)
The Pattern parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC address value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The parameter is configurable when the check box is selected.
Pattern Mask (patternMask)

The Pattern Mask parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC mask value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The parameter is configurable when the check box is selected.

The Source MAC parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC address value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.

The Src Mask parameter specifies a hexadecimal MAC mask value in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx as a match criterion when you filter on a destination MAC address. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
May 2009
116-3
116-4
May 2009
117.1 Multicast Package parameters
117-2
May 2009
117-1
117.1
Multicast Package parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Multicast Package Policy form and its child forms.
Channel (channel)
The Channel parameter specifies an association between a multicast IP address used to deliver broadcast TV and the channel the subscriber uses to view the content from that multicast IP address. The range is 0 to 10 characters.
Cost (cost)
The Cost parameter specifies an price association between a multicast IP address used to deliver broadcast TV and the price that the subscriber must pay to view the content from that multicast IP address. The parameter is for information only. The range is 0 to 15 characters.
Description
Distribute
See Distribute (distribute) in section 133.1 for the parameter description. You can only distribute when the Is Root Catalogue parameter is set to root.
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 99. The default is 0.
IGMP Option (igmpOption)

The IGMP Option parameter specifies the type of IGMP filter to use to manage how subscribers access multicast broadcast TV streams. The options are:
None (default) Membership Query (017) Membership Report (018) Membership Report v2 (022) Leave Group v2 (023) Membership Report v3 (034)
117-2
May 2009
Is Root Catalogue (mainChannelCatalogue)

The Is Root Catalogue parameter specifies that a multicast package policy is a master or root of all the multicast channels. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, you can associate the multicast package policy with a ring group with multicast VLAN registration enabled by distributing the policy to devices or ring groups. When the parameter is enabled, you can also distribute the policy to all 7450 ESS devices in a multicast VPLS to assign a common set of multicast groups.
Loggable
Multicast Address (address)

The Multicast Address parameter specifies the IP address for the multicast stream. There is no default. The range is a valid multicast IP address in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Note Multicast addresses are distributed to ring groups when a
Multicast Package is associated with the ring group. All 7250 SAS and Telco devices in the ring group will receive the multicast broadcast TV streams. Use IGMP access control list policies to ensure that subscribers are limited to the broadcast channels paid for.
Name
See Name (displayedName) in section 133.1 for the parameter description. Use the Name parameter to create an operations-friendly name to associated the Multicast Address parameter. For example, if a Multicast IP address is associated with a pay per view channel that distributes spy movies, you could set the Name parameter to pay per view spy movies.
May 2009
117-3
117-4
May 2009
118.1 Egress Multicast Group parameters
118-2
May 2009
118-1
118.1
Egress Multicast Group parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Egress Multicast Group form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesMulticastEgress Multicast Group.
Description
Destination Chain Limit (chainLimit)

The Destination Chain Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of destination SAPs that are permitted on an EMG. The range is 1 to 30. The optimal length is 10 to 16. The default is 16.
Displayed Name
Dot1 Q Ethertype (dot1qEtype)

The Dot1 Q Ethertype parameter specifies the Ethertype expected when the Encapsulation Type parameter is set to Dot1 Q. The range is 1536 to 65 535 (0x0000 to 0xffff). The default is (0x8100) 33 024.
Encapsulation Type (encapType)

The Encapsulation Type parameter specifies the type of encapsulation that is shared by all members of the Egress Multicast Group. The encapsulation type must be the same for all the members of the chain associated with a service. The options are:
Null (default) Dot1 Q
118-2
May 2009
119.1 Multicast CAC parameters
119-2
May 2009
119-1
119.1
Multicast CAC parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Multicast CAC form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesMulticastMulticast CAC.
Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth)

The Bandwidth (kbps) parameter specifies the bandwidth for the object. The range depends on the type of object being configured. Table 119-1 lists the Bandwidth parameter ranges for different policy object types.
Table 119-1 Bandwidth (kbps) parameter
Object Channel Bundle Level Range (characters) 10 to 20 000 1 (default) to 4 294 967 295
Class (channelClass)
The Class parameter specifies the multicast ingress throughput limitation. The options are:
Low (default) High Default Action (defaultAction)

The Default Action parameter specifies the action to be applied to multicast streams (channels) when the streams do not match any of the multicast addresses defined in the multicast CAC policy. The options are:
Accept Discard (default) Description

119-2
May 2009

The End Address parameter specifies the end address of a BTV channel range. Specify an IPv4 multicast address in dotted decimal format. If only one channel is specified for the range, the address specified for the start address will also be used for the end address.
Max Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth)

The Max Bandwidth (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum bandwidth allowed for channels in a bundle. The range is 1 to 4 294 967 295 kbps. The default is 100 kbps.
Name

The Start Address parameter specifies the start address of a BTV channel range. Specify an IPv4 multicast address in dotted decimal format.
Type (channelType)
The Type parameter specifies if the multicast channel is mandatory or optional. The options are:
Not Mandatory (default) Mandatory

If the channel is configured as mandatory, the bandwidth is reserved in the bundle and on all potential interfaces to guarantee the channel request is accepted. If the channel is configured as Not Mandatory, the channel request will be accepted only if the bandwidth of the bundle and the interface are available.
May 2009
119-3
119-4
May 2009
120.1 Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters
120-2
May 2009
120-1
120.1
Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Ingress Path Management Policies form and its child forms. The 5620 SAM menu path is PoliciesMulticastIngress Multicast Path Management.
Admin BW Use Threshold (kbps) (adminBwUseThreshold)

The Admin BW Use Threshold parameter specifies the bandwidth rate at which a multicast channel configured to use an administrative rate will start and stop using that rate as the in-use ingress bandwidth when managing ingress multicast paths. The range is from 1 to 40 000 000 kbps. The default is 10.
Admin State (ingrPathMgmtAdminState)

The Admin State parameter specifies the administrative state of multicast path management on the MDA (IOM or IOM 2) or the forwarding plane of an IOM 3 or IMM. The options are:
Down (default) Up Administrative BW (kbps)

The Administrative BW parameter specifies the multicast channel's administrative bandwidth in kilo-bits per second. The range is from 0 to 40,000,000 kbps. The default is 0. The XML property name for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-1.
Table 120-1 Administrative BW (kbps) parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultAdminBw adminBw adminBw
Ancillary Path Limit (mbps) (ancillaryPathLimit)

The Ancillary Path Limit parameter specifies the override for the ancillary path limit of the bandwidth policy for the MDA. Units are in megabits per second. The value zero, means unspecified. Maximum supported value is 5000 mbps. The default is 0.
120-2
May 2009
Black Hole Rate (kbps)

The Black Hole Rate parameter specifies at which current rate a channel (including channels within a channel range or bundle) should be placed in the black-hole state (packets are dropped). This value can only be set when BW Decision parameter is set to Dynamic. The range is 0 to 40 000 000. The default is 0, which means never. The XML property name for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-2.
Table 120-2 Black Hole Rate (kbps) parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultBlackHoleRate blackHoleRate blackHoleRate
BW Decision
The BW Decision parameter specifies how the multicast ingress path manager determines the amount of bandwidth required by a multicast channel, including channels within a channel range or bundle. The XML property name and default value for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-3.
Table 120-3 BW Decision parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultBwDecision bwDecision bwDecision Default value Dynamic unspecified unspecified
BW Policy Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer)

The BW Policy Name parameter specifies the multicast bandwidth policy name configured on the MDA or forwarding plane. Note that a multicast bandwidth policy named "default" exists and cannot be modified or deleted. The BW Policy Name parameter can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Committed Buffer Space (%) (cbs)

The Committed Buffer Space parameter specifies the path CBS (queue length/depth) as a percentage of the total buffer pool. The range is 0 to 100. The default percentages for the primary, secondary and ancillary path are 5%, 30%, and 65% respectively.
This parameter is configurable for T1 and T2 paths. The T2 path values are used for nodes that use an IOM 3 or IMM. The T1 values are used for all other IOM types.
Congestion Priority Threshold (congestPriorityThreshold)

The Congestion Priority Threshold parameter specifies the preference level at which a multicast record changes from low congestion priority to high congestion priority. Allowed escalating values are 0 to 7. The default is 4.
Description

ECMP Optimization Threshold (ecmpOptimizationThreshold)

The ECMP Optimization Threshold parameter specifies the preference level at which the ECMP path manager is allowed to optimize channels. Channels with a preference level below the set threshold are considered for optimization. Allowed values are 0 to 7. The default is 7.

The End Address parameter indicates the ending address (in IPv4, IPv6, or DNS format) of the multicast channel range. It should always be greater than or equal to the Start Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Explicit Path
The Explicit Path parameter specifies an explicit ingress switch fabric multicast path (Primary, Secondary, Ancillary) for the channels (including those in a range or a bundle). If the parameter is not set, the Multicast Path Manager will dynamically place channels on the most optimal switch fabric paths. The default is unspecified. The XML property name for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-4.
Table 120-4 Explicit Path parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultExplicitPath explicitPath explicitPath
120-4
May 2009
Falling Delay (seconds)

The Falling Delay parameter specifies the value the bandwidth manager uses as a threshold to hold on to the previous highest bandwidth until the delay time has expired, while operating in dynamic bandwidth mode. This allows the bandwidth manager to ignore momentary drops in channel bandwidth. This value can only be set if BW Decision is set to Dynamic. A value of 0 specifies that a non-zero value of the parent is applied. The XML property name for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-5.
Table 120-5 Falling Delay (seconds) parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultFallingDelay fallingDelay fallingDelay Default value 30 0 0 Range 10 to 3600s 0 | 10 to 3600 0 | 10 to 3600 Parent Channel bundle Channel bundle Channel range
Falling Percent Reset (%) (fallingPercentReset)

The Falling Percent Reset parameter specifies the percentage of bandwidth decrease that must occur to reset the dynamic bandwidth monitoring function for a multicast channel. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 100.
High Bandwidth Alarm (mCastAlarm)

The High Bandwidth Alarm parameter applies to an MDA or a forwarding plane (IOM3 and IMM). Table 120-6 describes the meaning of the parameter for each application. The options are:
True (default) False

Table 120-6 High Bandwidth Alarm parameter
Parameter application MDA Forwarding plane Description Specifies whether an alarm is raised if there is more than one high bandwidth multicast traffic tap sharing a queue. Specifies whether if an alarm is raised if there are more than one high bandwidth multicast traffic tap sharing a forwarding plane.
May 2009
120-5
High Bandwidth Multicast Traffic Taps Group (mCastGroup)

The High Bandwidth Multicast Traffic Taps Group parameter specifies the group of high bandwidth multicast traffic taps to which a tap belongs. This parameter is not valid unless the High Bandwidth Source (mCastSource) parameter is enabled. A value of 0 specifies that this tap is not a member of any High Bandwidth Multicast Group. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
High Bandwidth Source (mCastSource)

The High Bandwidth Source parameter applies to an MDA or a forwarding plane (IOM3 or IMM). Table 120-7 describes the meaning of the parameter for each application. The options are:

Table 120-7 High Bandwidth Source parameter
Parameter application MDA Forwarding plane Description Specifies if this MDA should attempt to use separate queues when allocating high bandwidth multicast traffic taps. Specifies whether the forwarding plane should attempt to allocate separate fabric planes to high bandwidth multicast traffic taps.
High Priority Traffic (%) (highPriority)

The High Priority Traffic parameter specifies a percentage of the queue depth reserved for high congestion priority traffic. The range is 0 to 100. The default percentages for the three paths is 10% each. This parameter is configurable for T1 and T2 paths. The T2 path values are for nodes that use an IOM 3 or IMM. The T1 values are used for all other IOM types.
Maximum Buffer Space (%) (mbs)

The Maximum Buffer Space parameter specifies the paths committed buffer size (queue length/depth) as a percentage of the total buffer pool. The default percentages for the primary, secondary and ancillary path are 5%, 30%, and 65% respectively. This parameter is configurable for T1 and T2 paths. The T2 path values are used for nodes that use an IOM 3 or IMM. The T1 values are used for all other IOM types.
Name (bundleName)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the multicast information policy bundle. Note that a multicast information policy bundle named "default" exists on the node; it cannot be modified or deleted. The Name parameter can have a maximum of 32 characters.
120-6
May 2009
Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the multicast bandwidth policy configured on the MDA. Note that a multicast bandwidth policy named "default" exists and cannot be modified or deleted. The Name parameter can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Name (ingrPathMgmtPolicyPointer)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the multicast information policy configured on the VPLS, VPRN site, or the default routing instance. Note that a multicast information policy named "default" exists on the node and it cannot be modified or deleted. The Name parameter can have a maximum of 32 characters.
Note You cannot use the : symbol in the policy name. The
5620 SAM uses colons as separators for the object full name.
Number of Secondary T2 Paths (numberOfSeondaryT2Paths)

The Number of Secondary T2 Paths parameter specifies how many paths are configured as T2 secondary paths. Paths that are not configured as T2 secondary paths are configured as primary paths. The range is 1 to 15. The default is 1.
Path Limit (mbps) (pathLimit)

The Path Limit parameter overrides the default path limit for each of the three ingress multicast paths into the switch fabric. The minimum is 1. The maximum value for the primary and secondary paths is 2000, and for the ancillary path is 5000. The default value for the primary path is 2000, for the secondary path is 1500, and for the ancillary path is 5000.
Percentage of Total pool (%) (mcastBufferPoolPercentage)

The Percentage of Total pool parameter specifies how much of the total ingress buffer pool space for the MDA is dedicated for multicast channels managed by the bandwidth policy. The range is 1 to 50. The default is 10.
Preference Level
The Preference Level parameter specifies the relative preference level for multicast channels. The preference of a channel (including those in a bundle or range) specifies its relative importance over other multicast channels. Eight levels of preference are supported: 0 through 7. Preference value 7 indicates the highest preference level. The XML property name and default value for this parameter will vary depending on where it is set, namely at the bundle, channel range, or channel override level. The variations are shown in Table 120-8.
May 2009
120-7
120 Ingress Multicast Path Management parameters Table 120-8 Preference Level parameter variations
Parameter configuration level Channel bundle Channel range Channel override XML property name defaultPrefLevel prefLevel prefLevel Default value 7 0 0
Primary Path Limit (mbps) (primaryPathLimit)

The Primary Path Limit parameter specifies the override for primary path limit of the bandwidth policy for the MDA. Units are in megabits per second. The value zero, means unspecified. Maximum supported value is 2000 mbps. The default is 0.
Reserved CBS (%) (mcastBufferPoolResvCbsPercentage)

The Reserved (CBS) parameter specifies the percentage of the pool that will be reserved for multicast path queues within their Committed Buffer Size threshold. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 50.
Secondary Path Limit (mbps) (secondaryPathLimit)

The Secondary Path Limit parameter specifies the override for the secondary path limit of the bandwidth policy for the MDA. Units are in megabits per second. The value zero, means unspecified. Maximum supported value is 2000 mbps. The default is 0.
Source Address (srcAddress)

The Source Address parameter indicates the address of an explicit multicast channel for which you want to specify overrides. The channels IP address should fall within the containing range of the Channel Range and must be of the same IP address type (in IPv4, IPv6, or DNS format) as the range. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Start Address parameter indicates the starting address (in IPv4, IPv6, or DNS format) of the multicast channel range. It should always be less than or equal to the End Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
120-8
May 2009
121.1 Time of Day parameters
121-2
May 2009
121-1
121.1
Time of Day parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Time Range and Time of Day Suite forms and child forms.
End Run Day (frequencySettingTo)

The End Run Day parameter specifies the end day of a time range when the Frequency parameter is set to Weekly. The default is Sunday. The End Run Day parameter is configurable when the Ongoing parameter is enabled.
End Time (endDate)

The End Time parameter specifies the end date and time of the time range entry. You can use the up and down arrows to change the year, month, day, hour, or minute, or use the calendar icon to set the date. The default value is the current system time of the 5620 SAM server. When the Ongoing parameter is disabled, the format is YYYY/MM/dd HH:mm. When the Ongoing parameter is enabled, the format is HH:mm.
Frequency (frequency)
The Frequency parameter specifies how often the schedule operates. The options are:
Daily (default) Weekdays Weekend Weekly
The Frequency parameter is configurable when the Ongoing parameter enabled.
Name
The Name parameter specifies a name for the created time range policy or time of day suite policy. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Ongoing (onGoing)
The Ongoing parameter specifies whether a schedule has an end time. When the parameter is enabled, the schedule operates indefinitely. The options are:
121-2
May 2009
Priority
The Priority parameter specifies the priority of the time of day suite entry. If there are overlapping time range entries within a time of day suite entry, the time range entry with the highest priority is run first. The range is 1 to 10, where 1 is the highest priority, and 10 is the lowest. The default is 5. The Priority parameter value must be unique within a same policy type.
Start Run Day (frequencySettingFrom)

The Start Run Day parameter specifies the start day of a time range when the Frequency parameter is set to Weekly. The default is Sunday. The Start Run Day parameter is configurable when the Ongoing parameter is enabled.
Start Time (startDate)

The Start Time parameter specifies the start date and time of the time range entry. You can use the up and down arrows to change the year, month, day, hour, or minute, or use the calendar icon to set the date. The default value is the current system time of the 5620 SAM server. When the Ongoing parameter is disabled, the format is YYYY/MM/dd HH:mm. When the Ongoing parameter is enabled, the format is HH:mm. When the parameter value is greater than the current date and time, no tasks are run until the scheduled start time is reached.
May 2009
121-3
121-4
May 2009
122.1 Ethernet Services Policies parameters
122-2
May 2009
122-1
122.1
Ethernet Services Policies parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Ethernet Services Policies menu forms.
Bandwidth Sharing (bandwidthSharing)

The Bandwidth Sharing parameter specifies how bandwidth is shared on multiple ports of a SAP. The Bandwidth Sharing parameter is ignored if the Ingress Bandwidth (Mb) (IngressBW) parameter is set to 0. Table 122-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 122-1 Bandwidth Sharing parameter
Option Enabled Disabled Option description All ports that are part of the SAP use aggregated bandwidth, sharing some part of the bandwidth limit. Each port assigns some part of its bandwidth to the SAP.
CVLAN Treatment (cVlanTreatment)

The CVLAN Treatment parameter specifies the type of VLAN stacking operation to be performed on a customer frame entering this service. Table 122-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 122-2 CVLAN Treatment parameter
Option Stack SVLAN Translate Option description The SVLAN tag will be pre-pended to the frame before any existing 802.1Q tag. The existing 802.1Q tag will be replaced by the SVLAN tag.
See Description (description) in section Common Policies menu parameters for the parameter description.

See Displayed Name (displayedName) in section Common Policies menu parameters for the parameter description.
GVRP (gvrpTreatment)
The GVRP parameter specifies how the bridge handles GVRP PDUs on a UNI. Table 122-3 describes the options for this parameter.
122 Ethernet Services Policies parameters Table 122-3 GVRP parameter

Option Tunnel Drop Option description The PDUs are allowed to tunnel across the provider network. The PDUs are discarded and do not enter the provider network.
Ingress Bandwidth (Mb) (IngressBW)

The Ingress Bandwidth parameter specifies the ingress bandwidth limit, in megabits, for traffic to which this profile is applied. A value of 0 indicates that there is no bandwidth limit. The default is 0.
Priority (fixedPriority)
The Priority parameter specifies the value of the priority field of the 802.1q SVLAN tag pre-pended to customer data frames when the fixed priority mapping mode is selected. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Priority Mapping (priorityMapMode)

The Priority Mapping parameter specifies the source of the value used to populate the priority field of the SVLAN 802.1q tag when the tag is pre-pended to the customer data frame. Table 122-4 describes the options for this parameter.
Table 122-4 Priority Mapping parameter
Option Fixed Map Inner Pt to Outer P Bit Map Inner DSCP to Outer P Bit Option description Uses the value of the Priority (fixedPriority) parameter entered by the user. Uses the priority field value of an incoming tagged frame to fill in the priority field of the SVLAN tag. Uses the priority value of the DSCP field of an incoming tagged frame to fill in the priority field of the SVLAN tag.
STP (stpBpduTreatment)
The STP parameter specifies how the bridge handles STP BPDUs on a UNI. Table 122-5 describes the options for this parameter.
Table 122-5 STP parameter
Option Tunnel Drop Option description The BPDUs are allowed to tunnel across the provider network. The BPDUs are discarded and do not enter the provider network.
May 2009
122-3
122-4
May 2009
123.1 Routing parameters
123-2
May 2009
123-1
123.1
Routing parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Routing Policy Manager form and its child forms.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies what action, if any, should be taken for routes that match a specific routing policy statement entry. There can be one action for each routing policy statement. Table 123-1 describes the parameter options.
Option None (default) Option description No action is defined for the route. The Default Action parameter value is executed. If Default Action parameter is not configured, then the routing protocol default or the route configuration determines the action performed on the route, instead of the routing policy. Accept Routes that match the statement entry criteria are accepted and propagated based on the configurations set for the routing policy statement entry. Routes that match the statement entry criteria are rejected and not propagated based on the configurations set for the routing policy statement entry. Policy evaluation continues with the next policy entry within the same routing policy statement entry. Policy evaluation continues with the next routing policy statement following the current routing policy statement. You must configure an additional routing policy for import or export of routes using the Prefix List 1 parameter and subsequent Prefix List parameters. Dependencies
Reject
Next Entry Next Policy
Advertised Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf)

The Advertised Next Hop Self parameter specifies whether to advertise a next-hop IP address even if a third-party next hop is available to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR. The options are:

When the parameter is set to false, you can configure the Use Next Hop parameter. You cannot configure the parameter when the Use Next Hop parameter is enabled.
123-2
May 2009
All Instances (isAllInstances)

The All Instances parameter specifies that all OSPF route instances are announced neighboring nodes. The options are:

You can configure the All Instances parameter when the Protocol (protocol) parameter is set to OSPF.
BGP AS Path Name (asPathName)

The AS Path Name parameter specifies the name that references an AS path regular expression statement that is used as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. The AS path name must already be created using the Path Name parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR.
Begin Length (beginLength)

The Begin Length parameter specifies the prefix list matching criteria for the mask value of the IP address. The parameter value is greater than or equal to the value for the Mask parameter. You can configure the parameter when the Type parameter is set to Range. The parameter is configurable on 7750 SRs. The range is the Mask parameter value to 32. The default is 0.
BGP AS Path Action (pathAction)

The BGP AS Path Action parameter specifies what action to take for BGP AS path routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR. Table 123-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-2 BGP AS Path Action parameter
Option None (default) Option description No action is defined for the route. The Default Action parameter value is used. If the Default Action parameter is not configured, the routing protocol defaults or the route configuration determines the action performed on the route, instead of the routing policy. Add Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have a new AS regular expression path list appended to the existing AS path list for the route. Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have their AS regular expression path list removed. Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have the new AS regular expression path list replace the existing AS path list for the route. The action specified is performed. You can configure the BGP AS Path Name parameter to specify the AS path name, as configured using the AS Path Name parameter. The AS Path Name references the AS regular expression list. Dependencies
Remove Replace
May 2009
123-3
BGP AS Prepend number (prependAs)

The BGP AS Prepend number parameter specifies the AS number that is added to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR and the Prepend Count parameter is set to 1 or higher. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0. Use the BGP AS Prepend number and Prepend Count parameters to specify the AS number and the number of times that the AS numbers are added to the AS path attributes of routes.
BGP Local Preference (localPreference)

The BGP Local Preference parameter specifies a metric value modifier that is applied to BGP routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR and the Local Preference Set parameter is set to true. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Community Action 1 (communityAction1)

The Community Action 1 parameter specifies what action, if any, should be taken for BGP community describes for routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR. Table 123-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-3 Community Action 1 parameter
Option None (default) Add Option description No action is defined for the BGP community list. Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have the specified BGP community list added to any existing list for the route. Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have the specified BGP community list removed from any existing list for the route. Routes that match the routing policy statement entry have the specified BGP community list replace the existing list for the route. Dependencies The community path setting for matching routes is not modified. The action specified is performed. You can configure the Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 parameters to specify the BGP community list to be used. An existing community list must be configured using the Community List Name parameter.
Remove
Replace
Community Action 2 (communityAction2)

See Community Action 1 (communityAction1) in this section for the parameter description. The Community Action 2 parameter is not configurable when the Community Action 1 parameter is set to None.
123-4
May 2009
Community List Name (communityName)

The Community List Name parameter specifies the community name used as a match criterion for the routing policy statement entry. The name must have been created using the Community Name parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR.
Community Member (member)

The Community Member parameter specifies the community ID of the community member. The range is 1 to 72.
Community Member (members)

The Community Member parameter specifies the community ID of the community member. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option on 7750 SRs. The range is 1 to 256 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotation marks. Double quotation marks are used to delimit the start and end of a string that contains spaces.
Community Name (communityName)

The Community Name parameter specifies the route policy community list to use in routing policy entries. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotation marks. Double quotation marks are used to delimit the start and end of a string that contains spaces. You must configure at least one community member using the Community Member parameter. The parameter defines the name of a community list. Community lists are composed of a group of route destinations that share a common property. A community list allows you to perform actions on a community rather than on each member of the community.
Community Name 1 (communityName1)

The Community Name 1 parameter specifies the BGP community list to use for the action specified by the Community Action 1 parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR and the Community Action 1 parameter is set to an option other than None. The name must have been created using the Community List Name parameter.
Community Name 2 (communityName2)

See Community Name 1 (communityName1) in this section for the parameter description.
The Community Name 2 parameter is not configurable when the Community Action 1 parameter is set to None and the Community Action 2 parameter is set to None.
Damping Name (dampingName)

The Damping Name parameter specifies the damping name for the route damping profile. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 32 characters long. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotation marks. Double quotation marks are used to delimit the start and end of a string that contain spaces. Route damping controls route flap. Route flapping occurs when an advertised route between devices alternates between two paths due to network problems.
Damping Profile Name (damping)

The Damping Profile Name parameter specifies the damping profile to be assigned to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The name must already be created using the Damping Name parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR.

The Default Action parameter specifies what action, if any, should be taken for routes that do not match a specific routing policy statement entry. Table 123-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-4 Default Action parameter
Option None (default) Option description No action is defined for the route. The routing protocol defaults or route configuration settings are used to determine the action performed on the route, instead of the routing policy. Accept Reject Next Entry Routes that match are accepted and propagated. Routes that match are rejected and not propagated. Policy evaluation continues with the next policy statement entry within the same routing policy statement. Policy evaluation continues with the next routing policy following the current routing policy. Dependencies
Next Policy
Description
123-6
May 2009

Entry ID (entryId)
The Entry ID parameter specifies the unique instance of a routing policy statement entry within a routing policy statement. Table 123-5 lists the ranges for different device types and versions. There is no default.
Table 123-5 Entry ID parameter
Device 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and 7710 SR, Release 5.0 or later 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and 7710 SR, Release 4.0 Telco, all versions Range 1 to 4 294 967 295 1 to 65 535 1 to 65 535
Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you stagger the incremental value of the parameter, for example, set the parameter to 10 for the first routing policy entry, 20 for the second routing policy entry, and so on. This allows for the insertion of new routing policy entries without renumbering the entire set. Routing policy entries are compared against incoming packets. When a match is found, the action specified using the Action parameter occurs. If no action is specified, the action specified using the Default Action parameter occurs. If no action is specified, the default action for the protocol or the route configuration occurs. For this reason, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you sequence the routing policy entries to ensure the first entry is the most explicit and the last entry is the least explicit.
Half Life (halfLife)

The Half Life parameter specifies the time required for a route to remain stable in order for the figure of merit value to be reduced by one half. The range is 0 to 45 min. The default is 0 min. The figure of merit value is a value added to a route each time that the route flaps. For example, if the Half Life parameter is set to 6, and the route remains stable for 6 min. the new figure of merit value is 3 min. After another 3 min. pass and the route remains stable, the new figure of merit value is 1.5 min. When the figure of merit value is less than the Reuse parameter value, the route is considered valid and can be reused or included in route advertisements.
IGMP Host Prefix List Name (igmpHostPrefixList)

The IGMP Host Prefix List Name parameter specifies the name of the prefix list that is used as a match criterion for the IGMP host IP address. The value of the object is an empty string if it has not been set. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
May 2009
123-7
Instance ID (instanceIndex)
The Instance ID parameter specifies an OSPF route instance. The parameter can be used to identify routes installed by that instance and advertised to neighboring nodes. If you do not specify an instance ID, only routes installed by the base routing instance are advertised to neighboring nodes. You can configure the Instance ID parameter when the Protocol (protocol) parameter is set to OSPF. The range is 0 to 31. The default is 0.
ISIS External Route (isisEnabled)

The ISIS External Route parameter specifies whether IS-IS external routes are used as a match criterion for the routing policy statement entry. Table 123-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-6 ISIS External Route parameter
Option true Option description IS-IS external routes are used as match criteria. Dependencies Both external and internal routes as specified by the ISIS Route Level parameter are considered as match criterion.
false (default)
IS-IS external routes are not used as match criteria.
IS-IS external routes have a higher preference cost than IS-IS internal routes.
ISIS Route Level (isisRoutes)

The ISIS Route Level parameter specifies the IS-IS route level to use as a match criterion for the routing policy statement entry. Table 123-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-7 ISIS Route Level parameter
Option 0 (default) 1 2 Option description IS-IS is not used as a match criterion. IS-IS level 1 routes are used as a match criterion. IS-IS level 2 routes are used as a match criterion. Dependencies
123-8
May 2009
Local Preference Set (localPreferenceSet)

The Local Preference Set parameter specifies whether to allow the assignment of a BGP local preference value to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option. The options are:

You can configure the BGP Local Preference parameter when the parameter is set to the true option.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask for the IP address in the prefix list entry. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 32.
Max Suppression (maxSuppression)

The Max Suppression parameter specifies the maximum time that a route can remain suppressed after the figure of merit value for the route is exceeded. The range is 0 to 720 min. The default is 0 min, indicating suppression is disabled. A route is considered valid or suppressed based on the Suppress and Reuse parameters.
Metric Action (metricAction)

The Metric Action parameter specifies the metric action performed on routes that match the routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option. Table 123-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-8 Metric Action parameter
Option None (default) Add Subtract Set Option description No metric action is performed on matching routes. Add the metric value defined in the Metric Value parameter to the route metric value. Subtract the metric value defined in the Metric Value parameter from the route metric value. Replace the existing metric value of the route with the metric value defined in the Metric Value parameter. Dependencies
May 2009
123-9
Metric Value (metricValue)

The Metric Value parameter specifies a metric value modifier that is added to, subtracted from, or replaces the metric value for routes that meet a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option and the Metric Action parameter is set to an option other than None. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Multicast Group Prefix List Name (mcastGroupPrefixList)

The Multicast Group Prefix List Name parameter specifies the name of the prefix list that is used as a match criterion for the multicast group address. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Multicast Source IP Address (mcastSourceIpAddress)

The Multicast Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the multicast source router. This parameter is used by multicast protocols such as PIM and IGMP. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the IP address is unconfigured.
Neighbor IP Address (neighborIpAddress)

The Neighbor IP Address parameter specifies the neighbor IP address that is used as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the IP address is unconfigured.
Neighbor Prefix List (neighborPrefixList)

The Neighbor Prefix List parameter specifies the neighbor prefix list name that is used as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. The name must already be created using the Prefix List Name parameter. Specify an name of up to 32 characters.
Next Hop (nextHop)

The Next Hop parameter specifies the assignment of the IP address of the next hop for routes that match the routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy on the 7750 SR and the Use Next Hop parameter is enabled. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
123-10
May 2009
Next Hop Type (nextHopType)

The Next Hop Type parameter specifies the type of next hop. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Policy, or Next Entry. The options are:
IPv4 (default) IPv6 Origin (origin)

The Origin parameter specifies the type of BGP route that is considered as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable on the 7750 SR. Table 123-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-9 Origin parameter
Option None (default) IGP EGP Incomplete Option description BGP routes are not used as a match criterion. Only IGP BGP routes that originate within the AS are used as a match criterion. Only EGP BGP routes that originate in another AS are used as a match criterion. BGP routes that are not learned from IGP or EGP are used as a match criterion. Dependencies Use this option to allow match criteria for BGP routes learned using another protocol.
OSPF Area (area)

The OSPF Area parameter specifies the IP address of an OSPF area that is used as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the OSPF Area Set parameter is set to true. The range is an IP address from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0. All OSPF internal and external routes that use the parameter are matched. Only export routing policies use the parameter.
OSPF Area Set (areaSet)

The OSPF Area Set parameter specifies whether to use the OSPF Area parameter as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. The options are:
May 2009
123-11
OSPF, RIP, or ISIS Tag (Hex) (tag)

The OSPF, RIP, or ISIS Tag (Hex) parameter specifies the hexidecimal tag that is added to OSPF, RIP, or ISIS routes that meet the match criterion specified in a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Policy, or Next Entry. The range is a hexidecimal string from 0x0 to 0xFFFFFFFF. For OSPF and ISIS routes, all four octets are used. For RIP routes, only the two most significant octets are used.
OSPF Route Type (ospfRouteType)

The OSPF Route Type parameter specifies:
the type of OSPF LSAs that are used as a match criterion for a routing policy
statement entry assigns the type of OSPF LSAs to routes that match a routing policy statement entry Table 123-10 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-10 OSPF Route Type parameter
Option 0 (default) Option description OSPF link state types are not used as a match criterion, or no link state types are assigned to OSPF routes that meet the match criterion. Specifies that: Dependencies You can specify the assignment of LSA types when the Default Action parameter is set to Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy.
type 1 OSPF link state advertisements are used as a match criteria. type 1 OSPF link state advertisements are assigned to routes that meet the match criteria type 2 OSPF link state advertisements are used as a match criteria. type 2 OSPF link state advertisements are assigned to routes that meet the match criteria
Specifies that:
Path Name (pathName)

The Path Name parameter specifies the path name for the route policy AS path regular expression. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotes. Double quotes are used to delimit the start and end of a string that contains spaces.
Policy Statement Name (policyStatementName)

The Policy Statement Name parameter specifies the name of the routing action policy. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Prefix (prefix)
The Prefix parameter specifies the IP address for a prefix list entry. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format.
Prefix List 1 (prefixList1)

The Prefix List 1 and Prefix List 2 to 5 parameters specify the prefix list used as a from criteria to match routing policy statement entries. The name must already be created using the Prefix List Name parameter.

See Prefix List 1 (prefixList1) in this section for the parameter description.



Prefix List Name (prefixListName)

The Prefix List Name parameter specifies the name of a prefix list to use in a routing policy statement entry. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotation marks. Double quotation marks delimit the start and end of a string that contains spaces.
Prepend Count (prependCount)

The Prepend Count parameter specifies the number of times that a BGP AS number is added to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option. The range is 0 to 50. The default is 0, which means AS numbers are not added to route AS paths. Use the BGP AS Prepend number and Prepend Count parameters to specify the AS number and how many times the AS numbers are added to the AS path attributes of routes.
May 2009
123-13
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies the routing protocol to be used as a match criterion for a routing policy statement entry. Table 123-11 lists the available options for different device types.
Device type and version 7450 ESS From options To options
7750 SR
None Direct Static IS-IS OSPF RIP Aggregate None Direct Static BGP IS-IS OSPF RIP Aggregate BGP-VPN IGMP PIM OSPFv3 LDP
None IS-IS OSPF RIP
None BGP IS-IS OSPF RIP BGP-VPN OSPFv3
Regular Expression (regularExpression)

The Regular Expression parameter specifies the regular expression for the route policy AS path. The range is 1 to 255 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotes. Double quotes are used to delimit the start and end of a string that contains spaces. Regular expressions are strings that are used to specify match criteria for:
an AS path string, for example, 100 200 300 a community string, for example, 100:200, where 100 is the AS number and
200 is the community value Each regular expression is comprised of terms and operators. Table 123-12 describes the terms and operators.
123-14
May 2009
123 Routing parameters Table 123-12 AS path regular expression terms and operators
Type of term or operator Terms Elementary Range Wildcard Regular Set of choices Operators | * + {m,n} ^ $ Pipe to match terms on alternate sides Matches multiple occurrences of the term Underscore matches one or no occurrences of the term Matches one or more occurrences of the term Matches the least (m) and most (n) occurrences of the term Matches the beginning of the community string Matches the end of the community string An AS number Two elementary terms that are separated by a A dot (.) to match any elementary term Expression in round brackets Square brackets to specify a set of elementary or range terms 200 200-300 . (200) [100-300 400] Use Example
Reuse (reuse)
The Reuse parameter specifies whether to consider a route valid, based on a comparison with the figure of merit value for the route. The parameter must be less than the Suppress parameter. The range is 1 to 20 000. The default is 0. When the figure of merit value is less than the Reuse parameter value, the route is considered valid and is included in route advertisements.
Route Origin (origin)

The Route Origin parameter specifies the assignment of a BGP route type to BGP routes that meet the match criterion specified in a routing policy statement entry. Table 123-13 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
123-15
123 Routing parameters Table 123-13 Route Origin parameter

Option None (default) Option description BGP route types are not assigned to BGP routes that match the route criterion specified in the routing policy statement entry. Routes that match the route criterion are set as IGP BGP routes. Routes that match the route criterion are set as EGP BGP routes. Dependencies You can specify the assignment of BGP route types using the Route Origin parameter when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept option.
IGP EGP Incomplete
Route Preference (preference)

The Route Preference parameter specifies the route preference value assigned to a route that matches a routing policy statement entry. The parameter value is used by the routing table manager to assign preferences to the route, which override the routing preferences applied to the routes by the individual protocols. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 0, which indicates that no route preference is set for matching routes.
Static Route Tag (staticRouteTag)

The Static Route Tag parameter specifies an identifier for the static route. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0, which means that the identifier is unspecified.
Suppress (suppress)
The Suppress parameter specifies whether a route is considered valid based on the number of times that the route has flapped. Route flapping occurs when an advertised route between devices alternates back and forth between two paths due to network problems. The range is 1 to 20 000. The default is 0. The parameter must be greater than the Reuse parameter. When the figure of merit value is greater than the Suppress parameter value, the route is not considered valid and is removed from route advertisements.
Through Length (throughLength)

The Through Length parameter specifies the prefix list matching criterion for the mask value of the IP address. The parameter value must be greater than or equal to the Mask parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Type parameter is set to the Through or Range options. The range is Mask parameter value to 32. The default is 0.
123-16
May 2009
Trace Tree (LdpTraceTree)

The Trace Tree parameter specifies the whether or not to enable trace tree configuration. When enabled the LDP ECMP tree discovery and LDP ECMP path probing can be configured. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Triggered Re-evaluation of Route Policies (manualPolicyTrigger)

The Triggered Re-evaluation of Route Policies parameter specifies whether to trigger a route policy re-evaluation. Table 123-14 describes the parameter options.
Table 123-14 Triggered Re-evaluation of Route Policies parameter
Option true Option description When a triggered re-evaluation is enabled, any routing policy change or policy assignment change within the protocol does not take effect until the protocol is reset or a clear command is issued to re-evaluate the route policy. When changes to a routing policy are saved, the change is effective immediately. This should be used with caution, because changes that affect the routing across a network, for example, changes for all BGP peers, may cause routing update storms in the network. Routing storms may cause potential impacts on network performance when the routes are updated. Dependencies You must reset the applicable protocol before any changes to the routing policy take effect.
false (default)
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies how the Prefix and Mask parameters are matched in the prefix entry list. Table 123-15 describes the parameter options.
Option Exact (default) Longer Option description The prefix list entry only matches routes with the exact values specified in the Prefix and Mask parameters. The prefix list entry only matches routes with the exact value specified in the Prefix parameter, and a mask greater than the Mask parameter value. Dependencies
(1 of 2)
May 2009
123-17
Option Through
Option description The prefix list entry only matches routes with the exact value specified in the Prefix parameter, and a mask in the range specified in the Through Length parameter. The prefix list entry only matches routes with the exact value specified in the Prefix parameter, and a mask in the range specified in the Begin Length and Through Length parameters.
Dependencies You can configure the Through Length parameter to a value between the Mask parameter value and 32. You can configure the Begin Length and Through Length parameters to a value between the Mask parameter value and 32.
Range
(2 of 2)
Use Next Hop (isNextHopEnabled)

The Use Next Hop parameter specifies whether to allow the assignment of an IP address as the next hop to routes that match a routing policy statement entry. The parameter is configurable when the Default Action parameter is set to the Accept, Next Entry, or Next Policy option. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled and the Advertised Next Hop Self parameter is set to false, you can specify the IP address using the Next Hop parameter.
Value (value)
The Value parameter specifies the group value associated with this SRLG group. It is a bitmask value that uniquely identifies the group, and this value is unique within a virtual router instance. The range is 0 to 4,294,967,295. There is no default value.
123-18
May 2009
124.1 MPLS Administration Groups parameters
124-2
May 2009
124-1
124.1
MPLS Administration Groups parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Admin Group (MPLS) Policy form and its child forms.

Synchronize (syncTo)
Value (value)
The Value parameter specifies a unique value to use for the created administrative group in 32 bit mask format. The value is used by MPLS interfaces to advertise administrative group associations using CSPF. The value must be identical across all routers within a single domain. The range is 0 to 31. The default is 0.
124-2
May 2009
125.1 VRRP policy parameters
125-2
May 2009
125-1
125.1
VRRP policy parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the VRRP Policy (Create) form and child forms.
Displayed Name
Delta in Use Limit (deltaInUseLimit)

The Delta in Use Limit parameter specifies a value that is subtracted from the current in-use priority for all VRRP instances to which the policy is applied. Multiple delta priority events can apply simultaneously, creating a dynamic priority value. The base priority for the instance minus the sum of the delta values yields the actual priority value in use. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 1, which prevents delta priority events from operationally disabling the VRRP instance.
Description
Hold Clear (seconds) (holdClear)

The Hold Clear (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time by which the effect of a cleared event on the associated VRRP instance is delayed for a VRRP priority-control event. The Hold Clear (seconds) time is used to prevent black hole conditions in the time gap between when a VRRP instance advertises itself as a master and other conditions associated with the cleared event have had a chance to enter a forwarding state. The range is 0 to 86400 s. The default is 0 s.
Hold Set (seconds) (holdSet)

The Hold Set (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time that must pass before the set state for a VRRP priority-control event can transition to the cleared state. The purpose of this parameter is to a dampen flapping event, in which the event continually transitions between clear and set. The Hold Set (seconds) value is loaded into a hold set timer that prevents a set event from transitioning to the cleared state until it expires. The range is 0 to 86400 s. The default is 0 s.
Hop Address (hopAddress)

The Hop Address parameter specifies an allowed next hop IP address to match the IP route prefix for a route unknown priority-control event. If the Hop Address does not match one of the defined IP addresses, the match is considered unsuccessful and the route unknown event transitions to the set state.
The Hop Address parameter is optional. If no Hop Address parameter is configured, the comparison between the RTM prefix return and the RouteIP route prefix is not included in the next hop information. The default is 0.0.0.0.
ID
Interval for Echo Request (seconds) (interval)

The Interval for Echo Request (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time that expires before the next directed ICMP echo request message is sent to the host IP address. The range is 1 to 60 s. The default is 1 s.
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the host at which connectivity is monitored. The host address receives a continuous ICMP echo request (ping) probe from the host unreachable priority event. If a ping fails, the event is considered to be set. If a ping is successful, the event is considered to be clear. The default is 0.0.0.0.
LAG ID (lagId)
See LAG ID (lagId) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
Less Specific (lessSpecific)

The Less Specific parameter specifies whether to shorten the search parameters for the IP route prefix specified in the route-unknown priority event. Specifying a less-specific allows a CIDR shortest match hit on a route prefix that contains the IP route prefix. The options are:
false (default) true Limit of Echo Request Failures (dropCount)

The Limit of Echo Request Failures parameter specifies the number of consecutively sent ICMP echo request messages that must fail before the host unreachable priority-control event is set. The range is from 1 to 60 s. The default is 3.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the IP address subnet mask in dotted-decimal format or as a 32-bit integer. The range is from 0 to 32. The default is 24.
May 2009
125-3
Number of Ports Down (numberofPortsDown)

The Number of Ports Down parameter specifies the number of ports that must be in an operationally down state before the event can be set. When all ports enter into the operational up state, the event is considered to be clear. As ports enter the operational up state, any previous set threshold that represents more down ports is considered cleared, and the event is considered to be set. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 0.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the effect that the set event has on the VRRP instance in-use priority. When the event is set, the priority level is determined by how you configure the Priority Type. The range is 0 to 254. The default is 0. See Priority Type (priorityType).
Priority Type (priorityType)

The Priority Type parameter specifies how the set event affects the in-use priority for the VRRP instance. Table 125-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 125-1 Priority Type parameter
Option Delta (default) Explicit Option description Subtracts a value from the current in-use priority for all VRRP instances to which the policy is applied. Defines the in-use priority for the VRRP instance. The value is not affected by the delta in-use priority limit.
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies the source protocol from which the installed route must be populated in the route unknown policy for a VRRP instance. There is no default. The options are:
Static RIP IS-IS OSPF BGP
Timeout for Echo Request (seconds) (timeout)

The Timeout for Echo Request parameter (seconds) specifies the amount of time that must expire before the far-end IP host is considered unresponsive to an outstanding ICMP echo request message. The range is from 1 to 60 s. The default is 1 s.
125-4
May 2009
126.1 CFM 802.1ag parameters
126-2
May 2009
126-1
126.1
CFM 802.1ag parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the CFM 802.1ag Policy form and its child forms.
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the Maintenance Domain. The range is 1 to 4 294 967 295.
Level (maintDomainLevel)
The Level parameter specifies one of 7 levels for the Maintenance Domain. This parameter enables an operator to group objects. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Name Type (maintDomainNameType)

The Name Type parameter specifies name of the Maintenance Domain. The options are:
unspecified (default) DNS MAC String
126-2
May 2009
127.1 802_1x parameters
127-2
May 2009
127-1
127.1
802_1x parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the 802_1x Policy form and its child forms.
Accounting Port (acctPort)

The Accounting Port parameter specifies the UDP port on the RADIUS server to which you want to connect to perform accounting activities. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1813.
Administrative Status
See Administrative State (administrativeState) in section 133.1 for the parameter description. The default is Down.
Authorization Port (authPort)

The Authorization Port parameter specifies the UDP port on the RADIUS server to which you want to connect to perform authorization activities. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1812.
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server. The range is any valid unicast IP address.
Password (password)
The Password parameter specifies the key that is associated with the RADIUS server. You must configure the parameter. The range is any valid key that is supported by the RADIUS server of 1 to 20 characters. You must configure the parameter.
127-2
May 2009
Request Timeout (requestTimeout)

The Request Timeout parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that elapses before an attempt is made to send the same request again to the same RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 5.
Retry Attempts (retryAttempts)

The Retry Attempts parameter specifies the maximum number of times an attempt is made to send a request to the same RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 3.
Server Index (serverIndex)

The Server Index parameter specifies a unique RADIUS server for the policy. The range is 1 to 5. The default is 0.
Server Type (serverType)

The Server Type parameter specifies the type of activities to be performed by the RADIUS server. Table 127-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 127-1 Server Type parameter
Option combined accounting authorization (default) Option description The RADIUS server is used for both authorization and accounting activities. The RADIUS server is used for accounting activities only. The RADIUS server is used for authorization activities only. Dependencies
Source Address (sourceAddress)

The Source Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the RADIUS packets. The range is any valid unicast IP address. When the parameter specifies the address of the interface, the RADIUS client uses the address for authentication requests. When the address is in-band, the system IP address is used. When the address is out-of-band, the IP address of the management interface is used.
Synchronize
May 2009
127-3
127-4
May 2009
128.1 RADIUS Based Accounting parameters
128-2
May 2009
128-1
128.1
RADIUS Based Accounting parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the RADIUS Accounting Policy form and child forms.
Access Algorithm (accessAlgorithm)

The Access Algorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that is used to select a RADIUS server from the list of configured servers. The options are:
Direct (default) Round-robin Enable

The Enable parameter specifies whether the interval for updating subscriber host information is enabled. The options are:

When the Enable parameter is set to disabled, the subscriber host information is not updated. When the parameter is set to enabled, you can configure the Value (minutes) parameter.
Port (port)
The Port parameter specifies the UDP port of the RADIUS server that is contacted. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1813.
Port Prefix String (nasPortPrefixString)

The Port Prefix String parameter specifies the string to be added as a prefix to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS accounting requests. The range is 0 to 8. A value can be specified for the prefix if the Port Prefix Type parameter is set to User String.
Port Prefix Type (nasPortPrefixType)

The Port Prefix Type parameter specifies the prefix type to be added to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS accounting requests. The options are:
None (default) User String
128-2
May 2009
Port Suffix Type (nasPortSuffixType)

The Port Suffix Type parameter specifies the suffix type to be added to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS accounting requests. The options are:
None (default) Circuit Id Remote Id RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes)

The RADIUS Attributes parameter specifies the RADIUS attributes that are included in RADIUS accounting requests. Table 128-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 128-1 RADIUS Attributes parameter
Option Subscriber Profile (subscrProfile) NAS Port ID (nasPortID) Circuit ID (circuitID) Framed IP Mask (framedIPMask) SLA Profile (slaProfile) NAS ID (nasID) Remote ID (remoteID) Subscriber ID (subscrID) Framed IP Address (framedIPAddr) Description The subscriber profile is included in the request The Network Access Server port ID is included in the request The circuit ID is included in the request The framed IP mask is included in the request The SLA profile is included in the request The Network Access Server ID is included in the request The remote server ID is included in the request The subscriber ID is included in the request The framed IP address is included in the request
Retry Attempts (retryAttempts)

The Retry Attempts parameter specifies the number of times an attempt is made to send an accounting request to the same RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 3.
Router Instance (routerType)

The Router Instance parameter specifies the type of virtual router for the RADIUS-based accounting policy. Table 128-2 describes the options.
May 2009
128-3
128 RADIUS Based Accounting parameters Table 128-2 Router Instance parameter
Option Matched (default) VPRN Description Base and Management router instances are the same. A VPRN service that is used as the routing instance for the RADIUS accounting policy. The routing table configuration of the router is the routing instance for the RADIUS accounting policy. The bof configuration of the router is the routing instance for the RADIUS accounting policy. Dependencies This option is not available for the 7450 ESS in a local policy.
Base
Management
Secret Name (secret)

The Secret name parameter specifies the secret key associated with the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 20 characters.
Server IP Address (address)

The Server IP Address specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server. Each RADIUS server must have its own unique IP address. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Session ID Format (sessionIDFormat)

The Session ID Format parameter specifies the format for the acct-session-id attribute used in RADIUS accounting requests. The options are:
Description (default) Number Source Address (sourceAddress)

The Source Address parameter specifies the source IP address of a RADIUS packet for DHCP-RADIUS accounting. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds)

The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the time that elapses before an attempt is made to resend an accounting request to the same RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 90. The default is 5.
128-4
May 2009
User Standard Account Attribute (useStdAcctAttrib)

The User Standard Account Attribute parameter specifies whether standard accounting attributes or vendor-specific attributes are used. If the parameter is enabled, standard accounting attributes are used. When the parameter is disabled, vendor-specific accounting attributes are used. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Value (minutes) (updateInterval)

The Value (minutes) parameter specifies how often subscriber host accounting information is updated. The range is 10 to 1080. The default is 0, which means that no updates are sent. The Value (minutes) parameter is configurable when the Enable parameter is set to enabled.
May 2009
128-5
128-6
May 2009
129.1 Residential Subscriber parameters
129-2
May 2009
129-1
129.1
Residential Subscriber parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Residential Subscribers form and child forms.
Accounting Enabled (accountingOn)

The Accounting Enabled parameter specifies the administrative state for the collection of accounting statistics. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Administrative State

ANCP String (ancpString)

The ANCP String parameter specifies the ANCP string encoded in the identification strings. The range is 0 to 63 characters. There is no default.
Application (application)
The Application parameter specifies a string that categorizes an SLA profile by the type of application to which the SLA profile applies. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Application Profile String (appProfileString)

The Application Profile String parameter specifies a string that categorizes an application profile. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Circuit ID (circuitId)
The Circuit ID parameter specifies the circuit ID to match against. When the value is not configured, the parameter is not used during the search. The range is 0 to 255.
Circuit ID Format (circuitIdFormat)

The Circuit ID Format parameter specifies the how the circuit data is presented. The options are:
Ascii (default) Hex
129-2
May 2009
Custom Option Number (optionID)

The Custom Option Number parameter specifies the number of the custom option. You must choose a number that has not been previously assigned to a standard option that is defined in RFC 2131. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 1.
Days (days)
Lease Renew Time Lease Rebind Time
Description
DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (dhcpCidMaskPreNum)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length parameter specifies the number of characters to remove from the beginning of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1). If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (dhcpCidMaskPreStr) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (dhcpCidMaskPreStr)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String parameter specifies a substring that is removed from the beginning of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1). The string must contain printable ASCII characters. You can use * as a wildcard. If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (dhcpCidMaskPreNum) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
May 2009
129-3
DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (dhcpCidMaskSufNum)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length parameter specifies the number of characters to be removed from the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1). If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (dhcpCidMaskSufStr) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (dhcpCidMaskSufStr)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix String parameter specifies a substring that is removed from the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1). The string must contain printable ASCII characters. You can use * as a wildcard. If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (dhcpCidMaskSufNum) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
DHCP String (dhcpString)

The DHCP String parameter specifies the DHCP string of the Option 82 suboption to match against during host identification. When the value of this parameter is not specified, the parameter is not used for the search. The range is 0 to 255. There is no default.
Disable AC Cookies (disableAcCookies)

The Disable AC Cookies parameter specifies whether the use of AC cookie tags are disabled during the PPPoE discovery phase. The options are:
true false (default) Disable SHCV (disableSHCV)

The Disable SHCV parameter specifies whether SHCV is suspended if a port-down message is received. SHCV remains suspended until the NE sends a port-up message. The options are:

When this parameter is set to True and the Disable SHCV Hold Time (seconds) (disableSHCVHoldTIme) parameter is set to 1 to 7200 s, the NE suspends SHCV for the period of time defined. When the Disable SHCP Hold Time parameter is set to 0, the NE suspends SHCV until a port-up message is received.
129-4
May 2009
Disable SHCV Hold Time (seconds) (disableSHCVHoldTIme)

The Disable SHCV Hold Time (seconds) parameter specifies how long SHCV is suspended before the NE sends a port-up message. The range is 0 to 7200 s. The default is 0. This parameter is used in conjunction with the Disable SHCV (disableSHCV) parameter.
Disable SHCV Notification (disableSHCVNtf)

The Disable SHCV parameter specifies whether an alarm should be raised before SHCV is suspended on the NE. The options are:
true false (default) Displayed Name

Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit)

The Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate, in kb/s, of all egress queues for the subscriber. The parameter is configurable when the No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit check box is disabled. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an egress scheduler. The range is 1, which means that the rate is unlimited, or 1 to 40 000 000.
Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit)

The Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate of all HSMDA egress queues for the subscriber. The parameter is configurable when the No Egress Aggregate Rate Limit check box is disabled. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an egress scheduler. The range is 1, which means that the rate is unlimited, or 1 to 40 000 000.
Enable Reply On PADT (enableReplyOnPadt)

The Enable Reply On PADT parameter specifies whether the system replies with a PADT packet when a PADT packet is received for an existing PPPoE session. The options are:
true false (default) Frame Base Accounting (schedulerPolicyFrameBasedAccnt)

The Frame Base Accounting parameter specifies whether to use frame-based accounting or packet-based accounting. Frame-based accounting uses the inter-frame gap and instructions to calculate overhead.
May 2009
129-5
Host Limit (hostLimit)

The Host Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of hosts that use this SLA profile. Enable the parameter to configure a maximum number of subscriber hosts for the SLA profile. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 1, which means that no limit is specified.
Host Name (hostName)

The Host Name parameter specifies the name of the local user database. The range is 1 to 32. There is no default.
Hours (hours)
Ingress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit)

The Ingress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum total rate of all HSMDA ingress queues for the subscriber. The parameter is configurable when the No Ingress Aggregate Rate Limit check box is disabled. When the parameter is set to a value greater than 0, you cannot specify an ingress scheduler. The range is 1, which means that the rate is unlimited, or 1 to 40 000 000.
Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue)

The Inner Encapsulation Value parameter specifies the inner encapsulation value for the port. This parameter is configurable when the encapsulation type for the port is Q in Q. The range is 0 to 4094, or 4095 or * to indicate that all tags are accepted, regardless of value. The default is 0, which means that the port has no inner encapsulation value.
Intermediate Destination (intermediateDestId)

The Intermediate Destination parameter specifies to which intermediate destination, for example a DSLAM network device, the host belongs. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Intermediate Destination ID (interDestIdString)

The Intermediate Destination String parameter specifies a string that identifies an Intermediate Destination. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
129-6
May 2009
IP Address
See IP Address (address) in section 133.1 for the parameter description.
IP Address Pool Name (poolName)

The IP Address Pool Name parameter specifies the IP address pool that will be used to search for the IP address of the host. This parameter can be set when the Address Type parameter value is set to unknown and the Use GI Address (useGiAddress) parameter value is set to false. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
LCP Keep Alive Hold Up Multiplier (lcpKaHoldUpMplier)

The LCP Keep Alive Hold Up Multiplier parameter specifies number of LCP keep alive messages that can be missed before the PPPoE session is terminated. The range is 10 to 300. The default is 30.
LCP Keep Alive Interval (seconds) (lcpKaInterval)

The LCP Keep Alive Interval parameter specifies the time interval, in seconds, that LCP echo requests are transmitted. The range is 10 to 300. The default is 30.
MAC Address (clientMacAddress)

The MAC address parameter specifies the MAC address to match against. When the value is set to 00-00-00-00-00-00 (default), the MAC address is not used.
May 2009
129-7
Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1)

The Match Type DHCP 1 parameter specifies the search criteria to identify subscribers. The order of the user match criteria determines the evaluation order. For example if the Match Type DHCP 1 value is MAC Address, and the Match Type DHCP 2 value is Option 60, the database will search for users that match the MAC address before searching for users that match Option 60. If the value of Match Type DHCP 1 parameter is set to None, all subsequent Match Type DHCP parameters must be set to none. The Administrative State (administrativeState) parameter value must be set to Down before you can set any of the Match Type DHCP parameters. There is no default. The options are:
Circuit ID MAC Address None Option 60 Remote ID
Sap ID Service ID String System ID

The Match Type DHCP 2 parameter specifies the second type of search criteria to identify subscribers. See Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1)for more information.


Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1)

The Match Type PPPoE 1 parameter specifies the search criteria to identify subscribers. The order of the user match criteria determines the evaluation order. For example if the Match Type PPPoE 1 value is MAC Address, and the Match Type PPPoE 2 value is User Name, the database will search for users that match the MAC address before searching for users that match the User Name.
129-8
May 2009
If the value of Match Type PPPoE 1 parameter is set to None, all subsequent Match Type PPPoE parameters must be set to none. The Administrative State (administrativeState) parameter value must be set to Down before you can set any of the Match Type PPPoE parameters. There is no default. The options are:
Circuit ID MAC Address None Remote ID User Name

The Match Type PPPoE 2 parameter specifies the second type of search criteria to identify subscribers. See Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1)for more information.

The Match Type PPPoE 3 parameter specifies the second type of search criteria to identify subscribers. See Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1)for more information.
Maximum Sessions Per MAC (maxSessionsPerMac)

The Maximum Sessions Per MAC parameter specifies the maximum number of PPPoE sessions that can be created per MAC address. The range is 1 to 63. The default is 1.
Maximum Host Lost Connectivity Rate (traps per second) (maxHostLostConnectivityRate)

The Maximum Host Lost Connectivity Rate parameter specifies the number of lost host connectivity traps that the NE receives in one second before it raises a Maximum Host Lost Connectivity rate exceeded alarm. The parameter is configurable when the Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm parameter is enabled. When the Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm parameter is disabled, this parameter has no effect. The range is 1 to 10 000. The default is 20.
Minutes (minutes)
May 2009
129-9
Monitoring Period (monitoringPeriod)

The Monitoring Period specifies the length of time that selected residential subscriber hosts or SAPs are actively monitored for specific DHCP event changes. You enter a numeric value for this parameter and use it in conjunction with the Units (units) parameter, which specifies the unit of time measurement, for example, 10 and hours. The maximum possible period is 72 hours. However, the actual maximum period may be less than this, since it is also dependent on how many events are recorded during the monitoring period you specify. For residential subscriber hosts, the actual maximum period is also affected by the Polling Interval (pollingInterval) parameter option that you select.

Table 129-2 Netbios parameter options
Option Unspecified B P M Option Description Unspecified The DHCP server will use broadcast for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use peer to peer for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use a combination of broadcast and peer to peer. If broadcast cannot resolve the name, it uses peer to peer. The DHCP server will use a combination of peer to peer and broadcast. If peer to peer cannot resolve the name, it uses broadcast.
New Subscriber Identification (newSubscrIdent)

The New Subscriber Identification parameter specifies the new identifier for the subscriber. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
The Number parameter is used to identify options. All other DHCP protocol options are available and can be set by entering the option number, defined in RFC 2131 The range is 1 to 254. The default is 1.
129-10
May 2009
Option (option)
The Option parameter specifies the option that the DHCP server uses to search for DHCP or PPPoE clients. The values for the Option parameter match the CLI option list. When the parameter value is Custom Option, you must enter an Option Number (optionNumber). For all other Option values the Option Number (optionNumber) value is entered automatically. Table 129-3 lists the parameter options and the option numbers.
Table 129-3 Option parameter
Option Custom Option(default) Subnet Mask Default Routers DNS Name Servers Domain Name Netbois Name Server Netbois Node Type Lease Time Lease Renew Timer Lease Rebind Timer Option Number 999 1 3 6 15 44 46 51 58 59
Option 60 (dhcpOption60)
The Option 60 parameter specifies the option to match against during host identification. When the value is not specified the parameter is not used for a search. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
Option Number (optionNumber)

The Option Number parameter specifies the option number that the DHCP server uses to send the identification strings to the DHCP or PPPoE client. When the parameters value is set to 0, no identification strings will be sent. The range is 0 to 254. The default is 0.
Option Protocol (protocol)

The Option Protocol parameter specifies which protocol is used to configure, enable and disable the IP protocol on both ends of the point to point link. The options are:
LCP (default) IPCP
May 2009
129-11
Option Type (optionType)

The Option Type parameter specifies the format for storing the Option Value (optionValue) parameter. For a PPPoE policy, the Option Value (optionValue) parameter value must be IPv4 Address. The options are:
IPv4 Address (default) String Hex Option Value (optionValue)

The Option Value parameter specifies the value of this option. The range is 0 to 80. There is no default.
Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue)

The Outer Encapsulation Value parameter specifies the outer encapsulation value for the port. This parameter is configurable when the encapsulation type for the port is Dot1q or Q in Q. Table 129-4 lists the parameter ranges for different encapsulation types. The default is 0, which means that the port has no outer encapsulation value.
Table 129-4 Outer Encapsulation Value parameter
Encapsulation type Dot1q Q in Q Range 0 to 4094 0 to 4094 or 1 to 4094
PADO Delay (100s of milliseconds) (padoDelay)

The PADO Delay parameter specifies the delay timeout before sending a PADO. The range is 0 to 30. The default is 0.
Password Type (passwordType)

The Password Type parameter specifies the PPP protocol used to authenticate a PPPoE session. The value None indicates that no PPP authentication is done. When you choose the value For PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and For CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) as the Password Type parameter value, you must set the Password (password) parameter. The options are:
None ignore For PAP For CHAP
129-12
May 2009
Password (password)
The Password parameter specifies the password of the host. The Password parameter is configurable when User Name (userName) parameter is configured.
Polling Interval (pollingInterval)

The Polling Interval specifies the SNMP interval at which selected residential subscriber hosts are polled for specific DHCP event changes. You choose the value for the Polling Interval from the associated drop-down menu, with a range of 1 to 60 minutes. The default is 10 minutes. This parameter is used in conjunction with the Monitoring Period parameter.
PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (pppoeCidMaskPreNum)

The PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix Number parameter specifies the number of characters to remove from the beginning of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1). If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (pppoeCidMaskPreStr) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (pppoeCidMaskPreStr)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String parameter specifies a substring that is removed from the beginning of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1). The string must contain printable ASCII characters. You can use * as a wildcard. If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (pppoeCidMaskPreNum) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (pppoeCidMaskSufNum)

The DHCP Circuit Id Mask Suffix Number parameter specifies the number of characters to be removed from the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1). If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (pppoeCidMaskSufStr) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (pppoeCidMaskSufStr)

The DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix String parameter specifies a substring that is removed from the end of the incoming circuit ID before it is matched against the Circuit ID value configured in Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1). The string must contain printable ASCII characters. You can use * as a wildcard. If you configure this parameter, you must also configure the PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (pppoeCidMaskSufStr) parameter. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
May 2009
129-13
PPP MTU (mtu)

The PPP MTU parameter specifies the largest IP packet that can be sent out without being fragmented over the specific PPPoE tunnel. The range is 0 to 9212. The default is 0.
Primary Script Administrative State (script1AdministrativeState)

The Primary Script Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state for the primary subscriber identification script. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Primary Script URL (script1Url)

The Primary Script URL parameter specifies the location of the primary subscriber identification script. The range is 0 to 180 characters. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Rate Adjustment (egrRateAdjustment)

The Rate Adjustment parameter specifies the rate adjustment for the rate modification scheduler. This parameter is used when the rate returned by the DSLAM is calculated with a different encapsulation than the rate of the 7450 ESS or the 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 200. The default is 100.
Rate Adjustment (ingRateAdjustment)

The Rate Adjustment parameter specifies the rate adjustment for the rate modification scheduler. This parameter is used when the rate returned by the DSLAM is calculated with a different encapsulation than the rate of the 7450 ESS or 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 200. The default is 100.
Rate Modification (egrRateModificationType)

The Rate Modification parameter specifies the egress rate modification that is applied to the ANCP policy. The options are:
None (default) Agg-rate-limit Scheduler

When this parameter is set to Scheduler, the scheduler specified in the Rate Modification Scheduler parameter is used.
129-14
May 2009
Rate Modification (ingRateModificationType)

The rate Modification parameter specifies the ingress rate modification that ia applied to the ANCP policy. The options are:
None (default) Scheduler

When this parameter is set to Scheduler, the scheduler specified in the Rate Modification Scheduler parameter is used.
Rate Modification Scheduler (egrRateModSchedObjPointer)

The Rate Modification Scheduler parameter specifies the scheduler where you apply the egress rate modification rate.
Rate Modification Scheduler (ingRateModSchedObjPointer)

The Rate Modification Scheduler parameter specifies the scheduler to which you apply the ingress rate modification.
Rate Monitor (kbps) (egrRateMonitor)

The Rate Monitor (kbps) parameter specifies the egress rate below which an NE generates an event. When the Rate Monitor Notification (egrRateMonitorNtf) parameter is set to true, an alarm is raised. The range is 0 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
Rate Monitor (kbps) (ingRateMonitor)

The Rate Monitor (kbps) parameter specifies the ingress rate below which an NE generates an event. When the Rate Monitor Notification (ingRateMonitorNtf) parameter is set to true an alarm is raised. The range is 0 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
Rate Monitor Notification (egrRateMonitorNtf)

The Rate Monitor Notification parameter specifies whether an egress monitored event generates an SNMP notification. The options are:
true false (default) Rate Monitor Notification (ingRateMonitorNtf)

The Rate Monitor Notification parameter specifies whether an ingress monitored event generates an SNMP notification. The options are:

Rate Reduction (kbps) (egrRateReduction)

The Rate Reduction (kbps) parameter specifies the constant rate reduction to the egress rate specified by the DSLAM. This parameter is used if an NE needs to adjust the egress rate to a value that is offset compared to the total that is available on the DSLAM. The range is 0 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
Rate Reduction (kbps) (ingRateReduction)

The Rate Reduction (kbps) parameter specifies the constant rate reduction to the ingress rate specified by the DSLAM. This parameter is used if an NE needs to adjust the ingress rate to a value that is offset compared to the total that is available on the DSLAM. The range is 0 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm (rateExceededRaisesAlarm)

The Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm parameter specifies whether exceeding the trap rate specified by the Maximum Host Lost Connectivity Rate (traps per second) parameter generates a HostConnectivityLostRateExceeded alarm. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Remote ID (remoteId)

The Remote ID parameter specifies the remote ID to match against during host identification. When the value of this parameter is not specified, the parameter is not used for the search. The range is 0 to 255. There is no default.
Remove oldest Subscriber Host (removeOldestHostOn)

The Remove oldest Subscriber Host parameter specifies the action that the NE hosting the SAP takes when the number of subscriber hosts using the SLA profile reaches the maximum specified by the Host Limit parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Host Limit parameter is enabled. Table 129-5 lists the parameter options:
Table 129-5 Remove oldest Subscriber Host parameter
Option disabled (default) enabled Option description Specifies that the 5620 SAM rejects a new subscriber host that requests the SLA profile Specifies that the 5620 SAM accepts a new subscriber host that requests the SLA profile and removes the subscriber host that has had the longest association with the SLA profile
129-16
May 2009
SAP ID (sapId)
The SAP ID parameter specifies the SAP ID to match against during host identification. This parameter is a suboption of option 82. When the value of this parameter is not specified, the parameter is not used for the search. The range is 0 to 255. There is no default.
Secondary Script Administrative State (script2AdministrativeState)

The Secondary Script Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state for the secondary subscriber identification script. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Secondary Script URL (script2Url)

The Secondary Script URL parameter specifies the location of the secondary subscriber identification script. The range is 0 to 180 characters. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Seconds (seconds)
SLA Profile String (slaProfileString)

The SLA Profile String parameter specifies a string that identifies a SLA profile. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
SLA Profile String (displayedName)

The SLA Profile String parameter specifies an alias for the SLA profile. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Service ID (serviceId)
The Service ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the service. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
Strings From Option (stringFromOption)

The Strings From Option parameter specifies how the SLA profile and subscriber profile identification strings are derived. When the parameter is set to 0, the strings are obtained using the identification scripts. A value greater than 0 specifies the DHCP option number from which the strings are directly obtained. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Subscriber ID Alias (subscrAlias)

The Subscriber ID Alias parameter specifies an alias for the subscriber ID. The range is 0 to 64 characters.
Subscriber ID (subscriberIdString)
The Subscriber ID parameter specifies the option number that the DHCP server uses to send the identification strings to the DHCP and PPPoE client. When the parameter value is 0, no identification strings are sent. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Subscriber Identification (displayedName)

The Subscriber Identification parameter specifies an identifier for the subscriber in the explicit map. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Note You cannot use the : symbol in the subscriber identifier. The
Subscriber Identification (subscrIdent)

The Subscriber Identification parameter specifies an identifier for the subscriber for a PPPoE session. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subscrProfileString)

The Subscriber Mapped Profile String parameter specifies the mapped string to the subscriber profile assigned to the subscriber host. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subscrProfileString)

The Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String parameter specifies the mapped string to the subscriber SLA profile assigned to the subscriber host. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Subscriber Profile String (displayedName)

The Subscriber Profile String parameter specifies an alias for the subscriber profile. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Subscriber Profile String (subscriberProfileString)

The Subscriber Profile String parameter specifies a string that identifies a subscriber profile. Specify a text string for the parameter. The range is 0 to 16 characters. There is no default.
129-18
May 2009
System ID (systemId)
The System ID parameter specifies the system ID of the Option 82 suboption to match against during host identification. When the value of this parameter is not specified, the parameter is not used for the search. The range is 0 to 255. There is no default.
Tertiary Script Administrative State (script3AdministrativeState)

The Tertiary Script Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state for the tertiary subscriber identification script. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Tertiary Script URL (script3Url)

The Tertiary Script URL parameter specifies the location of the tertiary subscriber identification script. The range is 0 to 180 characters. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Trap Dropped Raises Alarm (trapDroppedRaisesAlarm)

The Trap Dropped Raises Alarm parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM raises a Maximum Host Lost Connectivity rate exceeded alarm against the subscriber when the NE drops a sapHostConnectivityLost trap. Dropping a trap can indicate a connectivity problem when alarm blocking is enabled and multiple connectivity-loss events generate a flood of traps. Enabling this parameter helps to alert 5620 SAM operators to potential connectivity problems that may otherwise not be immediately noticed. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Type (optionType)

IP Address ASCII String Hex String Units (units)

The Units parameter is used in conjunction with the Monitoring Period (monitoringPeriod) parameter, which specifies the length of time that selected residential subscriber hosts or SAPs are actively monitored for specific DHCP event changes. You choose the value of Units from the associated drop-down menu. The default is minutes.
May 2009
129-19
Use Direct Map as Default (useDirectMapAsDefault)

The Use Direct Map as Default parameter specifies whether an SLA or subscriber profile string in the DHCP option information maps directly to an SLA or subscriber profile. When the parameter is set to true and no matching profile string is found, the profile string is used as the profile name. The options are:
true false (default) Use GI Address (useGiAddress)

The Use GI Address parameter specifies whether the GI address is used to search for the IP address of the host. If the value is set to true, the gateway IP address is used. The value can only be set to true, when the value for the Address Type is set to 0 and the IP Address Pool Name (poolName) value contains an empty string.The options are:
True False (default) Use Multipoint Shared Queue (multipointSharedQueueOn)

The Use Multipoint Shared Queue parameter specifies whether the SLA profile uses the multipoint shared queue on the device. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Use Shared Queue (sharedQueueOn)

The Use Shared Queue parameter specifies whether the SLA profile uses the shared queue on the device. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) User Name (userName)

The User Name parameter specifies the name to match when searching for a PPPoE Host. The range is 0 to 32 characters. When 0 is used, a user name is not specified.
129-20
May 2009
User Name Format (userNameFormat)

The User Name Format parameter specifies the format of the user name. When the Full value is selected the both the host and domain parts of the user name is specified. For example, john@alcatel-lucent.com. The options are:
None Full Domain only Host only
VLAN for all Services (Bridged) (vlanAllServicesBridged)

The VLAN for all Services (Bridged) parameter specifies the intent to include bridged VLAN for all services functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN for all Services (Routed) (vlanAllServicesRouted)

The VLAN for all Services (Routed) parameter specifies the intent to include routed VLAN for all services functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN per ISP per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerISPPerServiceBridged)

The VLAN per Subscriber (Bridged) parameter specifies the intent to include bridged VLAN per ISP per service functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN per ISP per Service (Routed) (vlanPerISPPerServiceRouted)

The VLAN per Subscriber (Routed) parameter specifies the intent to include routed VLAN per ISP per service functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerServiceBridged)

The VLAN per Service (Bridged) parameter specifies the intent to include bridged VLAN per service functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN per Service (Routed) (vlanPerServiceRouted)

The VLAN per Service (Routed) parameter specifies the intent to include routed VLAN per service functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
May 2009
129-21
VLAN per Subscriber (Bridged) (vlanPerSubscrBridged)

The VLAN per Subscriber (Bridged) parameter specifies the intent to include bridged VLAN per Subscriber functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
VLAN per Subscriber (Routed) (vlanPerSubscrRouted)

The VLAN per Subscriber (Routed) parameter specifies the intent to include routed VLAN per Subscriber functionality in the service model for the policy. The parameter acts as a reference for the 5620 SAM operator during policy application.
129-22
May 2009
130.1 Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) parameters
130-2
May 2009
130-1
130.1
Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) menu forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Community (community)
The Community parameter specifies the name of the community that is shared between the 5620 SAM and the 7250 SAS or 7250 SAS-ES, Release 2.0. The range is 0 to 127 characters. The default is private.
Description
Displayed Name
Falling Threshold (fallingThreshold)

The Falling Threshold parameter specifies a falling threshold for the sampled statistic. The 5620 SAM generates an information alarm when the following conditions apply:
The current sampled value is less than or equal to the configured threshold, and The previously sampled value is greater than the configured threshold
The 5620 SAM also generates an information alarm for the following conditions:
The first sample of the statistic is less than or equal to the configured threshold,
and
The Start Up Alarm (startupAlarm) parameter is set to Falling or Either

After the 5620 SAM generates a falling threshold alarm, another alarm for the same event condition does not occur until the sampled statistic is equal to or greater than the configured value of the Rising Threshold (risingThreshold) parameter. The range is -2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647.
ID
130-2
May 2009
Interval (seconds) (interval)

The Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the polling period during which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. Consider the following guidelines when you configure the polling interval.
The interval should be low enough so that the sampled variable is unlikely to
increase or decrease by more than 2 147 483 647 during an interval The interval should not be excessively low as to create unnecessary processing overhead The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647.
Monitored Object OID (monitoredObjectId)

The Monitored Object OID parameter specifies the SNMP object identifier for the sampled variable. You can only sample SNMP variables that resolve to an ASN.1 primitive type of integer (integer, Integer32, Counter32, Counter64, Gauge, or TimeTicks). You can use a dotted string notation for the OID string format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.184582144. The range is 1 to 255 characters.
Owner (owner)
The Owner parameter specifies the creator of the alarm. The range is 0 to 127 characters. The default is 5620sam.
Rising Threshold (risingThreshold)

The Rising Threshold parameter specifies a rising threshold for the sampled statistic. The 5620 SAM generates an information alarm when the following conditions apply:
The current sampled value is greater than or equal to the configured threshold,
and
The previously sampled value is less than the configured threshold

The 5620 SAM also generates an information alarm when the following conditions apply:
The first sample of the statistic is greater than or equal to the configured
threshold, and The Start Up Alarm (startupAlarm) parameter is set to Rising or Either After the 5620 SAM generates a rising threshold alarm, another alarm for the same event condition does not occur until the sampled statistic is equal to or less than the configured value for the Falling Threshold (fallingThreshold) parameter. The range is -2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647.
May 2009
130-3
Sample Type (sampleType)

The Sample Type parameter specifies the method that is used to sample the NE data. The 5620 SAM compares the value against the configured threshold. Table 130-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 130-1 Sample Type parameter
Option Absolute (default) Delta Option description Specifies that the value of the selected variable is compared against the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval Specifies that the value of the selected variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and the difference is compared to the thresholds
Start Up Alarm (startupAlarm)

The Start Up Alarm parameter specifies an alarm for a rising or falling value. Table 130-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 130-2 Start Up Alarm parameter
Option Rising Option description Specifies an alarm for a rising threshold crossing event. The 5620 SAM creates an alarm for a rising threshold crossing event when the following conditions apply:

Falling
first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value Start Up Alarm parameter is set to Rising or Either
Specifies an alarm for a falling threshold crossing event. The 5620 SAM creates an alarm for a falling threshold crossing event when the following conditions apply:

Either (default)
first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value Start Up Alarm parameter is set to Falling or Either
Specifies an alarm for a rising or falling threshold crossing event
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies the notification action associated with an event. Table 130-3 describes the parameter options.
Option None Log (1 of 2) Option description No notification action associated with the event Specifies that the 5620 SAM creates a log entry for the event
130-4
May 2009
Option Trap Log + Trap (default) (2 of 2)
Option description Specifies that an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations Specifies the creation of a log entry and sending of an SNMP trap
May 2009
130-5
130-6
May 2009
131.1 Size Constraint parameters
131-2
May 2009
131-1
131.1
Size Constraint parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Size Constraint Policy form and child forms.
Apply Threshold To (thresholdPolicy)

The Apply Threshold To parameter specifies how the Threshold (# of objects) parameter value applies to the selected classes. Table 131-1 lists the parameter options.
Table 131-1 Apply Threshold To parameter
Option Each selected class individually (default) All selected classes collectively Option description The threshold is reached when the number of objects for one class exceeds it. The threshold is reached when the total number of objects for all classes exceeds it.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Objects To Be Deleted When Threshold Exceeded (# of objects) (rowsToDelete)

The Objects To Be Deleted When Threshold Exceeded (# of objects) parameter specifies the number of database objects that are removed when a threshold is reached, as determined by the Threshold (# of objects) and Apply Threshold To parameters. The minimum value is 1. There is no maximum value. The default is 5000.
Policy Id (policyId)
The Policy Id parameter specifies a numeric identifier for the policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Assign ID parameter is disabled. The minimum value is 1. There is no maximum value. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Threshold (# of objects) (rowThreshold)

The Threshold (# of objects) parameter specifies the number of database objects to use as a threshold for size-constraint purposes. The minimum value is 1000. There is no maximum value. The default is 100 000.
132.1 Application Assurance parameters
132-2
May 2009
132-1
132.1
Application Assurance parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Application Assurance Policies child forms.
Administrative State (adminState)

The Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state of the application assurance filter component. The options are:
In Service Out of Service (default) ASO Characteristic Default Value (asoCharDefValue)

The ASO Characteristics Default Value parameter specifies the default value for the ASO characteristic. Click on the Select button to list and choose an ASO characteristic default value.
ASO Characteristic Value (asoCharacteristicValue)

The ASO Characteristic Value parameter specifies the ASO characteristic value entry to associate with the application profile. Click on the Select button to list and choose an ASO characteristic value entry.

Table 132-1 lists where to find information about the Collect Accounting Statistics parameter.
Table 132-1 Collect Accounting Statistics parameter
Parameter Collect Accounting Statistics for an application Collect Accounting Statistics for an application group Collect Accounting Statistics for a protocol Collect Accounting Statistics for an application per subscriber Collect Accounting Statistics for an application group per subscriber Collect Accounting Statistics for a protocol per subscriber See Collect Accounting Statistics (appCollectStats) in this section Collect Accounting Statistics (appGrpCollectStats) in this section Collect Accounting Statistics (protCollectStats) in this section Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppCollectStats) in this section Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppGrpCollectStats) in this section Collect Accounting Statistics (subProtCollectStats) in this section
132-2
May 2009
Collect Accounting Statistics (appCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for an application. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Collect Accounting Statistics (appGrpCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for an application group. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Collect Accounting Statistics (protCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for a protocol for a protocol per subscriber for the subscribers enabled on the NE for accounting statistics collection. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for an application per subscriber for the subscribers enabled on the NE for accounting statistics collection. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppGrpCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for an application group per subscriber. The options are:
May 2009
132-3
Collect Accounting Statistics (subProtCollectStats)

The Collection Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of application assurance accounting statistics is enabled for a protocol per subscriber. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Description

Displayed Name
Divert (divert)
The Divert parameter specifies whether the traffic for the subscriber associated with the policy is diverted to the ISA-AA MDA. The options are.
Disabled (default) Enabled Entry ID (id)

The Entry ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the application filter policy identifier. The range is 1 to 65 535.
Flow Full High Watermark (flowFullHighMark)

The Flow Full High Watermark parameter specifies that an alarm is raised when the high flow table capacity threshold is reached. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 95.
Flow Full Low Watermark (flowFullLowMark)

The Flow Full Low Watermark parameter specifies the level the flow table capacity must reach before the high watermark alarm is cleared. The range is 0 to 100. The default is 90.
Flow Set-up Direction (flowSetupDir)

The Flow Set-up Direction parameter specifies the flow set up direction to which the application filter entry is to be applied. Table 132-2 describes the parameter options.
132-4
May 2009
132 Application Assurance parameters Table 132-2 Flow Set-up Direction parameter
Option Subscriber to Network Network to Subscriber Both (default) Option description The application filter entry is applied to flows initiated by a local subscriber. The application filter entry is applied to flows initiated from a remote destination towards a local subscriber. The application filter entry is applied for subscriber-to-network and network-to-subscriber traffic.
IP Protocol Number (ipProtocolNumber)

The IP Protocol Number parameter specifies an IP protocol as a match criterion for the filter. Table 132-3 lists the parameter options. The default is ALL.
Table 132-3 IP Protocol Number parameter
Options ALL HOPOPT ICMP IGMP GGP IP ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX DCN_MEAS (1 of 2) SEP 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IPv6Route IPv6Frag IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA ESP AH I_NLSP SWIPE IPPC any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP TCF IFMP PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI SMP
May 2009
132-5
Options HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 NETBLT MFE_NSP MERIT_INP (2 of 2) NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_No Nxt IPv6_Opts any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN RVD EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) GMTP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE SCTP FC RSVP_E2E_IGNORE
IP Protocol Operator (ipProtocolNumberOperator)

The IP Protocol Operator parameter specifies the operator applied against the value specified by the IP Protocol Number parameter. The options are:
None (default) Equal Not Equal Network Address (networkAddr)

The Network Address parameter specifies the network address to match against the IP address that a local subscriber is communicating with.
Network Address Operator (networkAddrOperator)

The Network Address Operator parameter specifies the operator applied against the value specified by the Network Address parameter. The options are:
None (default) Equal Not Equal Less Than Greater Than Range
132-6
May 2009
Network Address Prefix Length (networkAddrPrefixLength)

The Network Address Prefix Length parameter specifies the length of the prefix of the network address. The range is 1 to 32. The default is 0.
Network Port (networkPort)

The Network Port parameter specifies a port number to match against the TCP/UDP port number that a local subscriber is communicating with. Range is 0 to 65 535. Default is 0.
Network Port Operator (networkPortOperator)

The Network Port Operator parameter specifies the operator applied against the value specified by the Network Port parameter. The options are:
None (default) Equal Not Equal Less Than Greater Than
Protocol Operator (protocolOperator)

The Protocol Operator parameter specifies whether the policy is preconfigured on the node or if the policy is user-defined. The options are:
None (default) Equal Not Equal Subscriber name (displayedName)

The Subscriber name parameter specifies a string that identifies a subscriber identifier. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
May 2009
132-7
132-8
May 2009
133.1 Common Policies menu parameters
133-2
May 2009
133-1
133.1
Common Policies menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the 5620 SAM Policies menu forms and child forms.
The Action parameter specifies the action that should be performed with the packet when the match specified criteria are met. Table 133-1 describes the parameter options.
Option drop forward Option description Discard the packet. Forward the packet based on the specified next hop parameters. Perform the action specified by the Default Action parameter for the filter. Forward the packet to the URL configured in the Redirect URL parameter. Forward the packet based on the specified SAP parameters. Dependencies The parameters in the Next Hop Routing tab must be configured. The parameters in the Forwarding Destination tab for a specified SAP must be configured. The parameters in the Forwarding Destination tab for a specified SDP must be configured.
default (default) HTTP redirect forward (SAP)
forward (SDP)
Forward the packet based on the specified SDP parameters.

Up Down
The default value depends on the type of policy.
133-2
May 2009
Alarm All Differences

The Alarm All Differences parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM raises an alarm during a policy audit when differences in configurable and read-create attributes and entries that are not applicable to the device release are found between local and global policies. When the parameter is disabled, an alarm is raised if any differences in configurable and read-create attributes and entries that are applicable to the device release are found. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Auto-Assign ID

Enabled (default) Disabled CIR (kbps) (cir)

The CIR (kbps) parameter specifies the administrative committed information rate for a queue. The parameter specifies the rate at which the system prioritizes the queue over other queues that are competing for the same bandwidth. For access ingress interfaces, the CIR also defines the rate that packets are considered in-profile by the system. In-profile packets are preferentially queued by the system at egress and at subsequent next-hop nodes that the packet traverses. To be properly handled as in- or out-of-profile throughout the network, the packets must be marked accordingly for profiling at each hop. The range depends on the queue type and on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. Table 133-2 lists the parameter ranges for different queue types. You can also choose the MAX check box, which specifies the maximum available CIR. The default is 0.
Table 133-2 CIR (kbps) parameter
Object HSMDA queues Queues (except HSMDA queues) Range -1 to 40 000 000 -1 to 100 000 000
The MAX check box specifies whether the CIR (kbps) parameter is set to infinity or can be configured. The options are:

When the MAX check box is enabled, you cannot configure the CIR parameter.
May 2009
133-3
CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation)

The CIR Adaptation parameter specifies the method used by the device to derive the operational CIR setting when the queue is provisioned in hardware. Table 133-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-3 CIR Adaptation parameter
Option Closest (default) Min Option description The operational CIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. The operational CIR for the queue is equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. The operational CIR for the queue is equal to or less than the administrative rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. Dependencies
Max
CIR Level
Table 133-4 lists where to find more information about the CIR Level parameter.
Table 133-4 CIR Level parameter
Parameter CIR Level in Parent Scheduler panel CIR Level in Port Parent panel See See CIR Level (cirLevel) in this section See CIR Level (portParentCirLevel) in this section
CIR Level (cirLevel)

The CIR Level parameter specifies the CIR priority level of the tier 2 or tier 3 child scheduler in comparison to other child schedulers with the same parent that are contending for a CIR from the parent. The parameter is configurable when the Tier parameter is set to the 2 or 3 option. The range is Default, 1 to 8. The default is Default. The higher the number, the higher the CIR priority level of the child scheduler within CIR request from the parent. Child schedulers with the CIR Level parameter set lower than other child schedulers do not receive CIR bandwidth distribution until all child schedulers with a higher level have reached their maximum bandwidth allocation, or have no packets to pass. When two child schedulers have the same CIR Level parameter value, the CIR Weight parameter determines which scheduler first receives the CIR bandwidth.
133-4
May 2009
For example, there are three tier 2 child schedulers with the same tier 1 parent scheduler:
child scheduler ABC has its CIR Level parameter set to 3 child scheduler DEF has its CIR Level parameter set to 6 child scheduler GHI has its CIR Level parameter set to 7
When the parent scheduler receives traffic within its CIR, bandwidth is allocated to the child schedulers. Child scheduler GHI receives its CIR bandwidth requirement from the parent scheduler before DEF and ABC. When GHI reaches its maximum CIR requirements and there is CIR bandwidth remaining, scheduler DEF receives the CIR bandwidth before scheduler ABC.
CIR Level (portParentCirLevel)

The CIR Level parameter specifies the CIR priority level of child schedulers and queues in comparison to other child schedulers and queues for within-CIR distribution. The range is 1 (lowest priority) to 8 (highest priority). The default is 1.
CIR Weight
Table 133-5 lists where to find more information about the CIR Weight parameter.
Table 133-5 CIR Weight parameter
Parameter CIR Weight in Parent Scheduler panel CIR Weight in Port Parent panel See See CIR Weight (cirWeight) in this section See CIR Weight (portParentCirWeight) in this section
CIR Weight (cirWeight)

The CIR Weight parameter specifies the relative importance of a child scheduler in comparison to other child schedulers that have identical CIR Level parameter settings. The parameter is configurable when the Tier parameter is set to the 2 or 3 option. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 001. A setting of 000 specifies that the child scheduler receives CIR bandwidth only after all non-000 weighted child schedulers have received CIR bandwidth.
CIR Weight (portParentCirWeight)

The CIR Weight parameter specifies the relative importance of a child scheduler or queue in comparison to other child schedulers or queues that have identical CIR Level parameter settings. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 001.
May 2009
133-5
Committed Burst Size (kb) (committedBurstSize)

The Committed Burst Size (kb) parameter specifies the committed burst pool size for a queue and overrides the default reserved pool burst for the queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device will calculate committed burst pool size based on the CIR and the PIR. The default is default.
Configuration Mode (configurationMode)

The Configuration Mode parameter specifies the mode in which the global policy is configured and determines whether the policy can be distributed to the network elements. Table 133-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-6 Configuration Mode parameter
Option Draft (default) Option description The policy is not reviewed or approved for distribution to network elements. The policy can be synchronized. The 5620 SAM creates a global policy in draft mode for local policies discovered from the network or created through CLI. Released The policy is reviewed and approved for distribution to network elements. Releasing a global policy also distributes the policy to existing local definitions. The policy can be synchronized. Can be distributed Dependencies Cannot be distributed
The Destination IP parameter specifies the destination IP address to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. Specify an IP address for the Destination IP parameter in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. When a packet contains the destination IP address specified by the Destination IP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
Distribution Mode (distributionMode)

The Distribution Mode parameter specifies whether the local policy is synchronized with the associated global policy. Table 133-7 describes the parameter options.
133-6
May 2009
133 Common Policies menu parameters Table 133-7 Distribution Mode parameter
Option Sync With Global (default) Option description The local policy is synchronized with the global policy at all times. The local instance cannot be modified. Local policies discovered from the network or created through CLI are in Sync With Global mode. Local Edit Only You can modify the local instance only which affects the associated network element. Changes to the global policy do not affect the local policy unless a synchronization operation is manually performed. Dependencies
DSAP (dsap)
The DSAP parameter specifies an Ethernet 802.2 LLC DSAP value or range as the match criterion. You must enable the parameter to specify a value. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1, which means that filtering for this parameter is disabled. This parameter is configurable when the Frame Type parameter is set to e802dot2LLC.
DSAP Mask (dsapMask)

The DSAP Mask parameter specifies a mask value as a match criterion when you filter on a DSAP value. The parameter is configurable when the DSAP parameter is enabled. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1, which means that filtering for this parameter is disabled. This parameter is configurable only when the Frame Type parameter is set to e802dot2LLC.
Default
The Default parameter specifies whether a parameter is set to the default value or can be configured. The options are:
disabled enabled (default)

When the Default parameter is set to enabled, you cannot configure the associated parameters.
Default FC (defaultFc)
The Default FC parameter specifies the default forwarding class for packets that ingress a network interface which uses the network policy. All packets with undefined DSCP or LSP EXP bits will be mapped to the specified forwarding class and associated profile. The default profile is specified by the Default FC Profile parameter. Table 133-8 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
133-7
133 Common Policies menu parameters Table 133-8 Default FC parameter

Option be (default) l2 af l1 Option description Specifies that packets in the class are treated, at best, as out-of-profile assured service packets. There are no delivery guarantees. The best-effort and low-2 forwarding class options are intended for best effort traffic. Specifies that packets in the class are forwarded or discarded based on the availability of bandwidth on network elements. The assured and low-1 forwarding class options are intended for assured traffic. Packets transmitted that are at or below the committed rate are marked in-profile. Packets transmitted that are above the committed rate will be marked out-of-profile. h2 ef h1 nc Specifies that packets in the class are always serviced at congestion points over other forwarding classes. These options are intended for high-priority traffic. Dependencies
The h2 and ef forwarding class options are intended for delay/jitter sensitive traffic. The h1 forwarding class option is intended for secondary network control traffic or delay/jitter sensitive traffic. The nc forwarding class option is intended for network control traffic.
Destination Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2)

The Destination Port parameter specifies the destination port match criterion for a packet. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter value is TCP or UDP. Table 133-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-9 Destination Port parameter
133-8
May 2009

The Displayed Name parameter specifies a name for the created policy object.
Note You cannot use the : symbol in a policy name. The
The range depends on the type of object being configured. Table 133-10 lists the Name parameter ranges for different policy object types.
Table 133-10 Displayed Name parameter
Object Forwarding subclass Residential Subscriber policy Shared Risk Link Group policy 802.1x policy OmniSwitch QoS action, condition, or policy Other Range (characters) 0 to 29 0 to 32 0 to 32 1 to 32 1 to 31 0 to 80
Click on the Distribute button to open the Distribute form. From the Distribute form, you can specify whether the local policy is global and distributed across all selected nodes. Policies are also automatically distributed to devices when they are used by resources on the device.
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the DiffServ Code Point value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the DSCP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter. Table 133-11 lists the parameter options.
Options be (default) cp1 (1 of 2) ef cp2 nc1 cp3 nc2 cp4
May 2009
133-9
Options cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 (2 of 2) cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask length associated with a destination IP address. The destination IP address and associated subnet mask are used as the match criteria for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
Entry ID (id)
The Entry ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter entry. The entry ID determines the order of all entry IDs within a specific filter ID, in which the matching criteria specified in the collection is compared. Packets are compared to entry IDs in an ascending order. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Expedite (expedite)
The Expedite parameter specifies the method that the device uses to service the queue in hardware. Although parental virtual schedulers can be defined for the queue, they only enforce how the queue vies for bandwidth with other queues associated with the same scheduler hierarchy. Expediting provides an internal mechanism which defines access rules when the queue competes for bandwidth with queues in other virtual schedulers. Table 133-12 describes the parameter options.
133-10
May 2009
133 Common Policies menu parameters Table 133-12 Expedite parameter

Option Auto (default) Option description Specifies that the device automatically defines the way that the queue is serviced in hardware. Specifies that the queue is treated in an expedited manner when all forwarding classes mapped to the queue are expedited types (nc, ef, h1 or h2). The queue is treated in a non-expedited manner when a single non-expedited forwarding class (be, af, l1, or l2) is mapped to the queue. Specifies that the queue is treated in an expedited manner regardless of the forwarding classes that are mapped to the queue Specifies that the queue is treated in an non-expedited manner regardless of the forwarding classes that are mapped to the queue Dependencies You cannot configure the parameter for network policy queue 9. It is set to Auto by default and cannot be changed.
Yes No
Filter ID (id)
See ID in this section for more information.

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class to map to an object. Table 133-13 describes the parameter options.
For Queue mapping Description Specifies the forwarding class that is mapped to the queue specified by the Queue ID, Multicast Queue ID, Broadcast Queue ID, and Unknown Queue ID parameters. Options
Dot1p, DSCP, Precedence, IP, and MAC mapping
Specifies the forwarding class to which packets with the specified match criteria are mapped. The default option specifies that packets maintain their previous forwarding class. The parameter options are described in Table 133-8.
be (default) l2 af l1 h2 ef h1 nc default (default) be l2 af l1 h2 ef h1 nc
May 2009
133-11
Fragment (fragment)
The Fragment parameter specifies whether fragmented or non-fragmented packets are used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. Fragmented packets have either the MF bit set, or have the Fragment Offset field of the IP header set to a non-zero value. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. The options are:
off (default) false true

When a packet matches the value specified by the Fragment parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
High Priority Reserved (highPriorityReserved)

The High Priority Reserved parameter specifies the percentage of buffer pool space for the queue that is only used by high-priority packets. The range is -1 to 100, with -1 indicating default. The default is default, which means that the device will calculate high priority reserved pool size based on the CIR and the PIR values.
HSMDA Counter Override (hsmdaCntrOvr)

The HSMDA Counter Override parameter specifies the counter to use for traffic that matches the specified entry. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0. A value of 0 means that the default counters should be used.
HSMDA Egress Profiling (hsmdaDot1pProfile)

The HSMDA Egress Profiling parameter specifies whether egress profiling on HSMDA queues is performed. The options are:
false (default) true HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes)

Table 133-14 lists where to find information about the HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) parameter.
133-12
May 2009
133 Common Policies menu parameters Table 133-14 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) parameter
Parameter HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) for egress HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) for ingress See See HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaEgrPackByteOff) in this section See HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaIngPackByteOff) in this section
HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaEgrPackByteOff)

The Packet Byte Offset parameter specifies the offset of an HSMDA egress policy. The parameter is configurable when the Override check box is enabled. The range is -32 to 31. The default is no override. When the Override check box is enabled, the value entered overrides the configured offset of the HSMDA egress policy.
HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaIngPackByteOff)

The Packet Byte Offset parameter specifies the offset of an HSMDA ingress policy. The parameter is configurable when the Override check box is enabled. The range is -32 to 31. The default is no override. When the Override check box is enabled, the value entered overrides the configured offset of the HSMDA ingress policy.
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the object. For queues, the range is 1 to 16. For policy IDs, the range is 1 to 65535. You can configure the parameter for policies when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is set to disabled.
Inner Encap Value (fwdSapInnerEncapValue)

The Inner Encap Value parameter specifies the SAP Inner encapsulation of the destination for this filter entry. A value of 0 indicates that either the SAP encapsulation value is not specified when Port Name and Service Id have valid values or there is no SAP destination. A value different from 0 can only be specified if the value of the Action property of this entry is forward SAP. The default is 0.
IP Address (address)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the host. You can configure the parameter when the IP Address Pool Name (poolName) parameter is not configured and the Use GI Address (useGiAddress)parameter is set to False. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
LAG ID (lagId)
The LAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG. The range is 1 to 200 for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 64 for the 7450 ESS-1, 7750 SR-1, and the 7710 SR.
The LAG ID is identical for all members of a LAG. The LAG ID creates an association between a logical IP interface and a LAG. An IP interface can be associated with a port or the system loopback address.
Level
Table 133-15 lists where to find more information about the Level parameter.
Table 133-15 Level parameter
Parameter Level in Parent Scheduler panel Level in Port Parent panel See See Level (level) in this section See Level (portParentLevel) in this section
Level (level)
The Level parameter specifies the priority level of the tier 2 or tier 3 child scheduler in comparison to other child schedulers with the same parent scheduler. The Level parameter helps determine relative importance when children are contending for bandwidth. The parameter is configurable when the Tier parameter is set to the 2 or 3 option. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1. The higher the number, the higher the priority level of the child scheduler bandwidth request. Child schedulers with the Level parameter set lower than other child schedulers do not receive bandwidth until all child schedulers with a higher level have reached their maximum bandwidth allocation, or have no packets to pass. When two child schedulers have the same Level parameter value, the Weight parameter determines which scheduler first receives bandwidth. For example, there are three tier 2 schedulers with the same tier 1 parent scheduler:
child scheduler alpha has its Level parameter set to 3 child scheduler beta has its Level parameter set to 6 child scheduler omega has its Level parameter set to 7
When the parent scheduler receives traffic above its CIR, bandwidth is allocated to the child schedulers. Child scheduler omega receives the bandwidth from the parent scheduler before beta and alpha. When omega reaches its maximum bandwidth requirements, and there is bandwidth remaining, scheduler beta receives the bandwidth before scheduler alpha.
Level (portParentLevel)
The Level parameter specifies the priority level of child schedulers or queues in comparison to other child schedulers or queues with the same port parent scheduler for above-CIR bandwidth distribution. The Level parameter helps determine relative importance when child schedulers or queues contend for bandwidth. The range is 1 (lowest priority) to 8 (highest priority). The default is 1.
133-14
May 2009
Child schedulers or queues with the Level parameter set lower than other child schedulers or queues do not receive bandwidth until all of the schedulers and queues with a higher level reach their maximum bandwidth allocation, or have no packets to pass. When two child schedulers or queues have the same Level parameter value, the Weight parameter determines which scheduler first receives bandwidth. For example, there are three tier 2 schedulers with the same tier 1 parent scheduler:
child scheduler alpha has its Level parameter set to 3 child scheduler beta has its Level parameter set to 6 child omega has its Level parameter set to 7
When the parent scheduler receives traffic above its CIR, bandwidth is allocated to the child schedulers. Child scheduler omega receives the bandwidth from the parent scheduler before beta and alpha. When omega reaches its maximum bandwidth requirements, and there is bandwidth remaining, scheduler beta receives the bandwidth before scheduler alpha.
Loggable (loggable)
The Loggable parameter specifies whether logging information about MAC filtering is generated and how this information, if any, is managed. Table 133-16 describes the options.
Table 133-16 Loggable parameter
Option None (default) Log Log Input Option description No logging information is generated. An informational logging message about the packet that matches the entry is sent to the 7250 SAS or Telco console. An informational logging message about the packet that matches the entry and includes input source information is stored on the 7250 SAS or Telco device.
Maximum Burst Size (kb) (maximumBurstSize)

The Maximum Burst Size (kb) parameter specifies the maximum burst pool size for a queue and overrides the default reserved burst pool for the queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device will calculate committed burst pool size based on the CIR and the PIR. The default is default.
The Name parameter specifies a name for the created object. The range is 0 to 32 characters. The characters must be 7-bit ASCII characters, excluding double quotation marks.
May 2009
133-15
Outer Encap Value (fwdSapOuterEncapValue)

The Outer Encap Value parameter specifies the SAP outer encapsulation of the destination for this filter entry. A value of 0 indicates that either the SAP encapsulation value is not specified when Port Name and Service Id have valid values or there is no SAP destination. A value different from 0 can only be specified if the value of the Action property of this entry is forward SAP. The default is 0.
Override CIR
The Override CIR parameter specifies the override value for the administrative committed information rate for a queue. The default is MAX which specifies the maximum available CIR. The range depends on the type of queue being configured. Table 133-17 lists the ranges.
Table 133-17 Override CIR parameter
Queue type HSMDA queue Queue Range The range is 0 to 40 000 000 kbps, depending on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. The range is 0 to 100 000 000 kbps, depending on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied.
Override CIR Adaptation

The Override CIR Adaptation parameter specifies the override value for the method used by the device to derive the operational CIR setting when the queue is provisioned in hardware Table 133-18 describes the parameter options. You can also choose the Default option, which specifies that the operational CIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter.
Table 133-18 Override CIR Adaptation parameter
Option Closest (default) Min Option description The operational CIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. The operational CIR for the queue is equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. The operational CIR for the queue is equal to or less than the administrative rate specified by the CIR (kbps) parameter. Dependencies
Max
133-16
May 2009
Override Committed Burst Size

The Override Committed Burst Size parameter specifies the override value for the Committed burst pool size for a queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device will calculate committed burst pool size based on the CIR and the PIR. The default is default.
Override High Priority Reserved

The Override High Priority Reserved parameter specifies the override value for the percentage of buffer pool space for the queue that is only used by high-priority packets. The range is -1 to 100, with -1 indicating default. The default is default, which means that the device calculates the high priority reserved pool size based on the CIR and the PIR values.
Override Maximum Burst Size

The Override Maximum Burst Size parameter specifies the override value for the maximum burst pool size for a queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device calculates the committed burst pool size based on the CIR and PIR.
Override PIR
The Override PIR parameter specifies the override value for the administrative peak information rate for the queue. The default is MAX which specifies the maximum available CIR. The range depends on the type of queue being configured. Table 133-19 lists the ranges.
Table 133-19 Override PIR parameter
Queue type HSMDA queue Queue Range The range is 0 to 40 000 000 kbps, depending on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. The range is 0 to 100 000 000 kbps, depending on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied.
Override PIR Adaptation

The Override PIR Adaptation parameter specifies the override value for the method used by the device to derive the operational PIR setting when the queue is provisioned in hardware
May 2009
133-17
Table 133-20 describes the parameter options. You can also choose the Default option, which specifies that the operational PIR for the queue is the rate closest to the rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter.
Table 133-20 Override PIR Adaptation parameter
Option Closest (default) Min Option description The operational PIR for the queue will be the rate closest to the rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. The operational PIR for the queue will be equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. The operational PIR for the queue will be equal to or less than the administrative rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. Dependencies
Max
Override Port Average Overhead

The Override Port Average Overhead parameter specifies the override value for the average percentage that the offered load to a queue is expected to expand during the frame encapsulation process before sending traffic on queues that egress a SONET or SDH port or channel. The range is 0 to 100. Default specifies that the egress QoS policy for the queue is applied.
Override Summed CIR

The Override Summed CIR parameter specifies the override value for the summed CIR The options are:
true false (default) Path ID (fwdSdpBindPathId)

The Path ID parameter specifies the ID of the SDP binding path of the destination for this filter entry. A value of 0 indicates that there is currently no SDP binding defined. A value different from 0 can only be specified if the value of the Action object of this entry is forward (SDP).
133-18
May 2009
PIR (kbps) (pir)

The PIR (kbps) parameter specifies the administrative peak information rate for a queue. The parameter specifies the maximum rate that the queue can transmit packets through the switch fabric for access ingress, or out an egress interface for access egress queues. Specifying a value for the PIR parameter does not guarantee that the queue can transmit at the intended rate. The actual rate sustained by the queue can be limited by oversubscription factors or available egress bandwidth. The range is 1 to 100 000 000 kbps, dependant on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. You can also choose the MAX check box The default is MAX. The MAX check box specifies whether the PIR (kbps) parameter is set to infinity or can be configured. The options are:

When the MAX check box is enabled, you cannot configure the PIR parameter.
PIR Adaptation (pirAdaptation)

The PIR Adaptation parameter specifies the method used by the device to derive the operational PIR setting when the queue is provisioned in hardware. Table 133-21 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-21 PIR Adaptation parameter
Option Closest (default) Min Option description The operational PIR for the queue will be the rate closest to the rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. The operational PIR for the queue will be equal to or greater than the administrative rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. The operational PIR for the queue will be equal to or less than the administrative rate specified by the PIR (kbps) parameter. Dependencies
Max
Port Average Overhead (%) (portAvgOverhead)

The Port Average Overhead (%) parameter specifies the average percentage that the offered load to a queue is expected to expand during the frame encapsulation process before sending traffic on queues that egress a SONET or SDH port or channel. The default is 0. The range is 0 to 100.
Port Name (fwdSapPortName)

The Port Name parameter specifies the destination SAP port for this filter entry. A value of empty string indicates that there is currently no SAP destination defined.
Port Parent (portParent)

The Port Parent parameter specifies whether you can define a direct child-parent relationship between a queue and a port scheduler priority level. The options are:
true false (default) Precedence (precedence)

The Precedence parameter specifies the IP precedence value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress or egress the access interface to which the access ingress or egress policy is applied. The range is default, 0 to 7. The default is 0. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the Precedence parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the enqueuing priority with which to map packets that are marked with the specified Dot1p, DSCP, Precedence, IP, or MAC value. Table 133-22 describes the parameter options.
Option default (default) low high Option description Specifies that the probability of enqueuing a packet decreases when the ingress queue is congested Specifies that the probability of enqueuing a packet decreases when the ingress queue is congested Specifies that the probability of enqueuing a packet increases when the ingress queue is congested Dependencies
Profile ID (id)
The Profile ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the object. The parameter is configurable for profiles when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535.
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies the protocol to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied.
133-20
May 2009
When a packet uses the protocol specified by the Protocol parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter. Table 133-23 lists the parameter options.
Options ALL (default) HOPOPT ICMP IGMP GGP IP ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX DCN_MEAS HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 (1 of 2) SEP 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IPv6Route IPv6Frag IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA ESP AH I_NLSP SWIPE NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_No Nxt IPv6_Opts any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) IPPC any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP TCF EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP IFMP PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI SMP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE
May 2009
133-21
Options NETBLT MFE_NSP MERIT_INP (2 of 2) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN RVD ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) GMTP SCTP FC RSVP_E2E_IGNORE
Queue ID (queueId)
The Queue ID parameter specifies a unicast queue to be mapped to a forwarding class. Click on the Select button to list and choose a queue. The queue is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter. The mapping that you specify overrides the default forwarding class-toqueue mapping for unicast traffic.
Redirect URL (redirectURL)

The Redirect URL parameter specifies the URL to redirect a subscriber to when the Action parameter is set to HTTP redirect. The subscriber web browser closes the original TCP connection and opens a new connection to the web portal. The subscriber can use the web portal to create or modify a service profile. The web portal updates the ACL policy, directly or through another system such as the 5750 SSC, to remove the redirection policy. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
Scheduler button
Click on the Scheduler button to list and choose a virtual scheduler for the object.
Scope (scope)
The Scope parameter specifies whether the policy can be applied to individual or multiple SAPs and network ports. Table 133-24 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-24 Scope parameter
Option template (default) exclusive Option description Policy can be applied to multiple SAPs or network ports. You can override Access Ingress or Access Egress policies that have the Scope parameter set to template. Policy can only be applied to a single SAP or network port. An error message appears if you attempt to assign the policy to another SAP or network port. You can reassign the policy if you remove the assignment to the original SAP or network port. Dependencies
133-22
May 2009
Set to Local Edit Only upon finding of differences (localEditDifferences)

The Set to Local Edit Only upon finding of differences parameter specifies whether the local policy distribution mode will be changed to local edit only when the audit discovers differences between local and global policy.
Set to Sync with Global upon finding of no differences (globalSyncNonDifferences)

The Set to Sync with Global upon finding no differences parameter specifies whether the local policy distribution mode is changed to sync with global when the audit discovers no differences between local and global policies.
The Source IP parameter specifies the source IP address to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. Specify an IP address for the Source IP parameter in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. When a packet contains the source IP address specified by the Source IP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter.
Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2)

The Source Port parameter specifies the source port match criterion for a packet. The parameter is configurable when the Protocol parameter value is TCP or UDP. Table 133-25 describes the parameter options.
Table 133-25 Source Port parameter
May 2009
133-23

The Src Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask length associated with a source IP address. The source IP address and associated subnet mask are used as the match criteria for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
SSAP (ssap)
The SSAP parameter specifies an Ethernet 802.2 LLC SSAP value or range as match criterion. You must enable the parameter to specify a value. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1, which means that filtering on this parameter is disabled. This parameter is configurable only when the Frame Type parameter is set to e802dot2LLC.
SSAP Mask (ssapMask)

The SSAP Mask parameter specifies a mask value to use as a match criterion when you filter on an SSAP value. The parameter is configurable when the DSAP parameter is enabled. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1, indicating that filtering on this parameter is disabled. This parameter is configurable only when the Frame Type parameter is set to e802dot2LLC.
Summed CIR (summedCir)

The Summed CIR parameter specifies that the CIR rate be used as the summed CIR values of the children schedulers or queues. The options are:
true (default) false Synchronize (syncTo)

Click on the Synchronize button to open the Synchronize form. From the Synchronize form, you can specify that the local policy is global and distributed across all selected nodes.
VC ID (fwdSdpBindVcId)
The VC ID parameter specifies the identification number of the virtual circuit for the SDP binding destination of this filter entry. A value of 0 indicates that there is currently no SDP binding defined.
VLAN Priority Tag (vpt)

The VLAN Priority Tag parameter specifies the Dot1p priority value as a match criterion. The parameter is configurable when the check box is selected. Table 133-26 lists the parameter options.
133-24
May 2009
133 Common Policies menu parameters Table 133-26 VLAN Priority Tag parameter
Option default (default) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Option description Best effort Background Spare Excellent effort Controlled load Video Voice Network control
Weight
Table 133-27 lists where to find more information about the Level parameter.
Parameter Weight in Parent Scheduler panel Weight in Port Parent panel See See Weight (weight) in this section See Weight (portParentWeight) in this section
Weight (weight)
The Weight parameter specifies the relative importance of a child scheduler in comparison to other child schedulers that have identical Level parameter settings. The parameter is configurable when the Tier parameter is set to the 2 or 3 option. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 001. A setting of 000 specifies that the child scheduler receives bandwidth from the parent only after all non-000 weighted child schedulers have received bandwidth.
Weight (portParentWeight)
The Weight parameter specifies the relative importance of a child scheduler or queue in comparison to other child schedulers or queues that have identical Level parameter settings. The range is 000 to 100. The default is 001. The higher the number, the higher the priority of the child scheduler bandwidth request. A setting of 000 specifies that the child scheduler or queue receives bandwidth from the parent only after all non-000 weighted child schedulers and queues have received bandwidth.
May 2009
133-25
133-26
May 2009
Tools menu parameters
134 Manage Tests parameters 135 Script manager parameters 136 Manage MIB Statistics Policies parameters 137 File parameters 138 Accounting parameters 139 Server performance statistics parameters 140 Statistics Records parameters 141 Manage Schedules and Scheduled Tasks parameters 142 Analyze Profile Assignment parameters 143 Time Range Entry Assignment parameters 144 Copy/Move SAPs menu parameters 145 Common Tools menu parameters
May 2009
May 2009
134.1 Manage Tests parameters
134-2
May 2009
134-1
134.1
Manage Tests parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Tests form and child forms.
Add Hop Info (createHopEntries)

The Add Hop Info parameter specifies whether the managed device keeps a record of the ICMP trace test hops, on a per-hop basis, when the test is run. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Administrative State

Age (seconds) (age)

The Age (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, that an OAM MAC address is aged in the FIB. The default is 3600.
ANCP String (ancpString)

The ANCP-string parameter specifies an existing ANCP string which is the ASCII representation of the DSLAM circuit ID. The range is 0 to 63 characters.
ATM Interface ID (pvcConnection)

The ATM Interface ID parameter specifies the ID of the ATM PVC against which the ATM ping is performed. Click on the Select button and choose an ATM PVC connection from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the ATM PVC connection. The VPI and VCI of the PVC are added to the form.
Auto-Assign ID
See Auto-Assign ID (id) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Bypass Routing (bypassRouting)

The Bypass Routing parameter specifies whether to send the ICMP ping request to a host on a directly attached network, thereby bypassing the routing table. The options are:

When the Egress Interface Index (egressIfIndex) is set to any value except 0, the Bypass Routing parameter must be set to disabled.
134-2
May 2009
CCM Interval (ccmInterval)

The CCM Interval parameter specifies, in seconds, how often continuity messaging is run on the MEP. The options are:
1 10 60 (default) 600

The CC Messages parameter specifies whether or not continuity messaging is run on the MEP. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Clear Alarm on Falling Threshold (clearAlarmOnFalling)

The Clear Alarm on Falling Threshold parameter specifies whether to clear an existing threshold-crossing alarm, when a threshold is crossed due to a falling counter and the threshold condition no longer exists. The options are:

For the measurements to be of value, all managed devices that are part of the diagnostic must use consistent clocking; for example, have NTP enabled using a common timing source. When the Threshold Value (thresholdValue) parameter value is exceeded, the alarm is raised against the generic class, using the alarm name SasThresholdExceededAlarm.
Control Plane (sendControl)

The Control Plane parameter specifies whether the OAM request is sent on the control plane, rather than on the data plane. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Count

The Count parameter specifies the number of frames that are sent during an OS 6850 ping. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 6.
May 2009
134-3
Count (count)
The count parameter specifies the number of messages that the access node uses to test the circuit. The range is 1 to 32. The default is 1.
Customer ID
The Customer ID parameter specifies the customer to which the ANCP loopback diagnostic is performed.
Data Pattern (pattern)

The Data Pattern parameter specifies the repeated pattern that is inserted into the data field of an ICMP ping. You can configure the parameter when the Positional Data Pattern (positionalPattern) parameter is disabled. The options are:
-1 (default, indicating disabled) 0 to 65 535 Data Size (meptransmitLbmDataTlv)

The Data Size parameter specifies the size of the loopback message. The range is 1 to 1500. The default is 0.
Destination Address (destinationIpAddr)

The Destination Address parameter specifies the destination IP address for the multicast trace OAM diagnostic. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Destination IP Address (targetIpAddress)

The Destination IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the CPE device that is the object of the ping. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Destination MAC (mepTransmitLbmdestMac)

The Destination MAC parameter specifies the configured MAC address for the MEP. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
134-4
May 2009
Destination Path Address (pathDest)

The Destination Path Address parameter specifies a unique path for the LSP ping. This parameter allows you to configure ECMP paths. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Destination Type (destinationType)

The Destination Type parameter specifies the type of destination. Table 134-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 134-1 Destination Type parameter
Option End-to-End (default) Segment Option description Sends a unidirectional ping to the connection endpoint Sends a unidirectional ping to the segment termination point Dependencies
DiffServ Field (diffServField)

The DiffServ Field parameter specifies the DiffServ value for the test packet. The value is stored in the Differentiated Services field in the IP packet used to encapsulate the OAM traceroute or ping probe. The Differentiated Services field is defined as the type of service octet in an IPv4 header. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0. This parameter can be used to determine what effect an explicit Differentiated Services field setting has on a trace response. Field usage is often not supported by IP implementations. A value of 0 means that the function represented by this option is not supported. Useful service octet values include 16 (low delay) and 8 (high throughput).
up (default) down Direction (mepDirectionAccessInterfaces)

The Direction parameter specifies the direction the auto-created MEPs will have on MEP Creation on Access Interface (autoMepCreationAccessInterface). When the direction is up the packet is sent toward the router. When the direction is down the packet is sent to the customer node. The options are:
up (default) down
Direction (mepDirectionSdpBindings)
The Direction parameter specifies the direction the auto-created MEPs will have on MEP Creation on all SDP Bindings (autoMepCreationSdpBindings). When the direction is up the packet is sent toward the router. When the direction is down the packet is sent to the customer node. The options are:
up (default) down DNS Name (dnsName)

The DNS Name parameter specifies the DNS name to be resolved to an IP address. For example, to resolve the DNS name alcatel.com, type alcatel.com. The range is a string of 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
DNS Server Address (targetIpAddress)

The DNS Server Address parameter specifies the IP address for the DNS server, which is reachable from the managed devices. This value is typically available using a show bof command on the managed device. The value is a valid IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
DNS Server Type (dnsServerType)

The DNS Server Type parameter specifies the type of DNS server against which the IP address resolution is being performed. The options are:
User Choice Primary (default) Secondary Tertiary
Do Not Fragment (doNotFragment)

The Do Not Fragment parameter specifies whether the Dont Fragment (DF) bit is set in the ICMP ping packet. The options are:

When the parameter is disabled, the bit is not set.
DR IP Address (drIPAddress)
The DR IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for the PIM interface on the destination router. The value is a valid IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
134-6
May 2009
Duration (minutes) (timer)

The Duration (minutes) parameter specifies the duration of the continuity check test. The range is 1 to 1000m. The default is 1.
Egress Interface Index (egressIfIndex)

The Egress Interface Index parameter specifies the interface index of the interface used to transmit the ICMP ping packets. The options are 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0. When you enable the Bypass Routing parameter, the parameter must be set to 0.
Entity Type (testedEntityType)

The Entity Type parameter specifies the type of object to which the test policy or test suite applies. In the context of a test policy, the parameter determines the types of available test definitions. In the context of a test suite, the parameter determines the types of tests that the 5620 SAM generates. Table 134-2 lists the parameter options.
Table 134-2 Entity Type parameter
Option None VLL Service (default) VPLS VPRN Service Mirror Service Tunnel (SDP) LSP Service Connector ATM PVC Router Option Description Places no restrictions on the test types available for inclusion in a test suite Dependencies Available for test suite only
Execute button
Click on the Execute button to initiate a specified OAM diagnostic from the current form. Run the diagnostic after you configure the parameters. You can then view the results of the diagnostic.
First Run Execution Sequence (firstGroupExecutionSequence)

The First Run Execution Sequence parameter specifies, for a test suite, the order of execution for the tests in the First Run Tests list. Table 134-3 lists the parameter options.
134 Manage Tests parameters Table 134-3 First Run Execution Sequence parameter
Option In Parallel (default) All In Sequence Option description Specifies that the tests are run concurrently Specifies that the tests are run sequentially
Flood (flood)
The Flood parameter specifies the method for sending the OAM MAC address during a MAC populate or MAC purge operation. Table 134-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 134-4 Flood parameter
Option Enabled Option description Specifies that the OAM MAC address is sent to all upstream devices, and each upstream device adds or deletes the MAC address, depending on the type of OAM. Specifies that the OAM MAC address is sent to the local FIB Dependencies
Disabled (default)
Force OAM (force)

The Force OAM parameter specifies that the MAC address is converted to an OAM-generated MAC address, even if the MAC address was set by another method. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Forwarding Class (forwardingClass)

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class for a tunnel ping, MAC ping or trace, LSP ping or trace and LDP tree trace, VPRN ping or trace, and CPE ping. The options are:
h2 ef h1 nc
For LSP and MAC pings, the parameter value is the forwarding class of the SDP (service tunnel) encapsulation. For LSP ping and trace, this is the forwarding class of the LSP tunnel. For VCCV ping, this is the forwarding class of the VLL.
134-8
May 2009
Forwarding Profile (profile)

See Forwarding Profile (profile) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
From IP Address (originatingNode)

The From IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the managed device that is the origin of the OAM test. The value is a valid IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. When the Target Type (targetType) parameter is set to VPRN Site, the routing instance is displayed.
Generate Alarm on Rising Threshold (generateAlarmOnRising)

The Generate Alarm on Rising Threshold parameter specifies whether to raise a threshold-crossing alarm when a threshold is crossed due to a rising counter. The options are:

For the measurements to be of value, all managed devices that are part of the diagnostic must use consistent clocking; for example, have NTP enabled using a common timing source. When the Threshold Value (thresholdValue) parameter value is exceeded, the alarm is raised against the generic class, using the alarm name SasThresholdExceededAlarm.
High-priority Defect (mepHighestPrDefect)

The High Priority Defect parameter specifies the highest level at which an alarm will be raised by the MEP. The range is 0 to 5. When the value is 0 (default) there is no defect.
ID (id)
ID (lsp)
The ID parameter specifies the ID of the LSP being tested. This parameter is configurable when the Target Type (targetType) parameter is set to LSP or LSP Path and the Site ID (siteID) parameter is configured.
ID (mepId)
May 2009
134-9
Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults)

The Ignore Probe Results parameter specifies that the 5620 SAM ignores all test probe result records. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable

When the Lightweight Execution (sla) parameter is enabled, this parameter is also enabled and read-only.
Include Falling Threshold

The Include Falling Threshold parameter specifies whether to generate a threshold-crossing alarm for an OAM test if the value falls below a specified level. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Inhibit Learning (inhibitLearning)

The Inhibit Learning parameter specifies whether MAC entries are learned (created in the router table) during an OAM MAC purge diagnostic activity. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Initial Time to Live

See Initial Time to Live (initialTimeToLive) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Interval (seconds)
The Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the polling interval that is used for the ping. The range is 1 to 10 000. The default is 1.
Interval (seconds) (interval)

The Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that must expire before the next message request is sent. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 1. A value of 0 indicates that only one message request is sent.
IP Address
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the OS 6850 that is the object of the ping. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
134-10
May 2009
Label TTL (labelTimeout)

The Label TTL parameter specifies the TTL value in the VC label for the OAM request. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 5.
Last Run Execution Sequence (lastGroupExecutionSequence)

The Last Run Execution Sequence parameter specifies, for a test suite, the order of execution for the tests in the Last Run Tests list. Table 134-5 lists the parameter options:
Table 134-5 First Run Execution Sequence parameter
Option In Parallel (default) All in Sequence Option description Specifies that the tests are run concurrently Specifies that the tests are run in sequence
LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix)

The LDP Prefix parameter specifies the IP address of the LDP for the MPLS path being probed by an LSP OAM diagnostic. You can configure the parameter when the Target Type parameter is set to Type of Site. Specify the IP address of the LDP prefix. The default is 0.0.0.0.
LDP Prefix Length (ldpPrefixLen)

The LDP Prefix Length parameter specifies the prefix length of the LDP IP address for the MPLS path being probed by an LSP OAM diagnostic. You can configure the parameter when the Target Type parameter is set to Type of Site. The prefix length value can be set to 32. The default is 32.
LDP Prefix Length (prefixLen)

The LDP Prefix Length parameter specifies the IP address prefix length for the LDP-based LSP for the OAM LDP tree discovery test. You can configure the parameter when the LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix) value has been specified. The prefix length value can be set to 32. The default is 32.
Lightweight Execution (sla)

The Lightweight Execution parameter specifies that the 5620 SAM only displays results for tests that fail, generate threshold crossing alarms, or time out. The options are:
May 2009
134-11
When this parameter is enabled, the Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults) parameter is enabled and the Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy) parameter options are enabled.
Loopback Location (hex) (loopbackLocation)

The Loopback Location (hex) parameter specifies the ID used in the ATM OAM loopback cell, for example, FF:FF:01:FF:00:FF:02:FF. If all bits in the ID are 1, the destination of the ATM OAM ping is the far end of the virtual circuit. Otherwise, the destination is a specific ATM node. The range is 16 hexadecimal numbers separated by a ., up to 47 characters. Each number ranges from 00 to FF. The default is FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.

The Low-priority Defect parameter specifies the level at which an alarm will be raised by the MEP. The options are:
allDef macRemErrXcon remErrXcon (default) errXcon xon noXon
MA ID (maintenanceAssociationId)
The MA ID parameter specifies the ID of the Maintenance Association. This ID must be unique to the Maintenance Domain to protect against accidental association service instances. The range is 1-8191. The default is 1.

The MAC Address parameter specifies the configured MAC Address for the MEP. The default is 0.0.0.0.

The Maintenance Domain ID parameter specifies the maintenance domain ID for the MEP. The range is 1-8191. The default is 1.
Maximum Concurrent Pings (maxConcurrentPings)

The Maximum Concurrent Pings parameter specifies the maximum number of pings that can be performed on the managed devices. You can configure the parameter when the Unlimited Concurrent Pings parameter is disabled. Enter the maximum number of pings allowed. The default is 0.
134-12
May 2009
Maximum Concurrent Traces (maxConcurrentTraces)

The Maximum Concurrent Traces parameter specifies the maximum number of traces that can be performed on the managed devices. You can configure the parameter when the Unlimited Concurrent Traces parameter is disabled. Enter the maximum number of traces allowed. The default is 0.
Maximum Failures
See Maximum Failures (maxFailures)in section 145.1 for the parameter description. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 128.
Maximum Hop
The Maximum Hop parameter specifies the maximum number of hops that is traced along the path to the target OS 6850. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 5.
Maximum Number of Hops (hopCount)

The Maximum Number of Hops parameter specifies the maximum number of hops traced along the path to the source router.
Maximum Paths (maxPath)

The Maximum Paths parameter specifies the maximum number of paths that can be discovered for the given LDP prefix.
Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive)

The Maximum Time to Live parameter specifies the maximum TTL value, in hops, in the packet label for the OAM diagnostic. The value must be greater than the value for the Initial Time to Live parameter. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 4 for VPRN and MAC trace OAM diagnostics. The default is 8 for VCCV trace OAM diagnostics. The default is 30 for LSP trace, LDP Tree trace and ICMP trace OAM diagnostics.
MEP Creation on Access Interface (autoMepCreationAccessInterface)

The MEP Creation on Access Interface parameter specifies whether or not the MEPs that are configured on all access interfaces in the service are enabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled
May 2009
134-13
MEP Creation on all SDP Bindings (autoMepCreationSdpBindings)

The MEP Creation on SDP Binding parameter specifies whether or not the MEPs that are configured on SDP Bindings in the service are enabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled MEP ID (id)

The MEP ID parameter specifies the identification number given to the unmanaged remote MEP. The range is 0 to 8191. The default is 0.
MHF-Creation (mhfCreation)
The MHF-Creation parameter specifies whether or not MEPs in a specific MD level are recognized as MIPs on other MD levels. For example if a set of MEP are configured on MD1, and the MHF Creation parameter is set to explicit, when a CFM test is run on MD2 the MEPs from MD1 are automatically included in the test and are recognized as MIPs. The options are:
None (default) Explicit MTU End Size (octets) (mtuEndSize)

The MTU End Size (octets) parameter specifies the size of the frame, in bytes, that ends an MTU OAM diagnostic test. The frame size at the beginning of the test is the value provided by the MTU Start Size (octets) parameter. The parameter value must exceed the size of the MTU Start Size (octets) parameter. During the test, the frame grows incrementally by the number of bytes specified by the MTU Step Size (octets) parameter. When the size specified by the MTU End Size (octets) parameter is reached, the test is complete. The range is 41 to 9198. The default is 9198.
MTU Start Size (octets) (mtuStartSize)

The MTU Start Size (octets) parameter specifies the size of the frame, in bytes, that starts an MTU OAM diagnostic test. The frame size at the beginning of the test is the value provided by the MTU Start Size (octets) parameter. During the test, the frame grows incrementally by the number of bytes specified by the MTU Step Size (octets) parameter. When the size specified by the MTU End Size (octets) parameter is reached, the test is complete. The range is 40 to 9197. The default is 40.
134-14
May 2009
MTU Step Size (octets) (mtuStepSize)

The MTU Step Size (octets) parameter specifies by how many bytes a frame grows incrementally when an MTU ping operation is performed. The frame size at the beginning of the test is the value provided by the MTU Start Size (octets) parameter. During the test, the frame grows incrementally by the number of bytes specified by the MTU Step Size (octets) parameter. The next size message is not sent unless a reply is received or three messages time out at the current step size. When the size specified by the MTU End Size (octets) parameter is reached, the test is complete. The range is 1 to 512. The default is 32.
Multicast Group (groupMcastAddress)

The Multicast Group parameter specifies the destination multicast address for the OAM request. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Multicast Source (sourceMcastAddress)

The Multicast Source parameter specifies the source multicast address for the OAM request. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Name
Table 134-6 lists where to find information about the Name parameter.
Table 134-6 Name parameter
Parameter Name for aggregation scheduler Name for the test Name for STM test policy or test suite Name for service site Name for subscriber See Name (aggregationSchedulerName) in this section Name (testName) in this section Name (displayedName) in this section Name (siteName) in this section Name (subscriberName) in this section
Name (aggregationSchedulerName)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the aggregation scheduler. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
The Name parameter specifies a name for the STM test policy or test suite. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
May 2009
134-15
Name (maintAssocName)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the MA. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Name (siteName)
The Name parameter specifies the name of the site on which the service resides. Click on the Select button and choose a service site from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the site. The read-only Service ID, System ID (for CPE and MAC pings), operational state (for CPE and MAC pings), and Site ID parameters are populated with the ID number and IP address of the selected site. For CPE, MAC, and multicast FIB pings, you can configure the parameter when the Service Name parameter is configured.
The Name parameter specifies a name for the subscriber. The range is 0 to 32 characters.
Name (testName)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the test. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Name Format (maintAssocNameType)

The Name Format parameter specifies the address type of the MA. The options are:
vid string integer vpn-id
The default is string.
NE Persistent (nePersistent)
The NE Persistent parameter specifies whether the OAM test will be deployed to the network node after its first execution. When you enable the parameter, the OAM test is deployed to the NE and remains on the NE. The options are:
134-16
May 2009
NE Schedulable (neSchedulable)
The NE Schedulable parameter specifies whether the associated OAM test, or the test suite generated from the policy, can be scheduled and run on managed NEs. The options are:

When you enable the parameter for an OAM test, the test is deployed to the managed NE. You must enable the parameter in a test policy for the test suite that is associated with the policy to become an NE scheduled task. You must enable the parameter when the Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults) and Lightweight Execution (sla) parameters need to be enabled.
Next Hop Address (nextHopAddr)

The Next Hop Address parameter specifies the IP address of the next hop for VPRN ICMP diagnostics. The value is a IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. You can configure the parameter when the Target Type (testTargetType) parameter is set to VPRN Site and the Bypass Routing (bypassRouting) parameter is disabled.
Next Hop Interface Address (nhAddress)

The Next Hop Interface Address parameter specifies the interface address to the next hop in which the LSP ping test will be transmitted. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. You can configure the parameter when the Next Hop Interface Name (nhIntfName) is not configured.
Next Hop Interface Name (nhIntfName)

The Next Hop Interface Name parameter specifies the administrative name of the next hop interface. The Next Hop Interface Name value must be unique within the virtual router instance. The range is 0 to 32 characters. You can configure the parameter when the Next Hop Interface Address (nhAddress) is not configured.
Number of Loopback Sent (mepTransmitLbmMessages)

The Number of Loopback Sent parameter specifies the number of loopback messages to be transmitted. The range is 1 to 1024. The default is 1.
May 2009
134-17
Number of Test Probes

See Number of Test Probes (packetsToSend) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Originating MEP(originatingMep)
The Originating MEP parameter specifies the MEP from which the test originated. The range is 1 to 8191. The default is 1.
Packet History Size (rows)

See Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Packet Size
The Packet Size parameter specifies the size, in bytes, of the data portion of the packet that is sent for the ping. The range is 1 to 60 000. The default is 64.
Packet Size (octets) (packetSize)

The Packet Size (octets) parameter specifies the size, in octets, of the message in an OAM diagnostic. The range is 40 to 9198. Table 134-7 describes the packet sizes according to test type.
Table 134-7 Packet Size (octets) parameter
For LSP ping Packet size description When the test target type is an LSP or LSP path, the minimum size is 98 and the default is 98. When the test target type is any LSP, the minimum size is 84 and the default is 98. LSP trace For any test target type the minimum size is 108 and the default is 108.
Path Change (pathChanged)

See Path Change (pathChanged) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Path ID (sdpBindingPathId)
134-18
May 2009
Path ID (spokeSdpBinding)
Port ID (sapPortId)
The Port ID parameter specifies which interface to send a MAC populate request on. Click on the Select button and choose an access interface from the list. The read-only Encap Type parameter is populated with the encapsulation type of the selected access interface.
Positional Data Pattern (positionalPattern)

The Positional Data Pattern parameter specifies the repeated pattern that is inserted in the data field of an ICMP ping. The options are:
disabled (default, which indicates that a value of -1 is sent to the managed device) enabled
When you enable the parameter, positional values are repeated and inserted in the ICMP ping packet.

Probe Failure
See Probe Failure (probeFailure) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Probe Failure Reporting Threshold (probeFailureThreshold)

The Probe Failure Reporting Threshold parameter specifies the number of times a probe can fail before an indication of failure is provided. This parameter has no effect if the value is higher than the value for the Probes to be Issued parameter. The range is 1 to 15. The default is 1.
Probe Failure Threshold

See Probe Failure Threshold (packetFailureThreshold) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
134-19
Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows)

Probe Interval (seconds)

See Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Probes per Hop (probesPerHop)

The Probes per Hop parameter specifies the number of OAM packets sent for a particular TTL value. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Probe Timeout (seconds)

See Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout)in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Probes to be Issued (probesToBeIssued)

The Probes to be Issued parameter specifies the number of OAM packets sent. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 1.
Rapid (rapid)
The Rapid parameter specifies whether to send ICMP ping probes in rapid sequence, as part of one packet of ping probes. The options are:

When you enable the parameter, the Probe Interval (seconds) parameter is measured in tens of milliseconds, not seconds.
Reply Control (replyControl)

The Reply Control parameter specifies that the OAM response arrives on the control plane rather than the data plane. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Reply Type (replyType)

The Reply Type parameter specifies the method of reply expected from the VCCV ping request. This is the reply method used by the far-end device. Table 134-8 describes the parameter options.
134-20
May 2009
134 Manage Tests parameters Table 134-8 Reply Type parameter

Option IP Control Channel (default) Option description Specifies that the ping request message is sent from the far-end device out-of-band (not using the VLL), using IPv4. Specifies that the ping request message is sent from the far-end device in-band using the VCCV control channel (using the VLL). Dependencies
Reply using Control Plane (replyViaControlPlane)

The Reply using Control Plane parameter specifies that the OAM response arrives on the control plane rather than the data plane. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Response Address (responseIpAddr)

The Response Address parameter specifies the response IP address for the multicast trace OAM diagnostic. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Retry Counter (retryCount)

The Retry Counter parameter specifies the maximum number of consecutive timeouts allowed before failing a path probe. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 3.
Return LSP (returnLsp)

The Return LSP parameter specifies the Administrative name for the LSP to use to return a response to the LSP ping test. The LSP name must be unique within the virtual router instance. The range is 0 to 32.
Return Tunnel (returnTunnel)

The Return Tunnel parameter specifies a unique ID for the return service tunnel for a tunnel ping. Enter a service tunnel ID for the return path of the circuit being tested. The range is 0 to 17407. The default is 0.
SAP or Binding (sapOrBinding)

The SAP or Binding parameter specifies whether the MEP is associated with a SAP or SDP binding. The options are:
SAP (default) SDP Binding
May 2009
134-21
Send using Control Plane (sendControl)

The Send using Control Plane parameter specifies whether the OAM request is sent on the control plane, rather than on the data plane. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Service ID (serviceId)

The Service ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 2147483647. The default is 0.
Service Name (serviceName)

The Service Name parameter specifies the name of the VPLS being tested. Click on the Select button and choose a service from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the service. The range is 1 to 32 characters. When you configure the parameter, you can configure the site-related parameters.
Site ID
Size (octets) (packetSize)

The Size (octets) parameter specifies the OAM packet size, in octets, of the probe for a trace diagnostic. Table 134-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 134-9 Size (octets) parameter
For VPRN ping MAC ping VPRN trace MTU ping Tunnel ping Multicast FIB ping LSP ping LSP trace VCCV ping VCCV trace (1 of 2) 88 and 93 to 9198 (default is 88) 88 and 93 to 9198 (default is 88) 84 to 9198 (default is 98) Range and default 1 to 65 535 (default is 40) 80 to 9198 (default is 128) 40 to 9198 (default is 40)
134-22
May 2009
For ICMP Ping MEF MAC ping (2 of 2)
Range and default 0 to 16 384 (default is 56) 64 to 1468 (default is 64)
Source Address (srcAddr)

The Source Address parameter specifies the IP address of the multicast-capable source. The IP address is the unicast address at the start of the traceable route. The value is a valid IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Source IP Address (sourceIpAddress)

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the source device for an OAM diagnostic. The value is a valid IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. For CPE pings, the source IP address must be in the same subnet as the destination IP address.
Source MAC Address (sourceMacAddress)

The Source MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the source router in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF or 00-00-00-00-00-00, depending on the diagnostic.
Source Site ID
The Source Site ID parameter specifies the IP address of the device that is the originating site of the service tunnel. The range is a IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. When you configure the parameter, the ID parameter is populated with the ID of the service tunnel.
Strategy (generationStrategy)
The Strategy parameter specifies the policy used to control the generated OAM tests. The options are:
All (default) End to End Subscriber Ident String (subscriberIdent)

The Subscriber Ident String parameter specifies an existing subscriber ID that the 7750 SR, the 7450 ESS, or the 7710 SR uses to identify the circuit that sends an OAM request to the access node. The range is 0 to 32 characters. There is no default.
May 2009
134-23
System ID (Loopback Ip Address) (systemAddress)

The System ID (Loopback Ip Address) parameter specifies the system ID (loopback) IP address of the device that is the originating site of the service. The value is an IP address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0. Click on the Select button to choose a site from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the selected site.
Target IP Address (targetIpAddress)

The Target IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the target device for an OAM diagnostic. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format, or DNS name. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Target MAC (mepTransmitLtmTargetMacAddress)

The Target MAC parameter specifies the configured MAC address for the MEP in the xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx format. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
Target MAC Address (targetMacAddress)

The Target MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the target router in the format xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. When you configure an MEF MAC ping test, the Target MAC Address parameter specifies the shelf base MAC address of a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA, Release 3.0.
Target Type (targetType)

The Target Type parameter specifies the circuit used to perform an ANCP loopback diagnostic. The values are Subscriber Ident String or ANCP String. The default is Subscriber Ident String.
Test Completion
See Test Completion (trapGenerationPolicy) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Test Failure
See Test Failure (trapGenerationPolicy) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Test Failure Threshold

See Test Failure Threshold (testFailureThreshold) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
134-24
May 2009
Tested Entity Status Affected by Results (sasValidator)

The Tested Entity Status Affected by Results specifies whether the test suite is used to validate the operational status of the tested service or service tunnel to which the test suite applies. The results of the validation test are indicated by the operational state cause flags of the associated service or service tunnel. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Threshold Value (thresholdValue)

The Threshold Value parameter specifies the value to monitor to determine whether a threshold-crossing alarm should be raised or cleared, based on the rising or dropping count. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0. For the measurements to be of value, all managed devices that are part of the diagnostic must use consistent clocking; for example, have NTP enabled using a common timing source.
Time To Wait (milliseconds) (waitMilliSec)

The Time to Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies how long, in milliseconds, the ICMP trace waits for a response before sending the next probe packet. The range is 10 to 60000 ms. The default is 10 ms.
Timeout
Table 134-10 lists where to find more information about the Timeout parameter.
Table 134-10 Timeout parameter
Parameter Timeout for message responses Timeout for an OS 6850 ping test Timeout for ANCP loopback diagnostic Timeout for an LSP trace request during tree discovery See Timeout (seconds) in this section Timeout (seconds) in this section. Timeout (seconds) (timeout) in this section Timeout (seconds) (timeOut) in this section
Timeout (seconds)
The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum time to receive a message response. All reply messages received after the expiry of the maximum time limit are silently discarded. The range is 1 to 100 s. The default is 5 s.
May 2009
134-25
Timeout (seconds)
The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum time that the OS 6850 ping waits for a response before timing out. The range is 1 to 10 000. The default is 5.

The Timer (minutes) parameter specifies the time-out value for an LSP trace request during tree discovery. The range is 1 to 60s. The default is 30.
Timeout (seconds) (timeout)

The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time that the 7450 ESS, the 7750 SR, or the 7710 SR waits for a result from the ANCP loopback diagnostic. The range is 0 to 255s. The default is 0.
Time To Live
See Time To Live (timeToLive) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Transport Preference (transportPreference)

The Transport Preference parameter specifies the type of transport to use when you configure circuits for a service. This parameter is not configurable when the Topology Auto-Completion parameter is set to Manual: User Defined Connectivity (No Hierarchy). The options are:
GRE MPLS:LDP MPLS:RSVP-LSP Any (default)
Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy)

The Trap Generation parameter specifies when the node sends traps while executing an OAM test. The options are:
Test Completion (default) Test Failure Probe Failure

All of the parameter options are enabled and readonly when the Lightweight Execution (sla) parameter is enabled.
134-26
May 2009
TTL (ltrTtl)
The TTL parameter specifies the number of hops remaining in the Link Trace Message. As each Link Trace Responder handles the message, the value is decreased by 1. The value returned in the Link Trace Responder is 1 less than the value that is received by the Link Trace Message. When the value is 0 or 1, the Link Trace Message is not forwarded to the next hop. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 64.
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies the type of threshold crossing event on which to raise an alarm. The options are:
Inbound Jitter (default) Outbound Jitter Roundtrip Jitter Inbound Loss Outbound Loss Roundtrip Loss Inbound Latency Outbound Latency Roundtrip Latency
For the measurements to be of value, all managed devices that are part of the diagnostic must use consistent clocking; for example, have NTP enabled using a common timing source.
Unlimited Concurrent Pings (unlimitedConcurrentPings)

The Unlimited Concurrent Pings parameter specifies whether to allow an unlimited number of pings on the managed devices. The options are:

Use the check box to change the parameter.
Unlimited Concurrent Traces (unlimitedConcurrentTraces)

The Unlimited Concurrent Traces parameter specifies whether to allow an unlimited number of traces on the managed devices. The options are:

Use the check box to change the parameter.
May 2009
134-27
Update Test Result Status (updateResultStatus)

The Update Test Result Status parameter specifies if the Threshold Crossing Event should change the test result status. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Use Local Tunnel (useLocalTunnel)

The Use Local Tunnel parameter specifies that the ping request message is sent using the same service tunnel encapsulation labeling as service traffic. Table 134-11 describes the parameter options.
Table 134-11 Use Local Tunnel parameter
Option Enabled (default) Option description Specifies that the ping request message is sent from the local device using the same labeling for service tunnel encapsulation as for service traffic. The ping attempts to use an egress SDP (service tunnel) ID bound to the service, with the specified far-end IP address, with the VC label for the service. Specifies that the ping request message is sent with GRE with the OAM label from the local device. Dependencies
Disabled
Use Remote Tunnel (useRemoteTunnel)

The Use Remote Tunnel parameter specifies which path mechanism the far end uses for an OAM ping diagnostic. Table 134-12 describes the parameter options.
Table 134-12 Use Remote Tunnel parameter
Option Enabled (default) Option description Specifies that the ping response message from the remote device attempts to use an egress SDP (service tunnel) ID bound to the service, with the message originator as the destination IP address, with the VC label for the service Specifies that the ping request message is sent with GRE with the OAM label from the remote device Dependencies
Disabled
VCs Label Time Live (vcLabelTtl)

The VCs Label Time Live parameter specifies the TTL value, in seconds, added to the test packet, to ensure that the packet does not circulate in a routing loop past the configured time. The range is 1 to 255 s. The default is 255 s for CPE pings. When the parameter is set to 1, the CPE ping is done on the local SAP.
134-28
May 2009
Virtual Router ID (vRtrID)

The Virtual Router ID parameter specifies a number used to identify a virtual router instance. The range is 1 to 4096. The default is 1.
VC Type
See VC Type in section 92.1 for the parameter description.
VLAN Drop Enable (mepTransmitLbmVlanDropEnable)

The VLAN Drop Enable parameter specifies whether or not the VLAN is eligible to be dropped. The options are:
Enable Disable (default) VLAN ID (vlanId)

The VLAN ID parameter specifies the identification number of the VLAN. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
VLAN Priority (mepTransmitLbmVlanPriority)

The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the VLAN. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
VLAN VC Tag
May 2009
134-29
134-30
May 2009
135.1 Script manager parameters
135-2
May 2009
135-1
135.1
Script manager parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the script manager forms and child forms.
Answer
The Answer parameter specifies the answer to a command sent by the system in response to a question intervention tag.
Auto-Assign ID
Comment (comment)
The Comment parameter is an optional parameter that specifies additional information about the version of the script and the NE associated with the script.
Content Type (contentType)

The Content Type parameter specifies the types of commands that appear in the contents the CLI script. Table 135-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 135-1 Content Type parameter options
Option CLI (default) Velocity Description The script version contains CLI substitution The script version contains Velocity engine support Dependencies
Continue On Command Failure (continueOnCommandFailure)

The Continue On Command Failure parameter specifies whether the script continues to execute in its entirety if an error occurs. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Default Value

The Default Value parameter specifies the default value that is associated with the parameter tag or intervention tag in the CLI script. The range is 0 to 255 characters. The characters ( ) ? / are not allowed.
135-2
May 2009
The Description parameter specifies a description for the created script. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
Label
The Label parameter specifies the CLI script parameter tag in a CLI script. The range is 1 to 255 characters. Only alphanumeric characters, underscores, and dashes are allowed.
Name (scriptName)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the script. The range is 1 to 255 characters.
NE Type (neType)
The NE Type parameter specifies the type of NE that is associated with the script. The parameter displays all managed Alcatel-Lucent network devices and discovered generic NE devices, based on their system name or generic NE profile name. There is no default value.
NE Version Information (neVersionInformation)

The NE Version Information parameter is an optional parameter that specifies additional information about the NE version that is associated with the script.
Question
The Question parameter specifies a question that is expected in response to a command in a script. The system responds to the question with the answer specified by the Answer parameter.
Script ID (id)
The Script ID parameter specifies a unique numeric identifier for the created script. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Script Version (mtosi_version)

The Script Version parameter specifies the version of the script that is added to the instance.
May 2009
135-3
State (state)
The State parameter specifies whether the script can be executed against the configured targets. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Type

The Type parameter specifies the category of the script. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
Use Latest Version (useLatestVersion)

The Use Latest Version parameter specifies whether the latest version of the script is executed on the targets that are associated to a script instance. Select the check box to enable this parameter. The options are:
135-4
May 2009
136.1 Manage MIB Statistics Policies parameters
136-2
May 2009
136-1
136.1
Manage MIB Statistics Policies parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage MIB Statistics Policies form and its child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Displayed Name
Policy ID (id)
The Policy ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 0.
Polling Admin State (administrativeState)

The Polling Admin State parameter specifies whether the polling of managed devices is enabled (up). The options are:
Up (default) Down
136-2
May 2009

The Polling Interval parameter specifies how often MIB elements of discovered and managed devices are polled for changes to their MIBs. When changes are detected, the 5620 SAM rereads the MIB element and updates the database. The default is 15 minutes. When this parameter is disabled, synchronization between network elements and the database do not occur. The options are:
5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 1 hour, 15 minutes 1 hour, 30 minutes 1 hour, 45 minutes 2 hours
2 hours, 15 minutes 2 hours, 30 minutes 2 hours, 45 minutes 3 hours 4 hours 8 hours 12 hours 24 hours 48 hours
Polling Synchronization Time

See Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
136-3
136-4
May 2009
137 File parameters
137.1 File parameters
137-2
May 2009
137-1
137 File parameters
137.1
File parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage File Policies form and its child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Distribution Mode
See Distribution Mode (distributionMode) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Drive (drive)
The Drive parameter specifies where statistics are to be collected for backup purposes. You cannot specify the same location for both the Drive and the Storage Drive - Backup parameters. The options are:
ID
Application Specific Default (default) cf1: cf2: cf3:
See ID (logid) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Retention (hours) (retentionInterval)

The Retention (hours) parameter specifies the number of hours to keep accounting statistics log files. The retention interval is the minimum number of hours that the logs are stored on the storage media. Any files, that are not transferred by FTP or SCP from the storage media when the retention time is reached, may be deleted; or the logs may remain longer if space is available. The range is 1 to 500. The default is 12.
137 File parameters
Ensure that managed devices have sufficient resources to support large-scale statistical policy usage. Ensure that the values for the collection intervals, Retention parameters, and Rollover parameters are sufficient. Also ensure that statistics are retrieved from the storage devices on a regular basis.
Rollover (minutes) (collectionInterval)

The Rollover (minutes) parameter specifies the file rollover time, in minutes, of the accounting statistics files. The range is 5 to 2880 for 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and 7710 SR, Release 5.0 and later, and 7705 SAR, Release 1.0 and later. The range is 15 to 2880 for earlier device versions. The default is 1440. Ensure that managed devices have sufficient resources to support large-scale statistical policy usage. Ensure that the values for the collection intervals, Retention parameters, and Rollover parameters are sufficient. Also ensure that statistics are retrieved from the storage devices on a regular basis.
Storage Drive - Backup (backupPath)

The Storage Drive - Backup parameter specifies where statistics are backed up. You can specify different flash drives for different policies, depending on your needs and the size of the logging data to be stored. You cannot specify the same location for both the Drive and the Storage Drive - Backup parameters. The options are:
Application Specific Default (default) cf1: cf2: cf3:
Synchronize
May 2009
137-3
137 File parameters
137-4
May 2009
138.1 Accounting parameters
138-2
May 2009
138-1
138.1
Accounting parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Manage Accounting Policies form and child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Administrative
Collection Interval (m) (collectionInterval)

The Collection Interval (m) parameter specifies the frequency, in minutes, that accounting statistics counters for the selected Type parameter are logged. The range is 5 to 120. The default is 15. Ensure that managed devices have sufficient resources to support large-scale statistical policy usage. Ensure that the values for the collection intervals, Retention parameters, and Rollover parameters are sufficient. Also ensure that statistics are retrieved from the storage devices on a regular basis.
Default (isDefault)
The Default parameter specifies whether the policy is the default policy. The options are:
true false (default) Description

Displayed Name
Distribute
Distribution Mode
See Distribution Mode (distributionMode) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
138-2
May 2009
File ID (fileID)
Use the Select button next to the File ID parameter to choose a file policy from the list of file policies.
ID (id)
Name (fileName)
Use the Select button next to the Name parameter to choose a file policy from the list of file policies.
Synchronize
Type (recordType)
The Type parameter specifies the type of accounting statistics to collect. Network statistics are collected from network interfaces. Service statistics are collected from SAPs through which customer data flows. Application assurance statistics are collected from NEs that support application assurance. The options are:
None (default) Service Ingress Octet Service Egress Octet Service Ingress Packet Service Egress Packet Network Ingress Octet Network Egress Octet Network Ingress Packet Network Egress Packet Compact Service Ingress Octets Combined Service Ingress
Combined Network Ing Egr Octets Combined Service Ing Egr Octets Complete Service Ingress Egress Combined Service SDP Ingress Egress Complete Service SDP Ingress Egress Complete Subscriber Ingress Egress AA Protocol AA Application AA Application Group AA Subscriber Protocol AA Subscriber Application AA Subscriber Application Group
May 2009
138-3
138-4
May 2009
139.1 Server performance statistics parameters
139-2
May 2009
139-1
139.1
Server performance statistics parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Server Performance Statistics form and its child forms.
Accounting Stats Failure Periodic Threshold

The Accounting Stats Failure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of accounting statistics failures that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. Accounting statistics failures can be caused by conditions such as failed file transfers. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Accounting Stats Pending Periodic Threshold

The Accounting Stats Pending Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of accounting statistics that are pending to be processed that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Accounting Stats Processed Periodic Threshold

The Accounting Stats Processed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of accounting statistics processed that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Accounting Stats Total Periodic Threshold

The Accounting Stats Total Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of accounting statistics received that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Alarm Total Periodic Threshold

The Alarm Total Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
139-2
May 2009
Cleared Periodic Threshold

The Cleared Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of cleared alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Collection Interval (pollingInterval)

The Collection Interval parameter specifies the frequency with which the statistics counters for the selected statistics class are logged. The default is 15 minutes.
Condition Periodic Threshold

The Condition Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of condition alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Critical Periodic Threshold

The Critical Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of critical alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Dropped Backpressure Periodic Threshold

The Dropped Backpressure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of traps dropped because of backpressure during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. Backpressure conditions occur when the 5620 SAM server is very busy processing other traps. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Dropped Duplicate Periodic Threshold

The Dropped Duplicate Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of duplicate SNMP traps dropped during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Dropped Full Resync Periodic Threshold

The Dropped Full Resync Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of SNMP traps that are not processed because of a pending full resync during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
May 2009
139-3
Dropped Not Managed Periodic Threshold

The Dropped Not Managed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of SNMP traps associated with an unmanaged NE dropped during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Dropped Out Of Sequence Periodic Threshold

The Dropped Out Of Sequence Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of SNMP traps with non-sequential trap IDs dropped during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Incoming Periodic Threshold

The Incoming Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of SNMP traps received during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the SNMP Trap counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Indeterminate Periodic Threshold

The Indeterminate Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of indeterminate alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Info Periodic Threshold

The Info Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of log entries for info alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Major Periodic Threshold

The Major Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of major alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Minor Periodic Threshold

The Minor Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of minor alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
139-4
May 2009
Polling Synchronization Time

Retention Time (hours)

See Retention Time (hours) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
SAM-O Events Enabled

See SAM-O Events Enabled in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Scheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled SNMP statistics awaiting processing that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Scheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of processed scheduled SNMP statistics that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Scheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled SNMP statistics received that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Scheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled node resync failures that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Scheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled processed node resyncs that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
May 2009
139-5
Scheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled node resyncs that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Scheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold

The Scheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of scheduled SNMP statistics processing failures that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. Statistics failures may occur if an NE is unreachable or if collection takes longer than the collection interval time. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Threshold Reporting State

See Threshold Reporting State (thresholdReportingState) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Unscheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled node resync failures that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled processed node resyncs that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled node resyncs that the Node Resync counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Used Heap Memory Periodic Threshold

The Used Heap Memory Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the amount of heap memory currently in use that the SAM Memory counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
139-6
May 2009
Used Non Heap Memory Periodic Threshold

The Used Non Heap Memory Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the amount of non-heap memory currently in use that the SAM Memory counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled SNMP statistics awaiting processing that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of processed unscheduled SNMP statistics that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled SNMP statistics received that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Unscheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold

The Unscheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of unscheduled SNMP statistics processing failures that the Stats Collection counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
Warning Periodic Threshold

The Warning Periodic Threshold parameter specifies the number of warning alarms that the Alarm Rate counter records during the interval specified by the Collection Interval parameter. When the counter reaches this number, a threshold-crossing alarm is raised.
May 2009
139-7
139-8
May 2009
140.1 Statistics Records parameters
140-2
May 2009
140-1
140.1
Statistics Records parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the statistics records forms and its child forms.
Statistics Type
The Statistics Type parameter specifies the type of logged data that should be displayed in the resulting search list. The options are:
Current Data (default) Statistics Record Statistics Policy

Current data shows the most recent statistics record available. The statistics record shows all available statistics for that type of statistics. The statistics policy shows the applicable statistics policy configured for that type of statistic.

See Retention Time (hours) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.


See Threshold Reporting State (thresholdReportingState) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
140-2
May 2009
141.1 Manage Schedules and Scheduled Tasks parameters
141-2
May 2009
141-1
141.1
Manage Schedules and Scheduled Tasks parameters

This chapter describes the unique parameters on the Manage Schedules, Manage Scheduled Tasks, and child forms.
All Months (runAllMonths)

The All Months parameter specifies whether the NE schedule runs in all months of the year. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Per Month. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled All Weekdays (runAllDays)

The All Weekdays parameter specifies whether the NE schedule runs on all days of the week. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Per Day. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Change Current User To

The Change Current User To parameter specifies the 5620 SAM user to which the SAM scheduled task is to be assigned. The options are all configured user accounts. The default is admin, which is the default 5620 SAM account.
Day (runDay)
The Day parameter specifies the day on which the NE schedule is run. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Once or Per Month. The range is 1 to 31. The default is 1.
Delay Time (seconds) (delayTime)

The Delay Time (seconds) parameter specifies the delay start time for a run within a scheduled task. The delay time is applied when the execution time of a scheduled run is skipped. If a previous run is complete and a scheduled run is triggered, the run will execute and will not be delayed whether a delay time is configured or not. If this parameter is set to 0, there will be no delay. The range is 0, 60 to 900. The default is 0. The Delay Time (seconds) parameter can be set when the Enable parameter is set to Enable.
Description
Enable
The Enable parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the configurability of the Delay Time parameter. The options are:
Enable Disable (default) End Time (endYear endMonth endDay endHour endMinute)
The End Time parameter specifies the end time of the NE schedule. The range is any date in the current or next year. The default is the current 5620 SAM server time. The parameter is configurable except when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Once. You can choose the year, month, or day values using the calendar button. All values are configurable using the up and down arrows beside the parameter, the cursor keys on the keyboard, or by entering the value.
Frequency
Table 141-1 lists where to find information about the Frequency parameter.
Table 141-1 Frequency parameter
Parameter Frequency for SAM schedule Frequency for NE schedule See Frequency (frequency) in this section Frequency (frequencyType) in this section
Frequency (frequency)
The Frequency parameter specifies how often the SAM schedule operates. Table 141-2 describes the parameter options.
Option Once (default) Per Second Option description The SAM schedule is run only once. The SAM schedule is performed every second, based on an additional parameter. Dependencies You cannot configure the User End Time (endDate) parameter. You must configure the Run Every Second (runEverySecond) or Run Every Seconds parameter to specify the frequency.
(1 of 2)
May 2009
141-3
Option Per Minute
Option description The SAM schedule is performed every minute, based on an additional parameter. The SAM schedule is performed every hour, based on an additional parameter. The SAM schedule is performed every day, based on an additional parameter. The SAM schedule is performed every week, based on an additional parameter. The SAM schedule is performed every month, based on an additional parameter.
Dependencies You must configure the Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute) or Run Every Minutes parameter to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Hour (runEveryHour) or Run Every Hours parameter to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Day (runEveryDay), Run Every Days, or Run Every (runDay) parameter to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Week (runEveryWeek) or Run Every Weeks (runWeek) parameter to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Month (runEveryMonth) or Run Every Months parameter to specify the frequency.
Per Hour
Per Day
Per Week
Per Month
(2 of 2)
Frequency (frequencyType)
The Frequency parameter specifies how often the NE schedule operates. Table 141-3 describes the parameter options.
Option Once Option description The NE schedule is run only once. Dependencies You cannot configure the End Time (endYear endMonth endDay endHour endMinute) parameter. You must configure the Month (runMonth), Day (runDay), Hour (runHour), and Max Log Entries Allowed (maxLogEntries) parameters to specify the time at which the schedule runs. Per Second (default) The NE schedule is performed every second, based on additional parameters. You must configure the Run Every Seconds (runEverySeconds) and Repeated Runs (repeatedRuns) parameters to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Minutes (runEveryMinutes) and Time Alignment Setting parameters to specify the frequency. You must configure the Run Every Hours (runEveryHours), Hour Alignment Setting (alignmentInHour), and Minute Alignment Setting (alignmentInMinute) parameters to specify the frequency.
Per Minute
The NE schedule is performed every minute, based on additional parameters. The NE schedule is performed every hour, based on additional parameters.
Per Hour
(1 of 2)
141-4
May 2009
Option Per Day
Option description The NE schedule is performed every day, based on additional parameters.
Dependencies You must configure the Hour (runHour) parameter and the All Weekdays (runAllDays) or Run Every Days (runEveryDays) parameter to specify the frequency. You must configure the Day (runDay) and Hour (runHour) parameters, and the All Months (runAllMonths) or Run Every Months (runEveryMonths) parameter to specify the frequency.
Per Month
The NE schedule is performed every month, based on additional parameters.
(2 of 2)
Hour (runHour)
The Hour parameter specifies the hour in which the NE schedule is run. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Once, Per Day, or Per Month. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Hour Alignment Setting (alignmentInHour)

The Hour Alignment Setting parameter specifies the base hour with which the NE schedule aligns. The parameter is used with the Run Every Hours (runEveryHours) parameter. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Location (scriptHomeDirectory)
The Location parameter specifies where a target NE stores the script that contains the scheduled task actions. The value must be the absolute path of an existing directory in the NE file system. The range is 0 to 255 characters. The default is cf3:/script.
Max Log Entries Allowed (maxLogEntries)

The Max Log Entries Allowed parameter specifies the maximum number of script-execution results that a target NE stores in the location specified by the Result Location (resultHomeDirectory) parameter. When the parameter value is exceeded, the NE deletes the oldest file. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1.
Max Time Log Entries Kept (seconds) (maxTimeLogEntries)

The Max Time Log Entries Kept (seconds) parameter specifies how long, in seconds, an NE stores the script-execution result files in the location specified by the Result Location (resultHomeDirectory) parameter. The range is 0 to 21 474 836. The default is 3600.
Max Time Script Run (seconds) (maxTimeScriptRun)

The Max Time Script Run (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that elapses before an NE stops the execution of the script that contains the NE scheduled task actions. The range is 0 to 21 474 836. The default is 3600.
May 2009
141-5
Minute (runMinute)
The Minute parameter specifies the minute in which the NE schedule is run. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Once, Per Day, or Per Month. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Minute Alignment Setting (alignmentInMinute)

The Minute Alignment Setting parameter specifies the base minute with which the NE schedule aligns. The parameter is used with the Run Every Minutes (runEveryMinutes) parameter. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Month (runMonth)
The Month parameter specifies the month in which the NE schedule is run. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Once. The default is January. The options are:
January February March April May June
July August September October November December
The Name parameter specifies the name of the schedule. The range is 1 to 32 characters. There is no default.
Ongoing (onGoing)
The Ongoing parameter specifies whether a schedule has an end time. When the parameter is disabled, the schedule operates indefinitely. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Repeated Runs (repeatedRuns)

The Repeated Runs parameter specifies the number of times that an NE schedule is run when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter value is Per Second. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
141-6
May 2009
Result Location (resultHomeDirectory)

The Result Location parameter specifies the location of the script result files that are associated with the NE scheduled task. The value can be a local file system path, or a remote file system path such as an FTP location. A target NE appends a timestamp to the value to uniquely identify each stored file. If the NE cannot reach the specified file location, the NE does not execute the scheduled task. The range is 0 to 255 characters. The default is cf3:/result.
Run Every
Table 141-4 lists where to find more information about the Run Every parameter.
Table 141-4 Run Every parameter
Parameter Run Every n days Run Every n weeks Run Every n months See Run Every (runDay) in this section Run Every (runWeek) in this section Run Every (runMonth) in this section
When a user chooses the Run Everyparameter, they cannot set the Ongoing (onGoing)parameter. The User End Time (endDate) must be set and cannot exceed the User Start Time (startDate).
Run Every (runDay)

The Run Every parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs on the days indicated by the selected check boxes. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Day. There is no default. The options are:
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday
Friday Saturday Sunday
May 2009
141-7
Run Every (runMonth)

The Run Every parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs on the months indicated by the selected check boxes. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Month. There is no default. The options are:
Run Every (runWeek)

The Run Every parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs on a specific day of the week and week of the month. For example a scheduled task can be run every second Tuesday of the month. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Week. The day of the week on which the SAM schedule runs is configurable using a drop-down menu. The options are:
The week of the month in which the SAM schedule runs is selectable using a checkbox. The options are:
First Second Third Fourth Last
Run Every Day (runEveryDay)

The Run Every Day parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every day. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Day. The options are:
141-8
May 2009
Run Every Days

The Run Every Days parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every n days, where n is a numerical value that you set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Day. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Run Every Days (runEveryDays)

The Run Every Days parameter specifies that the NE schedule runs on the days indicated by the selected check boxes. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Per Day and the All Weekdays (runAllDays) parameter is disabled. There is no default. The options are:
Run Every Hour (runEveryHour)

The Run Every Hour parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every hour. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Hour. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Run Every Hours

The Run Every Hours parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every n hours, where n is a numerical value set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Run Every Hour (runEveryHour) parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Run Every Hours (runEveryHours)

The Run Every Hours parameter specifies, in hours, how often the NE schedule runs. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Per Hour. The parameter is used with the Hour Alignment Setting (alignmentInHour) parameter. There is no default. The options are:
1 2 3 4
6 8 12
May 2009
141-9
Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute)

The Run Every Minute parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every minute. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Minute. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Run Every Minutes

The Run Every Minutes parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs every n minutes, where n is a numerical value set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute) parameter is disabled.
Run Every Minutes (runEveryMinutes)

The Run Every Minutes parameter specifies, in minutes, how often the NE schedule runs. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Per Minute. There is no default. The options are:
1 2 3 4 5 6
10 12 15 20 30 60
Run Every Month (runEveryMonth)

The Run Every Month parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs every month. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Month. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Run Every Months

The Run Every Months parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs every n months, where n is a numerical value set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Month. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1. A month is based on a 30-day interval.
141-10
May 2009
Run Every Months (runEveryMonths)

The Run Every Months parameter specifies the interval in months between NE schedule runs. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Per Month and the All Months (runAllMonths) parameter is disabled. The default is 0.
Run Every Second (runEverySecond)

The Run Every Second parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every second. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Second. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Run Every Seconds

The Run Every Seconds parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs every n seconds, where n is a numerical value set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Run Every Second (runEverySecond) parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Run Every Seconds (runEverySeconds)

The Run Every Seconds parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the NE schedule runs. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequencyType) parameter is set to Per Second. The range is 0, or 30 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Run Every Week (runEveryWeek)

The Run Every Week parameter specifies whether the SAM schedule runs every week. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Week. The options are:
May 2009
141-11
Run Every Weeks (runWeek)

The Run Every Weeks parameter specifies that the SAM schedule runs every n weeks, where n is a numerical value set using the up and down arrows. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to Per Week. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Scheduled Task Description (description)

The Scheduled Task Description parameter specifies the description of this association of a schedule and a scheduled task. The range is 0 to 254 characters.
Scheduled Task Name (displayedName)

The Scheduled Task Name parameter specifies the name of this association of a schedule and a scheduled task. You must configure the parameter. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
Time Alignment Setting

See Minute Alignment Setting (alignmentInMinute) in this section for the parameter description.
User End Time (endDate)

The User End Time parameter allows you to enter the user end time based on the client time zone, daylight savings mode, and time zone set in the user preferences. Depending on the time and the time zone set by the user, the user end time is converted to the server end time. The server end time is also calculated based on the server time zone and daylight savings mode set for the server. The range is any date. The default is the time that the 5620 SAM server starts, plus one minute. The parameter is configurable when the Frequency (frequency) parameter is set to any value except Once and the Ongoing (onGoing) parameter is disabled. You can choose the year, month, or day values using the calendar button. All values are configurable using the up and down arrows beside the parameter, the cursor keys on the keyboard, or by entering the value. All schedules are based on the 5620 SAM server time at the time when the schedule was created. For example, if you create a schedule in a different time zone from the server, 5620 SAM converts the value and updates the server end time parameter with the converted time. The scheduled task is executed based on the server time.
User Start Time (startDate)

The User Start Time parameter allows you to enter the user start time based on the client time zone, daylight savings mode and the time zone set in the user preferences. Depending on the time and the time zone set by the user, the user start time is converted to the server start time. The server start time is also calculated based on the server time zone and daylight savings mode set for the server. The range is any future date. The default is the time that the 5620 SAM server GUI started, plus one minute.
141-12
May 2009
You can choose the year, month, or day values using the calendar button. All values are configurable using the up and down arrows beside the parameter, the cursor keys on the keyboard, or by entering the value. When a SAM schedule is created using a client PC, Linux or Solaris workstation in a time zone different from the 5620 SAM server time zone, you can configure the remote PC time zone to the local time zone by choosing Application User PreferencesTime Zone. If you do not configure the time zone, 5620 SAM will use the default client PC time zone. All schedules are based on the 5620 SAM server time at the time when the schedule was created. For example, if you create a schedule in a different time zone from the server, 5620 SAM converts the value and updates the server start time parameter with the converted time. The scheduled task is executed based on the server time.
May 2009
141-13
141-14
May 2009
142.1 Analyze Profile Assignment parameters
142-2
May 2009
142-1
142.1
Analyze Profile Assignment parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Profile Assignment Analysis Tool form and its child forms.
SLA Profile String

The SLA Profile String parameter specifies the SLA profile string that the profile assignment analysis tool uses as an input criterion. Any combination of ASCII characters is valid, but the parameter value must match an existing SLA profile string in a subscriber profile, subscriber explicit map, or subscriber identification policy for the analysis to return valid results.
Subscriber Identification String

The Subscriber Identification String parameter specifies the subscriber identification string that the profile assignment analysis tool uses as an input criterion. Any combination of ASCII characters is valid, but the parameter value must match an existing subscriber identification string in a subscriber explicit map or a subscriber identification string defined for a subscriber host for the analysis to return valid results.
Subscriber Profile String

The Subscriber Profile String parameter specifies the subscriber profile string that the profile assignment analysis tool uses as an input criterion. Any combination of ASCII characters is valid, but the parameter value must match an existing subscriber profile string in a subscriber explicit map or subscriber identification policy for the analysis to return valid results.
142-2
May 2009
143.1 Time Range Entry Assignment parameters
143-2
May 2009
143-1
143.1
Time Range Entry Assignment parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Time Range Entry Assignment Tool form and its child forms.
End Date
The End Date parameter specifies the end date and time of the time range entry assignment analysis. You can use the up and down arrows to change the year, month, day, hour, or minute. The default value is the current system time of the 5620 SAM server.
Search by TIme Of Day Entry Type

The Search by Time Of Day Entry Type parameter specifies whether the time range entry assignment analysis tool uses the Time Of Day Entry Policy Type parameter as an input criterion. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Start Date

The Start Date parameter specifies the start date and time of the time range entry assignment analysis. You can use the up and down arrows to change the year, month, day, hour, or minute. The default value is the current system time of the 5620 SAM server.
Time Of Day Entry Policy Type

The Time Of Day Entry Policy Type parameter specifies the type of time of day entry policy that the time range entry assignment analysis tool uses as an input criterion. The options are:
Ingress IPV6 Filter Egress MAC Filter Egress QoS Scheduler Policy Ingress IP Filter Egress IPV6 Filter Ingress QoS Scheduler Policy Egress QoS Policy Ingress QoS Policy
143-2
May 2009
Time Range Entry Container Type

The Time Range Entry Container Type parameter specifies the type of policy string that the time range entry assignment analysis tool uses as an input criterion. The options are:
L2 Access Interface L3 Access Interface Aggregation Suite Time Of Day Suite
May 2009
143-3
143-4
May 2009
144.1 Copy/Move SAPs menu parameters
144-2
May 2009
144-1
144.1
Copy/Move SAPs menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Copy/Move SAPs form.
Action Type (isMoving)

The Action Type parameter specifies the operation to be performed on a SAP. The options are:
Copy (default) Move Continue on individual Failure

The Continue on individual Failure parameter specifies the action to be taken if a SAP copy or move operation fails. When the parameter is disabled, the operation stops after the first failure and all successful SAP copy or move operations are reversed. When the parameter is enabled, the operation continues until all SAP copy or move operations that can be completed successfully are finished. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Current Mode (targetType)

The Current Mode parameter specifies the type of interface on which the move and copy operations are performed. The options are:
L2 Access Interface (default) L3 Access Interface L3 Subscriber Interface SAP Inner Encap Value End
The Inner Encap Value End parameter specifies the ending value of the inner encapsulation label. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 4095.
Inner Encap Value Offset (innerEncapShiftOffset)

The Inner Encap Value Offset parameter specifies the offset value used to shift the inner encapsulation value of a copied or moved SAP. This value is required when the destination port has a SAP with the same encapsulation value as the SAP that is being copied or moved. The range is 4095 to 4095. The default is 0.
144-2
May 2009
Inner Encap Value Start

The Inner Encap Value Start parameter specifies the starting value of the inner encapsulation label. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Outer Encap Value End

The Outer Encap Value End parameter specifies the end value of the outer encapsulation label. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 4094.
Outer Encap Value Offset (outerEncapShiftOffset)

The Outer Encap Value Offset parameter specifies the offset value that is used to shift the outer encapsulation value of a copied or moved SAP. This value is required when the destination port has a SAP that uses the same encapsulation value as the SAP that is being copied or moved. The range is 4094 to 4094. The default is 0.
Outer Encap Value Start

The Outer Encap Value Start parameter specifies the start value of the outer encapsulation label. The range is 0 to 4094. The default is 0.
Service Type
The Service Type parameter specifies the type of service for the source interface SAPs. When the Current Mode (targetType) parameter is L2 Access Interface, the options are:
All L2 Services (default) Epipe Ipipe VPLS MVPLS
When the Current Mode (targetType) parameter is L3 Access Interface or L3 Subscriber Interface SAP: the options are:
All L3 Services (default) IES VPRN
May 2009
144-3
144-4
May 2009
145.1 Common Tools menu parameters
145-2
May 2009
145-1
145.1
Common Tools menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the Tools menu forms and child forms.

The Administrative State parameter specifies whether the object can be put in service. The options are:
Up (default) Down Auto-Assign ID (id)

The Auto-Assign ID parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM automatically assigns a unique numeric identifier to the created object. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Description (description)


The Displayed Name parameter specifies a name for the created policy object. The range is 0 to 80 characters.

Click on the Distribution Mode button to open the Distribution Mode form. The Distribution Mode parameter specifies whether the local policy is synchronized with the associated global policy. Table 145-1 describes the parameter options.
145-2
May 2009
145 Common Tools menu parameters Table 145-1 Distribution Mode parameter
Option Sync With Global (default) Option description The local policy is synchronized with the global policy at all times. The local instance cannot be modified. Local policies discovered from the network or created through CLI are in Sync With Global mode. Local Edit Only You can modify the local instance only which affects the associated network element. Changes to the global policy do not affect the local policy unless a synchronization operation is manually performed. Dependencies

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class to map to an object. Table 145-2 describes the parameter options.
For Queue mapping Description Specifies the forwarding class that is mapped to the queue specified by the Queue ID, Multicast Queue ID, Broadcast Queue ID, and Unknown Queue ID parameters. Options
Dot1p, DSCP, Precedence, IP, and MAC mapping
Specifies the forwarding class to which packets with the specified match criteria are mapped. The default option specifies that packets maintain their previous forwarding class. The parameter options are described in Table 133-8.
be (default) l2 af l1 h2 ef h1 nc default (default) be l2 af l1 h2 ef h1 nc
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique numeric identifier for the created object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. Table 145-3 lists the parameter ranges for different object types. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
May 2009
145-3
145 Common Tools menu parameters Table 145-3 ID parameter

Parameter ID for OAM test ID for STM test policy or test suite Range 1 to 99 999 999 1 to 268 435 455
Forwarding Profile (profile)

The Forwarding Profile parameter specifies whether the test packets are in or out of profile, as compared to the forwarding class of the test packet. The options are:
in (default for VCCV ping) out (default) ID (logid)

The ID parameter specifies a unique numeric identifier for the created log. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. Table 145-4 lists the parameter ranges for different log types. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Parameter ID for accounting policy ID for file policy Range 1 to 99 1 to 99
Initial Time to Live (initialTimeToLive)

The Initial Time to Live parameter specifies the minimum TTL value in the packet label for the OAM diagnostic. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1.
Maximum Failures (maxFailures)

The Maximum Failures parameter specifies how many packet arrival failures are allowed before the OAM test is considered failed. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 5. A value of 0 or 255 specifies no maximum number of failures; the test continues to run, no matter the number of time outs.
Number of Test Probes (packetsToSend)

The Number of Test Packets parameter specifies the number of OAM packets sent. Table 145-5 describes the range and default values for several OAM tests.
145-4
May 2009
145 Common Tools menu parameters Table 145-5 Number of test packets parameter
OAM Test ICMP Trace, LSP Trace, LSP Ping, LDP Tree Trace ICMP or VCCV Ping MEF MAC Ping Range 1 to 100 1 to 100 2 to 15 Default 3 5 2
Path Change (pathChanged)

The Path Change parameter specifies whether the managed device on which the OAM test was issued should raise an SNMP trap to indicate that the path changed during the test. When this happens, the list of hops associated with this test result are suspect, and may contain hops from before and after the path change. The trap is raised once the Path Change Threshold is reached. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime)

The Polling Synchronization Time parameter specifies the polling synchronization start time from which the polling intervals are calculated in hh:mm format based on a 24-hour clock. When the server restarts, the next appropriate collection interval is calculated and polling restarts. The default is 00:00.
Probe Failure Threshold (packetFailureThreshold)

The Probe Failure Threshold parameter specifies the number of times a probe can fail before an indication of failure is provided. This parameter has no effect if the value is higher than the value for the Probes to be Issued parameter. The range is 0 to 15. The default is 1.
Probe Failure (probeFailure)

The Probe Failure parameter specifies whether the managed device on which the OAM test probe was issued should raise an SNMP trap to indicate that one of the probes failed. The probe failure trap is raised once the Probe Failure Threshold is reached. The options are:
May 2009
145-5
Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows)

The Probe History Size (rows) parameter specifies the number of OAM history rows that can be stored on the managed device packet/probe results table. The range is 1 to 99 000 000. The default is 50. When the parameter setting has been exceeded, the device removes the oldest entry in the table to allow a new history row.
Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval)

The Probe Interval parameter specifies the number of seconds to wait before sending the next probe. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout)

The Probe Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, before a message request times out and is aborted. The message request depends on receiving a message reply from the target corresponding to the outstanding request. The Probe Timeout value must be less than the Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval) value. Table 145-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 145-6 Probe Timeout (seconds) parameter
For LSP Ping, LSP Trace, LDP Tree Trace ATM ping, MTU ping, VPRN ping, Tunnel ping, MAC trace, VPRN trace, MAC ping, ICMP trace, and VCCV ping ICMP ping and DNS ping MEF MAC ping VCCV trace Range and default 1 to 3 (default is 1) 1 to 10 (default is 1) 1 to 10 (default is 5) 1 to 60 (default is 1) 1 to 60 (default is 3)

The Retention Time (hours) parameter specifies the number of hours to keep log files. The retention interval is the minimum number of hours that the logs are stored on the storage media. Any files, that are not transferred by FTP or SCP from the storage media when the retention time is reached, may be deleted; or the logs may remain longer if space is available. The range is 1 to 8760. Ensure that managed devices have sufficient resources to support large-scale statistical policy usage. Ensure that the values for the collection intervals, Retention parameters, and Rollover parameters are sufficient. Also ensure that statistics are retrieved from the storage devices on a regular basis.
145-6
May 2009

The SAM-O Events Enabled parameter specifies whether JMS XML event notification of scheduled statistics is enabled for OSS client applications. The options are:
Enabled (not recommended) Disabled (default)

See the 5620 SAM-O OSS Interface Developer Guide for information on how to collect statistics for OSS client applications.
Site ID (siteID)
Table 145-7 describes the parameter options. Click on the Select button to choose a site. You can select filters to view specific sites; for example you can choose the apply span of control filter to view only sites that are in your span of control.
Table 145-7 Site ID parameter
For LSP Ping LSP Trace LDP Tree Trace Multicast Router Information Multicast Trace MEP Option IP address of the MPLS path. Click on the Select button and choose an MPLS path from the list. Click on the Clear button to remove the MPLS path. The read-only name parameter is populated with the configured name of the MPLS path. IP address for the VPRN PIM site or the core routing PIM site. IP address for the VPRN or core routing PIM site. IP address for the multicast group. IP address for the MEP.
Target Type (testTargetType)

The Target Type parameter specifies the type of object against which the OAM diagnostic is performed. Table 145-8 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
145-7
145 Common Tools menu parameters Table 145-8 Target Type parameter
For MAC purge MAC trace MAC populate MAC ping MEF MAC Ping LSP ping LSP trace Multicast router information Multicast trace ICMP ping 7250 SAS-ES and 7250 SAS-ESA 3.0 VPLS Site LSP (default) LSP Path Any LSP Core Routing PIM Site (default) VPRN PIM Site Core Routing Site (default) VPRN Site Options VLL Site VPLS Site (default)
Test Completion (trapGenerationPolicy)

The Test Completion parameter specifies whether the managed device on which the OAM test was completed should raise an SNMP trap to indicate completion of the test. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Test Failure (trapGenerationPolicy)

The Test Failure parameter specifies whether the managed device on which the OAM test failed should raise an SNMP trap to indicate a test failure. The test failure trap is raised once the value set for the Test Failure Threshold parameter is reached. The options are:

The types of test failure traps generated depends on the test type, for example:
the current path of a trace is different than the previously determined path the full path cannot be determined Test Failure Threshold (testFailureThreshold)
The Test Failure Threshold parameter specifies the number of times a test can fail before an indication of failure is provided. Table 145-9 describes the parameter options.
145-8
May 2009
145 Common Tools menu parameters Table 145-9 Test Failure Threshold parameter
For Circuit ping Tunnel ping MTU ping VPRN ping MAC ping MEF MAC Ping Multicast router information Multicast FIB ping ICMP ping DNS ping Range 0 to 15 (default is 1)
Threshold Reporting State (thresholdReportingState)

The Threshold Reporting State parameter specifies whether to generate threshold alarms when the number of log entries exceeds the Max Log Records parameter value. The options are:
Up (default) Down Time To Live (timeToLive)

The Time To Live parameter specifies the TTL value, in hops, added to the test packet to ensure that the packet does not circulate in a routing loop past the configured time. The range is 1 to 255 for VPRN ping, VPRN trace, and multicast FIB ping diagnostics. The range is 1 to 128 for ICMP ping diagnostics. The default is 5 for VPRN ping, VPRN trace, and multicast FIB ping diagnostics. The default is 255 for LSP pings. The default is 64 for ICMP pings. The default is 5 for MAC pings.
May 2009
145-9
145-10
May 2009
Administration menu parameters
146 Database parameters 147 Alarm Settings parameters 148 Discovery Manager parameters 149 Mediation parameters 150 NE Maintenance parameters 151 5620 SAM User Security parameters 152 Change Password parameters 153 TCP Key Chains parameters 154 5620 SAM RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication parameters 155 NE Management Access Filters parameters 156 NE User Profiles parameters 157 NE User Configuration parameters 158 NE Password Policy parameters 159 NE RADIUS Authentication parameters 160 NE TACACS+ Authentication parameters 161 NE AOS Security Authentication parameters
May 2009
162 NE System Security parameters 163 Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters 164 NE DoS Protection parameters 165 NE CPM Filter parameters 166 Generic NE Profiles parameters 167 Common Administration menu parameters
May 2009
146.1 Database parameters
146-2
May 2009
146-1
146.1
Database parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Database Manager form and child forms.
Accounting Statistic Data Retention Period (Days) (accStatsDataPartInt)

The Accounting Statistic Data Retention Period (Days) parameter specifies how long, in days, the 5620 SAM database retains collected statistics data. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 1.
Auto-Assign ID
See Auto-Assign ID in section 133.1 for more information.
Backup Interval (backupFrequency)

The Backup Interval parameter specifies how often a backup is performed. For example, when you set the Backup Interval parameter to 5 and the Interval Unit parameter to hour, a backup is performed every 5 h. The parameter is used with the Interval Unit parameter. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 24.
Backup Type (scheduledBackupType)

The Backup Type parameter specifies the type of scheduled backup to perform. The options are:
Full (default) Partial Description

See Description (description) in section 133.1 for more information.
Interval Unit (backupFrequencyUnit)

The Interval Unit parameter specifies the unit of time for the Backup Interval parameter. The options are:
minute hour (default) day week
146-2
May 2009
Manual Backup Directory (manualBackupDest)

The Backup Directory parameter specifies the database root backup directory destination for unscheduled backups. The range is 0 to 200 characters. The default for scheduled backups is /opt/5620sam/dbbackup for workstations or C:\5620sam\dbbackup for PCs. There is no default for unscheduled backups.
Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) (maxSize)

The Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) parameter specifies the log size that must be reached before the archiving action occurs. You can configure the parameter when the Purge Mode parameter is set to any option except Manual. The range starts at 0 Kb and has no upper limit. The default is 100 000 KB. When the Purge Mode parameter is set to By Max Log Size, no zipped archives are created. When there are multiple logs of each type, for example, 24 audit log files, the size of each file is considered, and when the collective size of the files reaches the parameter limit, all logs are zipped in one file.
Number of Archives (numArchives)

The Number of Archives parameter specifies the maximum number of archive logs that must be reached before the purging action occurs. You can configure the parameter when the Purge Mode parameter is set to By Max Log Size and Number of Archives. The range is 0 to 2 147 486 347. The default is 50. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you store archived log files for record keeping and troubleshooting. When the parameter value is reached, the archived log files are deleted. You can move the archived log files from the database to another site for storage.
Number to Keep (backupNumberOfSets)

The Number to Keep parameter specifies how many database backups are stored. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 3.
Note Ensure that the backup location has enough space to contain
the database. For regularly scheduled backups, ensure that there is enough space for numerous backup copies of the database.
Policy ID (policyId)
See ID (id) in section 133.1 for more information.
Purge Mode (purgeMode)

The Purge Mode parameter specifies the criterion that must be met before database log files are purged. Table 146-1 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
146-3
146 Database parameters Table 146-1 Purge Mode parameter

Option Manual Option description No purge criterion is set. If log management is required, the logs are manually handled by a user with database management permissions. When manual is selected, the following back up policy configuration parameter values are updated, Auto-Purge Scheme (purgeMode) is set to Limit to a Maximum Number of Backups, and the Number of Backups (numBackupsToKeep) parameter is set to 30. When the log or logs reach the Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) parameter setting, the log or logs are deleted and a new log of size 0 kb is started. Logs are zipped when the Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) parameter setting is reached, and then the archived log files are deleted based on the number of archives stored. Dependencies Alcatel-Lucent does not recommend that users perform database management functions with Oracle tools. Such actions can damage databases and may void support contracts. You cannot configure any additional parameters. You cannot configure the Number of Archives parameter. No zipped archives of logs are kept. When the archive log limit is reached and the maximum log size is reached, a new archive is created and the oldest archive file is deleted. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you store archived log files off the database system, for record keeping and troubleshooting.
By Max Log Size
By Max Log Size and Number of Archives (default)
Scheduled Backup Directory (schedBackupDest)

The Backup Directory parameter specifies the database root backup directory destination. For scheduled backups, the backup databases are stored in up to three subdirectories to ensure that multiple versions of the database are available. The range is 0 to 200 characters. The default for scheduled backups is /opt/5620sam/dbbackup for workstations or C:\5620sam\dbbackup for PCs. There is no default for unscheduled backups.
Schedule Enabled (isScheduleEnabled)

The Schedule Enabled parameter specifies whether the database backup schedule is in effect. When the parameter is enabled, the 5620 SAM backs up the 5620 SAM database
Start Time (backupStartTime)

The Start Time parameter specifies when the database backup is scheduled to start, in the format yyyy/MM/dd hh:mm. For example, if the parameter were set to 2006/01/29 02:30, the first backup starts on January 29, 2006 at 2:30 a.m. The parameter uses a 24-hour clock. When the value of the start time parameter is reached, the Backup Interval and Interval Unit parameters govern the backup frequency and successive start times. For example, the next scheduled backup starts at the time chosen and every interval thereafter. If the start time is set to Oct 26 14:15, and the interval is 6 hours, then backups are performed Oct 26 at 14:15, Oct 26 at 20:15, Oct 27 at 02:15, and so on. To change the date, highlight the year, month, day, hour, or minute value on the client GUI and use the up and down arrow keys to modify the setting.
146-4
May 2009
147.1 Alarm Settings parameters
147-2
May 2009
147-1
147.1
Alarm Settings parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Alarm Settings form and its child forms.
Alarm deletion (isAlarmDeletionEnabled)

The Alarm deletion parameter specifies whether alarm deletion policies are allowed. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Attribute Name (attributeName)

The Attribute Name parameter specifies the object attribute that is associated with the object type. This parameter is configurable when an Additional Text Policy has been created. Click on the Select button to list and choose an attribute.
auto (implicitDeletionRule)
The auto parameter specifies an automatic deletion policy to use for alarms. This parameter is configurable if the Alarm Deletion parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
disabled when cleared (default) when acknowledged when cleared and acknowledged when cleared or acknowledged
Caution When an escalation policy uses the default when cleared
option, the esclation policy does not work. You must configure the parameter to a value other than when cleared to ensure the escalation policy is successful.
automatic severity alterations (isSeverityAutoAlterable)

The automatic severity alterations parameter specifies whether to enable automatic severity changes for alarms based on specific alarm policies. This parameter is configurable when the Severity Alterable parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:

Automatically Assigned Urgency (autoAssignedUrgency)

The Automatically Assigned Urgency parameter specifies the urgency for an alarm type. The default 5620 SAM setting is unique to the alarm type. For example, the default 5620 SAM setting may be to associate an alarm type with a minor urgency. However, in a particular network configuration, the alarm condition may be historically recognized as a precursor to a larger network problem. You may decide to change the default setting for the alarm type from minor to major urgency, raising the visibility of the issue to network operators. The options are:
minor major critical indeterminate
clearing (if self-clearing alarm) (isSeverityManualClearingEnabled)

The clearing (if self-clearing alarm) parameter specifies whether to allow an operator to clear an alarm if the alarm is self-clearing. A self-clearing alarm is cleared when an alarm-clearing condition occurs. This parameter is configurable when the manual severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:

Alarms that are not self-clearing must be cleared manually. The 5620 SAM Troubleshooting Guide describes which alarms are self-clearing.
De-escalation
Table 147-1 lists where to find information about the De-escalation parameter.
Table 147-1 De-escalation parameter
Parameter De-escalation for alarm De-escalation for policy See De-escalation (deEscalationEnabled) in this section de-escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityDeEscalationEnabled) in this section
May 2009
147-3
De-escalation (deEscalationEnabled)
The De-escalation parameter specifies whether to de-escalate the severity level of an alarm based on how frequently the alarm is processed by the 5620 SAM. When the parameter is enabled, you can add one or more threshold rules to the policy. This parameter is configurable when the automatic severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) de-escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityDeEscalationEnabled)

The de-escalation (defined by specific policy) parameter specifies whether to automatically de-escalate the severity of an alarm based on the specific alarm policy. This parameter is configurable when the automatic severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Description

Detailed Text
The Detailed Text parameter specifies the updated note information when a note for an alarm is modified. The modified note information appears under the Revision History tab as the textual explanation. The range is 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Domain (domain)
The Domain parameter specifies the type of policy to be associated with an object. You can list and choose a domain by clicking on the Select button.
Escalation
Table 147-2 lists where to find information about the Escalation parameter.
Table 147-2 Escalation parameter
Parameter Escalation for specific alarm types Escalation for global alarm policy See Escalation (escalationEnabled) in this section escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityEscalationEnabled) in this section
147-4
May 2009
Escalation (escalationEnabled)
The Escalation parameter specifies whether to escalate the severity level of an alarm based on how frequently the alarm is processed by the 5620 SAM. When the parameter is set to Enabled, you can add one or more threshold rules to the policy. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityEscalationEnabled)

The escalation (defined by specific policy) parameter specifies whether to automatically escalate the severity of an alarm based on the specific alarm policy. This parameter is configurable when the automatic severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Frequency (frequencyThreshold)

The Frequency parameter specifies how many times in a 24-hour period that an alarm needs to occur before the severity level is escalated or de-escalated based on the Severity parameter. The range is 1 to 100 000. There is no default. You must configure the parameter.
Group Tag (groupTag)

The Group Tag parameter specifies a name for an alarm or group of alarms. The range is 0 to 15 alphanumeric characters. The default is N/A. Use the parameter to create a common name for the same type of alarms. For example, if you gave all ospf class alarms the Group Tag name OSPF, you could then generate a list of only OSPF alarms, by sorting them using the OSPF group tag.
History Enabled (historyEnabled)

The History Enabled parameter specifies whether an entry should occur in the log each time a policy is applied to change the severity level of an alarm. The options are:
May 2009
147-5
implicit severity demotion (isSeverityImplicitDemotionEnabled)

The implicit severity demotion parameter specifies whether to automatically demote the severity of the alarm based on the specific alarm policy. The parameter is configurable when the automatic severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled implicit severity promotion (isSeverityImplicitPromotionEnabled)

The implicit severity promotion parameter specifies whether to automatically promote the severity of the alarm based on the specific alarm policy. This parameter is not configurable if the automatic severity alterations parameter is set to Disabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Initial Severity Assignment (autoAssignedSeverity)

The Initial Severity Assignment parameter specifies the severity level of the alarm when it is first raised. The default value is based on the specific alarm that you are viewing. The options are:
cleared indeterminate info condition warning minor major critical
Interval (collectionInterval)
The Interval parameter specifies the amount of time that alarms are collected. The default value is based on the specific alarm that you are viewing. The options are:

147-6
10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 1 hour, 15 minutes 1 hour, 30 minutes 1 hour, 45 minutes 2 hours
May 2009
2 hours, 15 minutes 2 hours, 30 minutes 2 hours, 45 minutes 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours 12 hours 24 hours
Log On Change (logOnChange)

The Log On Change parameter specifies whether to log an event and store the alarm in the historical alarm database when an alarm property changes, for example, when an alarm is acknowledged. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Log On Deletion (logOnDeletion)

The Log On Deletion parameter specifies whether to log an event and store the alarm in the historical alarm database when an alarm is deleted. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you specify the Enabled option, otherwise there is no record of the alarm after it is deleted. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled manual (manualDeletionRule)

The manual parameter specifies when an operator can manually remove an alarm. When this parameter is set to disabled, operators cannot manually remove alarms. The options are:
disabled when cleared when acknowledged when cleared and acknowledged when cleared or acknowledged always (default)
manual severity alterations (isSeverityManuallyAlterable)

The manual severity alterations parameter specifies whether operators can manually change the severity of alarms. The parameter is configurable when the Severity Alterable parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Max Log Size (records) (maxLogSize)

The Max Log Size (records) parameter specifies the maximum number of alarms to store in the alarm history database log. Ensure that there is enough disk space to store the alarms. When the threshold is reached, the oldest alarm log entries are overwritten by the new alarm log entries. The range is 10 000 to 10 000 000 000. The default is 100 000.
May 2009
147-7
For example, the parameter is set to 10 000 alarms. There are currently 10 000 alarms in the log. The 10 001st alarm is now ready to be logged. The following actions occur. 1 2 3 The oldest alarm in the log is deleted. The newest logged alarm is given ID 1. There are again 10 000 alarms in the log. Another alarm, now the 10 001st alarm, is logged. The next oldest alarm in the log is deleted. The newest logged alarm is given ID 2. There are again 10 000 alarms in the log.
Object Type
The Object Type parameter specifies the type of object that is to be associated with an alarm policy. You can list and choose an object type by clicking on the Select button.
Order (order)
The Order parameter specifies the numeric sequence of attributes listed in the Additional Text field on the Alarm Info form and the dynamic alarm list. The range is 0 to 65 535.
Overwrite existing (overwrite)

The Overwrite existing parameter specifies whether existing text in the Additional Text field on the Alarm Info form is overwritten. If the parameter is disabled, new information is appended to the existing text. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Reason for change

The Reason for change parameter specifies the justification for editing an existing note on an alarm. The options are:
unspecified (default) unknown comment clarification
update confirmation correction dispute
Severity (associatedSeverity)
The Severity parameter specifies which severity level an alarm should be escalated or de-escalated to, if the alarm exceeds the threshold value set by the Frequency parameter. Table 147-3 describes the parameter options.
147-8
May 2009
147 Alarm Settings parameters Table 147-3 Severity parameter

Option unspecified (default) cleared indeterminate Option description No severity level is assigned. The alarm, regardless of the previous state, is cleared and is no longer current. Typically, a cleared alarm is removed from the list of active alarms to the history log. The 5620 SAM uses internal rules to determine the severity level of the alarm. For example, when a disk full alarm is raised, the alarm is indeterminate while the 5620 SAM determines whether the alarm should be minor, major, or critical, depending on the remaining disk capacity. When an alarm has its severity changed to indeterminate based on existing rules, the 5620 SAM reverts the alarm severity back to its initial rule. info condition warning The alarm reports information only and does not signify a fault condition. The reporting device detected a condition that could potentially impede service, even though no significant service disruption has occurred. The problem should be investigated to determine whether further action is required before the condition escalates. The event or condition reported is caused by a fault, which is not currently affecting essential network operation. The problem should be investigated to determine whether corrective action is required to prevent a more serious service-affecting condition. The event or condition reported is causing a degradation of service and corrective action should be taken as soon as possible. For example, a major alarm may be raised if the capacity of a managed object is affected, which may result in degradation or interruption of service. A severe service-affecting fault has occurred, and corrective action should be taken immediately. For example, the failure of a managed object may result in a significant disruption or complete loss of service due to a device failure.
minor
major
critical
Severity Alterable (isSeverityAlterable)

The Severity Alterable parameter specifies whether to allow automatic changes to severity based on individual alarm policies or manual changes to the severity based on operator actions. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled severity demotion (isSeverityManualDemotionEnabled)

The severity demotion parameter specifies whether to allow an operator to decrease the severity of an alarm. The parameter is configurable when the manual severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
May 2009
147-9
severity promotion (isSeverityManualPromotionEnabled)

The severity promotion parameter specifies whether to allow an operator to increase the severity of an alarm. The parameter is configurable when the manual severity alterations parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Squelch (isSquelched)

The Squelch parameter specifies whether every instance of the specific alarm is ignored. This allows for event suppression. When the parameter is enabled, the alarm is not displayed on the client GUI and any OSS system listening on the JMS event channel do not receive notification of the alarm. The options are:
147-10
May 2009
148.1 Discovery Manager parameters
148-2
May 2009
148-1
148.1
Discovery Manager parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Discovery Manager form and child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for a discovery rule. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 5000. The default is 0.
Ignore Timestamps
The Ignore Timestamps parameter specifies whether entries with unchanged last change timestamps are processed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) IP Address (ipAddress)

The IP Address parameter specifies a unique identifier for a network element in standard IP address format.
Mask Bits (maskBits)

The Mask Bits parameter specifies the mask bits for a general IP range to discover a subnet. You can discover a subnet by specifying a general IP address and setting a portion of the network mask bits to 0. For example, when you set the IP address to 192.168.24.0 and set the network mask bits to 24, all devices in subnet 192.168.24 are discovered. The range is 24 to 32. The default value is 32.
148-2
May 2009
OLC State (olcState)

Read Policy ID (readMediationPolicyId)

Click on the Select button to choose a Read Policy for the discovery rule, or click on the View button to display the selected policy.
Usage (usage)
The Usage parameter specifies how a rule is used as a search filter to discover network elements. For example, one rule element may specify that a subnet be included and therefore discovered, while another rule element may specify that specific IP addresses in the subnet be excluded and therefore not discovered. Table 148-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 148-1 Usage parameter
Option Include (default) Exclude Option description Specifies that the discovery rule is used to find elements that meet the search criteria Specifies that the discovery rule is used to filter out elements that meet the search criteria Dependencies
Write Policy ID (writeMediationPolicyId)

Click on the Select button to choose a Write Policy for the discovery rule, or click on the View button to display the selected policy.
May 2009
148-3
148-4
May 2009
149.1 Mediation parameters
149-2
May 2009
149-1
149.1
Mediation parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Poller Manager form and its child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Connect Timeout (sec) (ftpReadTimeout)

The Connect Timeout parameter specifies the timeout period for the FTP connection. The range is 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 10.
Communication Protocol (cliCommunicationProtocol)

The Communication Protocol parameter specifies the protocol that is used to connect to the device using the CLI. The options are:
Telnet (default) SSH2 Community String (community)

The Community String parameter specifies the name of the community shared between the network manager and a managed element. This parameter is configurable when the Security Model parameter is set to SNMP v2c. The range is 0 to 32 characters. The default is private.
The Description parameter specifies a description for the policy. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
149-2
May 2009
Discovery Rule Scan Interval (topologyScanInterval)

The Discovery Rule Scan Interval parameter specifies how often the 5620 SAM rescans the network according to existing discovery rules. The options are:
5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 1 hour, 15 minutes 1 hour, 30 minutes (default) 1 hour, 45 minutes 2 hours

The Displayed Name parameter specifies a name for the policy. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
File Transfer Type (fileTransferType)

The File Transfer Type parameter specifies the protocol that is used for file transfers between the managed device and the 5620 SAM. Secure file transfer uses SCP and is supported on the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR. The options are:
FTP (default) Secure

When you choose the Secure option, node database backup and restores, software upgrades, and accounting statistics are transferred securely.
Note If the parameter is set to Secure, the Communication
Protocol parameter must be set to SSH2. The User Name and User Password parameters must be the user name and password of the SSH server.
Network Element Type (neType)

The Network Element Type parameter specifies the type of NE to which the event notification policy applies. There is no default. The options are:
Alcatel-Lucent 7250 SAS Alcatel-Lucent 7250 SAS-ES Alcatel-Lucent 7250 SAS-ESA Alcatel-Lucent 7450 ESS Alcatel-Lucent 7701 CPAA Alcatel-Lucent 7705 SAR
Alcatel-Lucent 7710 SR Alcatel-Lucent 7750 SR Alcatel-Lucent OS 6850 Alcatel-Lucent OS 6855 Alcatel-Lucent OS 6400 Generic NE Telco
149-3
May 2009
Number of Varbind per PDU (numberOfVarPerPdu)

The Number of Varbind per PDU parameter specifies the varbind value for a PDU. The range is 20 to 200. The default is 100.
Ping Command Timeout (seconds) (maxOSCommandExecutionTimeSeconds)

The Ping Command Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies how much time should be allowed to elapse before a timeout alarm is generated. The range is 1 to 30. The default is 3.
Ping Interval (minutes) (pingScheduleMinutes)

The Ping Interval (minutes) parameter specifies how many minutes should elapse before a ping is attempted. The range is 0 to 10 000. The default is 2.
Ping Interval (seconds) (pingScheduleSeconds)

The Ping Interval (seconds) parameter specifies how many seconds should elapse before a ping is attempted. The range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.
Policy ID (id)
The Policy ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Polling Admin State (administrativeState)

The Polling Admin State parameter specifies if the MISB is periodically resynchronized. When the Polling Admin State parameter value is set to up, periodic polling will occur according to the Polling Interval (pollingInterval) setting. When the Polling Admin State parameter value is set to down, periodic polling is not executed. The options are:
Up (default) Down
149-4
May 2009

The Polling Interval parameter specifies how often MIB elements of discovered and managed devices are polled for changes to their MIBs. When changes are detected, the 5620 SAM rereads the MIB element and updates the database. The default depends on the type of MIB element. When this parameter is disabled, synchronization between network elements and the database does not occur. The options are:
Disabled 5 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 1 hour, 15 minutes 1 hour, 30 minutes 1 hour, 45 minutes 2 hours
Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime)

Read Timeout (sec) (ftpReadTimeout)

The Read Timeout parameter specifies the read timeout period for the FTP connection. The range is 0 to 600 seconds. The default is 50.
Retry (snmpRetry)
The Retry parameter specifies the number of retries for SNMP polling or deployment requests between the 5620 SAM and the managed devices. When a request is made, either polling or deployment, from the 5620 SAM to the managed device, and a response is not received from the managed device, the parameter determines the number of retries of the same request. A response may not be received because of network errors with UDP, or because the timeout (ms) parameter value is exceeded. The range is 0 to 4. The default is 1.
Schedule Enabled (pingScheduleEnabled)

The Schedule Enabled parameter specifies whether pings should occur, based on the Ping Interval (minutes) and Ping Interval (seconds) parameters. The options are:
May 2009
149-5
You must enable scheduling for the default ping policy to be performed. When scheduling is not enabled, and a managed device is not reachable, management connection alarms may not be raised. For example, if there is no standby CPM or in-band management IP address, a ping policy should be created that has the parameter disabled. This allows an inactive ping policy to be applied during discovery rule creation for the in-band management interface ping and standby CPM ping, This ensures those non-existent interfaces are not pinged. In this example, ping policy with the parameter enabled would be created and applied during discovery rule creation for an out-of-band interface, since the interface exists and can be pinged.
Security Model (SnmpSecurityModel)

The Security Model parameter specifies which version of SNMP should be used, depending on your network security requirements. Table 149-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 149-1 Security Model parameter
Option SNMP v1 SNMP v2c (default) SNMP v3 (USM) Option description Version v1 of SNMP is used for authentication. Version 2c of SNMP is used for authentication. Version 3 of SNMP is used for authentication. Dependencies The Community String parameter must match that of the managed network element. Choose a user by clicking on the Select button.
SSH2 Server Port (sshCommunicationPort)

The SSH2 Server Port parameter specifies the port of the secure SSH2 server that is contacted by the 5620 SAM. This parameter is configurable when the Communication Protocol parameter is set to SSH2. The default is 22.
Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) (trapLossResyncToleranceTime)

The Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) parameter specifies the minimum interval between resynchronizations of the network device before the device is placed in stand-down mode. In stand-down mode, SNMP traps are ignored. After the stand-down period passes, 5620 SAM resynchronizes with an NE because of lost SNMP traps. The default is 300 s. The parameter and the Stand-down Duration Multiplier parameter are used to control SNMP trap bursts from NEs in the following cases:
when a single network event causes a significant number of SNMP traps when a specific network condition can cause NE objects, such as interfaces, to
quickly flap between up and down states
149-6
May 2009
Using the two parameters handles trap loss for these SNMP trap bursts in the following manner. 1 2 3 4 5 6 The 5620 SAM tracks when resynchronizations caused by SNMP trap loss occur on NEs. The time interval is handled by the Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) parameter. A stand-down of SNMP traps from the NE is initiated, based on the Stand-Down Duration Multiplier parameter value. A FrequentFullResyncsDueToTrapProblems alarm is raised to indicate that some SNMP traps were lost. A message is added to the EmsServerLog.txt file. The NE is resynchronized after the Stand-down Duration Multiplier value multiplied by either the Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) parameter value, or the last resynchronziation duration for the NE. The greater of the two values signals the resynchronization. When the stand-down period expires, the 5620 SAM resynchronizes the network device, clears the trap problem alarm, and logs a message.
Stand-down Duration Multiplier (trapLossStandDownPeriod)

The Stand-down Duration Multiplier parameter specifies the multiplier used to calculate the stand-down time of the NE, during which the 5620 SAM does not process SNMP traps from the NE. In stand-down mode, SNMP traps are ignored. After the stand-down interval passes, the 5620 SAM resynchronizes with an NE to recover lost SNMP traps. The default is 2. The parameter and the Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) parameter are used to control SNMP trap bursts from NE in the following cases:
when a single network event causes a significant number of SNMP traps when a specific network condition can cause NE objects, such as interfaces, to
quickly flap between up and down states See Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) in this section for more information.
Timeout (milliseconds) (snmpTimeout)

The Timeout (milliseconds) parameter specifies the SNMP timeout value for polling or deployment requests between the 5620 SAM and the managed devices. When the request is sent, and no response is received within the Timeout value set, then another request is sent if the Retry parameter value is greater than 1. The range is 200 to 40 000. The default is 10 000.
User Name (userName)

The User Name parameter specifies the CLI user name. On CLE devices, such as the 7250 SAS and Telco devices, the User Name, User Password, and Confirm User Password parameters are used to allow CLI access on the managed device.
The range is unlimited. The default depends on the type of managed device. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent support representative for more information.
User Password (cliPassword)

The User Password parameter specifies the CLI password for the user. On CLE devices, such as the 7250 SAS and Telco devices, the User Name, User Password, and Confirm User Password parameters are used to allow CLI access on the managed device. The value that you enter for the User Password parameter must also be entered for the Confirm Password parameter value. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The default depends on the type of managed device. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent support representative for more information.
149-8
May 2009
150.1 NE Maintenance parameters
150-2
May 2009
150-1
150.1
NE Maintenance parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the NE Maintenance form and child forms.
Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer (isAutoActivate)

The Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer parameter specifies whether the device activates the new software image after an upgrade operation successfully completes. The parameter is enabled and not configurable when the In Service Software Upgrade parameter is enabled. Table 150-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 150-1 Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer parameter
Option enabled (default) Option description After the 5620 SAM transfers the software files to the NE, it does the following:

disabled
updates the BOF with the new software image location backs up the original boot.ldr at the location specified by the CFlash Backup Root Path parameter replaces the currently active boot.ldr file with the new one forces a boot env synch and a config synch on NEs that have redundant CPMs
The 5620 SAM transfers the software files to the NE for activation at a later time.
Auto-Assign ID
Auto-Purge Scheme (purgeMode)

The Auto-Purge Scheme parameter specifies the method of backup purging used to control the number of device configuration backups files kept by the 5620 SAM. Table 150-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 150-2 Auto-Purge Scheme parameter
Option No Auto-purge (default) Limit To A Maximum Number Of Backups By Age (1 of 2) Option description The number of backup files is manually controlled. The maximum number of backup files kept is the value specified by the Number of Backups parameter. When this maximum is reached, the oldest backup files are deleted to make room for the new ones. All backup files older than the value specified by the Maximum Backup Age parameter are deleted. Dependencies The Number of Backups parameter must be configured.
The Maximum Backup Age parameter must be configured.
150-2
May 2009
Option By Age But Retain A Minimum Number Of Backups By Age But Limit To A Maximum Number Of Backups (2 of 2)
Option description Backup files older than the value specified by the Maximum Backup Age parameter are deleted only if the number of files in the backup directory has reached the value specified by the Number of Backups parameter. Backup files older than the Maximum Backup Age parameter are deleted and the number of files is limited by the Number of Backups parameter.
Dependencies The following parameters must be configured:
Maximum Backup Age Number of Backups
Auto-Reboot After Successful Upgrade (isAutoReboot)

The Auto-Reboot After Successful Upgrade parameter specifies whether the device initiates a reboot after an upgrade operation is successfully completed. The parameter is configurable when the In Service Software Upgrade parameter is disabled. The options are:

When you are upgrading multiple devices, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that the parameter is set to disabled. This ensures that reboots of managed devices do not interfere with the transfer of software images from the 5620 SAM to the managed devices.
Caution When you use the 5620 SAM client GUI to perform
managed device software upgrades and disable the parameter, there is a risk that the bof.cfg file may be overwritten in the following situations:
when a user performs bof save using the CLI on the managed
device If there is a gap between a software upgrade and a reboot Perform a show bof to ensure another user has not performed bof save.
Note You are not required to reboot for some node software
upgrades; for example ISA-AA upgrades. See the associated node documentation for additional information.
Auto Backup Scheme (autoBackupScheme)

The Auto Backup Scheme parameter specifies under which conditions a backup to the database should occur. Table 150-3 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
150-3
150 NE Maintenance parameters Table 150-3 Auto Backup Scheme parameter

Option No Auto-backup (default) Every 5620 SAM Server Initiated Save Every Nth 5620 SAM Server Initiated Save Option description Specifies that no automatic backups occur Specifies that a backup occurs when the 5620 SAM server initiates a save operation Specifies that a backup occurs only after a set number of save operations occur The Auto Backup Threshold (operations) parameter must be configured Dependencies
Auto Backup Threshold (operations) (autoBackupSchemeTreshold)

The Auto Backup Threshold (operations) parameter specifies how many save operations occur before a backup is initiated. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Backup Scheme parameter is set to Every Nth 5620 SAM Server Initiated Save. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 0.
Auto-Reboot After Successful Activation (isAutoReboot)

The Auto-Reboot After Successful Activation parameter specifies whether a reboot is required after the database is successfully restored to the device. The options are:

Note You are not required to reboot for some node software
upgrades. See the associated node documentation for additional information. When you are downloading multiple images to multiple devices, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that the automatic reboot option is disabled, to ensure that the new software is properly transferred.
Caution When you use the 5620 SAM client GUI to perform
managed device software upgrades and disable the parameter, there is a risk that the bof.cfg file may be overwritten in these situations:
when a user performs bof save using CLI on the managed device If there is a gap between a software upgrade and a reboot, perform
a show bof to ensure another user hasnt performed a bof save.
Auto Save Scheme (autoSaveConfigScheme)

The Auto Save Scheme parameter specifies how configuration changes are automatically saved on the managed device, and when the network device performs a save of its running configuration, and, if so, how often. Table 150-4 describes the parameter options.
150 NE Maintenance parameters Table 150-4 Auto Save Scheme parameter

Option No Auto-save Every Deployment (default) Option description Specifies that configuration changes are not saved to the device automatically. Specifies that configuration changes are saved on the device after every configuration change is deployed to the device. This option ensures that the managed device configuration file is always up to date with the 5620 SAM database. Dependencies Ensure that this option does not cause excessive activity on the managed device when there is a high rate of network configuration; for example, when an OSS client is performing bulk service configurations through the 5620 SAM-O open interface. When N is set to a large number, changes deployed to a managed device are saved less often on the device. It is therefore possible to lose configuration changes if the device reboots.
Every Successful Deployment Every Nth Deployment Every Nth Successful Deployment
Specifies that configuration changes are saved to the device only when a successful deployment is executed. Specifies that configuration changes are saved to the device after every N deployments, where N is specified by the Auto Save Threshold parameter. Specifies that configuration changes are saved to the device after every N successful deployments, where N is specified by the Auto Save Threshold parameter.
Auto Save Threshold (autoSaveConfigThreshold)

The Auto Save Threshold parameter specifies the number of deployments or successful deployments that are required before configuration changes are automatically saved to the router. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Save Scheme parameter is set to Every Nth Deployment or Every Nth Successful Deployment The range is 0 to 10 000. The default value is 0.
Caution When N is set to a large number, changes deployed to a
managed device are saved less often on the device. It is therefore possible to lose configuration changes if the device reboots.
Boot Option File Mode (bootOptionFileBackupMode)

The Boot Option File Mode parameter specifies the backup behavior for the boot option file. The options are:
Disabled New Version Only Always (default) CFlash Backup Root Path (cflashBackupRoot)
The CFlash Backup Root Path parameter specifies the full path on the device where the node software image file is to be backed up. The default is cfx:/backup, where x is the compact flash drive. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
May 2009
150-5
CFlash Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot)

The CFlash Image Root Path parameter specifies the full path on the device where the node software image file is to be downloaded. The range is 0 to 255 characters. The default value is cf3:/images.
CLI Config File Mode (cliConfigFileBackupMode)

The CLI Config File Mode parameter specifies the backup behavior for the CLI config file. The options are:
Disabled (default) New Version Only Always CLI Config Save Details (cliConfigSaveDetails)
The CLI Config Save Details parameter specifies whether to save additional details about the CLI configuration save changes. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) CLI Debug Save Config File Mode (debugConfigFileBackupMode)
The CLI Debug Save Config File Mode parameter specifies whether to save the debug config files in a backup operation. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Deployment Mode (DeploymentMode)

The Deployment Mode parameter specifies whether configuration management information is sent to a network device or remains on the 5620 SAM. Table 150-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 150-5 Deployment Mode parameter
Option Deployed through SNMP (default) No Deployment Option description Specifies that 5620 SAM configurations are sent to the managed devices using SNMP. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you use this option. Specifies that 5620 SAM configurations are not sent to devices and remain on the 5620 SAM server. This option is useful in lab or demonstration environments, when there is a restored database available, but no network is accessible. Dependencies
150-6
May 2009
Enable Backup (enableBackup)

The Enable Backup parameter specifies whether device backup operations are enabled in the backup policy. When the Enable Backup parameter is disabled, no other parameters on the form are configurable. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled File Compression (compressionMode)

The File Compression parameter specifies the compression format of the backup file if compression is used. If there is no file compression, the value is None. The options are: When you configure an AOS Based Node backup policy, the File Compression parameter only applies to files saved to the certified directory. Files saved to the network directory are always saved using ZIP file compression.
None (default) ZIP GZIP Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot)

The Image Root Path parameter specifies the full path on the device where the node software image file is to be downloaded. The range is 0 to 255 characters. The default value is /flash/.
In Service Software Upgrade (isIssu)

The In Service Software Upgrade parameter specifies whether you want to perform a maintenance (minor) software upgrade on a redundant CPM device without service interruption. During the upgrade, service is maintained as one CPM assumes operation while the other restarts. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer parameter is enabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Maximum Backup Age (days) (maxBackupAge)

The Maximum Backup Age (days) parameter specifies the length of time, in days, that backup files are retained by the 5620 SAM before they are purged. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Purge Scheme parameter is set to a value that begins with By Age. Any non-negative number is valid. The default is 100.
Name
May 2009
150-7
Number of Backups (numBackupsToKeep)

The Number of Backups parameter specifies the maximum number of backup files that are saved in the 5620 SAM database. Any non-negative number is valid. Ensure that there is enough disk space to accommodate the specified value. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Purge Scheme parameter is set to something other than No Auto-purge or By Age. The default is 30. The range is limited by the backup disk space available.
Policy ID (policyId)
The Policy ID parameter specifies a numeric identifier for the backup policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0, which means that no value is specified.
Policy Type (policyType)

The Policy Type parameter specifies the type of backup or software upgrade policy. The options are:
SR Based Node (default) AOS Based Node Retry Interval (retryFrequency)

The Retry Interval parameter specifies the time interval between retry attempts if deployment failed. The options are:
1 minute 5 minutes (default) 10 minutes 15 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes
1 hour 2 hours 3 hours 6 hours 12 hours 24 hours 48 hours
Retry Scheme (retryScheme)

The Retry Scheme parameter specifies how deployment failures should be handled. Table 150-6 describes the parameter options.
150-8
May 2009
150 NE Maintenance parameters Table 150-6 Retry Scheme parameter

Option No Retries Retry Forever (default) Retry Number Of Times Option description Specifies that a deployment retry does not occur as a result of a failed deployment. Specifies that a retry of the deployment should occur continuously, based on the interval period. Specifies that a retry of the deployment should occur the number of times specified in the Retry Threshold parameter. Dependencies A deployment failure does not raise an alarm until the number of deployment retries is reached. When you set the parameter to Retry Forever, there is no set number of attempts, and a deployment failure alarm is not raised.
Retry Threshold (retryThreshold)

The Retry Threshold parameter specifies the number of times that a retry should occur in the event of a failed deployment. The range is 0 to 10 000. The default value is 0.
Save Certified Directory (saveCertifyDir)

The Save Certify Directory parameter specifies whether the OmniSwitch certified directory should be saved during a backup operation. The certified directory contains configuration files that are certified as the default startup files for the switch. These files are the trusted configuration and binary image files. They are used if there is a non-specified reload. The options are:
Enable (default) Disable Save Details (saveConfigDetails)

The Save Details parameters specifies whether to save additional details about the configuration file save change scheme configured. The options are:

When you set the parameter to Enabled, default and non-default information is saved. When you set the parameter to Disabled, only non-default information is saved.
Save Network Directory (saveNetworkDir)

The Save AOS Network Directory parameter specifies whether the OmniSwitch network directory should be saved during a backup operation. The network directory contains files that may be required by servers used for authentication. Other files can also be stored in this directory, if required. The options are:
Enable Disable (default)
May 2009
150-9
Scheduled Backup Interval (scheduledBackupFrequency)

The Scheduled Backup Interval parameter specifies the time interval between scheduled backups to the database. The parameter is configurable when the Scheduled Backup Scheme parameter is set to something other than No Scheduled Backup. The options are:
15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours
6 hours 12 hours 24 hours (default) 48 hours
Scheduled Backup Scheme (scheduledBackupScheme)

The Scheduled Backup Scheme parameter specifies whether a scheduled backup to the managed device database should occur, and, if so, under what conditions. Table 150-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 150-7 Scheduled Backup Scheme parameter
Option No Scheduled Backup Every Scheduled Interval (default) Every Scheduled Interval If 5620 SAM Server Initiated Save Performed Option description Specifies that backups to the database do not automatically occur Specifies that backups to the database should occur based on the value of the Scheduled Backup Interval parameter Specifies that backups to the database should occur as scheduled but only when the 5620 SAM server initiates a save (admin save) operation during the previous backup interval. This option can be used in networks where the managed device configuration is relatively static and fixed or where the backup interval is short to prevent unnecessary backups and management traffic. Dependencies The following parameters must be configured:
Scheduled Backup Interval Scheduled Backup Threshold (operations)
Scheduled Backup Sync Time (scheduledBackupSyncTime)

The Scheduled Backup Sync Time parameter specifies the start time for the first scheduled backup. The range is an allowable value in the format HH:mm. For example, to start a backup at 1 p.m., set the parameter to 13:00, then click on the Apply button. When the parameter value is reached, the backup begins. Backups are then performed at regular intervals, based on the Scheduled Backup Interval and the Scheduled Backup Scheme parameters. The parameter is configurable when the Scheduled Backup Scheme parameter is set to something other than No Scheduled Backup. The default is 02:00 (2 a.m.). The range is a valid time value, based on a 24-hour clock.
150-10
May 2009
Scheduled Backup Threshold (operations) (scheduledBackupTreshold)

The Scheduled Backup Threshold (operations) parameter specifies the number of times that a database backup retry should occur if the backup fails. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 0.
Scheduled Save Interval (scheduledSaveConfigFrequency)

The Scheduled Save Interval parameter specifies the time interval that should elapse before the next save operation is performed. The parameter is configurable when the Scheduled Save Scheme parameter is set to anything other than No Scheduled Save. The options are:
15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour (default) 2 hours 3 hours
6 hours 12 hours 24 hours 48 hours
Scheduled Save Scheme (scheduledSaveConfigScheme)

The Scheduled Save Scheme specifies whether a scheduled save operation should occur, and, if so, under what deployment conditions. Table 150-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 150-8 Scheduled Save Scheme parameter
Option No Scheduled Save (default) Scheduled Always Option description Specifies that a save is not executed automatically Specifies that a save is executed every time the specified time interval has elapsed Dependencies Requires a value to be configured for the Scheduled Save Interval parameter
Scheduled If Deployment Performed Scheduled If Successful Deployment Performed
Specifies that a save is executed only when a deployment is performed Specifies that a save is executed only when a successful deployment is performed
Upgrade File Type (upgradeBootFiles)

The Upgrade File Type parameter specifies the type of software upgrade to perform. The options are:
Image and Boot Files (default) Image Files Only Boot Files Only
150-12
May 2009
151.1 5620 SAM User Security parameters
151-2
May 2009
151-1
151.1
5620 SAM User Security parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the 5620 SAM User Security form and its child forms.
Account Expiry (accountExpiryEnabled)

The Account Expiry parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM should track how long an account remains dormant. When the parameter is enabled and a user account is not used for the number of days specified in the Account Expiry (days) parameter, the user account is removed from the system. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Account Expiry (days) (accountValidityPeriod)

The Account Expiry (days) parameter specifies how long dormant accounts are kept in the system. When a user account is not used for the number of days specified in the parameter and the Account Expiry parameter is enabled, the user account is removed from the system. The range is 0 to 365 days. The default is 180 days.
Advance Password Expiry Notification (days) (advancePasswdExpirNotification)

The Advance Password Expiry Notification (days) parameter specifies how many days before a user password will expire that the user is notified. The range is 0 and 1 to 365 days. The default is 10 days. When the parameter is set to 0, no notification of password expiry is sent to the user.
Apply Local Authentication Only (localAuthenticationOnly)

The Apply Local Authentication Only parameter specifies whether only local authentication is applied to the user group. If this parameter is disabled, remote authentication can be applied to the group. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Attempts before e-mail (numAuthFailuresBeforeNotification)

The Attempts before e-mail parameter specifies how many failed login attempts are allowed per user account before an e-mail is sent to indicate that login failures are occurring. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 3.
151-2
May 2009
Attempts before lockout (numAuthFailuresBeforeLockout)

The Attempts before lockout parameter specifies how many failed login attempts are allowed per user account before that user account is locked out of the system. The range is 0, or 1 to 10 attempts. The default is 5 attempts. If you set the parameter to 0, account lockout functionality is disabled.
Client Timeout (minutes) (guiTimeoutMinutes)

The Client Timeout (minutes) parameter specifies whether 5620 SAM clients shut down automatically after the configured number of minutes of inactivity. The range is 0, or 1 to 9999 min. The default is 0 for all clients. A value of 0 indicates that the client GUI expiry inactivity check functionality is disabled, and client GUIs are not shut down due to inactivity. The parameter is configured system-wide when configured from the General tab. The parameter is configured for a user group when the Override Global Timeout parameter is enabled. The timeout value is 15 minutes for a user group. The setting affects clients that are connected to the 5620 SAM server.
Confirm Password
See Confirm Password in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Description
E-mail Address (fromEmailAddress)

The E-mail Address parameter specifies the address to which an e-mail message is sent if the number of login attempts exceeds the value of the Attempts before lockout parameter. The e-mail message sent is specified using the E-mail text parameter. The value is a valid e-mail address of up to 80 characters using the format name@name.extension.
E-mail Subject (authFailureNotificationSubject)

The E-mail Subject parameter specifies the subject line of the email sent to the user email address. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The default for authentication failures is Authentication Failure. You cannot use double quotes in the text.
E-mail Subject (suspendedNotificationSubject)

The E-mail Subject parameter specifies the subject line of the email sent to the user email address. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The default for suspended account email is Account Suspended. The default for authentication failure is Authentication Failure. You cannot use double quotes in the text.
May 2009
151-3
E-mail text (authFailureNotificationText)

The E-mail text parameter specifies the e-mail message to be sent when the number of login attempts exceeds the value of the Attempts before lockout parameter. The range is 0 to 1024 characters. The default for authentication failure is Enter authentication failure email notification text here. The default for suspended account email is Enter account suspended email notification here. You cannot use double quotes in the text.
E-mail text (suspendedNotificationText)

The E-mail text parameter specifies the e-mail message to be sent when the account is to be suspended. The range is 0 to 1024 characters. The default is Enter account suspended email notification text here. You cannot use double quotes in the text.
E-mail User Name (mailUserId)

The E-mail User Name parameter specifies the outgoing SMTP e-mail user name. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The default is N/A.
E-mail User Password (mailUserPasswd)

The E-mail User Password parameter specifies the outgoing SMTP mail server password. The range is 0 to 80 characters. There is no default.
Enable IP Address validation (enableClientIpAddressValidation)

The Enable IP Address validation parameter specifies whether a user must log in to the 5620 SAM using a client with a valid IP address specified by the Valid Client IP address (validClientIpAddress) parameter. The options are:
True False (default) Enabled (statementEnabled)

The Enabled parameter specifies whether to display a login statement to client GUI users on the login screen. You must be logged in to the client GUI with administrator privileges to view the parameter. The options are:
151-4
May 2009
Reserve Administrator Login (reserveAdminEnabled)

The Reserve Administrator Login parameter specifies whether to reserve one client GUI session, from the total number of sessions allowed based on the licence key, for admin login only. The options are:
disabled (default) enabled First Time Login Password Change

The First Time Login Password Change parameter specifies whether a user will be prompted to enter a new password before they can login for the first time. The options are:
disabled (default) enabled Max Log Records (maxLogRecords)

The Max Log Records parameter specifies the maximum number of security event records to store in the log. Ensure that there is enough disk space to store the security logs. When the threshold is reached, the oldest log entries are overwritten. The range is 10 000 to 10 000 000 000. The default is 100 000.
Override Global Timeout (guiTimeoutOverride)

The Override Global Timeout parameter specifies whether to use the same client inactivity check for all clients in the system, or whether to specify an inactivity check for all users in a specific user group. The options are:

When the parameter is disabled, the client inactivity check is governed by a global value applicable to all clients. When the parameter is enabled, you can specify the Client Timeout (minutes) parameter for the user group. For user accounts associated with the modified user group, the new inactivity check period applies. For example, if there is a user group created that allows users to view but not manage incoming alarms, and no configuration actions take place using that client GUI, you can disable the GUI inactivity check for a specific user group by setting the parameter to enabled and setting the Client Timeout (minutes) parameter to 0, indicating that the inactivity check is disabled.
May 2009
151-5
Password Expiry (passwordExpiryEnabled)

The Password Expiry parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM should track how long an account password remains dormant. When a user password is not used for the number of days specified in the Password Expiry (days) parameter, the password is removed from the system and another password must be created for the account. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Password Expiry (days) (passwordValidityPeriod)

The Password Expiry (days) parameter specifies the threshold for how long a user account password can be used before the password must be modified. The range is 0, or 1 to 365 days. The default is 90 days. If you set the parameter to 0, password expiry functionality is disabled.
Profile ID (scopeOfCommandProfileId)
The Profile ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the scope of command profile. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled.
Profile ID (spanOfControlProfileID)
The Span of Control Profile ID parameter specifies the administrator-defined or default span of control profile to be assigned to the user group. Click on the Select button to list and choose the span of control profile.
Profile Name (scopeOfCommandProfileName)

The Profile Name parameter specifies the scope of command profile name. The range is 1 to 80 characters.
Profile Name (spanOfControlProfileName)

The Profile Name parameter specifies the span of control profile name. The range is 1 to 80 characters.

The Retention Time (hours) parameter specifies the number of hours to keep log files. The retention interval is the minimum number of hours that the logs are stored on the storage media. Any files, that are not transferred by FTP or SCP from the storage media when the retention time is reached, may be deleted; or the logs may remain longer if space is available. The range is 1 to 8760. Ensure that managed devices have sufficient resources to support large-scale statistical policy usage. Ensure that the values for the collection intervals, Retention parameters, and Rollover parameters are sufficient. Also ensure that statistics are retrieved from the storage devices on a regular basis.
151-6
May 2009
Role Name (roleName)

The Role Name parameter specifies a unique name for the scope of command role. The range is 1 to 32 characters.

Scope of Command Profile ID

The Scope of Command Profile ID parameter specifies the administrator-defined or default scope of command profile to be assigned to the user group. Click on the Select button to list and choose the scope of command profile.
Server Name (outGoingServerMail)

The Server Name parameter specifies the outgoing SMTP mail server name. The range is 0 to 80 characters. There is no default.
Span ID (spanId)
The Span ID parameter specifies the administrator-defined or default span of control ID to be assigned to identify the span.
Span Name (spanName)

The Span Name parameter specifies the user-defined name for the span. The range is 0 to 80 characters. There is no default.
Span Description (spanDescription)

The Span Description parameter specifies the user-defined description for the span. The range is 0 to 256 characters. There is no default.
Span of Control Profile ID

The Span of Control Profile ID parameter specifies the administrator-defined or default span of control profile to be assigned to the user group. Click on the Select button to list and choose the span of control profile.
Statement (statement)
The Statement parameter specifies the content of the login message that client GUI users view before they log in to a client GUI session. You must be logged in to the client GUI with administrator privileges to configure the parameter. The range is 0 to 2000 characters. You must set the Enabled parameter before the statement is displayed at log in. When you do not enter a value for the parameter, a value of N/A is automatically assigned, and can be viewed when users log in. You cannot use double quotes in the text.
May 2009
151-7
Test Message (testEmailMessage)

The Test Message parameter specifies the text message that is displayed in the test e-mail that is received when a successful test of the validity of the user e-mail address is achieved. The range is 0 to 1024 characters. The default text is Enter a test message here.

The Threshold Reporting State parameter specifies whether to generate threshold alarms when the number of log entries exceeds Max Log Record parameter value. The options are:
Up (default) Down User Group (defaultSystemGroupAttributePtr)

The User Group parameter specifies a user group in the 5620 SAM that represents the default user group for remote-only users (temporary 5620 SAM user account). The User Group parameter is used when remote authentication is enabled and the remote authentication server does not provide the user group to which the user belongs to the 5620 SAM. The options are:

Note A LI user group cannot be set as the default external user
group.
User Group (groupName)

The User Group parameter specifies an administrator-defined group of users that are likely to perform similar tasks. The range is 5 to 40 characters. There is no default. You cannot use spaces in the user group name.
User Group (groupName)

The User Group parameter specifies an administrator-defined group of users that are likely to perform similar tasks. Click on the Select button to list the available user groups. A user account can only be associated with one user group at a time.
151-8
May 2009
User Group State (userGroupPointer)

The User Group State parameter specifies whether the user group is active in the 5620 SAM. The options are:
active (default) suspended User Name (userName)

The User Name parameter specifies a unique identifier for an individual that uses the 5620 SAM. You cannot use spaces in the user name. User names are case sensitive. The range is 1 to 40 characters.
User Password (password)

The User Password parameter specifies the password for a 5620 SAM user (not the currently logged in administrators password). Passwords must use at least one numerical character, one special character, an upper-case character, and a lower-case character, and cannot be the same as the user account name. The range is 8 to 80 characters and must conform to the site password policies configured.
User State (state)

The User State parameter specifies whether the user is active in the 5620 SAM and allowed to log in. The options are:
active (default) suspended Valid Client IP address (validClientIpAddress)

The Valid Client IP Address parameter specifies the IPv4 address of a client used to access the 5620 SAM. When the Enable IP Address validation (enableClientIpAddressValidation) parameter is True, the user can only access the 5620 SAM from a client with the specified IP address. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
May 2009
151-9
151-10
May 2009
152.1 Change Password parameters
152-2
May 2009
152-1
152.1
Change Password parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Password Change form.
Confirm Password
The Confirm Password parameter specifies the password that was entered for a 5620 SAM user for confirmation purposes. The range is 8 to 100 characters and must match the value entered in the New Password parameter.
New Password (password)

The New Password parameter specifies a new password for a currently logged in user. The characters entered for this parameter must conform to the rules for password creation. The range is 8 to 100 characters. Passwords must use at least one numerical character, one special character, an upper-case character, and a lower-case character, and cannot be the same as the user account name. See chapter 11 for more information.
Old Password (password)

The Old Password parameter specifies the current password of a current user account. The range is 5 to 100 characters.
152-2
May 2009
153.1 TCP Key Chains parameters
153-2
May 2009
153-1
153.1
TCP Key Chains parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the TCP KeyChains form and child forms.
Admin State (adminState)

The Admin State parameter specifies the administrative state of the key chain or key. The options are:
In Service (default) Out Of Service Auto-Assign ID

Begin Time (beginTime)

The Begin Time parameter specifies the time after which the NE uses the key to sign or authenticate the protocol stream. Manually enter a date in yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm format, or use the calendar icon beside the parameter to choose a value. The default is Forever. When the parameter value is set to Forever, the key is not active or used as an eligible key.
Displayed Name (keyChainName)

Description (chainDescription)
End Time (endTime)

The End Time parameter specifies the time until which the NE uses the key to sign or authenticate the protocol stream. The parameter is configurable when the Key Direction parameter is set to Receive. Manually enter a date in yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm format, or use the calendar icon beside the parameter to choose a value. The default is Forever. When the parameter value is set to Forever, the key is valid indefinitely.
Key (sharedSecret)
The Key parameter specifies the shared secret value that the 5620 SAM uses as input for the algorithm specified by the Secret Key Algorithm parameter to sign or authenticate a protocol packet. Specify an alphanumeric value, or accept the value that the 5620 SAM provides. The range is 1 to 20 characters. The default value is a random value that the 5620 SAM generates.
153-2
May 2009
Note For security reasons, Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you
accept the default value that the 5620 SAM generates.
Key Direction (keyDirection)

The Key Direction parameter specifies the protocol-stream direction to which an NE applies the key. The options are:
Send Receive Send-Receive

Caution Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you choose the
Send-receive option to ensure bidirectional communication between NEs.
Key ID (keyId)
The Key ID parameter specifies a numeric value that the 5620 SAM combines with the Displayed Name and Key Direction parameter values to create a unique identifier for the key. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 63.
Receive Option (receiveTcpOptionNumber)

The Receive Option parameter specifies the TCP option value in a received TCP header that is associated with the key chain. The options are:
253 254 (default) All Secret Key Algorithm (algorithm)

The Secret Key Algorithm specifies the algorithm that is used to sign or authenticate the secret key. The options are:
AES-128-CMAC-96 (default) HMAC-SHA-1-96
May 2009
153-3
Send Option (sendTcpOptionNumber)

The Send Option parameter specifies the TCP option value in a TCP header that the NE sends to another device. The options are:
253 254 (default) All Tolerance (seconds) (tolerance)

The Tolerance parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that an eligible receive key overlaps with an active send key. The parameter is configurable when the Key Direction parameter is set to Receive or Send-Receive. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 300.
153-4
May 2009
154.1 5620 SAM RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication parameters 154-2
May 2009
154-1
154.1
5620 SAM RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Remote Authentication Manager form and its child forms.
Address
See Address (address) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1)

The Authentication Order parameters are used to indicate the preferred type and order of password authentication used to verify the 5620 SAM user account. The value of the parameter is the first method of authentication, followed by the values for the two other authentication orders. Table 154-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 154-1 Authentication Order 1 parameter
Option none local (default) Option description Specifies that no authentication type is used Specifies that locally-managed 5620 SAM password authentication is required, based on the passwords assigned by the system administrator Specifies that RADIUS server password authentication is required Specifies that TACACS+ server password authentication is required Dependencies
radius tacplus

See Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) for the parameter description. The default is tacplus

See Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) for the parameter description. The default is radius.
Description
Displayed Name
Exit On Reject
See Exit On Reject (authExitOnReject) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Port
See Port (port) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Retry Attempts
See Retry Attempts (retryAttempts) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Secret
See Secret Name (secret) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Single Connection
See Single Connection (singleConnection) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Timeout (seconds)
See Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
154-3
154-4
May 2009
155.1 NE Management Access Filters parameters
155-2
May 2009
155-1
155.1
NE Management Access Filters parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE Management Access Filters form and its child forms.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies whether a packet that matches the selection criteria is permitted or denied access to the site. Table 155-1 describes the parameter options.
Option none permit deny Option description Specifies that no default action is set Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are permitted Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are denied and an ICMP host unreachable message is sent When you set the parameter to deny, you cannot distribute the policy to the managed device. Before setting the parameter to deny, set the parameter to permit, distribute the configuration to the managed devices, then reconfigure the parameter to deny. Dependencies
Deny Host U unreachable
Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are denied and a host unreachable message is sent
Auto-Assign ID
Configuration Mode
See Configuration Mode (configurationMode) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Default Filter Action (defaultAction)

The Default Filter Action parameter specifies which action is applied to any packets that do not meet the selection criteria. Site management access filters specify the type of access, for example, FTP or Telnet, allowed on the managed devices. These specifications apply to all users that access the device. Table 155-2 describes the parameter options.
155-2
May 2009
155 NE Management Access Filters parameters Table 155-2 Default Filter Action parameter
Option none (default) permit deny deny host unreachable Option description Specifies that no default action is set Specifies that packets that do not match the configured selection criteria are permitted Specifies that packets that do not match the configured selection criteria are denied Specifies that packets that do not match the configured selection criteria are denied and a host unreachable message is sent Dependencies Cannot be set if one or more Site MAF Match Entries exist
Description

The Destination Port parameter specifies the destination UDP or TCP port number. Packets matching the specified port number will be permitted or denied based on the option chosen by the Action parameter. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Destination Port Mask (destinationPortMask)

The Destination Port Mask parameter specifies the mask bits to use, if any, when setting the Destination Port parameter. Packets matching the specified port mask will be permitted or denied based on the option chosen by the Action parameter. This parameter is not configurable if the Destination Port parameter is not set. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 65 535.
Displayed Name
Distribute
ID
Protocol
May 2009
155-3
Source IP
Source IP Mask
See Source IP Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Source Port ID (sourcePortName)

The Source Port ID parameter specifies the address of the source port. Use the format slot/daughtercard/port. For example, to configure port 3 on daughter card 2 on card 6, enter 6/2/3. This parameter is configurable when the Source Port Type parameter is set to port or lag. The range is 0 to 30 characters.
Source Port Type (portType)

The Source Port Type parameter specifies that incoming packets are restricted and must be sent by one of the specified port types to match the criteria specified in the Source IP and Source IP Mask parameters. Packets matching the specified port type will be permitted or denied based on the option chosen by the Action parameter. Table 155-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 155-3 Source Port Type parameter
Option any (default) Option description Specifies that incoming packets from any port are permitted or denied access using any of the specified port types Specifies to configure the Ethernet port on the primary CPM to match the criteria Specifies that incoming packets from a given port, as identified by the Source Port ID parameter, are permitted or denied Specifies that incoming packets from a given LAG, as identified by the Source Port ID parameter, are permitted or denied You can configure the Source Port ID parmaeter Dependencies
cpm port
lag
Synchronize
155-4
May 2009
156.1 NE User Profiles parameters
156-2
May 2009
156-1
156.1
NE User Profiles parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE User Profiles form and its child forms.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies how to handle CLI commands that match the selection criteria specified in the Match String parameter. Table 156-1 describes the parameter options.
Option deny (default) Option description Specifies that CLI commands that match the value indicated in the Match String parameter are denied access to the site (router). Specifies that CLI commands that match the value indicated in the Match String parameter are permitted access to the site (router). Specifies that no default action is set Dependencies
allow
none
Auto-Assign ID
Configuration Mode
Default Profile Action (defaultAction)

Specify the Default Profile Action parameter to determine how to handle CLI commands that do not match any of the configured profile entries. Table 156-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 156-2 Default Profile Action parameter
Option deny Option description Specifies that CLI commands that do not match any of the configured Site User Profile Match Entries are denied access to the site (router). Dependencies
(1 of 2)
156-2
May 2009
Option allow (default for administration account) none (default for all accounts except administrative) (2 of 2)
Option description Specifies that CLI commands that do not match any of the configured Site User Profile Match Entries are permitted access to the site (router). Specifies that no default action is set
Dependencies
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
ID
LI Profile (liProfile)
The LI Profile parameter specifies whether the profile has LI privileges. The options are:

Note To configure the LI Profile parameter you must have LI privileges. For more information about LI, see Chapter 26.
Match String (matchString)

The Match String parameter specifies a CLI command prefix which defines the scope of the user profile. For example, when you set the match string to config and specify a deny action, the user profile cannot use any CLI commands that begin with config. CLI commands are forwarded or denied access to the site (router) based on the Action parameter value.
May 2009
156-3
Synchronize
156-4
May 2009
157.1 NE User Configuration parameters
157-2
May 2009
157-1
157.1
NE User Configuration parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE User Configuration form and its child forms.
Access (access)
The Access parameter specifies which functions the site user can access. You can choose one or more of the available options. By default, none of the options are selected. The options are:
li snmp console (serial port or Telnet access) ftp

Note To set the li value you must have LI privileges. For more
information about LI, see chapter 26.
Authentication Protocol (snmpAuthProtocol)

The Authentication Protocol parameter specifies the authentication method to establish communication with the managed device. SNMP authentication allows the device to validate the managing node that issued the SNMP message and determine if the message has been tampered with. Table 157-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 157-1 Authentication Protocol parameter
Option No Authentication (default) MD5 Option description Specifies that no checks, with the exception of a permission check of the user account, are performed. MD5 specifies that the authentication protocol can be HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. The password length is specified in the Set New Authentication Password parameters. SHA specifies that the authentication protocol can be either HMAC-MD5-96 or HMAC-SHA-96. The password length is specified in the Set New Authentication Password parameters. Dependencies The authentication protocol and associated passwords should match the authentication used on the devices where the accounts reside.
SHA
Configuration Mode
157-2
May 2009
Confirm New Auth Password (snmpAuthPassword2)

The Confirm New Auth Password parameter specifies the users authentication password for confirmation purposes. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Confirm New Priv Password (snmpPrivPassword2)

The Confirm New Priv Password parameter specifies the users privacy password for confirmation purposes. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Confirm Password (password2)

The Confirm Password parameter specifies the password for a local site user for confirmation purposes. The parameter value must match the Password parameter value. The range is 0 to 129 characters and must conform to the site password policies.
Console Cannot Change Password (consoleCannotChangePassword)

The Console Cannot Change Password parameter specifies whether a user can change their password for both FTP and console login. The options are:

When the parameter is set to true, the user cannot change their password for FTP and console login.
Console Login Exec File (consoleLoginExecFile)

The Console Login Exec File parameter specifies the location of the users login exec file which executes every time a user successfully logs in to a console session. The range is 0 to 200 characters. There is no default.
Console New Password At Login (consoleNewPasswordAtLogin)

The Console New Password At Login parameter specifies whether the user must change their password at the next console or FTP login. The options are:
true false (default) Description

Distribute
May 2009
157-3
Home Directory (homeDirectory)

The Home Directory parameter specifies the default local home directory on the managed device for the user for both console and FTP access. The directory is specified as a URL or a URL/directory structure. If the Restrict to Home parameter is set to true, then no file access is granted for the user and no home directory is created. If the Restrict to Home parameter is set to false, then the root directory of the device becomes the default home directory. The range is 0 to 200 characters.
New Authentication Password (snmpAuthPassword)

The New Authentication Password parameter specifies the initial authentication password when the user is created or modifies the password of an existing user. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
New Privacy Password (snmpPrivPassword)

The New Privacy Password parameter specifies the initial privacy password when the user is created or modifies the password of an existing user. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Password (password)
The Password parameter specifies the password for a local site user, for console or ftp access. The range is 0 to 129 characters and must conform to the site password policies.
Privacy Protocol (snmpPrivProtocol)

The Privacy Protocol parameter specifies the encryption method that the user must use to communicate with the managed device. The options are:
No Privacy (default) DES

The DES option specifies the DES privacy key. The privacy password for the DES key is specified in the Set New Privacy Password parameters. The password should match the password configured on the managed device for the user that is using DES privacy.
Restrict to Home (isRestrictedToHome)

The Restrict to Home parameter specifies whether a user can access other directories in addition to their home directory on the managed device. The options are:
true false (default) Synchronize

User Name (displayedName)

The User Name parameter specifies a unique name for the site user. You must configure the parameter. The range is 1 to 16 characters.
May 2009
157-5
157-6
May 2009
158.1 NE Password Policy parameters
158-2
May 2009
158-1
158.1
NE Password Policy parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE Password Policy form and its child forms.
Admin Password (adminPassword)

The Admin Password parameter specifies the password for an admin user, allowing another user account to have administration privileges on the managed device for one session. No RADIUS or TACACS+ authorization is performed. After the session ends, the Admin Password is no longer valid. The length of the password depends on the hash or encryption used. The maximum length is 20 characters unhashed, 32 characters if hashed, and 54 characters if the hash2 keyword is specified.

The Authentication Order parameters are used to indicate the preferred type and order of password authentication used to verify the user account password. Authentication is performed in order, from 1 to 3. The first authentication method will be used, if it can be used successfully. If the first authentication method cannot be used, then the second authentication method is attempted. Table 158-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 158-1 Authentication Order 1 parameter
Option none local radius (default) tacplus Option description Specifies that no authentication type is used Specifies that locally-managed device password database authentication is required Specifies that RADIUS server password authentication is required Specifies that TACACS+ server password authentication is required Dependencies You must configure user accounts and password policies for each type of authentication used, for example, RADIUS and local 5620 SAM server authentication. System administrators need to manage the user accounts, as described in chapter 11.

See Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) for the parameter description. The default is tacplus.

See Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) for the parameter description. The default is local.
158-2
May 2009
Auto-Assign ID
Complexity (complexity)
The Complexity parameter specifies the types of characters that are required in a password. Table 158-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 158-2 Complexity parameter
Option Numeric Characters Mixed Case Option description Specifies that at least one number must be included in the password, for example 3. Specifies that at least one uppercase and one lowercase character must be included in the password, for example, H and h. Specifies that at least one special character must be included in the password, for example, &. Dependencies
Special Characters
Configuration Mode
Confirm Password
The Confirm Password parameter specifies a confirmation of the Admin Password parameter. Enter the same value.
Days Before Expiration (aging)

The Days Before Expiration parameter specifies the number of days that a password can be active before a new password must be entered. When the Password Never Expires parameter is enabled, this field is not configurable. The range is 1 to 500 days. The default is 500 days.
Description
Distribute
Exit on Reject
See Exit On Reject (authExitOnReject) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Health Check (isPasswordHealthCheck)

The Health Check parameter specifies whether to perform RADIUS or TACACS+ server monitoring, to ensure that the servers are reachable. The options are:

When the parameter is set to true, the servers are monitored for seconds at 30 second intervals. Events are generated to indicate when a server is unreachable or when a previously unreachable server becomes reachable.
Health Check Interval (passwordHealthCheckInterval)

The Health Check Interval parameter specifies the server polling interval, in seconds, when you enable the Health Check (isPasswordHealthCheck) parameter. The range is 6 to 1500. The default is 30.
ID
Lockout Time (minutes) (lockoutMinutes)

The Lockout Time (minutes) parameter specifies the amount of time a user is locked out of their account if they exceed the maximum number of password site attempts in the time specified by the value of the Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) parameter. The range is 0 to 1440 min. The default is 10 min.
Maximum Attempts (attemptsCount)

The Maximum Attempts parameter specifies the maximum number of attempts to enter a password before the user is locked out of their account. Configure this parameter in conjunction with the Lockout Time (minutes) and the Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) parameters. The range is 1 to 64. The default is 3.
Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) (attemptsMinutes)

The Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) parameter specifies the maximum number of minutes that can elapse during a password attempt before the user is locked out of their account. Configure this parameter in conjunction with the Maximum Attempts and the Lockout Time (minutes) parameters. The range is 0 to 60. The default is 5.
Minimum Length (minLength)

The Minimum Length parameter specifies the minimum number of characters that are required for a password. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 6.
158-4
May 2009
Name (name)
The Name parameter specifies a name for the created object. The range is 0 to 80 characters.
Password Never Expires (neverExpires)

The Password Never Expires parameter specifies whether the password can expire. When the parameter is disabled, you can specify the number of days the password can be active before a new password must be entered in the Days Before Expiration parameter. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Synchronize

May 2009
158-5
158-6
May 2009
159.1 NE RADIUS Authentication parameters
159-2
May 2009
159-1
159.1
NE RADIUS Authentication parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE RADIUS Authentication form and its child forms.
Address
Configuration Mode
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
Enable Accounting
See Enable Accounting (isAccountingEnabled) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Authorization
See Enable Authorization (isAuthorizationEnabled) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
ID
Port
159-2
May 2009
Retry Attempts
Secret
Source Address
See Source Address (sourceAddress) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Synchronize
Timeout (seconds)
May 2009
159-3
159-4
May 2009
160.1 NE TACACS+ Authentication parameters
160-2
May 2009
160-1
160.1
NE TACACS+ Authentication parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE TACACS+ Authentication form and its child forms.
Accounting Type (accountingType)

The Accounting Type parameter specifies the type of accounting to use when the Enable Accounting is set to true. Table 160-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 160-1 Accounting Type parameter
Option Start and Stop Option description Specifies that both start and stop record accounting notices are sent during authentication transactions with the TACACS+ server. Start packets are sent whenever a user performs a command. Specifies that a stop record accounting notice is sent at the end of an authentication transaction with the TACACS+ server. Stop packets are sent whenever a user command is complete. Dependencies The Enable Accounting parameter must be set to true.
Stop Only (default)
Address
Configuration Mode
Description
Displayed Name
Distribute
160-2
May 2009
Enable Accounting
See Enable Accounting (isAccountingEnabled) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Enable Authorization
See Enable Authorization (isAuthorizationEnabled) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
ID
Secret
Single Connection
See Single Connection (singleConnection) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Source Address
See Source Address (sourceAddress) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
Synchronize
Timeout (seconds)
May 2009
160-3
160-4
May 2009
161.1 NE AOS Security Authentication parameters
161-2
May 2009
161-1
161.1
NE AOS Security Authentication parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE AOS Security Authentication form and its child forms.
Account Port (aaasRadAcctPort)

The Account Port parameter specifies the UDP destination port for accounting requests. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1813.
Authentication Port (aaasRadAuthPort)

The Port parameter specifies the UDP destination port for authentication requests. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1812.
Port (aaasTacacsPort)
The Port parameter specifies the port number for the primary TACACS+ server. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 49.
Retries (aaasRetries)
The Retries parameter specifies the number of retries that the switch makes to authenticate a user before the switch tries to use the backup server. The range is 1 to 32. The default is 3.
Secret (aaasRadKey)
The Secret parameter specifies the secret value that is configured on the switch and the server, but which is not sent over the network. The parameter can be any text or hexadecimal string but the value must match the secret that is configured on the server. The Secret is case-sensitive and is required when creating a server. The range is 1 to 64 characters.
Secret (aaasTacacsKey)
The Secret parameter specifies the secret value that is configured on the switch and the server, but which is not sent over the network. The parameter can be any text or hexadecimal string but the value must match the secret that is configured on the server. The Secret is case-sensitive and is required when you create a server. The range is 1 to 64 characters.
161-2
May 2009
162.1 NE System Security parameters
162-2
May 2009
162-1
162.1
NE System Security parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE System Security form.
Access (templateAccess)
The Access parameter specifies the type of permitted user access. Enable one or more options, as required. The options are:
FTP Console (enabled by default) Console Login Exec File (templateConsoleLoginExecFile)

The Console Login Exec File parameter specifies the name of a login script on the NE that runs automatically when a user logs in. Specify an NE file path. The range is 0 to 200 characters. There is no default.
CPM-Per-Peer-Queuing (cpmPerPeerQueuing)
The CPM-Per-Peer-Queuing parameter specifies whether to enable or disable per peer queuing. Per-peer queuing ensures that the managed device automatically allocates a separate CPM hardware queue for provisioned peers, for example, a BGP or T-LDP peer. The options are:
true false (default) Home Directory (templateHomeDirectory)

The Home Directory parameter specifies the name of the user home directory on the NE. Specify an NE file path. The range is 0 to 100 characters. There is no default.
Link Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtLinkRateLimit)

The Link Rate Limit (pps) parameter specifies the maximum rate, in packets per second, at which an interface can receive link-layer protocol packets from a specific source. This limit is applied to the network and access interfaces on the NE. The range is 1, or 1 to 65 535. The default is -1, which means that there is no maximum rate.
Port Overall Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtPortOverallRateLimit)

The Port Overall Rate Limit (pps) parameter specifies the maximum rate, in packets per second, at which the NE can receive link-layer protocol packets from a specific source. The range is 1, which means that there is no maximum rate, or 1 to 65 535. The default is 15 000.
162-2
May 2009
Protection Administrative State (cpmProtDropUncfgdProtocolMsg)

The Protection Administrative State parameter specifies whether NE DoS protection is enabled or disabled. When the parameter is enabled, the NE enforces the limits specified by the Link Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtLinkRateLimit) and Port Overall Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtPortOverallRateLimit) parameters and drops packets for unconfigured protocols. The options are:
Down (default) Up Restricted to Home Directory (templateRestrictedToHomeDirectory)

The Restricted to Home Directory parameter specifies whether the user is restricted to the directory on the NE specified by the Home Directory (templateHomeDirectory) parameter. The options are:
true false (default) Servers Enabled (enableServers)

The Servers Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable or disable FTP, Telnet, or SSH servers on the managed device. The enabled options are determined by how the device is configured during commissioning, and depend on whether the managed device supports the type of server. See chapter 8 for more information about using CLI to configure devices as servers. The options are:
Telnet IPv6 (available on the 7750 SR only) FTP (enabled by default for all supporting devices) SSH (enabled by default for all supporting devices) Telnet (enabled by default for all supporting devices)
SSH (sshServerVersion)
The SSH parameter specifies the version of SSH supported on the managed device. The option are:
Version 1 Version 2 (default for 7450 ESS) Version 1-2 (default for 7750 SR)
May 2009
162-3
162-4
May 2009
163.1 Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters
163-2
May 2009
163-1
163.1
Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Create Subscriber Authentication Policy form and its child forms.
Accept CoA (acceptAuthenticateChange)

The Accept CoA parameter specifies whether the router handles the CoA messages from the RADIUS server and changes to the RADIUS accounting policies assigned to subscriber profiles during a subscriber host session. The options are:

The RADIUS server sends CoA messages when the following occurs:
the subscriber profile of the subscriber host is modified the SLA profile of the subscriber host is modified the IP configuration of the subscriber host is modified a subscriber host is created
Access Algorithm (accessAlgorithm)

The Access Algorithm parameter specifies the algorithm that is used to select a RADIUS server from the list of configured servers. The options are:
Direct (default) Round-robin Auto-Assign ID

Description
Displayed Name
ID
163-2
May 2009
Password (password)
The Password parameter specifies the password associated with a user in an authentication request sent to the RADIUS server. The range is 0 to 10. There is no default.
Port
Port Prefix String (nasPortPrefixString)

The Port Prefix String parameter specifies the string to be added as a prefix to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS authentication request messages. The range is 0 to 8. A value can be specified for the prefix if the Port Prefix Type parameter is set to User String.
Port Prefix Type (nasPortPrefixType)

The Port Prefix Type parameter specifies the prefix type to be added to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS authentication request messages. The options are:
None (default) User String Port Suffix Type (nasPortSuffixType)

The Port Suffix Type parameter specifies the suffix type to be added to the NAS Port ID option of the RADIUS Attributes parameter when included in RADIUS authentication request messages. The options are:
None (default) Circuit Id Remote Id PPPoE Access Method (pppoeAccessMethod)

The PPPoE parameter specifies one of the methods to authenticate PPPoE towards the RADIUS server. Table 163-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 163-1 PPPoE parameter
Option None PADI Description no PPPoE authentication PPPoE authentication based on the received PADI packet
May 2009
163-3
RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes)

The RADIUS Attributes parameter specifies the RADIUS attributes that are included in RADIUS authentication request messages. Table 163-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 163-2 RADIUS Attributes parameter
Option MAC Address (macAddress) DHCP Vendor Class ID (dhcpVendorClassId) NAS ID (nasID) Remote ID (remoteID) Access Loop Options (accessLoopOptions) PPPoE Service Name (pppoeServiceName) NAS Port ID (nasPortID) Circuit ID (circuit ID) Description The MAC address is included in the request. The DHCP Vendor Class ID is included in the request. The Network Access Server ID is included in the request The remote server ID is included in the request The access loop options are included in the request. The PPPoE service name is included in the request. The Network Access Server port ID is included in the request The circuit ID is included in the request
Re-Authenticate when DHCP lease expired (reAuthenticate)

The Re-Authenticate when DHCP lease expired parameter specifies whether or not authentication is reissued when the DHCP lease state time expires. This parameter assumes that DHCP snooping is enabled on a given IES or VPLS. The options are:
false (default) true Retry Attempts

Router Instance (routerType)

The Router Instance parameter specifies the type of virtual router for the RADIUS authentication policy. Table 163-3 describes the options.
163-4
May 2009
163 Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters Table 163-3 Router Instance parameter
Option Matched (default) VPRN Description Base and Management router instances are the same. A VPRN service that is used as the routing instance for the policy. Dependencies This option is not available for the 7450 ESS in a local policy.
Base
The routing table configuration of the router is the routing instance for the policy. The bof configuration of the router is the routing instance for the policy.
Management
Secret Key
Server IP Address
Source Address (sourceAddress)

The Source Address parameter specifies the source IP address of the RADIUS packets. The range is any valid unicast address. The default is 0.0.0.0. When the parameter specifies the address of the interface, the RADIUS client uses the address for authentication requests. When the address is in-band, the system IP address is used. When the address is out-of-band, the IP address of the management interface is used.
Timeout (seconds)
User Name Format (userNameFormat)

The User Name Format parameter specifies the format of the user name in an authentication request sent to the RADIUS server. Table 163-4 describes the options.
May 2009
163-5
163 Subscriber Authentication Policy Manager parameters Table 163-4 User Name Format parameter
Option MAC Address (default) Circuit ID Option description The MAC address of the DHCP client is the user name. The Option 82 circuit ID from the DHCP packet is the user name. If the 7450 ESS or 7750 SR served as the DHCP relay that inserted the Option 82 information, the user name corresponds to the format defined in the information option. Both ASCII Converted Circuit ID ASCII Converted Both Both the MAC address and the Option 82 circuit ID are used as the user name. The ASCII converted circuit ID of the DHCP client is the user name. Both the MAC address and the ASCII converted circuit ID of the DHCP client are used as the user name.
163-6
May 2009
164.1 NE DoS Protection parameters
164-2
May 2009
164-1
164.1
NE DoS Protection parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE DoS Protection form.
Auto-Assign ID
Description
Overall Rate Limit (pps) (overallRateLimit)

The Overall Rate Limit (pps) parameter specifies the maximum rate, in packets per second, at which the interfaces and SAPs on the NE can collectively receive network-control protocol packets. The range is 1, which means that there is no maximum rate, or 1 to 65 535. The default is 6000.
Packet Rate Limit (pps) (packetRateLimit)

The Packet Rate Limit (pps) parameter specifies the maximum rate, in packets per second, at which the NE receives packets from a specific subscriber or subscriber host. The range is 1, or 1 to 65 535. The default is 1, which means that there is no maximum rate.
Policy ID (id)
The Policy ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the NE DoS protection policy. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Receive Notification (polAlarm)

The Receive Notification parameter specifies whether the NE generates an event if the Packet Rate Limit (pps) (packetRateLimit) or Overall Rate Limit (pps) (overallRateLimit) parameter value is exceeded. The options are:
164-2
May 2009
165.1 NE CPM Filter parameters
165-2
May 2009
165-1
165.1
NE CPM Filter parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the NE CPM Filter form.
Action (action)
The Action parameter specifies whether a packet that matches the selection criteria is permitted or denied access to the site. Table 165-1 describes the parameter options.
Option drop (default) forward queue Option description Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are dropped Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are forwarded Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria are sequentially queued for transmission. Specifies that packets that match the configured selection criteria inherit the default CPM filter action Dependencies
default
Auto-Assign ID
CIR (kb/s) (cir)

The CIR (kb/s) parameter specifies the administrative committed information rate for a queue. The parameter specifies the rate at which the system prioritizes the queue over other queues that are competing for the same bandwidth. The range is 0 to 100 000 000 kb/s, depending on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. You can also choose the MAX option, which specifies the maximum available CIR. When the MAX parameter is set to enabled, you cannot configure the CIR or PIR parameters. The default is 0.
Committed Burst Size (KB) (committedBurstSize)

The Committed Burst Size (KB) parameter specifies the committed burst pool size for a queue and overrides the default reserved pool burst for the queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device will calculate committed burst pool size based on the CIR and the PIR. The default is default.
Configuration Mode
CFM Opcode (cfmOpCodeOper)

The CFM Opcode parameter specifies the type of operation code that is performed in an NE CPM or MAF. If you set the CFM Opcode parameter to a value other than NONE, the values of the CFM Val 1 (cfmOpCodeValue1) and CFM Val 2 (cfmOpCodeValue2) are applied. The CFM Opcode parameter is applied only when the Frame Type (frameType) parameter is set to e802dot1ag. The options are:
NONE (default) EQUAL RANGE LESS_THAN GREATER_THAN
CFM Val 1 (cfmOpCodeValue1)

The CFM Val 1 parameter specifies a value that is applied when you configure the CFM Opcode (cfmOpCodeOper) parameter. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
CFM Val 2 (cfmOpCodeValue2)

The CFM Val 2 parameter specifies a value that is applied when you configure the CFM Opcode (cfmOpCodeOper) parameter. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
Default Filter Action (defaultAction)

The Default Filter Action parameter specifies which action is applied to any packets that match the selection criteria. Table 165-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-2 Default Filter Action parameter
Option forward (default) drop Option description Specifies that packets matching the filter entry are forwarded Specifies that packets matching the filter entry are dropped Dependencies
Description
The Destination IP parameter, combined with the Destination Mask parameter, specifies a destination IP address range as a match. When the parameter is enabled, specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0 for IPv4 or 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 for IPv6.

The Destination MAC parameter specifies a destination MAC address or range that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or management access (destination service access point) filter. Specify a MAC address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Destination Mask
Table 165-3 lists where to find more information about the Destination Mask parameter.
Table 165-3 Destination Mask parameter
Parameter IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified destination IP address Port mask value to use as a match criterion for the destination port of the packet See Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) in this section Destination Mask (destinationPortMask) in this section
Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask)

The Destination Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified destination IP address. The parameter is configurable when the Destination IP parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 32 for an IPv4 mask or 0 to 128 for an IPv6 mask. The default is 0.
Destination Mask (destinationPortMask)

The Destination Mask parameter specifies the 16-bit mask to be applied when matching the destination TCP/UDP port. The parameter is configurable when the Destination Port parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 65535. The default is 0.

The Destination Port parameter specifies the TCP/UDP port to match the destination port of the packet. The range is 0 to 65535. The default is disabled and 0.
Displayed Name
Dot1p (dot1pValue)
The Dot1p parameter specifies an IEEE 802.1p value that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. The dot1p match criterion fails for the frame when a frame is missing the 802.1p bits. The options are:
Not Set (-1) (default) 0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Dot1p Mask (dot1pMask)

The Dot1p Mask parameter specifies the mask that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. The options are:
0 (default) 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the DiffServ Code Point value to be used as the CPM IP filter match criterion. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the DSCP parameter, the packet is mapped to the priority specified by the Priority parameter. Table 165-4 lists the parameter options.
Options be (default) cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 (1 of 2) ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1
May 2009
165-5
Options cs2 af11 af22 af33 (2 of 2) cs3 af12 af23 af41 cs4 af13 af31 af42 cs5 af21 af32 af43
DSAP (dsap)
The DSAP parameter specifies an Ethernet 802.2 LLC destination service access point (DSAP) value that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or management access filter. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1.
DSAP Mask (dsapMask)

The DSAP Mask parameter specifies the mask that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1.

The Dst Mask parameter specifies the 48-bit mask to match a range of MAC address values in an NE CPM or management access filter. Specify a MAC address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00. The Dst Mask parameter is configurable when the Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) is enabled.
Entry ID (id)
The Entry ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the filter entry. The entry ID determines the order of all entry IDs within a specific filter ID. Packets are compared to entry IDs in ascending order. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2048. The default is 0.

The Ether Type parameter specifies an Ethernet type II Ethertype value that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. The Ether Type parameter is a two-byte field that is used to identify the protocol carried by the Ethernet frame. The range is -1 to 65 535. The default is -1.
Flow Label (flowLabel)

The Flow Label parameter specifies the flow identifier in an IPv6 packet header. Flow labeling is used to label packets that belong to specific traffic flows for which the sender requests special handling. The range is 0 to 1 048 575. The default is 0.
165-6
May 2009
Fragment (fragment)
The Fragment parameter specifies whether fragmented or non-fragmented packets are used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and queue priority. Fragmented packets have either the MF bit set, or have the Fragment Offset field of the IP header set to a non-zero value. The options are:
off (default) false true Frame Type (frameType)

The Frame Type parameter specifies the Ethernet frame type that is applied as the MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. Table 165-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-5 Frame Type parameter
Option none (default) e802dot3 e802dot1ag e802dot2LLC e802dot2SNAP Ethernet II Description No frame type is used for filter match criteria Specifies that the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.3 Specifies that the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.1 ag Specifies that the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 LLC Specifies that the frame type is Ethernet IEEE 802.2 SNAP Specifies that the frame type is Ethernet Type II Dependencies Supported only for CPM MAC match entries Supported only for MAC MAF match entries Supported only for MAC MAF match entries

The ICMP Code parameter specifies using the ICMP code field in the ICMP header of an IP packet as the filter match criterion. You can configure this parameter when the Protocol parameter is set to ICMP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 1.

The ICMP Type parameter specifies using the ICMP type field in the ICMP header of an IP packet as the filter match criterion. You can configure this parameter when the Protocol parameter is set to ICMP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 1.
May 2009
165-7
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the queue. The range is 33 to 2000. The default is 0.
IP Option (ipOptionValue)
The IP Option parameter specifies the optional header field to be included in a packet as a match criterion for the filter. Table 165-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-6 IP Option parameter
Option EOOL (000) (default) NOP (001) RR (007) ZSU (010) MTUR (012) MTUP (011) ENCODE (015) TS (068) TR (082) SEC (130) LSR (131) E_SEC (133) CIPSO (134) SID (136) SSR (137) VISA (142) IMITD (144) EIP (145) ADDEXT (147) RTRALT (148) SDB (149) NSAPA (150) DPS (151) UMP (152) FINN (205) Option description End of Options List No Operation Record Route Experimental Measure MTU Reply MTU Probe Time Stamp Traceroute Security Loose Source Route Extended Security Commercial Security Stream ID Strict Source Route Experimental Access Control IMI Traffic Descriptor Extended Internet Protocol Address Extension Router Alert Selective Directed Broadcast NSAP Addresses Dynamic Packet State Upstream Multicast Packet Experimental Flow Control Dependencies
165-8
May 2009
IP Option Mask (ipOptionMask)

The IP Option Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as an additional match criterion for the specified IP Option parameter. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
IPv6 Administrative Status (ipv6AdminstrativeStatus)

The IPv6 Administrative Status parameter specifies whether IPv6 is enabled for the IP filter policy. The options are:
Down (default) Up MAX

The MAX parameter specifies whether the PIR (kbps) parameter or CIR (kbps) parameter is set to infinity or can be configured. The options are:

When the MAX parameter is set to enabled, you cannot configure the CIR or PIR parameters.
Maximum Burst Size (KB) (maximumBurstSize)

The Maximum Burst Size (KB) parameter specifies the maximum burst pool size for a queue and overrides the default reserved burst pool for the queue. The range is -1 to 131 072, with -1 indicating default. Default specifies that the device will calculate committed burst pool size based on the CIR and the PIR. The default is default.
Multiple Option (multipleOption)

The Multiple Option parameter specifies whether to perform a match for a packet that contains more than one optional header field. This parameter is configurable when the Option Present parameter is enabled. Table 165-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-7 Multiple Option parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains more than one optional header field. Matches when a packet contains more than one optional header field. Dependencies
May 2009
165-9
Next Header
See Protocol (protocol) in section 167.1 for more information.
Option Present (optionPresent)

The Option Present parameter specifies whether to perform a match on a packet that contains an optional header field. Table 165-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-8 Option Present parameter
Option off (default) false true Option description Specifies that filtering for this parameter is disabled. Does not match when a packet contains an optional header field. Matches when a packet contains an optional header field. Dependencies
PIR (kb/s) (pir)

The PIR (kb/s) parameter specifies the administrative peak information rate for a queue. The parameter specifies the maximum rate that the queue can transmit packets. Specifying a value for the PIR parameter does not guarantee that the queue can transmit at the intended rate. The actual rate sustained by the queue can be limited by oversubscription factors or available egress bandwidth. The range is 1 to 100 000 000 kb/s, dependant on the line rate of the object to which the policy is applied. You can also choose the MAX option, which specifies the maximum available PIR. When the MAX parameter is set to enabled, you cannot configure the CIR or PIR parameters. The default is MAX.
Protocol
Queue ID (id)
The Queue ID parameter specifies an integer value that identifies a CPM queue. You can configure the parameter when the Action parameter is set to queue. The range is 33 to 2000. The default is 0.
165-10
May 2009
Routing Instance (routingInstanceFor)

The Routing Instance parameter specifies the criteria used to choose the routing instance. The options are:
none (default) base management

For example, when you set the parameter to base, the filter match is done on the base routing instance of the managed device.
Service Id
The Service Id parameter specifies the service ID that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or management access filter.
SNAP OUI (snapOui)

The SNAP OUI parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC subnetwork access protocol (SNAP) Ethernet frame OUI zero or non-zero value that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. Table 165-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 165-9 SNAP OUI parameter
Option off zero Non Zero Description Specifies that packets with the three-byte SNAP OUI field in the SNAP ID set to zero must be matched Specifies that packets with the three-byte SNAP OUI field in the SNAP-ID not set to zero must be matched Dependencies
SNAP PID (snapPid)

The SNAP PID parameter specifies an IEEE 802.3 LLC subnetwork access protocol Ethernet frame ID value that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or management access filter. The range is -1 to 65 535. The default is -1.
Source IP
Source IP Mask
See Source IP Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) in section 167.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
165-11

The Source MAC parameter specifies the source MAC address or range that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or MAF. Specify the 48-bit IEEE MAC address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Source Mask
Table 165-10 lists where to find more information about the Source Mask parameter.
Table 165-10 Source Mask parameter
Parameter IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified source IP address Port mask value to use as a match criterion for the source port of the packet See Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) in this section Source Mask (sourcePortMask) in this section
Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)

The Source Mask parameter specifies the IP mask value to use as a match criterion for the specified source IP address. The parameter is configurable when the Source IP parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 32 for IPv4 IP addresses and 0 to 128 for IPv6 IP addresses. The default is 0.
Source Mask (sourcePortMask)

The Source Mask parameter specifies the 16-bit mask to be applied when matching the source TCP/UDP port. The parameter is configurable when the Source Port parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 65535. The default is 0.
Source Port (sourcePort)

The Source Port parameter specifies the TCP/UDP port to match the source port of the packet. The range is 0 to 65535. The default is disabled and 0.

The Src Mask parameter specifies the 48-bit mask that must match a range of MAC addresses in an NE CPM or management access filter. Specify a MAC address in colon-hexadecimal format. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00. The Src Mask parameter is configurable when the Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) is enabled.
165-12
May 2009
SSAP (ssap)
The SSAP parameter specifies an Ethernet 802.2 LLC source SSAP for a MAC filter match criterion. This is a one-byte field that is part of the 802.2 LLC header of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Frame.The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1.
SSAP Mask (ssapMask)

The SSAP Mask parameter specifies the mask that is applied as a MAC filter match criterion in an NE CPM or management access filter. The range is -1 to 255. The default is -1.
TCP Ack (tcpAck)

The TCP Ack parameter specifies matching on the ACK bit in the TCP header of an IP packet as the filter match criterion. The parameter is configurable when the TCP Syn parameter is enabled. The options are:
off (default) false true TCP Syn (tcpSyn)

The TCP Syn parameter specifies matching on the SYN bit in the TCP header of an IP packet as the filter match criterion. The SYN bit is normally set when the packet source initiates a TCP session with the specified destination IP address. The options are:
off (default) false true
May 2009
165-13
165-14
May 2009
166.1 Generic NE Profiles parameters
166-2
May 2009
166-1
166.1
Generic NE Profiles parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Generic NE Profile form and child forms.
Auto-Assign ID
Command Prompt (CommandPrompt)

The Command Prompt parameter specifies the command prompt that is used to manage the generic NE using the CLI. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 1 to 255 characters. The default is: [\n\r][ \t]?[A-Za-z0-9]*[A-Za-z0-9_-]*(>|#)[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for the appropriate CLI information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Description
Default Element Manager URL (defaultEmUrl)

The Default Element Manager URL parameter specifies the default URL of the generic NE for network element management. You can specify the IP address as a tag within the URL with the format %<IP_address>%.
Disable Paging Command (disablePagingCommand)

The Disable Paging Command parameter specifies the CLI command to disable paging on the device. The range is 1 to 100 characters. See the specific device documentation for the appropriate CLI information.
Enable Login Command (writeAccessLoginCommand)

The Enable Login Command parameter specifies the command to enable the second-level login. This parameter is configurable if the Enable Second Login parameter is set to Enabled. The range is 1 to 255 characters. See the specific device documentation for the appropriate CLI information.
166-2
May 2009
Enable Login Prompt (enablingWriteAccessLoginPrompt)

The Enable Login Prompt parameter specifies the write-access password prompt for the second-level login. This parameter is configurable if the Enable Second Login parameter is set to Enabled. The range is 1 to 255 characters. The default is: [\n\r][Pp]assword(:)?[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for the appropriate CLI information. This parameter is not a regular expression.
Enable Second Login (twoStepsLogin)

The Enable Second Login parameter specifies whether the generic NE has a second-level of login for write access. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Error Indicator (errorIndicator)

The Error Indicator parameter specifies whether the errors in a command result are indicated. Regular expressions can be used. The default is: [\n\r].*(ERROR|Error).* See the specific device documentation for the appropriate CLI information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Execution Command Timeout (seconds) (freezeDetectTime)

The Execution Command Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the time before an execution command times out and is stopped. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 120.
Full Node Resync on Max Trap Gap (fullNodeResyncOnMaxTrapGap)

The Full Node Resync on Max Trap Gap parameter specifies whether a full NE resynchronization is performed if the number of lost SNMP traps exceeds the number specified in the Maximum Trap Gap (maxTrapGap) parameter. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Generic NE Type (productName)

The Generic NE Type parameter specifies a unique network element type for this generic NE profile. The range is 1 to 80 characters.
ID
Idle Session Warning Message (idleSessionWarningMsg)

The Idle Session Warning Message parameter specifies whether an idle session message is ignored if the session becomes idle. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Login Prompt Optional (isLoginPromptOptional)

The Login Prompt Optional parameter specifies whether the login prompt is optional. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Login Timeout (seconds) (loginTimeout)

The Login Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the time before a login command times out and is stopped. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 10.
Max Number Of Sessions (maxNumSessions)

The Max Number Of Sessions parameter indicates the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions that the generic NE can accept. The range is 1 to 300. The default is 1.
Maximum PDU Size (maxPduSize)

The Maximum PDU Size parameter specifies, in bytes, the size of the largest SNMP PDU that the 5620 SAM accepts from an NE associated with this profile. The range is 484 to 9216. The default is 484.
Minimum Time Interval Between Full Node Resyncs (minTimeIntervalBetweenFullNodeResyncs)

The Minimum Time Interval Between Full Node Resyncs parameter specifies the minimum amount of time, in seconds, that the 5620 SAM waits between successive NE resynchronizations in response to SNMP trap losses. The parameter is configurable when the Full Node Resync on Max Trap Gap (fullNodeResyncOnMaxTrapGap) parameter is enabled. The range is 600 to 86 400. The default is 600.
166-4
May 2009
Maximum Trap Gap (maxTrapGap)

The Maximum Trap Gap parameter specifies the maximum number SNMP traps that are lost before the 5620 SAM performs a full NE resynchronization. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 200.
Pre Login Prompt (preLoginPrompt)

The Pre Login Prompt parameter specifies any pre-login messages. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 0 to 255 characters. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Read Login Prompt (readLoginPrompt)

The Read Login Prompt parameter specifies the read-access login prompt. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 1 to 255. The default is: [\n\r][lL]ogin(:)?[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for more information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Read Password Prompt (readPasswordPrompt)

The Read Password Prompt parameter specifies the read-access password prompt. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 1 to 255 characters. The default is: [\n\r][Pp]assword(:)?[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for more information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Reset Command (resetCommand)

The Reset Command parameter specifies the command to return to the root of the CLI command tree. The range is 1 to 100 characters.
May 2009
166-5
Supports Trap Restoration Logs (supportsTrapRestorationLogs)

The Supports Trap Restoration Logs parameter specifies whether the generic NEs associated with this profile support the use of SNMP trap restoration logs for restoring lost traps. The parameter is configurable when the Supports Trap Sequence Number (supportsTrapSeqNumber) parameter is enabled. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Supports Trap Sequence Number (supportsTrapSeqNumber)

The Supports Trap Sequence Number parameter specifies whether the generic NEs associated with this profile support SNMP trap sequence numbering. The options are:

Caution The 5620 SAM supports trap sequencing only for devices
that increment the trap ID value by 1. Do not enable the parameter if the generic NE increments the trap ID value by anything other than 1.
Sys Object ID (sysObjectId)

The Sys Object ID parameter specifies a unique SNMP sys object ID for this generic NE profile. The sys object ID can be specific to a product or to a product family using a wildcard character (*). The range is 0 to 255 characters. The default is: .1.3.6.1.4.1.
Telnet Port (telnetPort)

The Telnet Port parameter specifies the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions that the generic NE can accept or run. The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 23.
Trap Destination Re-enable Time Interval (trapDestinationReenableTimeInterval)

The Trap Destination Re-enable Time Interval parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that the 5620 SAM waits between disabling and re-enabling the 5620 SAM SNMP trap destination on an NE associated with the profile. The range is 300 to 3600. The default is 300.
Write Login Prompt (writeLoginPrompt)

The Write Login Prompt parameter specifies the write-access login prompt. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 1 to 255 characters. The default is:
[\n\r][lL]ogin(:)?[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for more information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
Write Password Prompt (writePasswordPrompt)

The Write Password Prompt parameter specifies the write-access password prompt. Regular expressions can be used. The range is 1 to 255. The default is: [\n\r][Pp]assword(:)?[ \t]* See the specific device documentation for more information. See http:\www.regularexpression.org for more information about regular expressions.
May 2009
166-7
166-8
May 2009
167.1 Common Administration menu parameters
167-2
May 2009
167-1
167.1
Common Administration menu parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the Administration menu forms and child forms.
Accounting Port (accountingPort)

The Accounting Port parameter specifies the accounting port of the RADIUS server that is contacted. This parameter is configurable on the 7710 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1813.
Address (address)
The Address parameter specifies the IP address of the TACACS+ or RADIUS server. Each RADIUS or TACACS+ server must have its own unique IP address. There is no default IP address displayed. You must configure the parameter.

The Administrative State parameter specifies whether an object is administratively enabled. The default depends on the object type. For example, for RADIUS servers, the default is Up. For logging and performance statistics log policies, the default is Down. The options are:
Up Down Authentication Port (port)

The Authentication Port parameter specifies the TCP port of the RADIUS server that is contacted. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1812.
Auto-Assign ID
Enabled (default) Disabled Configuration Mode (configurationMode)

The Configuration Mode parameter specifies the mode in which the global policy is configured and determines whether the policy can be distributed to the network elements. Table 167-1 describes the parameter options.
167-2
May 2009
167 Common Administration menu parameters Table 167-1 Configuration Mode parameter
Option Draft (default) Option description The policy is not reviewed or approved for distribution to network elements. The policy can be synchronized. The policy is reviewed and approved for distribution to network elements. Releasing a global policy does not distribute the policy to existing local definitions for management access filters and CPM IP filters. For all other policies, the policy is distributed when released. The policy can be synchronized. Dependencies Cannot be distributed Can be distributed
Released
Confirm Password
The Confirm Password parameter specifies the password for a user of the system for confirmation purposes. Passwords must use at least one numerical character, one special character, an upper-case character, and a lower-case character, and cannot be the same as the user account name. The range is 8 to 100 characters. The parameter value must match the User Password parameter.
The Description parameter specifies a description for the created object. The default for user groups is user group. The range is 0 to 80 characters for user groups, users, span of command and scope of command roles, NE DoS protection policies, and OmniSwitch RADIUS or TACACS+ policies. The range is 0 to 256 for scope of command profiles.

The Displayed Name parameter specifies a name for the created object. The range is 0 to 32, 1 to 32, 1 to 31, or 0 to 80 characters, depending on the form.
Note You cannot use the : symbol in a policy or key chain name.
The 5620 SAM uses colons as separators for the object full name.

The Distribution Mode parameter specifies whether the local policy is synchronized with the associated global policy. Table 167-2 describes the parameter options.
167 Common Administration menu parameters Table 167-2 Distribution Mode parameter
Option Sync With Global (default) Local Edit Only Option description The local policy is synchronized with the global policy at all times. The local instance cannot be modified. You can modify the local instance only which affects the associated network element. Changes to the global policy do not affect the local policy unless a synchronization operation is manually performed. Dependencies
Enable Accounting (isAccountingEnabled)

The Enable Accounting parameter specifies whether to enable accounting on the RADIUS or TACACS+ server. Accounting is used to track how often users log into a RADIUS or TACACS+ server for authorization purposes. Accounting must be enabled on your RADIUS or TACACS+ server before setting this parameter to true. The options are:
true false (default) Enable Authorization (isAuthorizationEnabled)

The Enable Authorization parameter specifies whether to enable authorization for site users. Setting this parameter to true requires users to authenticate themselves to a RADIUS or TACACS+ server before being granted access to the site (router). The options are:
true false (default) Enable User Template (templateUsedByTacplus)

The Enable User Template parameter specifies whether to enable predefined user templates for policies.
true false (default) Exit On Reject (authExitOnReject)

The Exit On Reject parameter specifies whether the next method in the password authentication order is attempted when a password authentication method attempt is rejected. When this parameter is enabled and one of the authentication methods configured in the authentication order sends a reject, the next method in the order is not attempted. The options are:
167-4
May 2009
ID (id)
The ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the created object. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Ip Address (aaasIpAddress)
The Ip Address parameter specifies the IP address or DNS host name of the primary RADIUS or TACACS+ server. An IP address or host name is required when you create a server. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Ip Address 2 (aaasIpAddress2)
The Ip Address 2 parameter specifies the IP address or DNS host name of an optional backup RADIUS or TACACS+ server. An IP address or host name is required when you create a server.
Password (password)
The Password parameter specifies the password for a user of the system for confirmation purposes. Passwords must use at least one numerical character, one special character, an upper-case character, and a lower-case character, and cannot be the same as the user account name. The range is 8 to 100 characters. The parameter value must match the Confirm Password parameter.
Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime)

The Polling Synchronization Time parameter specifies the polling synchronization start time from which the polling intervals are calculated in hh:mm format based on a 24-hour clock. When the server restarts, the next appropriate collection interval is calculated and polling restarts for all enabled MIBs. The default is 00:00.
Port (port)
The Port parameter specifies the TCP port of the RADIUS server that is contacted. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 1812.
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies which protocol to use as a match filter. Table 167-3 describes the parameter options.
Options ALL HOPOPT (1 of 2) MERIT_INP SEP RVD IPPC GMTP IFMP
May 2009
167-5
Options ICMP IGMP GGP IP ST TCP CBT EGP IGP BBN_RCC_MON NVP_II PUP ARGUS EMCON XNET CHAOS UDP MUX DCN_MEAS HMP PRM XNS_IDP TRUNK_1 TRUNK_2 LEAF_1 LEAF_2 RDP IRTP ISO_TP4 NETBLT MFE_NSP RSVP_E2E_IGNORE IPv6_ICMP (2 of 2) 3PC IDPR XTP DDP IDPR_CMTP TP++ IL IPv6 SDRP IPv6Route IPv6Frag IDRP RSVP GRE MHRP BNA ESP AH I_NLSP SWIPE NARP MOBILE TLSP SKIP IPv6_ICMP IPv6_Noxt IPv6_Opts any host internal protocol (61) CFTP any local network (63) SAT_EXPAK KRYPTOLAN IPv6_No_Nxt any distributed file system (68) SAT_MON VISA IPCV CPNX CPHB WSN PVP BR_SAT_MON SUN_ND WB_MON WB_EXPAK ISO_IP VMTP SECURE_VMTP VINES TTP NSFNET_IGP DGP TCF EIGRP OSPFIGP Sprite_RPC LARP MTP AX.25 IPIP MICP SCC_SP ETHERIP ENCAP any private encryption scheme (99) IPv6_Opts PNNI PIM ARIS SCPS QNX A/N Active Networks (107) IPComp SNP Compaq_Peer IPX_in_IP VRRP PGM any 0-hop protocol (114) L2TP DDX IATP STP SRP UTI SMP SM PTP ISIS FIRE CRTP CRUDP SSCOPMCE IPLT SPS PIPE SCTP FC
167-6
May 2009
Protocol Name (aaasProtocol)

The Protocol Name parameter specifies the protocol type for this policy. The options are:
RADIUS (default) TACACS+ Retry Attempts (retryAttempts)

The Retry Attempts parameter specifies the maximum number of times an attempt is made to contact the RADIUS server to perform authorization. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 3.

The SAM-O Events Enabled parameter specifies whether JMS XML event notification of scheduled statistics is enabled for OSS client applications. The options are:
Enabled (not recommended) Disabled (default)

See the 5620 SAM-O OSS Interface Developer Guide for information on how to collect statistics for OSS client applications.
Secret Name (secret)

The Secret Name parameter specifies a secret value that must match the secret value on the RADIUS or TACACS+ server. The range is 1 to 20 characters.
Single Connection (singleConnection)

The Single Connection parameter specifies whether to use a single connection to the TACACS+ server. This allows a single connection to the TACACS+ server to stay up, instead of setting up a new connection for each authentication event. When a single connection is used, all Telnet, SSH, or FTP sessions use the connection. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Source Address (sourceAddress)

The Source Address parameter specifies the IP address of the RADIUS or TACACS+ server. The default is 0.0.0.0.
May 2009
167-7
If this object is configured with the address of the router interface, the RADIUS client uses it while making a request to the server. If the address is not configured or is not the address of the one of interfaces, the source address is based on the address of the RADIUS server. If the server address is in-band, the client uses the system IP address. If it is out-of-band, the source address is the address of the management interface.
Note Although it is configurable, the parameter on the RADIUS or TACACS+ policy creation form is not used by Release 4.0 and later devices. You must use the Source Address tab of the routing instance properties form for the device to specify the source address of the RADIUS or TACACS+ server.
The Source IP parameter specifies the IP address of the requester. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format.
Source IP Mask (sourceIpAddressMask)

The Source IP Mask parameter specifies the mask bits to use when you specify a general IP range with the Source IP parameter to discover a subnet. Packets matching the specified IP mask are permitted or denied, based on the option chosen by the Action parameter. The range is 0 to 32 for an IPv4 address, or 0 to 128 for an IPv6 address. The default is 0.
Time Out (aaasTimeOut)

The Time Out parameter specifies the timeout period for server replies to authentication requests. The range is 1 to 30. The default is 2.
Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds)

The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies how many seconds the managed device waits for a response from the RADIUS or TACACS+ server. The range is 1 to 90. The default is 3. The default is 5 for the Timeout (seconds) parameter assigned to subscriber authentication policies.
167-8
May 2009
Equipment navigation tree parameters
168 Network parameters 169 Router parameters 170 LAG parameters 171 CCAG parameters 172 ISA-AA Group parameters 173 IPSEC Group parameters 174 Bundles parameters 175 Shelf parameters 176 Card Slot parameters 177 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor parameters 178 Physical Port and APS parameters 179 Channel parameters 180 Common equipment navigation tree parameters
May 2009
May 2009
168.1 Network parameters
168-2
May 2009
168-1
168.1
Network parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the form launched from the contextual menu option for the Network icon in the ring group view.
Description (groupDescription)
The Description parameter specifies a description for the ring group. The range is 0 to 255 characters.
Enabled (enabled)
The Enabled parameter specifies whether TLS is enabled for the ring group. When the Enabled parameter is enabled from the TLS tab button, all 7250 SAS or Telco devices added to the ring group inherit the configured TLS parameter settings.
Ethertype (ethertypeValue)
The Ethertype parameter specifies the 802.1Q tag for the Ethernet packet representing the VLAN ID. You can configure the parameter when the Enabled parameter on the TLS tab is enabled. The default is 0x8100, which is the standard tag for 802.1Q traffic. The range is a supported three- to six-character hexadecimal number in the format 0x1234.
Group Name (groupName)

The Group Name parameter specifies a name for the ring group. The range is 1 to 10 characters.
Jumbo Frame (jumboFrame)

The Jumbo Frame parameter specifies whether the 7250 SAS or Telco device allows Ethernet payloads in frames larger than 1500 bytes. You can configure the parameter when the Enabled parameter on the TLS tab is enabled. Use the parameter to allow the transport of large frames for Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, in which a larger MTU frame size is required. The options are:

Devices in the L2 VPN service and the VLAN must be capable of supporting larger frame sizes. All devices in the same ring must have the same parameter setting. For example, all devices can have the parameter enabled, or all of them can have it disabled. You must reboot the node for a change to the parameter to take effect.
Mode
See Mode (mvrMode) in section 185.1 for the parameter description.
168-2
May 2009
Query Response Time (seconds) (mvrQueryTime)

The Query Response Time (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum time to wait for IGMP report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. The range is 0 to 25 s. The default is 10 s.
Ring Group Type (groupMode)

The Ring Group Type parameter specifies whether the ring group will be used for VLAN or VPLS services. The options are:
VLAN (default) VPLS
May 2009
168-3
168-4
May 2009
169.1 Router parameters
169-2
May 2009
169-1
169.1
Router parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the router property form, the child forms, and the forms opened from other contextual menu options for routers.
Active Management IP (activeManagementIp)

The Active Management IP parameter specifies the preferred management method used for the device. Table 169-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 169-1 Active Management IP parameter
Option Primary (default) Option description Specifies that management traffic should use the IP address initially used to discover the device. This can be the system IP address (in-band management) or the management IP address (out-of-band management). Out-of-band management means that traffic is sent on the control plane, separate from customer traffic. In-band management means that traffic is sent on the data plane using the customer forwarding path, but is distinguished from customer data using a VRF table. Secondary Specifies that management traffic should use the second IP address discovered for the device. This is the system IP address (in-band management). In-band management means that traffic is sent on the data plane using the customer forwarding path, but is distinguished from customer data using a VRF table. Dependencies

ATM OAM Loopback Location ID (atmOamLoopbackLocationID)

The ATM OAM Loopback Location ID parameter specifies the 16 octets that identifies the system loopback location ID as required by the ATM OAM loopback capability. Invalid values include an ATM OAM Loopback Location ID where the first octet is: 00, FF, or 6A. A valid ATM OAM Loopback Location ID requires the the first octet to be: 01 or 03. Other values are not accepted. The minimum is 0 and the maximum is 47. The default is 01:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00: 00:00.
ATM OAM Loopback Period (atmOamLoopbackPeriod)

The ATM OAM Loopback Period parameter specifies how the number of times the loopback cell is transmitted on the ATM interface to verify its connection to an endpoint on a virtual circuit. You can enable ATM loopbacks for IES and VPRN SAPs on a 7750 SR interface. The range is 0 to 40. The default is 10.
169-2
May 2009
Auto Revert to Preferred (isMgmtIpAutoRevertive)

The Auto Revert to Preferred parameter specifies which management method to revert to when the original device returns to an active state after a switchover. Table 169-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 169-2 Auto Revert to Preferred parameter
Option Enabled Option description Specifies that the device reverts to the management method configured in the Management IP Selection parameter when the device returns to an active state. Specifies that no attempt to revert to the management method configured in the Management IP Selection parameter is attempted when the device returns to an active state. Dependencies Use only when the Management IP Selection parameter is set to Primary Preferred or Secondary Preferred. If the Active Management IP parameter is set to Primary Only or Secondary Only and the Auto Revert to Preferred parameter is set to Disabled, a loss of network visibility can occur if secondary management fails.
Disabled (default)
Description
The Description parameter specifies a description for the DHCP lease state persistence function. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The default is N/A.
Ignore Timestamps
The Ignore Timestamps parameter specifies whether entries with unchanged last change timestamps are processed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) L4 Load Balancing (l4LoadBalancing)

The L4 Load Balancing parameter specifies whether the device performs system-wide load TCP and UDP load balancing. If enabled, the device includes the L4 source and destination port fields in the hashing calculation for a TCP or UDP packet.
enabled disabled (default) LACP System Priority (sysLacpSystemPriority)

The LACP System Priority parameter specifies the priority for link aggregation on the device. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 32 768.
May 2009
169-3
LI Local Save Allowed (liLocalSaveAdmin)

The LI Local Save Allowed parameter specifies whether lawful interception configuration is saved locally. If the information is saved locally it is subject to local regulations. When LI Local Saved parameter is enabled, 5620 SAM periodically performs a save. If the parameter value is set to false, the LI information must be reconfigured after a system reboot. The options are:
True False (default) Location (location)

The Location parameter specifies the physical location of the device. The range is N/A, or 0 to 80. The default is N/A. Use the parameter to indicate a physical location for the device. This is useful when generating inventories of network devices.
Management IP Selection (mgmtIpRule)

The Management IP Selection parameter specifies the management method to be used in the event of a switchover. Table 169-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 169-3 Management IP Selection parameter
Option Primary Preferred Option description Specifies that primary management is available for the device as the preferred management method in the event of a switchover. Specifies that only primary management is available for the device and that no attempt will be made to use a secondary connection in the event of a switchover. Specifies that only secondary management is available for the device and that no attempt will be made to use a primary connection in the event of a switchover. Specifies that secondary management is available for the device as the preferred management method in the event of a switchover. Dependencies The Active Management IP parameter must be set to Primary or Secondary. The Active Management IP parameter must be set to Primary. The Active Management IP parameter must be set to Secondary. The Active Management IP parameter must be set to Primary or Secondary.
Primary Only (default)
Secondary Only
Secondary Preferred
Number of Tries for Down State (atmOamRetryDown)

The Number of Tries for Down State parameter specifies the number of times that the loopback attempts transmission on the ATM interface if it does not receive a response. If a response is not received and consecutive retry-down commands also result in failure, the endpoint raises an alarm. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 4.
169-4
May 2009
Number of Tries for Up State (atmOamRetryUp)

The Number of Tries for Up State parameter specifies the number of times that the loopback attempts transmission on the ATM interface after a response is received. If a response is received and consecutive retry-up commands also result in failure, the endpoint displays an up state. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 2.
Persistent SNMP Indices (persistentSnmpIndices)

The Persistent SNMP Indices parameter specifies whether persistent SNMP indices are configured on the managed devices. The options are:

Caution The 5620 SAM requires persistent SNMP indices to save
running configurations on managed devices. If persistence is not enabled, there will be database inconsistencies and 5620 SAM will not be able to discover managed devices. You should set the parameter to true if persistency has been turned off on the managed device. You cannot set the parameter to false using 5620 SAM. The 5620 SAM cannot properly manage a device with SNMP index inconsistencies.
Resync
See Resync button (triggerResync) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Redundant Synchronization Mode (redundantSynchronizationMode)

The Redundant Synchronization Mode parameter specifies when redundant devices should be resynchronized, based on changes to configuration on the devices. Table 169-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 169-4 Redundant Synchronization Mode parameter
Option None (default) Configuration File Change Boot Environment Change Option description Specifies that no resynchronization is performed for redundant devices when one of the device configurations changes. Specifies that resynchronization is performed for redundant devices when the configuration file of one of the devices changes. Specifies that resynchronization is performed for redundant devices when the BOF file of one of the devices changes.
Resource Group ID
The Resource Group ID parameter specifies the group to which the NE is assigned for the management of 5620 SAM system resources.
May 2009
169-5
Caution Changing the Resource Group ID parameter setting has
serious consequences. Do not configure the parameter without first contacting your Alcatel-Lucent technical-support representative.
Router ID (routerId)
The Router ID parameter specifies the routing instance as the IP address of the managed router. The router ID uniquely identifies the device within an autonomous system and is used by OSPF and BGP in the routing table manager instance.
Scheduled Polling (resyncState)

The Scheduled Polling parameter specifies whether polling is enabled for the device. Polling policies are configured under the Poller Policies menu, using the Base Polling Interval and the Discovery Rule Scan Interval parameters. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Separate LI Administration (liSeparateAdmin)

The Separate LI Administration parameter specifies whether a node can be configured to separate normal system administrative tasks from tasks of the LI user. When the parameter value is set to true, there is an administrative separation and the LI user is the only entity who can grant LI permissions to any other user. System administrators without LI privileges cannot modify, create, or view any LI-specific configurations.The node must be rebooted to activate the separate mode. The options are:

In the separate mode, the anonymity of the mirror source object is protected. Once source criteria is attached to the LI source, the following applies:
In SAP configurations, only the modifications that stop the flow of LI data while
the customer receives data is blocked.
In filter configurations, if a filter entry is attached to the LI source, modifications

and deletion of both the filter and the filter entry are blocked.
SSH Session
Click on the SSH Session button to start an SSH-secured Telnet session with the device. SSH must be enabled on the device for this option to be available. Only SSH2 is supported on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7250 SAS, and generic NEs. The devices require preconfiguration before an SSH session can be established using SSH2. See chapter 15 for more information about configuring SSH2.
169-6
May 2009
Slot
The Slot parameter specifies the location on the managed device where the router or switch writers the DHCP persistence file, which tracks all the information learned through DHCP snooping. When this information is written to the compact flash on the managed device, the learned information is retained across reboots. Use the Select button to choose a flash file location on the appropriate card slot. Click on the OK button to select the card slot. The card slot ID and flash ID are populated on the form. You can use the Layer 2 and Layer 3 parameters to save the DCHP information to different flash devices, or the same device.
System ID (Loopback Ip Address) (systemAddress)

The System ID parameter specifies the loopback IP address for the system, also known as the system IP address. When the system IP address is used to discover the device, the management connection is in-band and there must be a route from the 5620 SAM to the port on which the system IP address is configured. The system ID is associated with the network entity (such as a specific router), not a specific interface. The system ID preserves connectivity when routing reconvergence is possible. If an interface fails or is removed, the system ID is used as the router identifier. A system interface must have an IP address with a 32-bit subnet mask. The system ID is associated automatically during configuration of the following entities:
termination points for service tunnels hops when you configure MPLS paths and LSPs addresses on a target router for BGP and LDP peering Telnet Session
See Telnet Session button in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
View Shelf
Click on the View Shelf button to open the Equipment Window - Display form for a graphical representation of the equipment in the shelf.
VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) (vplsServiceMode)

The VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) parameter specifies the VPLS mode of a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA node. The options are:
Disabled (default) Qualified (applicable to Release 2.0 to Release 3.0 R3.1 inclusive) Unqualified (applicable to Release 2.0 to Release 3.0 R3.1 inclusive) Enabled (applicable to Release 3.0 R4 or later)
May 2009
169-7
169 Router parameters Table 169-5 VPLS Mode parameter

Parameter Value Disabled Qualified (Release 2.0 to Release 3.0 R3.1) Description\ Specifies that the node supports only VLAN services. Specifies that a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA node supports VPLS SAPs with encapsulation. A node in this mode uses a port and an encapsulation value to identify a VPLS SAP. Multiple services can use the same port as long as they have different encapsulation values. You can specify the SAP encapsulation value using the Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue) parameter. Specifies that a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA node in this mode does not support VPLS SAPs with encapsulation. A VPLS SAP uses an entire port and cannot be shared with another service. Specifies that a 7250 SAS-ES or 7250 SAS-ESA node in this mode supports VPLS services. The user cannot change this value back to Disabled using the 5620 SAM.
Unqualified (Release 2.0 to Release 3.0 R3.1) Enabled (Release 3.0 R4 or later)
169-8
May 2009
170 LAG parameters
170.1 LAG parameters
170-2
May 2009
170-1
170 LAG parameters
170.1
LAG parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the LAG property form, the child forms, and the forms opened from other contextual menu options for LAGs.
Active Sub-Group Selection Criteria (lacpSelCrit)

The Active Sub-Group Selection Criteria parameter specifies the criterion for selecting the active LAG subgroup. Table 170-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 170-1 Active Sub-Group Selection Criteria parameter
Option Highest_Count (default) Option description The subgroup with the highest number of eligible link members is the active group. An eligible member is a LAG link that can potentially become active since it is operational and has not been disabled by a remote system (on which standby link signaling is not supported). The subgroup with the highest aggregate weight is the active group. Dependencies
Highest_Weight
The parameter is configurable on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and on Release 5.0 or later of the 7710 SR.
Actor Administration Key (actorAdminKey)

The Actor Administration Key parameter specifies a unique value to identify the channel group on each port that is configured to use LACP. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Generate parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 65 535.

Auto-Generate
The Auto Generate parameter specifies whether to automatically configure an Actor Administration Key parameter. The options are:
170-2
May 2009
170 LAG parameters
Auto-Assign ID
Class
See Class (PortClass) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Configured Address
See Configured MAC (macAddress) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Description
Dynamic Cost (dynamicCosting)

The Dynamic Cost parameter specifies whether to enable the LACP and OSPF costing for a LAG, based on the available aggregated, operational bandwidth. The parameter is used to calculate path cost. Table 170-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 170-2 Dynamic Cost parameter
Option Enabled Option description Specifies that when the number of active links is greater than the value set in the Port Threshold parameter, the path cost is dynamically calculated. The calculation occurs when there is a change in the number of active links, regardless of the specified port threshold action. If the port-threshold is met and dynamic cost is set, the path cost is dynamically recalculated. If OSPF auto-cost is not configured, the cost configured on the OSPF metric determines the cost when the number of links available exceeds the configured LAG threshold value. The configured threshold action determines whether the LAG is advertised. Disabled (default) Specifies that when dynamic-cost and OSPF auto-cost are not configured, the cost configured on the OSPF metric determines the cost advertised when the number of links available exceed the configured LAG threshold value. The Port Threshold Action parameter setting determines whether the LAG is advertised. If OSPF auto-cost is configured, the cost is based on the total number of configured links. This cost remains static provided the number of links that are up exceeds the LAG threshold value. The configured threshold action determines whether and at what cost the LAG is advertised. Dependencies
Path cost is dynamically calculated based on interface bandwidth. The cost advertised is inversely proportional to the number of links available when the number of links that are up exceeds the configured LAG threshold value. The configured threshold action determines if and at what cost the LAG is advertised.
May 2009
170-3
170 LAG parameters
For example, assume a physical link in OSPF has an associated cost of 100, and the LAG consists of four physical links. The cost associated with the logical link is 25 (one quarter for each physical link). If one link fails, the cost is automatically adjusted to 33 (one-third for each physical link).
Encap Type
See Encap Type (encapType) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) (lacpHoldTimeDown)

The Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) parameter specifies the delay between the detection of a LAG being down (all active ports are down) and reporting the detection. The range is 0 to 50. The default is 0. The parameter is configurable on the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR.
LACP Mode (lacpMode)

The LACP Mode parameter specifies whether the LACP is active or passive. The parameter is used for aggregated Ethernet interfaces only. One end of the LAG group must be configured as active for the LACP to work. The options are:
active passive (default) LACP System Priority (sysLacpSystemPriority)

The LACP System Priority parameter specifies the LACP system priority on aggregated Ethernet interfaces. The range is 1 to 65 535, where 1 is the highest priority. The default is 1.
LACP Transmit Interval (lacpTransmitInterval)

The LACP Transmit Interval parameter specifies the speed of the transmission. The options are:
Slow Fast (default) LACP Transmit Standby (lacpXmitStdby)

The LACP Transmit Standby parameter specifies whether LACP message transmission on standby links is enabled. By default, links that are members of a LAG and are in standby mode still receive and transmit LACP messages. The disabling of LACP message transmission on standby links adversely affects switchover times and should only be done to ensure interworking with systems that do not support standby link signaling. The options are:

170 LAG parameters
The parameter is configurable on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and on Release 5.0 or later of the 7710 SR.
LAG ID (lagId)
The LAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG. The range is 1 to 200 for the multiple-slot 7450 ESS and 7750 SR devices. The range is 1 to 64 for the 7450 ESS-1, 7750 SR-1, and the 7710 SR. The LAG ID is identical for all members of a LAG. The LAG ID creates an association between a logical IP interface and a LAG. An IP interface can be associated with a port or the system loopback address.
Mode
See Mode (mode) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Port Threshold (portThreshold)

The Port Threshold parameter specifies the number of operational links that can fall below the configured threshold level. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0, which indicates that the link is operationally down when all links are down.
Port Threshold Action (portThresholdAction)

The Port Threshold Action parameter specifies the action taken when the number of operational links falls below the configured port threshold. Depending on the path cost value that is calculated, this parameter determines whether the LAG is advertised. Table 170-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 170-3 Port Threshold Action parameter
Option down (default) Option description Specifies that dynamic costing is disabled, indicating that the LAG is not advertised. When the number of links that are up in a LAG is less than the configured threshold, the LAG is operationally down. For example, assume that a LAG consists of eight physical links, the threshold is set to four, and dynamic costing is not configured. If the number of operational links drops below four, the link is operationally down until the number of operational links is at least four. Dynamic Cost Specifies that dynamic costing is enabled, indicating that the LAG is advertised. When the number of links available in a LAG is less than the configured threshold, the LAG uses the dynamic cost, which allows other nodes to adjust their routing tables according to the revised costs. When the threshold is not exceeded, a fixed metric for all operational links is advertised. Dependencies
May 2009
170-5
170 LAG parameters
Port Type (lagPortType)

The Port Type parameter specifies the port member type for the LAG. The options are:
standard (default) hsmda

A LAG cannot contain port members from HSMDA and standard ports. The LAGs added to the MC-LAG must have the same member port type.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the Actor System Priority for the LACP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 128. The parameter configures the base router priority or selection order for the virtual router instance that is used in the master election process. The priority value and the preempt mode allow the virtual router with the best priority to become the master virtual router. Priority control policies can override or adjust the base priority value, depending on events or conditions within the chassis. To prevent a backup virtual router with a better priority value from becoming the master when an existing non-owner virtual router is the current master, set the preempt parameter on a virtual router to false, using the CLI. The master election process is determined on a first-come, first-served basis.
QoS Adaptation (adaptQoS)

The QoS Adaptation parameter specifies the CCAG SAP queue and virtual scheduler buffering and rate parameters are adapted over multiple active CCAs. Table 170-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 170-4 QoS Adaptation parameter
Option Distribute (default) Option description CCAG SAP queues and schedulers on each CCA will receive a portion of the defined parameters in the QoS and scheduler policies. The portion is decided on an IOM basis, with the ratio determined by the number of active CCA members on the IOM relative to the total number of active members within the CCAG. The following equation may be used to determine the actual ratio: IOM-parameter-value = (IOM-active-CCA / total-active-CCA) * policy-parameter-value Link CCAG will create the SAP queues and virtual schedulers on each CCA with the actual parameters defined in the QoS and scheduler policies. This mode is useful when conversation hashing places all or most traffic over a single CCA. Dependencies
170-6
May 2009
170 LAG parameters
Resync
Show Only Compatible Ports

The Show Only Compatible Port Numbers parameter specifies whether to filter the list of ports presented, by determining whether the ports can be configured as LAGs. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, checks are performed to ensure the following:
the port mode is network the port cannot be POS the port cannot belong to another LAG there cannot be more than eight ports in a LAG the port cannot be bound to a Layer 3 interface the ports must have the same speed the port must be set to full duplex and auto negotiation must be turned off
Slave to Partner (lacpSelCritSlaveToPartner)

The Slave to Partner parameter specifies whether all ports in a LAG that are signaled as standby by the partner should be considered as eligible members for active selection. An eligible member is a LAG member link that can potentially become active, since it is operational and has not been disabled by a remote system (on which standby link signaling is not supported). The default is disabled. The parameter is configurable on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and on Release 5.0 or later of the 7710 SR.
Sub-Group ID (subGroupId)
The Sub-Group ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the LAG subgroup. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1. Table 170-5 describes additional options for this parameter.
Table 170-5 Sub-Group ID parameter
Option auto_mda auto-iom Parameter description Ports that belong to the same MDA are assigned the same subgroup ID. Ports that belong to the same IOM are assigned the same subgroup ID. Dependencies
May 2009
170-7
170 LAG parameters
View the newly created interface

The View the newly created interface parameter specifies that the Properties form for the newly created LAG opens when you close the configuration form.
170-8
May 2009
171 CCAG parameters
171.1 CCAG parameters
171-2
May 2009
171-1
171 CCAG parameters
171.1
CCAG parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the CCAG property form, the child forms, and the forms opened from other contextual menu options for CCAGs.
Access Adapt QoS (accessAdaptQos)

The Access Adapt QoS parameter specifies how the CCAG SAP queue and virtual scheduler buffering rate parameters are adapted over multiple active CCAs. The options are:
Link Distribute (default)

When you choose Link, the CCAG creates the SAP queues and virtual schedulers on each CCA with the actual parameters specified in the path table. When you choose Distribute, each CCA receives a portion of the parameters specified in the path table.
CCAG ID (ccagId)
The CCAG ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the CCAG.The CCAG ID is identical for all members of a CCAG. The CCAG ID creates an association between a VSM-CCA and a CCAG. The range is 1 to 8. There is no default.
CCA Rate (kbps) (ccaRate)

The CCA Rate parameter specifies the maximum forwarding rate for each CCA member within the CCAG. The range is 1 to 100 000 000. The default is 1.
CCA Rate Enabled (ccaRateEnabled)

The CCA Rate Enabled parameter is used in conjunction with CCA Rate to state that the user will either set a CCA Rate or disable it, defaulting CCA Rate to 1. By default the CCA Rate Enabled parameter is disabled.
CC ID (ccId)
The CC ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the CC within the CCAG. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not set.
Description
171 CCAG parameters
Egress Reserved CBS (%)

See Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs) in section 99.1 for the parameter description.
Egress Slope Policy

See Slope Policy (slope) in section 180.1 for parameter description.
Ingress Reserved CBS (%)

See Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs) in section 99.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Slope Policy

See Slope Policy (slope) in section 180.1 for parameter description.
MTU (octets) (mtuValue)

The MTU (octets) parameter specifies the default MTU size for the CCAG path. When the parameter is set to 0, the MTU is calculated internally. The default value is 1518.
Path Rate (Kb/s) (pathRate)

The Path Rate specifies the bandwidth rate limitation for this path on each member CCA in the CCAG. The range is 1 to 100000000. The default is 1.
Path Rate Enabled (pathRateEnabled)

The Path Rate Enabled parameter is used in conjunction with Path Rate to state that the user will either set a path Rate or disable it, defaulting Path Rate to 1. By default, Path Rate Enabled is disabled.
Path Rate Option (pathRateOption)

The Path Rate Option parameter specifies whether the Path Rate is defined as an aggregate path rate for all CCAs in the CCAG or as a path rate for an individual CCA. The options are:
Aggregate (default) CCA Path Weight (%) (pathWeight)

The Path Weight parameter specifies the scheduling percentage for this path. It is applied to all CCAs in the CCAG membership list for this path. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 50.
May 2009
171-3
171 CCAG parameters
171-4
May 2009
172.1 ISA-AA Group parameters
172-2
May 2009
172-1
172.1
ISA-AA Group parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the ISA-AA Group property form, the child forms, and the forms opened from other contextual menu options for ISA-AA groups.
Description
Egress From-Subscriber Reserved CBS % (egressFromSubReservedCbs)

The Egress From-Subscriber Reserved CBS % parameter specifies the percentage of the buffer pool that is reserved for high priority traffic for subscriber to network traffic egressing towards the ISA-AA MDA. The range is -1 to 100. The default is -1. The value of -1 specifies that the reserved CBS is calculated as the sum of the CBS requested by the entities that use this pool.
Egress To-Subscriber Reserved % (egressToSubReservedCbs)

The Egress To-Subscriber Reserved CBS % parameter specifies the percentage of the buffer pool that is reserved for high priority traffic for all traffic egressing from the ISA-AA MDA. The range is -1 to 100. The default is -1. The value of -1 specifies that the reserved CBS is calculated as the sum of the CBS requested by the entities that use this pool.
Forwarding Class Name (fcName)

The Forwarding Class Name parameter specifies the divertable forwarding class for the group. The options are:
be (default) l2 af I1
h2 ef hi nc
Group Number (groupNumber)

The Group Number parameter specifies the identifier assigned to the group of ISA-AA MDAs. The parameter must be set to 1.
172-2
May 2009
Ingress To-Subscriber Reserved (ingressReservedCbs)

The Ingress To-Subscriber Reserved CBS % parameter specifies the percentage of the buffer pool reserved for high priority traffic for all traffic ingressing from the ISA-AA MDA. The range is -1 to 100. The default is -1. The value of -1 specifies that the reserved CBS is calculated as the sum of the CBS requested by the entities that use this pool.
ISA-AA MDA Role (aaMdaRole)

The ISA-AA MDA Role parameter specifies the role of the selected MDA. The options are:
Primary (default) Backup Operation Upon Failure (failToMode)

The Operation Upon Failure parameter specifies whether traffic is permitted or denied when there is an operation upon failure of the group. The options are:
Fail To Wire (default, traffic is permitted) Fail To Open
May 2009
172-3
172-4
May 2009
173.1 IPSEC Group parameters
173-2
May 2009
173-1
173.1
IPSEC Group parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the IPSec Group form, the child forms, and the forms opened from other contextual menu options for ISA-IPSEC groups.
Description

The Group Number parameter specifies the identifier assigned to the group of IPsec MDAs. The range is 1 to 4. There is no default.
173-2
May 2009
174.1 Bundles parameters
174-2
May 2009
174-1
174.1
Bundles parameters
This chapter describes the parameters for the forms and child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options of the Bundles object.
ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat)

See ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
ATM Minimum VPI Value (atmInterfaceMinimumVPIValue)

The ATM Minimum VPI Value parameter specifies the minimum VPI value that can be used on the ATM interface for a VPC for the IMA group bundle. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Auto-Assign ID
Bundle ID (bundleId)
The Bundle ID parameter specifies a unique identifier for the multi-link bundle. The Bundle ID is identical for all members of a bundle. Table 174-1 describes the parameter options. The default is 0.
Table 174-1 Bundle ID parameter
Option 1 to 8 1 to 10 1 to 56 Dependencies 7710 SR, Release 6.0 or later, on the 8 X ATM DS1/E1 CMA 7705 SAR 7750 SR, Release 4.0 7750 SR and 7710 SR, Release 5.0, on all MDAs other than channelized ASAP MDAs 7750 SR and 7710 SR, Release 6.0 or later, on the following MDAs:

(1 of 2)
1 x OC12 Deep Channel 4 x OC3 Deep Channel 4 x DS3/E3 Deep Channel 12 x DS3/E3 Deep Channel 8 x DS1/E1 Channel CMA (7710 SR)
174-2
May 2009
Option 1 to 112
Dependencies 7750 SR and 7710 SR, Release 6.0 or later, on the 4 x Channelized DS3/E3 ASAP MDA 7750 SR and 7710 SR, Release 5.0, on all supported channelized ASAP MDAs 7750 SR and 7710 SR, Release 6.0 and later, on the following MDAs:
1 to 128 1 to 256

(2 of 2)
4 x Channelized OC3 ASAP 1 x Channelized OC12 ASAP 12 x Channelized DS3/E3 ASAP
Bundle MRRU (bytes) (bundleMRUU)

The Bundle MRRU parameter specifies the maximum frame size that can be reconstructed from multi-link fragments. The range is 1500 to 9206. The default is 1524.
Bundle Number (bundleNumber)

The Bundle Number parameter specifies the bundle number for the MC APS bundle. The range is 1 to 1280. There is no default.
Bundle Type (bundleType)

The Bundle Type parameter specifies the type of multilink bundle that is created on a channelized ASAP MDA. The options are:
IMA Group PPP Class Count (mlpppClassCount)

The Class Count parameter specifies the number of classes in a MC MLPPP bundle. The range is 0 to 4. The default is 0. When the parameter is set to 0, MC MLPPP is disabled.
Clock Source (channelClockSource)

The Clock Source parameter specifies whether the DS3 timing source for transmitted data is the internal clock or a clock recovered from the receive data stream for the line. The options are:
Loop Timed Node Timed (default)
May 2009
174-3
Configured MAC
Daughter Card CLI Name (daughterCardDisplayedName)

The Daughter Card CLI Name parameter specifies the CLI name of the daughter card on which the APS working and protection bundle reside. Click on the Select button to list and choose a daughter card.
Description
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression

See Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Encap Type
End Point Class ID (mlpppEndPointIdClass)

The End Point Class ID parameter specifies the class of service that is transmitted over the MC MLPPP bundle. The options are:
IP Address IEEE 802.1q (default) End Point ID (mlpppEndPointId)

The End Point ID parameter specifies the IPv4 address of the endpoint class in dotted-decimal format. The End Point ID parameter is configurable when the End Point Class ID parameter is set to IP Address. The default is 0.0.0.0.
First Network Element (apsBundleLowNodeDn)

The First Network Element parameter specifies the near-end device in the MC APS bundle.
Fragment Threshold (bytes) (fragmentThreshold)

The Fragment Threshold (bytes) parameter specifies the maximum length of a fragment transmitted across a multi-link bundle. The range is 128 to 512. The default is 128. Setting the parameter to 0 specifies that the range for MLPPP bundles is unlimited.
174-4
May 2009
IMA Version (imaVersion)

The IMA Version parameter specifies the ATM Forum IMA Specification Version that is used in the multilink IMA group bundle. The options are:
1.1 (default) 1.0 Link Activation Timer (linkActivationTimer)

The Link Activation Timer parameter specifies how much time, in milliseconds, is needed for a member link of an IMA group to stabilize after an alarm is raised, before the member link is re-activated. The range is 1 to 30 000. The default is 10 000.
Link Deactivation Timer (linkDeactivationTimer)

The Link Deactivation Timer parameter specifies how much time, in milliseconds, must elapse before a member link of an IMA group is deactivated after an alarm is raised. The range is 1 to 30 000. The default is 2000.
Link Fragmentation and Interleaving (bundleLFI)

The Link Fragmentation and Interleaving parameter specifies LFI on the multilink bundle. LFI interleaves high-priority traffic within a stream of fragmented lower-priority traffic. LFI helps avoid excessive delays to high-priority, delay-sensitive traffic over a low-speed link. The options are:

You are not required to use all timeslots when you configure a multilink bundle with LFI. There is a restriction of one member for a multilink bundle with LFI. Multilink bundles without LFI support up to 8 members.
Maximum Links (maximumLinks)

The Maximum Links parameter specifies the maximum number of links that is used to determine the maximum configurable bandwidth for the IMA group. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 8. The following formula determines the maximum configurable ATM bandwidth: (number of links) * (M-1)/M * (2048/2049) * primary member link speed where,
M is the IMA frame size (128) the primary member link speed is either E1 (1920 kbps) or DS1 (1539 kbps). E1
is used for a group with no members.
May 2009
174-5
Minimum Links (minimumLinks)

The Minimum Links parameter specifies the minimum number of links that must be active in order for a multilink bundle to be active. If the number of active links drop below the value specified by this parameter, the bundle becomes operationally down. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.
MTU (bytes)
See MTU (bytes) (mtuValue) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Protection Type (bundleProtectedType)

The Protection Type parameter specifies the multi-link bundle is a working or protection channel. The options are:
Working (default) Protecting Red Diff Delay (milliseconds) (redDiffDelay)

The Red Diff Delay (milliseconds) parameter specifies the maximum acceptable differential delay for individual circuits within a multi-link bundle. If the differential delay exceeds the value set by this parameter, a BundleRedDiffExceeded alarms is raised. For PPP bundles, the range is 0 to 25. For IMA bundles, the range is 0 to 50. The default is 0.
Red Diff Delay Action (redDiffDelayAction)

The Red Diff Delay Action parameter specifies the action taken if the differential delay exceeds the threshold configured in the Red Diff Delay (milliseconds) parameter. Table 174-2 lists the parameter options.
Table 174-2 Red Diff Delay Action parameter
Option None (default) Down Option description Specifies that no action is taken. Specifies that the bundle be put into an operationally down state. Dependencies
Second Network Element (apsBundleHighNodeDn)

The Second Network Element parameter specifies the far-end device in the MC APS bundle.
174-6
May 2009
Short Sequence (shortSequence)

The Short Sequence parameter specifies that the multilink bundle should use short sequence (12 bit) numbers instead of the standard long sequence (24 bits) number. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Show Only Compatible Channels

The Show Only Compatible Channels parameter specifies whether to filter the list of channels presented, by determining whether the channels can be configured as members of a multilink bundle. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Test Member (testMember)

The Test Member parameter specifies the IMA group member link that is used to verify link connectivity for the IMA group bundle. Click on the Select button to list and choose an IMA group member.
Test Pattern (testPattern)

The Test Pattern parameter specifies the transmit test pattern in an IMA group loopback operation. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
Time Slots
See Time Slots (timeSlotBits) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Yellow Diff Delay (milliseconds) (yellowDiffDelay)

The Yellow Diff Delay (milliseconds) parameter specifies the yellow warning threshold for the differential delay for the circuits within a multilink bundle. If the differential delay exceeds the value configured for this parameter, a BundleYellowDiffExceeded alarm is raised. The range is 0 to 25. The default is 0.
May 2009
174-7
174-8
May 2009
175.1 Shelf parameters
175-2
May 2009
175-1
175.1
Shelf parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Shelf form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for shelves.
Active Timeout (activateTimeout)

The Active Timeout parameter specifies the time delay before the certified directory is copied to the working directory. The parameter is configurable only when you set the Command to Apply (versionMngt) parameter to copy certified to working. The range is 0 to 900. The default is 0.
Administrative Mode (adminMode)

The Administrative Mode parameter specifies the administrative chassis mode of the device. The administrative chassis mode becomes the operational chassis mode when the IOM 2 minimum IOM card requirements are met. Table 175-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 175-1 Administrative Mode parameter
Option A (default) Description Specifies chassis mode A Dependencies Supported on the:

B Specifies chassis mode B
7450 ESS-7, 7450 ESS-12, and 7450 ESS-4, Release 4.0 or later 7750 SR-7 and 7750 SR-12, Release 3.0 or later 7450 ESS-6, Release 5.0 or later 7450 ESS-6v, Release 6.0 or later
At least one of the following card types must be provisioned: 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM Card, B 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 (7750 SR only) 2 x 10-Gig MDA Oversubscribed IOM (7450 ESS only) 2 x XP MDA IOM 7450 ESS-7, 7450 ESS-12, and 7450 ESS-4, Release 4.0 or later 7750 SR-7 and 7750 SR-12, Release 3.0 or later 7450 ESS-6, Release 5.0 or later 7450 ESS-6v, Release 6.0 or later
Supported on the:

(1 of 2)
At least one of the following card types must be provisioned: 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM Card, B 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 (7750 SR only) 2 x 10-Gig MDA Oversubscribed IOM (7450 ESS only) 2 x XP MDA IOM
175-2
May 2009
Option C
Description Specifies chassis mode C
Dependencies Supported on the:
7750 SR-7 and 7750 SR-12, Release 4.0 or later
The following card type must be provisioned:

D Specifies chassis mode D
2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 (7750 SR only) 2 x XP MDA IOM 7750 SR-7 and 7750 SR-12, Release 6.1 or later
Supported on the:
The following card type must be provisioned in all card slots:
(2 of 2)
2 x XP MDA IOM
Alarm Severity (externalAlarmSeverity)

The Alarm Severity parameter specifies the level of severity that is assigned to an external alarm condition. The options are:
minor (default) major critical info
BITS Administrative State (bitsAdministrativeState)

The BITS Administrative State parameter specifies whether the BITS clock is administratively enabled. The options are:
Up Down (default) BITS Interface Type (bitsInterfaceType)

The BITS Interface Type parameter specifies the BITS interface type. The options are:
T1 ESF (default) T1 SF E1 PCM30CRC E1 PCM31CRC
May 2009
175-3
Command to Apply (versionMngt)

The Command to Apply parameter allows you to manage the OmniSwitch running configuration. Table 175-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 175-2 Command to Apply parameter
Option No command applied (default) Certify and Synchro Description Software management commands are not issued. Copies the working directory version of the software on the primary CMM to the certified directory on the primary CMM. This option also synchronizes the files between the primary and secondary CMMs by overwriting the contents of the secondary CMM certified directory with the contents of the primary CMM certified directory. This option updates all switches in an OS 6850 or OS 6400 stack with the primary CMM files. Certify Copies the working directory version of the software on the primary CMM to the certified directory on the primary CMM. Dependencies Choose this option only when the contents of the working directory have been verified as the best version of the CMM files. This option does not work when the switch is running from the certified directory.
Choose this option only when the contents of the working directory have been verified as the best version of the CMM files. This option does not work when the switch is running from the certified directory.
Flash Synchro
Copies the certified directory version of the primary CMM software to the certified directory of the secondary CMM. This option is used to synchronize the certified directories of the primary and secondary CMMs. The two CMMs must be synchronized in case a fail over occurs. This option updates all switches in an OS 6850 or OS 6400 stack with the primary CMM files.
Copy certified to working
Copies the contents of the primary CMM certified directory to the working directory of the primary CMM. The files in the working directory are overwritten by the contents of the certified directory. Immediately reboots the primary CMM from the working directory. CMM fail over does not take place during this reboot, which causes a loss of switch functionality during the reboot. In addition, all network interfaces reboot, including the secondary CMM. This option synchronizes the working directories of all the switches in an OS 6850 or OS 6400 stack with the working directory of the primary CMM switch.
Reload from working
175-4
May 2009
Delayed Activation Timer (delayedActivateTimer)

The Delayed Activation Timer parameter specifies the time delay before executing the reload from working directory option. The parameter is configurable only when you set the Command to Apply (versionMngt) parameter to reload from working directory. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 seconds. The default is 0.
Description
External Timing Reference Administrative State (externalInIfAdminStatus)

The External Timing Reference Administrative State parameter specifies whether the external input timing reference is administratively enabled on the 7705 SAR. The options are:
Up Down (default) External Timing Reference Impedance Type (externalInputImpedanceType)

The External Timing Reference Impedance Type specifies the input impedance value of the external input timing interface on the 7705 SAR. The options are:
High Impedance (default) 75 ohm 50 ohm External Timing Reference Input Type (externalInIfType)
The External Timing Reference Input Type parameter specifies the interface type of the external input timing reference on the 7705 SAR. The options are:
2048Khz-G703 (default) 5 Mhz 10 Mhz External Timing Reference Output Type (externalOutIfType)
The External Timing Reference Output Type parameter specifies the interface type of the external output timing reference on the 7705 SAR. The options are:
2048Khz-G703 (default) 5 Mhz 10 Mhz
May 2009
175-5
First Timing Reference Administrative State (firstTimingReferenceAdministrativeState)

The First Timing Reference Administrative State parameter specifies whether the first timing reference is administratively enabled. The options are:
Up Down (default) First Timing Reference Input (firstTimingReferenceInput)

The First Timing Reference Input parameter specifies first timing reference input type to the BITS clock. The options are:
bits (default) Reference One (default for 7710 SR) Reference Two external (default for 7705 SAR)
First Timing Reference Interface Type (firstTimingRefBitsInterfaceType)

The First Timing Reference Interface Type parameter specifies first timing reference input type to the BITS clock. The default is T1 ESF.
Force Mode (forceMode)

The Force Mode parameter specifies whether to force a change in the chassis mode set by the Administrative Mode parameter even if the installed IOM cards are not compatible with the configured chassis mode. The operational chassis mode is only changed if the installed IOM card is compatible with the specified administrative chassis mode. If the Force Mode parameter is enabled, all cards in the chassis that do not support the new chassis mode will be taken offline. The parameter is disabled by default.
Monitored Status (enableStatus)

The Monitored Status parameter specifies whether an alarm is raised on the 5620 SAM if an external alarm condition is detected. The options are:
Enable (default) Disable Name (dryContactName)

The Name parameter specifies a name for the dry contact sensor. The range is 0 to 16 characters. The default is 0, which does not specify a name is specified for the dry contact sensor.
175-6
May 2009
Polarity (polarity)
The Polarity parameter specifies the state of external contact sensors that are used to indicate an alarm condition. Table 175-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 175-3 Polarity parameter
Option Normally Opened Description An open circuit indicates normal operation of the external device. A closed circuit indicates an alarm condition. A closed circuit indicates normal operation of the external device. An open circuit indicates an alarm condition. Dependencies
Normally Closed
Primary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (primaryPerMcastPlaneLimit)

The Primary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) parameter specifies the multicast traffic rate limit supported on each switch fabric multicast plane when there is only one switch fabric card. The value of this parameter must be greater than or equal to the value of the Secondary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastPlaneLimit). The range is 1 to 2000. The default is 2000.
Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (primaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit)

The Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) parameter specifies the multicast traffic rate limit supported on each switch fabric multicast plane when there is more than one switch fabric card. The value of this parameter must be greater than or equal to the value of the Secondary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit). The range is 1 to 2000. The default is 2000.
Reboot
See Reboot button (reboot) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Reference Input Mode (revertive) (revertive)

The Reference Input Mode parameter specifies whether the input mode of the timing reference is revertive. The options are:
false (default) true Resync

May 2009
175-7
Second Timing Reference Administrative State (secondTimingReferenceAdministrativeState)

The Second Timing Reference Administrative State parameter specifies whether the second timing reference is administratively enabled. The options are:
Up Down (default) Second Timing Reference Input (secondTimingReferenceInput)

The Second Timing Reference Input parameter specifies second timing reference input type to the BITS clock. The options are:
bits Reference One (default) Reference Two external
Second Timing Reference Interface Type (secondTimingRefBitsInterfaceType)

The Second Timing Reference Interface Type parameter specifies second timing reference input type to the BITS clock. The default is T1 ESF.
Secondary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastPlaneLimit)

The Secondary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) parameter specifies the rate limit for secondary multicast traffic for each switch fabric multicast plane when there is only one switch fabric card. The value of this parameter must be less than or equal to the value of the Primary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (primaryPerMcastPlaneLimit) parameter. The range is 1 to 2000. The default is 1800.
Secondary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit)

The Secondary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) parameter specifies the rate limit for secondary multicast traffic for each switch fabric multicast plane when there is more than one switch fabric card. The value of this parameter must be less than or equal to the value of the Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (primaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit) parameter. The range is 1 to 2000. The default is 1800.
175-8
May 2009
Third Timing Reference Input (thirdTimingReferenceInput)

The Third Timing Reference Input parameter specifies third timing reference input type to the BITS clock. The options are:
bits Reference One Reference Two (default) external
The third timing reference is not supported on the 7710 SR and 7705 SAR.
May 2009
175-9
175-10
May 2009
176.1 Card Slot parameters
176-2
May 2009
176-1
176.1
Card Slot parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Card Slot form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for card slots.
Assigned Card Type (assignedChildType)

The Assigned Card type parameter specifies the card type to be configured for the card slot. The options depend on the settings of the Supported Card Types and Allowed Card Types parameters. You can configure the card for the slot when the Supported Card Types and Allowed Card Types parameters are set to the same value.
400g CPM/Switch Fabric 400g CPM/Switch Fabric 2 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM Card, B 2 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 2 2 x 10-Gig MDA Oversubscribed IOM 7705 IOM 4-Port 10GE XFP IMM 8-Port 10GE XFP IMM
12g 7710 IOM 100g CPM/Switch Fabric 1 x 10-Gig MDA IOM 200g CPM/Switch Fabric 200g CPM/Switch Fabric 2 80g CPM / Switch Fabric 2 7705 1g CSM 2 x XP MDA IOM 48-Port GIGE SFP IMM 48-Port GIGE TX IMM
Command Action (commandAction)

The Command Action parameter allows you to configure hardware-related operations on an OS 6850 or OS 6400 switch stack. Table 176-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 176-1 Command action parameter
Option Not Significant (1 of 2) Description A command is not issued. Dependencies
176-2
May 2009
Option Clear Slot (default)
Description Clears the current saved slot information for a switch in an OS 6850 or OS 6400 stacked configuration. When the saved slot information is cleared, the corresponding switch is automatically assigned a unique slot number after a reboot. Reboots the OS 6850 or OS 6400 switch
Dependencies
Reload
When the OS 6850 or OS 6400 switch is the primary CMM in a stack, it will no longer be primary. Instead, it will be secondary in a two-switch stack and idle in a stack consisting of three or more switches.
(2 of 2)
Enable Power Capacitor Detection (capacitorDetect)

The Enable Power Capacitor Detection parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the capacitor detection method for an OmniSwitch. The options are:

The capacitor detection method should only be enabled if there are legacy IP phones that are attached to the corresponding slot which is not compatible with IEEE specification 802.3af. Contact your Alcatel-Lucent technical support representative to find out which Alcatel-Lucent IP phone models need capacitor detection enabled.
Enable Priority Disconnect (priorityDisconnect)

The Enable Priority Disconnect parameter specifies whether to enable or disable the priority disconnect function on all ports in a specified slot of an OS 6400 or OS 6850. Priority disconnect is used by the system software to determine whether an incoming PD is granted or denied power when the PoE power resource cannot support an additional device. The options are:
true (default) false Maximum Power (Watts) (maxPower)

The Maximum Power (Watts) parameter specifies the maximum amount of inline power, in watts, that is allocated to all PoE ports in a slot. The range is 37 to 390. The default is 37.
May 2009
176-3
Pool Mode (poolMode)

The Pool Mode parameter specifies whether named pools can be created for an MDA. The Pool Mode parameter can be enabled and disabled at any time. When the Named Pool is in service the system no longer creates default pools per port, instead a set of pools that can be used by all queues and are not explicitly mapped to a named pool is used. The options are:
In service Out of Service Port Maximum Power (MilliWatts) (portMaximumPower)

The Port Maximum Power (MilliWatts) parameter specifies the maximum amount of inline power, in milliwatts, that is allocated to an individual PoE port in a slot. The range is 3000 to 16000. The default is 3000.
Power State (adminStatus)

The Power State parameter specifies whether to disable or enable power on all PoE ports in a slot. The options are:
On (default) Off Reboot

See Reboot button (reboot) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Remove Card button (removeCard)

Click on the Remove Card button to remove the card object from a card slot.
Resync
Saved Slot NI Number (savedSlotNINumber)

The Saved Slot NI Number parameter sets the saved slot number for OS 6850 or OS 6400 switches in a stacked configuration. The saved slot number is the slot position for the switch after a reboot. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.
Shut Down
See Shut Down button (shutDown) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
176-4
May 2009
Slot Priority (slotPriority)

The Slot Priority parameter specifies an inline power priority level for a slot of an OS 6850 or OS 6400. If the power supply of a stack is down, the order that slots are disabled is based on a priority assigned to the PoE ports on the slot. Table 176-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 176-2 Slot Priority parameter
Option Low (default) Description Intended for slots that have low-priority devices attached. If there is a power problem, inline power to low-priority ports is interrupted first. Intended for slots that have important, but not mission-critical devices attached. If there is a power problem, inline power to high-priority ports is given second priority. Intended for slots that have mission-critical devices attached. If there is a power problem, inline power to critical ports is maintained as long as possible. Dependencies
High
Critical
Temperature Threshold (Celsius) (temperatureThreshold)

The Temperature Threshold (Celsius) parameter sets the CPU warning temperature threshold for an OmniSwitch. The range is 16 to 94. The default is 0.
Turn Up
See Turn Up button (turnUp) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
176-5
176-6
May 2009
177.1 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor parameters 177-2
May 2009
177-1
177.1
Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor parameters
This chapter describes the parameters for the following forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options:
Daughter Card Slot Control Processor Flash Memory Switch Fabric Processor
177-2
May 2009
Assigned Daughter Card Type (assignedChildType)

The Assigned Daughter Card Type parameter specifies the daughter card type to be configured for the daughter card slot. The options depend on the settings of the unconfigurable Equipped Daughter Card Type and Supported Daughter Card Types parameters. You can configure the daughter card for the slot when the unconfigurable Supported Daughter Card Types parameter and the configurable Assigned Card Types parameter have the same value. The types of daughter cards available for each managed device are different based on the managed device. The options are:
60 x 10/100 Ethernet 16 x OC12/OC3 SFP 16 x OC3 SFP 4 x OC48 SFP 5 x 1-Gig Ethernet SFP 1 x OC12 Deep Channel 4 x OC3 Deep Channel 20 x 100 Ethernet FX 2 x 10-Gig Ethernet XFP 16 x ATM OC3 SFP 10 x 1-Gig Ethernet SFP 4 x DS3/E3 Deep Channel 24 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 TX 4 x Gig Ethernet (2 TX, 2 FX)
24 x Gig Ethernet (20 FX, 4 Dual

TX/FX) 10 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet SFP VSM Cross-Connect Adaptor ISA Application Assurance ISA IPsec HSMDA 10 x 1 Gig SFP 4 x DS1/E1 CE 8 x OC12/OC3 SFP 1 x Gig Ethernet SFP CMA 4 x DS3/E3 CMA 12 x Fast Ethernet 100 FX 8 x OC3 SFP
1 x OC192 12 x DS3/E3 Deep Channel 1 x 10-Gig Ethernet 2 x OC48 SFP 20 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet Tx 4 x ATM OC12/OC3 SFP 20 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet SFP 1 x 10-Gig Ethernet XFP 48 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 TX 24 x Gig Ethernet (20 TX, 4 Dual TX/FX) 24 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 FX 5 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet SFP
8 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 TX 2 x Fast Ethernet 1000 FX 8 x 10/100 Ethernet Tx CMA 4 x Channelized OC3 ASAP 8 x DS1/E1 Channel CMA Compact MDA 8 ports Channelized DS1/E1 Compact MDA 4 ports DS3/E3 Compact MDA 8 ports 10/100 Ethernet Tx Compact MDA 1 port 1-Gigabit Ethernet SFP 1 x 10-Gig Ethernet + 10 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet SFP
1 x Channelized OC12 ASAP 4 x Channelized DS3/E3 ASAP 16 x Channelized DS1/E1 ASAP 8 x ATM DS1/E1 CMA 12 x Channelized DS3/E3 ASAP
1 x Channelized OC3 CES 1 x Channelized OC3 CES CMA 6 x 10/100 Ethernet + 2 x

10/100/1000 Ethernet SFP
May 2009
177-3
Assigned MCM Card Type

The Assigned MCM Card Type parameter specifies the MDA carrier module type to be configured for the daughter card slot. The options depend on the settings of the unconfigurable Supported Daughter Card Types and Allowed Daughter Card Types parameters. You can configure the parameter when the In MDA Carrier Module Slot parameter is enabled.
Channel ID (channelID)
The Channel ID parameter specifies the identifier for the Channel Group. The identifier must be unique across the device. The range is 1 to 64. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not configured.
Clock Mode (clock)

The Clock Mode parameter specifies the source of the clock signal for the CES module. Table 177-1 lists the parameter options.
Table 177-1 Clock Mode parameter
Option adaptive backplane Option description The TDM bitstream from the master CES module supplies the clock signal. The CES module uses a clock signal from the neighboring CES module. The neighboring CES module receives its clock signal from an external oscillator. The clock signal from an external device that is connected to port 1 is the primary clock source, and the clock signal from the neighboring CES module acts as a backup clock souce when the primary clock source is not available. The CES module uses a clock signal from an external device that is connected to port 1. The on-card oscillator supplies the clock signal. The master CES module loops back the receive (Rx) clock signal and uses it as the transmit clock signal. The clock signal from the neighboring CES module is the primary clock source, and the clock signal from an external device that is connected to port 1 acts as a backup clock souce when the primary clock source is not available.
External backplane port 1 backup
external port 1 local loopback (default) backplane backup external port 1
Clock Mode (clockmode)

The Clock Mode parameter specifies the source of the clock signal for the MDA. The options are:
Adaptive Differential Not Applicable (default)
177-4
May 2009
Differential Timestamp Frequency (diffTimestampFrequency)

The Differential Timestamp Frequency parameter specifies the timestamp frequency, in kHz, of the differential clock on the MDA. The options are:
0 (default when clock mode is not differential) 19440 77760 103680 (default when clock mode is differential)
The Differential Timestamp Frequency parameter can be configured only when the Clock Mode parameter is set to Differential and no ports are configured on the MDA. If ports are configured, you must shut down the MDA.
Gateway IP Address (gatewayIpAddress)

The Gateway IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that the CES module uses as a default gateway. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is the IP Address (ipAddress) parameter value.
In MDA Carrier Module Slot (inMCM)

The In MDA Carrier Module Slot parameter specifies whether the daughter card slot on the 7710 SR allows the configuration of MDAs that are also supported on the 7750 SR. The default is disabled.
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for the CES module. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 192.168.0.4 for the CES module in slot 4 and 192.168.0.4 for the CES module in slot 5.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask that is applied to the IP Address (ipAddress) parameter value to create a unique IP identifier for the CES module. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 24.
Mode (mode)
The Mode parameter specifies the type of line that is connected to the CES module. The options are:
E1 (default) T1 Policy Name button (networkQueuePolicyName)

Click the Select button to list and choose a network queue policy for a daughter card.
May 2009
177-5
Reserved CBS %
See Reserved CBS% (reservedCbs) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Resync
Shut Down
Turn Up
View Dependencies
See View Dependencies button (getDependencyCount) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
177-6
May 2009
178.1 Physical Port and APS parameters
178-2
May 2009
178-1
178.1
Physical Port and APS parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Port property form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for ports. This chapter also describes the parameters on the APS Group property form, and child forms, launched from the right-click contextual menu options for APS groups.
Accounting Enabled
See Accounting Enabled (accounting) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Table 178-1 lists where to find information about the Administrative State parameter.
Table 178-1 Administrative State
Parameter Administrative State for a port Administrative State for 802.3ah EFM OAM See See Administrative State (administrativeState) in section 180.1 Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState) in this section
Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState)

The Administrative State parameter specifies the administrative state of the 802.3ah protocol on the selected port. The parameter is configurable when the Tunneling (dot3OamTunneling) parameter is disabled. The options are:

When the Administrative State parameter is set to Enabled and the Operational Status is Operational, the Peer Information panel appears on the 802.3ah form.
178-2
May 2009
Authenticate (mobilePortAuthenticate)
The Authenticate parameter specifies whether authentication is active on a mobile port. The parameter is configurable when the Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) parameter is set to Enable. When this Authenticate parameter is enabled on a mobile port, the port participates in a Layer 2 authentication process that restricts switch access at the VLAN level. The options are:
Enable Auth VLAN Not Applicable Disable (default) Enable 802.1x
Auto-negotiate (autoNegotiate)
The Auto-negotiate parameter specifies whether to automatically negotiate the Speed and Duplex parameters. Table 178-2 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-2 Auto-negotiate parameter
Option True (for 10x1-Gig oversubscribed ports and OmniSwitch ports) True is the default value for OmniSwitch ports. False (default value, except for OmniSwitch ports) Limited The Speed and Duplex parameter values for the link are used, based on the Speed and Duplex parameter settings. The current Speed and Duplex parameter settings are advertised, and the parameters are negotiated with the far-end link. Option description The link Speed and Duplex parameters are automatically negotiated with the far-end link or port. All speed and duplex information is advertised.
Backpressure (backPressure)
The Backpressure parameter specifies whether backpressure is used. The parameter setting applies only when the Duplex parameter is set to Half Duplex. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled BER Signal Degradation Threshold (lb2erSd)

The BER Signal Degradation Threshold parameter specifies the threshold for the line signal degradation BER. The line signal (b2) interleaved parity BER is continuously measured. If the BER exceeds the degradation threshold, an alarm is raised. The range is 3 to 9. The default is 6.
May 2009
178-3
BER Signal Failure Threshold (lb2erSf)

The BER Signal Failure Threshold parameter specifies the threshold for line signal failures. The line signal (b2) interleaved parity BER is continuously measured. If the BER exceeds the failure threshold, an alarm is raised and the link is set to operationally down. The range is 3 to 6. The default is 3.
Broadcast Limit (kbps) (broadcastLimit)

The Broadcast Limit (kbps) parameter specifies the received broadcast traffic limit. Limiting broadcast and multicast traffic helps to protect the switch from massive amounts of traffic. The range is -1 to 102 400. A value of -1 specifies that there is no broadcast limit. A value of 0 specifies that all broadcast traffic is blocked.
Broadcast Limit (Pkts/s) (broadcastLimitInPkt)

The Broadcast Limit (Pkts/s) parameter specifies the received broadcast and multicast traffic limit. Limiting broadcast and multicast traffic helps to protect the switch from massive amounts of traffic. The range is -1, or 0 to 262 143. A value of -1 specifies that there is no broadcast limit. A value of 0 specifies that all broadcast and multicast packets are blocked.
Cable Length (cableLength)

The Cable Length parameter specifies the cable length for the T1 or E1 line that is connected to the port. Table 178-3 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-3 Cable Length parameter
Option Cable length 0..133ft (Short) (default) 120 ohm high return loss on E1 120 ohm normal return loss on E1 75 ohm high return loss on E1 75 ohm normal return loss on E1 Rx gain 20 dB, Tx attenuation -7.5 dB (Long) Rx gain 20 dB, Tx attenuation -15 dB (Long) (1 of 2) Description The cable length is between 0 and 133 ft. Specifies a termination impedance of 120 ohms at high return loss on the E1 line Specifies a termination impedance of 120 ohms at normal return loss on the E1 line Specifies a termination impedance of 75 ohms at high return loss on the E1 line Specifies a termination impedance of 75 ohms at normal return loss on the E1 line Specifies a receive gain of 20 dB and a -7.5 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 20 dB and a -15 dB transmit attenuation Dependencies The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1.
178-4
May 2009
Option Rx gain 20 dB, Tx attenuation -22.5 dB (Long) Rx gain 26 dB, Tx attenuation -7.5 dB (Long) Rx gain 26 dB, Tx attenuation -15 dB (Long) Rx gain 26 dB, Tx attenuation -22.5 dB (Long) Rx gain 32 dB, Tx attenuation -7.5 dB (Long) Rx gain 32 dB, Tx attenuation -15 dB (Long) Rx gain 32 dB, Tx attenuation -22.5 dB (Long) (2 of 2)
Description Specifies a receive gain of 20 dB and a -22.5 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 26 dB and a -7.5 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 26 dB and a -15 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 26 dB and a -22.5 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 32 dB and a -7.5 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 32 dB and a -15 dB transmit attenuation Specifies a receive gain of 32 dB and a -22.5 dB transmit attenuation
Dependencies The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1.
Channel Number (channelNumber)

The Channel Number parameter indicates the channel number for an APS channel in an APS group. Table 178-4 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-4 Channel Number parameter
Option 1 0 Description Specifies the APS working channel Specifies the APS protection channel
Channel Role (apsChannelRole)

The Channel Role parameter indicates whether the APS channel is working or protection. The options are:
Working Protection Class

May 2009
178-5
Clock Source (clockSource)

The Clock Source parameter specifies whether the timing source for transmitted data is the internal clock (node timed) or a clock recovered from the receive data stream for the line (loop timed). Table 178-5 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-5 Clock Source parameter
For OC-192 OC-48 1 X 10-Gig with the XGig Mode parameter configured for WAN OC-12 OC-3 Channelized OC-12 Channelized OC-12 Channelized DS3 Loop Timed (default) Node Timed Node Timed Options Loop Timed (default) Node Timed
Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)

The Collect Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of accounting statistics on the port is enabled. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Command Switch (commandSwitch)

The Command Switch parameter specifies the operational state of APS. This parameter allows you to perform protection switch actions. Table 178-6 describes the options.
Table 178-6 Command Switch parameter
Option No Cmd Clear (default) Lockout of Protection Option Description Indicates that no command has been issued to the APS channel. Clears all switches for the specified channel. Disables use of the protection channel. Since this option has the highest priority, a failed working channel that has switched to the protection channel is switched back to the working channel even if it is in a fault condition. (1 of 2)
178-6
May 2009
Option Forced Switch of Working to Protection
Option Description Forces a high-priority switch of the specified working channel to the protection channel unless a request of equal or higher priority is already in effect. This option can be overridden either by a Lockout of Protection command or by detection of a signal fault on the protection line. If the working channel is already on the protection channel, no action occurs.
Forced Switch of Protection to Working Manual Switch of Working to Protection
Forces a high-priority switch of the specified protection channel to the working channel unless a request of equal or higher priority is already in effect. Allows the user to manually switch the specified working channel to the protection channel unless a request of equal or higher priority is already in effect. If the working channel has already switched to the protection channel, no action occurs.
Manual Switch of Protection to Working
Allows the user to manually switch the specified protection channel to the working channel unless a request of equal or higher priority is already in effect. If the protection channel has already switched to the working channel, no action occurs.
Exercise
Exercises the protection channel by sending an exercise request message over the protection line to the far-end device and expecting a reverse request message in return. The switch is not actually completed during the exercise routine. This option is only supported in the bidirectional mode of the 1+1 architecture.
(2 of 2)
Configured MAC
Controlled Port Control (paeAuthControlledPortControl)

The Controlled Port Control parameter specifies the control values for the type of 802.1X authentication for the port. The options are:
Force Unauthorized Auto Force Authorized (default)
May 2009
178-7
Db Loss (dbLoss)
The Db Loss parameter specifies the number of decibels the transmission signal decreases over time. This parameter is configurable when the Line Buildout parameter is set to Long on a DS1 interface. The options are:
0 dB (default) -7.5 dB -15.0 dB -22.5 dB
DDM Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression)

The DDM Event Suppression parameter specifies whether the NE is blocked from sending DDM-specific notifications to the 5620 SAM when digital diagnostics monitoring thresholds are exceeded on ports on SFP and XFP optical modular transceivers. The thresholds for SFPs and XFPs are programmed by the transceiver manufacturer. The options are:

Digital diagnostics monitoring is supported on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, and 7710 SR, Release 6.0 and later, and on the 7705 SAR.
Default 802.1p (qosDefault8021p)

The Default 802.1p parameter specifies the default 802.1p value that is inserted into packets received on untrusted ports. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Default Classification (qosPortDefaultClassification)

The Default Classification parameter specifies the type of packet that is used to classify traffic on the port. The options are:
b802.1p TOS (default) DSCP Default DSCP (qosPortDefaultDSCP)

The Default DSCP parameter specifies the default DSCP value that is inserted in packets received on untrusted ports. The range 0 to 63. The default is 0.
178-8
May 2009
Default VLAN Enable (defaultVlanEnable)

The Default VLAN Enable parameter specifies whether a mobile port forwards or drops the configured default VLAN traffic that does not match any VLAN rules. The parameter is configurable when the Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) parameter is set to Enable. When the parameter is enabled, non-matching traffic is carried on the configured default VLAN for the port. When the parameter is disabled, non-matching traffic is dropped. The options are:
Enable Disable Not Applicable (default) Default VLAN Restore (defaultVlanRestore)

The Default VLAN Restore parameter specifies whether a mobile port retains or drops a dynamic VPA when the traffic on the port that triggered the VLAN assignment ages out. When the parameter is enabled, the VPA is dropped. When the parameter is disabled, the VPA is retained. The parameter is configurable when the Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) parameter is set to Enable. The options are.
Enable Disable Not Applicable (default) Description

Detect Remote Faults (remoteFaultDetection)

The Detect Remote Faults parameter specifies whether remote fault detection is enabled on the port. When remote fault detection is enabled, the local device indicates link down on the port if the remote peer device detects link down. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Detection (mdiMdixCrossoverDetection)

The Detection parameter specifies the type of crossover detection for the port. When the parameter is set to Auto, you can interconnect any combination of MDI/MDIX ports using either a crossover or straight-through type of cable without distinction. The options are:
Auto (default) MDI MDIX
May 2009
178-9
Dot1 Q Acceptable Frames (dot1qAcceptableFrameTypes)

The Dot1 Q Acceptable Frames parameter specifies whether an OmniSwitch Ethernet port should accept all traffic (tagged and untagged) or only tagged traffic. The options are:
Admit All (default) Only VLAN Tagged Dot1 Q Ethertype (dot1qEtype)

The Dot1 Q Ethertype parameter specifies the Ethertype expected when the Encap Type parameter is set to Dot1 Q. The range is 1536 to 65 535. The default is 33 024.
Down When Looped (downWhenLooped)

The Down When Looped parameter specifies whether physical loop detection for the Ethernet port is enabled or disabled. When enabled, the port will periodically send out keep-alive PDUs with an EtherType of 0x9000. If the port receives a keep-alive that it transmitted, then the ports State (on the States tab) will be set to Link Down, if it was previously up. The port will not move back to the Link Up state for a period of time, as defined by the Retry Timeout (Sec) parameter. Instead, it will continue to periodically send out keep-alive PDUs. Every time the port receives a keep-alive PDU it sent while a loop has been detected, it will reset the time period that it will remain down, as defined by the Retry Timeout (Sec) parameter. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Duplex (duplex)

The Duplex parameter specifies the duplex communication type for an Ethernet port. Table 178-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 178-7 Duplex parameter
Option Full Duplex (default) Half Duplex Description Specifies that both ends of the communication link can send and receive signals at the same time Specifies that the signals on the communication link can only flow in one direction at a time Specifies that the switch advertises all available duplex modes during auto-negotiation Dependencies Cannot choose this option if the Auto-negotiate parameter is set to enabled. The Ethernet port must support multiple duplex modes. OmniSwitch 1 Gigabit and 10 Gigabit fiber ports only support full duplex. This mode is available only on the OmniSwitch. This is the default mode for copper Ethernet ports.
Auto
178-10
May 2009
Egress Percentage of Rate (%) (portEgrPoolPercentageRate)

The Egress Percentage of Rate (%) parameter specifies the port buffer allocation rate that limits the active bandwidth for the egress port. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 100.
Egress Percentage of Rate (%) (mdaEgrNamedPoolPolicy)

The Egress Percentage of Rate (%) parameter defines a percentage value that changes the amount of buffers used by an egress port. Changing the ports active bandwidth artificially lowers or increases the buffers managed by one egress port and gives them to other egress ports on the same MDA. This parameter does not change the actual bandwidth available on the port. The egress Percentage of Rate value is multiplied by the egress active bandwidth of the port. For example an Egress Percentage of Rate value of 150% results in an increased value of 50% (1.5 x rate). A value of 50% causes the active bandwidth to be reduced by 50%. A value of 100 restores the egress active rate to a normal value. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 100.
Egress Rate (Kbps) (egressRate)

The Egress Rate (Kbps) parameter specifies the maximum rate of traffic that can leave the port. The range is -1 to 10 000 000 kb/s. A value of -1 indicates that the limit on the egress rate is the full physical limit of the port.
Enable Admin State (adminEnable)

The Enable Admin State parameter administratively enables or disables a PoE port. The options are:
False True (default) Enable Multicast Limit Mode (enableMulitcastLimitMode)

The Enable Multicast Limit Mode parameter specifies whether the maximum flood rate for multicast traffic is allowed on an OmniSwitch Ethernet port. The options are:
True False (default) Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility)

The Enable Port Mobility parameter specifies whether the mobile status of an OmniSwitch Ethernet port is enabled. When the parameter is enabled, the port is eligible for dynamic VLAN assignment. The options are:
May 2009
178-11
Encap Type
First Network Element (nodeIdLow)

The First Network Element parameter specifies the near-end device in the MC APS group.
Flow (flowControl)
The Flow parameter specifies the flow control mode for the port. Table 178-8 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-8 Flow parameter
Option Disabled (default) Enabled Auto-negotiate Description Specifies that flow control for the port is disabled Specifies that flow control for the port is enabled Specifies that the flow control is enabled only if it is in use at the far end
Forbid IGMP Snooping (forbidIgmpSnooping)

The Forbid IGMP Snooping parameter specifies whether IGMP snooping occurs on the current port. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Forward All Multicast Traffic (forwardAllMulticast)

The Forward All Multicast Traffic parameter specifies whether all multicast traffic is forwarded to the current port. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Framing (framing)

The Framing parameter specifies what type of framing a port uses. The options are:
SONET (default) SDH
178-12
May 2009

The Group Number parameter specifies the group number for the APS group. The range is 1 to 64 for a single seven-slot or twelve-slot 7750 SR. The range is 1 to 16 for a single one-slot 7750 SR. There is no default.
Hold Time Down

Table 178-9 lists where to find information about the Hold Time Down parameter.
Table 178-9 Hold Time Down parameter
Parameter Hold Time Down for an interface Hold Time Down for an interface or SONET link See Hold Time Down (seconds) (holdTimeDown) in this section Hold Time Down (100s of ms) (holdTimeDown) in this section
Hold Time Down (seconds) (holdTimeDown)

The Hold Time Down (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds an interface is not advertised as down when an interface transitions from an up to a down state. The range is 0 to 50 s for 5620 SAM Release 6.0 or later and 0 to 5 for all other releases. The default is 0 s, which means that down-link transitions are immediately reported to upper-layer protocols.
Hold Time Down (100s of ms) (holdTimeDown)

The Hold Time Down (100s of ms) parameter specifies how long an interface or SONET link is not advertised as down to the rest of the system. This prevents reporting excessive interface transitions. This occurs by not advertising subsequent transitions of the interface to upper layer protocols until the configured timer has expired. The range is 0 to 100 in 100s of ms. The default is 0. When the parameter is set to 0, down-link transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols.
Hold Time Up
Table 178-10 lists where to find information about the Hold Time Up parameter.
Table 178-10 Hold Time Up parameter
Parameter Hold Time Up for an interface Hold Time Up for an interface or SONET link See Hold Time Up (seconds) (holdTimeUp) in this section Hold Time Up (100s of ms) (holdTimeUp) in this section
May 2009
178-13
Hold Time Up (seconds) (holdTimeUp)

The Hold Time Up (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds an interface is not advertised as up when an interface transitions from a down to an up state. This parameter allows for event damping, which prevents the excessive advertising of interface state changes. The range is 0 to 50 s for 5620 SAM Release 6.0 or later and 0 to 5 for all other releases.The default is 0 s, which means that up-link transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols.
Hold Time Up (100s of ms) (holdTimeUp)

The Hold Time Up (100s of ms) parameter specifies the SONET link up dampening timers. This prevents reporting excessive interface transitions. This occurs by not advertising subsequent transitions of the interface to upper layer protocols until the configured timer has expired. The range is 0 to 100 in 100s of ms. The default is 5 (500 ms). When the parameter is set to 0, up-link transitions are immediately reported to upper layer protocols.
Ignore BPDU (mobilePortIgnoreBPDU)

The Ignore BPDU parameter specifies whether BPDU ignore is active on a mobile port. The parameter is configurable when the Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) parameter is set to Enable. When Ignore BPDU is disabled, switch ports that send or receive spanning tree BPDUs are not eligible for mobile port dynamic VLAN assignment. When Ignore BPDU is enabled, BPDUs are ignored on the switch port and port traffic is subject to VLAN rules in the same manner as it is for non-BPDU mobile ports. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you do not enable the Ignore BPDU parameter. If you enable the Ignore BPDU parameter, network loops may not be detected or the switch may experience connectivity problems. The options are:
Enable Disable Not Applicable (default) Ingress Filtering (mobilePortIngFiltering)

The Ingress Filtering parameter specifies whether ingress filtering is enabled. The parameter is configurable when the Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) parameter is set to Enable. When ingress filtering is enabled and the VPM check fails, all ingress packets are silently dropped. Ingress filtering is enabled for all non-mobile ports. When ingress filtering is disabled and the VPM check fails, ingress VLAN packets are sent to the CPU for software VLAN classification. Ingress filtering is disabled for all mobile ports. The options are:
178-14
May 2009
Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) (portIngrPoolPercentageRate)

The Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) parameter specifies the port buffer allocation rate that limits the active bandwidth for the ingress port. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 100.
Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) (mdaIngrNamedPoolPolicy)

The Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) parameter defines a percentage value that changes the amount of buffers used by an ingress port. Changing the ports active bandwidth artificially lowers or increases the buffers managed by one ingress port and gives them to other ingress ports on the same MDA. This parameter does not change the actual bandwidth available on the port. The Ingress Percentage of Rate value is multiplied by the ingress active bandwidth of the port. For example an Ingress Percentage of Rate value of 150% results in an increased value of 50% (1.5 x rate). A value of 50% causes the active bandwidth to be reduced by 50%. A value of 100 restores the ingress active rate to a normal value. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 100.
Ingress Rate (Mbps) (ingressRate)

The Ingress Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the maximum rate of traffic that can ingress the port. The range is -1 to 10 000. A value of -1 indicates that the limit on the ingress rate is the physical limit of the port.
Initialize (paePortInitialize)
The Initialize parameter specifies whether the port begins to initialize 802.1X support. The options are:

When you set the parameter to true, after initialization is performed, the parameter reverts to the false option.
Inter-Frame Gap (bytes) (interFrameGap)

The Inter-Frame Gap (bytes) parameter specifies the minimum idle time between the end of one frame transmission and the beginning of the next frame transmission. The parameter only applies to OmniSwitch Gigabit Ethernet ports. The range is 9 to 12 bytes. The default value is 12 bytes.
J0 Byte (j0Byte)
The J0 Byte parameter specifies a numeric value for a SONET section trace. The parameter is configurable when the:
Framing parameter is set to SONET SONET Section Trace Mode parameter is set to Byte
May 2009
178-15
The value for the J0 Byte parameter is inserted continuously at the source and is checked against the value expected by the receiver. The range is 00 to ff hexadecimal characters. The default is 01.
J0 String (j0String)
The J0 String parameter specifies a text string that identifies a SONET section trace. The parameter is configurable when the:
Framing parameter is set to SONET SONET Section Trace Mode parameter is set to String
The range is 0 to 16 characters.
Keep Alive Interval (Sec) (keepAliveInterval)

The Keep Alive Interval (Sec) parameter specifies the number of seconds between each keep-alive PDU transmission. The range is 1 to 120. The default is 10.
Line Buildout (lineBuildout)

The Line Buildout parameter specifies the cable length for physical DS1 interfaces. Table 178-11 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-11 Line Buildout parameter
Option Long Short (default) Option description Specifies the line buildout for cable lengths over 655 ft (199.644 m). Specifies the line buildout for cable lengths up to 655 ft (199.644 m).
Line Code (lineCode)

The Line Code parameter specifies the line coding for the E1 or T1 controller of the CES module. Table 178-12 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-12 Line Code parameter
Option AMI (1 of 2) Option description The T1 or E1 controller uses AMI coding when signaling on the T1 or E1 line. Dependencies
178-16
May 2009
Option B8ZS (default)
Option description The T1 controller uses B8ZS coding when signaling on the T1 line.
Dependencies The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1.
hdb3 (default)
The E1 controller uses hdb3 coding when signaling on the E1 line.
(2 of 2)
Line Impedance (lineImpedance)

The Line Impedance parameter specifies the termination impedance for TDM ports. This parameter is configurable when the Port Type or Mode parameter is set to E1. Table 178-13 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-13 Line Impedance parameter
Option 75 ohm normal return loss on E1 75 ohm high return loss on E1 120 ohm normal return loss on E1 120 ohm high return loss on E1 (default) Option description Specifies a termination impedance of 75 at normal return loss on the E1 line. Specifies a termination impedance of 75 at high return loss on the E1 line. Specifies a termination impedance of 120 at normal return loss on the E1 line. Specifies a termination impedance of 120 at high return loss on the E1 line.
Not all values shown in Table 178-13 are supported by all TDM ports.
Line Length (lineLength)

The Line Length parameter specifies the line length, in feet, for the T1 or E1 line that is connected to the DS1 port. This parameter is configurable when the Line Buildout parameter is set to Short. Table 178-14 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-14 Line Length parameter
Option Line length 0..133ft (Short) (default) Line length 134..266ft (Short) Line length 267..399ft (Short) (1 of 2) Description The line length is between 0 and 133 ft. The line length is between 134 and 266 ft. The line length is between 267 and 399 ft. Dependencies
May 2009
178-17
Option Line length 400..533ft (Short) Line length 534..655ft (Short) (2 of 2)
Description The line length is between 400 and 533 ft. The line length is between 534 and 655 ft.
Dependencies
Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm)

See Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Loopback
Table 178-15 lists where to find information about the Loopback parameter.
Table 178-15 Loopback parameter
Parameter Loopback for SONET, SDH, and TDM classes Loopback for CES port See Loopback (loopback) in this section Loopback (loopback) in this section
Loopback (loopback)
The Loopback parameter specifies the loopback mode for the CES port. Table 178-16 lists the parameter options.
Option disabled (default) external Description Specifies that no loopback is configured for the CES port Specifies that an external loopback connector is present on the current TDM port. In this condition, the CES module ignores false signaling and alarms in the loopback signal. The bitstream that is derived from the received PSN packets is looped back. The bitstream received on the TDM port over the T1/E1 line is looped back to the T1/E1 line. Dependencies
local
The Clock Mode parameter for the daughter card slot must be set to adaptive.
remote
178-18
May 2009
Loopback (loopback)
The Loopback parameter specifies the loopback mode for SONET, SDH, and TDM classes. Table 178-17 lists the parameter options.
Option None (default) Line Option description Specifies a line loopback mode for the associated port or channel. Line loopback loops the frames received on the corresponding port or channels back to the remote router. You must shut down the corresponding port or channel to enabled loopback. Internal Specifies an internal loopback mode for the associated port or channel. Internal loopback loops the frames from the local router back to the framer. Specifies a remote loopback mode for the associated port or channel. Dependencies
Remote
MAC Address (lpsL2MacAddress)

The MAC Address parameter specifies an authorized static MAC address for a port that belongs to a VLAN. The port must belong to a VLAN and have learned port security enabled on the port. There is no default.
Max Egress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxEgrBW)

The Max Egress BW (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum egress bandwidth for each of the eight class of service queues on the port. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 296. The default is 0.
Max Ingress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxIngBW)

The Max Ingress BW (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum ingress bandwidth for each of the eight class of service queues on the port. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 296. The default is 0.
Max Req (paeAuthMaxReq)

The Max Req Period parameter specifies the maximum number of authentication requests to the authentication server, for example, a RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2.
May 2009
178-19
Maximum Power (milliwatt) (powerMaximum)

The Maximum Power (milliwatt) parameter specifies the maximum amount of power that is available for peripheral devices attached to the port. The range is 3000 to 16 000. The default is 3000.
Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schOvrMaxRate)

The Maximum Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the value that overrides the configured explicit maximum frame-based bandwidth for the HSMDA scheduler policy. The range is -2 to 40 000 (0 is not allowed). The default is no override (-2). When the Override option is enabled, the value entered overrides the configured bandwidth of the HSMDA scheduler policy. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the MAX option is disabled. MAX (-1) means that all instances of the scheduler policy on the egress ports or ingress HSMDAs are allowed at the available line rate.
Mode
Table 178-18 lists where to find information about the Mode parameter.
Parameter Mode for a service Mode for 802.3ah EFM OAM Mode for a hybrid Ethernet port See Mode (mode) in section 180.1 Mode (dot3OamMode) in this section Mode (hybridMode) in this section
Mode (dot3OamMode)
The Mode parameter specifies the 802.3ah EFM OAM port mode. The options are:
Active (default) Passive

Ethernet ports in active mode initiate 802.3ah EFM OAM monitoring activities, such as putting a peer port into a loopback state. Ethernet ports in the passive mode wait for a peer to initiate 802.3ah EFM OAM activities.
Mode (hybridMode)
The Mode parameter specifies the mode of operation of a hybrid (also known as combo) Ethernet port. Table 178-19 describes the parameter options.
178-20
May 2009
178 Physical Port and APS parameters Table 178-19 Hybrid Port Mode Parameter
Option Preferred Copper Description Hybrid ports use the copper RJ-45 10/100/1000 port instead of the fiber MiniGBIC SFP port when both ports are enabled and have a valid link. If the copper port goes down, the switch automatically switches to the fiber MiniGBIC SFP port. Hybrid ports always use the copper RJ-45 10/100/1000 port instead of the equivalent fiber MiniGBIC SFP port. Hybrid ports use the fiber MiniGBIC SFP port instead of the copper RJ-45 10/100/1000 port when both ports are enabled and have a valid link. If the fiber port goes down, the switch automatically switches to the copper RJ-45 port. Hybrid ports always use the fiber MiniGBIC SFP port instead of the equivalent copper RJ-45 10/100/1000 port.
Forced Copper Preferred Fiber (default)
Forced Fiber
MTU (bytes)
Multiplier (Intervals) (dot3OamMultiplier)

The Multiplier (Intervals) parameter specifies the number of receive intervals that can pass before any OAMPDUs are received on a port until the EFM OAM negotiation process restarts.
The Name parameter specifies a name for the HSMDA egress secondary shaper. You cannot include a colon in the HSMDA egress secondary shaper name.
Name (slopePolicy)
Click on the Select button to list and choose a slope policy for a port.
Network Queue Policy Name (networkQueuePolicyName)

Click the Select button to list and choose a network queue policy for a port.
Operational State (operationalState)

The Operational State parameter specifies the operational status of the port. The options are:
Powered Off (default) Powered On
May 2009
178-21
Port CLI Name (portDisplayedName)

The Port CLI Name parameter specifies the working or protection port chosen. Use the Select button to choose the appropriate port or channel from the list. Click on the OK button. The port FDN is displayed.
Port Framing (framing)

The Port Framing parameter specifies the type of framing on the attached T1 or E1 line. Table 178-20 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-20 Port Framing parameter
Option Unframed (default) E1 Framing (cas) Description The CES module operates in unstructured mode. The CES module operates in structured mode. Timeslot 16 carries signaling information. The CES module operates in structured mode. Timeslot 16 carries data Specifies the framing of 12 consecutive DS1 frames, and that timeslot 16 carries signaling information Specifies the framing of 12 consecutive DS1 frames, and timeslot 16 carries data Specifies the framing of 24 consecutive DS1 frames, and that timeslot 16 carries signaling information Specifies the framing of 24 consecutive DS1 frames, and timeslot 16 carries data Dependencies The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to E1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1. The Mode parameter for the CES module is set to T1.
E1 Framing (noncas)
Superframe (cas)
Superframe (noncas)
Extended superframe (cas) Extended superframe (noncas)
Port Type (ds1PortType)

The Port Type parameter specifies whether the port is DS1 or E1. The options are:
DS1 E1
178-22
May 2009
Power Priority (powerPriority)

The Power Priority parameter specifies the priority of powered devices that are connected to a port. Power to low-priority powered devices is removed before power is supplied to high- or critical-priority devices during a power shortage. The options are:
Critical High Low (default) Power State (adminStatus)

The Power State parameter specifies whether power is available to PD devices connected to a PoE port. The options are:
Off On (default) Q in Q Ethertype (qinqEtype)

The Q in Q Ethertype parameter specifies the Ethertype expected when the Encap Type parameter is set to Q in Q. The range is 1536 to 65 535. The default is 33 024.
Q0 (qosPortCOS0MaxBW)
The Q0 parameter specifies the maximum egress bandwidth for traffic in Q0. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 296. The default is 0. A value of 0 specifies best effort. A value of 4 294 967 296 specifies the maximum port speed.
Q0 (qosPortCOS0MinBW)
The Q0 parameter specifies the minimum egress bandwidth for traffic in Q0. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 296. The default is 0. A value of 0 specifies best effort. A value of 4 294 967 296 specifies the maximum port speed.
Q0 (qosPortLowPriorityWeight)
The Q0 parameter specifies the weight assigned to a port CoS egress queue. The range is 0 to 15. The default is 1.
See Q0 (qosPortCOS0MaxBW) in this section for more information.
See Q0 (qosPortCOS0MinBW) in this section for more information.
Q1 (qosPortMediumPriorityWeight)
See Q0 (qosPortLowPriorityWeight) in this section for more information.
Q2 (qosPortHighPriorityWeight)
Q3 (qosPortUrgentPriorityWeight)
Q4 (qosPortQ4PriorityWeight)
QoS Status (qosEnabled)

The QoS Status parameter specifies whether QoS is enabled on the port. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Quiet Period (paeAuthQuietPeriod)

The Quiet Period parameter specifies the quiet period for the device. The range is 1 to 3600 s. The default is 60 s.
Rate (Mbps)
Table 178-21 lists where to find information about the Rate (Mbps) parameter.
May 2009
178-25
178 Physical Port and APS parameters Table 178-21 Rate (Mbps) parameter
Parameter Rate for class 1 Rate for class 2 Rate for class 3 Rate for class 4 Rate for class 5 Rate for class 6 Rate for class 7 Rate for class 8 Rate for group 1 Rate for group 2 See See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass1Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass2Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass3Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass4Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass5Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass6Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass7Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass8Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp1Rate) in this section See Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp2Rate) in this section
Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass1Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the value that overrides the configured maximum rate allowed for scheduling class 1. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the MAX option is disabled. The range is -2 to 40 000 (0 is not allowed). The default is no override (-2). When the Override option is enabled, the value for this parameter overrides the configured rate allowed for scheduling class 1. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the MAX option is disabled. MAX (-1) means that the limit is not enforced for the class.

178-26
May 2009




May 2009
178-27


Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp1Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the value that overrides the maximum rate allowed for the scheduling classes mapped to group 1. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the MAX option is disabled. The range is -2 to 40 000 (0 is not allowed). The default is no override (-2). When the Override option is enabled, the value entered overrides the configured rate allowed for scheduling classes mapped to group 1. MAX (-1) means that the bandwidth limitation is removed from group 1.
Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp2Rate)

The Rate (Mbps) parameter specifies the value that overrides the maximum rate allowed for the scheduling classes mapped to group 2. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the MAX option is disabled. The range is -2 to 40 000 (0 is not allowed). The default is no override (-2). When the Override option is enabled, the value entered overrides the configured rate allowed for scheduling classes mapped to group 2. MAX (-1) means that the bandwidth limitation is removed from group 2.
Rate (kbps) (portEgrShaperRate)

The Rate (kbps) parameter specifies the maximum shapers rate threshold. When a shapers rate limit is reached, scheduling for all queues associated with the shaper is stopped. When the rate drops below the threshold, the queues are placed back in the scheduler service lists. The range is -1 to 10 000. The default is MAX (-1).
178-28
May 2009
RADIUS Server Policy Name (radiusServerPolicyName)

The RADIUS Server Policy Name parameter specifies the name of the RADIUS server policy created using the 5620 SAM 802_1x Policy Manager. Click on the Select button to list and choose a RADIUS server policy.
Reauth Enabled (paeAuthReAuthEnabled)

The Reauth Enabled parameter specifies whether to allow reauthentication requests. The options are:
true false (default) Reauth Period (paeAuthReAuthPeriod)

The Reauth Period parameter specifies the time between reauthentication requests. The parameter is configurable when the Reauth Enabled parameter is set to true. The range is 1 to 9000 s. The default is 3600 s.
Reauthenticate Control (paePortReauthenticate)

The Reauthenticate Control parameter specifies whether to reauthenticate the user. The options are:
true false (default) Received Remote Loopback Requests (dot3OamLoopbackIgnoreRx)

The Received Remote Loopback Requests parameter specifies whether a port ignores or processes received 802.3ah EFM OAM loopback commands. The options are:
Ignored (default) Processed

A port in loopback mode ignores all other traffic except 802.3ah EFM OAM traffic.
Report Alarms (reportAlarmBits)

The Report Alarms parameter specifies the SONET alarms to monitor and report. A check mark beside the alarm option enables the alarm to be logged. Table 178-22 lists the parameter options.
May 2009
178-29
178 Physical Port and APS parameters Table 178-22 Report Alarms parameter
Option Loss of Clock Option Description Reports a clock loss which causes the operational state of the port to be shut down Reports line remote defect indication errors. LRDI errors are caused by a remote LOF, LOC, or LOS. When enabled, LRDI alarms are raised and cleared. Reports line signal failure BER errors. Use the threshold command to set the error rates that, when exceeded, determine signal degradation and signal failure.When enabled, BER line signal failure alarms are raised and cleared. Reports section loss of frame errors. When enabled, SLOF alarms are raised and cleared. Reports a section loss of signal error on the transmit side. When enabled, SLOS alarms are raised and cleared. Reports line alarm indication signal errors. When enabled, LAIS alarms are raised and cleared. Reports section synchronization failure as reported by the S1 byte. When enabled, SSLF alarms are raised and cleared. Reports line signal degradation BER (bit interleaved parity) errors. The parameter sets the threshold for the error rates that, when exceeded, determines signal degradation and signal failure. When enabled, line signal degradation BER alarms are raised and cleared. Reports a line error condition raised by the remote because of b1 errors received from this device. When enabled, line error conditions are raised but not cleared. Alarm not monitored or reported Default Alarm monitored and reported
Line Remote Defect Indication
BER Line Signal Failure
Section Loss of Frame
Section Loss of Signal
Line Alarm Indication Signal
Section S1 Failure
BER Line Signal Degradation
Line Error Condition
Reserved CBS%
Resync
178-30
May 2009
Retry Timeout (Sec) (retryTimeout)

The Retry Timeout (Sec) parameter specifies the minimum number of seconds the port should wait after detecting a loop before its State variable (displayed on the States tab) can be set to Link Up. A value of No retry specifies that the port should not be set to the Link Up state until the user manually disables and re-enables the port by setting the Administrative State parameter to Down and then to Up. The range is 0 to 160. The default is 120.
Revertion Mode (revertMode)

The Revertion Mode parameter specifies whether the APS configuration is revertive. In non-revertive switching, a switch to the protection channel is maintained even after the working line has recovered from a failure or the manual switch has been cleared. In revertive switching, the traffic is switched back to the working channel after the working line has recovered from a failure or the manual switch has been cleared. The options are:
nonrevertive (default) revertive Second Network Element (nodeIdHigh)

The Second Network Element parameter specifies the far-end device in the APS group container.
Server Timeout (paeAuthServerTimeout)

The Server Timeout parameter specifies the timeout period for authentication requests from the authenticating server, for example, a RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 300 s. The default is 30 s.
Servicing Mode (qosPortServicingMode)

The Servicing Mode parameter specifies whether the port uses strict priority or weighted fair queuing to service the port QoS queues. Table 178-23 describes the parameter options.
Table 178-23 Servicing Mode parameter
Option Default (default) Strict Priority Description A strict priority method using eight priority queues. Lower priority traffic is dropped in the presence of higher priority traffic. A type of WFR that combines strict-priority queues and WRR queues. In Strict Priority scheduling, each CoS queue associated with the egress port is serviced in priority order from highest 7 to lowest 0. All traffic for a given CoS is transmitted before the scheduler proceeds to the next highest priority queue. (1 of 2)
May 2009
178-31
Option WRR
Description All queues participate in a WRR scheme. Traffic is serviced from each queue based on the weight of the queue. Weighted Round Robin (WRR) scheduling services each CoS queue associated with the egress port in round robin order from highest priority to lowest priority. WRR provides a weighted access to the egress port bandwidth at the packet level. A configurable weight from 1 to 15 is assigned to each CoS queue.
DRR
All queues participate in a DRR scheme. Traffic is serviced from each queue based on the weight of the queue. The DRR scheduling algorithm maintains a quantum value that defines the total number of credits for each CoS queue and a credit counter that is decremented each time a byte is taken from the queue for transmission. The purpose of the credit counter is to track the use of bandwidth by a CoS queue relative to the amount of bandwidth that has been allocated to the queue.
(2 of 2)
The port servicing mode overrides the global default servicing mode that is configured with QoS global parameter settings. To reset the servicing mode for the port to the global default mode, choose the Default option.
Set Local Loopback (dot3OamLoopbackLocalStatus)

The Set Local Loopback parameter specifies the local port loopback mode. The parameter is configurable when the Operational Status is Operational. You can specify the local loopback mode using this parameter even when the Received Remote Loopback Requests (dot3OamLoopbackIgnoreRx) parameter is set to Ignored. This parameter overrides 802.3ah EFM OAM command messages. The options are:
No Loopback (default) Local Loopback

This parameter has no effect unless the Loopback Status parameter is set to No Loopback.
Set Remote Loopback (dot3Actions)

The Set Remote Loopback parameter specifies the peer loopback state. The parameter is configurable when the Operational Status is Operational. When you enable this parameter, the local port sends an initiating loopback OAMPDU to the peer port to set it to a loopback state. If the peer port is already in a loopback state, you can disable this parameter to send a terminating loopback OAMPDU to the peer port to take it out of a loopback state. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Shut Down

178-32
May 2009
Single Fiber (singleFiber)

The Single Fiber parameter specifies whether to enable gathering and redirection of IP packets from a single fiber on the RX port of a SONET or Ethernet port and redistribute packets to other interfaces through static routes or policy-based forwarding. The options are:
true false (default) SONET Section Trace Mode (sonetSectionTraceMode)

The SONET Section Trace Mode parameter specifies the section trace type in the SONET section header to interoperate with some older versions of ADMs or regenerators that require an incremental STM ID. Table 178-24 lists the parameter options.
Table 178-24 SONET Section Trace Mode parameter
Option Byte (default) Increment-z0 String Option description 00 to ff hexadecimal characters, as configured using the J0 String (j0String) parameter Set to hexadecimal 01 and cannot be changed Up to 16 decimal characters, as configured using the J0 String (j0String) parameter Dependencies
Speed
See Speed (speed) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Supplicant Timeout (paeAuthSuppTimeout)

The Supplicant Timeout parameter specifies the timeout period for the authenticating device, for example, a RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 300 s. The default is 60 s.
Transmit Interval (dot3OamInterval)

The Transmit Interval parameter specifies the amount of time, in 100-ms intervals, between each periodic 802.3ah EFM OAMPDU that is transmitted and received. A lower value indicates that OAMPDUs are transmitted more frequently to the peer and that OAMPDUs must be received more frequently from the peer. The range is 1 to 600. The default is 10, which specifies that there is one second between the transmitted and received OAMPDUs.
May 2009
178-33
Trusted (qosPortTrusted)
The Trusted parameter specifies whether a port is trusted. All switch ports, by default, are not trusted, which means that the ports do not require incoming traffic packets to have their 802.1p or ToS/DSCP values set. When a port is not trusted, the 802.1p or ToS/DSCP bits in incoming packets are set to the default 802.1p or to DSCP values that are configured for the port. Fixed ports that are configured for 802.1q are always trusted, regardless of QoS settings, and cannot be configured as untrusted. Mobile ports are also trusted, but they may or may not accept Q-tagged traffic. The options are:
Yes No (default) Tunneling (dot3OamTunneling)

The Tunneling parameter specifies whether OAMPDUs are transparently passed through a port which is part of an Epipe service. The options are:

You can enable this parameter when the Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState) parameter is Disabled. You may need to run 802.3ah OAMPDUs between devices which are located at each end of an Epipe service. When you enable tunneling at both ends of an Epipe, the 802.3ah OAMPDUs that are received at one end of the Epipe are forwarded transparently through the Epipe. When you disable tunneling, OAMPDUs are dropped or processed locally, depending on the state of the 802.3ah protocol.
Turn Up
Tx Period (paeAuthTxPeriod)
The Tx Period parameter specifies the transmit period for the device. The range is 1 to 3600 s. The default is 30 s.
Type
Table 178-25 lists where to find information about the Type parameter.
178-34
May 2009
178 Physical Port and APS parameters Table 178-25 Type parameter
Parameter Type for access group Type for channel framing Type for APS group See Type (accessType) in this section Type (ds3Type) in this section Type (nodeCardinality) in this section
Type (accessType)
The Type parameter specifies the type of access group to create. The options are:
IP (default) MAC Type (ds3Type)

The Type parameter specifies the framing type for channels on the specified port. The options are:
DS3 (default) E3 Type (nodeCardinality)

The Type parameter specifies whether the working and protection channels of the APS group are located on a single device or on two independent devices. The options are:
Single Chassis (default) Multi Chassis View Dependencies

See View Dependencies button (getDependencyCount) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Wait To Restore (seconds) (waitToRestore)

The Wait To Restore (seconds) parameter specifies the wait-to-restore period in seconds for revertive switching. After clearing a condition that necessitated an automatic switch, the wait-to-restore period must elapse before traffic reverts to the working channel. The parameter is enabled when the Revertive Mode parameter is set to revertive. The range is 0 and 60 to 3600 s. The default is 300 s. A change in the value of the Wait To Restore (seconds) parameter takes effect at the next initiation of the wait-to-restore period. A change in the value does not modify the length of a wait-to-restore period that is currently active.
May 2009
178-35
Weight
Table 178-26 lists where to find information about the Weight parameter.
Parameter Weight for class 1 Weight for class 2 Weight for class 3 Weight for class 4 Weight for class 5 Weight for class 6 Weight for class 7 Weight for class 8 See See Weight (schOvrClass1WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass2WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass3WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass4WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass5WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass6WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass7WtInGp) in this section See Weight (schOvrClass8WtInGp) in this section
Weight (schOvrClass1WtInGp)
The Weight parameter specifies the value that overrides the configured weight of scheduling class 1. The parameter is configurable when the Override option is enabled and the Default option is disabled. The range is -2 to 100 (0 and -1 are not allowed). The default is 1. To configure the parameter for no override set the value to -2.
178-36
May 2009
Xgig Mode (networkMode)

The Xgig Mode parameter specifies whether the 10 Gbytes port is configured in LAN or WAN mode. Table 178-27 lists the options.
May 2009
178-37
178 Physical Port and APS parameters Table 178-27 Xgig Mode parameter
Option LAN (default) WAN Option description When the port configured as LAN, all SONET/SDH parameters cannot be configured. When the port is configured as WAN, some SONET/SDH parameters are enabled, to reflect WAN requirements. Dependencies SONET/SDH tabs appear on the properties form, but only a subset of parameters can be configured.
178-38
May 2009
179.1 Channel parameters
179-2
May 2009
179-1
179.1
Channel parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the Channel property form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for channels.
Accounting Enabled
See Accounting Enabled (accounting) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Address and Control Field Compression (acfc)

The Address and Control Field Compression parameter specifies whether to minimize the required backhaul bandwidth for DS1 and E1 channel groups within a PPP configuration. This parameter provides a method to negotiate the compression of the data link layer address and control fields of the data packet. Because these fields usually have constant values for point-to-point links, they are easily compressed. The peer is informed whether the implementation can receive compressed address and control fields. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Administrative State

Administrative Status (adminStatus)

The Administrative Status parameter specifies the status of the PVCC created for an ILMI link. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat)

See ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) in chapter 180 for the parameter description.
ATM Minimum VPI Value (atmInterfaceMinimumVPIValue)

The Minimum VPI Value parameter specifies the minimum VPI value that can be used on the ATM interface for a VPC. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
179-2
May 2009
Bit Error Insertion Rate (bitErrorInsertionRate)

The Bit Error Insertion Rate parameter specifies the line signal degradation BER and line signal failure thresholds. The options are:
Disabled (default) 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
The line signal (b2) interleaved parity BER is continuously measured. An alarm is raised if the rate exceeds the degradation or failure threshold. If the failure threshold is exceeded, the link is set to operationally down.
C2 Byte (hex) (c2Byte)

The C2 Byte (hex) parameter specifies the C2 byte value as a hexadecimal character or a decimal integer. The purpose of this byte is to communicate the payload type on a channel that is encapsulated by SONET framing. The range is 00 to FF (hexadecimal), or 0 to 255 (decimal). The default is CF (hexadecimal). When you specify 00 (hexadecimal), the parameter is reset to the default value.
Channel Framing (channelFraming)

The Channel Framing parameter specifies the DS1/E1 or DS3/E3 framing for the associated port or channel. Table 179-1 lists the parameter options.
May 2009
179-3
179 Channel parameters Table 179-1 Channel Framing parameter

For DS1 or E1 Option esf sf G.703 (not DS1) G.704 no-CRC G.704 CRC DS1-unframed DS3 or E3 c-bit m23 G.751 (not DS3) G.832 (not DS3) Option description Specifies extended super frame framing for the port Specifies super frame framing for the port Specifies G.703 framing for the channel Specifies G.704 framing without cyclical redundancy checking Specifies G.704 framing with cyclical redundancy checking Specifies an unstructured DS1 channel Specifies C-Bit framing for the port or channel Specifies M23 framing for the port or channel Specifies G.751 framing for the port or channel Specifies G.832 framing for the port or channel 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later Dependencies
Channelized (channelized)
The Channelized parameter specifies whether the service is channelized. The options are:
None (default) DS1 E1 Channel Type (portChannelType)

The Channel Type parameter specifies the type of channel created on the deep channelization card port. The options are:
Sonet Sts3 (Sdh Stm1) Sonet Sts1 (Sdh Au3) Class

179-4
May 2009
Clock Source (channelClockSource)

The Clock Source parameter specifies whether the timing source for transmitted data is the internal clock or a clock recovered from the receive data stream for the line. The options are:
Loop Timed Node Timed (default) Adaptive Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)
The Collect Accounting Statistics parameter specifies whether the collection of accounting statistics for the channel is enabled. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Configured MAC

CRC (crc)
The CRC parameter specifies the cyclic redundancy check on a channel. You can only configure a 16-bit CRC on an OC-3 channel. The default is 32 bit and cannot be changed when the encapsulation type is set to ATM. The options are:
16 bit 32 bit (default) CRC Precision (channelCRC)

The CRC Precision parameter specifies the cyclic redundancy check on a DS0 or DS3 channel. You can only configure a 16-bit CRC on a DS3 channel. The options are:
16 bit (default) 32 bit Description

Destination ECID (destinationECID)

The Destination ECID parameter specifies the emulated circuit identifier of the destination peer for a specific CES circuit. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
May 2009
179-5
Destination IP Address (destinationIpAddress)

The Destination IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the destination peer for a specific CES circuit. Specify a unicast IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 192.168.0.127.
Destination MAC Address (destinationMacAddress)

The Destination MAC Address parameter specifies the MAC address of the destination peer for a specific CES circuit. Specify a unicast MAC address in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. The range is 00-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.

The Destination Port parameter specifies the port number of the destination peer for a specific CES circuit. The range is 2000 to 65 535. The default is 2000.
Down Count (downCount)

The Down Count parameter specifies the number of keepalive intervals that must pass without receiving a keepalive packet before the link is declared down. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link should be provisioned with the same values. The range is 1 to 16. The default is 3.
Drop Count (keepAliveDropCount)

The Drop Count parameter specifies the number of failed responses to an SDP echo request before the SDP changes to a down state. The range is 1 to 255.
Duration (seconds) (bertDuration)

The Duration (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time for the BERT. The range is 0 s to 240 s.
Edit ATM button

Click on the Edit ATM button to configure the ATM Interface parameters for the channel.
Edit ILMI Link button

Click on the Edit ILMI Link button to configure the ILMI link parameters for the ATM interface.
Edit PPP button

Click on the Edit PPP button to configure the keep-alive Period and Drop Count parameters for the channel.
Egress Traffic Descriptor (egress)

The Egress Traffic Descriptor parameter specifies the ATM traffic descriptor profile ID for the egress traffic of the ILMI link. Click on the Select button to choose a qualified ATM QoS policy to associate to the ILMI link. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 1.
Encap Type
Equipment ID Code (channelMDLEicString)

The Equipment ID Code parameter specifies the EIC of the MDL. The range is 0 to 10 characters. The default is N/A.
Error Threshold
Table 179-2 lists where to find more information about the Error Threshold parameter.
Table 179-2 Error Threshold parameter
Parameter Error Threshold for DCE LMI Error Threshold for DTE LMI See Error Threshold (dceLmiErrorThreshold) in this section Error Threshold (dteLmiErrorThreshold) in this section
Error Threshold (dceLmiErrorThreshold)

The Error Threshold parameter specifies, for a DCE LMI, the number of errors necessary to place the Frame Relay LMI link operationally down. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DCE. The range is 1 to 4. The default is 3.
Error Threshold (dteLmiErrorThreshold)

The Error Threshold parameter specifies, for a DTE LMI, the number of errors necessary to place the Frame Relay LMI link operationally down. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DTE. The range is 1 to 4. The default is 3.
Facility ID Code (channelMDLPfiString)

The Facility ID Code parameter specifies the Facility ID Code sent in the MDL path message. The range is 0 to 38 characters. The default is N/A.
May 2009
179-7
Frame ID Code (channelMDLFicString)

The Frame ID Code parameter specifies the FIC of the MDL. The range is 0 to 10. The default is N/A.
Full Enquiry Interval (dteLmiFullEnquiryInterval)

The Full Enquiry Interval parameter specifies the full status polling interval for the Frame Relay LMI link. For example, when the parameter is set to 10, ten exchanges are completed between the DTE and DCE before a full status report is expected. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DTE. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 6. When the parameter is set to 1, the DTE always expects full status messages from the DCE.
Generator Number String (channelMDLGenString)

The Generator Number String parameter specifies the number string sent in the MDL test signal message. The range is 0 to 38 characters. The default is N/A.
Idle Cycle Flags (idleCycleFlags)

The Idle Cycle Flags parameter specifies the value that the DS0, DS1, or DS3 interface transmits during idle cycles. Table 179-3 lists the parameter options.
Table 179-3 Idle Cycle Flags parameter
Option Flags Ones Option description 0x7E is used as the idle cycle flag 0xFF is used as the idle cycle flag Dependencies
ILMI Link Vci (ilmiLinkVci)

The ILMI Link Vci parameter specifies the VCI of the ILMI link on the ATM interface being configured. The range is 1, 2, and 5 to 65 535. The default is 16.
ILMI Link Vpi (ilmiLinkVpi)

The ILMI Link Vpi parameter specifies the PVC identifier (vpi) of the ILMI link on the ATM interface being configured. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to UNI, the range is 0 to 255. When the ATM Interface Cell Format parameter is set to NNI, the range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
179-8
May 2009
Ime Type (requestedImeType)

The Ime Type parameter specifies whether the device that executes the ILMI protocol represents the user or network side of an ATM interface. The options are:
User-side (default) Network-side Ingress Traffic Descriptor (ingress)

The Ingress Traffic Descriptor parameter specifies the ATM traffic descriptor profile ID for the ingress traffic of the ILMI link. Click on the Select button to choose a qualified ATM QoS policy to associate to the ILMI link. The range is 1 to 1000. The default is 1.
Interface ID (interfaceId)
The Interface ID parameter specifies the identifier for the CES interface. The identifier must be unique across the device. The range is 1 to 30. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
Interface Mapping (atmInterfaceMapping)

The Interface Mapping parameter specifies the ATM cell mapping into a DS3 channel of an ATM interface. Table 179-4 lists the parameter options.
Table 179-4 Interface Mapping parameter
Option Direct (default) PLCP Description ATM direct mapping PLCP mapping Dependencies The Payload Type parameter of the channel must be set to Pdh Ds3
J1 String (j1String)
The J1 String parameter specifies the insertion of a continuous J1 path trace at the source to check against the expected value of the receiver. The J1 string contains all zeros for a path that is not provisioned. The range is 1 to 64 characters.
Keep Alive (seconds)

The Keep Alive (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, used to send periodic keepalive packets. The receiver process expects to receive a keepalive packet at every keepalive interval. The link is declared down if the receiver process does not receive a keepalive packet within the timeout interval. The link is declared up when the number of continual keepalive packets received equals the up-count. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link should be provisioned with the same values. The range is 0 to 300. The default is 10.
Keep-Alive Polling Count (keepAlivePollCount)

The Keep-Alive Polling Count parameter specifies how many consecutive polls must occur after an ILMI response message has not been received before connectivity is declared lost between peer IMEs. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 4.
Keep-Alive Polling Frequency (seconds) (keepAlivePollFreq)

The Keep-Alive Polling Frequency (seconds) parameter specifies the frequency, in seconds, between polls for ILMI connectivity loss between peer IMEs. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 1.
Keep-Alive Test Frequency (seconds) (keepAliveTestFreq)

The Keep-Alive Test Frequency (seconds) parameter specifies the frequency, in seconds, of tests for the reestablishment of connectivity after connectivity is lost between peer IMEs. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 5.
LMI Mode (mode)

The LMI Mode parameter specifies the mode of the interface configured for Frame Relay. The options are:
DTE (default) DCE Bi-Directional

Bidirectional LMI on a FR NNI link allows FR networks to peer with one another. Each end of the FR link acts as both a DTE and DCE device. The LMI Mode parameter can be set to Bi-Directional when the LMI Type parameter is set to ANSI or ITU.
LMI Type (frDlcmiState)

The LMI Type parameter specifies the type of interface configured for Frame Relay. The options are:
none rev1 ANSI (default for DS1 channels) ITU (default for E1 channels)
Set the parameter to none to disable Frame Relay LMI. Set the parameter to ITU to use ITU standard Q933 annex A LMI specification. Set the parameter to ANSI to use ANSI standard T1.167 annex D LMI specification. Set the parameter to rev1 to use Rev 1 version of the ANSI standard T1.167 annex D LMI specification.

See Load Balance Algorithm (loadBalanceAlgorithm) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Local Channel ID (localChannelId)

The Local Channel ID parameter specifies a channel number on the port according to the port structure. Table 179-5 lists the parameter options.
Table 179-5 Local Channel ID parameter
For Option STS192 SONET clear channel SONET sub-channel TDM 1 STS48 1 STS3 1 1 to 4 STS1 1 to 3 DS3 1 1 1 DS1 1 to 28 1 to 28 DS0 1 to 24 1 to 24 Dependencies
Local ECID (localECID)

The Local ECID parameter specifies an identifier for the local CES circuit. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Local Port (localPort)

The Local Port parameter specifies the port number for the local CES circuit. The range is 2000 to 65 535. The default is 2000.
Location ID Code (channelMDLLicString)

The Location ID Code parameter specifies the LIC of the MDL. The range is 1 to 11 characters. The default is N/A.
Loop Respond (channelFEACLoopRespond)

The Loop respond parameter specifies whether the associated DS3 interface can respond to remote loop signals. The DS3 far-end alarm and control signal can be used to send alarm or status information from the far-end terminal back to the local terminal. DS3 loopbacks at the far-end terminal are initiated from the local terminal. The options are:
false (default) true Loopback (channelLoopback)

The Loopback parameter specifies a loopback mode for SONET, SDH, and TDM classes. Table 179-6 lists the parameter options.
May 2009
179-11
179 Channel parameters Table 179-6 Loopback parameter

Option Line Option Description Specifies a line loopback mode for the associated port or channel. Line loopback loops frames received on the corresponding port or channels back to the remote device. Specifies an internal loopback mode for the associated port or channel. Internal loopback loops the frames from the local device back to the framer. Specifies a remote loopback mode for the associated port or channel. This mode is not available for SONET at the port level. Specifies an FDL line loopback according to ANSI T1.403. Specifies an FDL line loopback according to Bellcore TR-TSY-000312. Specifies a payload loopback using ANSI signaling. Dependencies Click on the Shut Down button to shut down the corresponding port or channel to enable loopback.
Internal
Remote
FDL ANSI FDL Bellcore Payload ANSI None
Max Jitter Expected (ms) (maxJitter)

The Max Jitter Expected parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the initial delay introduced by the jitter buffer. The jitter-buffer delay varies depending on congestion and processing delays in the network. As packets traverse the PSN, the delay varies from packet to packet. To accommodate this packet latency variation, the CES module uses a jitter buffer. The CES module supports a jitter buffer that can be sized according to the maximum packet latency variation expected for the network. The flexible buffer size helps prevent buffer underrun and overrun conditions. The range is 2 to 200. The default is 200.
MDL Message Type (channelMDLMessageType)

The MDL Message Type parameter specifies the:
transmission method of a message over a channelized interface line message data link for a DS3
Table 179-7 lists the parameter options for the MDL message type.
179-12
May 2009
179 Channel parameters Table 179-7 MDL Message Type parameter

Option Disabled (default) Test Signal DS3 Path Idle Signal Option description No MDL messages are transmitted Specifies the MDL test signal message that contains a generator number. Specifies the MDL DS3 path message that contains a facility identification code. Specifies the MDL idle signal message that contains a port number. C-bit framing must be used. Dependencies
Table 179-8 lists the parameter options for the MDL message types listed in Table 179-7. The default for all message options is N/A.
Table 179-8 MDL message options
Option Port Number String Generator Number String Option description Specifies the port ID code Specifies the generator number to send in the MDL test signal message Specifies the equipment ID code Specifies the location ID code Specifies the frame ID code Specifies the unit ID code Specifies the facility ID code Range 0 to 38 characters 0 to 38 characters Dependencies
Equipment ID Code Location ID Code Frame ID Code Unit ID Code Facility ID Code
0 to 10 characters 0 to 11 characters 0 to 10 characters 0 to 6 characters 0 to 38 characters
Mode
See Mode (mode) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Monitored Events
Table 179-9 lists where to find more information about the Monitored Events parameter.
Table 179-9 Monitored Events parameter
Parameter Monitored Events for DCE LMI Monitored Events for DTE LMI See Monitored Events (dceLmiMonitoredEvents) in this section Monitored Events (dteLmiMonitoredEvents) in this section
May 2009
179-13
Monitored Events (dceLmiMonitoredEvents)

The Monitored Events parameter specifies the event count for the Frame Relay LMI link. The event count is used to verify link integrity. When the number of events exceeds the configured value, the link is considered down, and is placed in an operationally down state. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DCE. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 4. The parameter value must be larger than or equal to the Error Threshold parameter.
Monitored Events (dteLmiMonitoredEvents)

The Monitored Events parameter specifies the event count for the Frame Relay LMI link. The event count is used to verify link integrity. When the number of events exceeds the configured value, the link is considered down, and is placed in an operationally down state. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DCE. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 4. The parameter value must be larger than or equal to the Error Threshold parameter.
MTU (bytes)
Network Queue Policy Name (queueId)

Click on the Select button to list and choose a network queue policy.
Pattern (bertPattern)
The Pattern parameter specifies the pattern that is used by the Bit Error Insertion Rate parameter. Table 179-10 lists the parameter options.
Table 179-10 Pattern parameter
Option None Ones Zeros Alternating 2^3 2^9 2^15 2^20 Option description Specifies no pattern. Specifies a repeating, all-ones pattern. Specifies a repeating, all-zeros pattern. Specifies a repeating pattern of ones and zeroes. Specifies a pseudo-random repeating pattern that is 8 bits long. Specifies a pseudo-random repeating pattern that is 512 bits long. Specifies a pseudo-random repeating pattern that is 32768 bits long. Specifies a pseudo-random repeating pattern that is 1048576 bits long. Dependencies
179-14
May 2009
Payload Scrambling Enabled (isPayloadScramblingEnabled)

The Payload Scrambling enabled parameter specifies whether payload scrambling is enabled. Scrambling randomizes the pattern of 1s and 0s carried in a SONET frame. Scrambling meets the needs of physical layer protocols that rely on sufficient transitions between 1s and 0s to maintain clocking. The options are:
true false (default) Payload Type (payloadType)

The Payload Type parameter specifies the type of payload configured for the channel. The options are:
Sonet Vt15 (Sdh Tu11) Sonet Vt2 (Sdh Tu12) Pdh Ds1 Pdh Ds3 Pdh E1 (for SDH framing only) Pdh E3 (for SDH framing only) Sdh Tug3 (for SDH framing only)
Period (keepalivePeriod)
The Period parameter specifies the keep-alive timer. A keep-alive message is sent every time this time expires. The range is 1 to 60 s. The default is 10 s.
Polling Interval (seconds)

Table 179-11 lists where to find more information about the Polling Interval (seconds) parameter.
Table 179-11 Polling Interval (seconds) parameter
Parameter Polling Interval (seconds) for DCE LMI Polling Interval (seconds) for DTE LMI See Polling Interval (seconds) (dceLmiPollingInterval) in this section Polling Interval (seconds) (dteLmiPollingInterval) in this section
Polling Interval (seconds) (dceLmiPollingInterval)

The Polling Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the Frame Relay DCE LMI link checks for a keepalive response from the DTE. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DCE. The range is 5 to 30. The default is 15.
May 2009
179-15
Polling Interval (seconds) (dteLmiPollingInterval)

The Polling Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the Frame Relay DTE LMI link sends out a keepalive response request to the DCE. The parameter is configurable when the LMI Mode parameter is set to DTE. The range is 5 to 30. The default is 10.
Port Number String (channelMDLPortString)

The Port Number String parameter specifies the port number string sent in the MDL idle signal message. The range is 0 to 38 characters. The default is N/A.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the VLAN priority for the packets on the circuit. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 1.
Protocol (protocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies the type of protocol that the CES interface uses when generating packets for the PSN. Table 179-12 lists the parameter options.
Option satop metro ethernet cesopsn Description An IP header is inserted in the packet. SAToP can only be used when the CES interface is configured for unstructured mode. A minimum-size header is used for the packets. This is bandwidth-efficient but the packets are not routable. Supported on structured and unstructured CES interfaces. CESoPSN (Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network) - an IP header is inserted in the packet. CESoPSN can only be used when the CES interface is configured for structured mode.
Protocol Field Compression (pfc)

The Protocol Field Compression parameter specifies whether to minimize the required backhaul bandwidth for DS1 and E1 channel groups within a PPP configuration. When low-speed links are used and this parameter is enabled, bandwidth is conserved by sending as little redundant data as possible. This parameter provides the option to choose between implementation simplicity and bandwidth efficiency. If successfully negotiated, the ISO 3309 extension mechanism may be used to compress the protocol field of the data packet to one octet instead of two octets. The options are:
179-16
May 2009
Protocol Version (requestedVersion)

The Protocol Version parameter specifies the ILMI protocol version used on the ILMI link. The Administrative Status parameter must be set to Disabled before the version can be changed. The options are:
4.0 (default) 3.1 Report Alarms (reportAlarmBits)

The Report Alarms parameter specifies the TDM and SONET/SDH channel alarms to monitor and report. A check mark beside the alarm option enables the alarm to be logged. Table 179-13 lists the parameter options. The default is disabled.
Table 179-13 Report Alarms parameter
For SONET or SDH Option Path Alarm unequipped path error Path Payload Mismatch Option description Reports path unequipped signal errors. Reports a path payload mismatch, which causes the channel to be operationally down. When enabled, PPLM traps are raised but not cleared. Reports path loss of pointer errors for each tributary. When enabled, PLOP traps are raised but not cleared. Reports a path error condition raised as a result of B3 errors received from the node. When enabled, PREI traps are raised but not cleared. Reports path remote defect indication errors. When enabled, PRDI alarms are raised and cleared. Reports path alarm indication signal errors. When enabled, PAIS alarms are raised and cleared. Reports looped packets errors. Reports out-of-frame errors. When enabled, OOF alarms are not raised or cleared. Reports alarm indication signal errors. When enabled, AIS alarms are not raised or cleared. Reports resource availability indicator events. When enabled, RAI alarms are not raised or cleared. Reports loss of signal errors. When enabled, LOS traps are not raised or cleared. Dependencies
Path Loss of Pointer
Path remote B3 error
Path Remote Defect Indication
Path Alarm Indication Signal
TDM
Far end wants the read end to loopback Out of frame Alarm Indication Signal
Resource Availability Indicator
Loss of Signal
Reserved CBS%
Restore Keep-Alive Defaults

Click on the Restore Keep-Alive Defaults button to restore the default values of the keep-alive parameters for the ILMI link.
Respond to Remote Loop Signal (remoteLoopRespondConfig)

The Respond to Remote Loop Signal parameter specifies whether a channel responds to remote loop signals. The options are:
True False (default) Resync

Samples Aggregation (samplesAggregation)

The Samples Aggregation parameter specifies the number of samples to aggregate in each outgoing PDU. The range is 2 to 39. The default is 2.
Scramble (scramble)
The Scramble parameter enables payload scrambling on channel groups. The Scramble parameter is supported if the Encap Type parameter is ATM. The default is true.
Shut Down
Signal Mode (signalMode)

The Signal Mode parameter specifies the type of signalling associated with the channel. The options are:
None (default) CAS Speed

See Speed (speed) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Subrate CSU Mode (subrateCSUMode)

The Subrate CSU Mode parameter configures the CSU compatibility mode to interoperate with existing DS3 subrate standards. The Subrate CSU Mode parameter applies only to non-channelized DS3s. Table 179-14 lists the parameter options.
179-18
May 2009
179 Channel parameters Table 179-14 Subrate CSU Mode parameter

Option Not Used (Default) Digital Link Option description Disables the subrate functionality for the DS3 channel Enables the Digital-Link (Quick Eagle) CSU compatibility mode for the DS3 channel Dependencies
Subrate Range (subrateRange)

The Subrate Range parameter specifies the subrate value for the associated DS3. The Subrate Range parameter applies only to non-channelized DS3s. You can configure the parameter when the Subrate CSU Mode is set to the Digital Link option. The range is 1 to 147 Kb/s. The default is 1.
Time Slots
See Time Slots (timeSlotBits) in section 180.1 for the parameter description.
Turn Up
Unit ID Code (channelMDLUnitString)

The Unit ID Code parameter specifies the UIC of the MDL. The range is 0 to 6 characters. The default is N/A.
Up Count (upCount)
The Up Count parameter specifies the number of continual keepalive packets that must be received to declare the link up. The nodes at the two endpoints of the cHDLC link should be provisioned with the same values. The range is 1 to 3. The default is 1.
May 2009
179-19
179-20
May 2009
180.1 Common equipment navigation tree parameters
180-2
May 2009
180-1
180.1
Common equipment navigation tree parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the equipment navigation tree forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options.
Accounting Enabled (accounting)

The Accounting Enabled parameter specifies whether to enable accounting for the port or channel. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, accounting and statistics data is collected in the appropriate records file, and made available to 5620 SAM.
Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId)

Click the Select button to list and choose an accounting policy ID for a port or channel. The accounting policy must be configured before assigning it to a port or channel.

Up (default) Down ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat)

The ATM Interface Cell Format parameter specifies the interface cell format. The options are:
UNI (default) NNI Auto-Assign ID

180-2
May 2009
Class (PortClass)
The Class parameter specifies the service required. The GUI only displays valid options for the operation that you are configuring. The options are:
Fast Ethernet (default) 10G Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Variable Speed Ethernet SONET TDM None
Configured MAC (macAddress)

The Configured Address parameter specifies the unicast MAC address or base chassis Ethernet MAC address that is configured for ports, LAGs, or BCP-enabled SONET channels.
Default VLAN (vlan)

The Default VLAN parameter specifies a default VLAN for the port. The range is 1 to 4092. The default is 1.
The Description parameter specifies a description for the created object. The range is 0 to 80 characters. The range for the description of a 7250 SAS-ESA dry contact sensor is 0 to 64 characters.
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression)

The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression parameter specifies whether the 5620 SAM raises an alarm when digital diagnostics monitoring thresholds are exceeded on ports on SFP and XFP optical modular transceivers. The thresholds for SFPs and XFPs are programmed by the transceiver manufacturer. The options are:

Digital diagnostics monitoring is supported on the 7450 ESS, 7750 SR, 7710 SR, Release 6.0 and later, and the 7705 SAR.
May 2009
180-3
Encap Type (encapType)

The Encap Type parameter specifies the encapsulation type for a service on a port or channel. The appropriate type must be configured on the terminating channel. When a port is configured for access or network mode, the encapsulation type must be specified to differentiate the services on the port or channel. Table 180-1 lists the parameter options. The encapsulation type for the 16 x channelized DS1/E1 ASAP daughter card cannot be changed after the DS0 channel group has been configured. The channel group must be deleted and reconfigured to change the encapsulation type.
Table 180-1 Encap Type parameter
For Ethernet access ports Option Dot1 Q Option description Supports multiple services on the port and a default MTU size of 1518 bytes. The outer encapsulation ID, which is used to differentiate services, is the VLAN ID in the IEEE 802.1Q header. Supports multiple services on the port or channel. The inner and outer encapsulation IDs, which are used to differentiate services, are the VLAN IDs in the IEEE 802.1Q header. Supports a single service on the port and has a default MTU size of 1514 bytes Dependencies
Q in Q
Null
No tags or labels are carried on the frames, so only one service can be configured on the port
Ethernet network ports
Dot1 Q Null
Supports multiple services on the port and up to 9212 bytes for the MTU size Supports a single service on the port Support VLAN tagged frames, and these tagged frames are allowed into the SONET path.
SONET/SDH network ports
PPP Auto
(1 of 2)
180-4
May 2009
For SONET, SDH, or TDM access ports or channels
Option BCP Null
Option description Supports a single service on the POS port or channel. This option is used to bridge a service between two devices using PPP over SONET, SDH, or TDM. The encapsulation ID is always 0. Supports multiple services on the port or channel. This option is used to bridge multiple services between two devices using PPP over SONET, SDH, or TDM. The outer encapsulation ID, which is used to differentiate services, is the VLAN ID in the IEEE 802,1Q header in the BCP-encapsulated frame. Supports one IP service on the port or channel. This option is typically used for device interconnection using PPP. Supports multiple services using the DLCI header Supports the encapsulation of ATM cells within SONET/SDH frames Supports mirroring of frame relay and POS ports. No link management protocol runs on these ports. Supports Cisco HDLC data encapsulation on synchronous serial links using frame characters and checksums. You can only configure Cisco HDLC on IES SAPs. Supports SONET, SDH, and TDM circuit emulation services Supports a single service on the POS port Supports multiple services on the port
Dependencies BCP is used on the SONET path as the network control protocol.
BCP Dot1 Q
IPCP
ICPC is used as the network control protocol, instead of BCP
FR ATM WAN Mirror
Cisco HDLC
CEM LAGs Null Dot 1Q (2 of 2)

The Load Balance Algorithm parameter specifies the load balancing algorithm used for the port or channel. Table 180-2 lists the parameter options.
Table 180-2 Load Balance Algorithm parameter
Option Include L4 Exclude L4 Default (default) unspecified (default) Option description Includes Layer 4 source and destination port values in the hashing algorithm Excludes Layer 4 source and destination port values in the hashing algorithm Inherits the global settings. The value is not applicable for ports that do not pass any traffic Dependencies Default for 7750 SR and 7450 ESS Default for 7710 SR
May 2009
180-5
Mode (mode)
The Mode parameter specifies whether the mode for a port is access or network. Table 180-3 lists the parameter options.
For Ethernet SONET clear channel SONET channelized TDM channel LAGs Option Access Option description Specifies the port or channel for service access. An access port or channel is used for customer-facing traffic on which services are configured. SAPs can only use an access port or channel. When a port or channel is configured for access mode, the appropriate Encapsulation Type parameter must be specified to differentiate the services on the port or channel. Network Configures the port or channel for transport network use. The network port or channel participates in the service provider transport or infrastructure network. For a 7250 SAS or Telco device, when you configure the mode as network, the ports are automatically made into uplinks for a VLAN and are added as tagged SAPs of the VLAN. When a port or channel is configured for network mode, the Encap Type is set to PPP Auto and cannot be changed. Dependencies
Ethernet SONET clear channel LAGs
MTU (bytes) (mtuValue)

The MTU (bytes) parameter specifies the default MTU size for a port, This is the size of the largest packet that can be sent or received on the physical interface a port, SONET/SDH clear channel, or a TDM channel. The parameter is configured at the connection termination endpoint. Service MTU values must be less than or equal to the service tunnel MTU. Service MTU values must be less than or equal to the access port MTU. The range is 512 to 4470 (512 to 1572 for the 7705 SAR). See MTU size and port configuration in chapter 27 for more information about MTU size considerations. Specifying a MTU value of 0 for the 7750 SR, 7710 SR, or 7705 SAR sets the MTU to the default value. Table 180-4 lists the parameter options.
Table 180-4 MTU (bytes) parameter
For Ethernet port Mode Network Access Type Null Dot1 Q (1 of 2) Default MTU size (bytes) 1572 (7705 SAR) 1514 1518
180-6
May 2009
For Fast Ethernet Other Ethernet
Mode Network Access Network
Type BCP Null BCP Dot1 Q IPCP FR ATM CEM
Default MTU size (bytes) 1514 1572 (7705 SAR) 1572 (7705 SAR) 9212 1572 (7705 SAR) 1522 1526 1502 1578 1524 1578 1578 1518 1572 (7705 SAR) 1522 1502 1578 1524 1572 (7705 SAR) 1572 (7705 SAR) 1572 (7705 SAR)
SONET/SDH clear channel
Access
Network TDM channel Access
PPP Auto BCP Null BCP Dot1 Q IPCP FR ATM CEM
Network (2 of 2)
PPP Auto
The Ethernet port-level MTU parameter value indirectly defines the largest physical packet that the port can transmit or the far-end Ethernet port can receive. Packets received that are larger than the MTU are discarded. Packets that cannot be fragmented at egress and exceed the MTU are discarded. The parameters specified for MTU configuration include the destination MAC address, source MAC address, Ethernet encapsulation type, length field, and the complete Ethernet payload. SONET channels use the MTU value to define the largest point-to-point payload that a SONET frame can contain. A major difference between channel and Ethernet physical MTU values is in what overhead is considered part of the framing method and what overhead is considered to be part of the application using the frame. The MTU value is associated with the Mode (mode) and Encap Type (encapType) parameter values for a port. If you change one of these values for a port, the 5620 SAM adjusts the port MTU value to a default value. You can configure the 5620 SAM to retain the current MTU value for ports rather than revert to the default. See MTU size and port configuration in chapter 27 for more information.
May 2009
180-7
OLC State (olcState)

Reboot button (reboot)

Click on the Reboot button to initialize all cards in the chassis.
Reserved CBS% (reservedCbs)

The Reserved CBS% parameter specifies the percentage of buffer space that is reserved for committed traffic. The range is 0 to 100, or Default. The default is -1, which specifies that the pool size should be computed as a fair weight between all pools.
Resync button (triggerResync)

Click on the Resync button to:
read and synchronize the MIB tables with the 5620 SAM synchronize the network management settings with the router Shut Down button (shutDown)
Click on the Shut Down button to administratively disable an object, which can be a card slot, daughter card slot, port, or channel. A warning appears stating that shutting down the object can result in a service disruption. Click on the View Dependencies button to display the number of dependents that are associated with the object. Click on the I understand the implications of this action check box to proceed. Click on the Yes or No buttons to proceed with or cancel the shutdown. For example, before you shut down the daughter card, you must first shut down the provisioned channels and ports. When you administratively disable an object, the operational state of the object and any entities contained within the object are also disabled. The operation does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics. Objects must be shut down before they can be deleted.
Slope Policy (slope)

Click on the Select button to list and choose a slope policy. The Slope Policy parameter specifies a slope policy which defines high and low priority RED slope parameters and the time average factor.
Speed (speed)
The Speed parameter specifies the speed of the port or channel. To change the port speed on a SONET/SDH port the port must be administratively shut down and all channels must be removed, when the port speed is changed the default channel configuration is recreated. Table 180-5 lists the parameter options.
Table 180-5 Speed parameter
For SONET Ethernet TDM SONET OC3 OC12 OC48 OC192 OC 768 Ethernet 10 100 1000 10000 Auto Speed Max100 Max1000 TDM 56 kbit/s 64 kbit/s Port speed for an OC-12 MDA that carries SONET STS-1 sub-channels. The sub-channel connection termination point is a TDM DS0 that operates at 64 kb/s. Port speed for an OC-3 MDA Port speed of an OC-12 MDA. The speed can be OC-3 or OC-12. Each port can have a different speed. Port speed for an OC-48 MDA Port speed for an OC-192 MDA Port speed for an OC-768 MDA Port speed of a Fast Ethernet (100Base-T), Gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T), or 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10GBase-X) port in Mb/s. You cannot configure the speed for LAG ports. Ports in a LAG are set at 100. Max100 and Max1000 set the maximum port speed to 100Mbs and 1000 Mbs respectively. Option Line Rate Option description Port speed at the full capacity of the equipment Dependencies Cannot choose this option if the Auto-negotiate parameter is set to enabled.
Telnet Session button

Click on the Telnet Session button to open a Telnet session with the route. You can use the Telnet session to communicate directly with the managed objects.
May 2009
180-9
Time Slots (timeSlotBits)

The Time Slots parameter specifies the DS0 channel to be used for TDM channelized services. The range is TS1 to TS24. The Time Slots parameter specifies the time slots from the selected TDM port that will be assigned to the channel group. Select from the Time Slots list which time slots from the frame to include in the channel group.
Turn Up button (turnUp)

Click on the Turn Up button to administratively enable an object, which can be a card slot, daughter card slot, port, or channel. The operational state of the object and any entities contained within the object are also enabled.
View Dependencies button (getDependencyCount)

Click on the View Dependencies button to view the number of services or interfaces that are affected by the shut down of a card slot, daughter card slot, port, or channel.
180-10
May 2009
May 2009
May 2009
181.1 OSPF navigation tree parameters
181-2
May 2009
181-1
181.1

The parameters that you can configure from the OSPF navigation tree and from the OSPF icon on the network navigation tree are the same. See chapter 193 for descriptions of the parameters on the OSPF navigation tree, its child forms, and forms launched from other right-click contextual menu options.
181-2
May 2009
May 2009
May 2009
182.1 IS-IS navigation tree parameters
182-2
May 2009
182-1
182.1

The parameters that you can configure from the IS-IS navigation tree and from the IS-IS icon on the network navigation tree are the same. See chapter 191 for descriptions of the parameters on the IS-IS navigation tree, its child forms, and forms launched from other right-click contextual menu options.
182-2
May 2009
Network navigation tree parameters
183 Router parameters 184 Routing Instance parameters 185 Bridge Instance parameters 186 Interface and interface IP address parameters 187 BGP parameters 188 IGMP parameters 189 MLD parameters 190 MSDP parameters 191 IS-IS parameters 192 MPLS parameters 193 OSPF parameters 194 PIM parameters 195 RIP parameters 196 RSVP parameters 197 Static Routes parameters 198 LDP parameters
May 2009
May 2009
183.1 Router parameters
183-2
May 2009
183-1
183.1
Router parameters
The parameters that you can configure from the Router icon on the network navigation tree and from the Router icon on the equipment navigation tree are the same. See chapter 169 for descriptions of the parameters on the Router form, and the child forms launched from the contextual menu options for routers.
183-2
May 2009
184.1 Routing Instance parameters
184-2
May 2009
184-1
184.1
Routing Instance parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Routing Instance form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for routing instances.
Action (action)
Included (default) Excluded Administrative State (administrativeState)

Aggregator (aggregator)
The Aggregator parameter specifies the use of a BGP aggregator. The aggregator is the BGP router that initially aggregates the currently advertised route. The options are:
True False (default) Aggregator AS (aggregatorAS)

The Aggregator AS parameter specifies a a number identifier for the BGP aggregator. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Aggregator IP Address (aggregatorIPAddress)

The Aggregator IP Address parameter specifies a BGP aggregator IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.

184-2
May 2009
Allow Send Force Renews (allowSendForceRenews)

The Allow Send Force Renews parameter specifies whether the server is allowed to send a DHCP force renew message to DHCP clients. When the value is set to true, the server will send a force renew message to DHCP clients, when the server detects configuration changes that will affect lease configuration. The client must renew their lease to receive the new parameter. The options are:
True False (default) As Set (asSet)

The As Set parameter specifies the BGP generation of autonomous system set path information. The options are:
True False (default) Autonomous Address Creation (autonomous)

The Autonomous Address Creation parameter specifies whether the routing prefix is used for stateless auto configuration. The options are:
true (default) false Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber)

The Autonomous System parameter specifies the AS number for the device. A device can only belong to one AS. An AS number is a globally unique number with an AS. This number is used to exchange exterior routing information with neighboring ASs and as an identifier of the AS itself. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled)

The BGP Enabled parameter specifies whether BGP is enabled for the device. Table 184-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 184-1 BGP Enabled parameter
Option Enabled Option description Specifies that BGP routing is enabled on the device Dependencies The Autonomous System parameter must be set from the Routing tab button on the Routing Instance form.
Disabled (default)
Specifies that BGP routing is disabled on the device
May 2009
184-3
Broadcast

Cflowd Type
Class
Confederation Autonomous System (confederationAutonomousSystemNumber)

The Confederation Autonomous System parameter specifies a confederation ID to reduce the IBGP mesh inside an AS. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0. An AS can be logically divided into smaller groupings called subconfederations. To create this division, you can use the parameter to assign the confederation ID. Each subconfederation has fully meshed IBGP and connections to other ASs outside of the confederation.
Configured Primary Status (configPrimaryStatus)

The Configured Primary Status parameter specifies whether the IP interface is the primary interface for the VLAN. The options are:
True False (default) Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit)

The Current Hop Limit parameter specifies the hop limit value that the interface includes in router advertisement messages. The interface informs the nodes on the subnet about the hop limit when it sends IPv6 packets. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 64. A value of zero means that the interface includes no hop limit value in a router advertisement message.
Days (maxLeaseDay)
The Day parameter specifies the maximum number of days that a leased IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 10.
184-4
May 2009
Days (minLeaseDay)
The Day parameter specifies the minimum number of days that a leased IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 3650. The default is 0.
Days (days)
Lease Renew Timer Lease Rebind Timer

The Displayed Name parameter specifies the name for the created object. The range is 1 to 32.
Dot1p (dot1p)
The Dot1p parameter specifies the forwarding class-to-IEEE 802.1p mapping for 802.1Q or 802.1P encapsulated packets that egress the access interface which uses the access egress policy. When a packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the IEEE 802.1p value specified by the Dot1p parameter. The range is 0 to 7, or default. The default is default. Specifying 0 is equivalent to removing the explicit marking.
DSCP (dscp)
The DSCP parameter specifies the DiffServ Code Point value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets to a forwarding class and enqueuing priority. The mapping is applied to packets that ingress the access interface to which the access ingress policy is applied. When a packet is marked with the value specified by the DSCP parameter, the packet is mapped to the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter and the priority specified by the Priority parameter. Table 184-3 lists the parameter options.
May 2009
184-5
184 Routing Instance parameters Table 184-3 DSCP parameter

Options be (default) cp1 cp5 cp11 cp19 cp27 cp35 cp42 cp47 cp52 cp57 cp61 cs2 af11 af22 af33 ef cp2 cp6 cp13 cp21 cp29 cp37 cp43 cp49 cp53 cp58 cp62 cs3 af12 af23 af41 nc1 cp3 cp7 cp15 cp23 cp31 cp39 cp44 cp50 cp54 cp59 cp63 cs4 af13 af31 af42 nc2 cp4 cp9 cp17 cp25 cp33 cp41 cp45 cp51 cp55 cp60 cs1 cs5 af21 af32 af43
Description
Edit Routing Policies

The Edit Routing Policies button allows you to configure device routing policies.
Egress Filter ID
Enable (ldpSyncTimerEnabled)
The Enable parameter specifies whether the LDP Synchronization Timer parameter can be set. The options are:
True False (default) Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter)

The Enable Auto ACL Filters parameter specifies whether the device can automatically build anti-spoofing filter lists. The range is 0 to 2000. The default is 0.
When this parameter is set to non-zero, auto-filtering is enabled and a filter allowing only PPPoE or DHCP traffic is established on the interface. The non-zero value indicates the maximum number of entries that the auto-filter can have. These entries are created by the agent upon snooping a valid DHCP reply packet and are used to allow traffic sourced by the given DHCP-assigned IP address.
Enable Forwarding (enableForwarding)

The Enable Forwarding parameter specifies whether the forwarding of IP frames to other subnets is enabled. The options are:
True False (default) Encap Type (encapsulationType)

The Encap Type parameter specifies the encapsulation type that is allowed on the interface. The options are:
Ethernet2 (default) SNAP Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes)

The Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes parameter specifies whether to enforce a maximum number of multicast routes on an interface when you configure routing properties for a service. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) End Address (endAddress)

The End Address parameter specifies the last IP address for a range of IP addresses to be configured for a subnetwork. You must also set the Start Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Exclusive (exclusive)
The Exclusive parameter specifies whether to allow the creation of an IP address range reserved for IESs or VPLSs. This provides a mechanism to reserve one or more address ranges for services. When this parameter is enabled, the configured IP addresses and subnet masks are exclusively used for services and cannot be assigned to network ports. The options are:
May 2009
184-7

The Forwarding Class parameter specifies the forwarding class value to be used as the match criterion for mapping packets that egress the access interface which uses the policy to a queue and Dot1p value. When a packet is marked with the forwarding class specified by the Forwarding Class parameter, the packet is mapped to the queue specified by the Queue ID parameter, and the Dot1p value specified by the dot1p parameter. The options are:
h2 ef h1 nc
Free Addresses Minimum Threshold (minFree)

The Free Addresses Minimum Threshold parameter specifies the minimum number of available IP addresses for a specific subnetwork. These IP addresses can be offered to DHCP clients belonging to the subnetwork. When the value is set to 0, there is no minimum specified. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 1.
Hours (maxLeaseHour)
The Hour parameter specifies the maximum number of hours that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Hours (minLeaseHour)
The Hour parameter specifies the minimum number of hours that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 23. The default is 0.
Hours (hours)
IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled)

The IGMP Enabled parameter specifies whether IGMP is enabled for the device. Table 184-4 describes the parameter options.
184-8
May 2009
184 Routing Instance parameters Table 184-4 IGMP Enabled parameter

Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that IGMP is enabled on the device Specifies that IGMP is disabled on the device Dependencies
IGP Inhibit
See IGP Inhibit (igpInhibit) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Filter ID
Interface ID (interfaceID)
The Interface ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the interface. This parameter is not configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 5119. The default is 0.
IP Address
May 2009
184-9
IP Address Prefix (ipAddrPrefix)

The IP Address Prefix parameter specifies a matching clause to the route map. Routes are distributed if the destination network number address is permitted by the specified prefix list.
IPv6 Prefix (prefix)

The IPv6 Prefix parameter specifies the IP prefix for router advertisement messages. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 32.
IS-IS Enabled (isisEnabled)

The IS-IS Enabled parameter specifies whether IS-IS is configured for the device. The options are:

When this parameter is enabled, IS-IS routing is enabled on the device.
LDP Synchronization Timer (ldpSyncTimer)

The LDP Synchronization Timer parameter specifies a time interval (seconds) used for IGP-LDP synchronization after a failure. The timer starts when the LDP session up and running over the interface and the FEC bindings are exchanged. When the timer expires, the link cost is restored and re-advertised. IPG announces a new best hop that the LDP can use if the label binding for the neighbors FEC is available. This parameters can be set when the Enable (ldpSyncTimerEnabled) parameter is set to enabled. The range is 0 to 1800 seconds. The default is 0.
LDP Enabled (ldpEnabled)

The LDP Enabled parameter specifies whether LDP is enabled for the device. Table 184-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 184-5 LDP Enabled parameter
Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that LDP is enabled on the device Specifies that LDP is disabled on the device Dependencies The Enable MPLS parameter must be set to Enabled.
184-10
May 2009
Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the router lifetime in seconds. The range is 0 or 4 to 9000. The default is 1800. A value of zero means that the router is not to be a default router.
Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled)

The Loopback Enabled parameter specifies whether or not any ports are associated with the interface. If the Loopback Enabled parameter is selected, no ports are associated with the interface and the interface is in a loopback state. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) MAC Address

Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag)

The Managed Address Config parameter sets the managed address configuration flag. This flag indicates that DHCPv6 is available for address configuration in addition to any address that has been autoconfigured using stateless address autoconfiguration. The options are:
false (default) true Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval)

The Max Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between router advertisement messages sent on the interface. The range is 4 to 1800. The default is 600.
Mask
The Mask parameter specifies a BGP aggregate address with a network mask.
Mask Reply
Maximum Declined Addresses Stored (maxDeclined)

The Maximum Declined Addresses Stored parameter specifies the maximum number of declined IP address that can be stored. Once the maximum is reached, the oldest declined IP address is moved back to the free IP address pool. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 64.
May 2009
184-11
Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime)

The Maximum Lease Time parameter specifies how long a DHCP client can use an IP address. The minimum lease time is 10, the maximum lease time is 10 years. The default is 10 days. The Maximum Lease Time parameter values must be larger than the Minimum Lease Time parameter.You can specify how long the DHCP client can use an IP address by configuring the following parameters:
Day Hour Minute Second
Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes

The Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes parameter specifies the number of routes for path sharing. Table 184-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 184-6 Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes parameter
Option 1 (default) 0 to 16 Option description The maximum number of equal cost routes allowed on this routing table instance, expressed as a number. The default 1 means equal cost routing is not implemented. For example, setting the parameter to 2 means two equal cost routes will be used for cost sharing. Dependencies Can only be used for routes learned with the same preference and protocol.
Member AS (memberAS)
The Member AS parameter specifies the AS number of the BGP confederation member. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 0, which specifies that the parameter is not configured. You must configure the parameter to create a BGP confederation.
Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval)

The Min Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the minimum interval between router advertisement messages sent on the interface. The range is 3 to 1350. The default is 200.
Minimum Lease Time (minLeaseTime)

The Minimum Lease Time parameter specifies how long a DHCP client can use an IP address. The minimum lease time is 10 seconds, the maximum lease time is 10 years. The default is 10 minutes.
184-12
May 2009
The Minimum Lease Time parameter values must be smaller than the Maximum Lease Time parameter. You can specify how long the DHCP client can use an IP address by configuring the following parameters:
Day Hour Minutes Second
Minutes (maxLeaseMinute)
The Minute parameter specifies the maximum number of minutes that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Minutes (minLeaseMinute)
The Minute parameter specifies the minimum number of minutes that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 10.
Minutes (minutes)
Minutes (offerMinute)
The Minute parameter specifies the number of minutes the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 1.
MLD Enabled (mldEnabled)

The MLD Enabled parameter specifies whether MLD is configured for the device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) MPLS Enabled (mplsEnabled)

The MPLS Enabled parameter specifies whether MPLS is enabled for the device. The options are:
May 2009
184-13
MSDP Enabled (msdpEnabled)

The MSDP Enabled parameter specifies whether MSDP is configured for the device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) MTU (mtu)

The MTU parameter specifies the MTU size for nodes on the link. The range is 0 to 9212. The default is 1280. A value of zero means that the interface sends no MTU option information in router advertisements.
Name

Table 184-7 Netbios parameter options
Option Unspecified B P M Option Description Unspecified The DHCP server will use broadcast for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use peer to peer for name resolution and registration. The DHCP server will use a combination of broadcast and peer to peer. If broadcast cannot resolve the name, it uses peer to peer. The DHCP server will use a combination of peer to peer and broadcast. If peer to peer cannot resolve the name, it uses broadcast.
Network Policy ID
184-14
May 2009
The Number parameter is used to identify options. All other DHCP protocol options are available and can be set by entering the option number, defined in RFC 2131. The range is 1 to 254. The default is 1.
Number of Redirects

Offer Time (offerTime)

The Offer Time parameter specifies how long the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. You can configure the following parameters:
Minute Second On-Link Determination (onLink)

The On-Link Determination parameter specifies whether the routing prefix is used for on-link determination. The options are:
true (default) false Option (option)

The Option parameter specifies the information the DHCP client will receive from the DHCP server. Depending on the option, the DHCP client can receive network configuration information or information on the available services on the network. If an option is not set the DHCP client is identified by their MAC Address. The following options are available:
Custom Option Subnet Mask Default Mask
May 2009
184-15
The following options are available for IP address pools:
Custom Option DNS Server Name Netbios Name Server Lease Time Lease Renew Time Lease Rebind Time Domain Name Netbios Node Type
All other DHCP protocol options are available and can be set by entering the option number, defined in RFC 2131. If the parameter value is Custom Option, you must configure the Number and Type parameters. If the value is Subnet Mask or Default Mask, these parameters are automatically configured.


Enabled Disabled (default) Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag)

The Other Stateful Config parameter specifies whether DHCPv6lite is available for the autoconfiguration of other non-address information, such as DNS parameters or information about other servers in the network. The options are:
false (default) true PIM Enabled (pimEnabled)

The PIM Enabled parameter specifies whether PIM is enabled for the device. Table 184-8 describes the parameter options.
184-16
May 2009
184 Routing Instance parameters Table 184-8 PIM Enabled parameter

Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Specifies that PIM is enabled on the device Specifies that PIM is disabled on the device Dependencies
Physical Address
Pool Name (displayedName)

The Pool Name parameter specifies the name of the IP address pool. The pool contains IP addresses. The range is 0 to 32. There is no default.
Prefix Length
Primary
Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime)

The Reachable Time (milliseconds) parameter specifies how long, in milliseconds, this router should be considered reachable by other nodes on the link after the router receives a reachability confirmation. The range is 0 to 3 600 000. The default is 0.
Redirects
Redirects Time
Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime)

The Retransmit Time (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the frequency of neighbor solicitation messages that are sent on the interface. The range is 0 to 1 800 000. The default is 0.
May 2009
184-17

The RIP Enabled parameter specifies whether RIP is enabled on the device. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Router ID

RSVP Enabled (rsvpEnabled)

The RSVP Enabled parameter specifies that RSVP is enabled on the device. The parameter cannot be changed.
Seconds (maxLeaseSecond)
The Second parameter specifies the maximum number of seconds that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Seconds (minLeaseSecond)
The Second parameter specifies the minimum number of seconds that a leased proxy IP address is valid. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Seconds (offerSecond)
The Second parameter specifies the number of seconds the DHCP client can consider the IP address before the offer is withdrawn. The range is 0 to 59. The default is 0.
Seconds (seconds)
Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement)

The Send Advertisement parameter specifies whether the interface sends routing advertisement messages. The options are:
184-18
May 2009
Server Name (displayedName)

The Server Name parameter specifies a name for a local DHCP server instance. The range is 0 to 31 characters. There is no default.

The Source Address Termination parameter specifies whether the source address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a managed node is a user-specified IP address or the primary address of the L3 access interface (referred to on the Source Address form as Interface Index). The L3 interface must be created on the routing instance and the VPRN service for the router before the IP Address value can be set. The options are:

The Source IP Address parameter specifies the IP address used by the IP application to send unsolicited packets to a node, in dotted-decimal format for IPv4, or colon-hexidecimal format for IPv6. An IPv6 IP address is configurable when the following conditions are true:
the Source Address Termination parameter is set to IP Address the IPv6 Allowed parameter is enabled for the L3 Access Interface for the router;
see chapter 31 for information about enabling IPv6. the IPv6 Allowed parameter is enabled for the VPRN service; see chapter 48 for information about enabling IPv6.

The Source IP Application parameter specifies the application for which the source IP or interface index is specified. Table 184-9 describes the parameter options available depending on the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) value.
May 2009
184-19
184 Routing Instance parameters Table 184-9 IP Source Application Parameter

Option Telnet FTP SSH RADIUS TACACS+ SNMP Traps Syslog ICMP Ping Trace Route DNS SNTP NTP Telnet IPv6 FTP IPv6 RADIUS IPv6 TACACS+ IPv6 SNMP Traps IPv6 Syslog IPv6 ICMP Ping IPv6 Trace Route IPv6 DNSIPv6 Selectable when the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) is set to an IPv6 address. Dependencies Selectable when the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) is set to an IPv4 address.
Note Although it is configurable, the Source Address parameter on
the RADIUS or TACACS+ policy creation form is not used by Release 4.0 and later devices. You must use the Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) parameter to specify the source address of the RADIUS or TACACS+ server for a Release 4.0 or later device.

The Start Address parameter specifies the first IP address for a range of IP addresses to be configured for a subnetwork. You must also set the End Address parameter. The default is 0.0.0.0.
184-20
May 2009
Strip Label (stripLabel)

The Strip Label parameter specifies whether MPLS labels are stripped from packets that are received on the interface. The options are:

This parameter is only configurable for L3 interfaces on 7750 SR single fiber mode SONET or Ethernet network ports on an IOM 3 or IMM.
Subnet Mask
Summary Only (summaryOnly)

The Summary Only parameter specifies the advertising suppression of aggregate routes to all neighbors. The options are:
True False (default) Timeout

Trusted (isTrusted)
Trusted (default for VPRN and network IP interfaces) Non-trusted (default for IES IP interfaces)
See Remark (egressRemark) in section 98.1 for more information.
TTL Expired

May 2009
184-21
Type (optionType)
IP Address ASCII String Hex String Unreachables


Use GI Address (useGiAddress)

The Use GI Address parameter specifies whether a gateway IP address is used. When the value is set to true, the IP address is set based on an available gateway IP address. The address is offered even if authentication fails or there is no local user database configured. When the value is set to false, the IP address must be specified and included in the local database. The options are:
True False (default) Value (optionValue)

The Value parameter specifies additional values for the DHCP option. Some DHCP options have additional attributes that can be used to identify a DHCP client. For example Option 53 DHCP Message has 13 types of messages associated with the option. To further identify a DHCP server a value of 2 can be configured, so that only DHCP OFFER messages are identified. All DHCP protocol options and values are defined in RFC 2131. You can choose 0 when the Type parameter is set to Hex String. The range is 0 to 127. There is no default.
184-22
May 2009
185.1 Bridge Instance parameters
185-2
May 2009
185-1
185.1
Bridge Instance parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the bridge instance property form, the L2 network interface form, and child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for bridges.
Admin Edge (portAdminEdge)

The Admin Edge parameter specifies the administrative edge port status of a port or group of ports for the flat mode CIST. The status determines whether a port is an edge or non-edge port when the Auto Edge (portAutoEdge) parameter is disabled for the port or group of ports. When the Auto Edge (portAutoEdge) parameter is enabled for the port or group of ports, the Admin Edge parameter status is overridden. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Administrative State (lpsAdminStatus)

The Administrative State parameter enables or disables LPS on the switch port. When LPS is enabled, only devices with a source MAC address that complies with LPS restrictions are learned on the port. The options are:
Enable (default) Disable Auto Edge (portAutoEdge)

The Auto Edge parameter specifies whether the STP automatically determines the operational edge port status of a port or a group of ports for the flat mode CIST. The Admin Edge (portAdminEdge) parameter is used to determine if a port is an edge or non-edge port when the Auto Edge parameter is disabled for the port. If the Auto Edge parameter is enabled for the port, then the Admin Edge parameter status is overridden. The options are:
Disabled Enabled (default) Auto VLAN Containment (stpBridgeAutoVlanContainment)

The Auto VLAN Containment parameter specifies whether auto VLAN containment is enabled on the bridge. When the parameter is enabled, a port that has no VLANs mapped to an MSTI cannot become the root port for that instance. These ports are automatically assigned an infinite path cost value to make them an inferior choice for root port. The option are:
185-2
May 2009
Bridge Max Hops (bridgeMaxHops)

The Bridge Max Hops parameter specifies the maximum number of hops that are authorized to receive MST regional information. Use this parameter to designate how many hops a BPDU is allowed to traverse before the BPDU is discarded and related information is discarded. The range is 1 to 40. The default is 20.
CLI Name
The CLI Name parameter specifies the device/shelf/port identifier of the physical port on the 7250 SAS or Telco device. There is no default.
Connection Type (portAdminConnectionType)

The Connection Type parameter specifies the connection type for a port or a group of ports for the flat mode CIST instance or a one-per-VLAN instance. Table 185-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-1 Connection Type parameter
Option No Point-to-Point (default) Option Description Specifies the port connection type as a no point-to-point link; the port connects to multiple switches Specifies the port connection type as a point-to-point link; the port connects directly to another switch Specifies that the switch software automatically defines the connection type as point-to-point or no point-to -point Specifies that the port is at the edge of a bridged LAN, does not receive BPDUs, and has only one MAC address learned. Edge ports, however, will operationally revert to a no point-to-point or point-to-point connection type if a BPDU is received on the port. Dependencies
Point-to-Point
Auto Point-to-Point
Edge Port
Default Bridged Disposition (defaultBridgeDisposition)

The Default Bridged Disposition parameter specifies the default disposition for bridged traffic (Layer 2) that arrives at the switch and does not match any policies. Table 185-2 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
185-3
185 Bridge Instance parameters Table 185-2 Default Bridged Disposition parameter
Option Accept (default) Drop Deny Option Description The switch accepts the flow. The switch silently drops the flow. The switch drops the flow and issues an ICMP message indicating that the flow was dropped for administrative reasons. Currently, this option provides the same result as the drop option. Dependencies
Default IGMP Disposition (defaultMulticastDisposition)

The Default IGMP Disposition parameter specifies the default disposition for multicast traffic that arrives at the switch and does not match any policies. Table 185-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-3 Default IGMP Disposition parameter
Options Accept (default) Drop Deny Options Description The switch accepts the flow. The switch silently drops the flow. The switch drops the flow and issues an ICMP message indicating the flow was dropped for administrative reasons. Currently, this option provides the same result as the drop option. Dependencies
Default Routed Disposition (defaultRoutedDisposition)

The Default Routed Disposition parameter specifies the default disposition for routed traffic (Layer 3) that arrives at the switch and does not match any policies. Table 185-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-4 Default Routed Disposition parameter
Options Accept (default) Drop Deny Options Description The switch accepts the flow. The switch silently drops the flow. The switch drops the flow and issues an ICMP message indicating that the flow was dropped for administrative reasons. Currently, this option provides the same result as the drop option. Dependencies
185-4
May 2009
Default Servicing Mode (servicingMode)

The Default Servicing Mode parameter specifies the default queuing scheme for destination (egress) ports. Table 185-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-5 Default Servicing Mode parameter
Options Strict Priority (default) Options Description Specifies the strict priority queuing scheme as the default servicing mode. All eight available queues on a port are serviced strictly by priority. Specifies the WRR queuing scheme as the default servicing mode. Specifies the DRR queuing scheme as the default servicing mode. Dependencies
WRR DRR
Description
Displayed Name
Ethertype (ethertypeValue)
The Ethertype parameter specifies the 802.1Q tag for the Ethernet packet representing the VLAN ID. The default is 0x8100, which is the standard tag for 802.1Q traffic. The range is a supported hexadecimal number in the format 0x1234.
Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay)

The Forward Delay (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time that a VLAN port remains in the listening and learning states while the port is transitioning to a forwarding state. When a topology change occurs, the forward delay value is also used to age all dynamically learned MAC addresses in the MAC address forwarding table. The range is 4 to 30. The default is 15.
Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime)

The Hello Time parameter specifies the hello time of the spanning tree for a flat mode CIST instance or for a one-per-VLAN instance. This value specifies the amount of time between each transmission of a BPDU on any port that is the spanning tree root or is attempting to become the spanning tree root. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 2.
May 2009
185-5
High MAC Range (lpsHiMacRange)

The High MAC Range parameter specifies the high end of a range of authorized MAC addresses allowed on a LPS enabled port. The default is FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF.
IGMP Snooping (igmpSnoopEnable)

The IGMP Snooping parameter specifies whether the bridge checks for IGMP membership, and controls the access to multicast streams. Table 185-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-6 IGMP Snooping parameter
Option Enabled Disabled (default) Option description Allow IGMP snooping Do not allow IGMP snooping Dependencies You must set the parameter to Enabled to provide BTV services across a VLAN.
Instance BPDU Switching (insBpduSwitching)

The Instance BPDU Switching parameter enables or disables the switching of spanning tree BPDUs on the flat mode CIST instance or for an individual VLAN instance when the switch is running in the 1x1 mode. When this parameter is enabled, the BPDUs received for this instance are switched when spanning tree is disabled. When this parameter is disabled, the BPDUs received on this instance are dropped when the spanning tree is disabled. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Instance Index (id)

The Instance Index parameter specifies the spanning tree instance identification number. The range is 0 to 4095. The default is 0.
Instance Name (mstInstanceName)

The Instance Name parameter specifies an optional name for an MST instance. The parameter can contain up to 32 characters. By default, the parameter is blank.
185-6
May 2009
Jumbo Frame (jumboFrame)

The Jumbo Frame parameter specifies whether the Telco device allows Ethernet payloads in frames larger than 1500 bytes. You can configure the parameter when the Enabled parameter is enabled from the TLS tab button. Use the parameter to allow the transport of large frames for Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, where a larger MTU frame size is required. The options are:

Devices in the L2 VPN service and the VLAN must be capable of supporting larger frame sizes. All devices in the same ring must have the same parameter setting. For example, all devices can have the parameter enabled, or all of them can have it disabled. You must reboot the node for a change to the parameter to take effect.
Last-Member Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopLastMember)

The Last-Member Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, one of several parameters that determine the query packet interval values to check for leave messages from host ports. The parameter specifies the expected response time for answering a query. This sequence describes how each parameter is used to determine group membership: 1 2 3 4 5 The device receives an IGMP leave message from an user. The device queries the group, using the Query Interval (seconds) parameter and the Robustness (packets) parameter. The device waits for a response from the group, using the Last-Member Interval (seconds) parameter. When an IGMP join message is received, the device refreshes the group membership values. The device sends a general query to the group, and expects a response back using the Response Time (seconds) parameter.
The parameter is configurable when the IGMP Snooping parameter is set to Enabled. The range is 1 to 125. The default is 10.
Learning Time Window (minutes) (lpsLearningWindowTime)

The Learning Time Window (minutes) parameter specifies the amount of time to allow source learning to occur on all LPS enabled ports. This parameter applies to the entire switch; when the time limit expires, source learning of new MAC addresses is stopped on all LPS enabled ports. Only configured, authorized MAC addresses are allowed on LPS enabled ports after this timer expires. All dynamically learned MAC addresses are converted to static MAC addresses if the Status (lpsLearningWinTimeWithStaticConversion) parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 65 536. The default is 0, which means that MAC learning takes place continuously.
May 2009
185-7
Low MAC Range (lpsLoMacRange)

The Low MAC Range parameter specifies the low end of a range of authorized MAC addresses allowed on a learned port security enabled port. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
MAC Address
MAC Address (lpsL2MacAddress)

The MAC Address parameter specifies an authorized static MAC address for a port that belongs to a VLAN. The port must belong to a VLAN and have learned port security enabled on the port. There is no default.
Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge)

The Max Age (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time that spanning tree information learned from the network on any port is retained, for a flat mode CIST instance or a 1x1 mode VLAN instance. When the age of the information exceeds the maximum age, the information is discarded. The range is 6 to 40. The default is 20.
Max. Filtered MACs to Learn (lpsMaxFilteredMacNum)

The Max. Filtered MACs to Learn parameter specifies the maximum number of filtered source MAC addresses that an LPS enabled port is allowed to learn. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 5.
Max. MAC Addresses to Learn (lpsMaxMacNum)

The Max. MAC Addresses to Learn parameter specifies the maximum number of source MAC addresses that an LPS enabled port is allowed to learn. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 1.
Mode
Table 185-7 lists where to find more information about the Mode parameter.
Table 185-7 Mode Parameter
Parameter Mode for a BTV MVR Mode for a VLAN instance port See Mode (mvrMode) in this section Mode (portManualMode) in this section
185-8
May 2009
Mode (mvrMode)
The Mode parameter specifies the mode of the BTV MVR. When a resynchronization is performed on the Telco device, the options are:
Dynamic (default) Static

You can configure the parameter on a resynchronized Telco device to Dynamic, but you cannot change the parameter to Static.
Mode (portManualMode)
The Mode parameter specifies the manual (forwarding or blocking) or dynamic mode to manage the state of a port or a group of ports for the specified VLAN instance. Dynamic mode defers the management of the port state to the spanning tree algorithm. The options are:
Dynamic (default) Blocking Forwarding MVR Admin Status (mvrEnable)

The MVR Admin Status parameter specifies whether the bridge is administratively ready to be involved in BTV VLAN services. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) MVR Source Interface (mvrSource)

The MVR Source Interface parameter specifies the type of VLAN and service interworking involvement between the network port on the Telco device and the 7450 ESS. MVR source interface determines whether Telco ring device provides an connectivity to BTV VLAN services. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Path Cost

Table 185-8 lists where to find more information about the Path Cost parameter.
May 2009
185-9
185 Bridge Instance parameters Table 185-8 Path Cost parameter

Parameter Path cost for a bridge STP Path cost for a spanning tree port See Path Cost (stpBridgePathCostMode) in this section Path Cost (portPathCost) in this section
Path Cost (portPathCost)

The Path Cost parameter specifies the spanning tree path cost of a port or a group of ports for a flat mode CIST instance or a 1x1 mode VLAN instance. This value is the contribution of this port to the path cost toward the spanning tree root bridge that includes this port. The path cost is based on the number of hops from the port to the root bridge. The range is 0 to 200 000 000. The default is 0.
Path Cost (stpBridgePathCostMode)

The Path Cost parameter specifies whether the bridge path cost is automatically assigned based on the selected spanning tree protocol or a 32-bit value is assigned to all paths. Table 185-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-9 Path Cost parameter
Option Auto (default) Option Description The port path cost value is automatically set depending on which STP protocol is active (32-bit for MSTP, 16-bit for STP and RSTP). A 32-bit value is used for the port path cost value regardless of which STP protocol is active. Dependencies
32-bit
Priority
Table 185-10 lists where to find more information about the Priority parameter.
Table 185-10 Priority Parameter
Parameter Priority level for QoS Priority for an STP port Priority for a bridge See Priority (priority) in this section Priority (portPriority) in this section Priority (priority) in this section
185-10
May 2009
Priority (portPriority)
The Priority parameter specifies the spanning tree priority value for a port or a group of ports for a flat mode CIST instance or a 1x1 VLAN instance. The spanning tree algorithm uses the value to determine the most favorable port when a bridge has multiple ports with the same path cost to the root bridge. The range is 0 to 15. The default is 8.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the priority of a flat mode CIST or MSTI bridge instance. In 1x1 mode, the parameter specifies the bridge priority for an individual VLAN instance. Bridge priority determines which bridge the spanning tree algorithm designates as the root bridge. The lower the bridge priority number, the higher the priority that is associated with the bridge. If the protocol is STP or RSTP, any value in the range of 0 to 65535 is allowed. If the protocol is MSTP, the value must be a multiple of 4096. If a specified value is not a multiple of 4096, the value is replaced by the closest multiple of 4096 that is lower than the value specified. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 32768.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the QoS priority level manually for each destination MAC address per interface on the bridge. All traffic destined for a specific MAC address, per VLAN and port, can be assigned a priority level. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
Protocol (stpProtocol)
The Protocol parameter specifies the STP used for a flat mode CIST instance or for an individual VLAN instance if the switch is using the 1x1 mode. STP flat mode supports STP, RSTP, and MSTP; 1x1 mode supports STP and RSTP. The parameter must be set to MSTP in order to configure MSTI in flat mode. The options are:
STP (default) RSTP MSTP Q0 (qosConfigLowPriorityWeight)

The Q0 parameter specifies the switch global value of the desired weight for the Q0 queue when WRR or DRR is the active queuing scheme. The range is 0 to 15. The default is 1.
Q1 (qosConfigMediumPriorityWeight)
May 2009
185-11
Q2 (qosConfigHighPriorityWeight)
Q3 (qosConfigUrgentPriorityWeight)
Q4 (qosConfigQ4PriorityWeight)
QoS Status (qosEnabled)

The QoS Status parameter specifies whether global QoS is enabled on the switch. When QoS policies are configured and applied, the switch attempts to classify traffic and apply relevant policy actions. When QoS is disabled globally, traffic that arrives at the switch is not classified. The options are:
185-12
May 2009
Query Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopQuery)

The Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, one of several parameters that determine the query packet interval values for checking leave messages from host ports. The parameter specifies the interval that the device waits, after sending a specific query to a group, to determine if group members still want to receive a specific multicast IP address stream. This sequence describes how each parameter is used to determine group membership: 1 2 3 4 5 The device receives an IGMP leave message from a user. The device queries the group, using the Query Interval (seconds) parameter and the Robustness (packets) parameter. The device waits for a response from the group, using the Last-Member Interval (seconds) parameter. When an IGMP join message is received, the device refreshes the group membership values. The device sends a general query to the group, and expects a response back using the Response Time (seconds) parameter.
The parameter is configurable when the IGMP Snooping parameter is set to Enabled. The range is 11 to 32 762 s. The default is 120 s.
Query Source IP Zero (querySourceIpZero)

The Query Source IP Zero parameter specifies whether to query a source IP address of 0.0.0.0. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Query Time (seconds) (mvrQuerytime)

The Querytime (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time to wait for IGMP report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. The range is 0 to 25. The default is 10.
Region Name (regionName)

The Region Name parameter specifies the name for an MST region. This parameter is one of three attributes (region name, region revision, and a VLAN to MST instance association) that define an MST region. Switches that share the same attribute values are considered part of the same MST region. Each switch can only belong to one MST region at a time. The parameter can contain up to 32 characters. By default, the parameter is blank.
May 2009
185-13
Region Revision (regionRevision)

The Region Revision parameter specifies the revision level of an MST region. This parameter is one of three attributes (region name, region revision, and a VLAN to MST instance association) that define an MST region. Switches that share the same attribute values are considered part of the same MST region. Each switch can only belong to one MST region at a time. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0.
Response Time (seconds) (igmpSnoopResponse)

The Response Time (seconds) parameter specifies one of several parameters that determine the query packet interval values to check for leave messages from host ports. The parameter specifies the expected response time for answering a general query. This sequence describes how each parameter is used to determine group membership: 1 2 3 4 5 The device receives an IGMP leave message from an user. The device queries the group, using the Query Interval (seconds) parameter and the Robustness (packets) parameter. The device waits for a response from the group, using the Last-Member Interval (seconds) parameter. When an IGMP join message is received, the device refreshes the group membership values. The device sends a general query to the group, and expects a response back using the Response Time (seconds) parameter.
The parameter is configurable when the IGMP Snooping parameter is set to Enabled. The range is 1 to 125 s. The default is 10 s.
Restricted Role (portRestrictedRole)

The Restricted Role parameter specifies whether the restricted role status for a port or a group of ports for the flat mode CIST is enabled. When this parameter is enabled, the port cannot become the root port, even if it is the best candidate. After a root port is selected, the restricted port is selected as an alternate port. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Restricted TCN (portRestrictedTcn)

The Restricted TCN parameter specifies the topology change notification status for a port or an aggregate of ports for the flat mode CIST. When this parameter is enabled, the port will not propagate topology changes and notifications to or from other ports. It is used to prevent bridges outside of a core network from causing flushes within the core network. The options are:
185-14
May 2009
Robustness (packets) (igmpSnoopRobustness)

The Robustness (packets) parameter specifies, in packets, one of several values that determine the query packet interval for checking for leave messages from host ports. The parameter specifies the number of specific query packets sent by the device. This sequence describes how each parameter is used to determine group membership: 1 2 3 4 5 The device receives an IGMP leave message from an user. The device queries the group, using the Query Interval (seconds) parameter and the Robustness (packets) parameter. The device waits for a response from the group, using the Last-Member Interval (seconds) parameter. When an IGMP join message is received, the device refreshes the group membership values. The device sends a general query to the group, and expects a response back using the Response Time (seconds) parameter.
The parameter is configurable when the IGMP Snooping parameter is set to Enabled. The range 2 to 524. The default is 2.
Status (lpsLearningWinTimeWithStaticConversion)
The Status parameter specifies whether the conversion of dynamic MAC addresses to static MAC addresses on an LPS enabled port is enabled. When this parameter is enabled and the Learning Time Window (minutes) (lpsLearningWindowTime) parameter timer has expired, all dynamic MAC addresses are converted to static MAC addresses. This stops the MAC addresses from aging out. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) STP Mode (stpBridgeMode)

The STP Mode parameter specifies the mode of the STP that is activated on the bridge instance. The flat mode applies a single spanning tree instance across all VLAN port connections. Flat mode supports the use of STP (802.1D), RSTP (802.1w), and MSTP. The 1x1 mode provides a separate spanning tree instance for each VLAN that is configured on the switch. The 1x1 mode supports STP and RSTP. The options are:
Flat 1x1(default)
May 2009
185-15
Super VLAN Uplink Interface (superVlanUplink)

The Super VLAN Uplink Interface parameter specifies the type of VLAN and service interworking involvement between the network port on the Telco device and the 7450 ESS. Super VLAN uplink interface determines whether the Telco ring device provides an uplink to Super VLAN services. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) TLS Admin Status (tlsEnabled)

The TLS Admin Status parameter specifies whether the bridge is administratively ready to be used in TLS L2 VPN services. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) TLS Mode (tlsMode)

The TLS Mode parameter enables legacy or Ethernet service mode. If you change the mode to Ethernet Service when legacy SVLANs are configured on the switch, a deployment error occurs. Remove the legacy SVLANs using the CLI before you change the mode. The options are:
Legacy (default) Ethernet Service TLS Uplink Interface (tlsUplink)

The TLS Uplink Interface parameter specifies the type of VLAN and service interworking involvement between the network port on the Telco device and the 7450 ESS. TLS uplink interface determines whether the Telco ring device provides an uplink to L2 VPN services. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Trap Threshold (lpsLearnTrapThreshold)

The Trap Threshold parameter specifies the number of bridged MAC addresses to learn before sending a trap. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 5.
185-16
May 2009
Trust Ports (trustPorts)

The Trust Ports parameter specifies whether the global trust mode for QoS ports is enabled. Trusted ports can accept 802.1p and ToS/DSCP values in incoming packets; untrusted ports set any 802.1p or ToS/DSCP values to zero in incoming packets, unless a default 802.1p or ToS/DSCP value is configured. By default, 802.1Q-tagged ports and mobile ports are trusted; any other port is untrusted. The options are:
No (default) Yes TX Hold Count (insBridgeTxHoldCount)

The TX Hold Count parameter specifies the number of PDUs that can be transmitted per port per second for this instance. The range is 1 to 10. The default value is 6.
Upper Ring Adjacency (adjacentToUpperRing)

The Upper Ring Adjacency parameter specifies the type of VLAN and service interworking involvement between the network port on the Telco device and the 7450 ESS. Upper ring adjacency determines that the interface in the Telco device is directly connected with the 7450 ESS that is the start and end of the ring. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Violation (lpsViolationOption)

The Violation parameter specifies the method to handle traffic that does not comply with LPS restrictions. Table 185-11 describes the parameter options.
Table 185-11 Violation parameter
Option Restrict Disabled Description Filters (blocks) unauthorized traffic, but allows traffic that complies with LPS restrictions to be forwarded on the port Disable the port when the port receives unauthorized traffic; traffic is not allowed on the port
VLAN ID (switchingInstanceId)
The VLAN ID parameter specifies the VLAN to which the bridge belongs. The VLAN ID is used to identify devices in the ring that receive multicast BTV channels, as identified in the Multicast Groups tab. There can be one MVR VLAN ID for each ring. The same VLAN ID can be used by multiple rings. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is 1. The supported ID range for 7250 SAS is 2 to 4092.
May 2009
185-17
185-18
May 2009
186.1 Interface and interface IP address parameters
186-2
May 2009
186-1
186.1
Interface and interface IP address parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Interface and interface IP address forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for Interfaces and interface IP addresses.

Up Down (default) Allow Directed Broadcasts

Broadcast

Cflowd Type
Class
Description

186-2
May 2009
Egress Filter ID
Enable Local Proxy (localProxy)

The Enable Local Proxy parameter specifies whether local proxy neighbor discovery can be used on the interface. Proxy neighbor discovery allows an interface, such as a network interface, to respond to neighbor discovery queries that are intended for another interface. The options are:
true false (default) Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal)

The Enable Local Proxy ARP parameter specifies whether local proxy ARP can be used on the device. Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests that are intended for another device. This allows a device to reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device. The options are:
true false (default) IGP Inhibit

See IGP Inhibit in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Ingress Filter ID
Interface ID (id)
The Interface ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the routing instance interface. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 0 to 5119. The default is 0.
IP Address
Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time in seconds that a router advertisement prefix remains preferred. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 604 800. The 4 294 967 295 value represents infinity. A preferred lifetime must not be longer than a valid lifetime. See the Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) parameter in this section for more information.
Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime)

The Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the length of time in seconds that a router advertisement prefix remains valid. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 25 920 000. The 4 294 967 295 value represents infinity. A valid lifetime must be longer than a preferred lifetime. See the Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) parameter in this section for more information.
MAC Address
Mask Reply
Multiplier (bfdMultiplier)
Name
Network Policy ID
No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry)
The No Expiry parameter sets the preferred lifetime of a router advertisement prefix to infinity, which is represented by the 4 294 967 295 value. See the Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) parameter in this section for more information. The options are:
true false (default) No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry)

The No Expiry parameter sets the valid lifetime of a router advertisement prefix to infinity, which is represented by the 4 294 967 295 value. See the Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) parameter in this section for more information. The options are:

Number of Redirects

Physical Address
Policy 1
Policy 2
Policy 3
Policy 4
Policy 5
Port (port)
The Port parameter specifies the underlying physical port that is associated with the interface. The physical port name is used to create the association. A physical port name is based on the slot, daughter card slot, and port number, for example, 1/1/11 specifies slot 1, daughter card slot 1, and port 11.
Primary
May 2009
186-5
Proxy Arp Policy 1 (proxyArpPolicy1)

The Proxy Arp Policy parameter specifies the name of the proxy ARP policy to use for this device. Enter an appropriate name for the proxy ARP policy. The proxy ARP policies are applied in order, from 1 to 5. Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests intended for another device. This allows a device reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device.

See Proxy Arp Policy 1 (proxyArpPolicy1) in this section for the parameter description.




Redirects

186-6
May 2009
Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp)

The Remote Proxy ARP parameter specifies whether proxy ARP can be used on the device. Proxy ARP allows a device, such as a router, to answer ARP requests that are intended for another device. This allows a device to reach a remote subnet without configuring routes to the subnet or a default gateway device. The options are:

When the Remote Proxy ARP parameter is set to true, you can configure a proxy ARP policy to specify the type of ARP management that is allowed on the device.
Router ID
Routing Instance ID
Subnet Mask

Timeout
TTL Expired

Unnumbered Reference (referenceType)

The Unnumbered Reference parameter specifies a text string to describe the reference to the unnumbered interface. The range is 1 to 32 characters.
May 2009
186-7
Unnumbered Type (unnumberedReferenceType)

The Unnumbered Type parameter specifies the type of unnumbered interface to use when the Class parameter is set to Unnumbered. Table 186-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 186-1 Unnumbered Type parameter
Option System (default) Option description Specifies the use of the system IP address Dependencies The Class parameter is set to Unnumbered. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that you use the System option because the system IP address is not associated with an interface and is therefore always reachable. IP address Name Specifies the use of another IP address Specifies the use of a name The Class parameter is set to Unnumbered.
Unreachables

View the newly created Network Interface

The View the newly created Network Interface parameter specifies whether the properties form for the interface is displayed when the current configuration form is closed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) What type of interface would you like to create?
The What type of interface would you like to create? parameter specifies the type of network interface that you are creating. The options are:
MPLS (default) OSPFv2 OSPFv3 RIP ISIS LDP
186-8
May 2009
187 BGP parameters
187.1 BGP parameters
187-2
May 2009
187-1
187 BGP parameters
187.1
BGP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the BGP forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for BGP.
Advertise Inactive Routes (advertiseInactiveRts)

The Advertise Inactive Routes parameter specifies whether the BGP instance advertises inactive BGP routes to the BGP peers. The options are:
True False (default) Advertise Label (advertiseLabel)

The Advertise Label parameter specifies the advertisement label address family to support the exchange of IPv6 address prefix types. IPv4 active neighbors cannot exist in the same peer group as active IPv6 neighbors. Enabling this parameter creates an IPv6 peer group and allows neighbors to exchange IPv6 prefixes. This keyword can be specified only for an IPv6 peer. The options are:
Enabled Disabled
The parameter is available on the VPN tab of a Peer (Create) form for a 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later.
Aggregator ID Zero (aggregatorIdZero)

The Aggregator ID Zero parameter specifies whether to set the router ID in the BGP aggregator path attribute to 0 when BGP aggregates routes. This prevents different devices within the AS from creating aggregate routes that contain different AS paths. The BGP aggregator path attribute is internal to the BGP protocol and is not configurable. Table 187-1 describes the parameter options.
187-2
May 2009
187 BGP parameters Table 187-1 Aggregator ID Zero parameter

Option false (default) Option description BGP adds the AS number and the router ID to the aggregator path. This prevents different routers within an AS from creating aggregate routes that contain different AS paths. When BGP aggregates routes, it adds the aggregator path attribute to the BGP update messages. true The aggregator path is set to 0 when BGP aggregates routes, rather than using the AS number and the router ID. Dependencies
Apply Export Route Policies (vpnApplyExport)

The Apply Export Route Policies parameter specifies whether to use export route policies. Export route policies are used to determine which routes are advertised to peers. Table 187-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-2 Apply Export Route Policies parameter
Option true Option description Export policies are used based on the order of policies configured for the Policy 1 to Policy 5 parameters. When no export policies are specified, the default export policy is used. false (default) Export policies are not used. Dependencies
Apply Import Route Policies (vpnApplyImport)

The Apply Import Route Policies parameter specifies whether to use import route policies. Import route policies are used to determine which routes are accepted from peers. Table 187-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-3 Apply Import Route Policies parameter
Option true Option description Import policies are used based on the order of policies configured for the Policy 1 to Policy 5 parameters. When no import policies are specified, the default import policy is used. false (default) Import policies are not used. Dependencies
May 2009
187-3
187 BGP parameters
AS Override (overrideAS)
The AS Override parameter specifies whether the network provider AS number that is configured for a BGP group in a VPRN overrides the customer AS number for the group. When the parameter is set to true for an egress eBGP session, the customer AS number is overwritten with the network provider AS number before the route is advertised to the other VPRN sites. The override behavior is required when BGP is the PE-CE protocol and some of the CE sites are in the same AS; normally, BGP loop detection does not permit two sites in the same AS to reach each other directly.
true false (default) AS Path Ignore (pathIgnore)

The AS Path Ignore parameter specifies whether the AS path is used to determine the optimum BGP route. Table 187-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-4 AS Path Ignore parameter
Option false (default) true Option description Ignore the AS path to determine the best BGP route. Use the AS paths of incoming routes in the BGP route selection process. Dependencies
Cluster ID (clusterId)
The Cluster ID parameter specifies the cluster ID for a route reflector server. Route reflector servers are used to reduce the number of IBGP sessions within an AS. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. When the parameter is set to 0.0.0.0, BGP assigns no cluster ID. Each route reflector server must be assigned a cluster ID and must specify which neighbors are clients and which are not clients to determine which neighbors should receive reflected routes and which should be treated as a standard IBGP peer.
Connect Retry Time (seconds) (connectRetryTime)

The Connect Retry Time (seconds) parameter specifies the BGP connect retry timer value in seconds. When the timer expires, the BGP tries to reconnect to the configured peer. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 120.
Damping (damping)
The Damping parameter specifies whether to prevent BGP systems from sending excessive route changes to BGP peers for learned routes. Damping can reduce the number of update messages that are sent between BGP peers and the load on peers without adversely affecting the route convergence time for stable routes. Table 187-5 describes the parameter options.
187 BGP parameters Table 187-5 Damping parameter

Option false (default) true Option description Disable route damping. Enable route damping. Dependencies When the parameter is set to true, and a route policy does not specify a damping profile, the default damping profile is used. You cannot configure the default damping profile, which has the following attributes:
half life of 15 min maximum suppression time of 60 min suppression threshold of 3000 reuse threshold of 750
Description
Disable Client Reflect (disableClientReflect)

The Disable Client Reflect parameter specifies whether to enable the reflection of routes by the route reflector to the clients in a specific group or neighbor. This parameter only disables the reflection of routes from other client peers. Routes learned from non-client peers are still reflected to all clients. Table 187-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-6 Disable Client Reflect parameter
Option false (default) true Option description Enable the reflection of routes to all client peers in the specific group or neighbor. Disable the reflection of routes. Dependencies
Disable Extended Communities (disableExtComms)

The Disable Extended Communities parameter specifies whether to send information about the BGP community to BGP neighbors directly, rather than using routing policy statements. Table 187-7 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
187-5
187 BGP parameters Table 187-7 Disable Extended Communities parameter

Option true Option description Do not send BGP community information to an associated peer. No BGP community information is advertised to local BGP peers. Send BGP community information to an associated peer and override the community information associated with this route as specified in a routing policy statement. Dependencies
false (default)
Disable Fast External Failover (fastExtFailover)

The Disable Fast External Failover parameter specifies whether the device should stop an EBGP session once an interface goes down or whether the EBGP session should remain up until the appropriate hold time values are reached. Table 187-8 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-8 Disable Fast External Failover parameter
Option true false (default) Option description The EBGP session stops once an interface goes down. The EBGP session remains up until the appropriate hold time values are reached. When the BGP routes become unavailable because the interface is down, BGP withdraws the unavailable route information from peers. Dependencies
Disable Standard Communities (disableComms)

The Disable Standard Communities parameter specifies whether to send information about the BGP community to BGP standard neighbors directly, rather than using routing policy statements. Table 187-9 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-9 Disable Standard Communities parameter
Option true Option description Do not send BGP community information to an associated BGP standard peer. No BGP community information is advertised to BGP standard peers. Send BGP community information to an associated BGP standard peer and override the community information associated with this route as specified in a routing policy statement. Dependencies
false (default)
Disallow IGP
See Disallow IGP (disallowIgp) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
187 BGP parameters
Enable Inter AS VPRN (enableInterAsVprn)

The Enable Inter AS VPRN parameter specifies whether the ASBR advertises VPRN routes to peers in other ASs to redistribute the unicast and multicast routes learned by BGP into MP-BGP routes, and the MP-BGP routes into BGP routes. The options are:
true false (default) Enable Peer Tracking (enabledPeerTracking)

The Enable Peer Tracking parameter specifies whether the BGP instance tracks BGP peers. BGP peer tracking allows faster BGP route convergence. The parameter is configurable on the 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later. The options are:
true false (default) Enable Rapid Withdrawal (enableRapidWithdrawal)

The Enable Rapid Withdrawal parameter specifies whether there is a delay before sending BGP withdrawal messages to BGP peers. When the value is enabled, there is no delay before sending BGP withdrawal messages. Withdrawal messages are sent immediately. When the value is disabled, BGP withdrawal messages may be delayed up to the minimum route advertisement delay. This delay allows for BGP updates to be efficiently packed to reduce BGP processing load. For voice applications, or applications that are sensitive to delays, you should allow Enable Rapid Withdrawal to ensure quality of service levels. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Graceful Restart

See Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart)in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Hold Time (seconds) (holdTime)

The Hold Time (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum time that the BGP waits between successive keep-alive or update messages from its peer before closing the connection. The range is 0 or 3 to 65 535. The default is 90. When the Hold Time (seconds) parameter value is less than the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter, the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter should be set to one-third of the Hold Time (seconds) parameter value. When the Hold Time (seconds) parameter is set to 0, the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter must be set to 0. This indicates that the connection with the peer is permanently up and no keep-alive packets are sent to the peer.
May 2009
187-7
187 BGP parameters
IBGP MultiPath (ibgpMultipath)

The IBGP MultiPath parameter specifies whether to allow IBGP multipath load balancing when BGP routes are added to the route table and the route that resolves the BGP next hop offers multiple next hops. Table 187-10 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-10 IBGP MultiPath parameter
Option false (default) true Option description Do not allow IBGP multipath load sharing. Allow IBGP multipath load sharing. Dependencies
Inherit Value
See Inherit Value in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Keep Alive (seconds) (keepAlive)

The Keep Alive (seconds) parameter specifies the BGP keep-alive time. A keep-alive message is sent every time this timer expires. The range is 0 to 21 845. The default is 30. The Keep Alive (seconds) parameter setting should be one-third of the Hold Time parameter interval setting. When the Hold Time (seconds) parameter is less than the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter, the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter should be set to one-third of the Hold Time (seconds) parameter value. When the Hold Time (seconds) parameter is set to 0, the Keep Alive (seconds) parameter must be set to 0. This indicates that the connection with the peer is permanently up and no keep alive packets are sent to the peer.
Key
See Key (key) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Local Address (localAddress)

The Local Address parameter specifies the local IP address that is used by the BGP group or neighbor to communicate with BGP peers. Outgoing connections use the parameter as the source of the TCP connection when they initiate connections with a peer. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. Specify a DNS address in the form of a string. When no value for the parameter is specified, the device uses the system IP address to communicate with IBGP peers and the interface address to communicate with directly connected EBGP peers.
187-8
May 2009
187 BGP parameters
Local AS (localAS)
The Local AS parameter specifies a local, sometimes called a virtual, AS number. The local AS number is added to AS path messages before the AS number of the device to make the local AS the second AS in the AS path. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0, which means that no AS value is specified. When you change the Local AS parameter at the BGP global level in an active BGP instance, the BGP instance restarts with the new local AS number. This causes BGP to re-establish the peer relationships with all peers in the group with the same new local AS number. When you change the local AS number at the neighbor level in an active BGP instance, the BGP re-establishes the peer relationship with the new local AS number.
Local AS Private (localASPrivate)

The Local AS Private parameter specifies whether the Local AS parameter number is displayed in paths that are learned from the peering. Table 187-11 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-11 Local AS Private parameter
Option false (default) true Option description The local AS parameter value is not private. The Local AS parameter value is private, and cannot be determined from paths learned from peering. Dependencies
Local Preference (localPreference)

The Local Preference parameter specifies the BGP local preference for incoming routes, when not otherwise specified. This value is used if the BGP route arrives from a BGP peer without the Preference (preference) parameter set. The parameter is overridden by any value set using a route policy. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 100.
Loop Detect (loopDetect)

The Loop Detect parameter specifies how the BGP peer session handles loop detection in the AS path. Table 187-12 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
187-9
187 BGP parameters Table 187-12 Loop Detect parameter

Option drop ignore (default) off Discard Route Option description Sends a notification to the remote peer to drop the session Ignores routes with loops in the AS path but maintains peering Disables loop detection Removes the route from the BGP routing table Dependencies
MED Compare (medCompare)

The MED Compare parameter specifies how the MED AS path setting is used in the BGP route selection process. The MED setting is always used in the route selection process regardless of the peer AS that advertised the route. This parameter specifies the MED value that is inserted in the RIB-IN. Table 187-13 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-13 MED Compare parameter
Option off (default) zero Option description Compare MEDs of routes that have the same peer AS. For routes learned without a MED setting, use 0 in the MED comparison. The routes with the lowest metric are the most preferred routes. For routes learned without a MED setting, use a value of infinity (2^32-1) in the MED comparison. This makes infinity routes the least preferred routes. Dependencies When a route has no MED setting, the route is assigned the infinity value, to make the route the least preferable route.
infinity
MED Source (medSource)

The MED Source parameter specifies whether to enable advertising the MED and, if so, specifies the method of the MED advertising used. Table 187-14 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-14 MED Source parameter
Option IGP Cost Metric Value None (default) Option description The MED is set to the IGP cost of the IP prefix. The MED setting is expressed as a decimal integer using the MED Value parameter. The MED is not advertised. Dependencies
187-10
May 2009
187 BGP parameters
MED Value (medValue)

The MED Value parameter specifies the MED path setting or MED value for a peer. The parameter is configurable when the MED Source parameter is set to Metric Value. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Min AS Origination (seconds) (minASOrigination)

The Min AS Origination (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the minimum interval in which an AS path setting that is originated by the local device can be advertised to a peer. The range is 2 to 255. The default is 15.
Min. Route Advertisement (minRouteAdvertisement)

The Min. Route Advertisement parameter specifies the minimum interval, in seconds, at which a path parameter can be advertised to a peer. The range is 2 to 255. The default is 30.
Minimum TTL Value

See Minimum TTL Value (minTTLValue) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Multi Hop (multiHop)

The Multi Hop parameter specifies the TTL value entered in the IP header of packets sent to an EBGP peer multiple hops away. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
Multi Path (multiPath)

The Multi Path parameter specifies the number of equal cost routes to use for multipath routing. This allows BGP load sharing of traffic across multiple links. The range is 1 to 16. The default is 1, which means that BGP load sharing is disabled. When the number of equal cost routes that are available is greater than the parameter, routes with the lowest next hop IP address value are chosen. When the parameter is set to 1 and multiple equal cost routes are available, the route with the lowest next hop IP address is used.
Name (siteName)
Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf)

The Next Hop Self parameter specifies whether the group or neighbor should always set the next hop AS path setting to its physical interface when advertising to an eBGP peer. Table 187-15 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
187-11
187 BGP parameters Table 187-15 Next Hop Self parameter

Option false (default) true Option description Third-party route advertisements are allowed. Third-party route advertisements are not allowed. Use the true option to avoid third-party route advertisements when the device is connected to a multi-access network. Dependencies
Passive (passive)
The Passive parameter specifies whether passive mode is enabled or disabled for BGP. Table 187-16 describes the parameter options.
Table 187-16 Passive parameter
Option false (default) true Option description BGP actively tries to connect to all the configured peers. BGP is in passive mode. BGP does not attempt to actively connect to the configured BGP peers but responds only when it receives a connect open request from the peer. Dependencies
Peer Address (peerAddress)

The Peer Address parameter specifies the IP address of the far-end peer. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format, or an IPv6z address in colon-hexadecimal format with a zone index. Specify a DNS address in the form of a string. The default is 0.0.0.0, which specifies that the address has not been configured.
Peer AS (peerAS)
The Peer AS parameter specifies a virtual, also known as a local, AS number for the remote peer. The parameter must be configured for each configured peer. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 0, which specifies that the parameter is not set. For eBGP peers, the value must not be the same as the AS number configured for this device at the global level, because the peer is in a different AS. For IBGP peers, the value must be the same as the AS number of this device at the global level.
Peer Type (peerType)

The Peer Type parameter specifies the type of BGP peer. Table 187-17 describes the parameter options.
187-12
May 2009
187 BGP parameters Table 187-17 Peer Type parameter

Option None (default) Internal External Option description The type of neighbor is determined from the local AS. The peer is an IBGP peer. The peer is an EBGP peer. Dependencies For connections to devices in internal systems For connections to devices in external systems
Policy 1 (inheritanceMask)
Preference
See Preference (preference) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Prefix Limit (prefixLimit)

The Prefix Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of routes that the BGP can learn from a peer. When the number of routes reaches 90% of this limit, an SNMP trap is sent from the device to indicate that the threshold limit has almost been reached. If the parameter value is exceeded, BGP peering is dropped and disabled, another SNMP trap is sent to indicate that the threshold limit has been reached. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Remove Private AS (removePrivateAS)

The Remove Private AS parameter specifies whether private AS numbers are removed from the AS path before the path is advertised to BGP peers. Table 187-18 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
187-13
187 BGP parameters Table 187-18 Remove Private AS parameter

Option false (default) true Option description The private AS number is advertised to peers. The private AS number is not advertised to peers. Dependencies The following AS numbers are considered private: 64512 to 65535.
Router ID
Stale Routes Time (seconds) (staleRoutesTime)

The Stale Routes Time parameter specifies the maximum time, in seconds, that stale routes will be maintained after a graceful restart is started. You can configure the parameter when the Graceful Restart parameter is set to true. The range is 1 to 3600. The default is 360.
Type
See Type (authenticationType) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
187-14
May 2009
188 IGMP parameters
188.1 IGMP parameters
188-2
May 2009
188-1
188 IGMP parameters
188.1
IGMP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the IGMP forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for IGMP.
Administrative Version (adminVersion)

The Administrative Version parameter specifies the configured version of IGMP on this IGMP interface. For IGMP to function correctly, all routers on a LAN must be configured to run the same version of IGMP. The options are:
Version 1 Version 2 Version 3 (default) Configured Source (configSrcAddr)

The Configured Source parameter specifies a source address for the group range. When a report is received in the range specified by the Start Mcast Address parameter and the End Mcast Address parameter, it is translated to a report with the value of this parameter as the source address. The range is an IP address from 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Configured Source Type (srcAddrType)

The Configured Source Type parameter specifies the IP protocol type for the multicast address of the group range. The value is set to IPv4 and cannot be changed.
Constraint Admin State (mCacConstAdminState)

The Constraint Admin State parameter specifies the administrative state of the multicast CAC policy's constraints. The options are:
Up (default) Down Description

188-2
May 2009
188 IGMP parameters
End Mcast Address (toGrpAddr)

The End Mcast Address parameter specifies the end of the group range. The value of this parameter must be greater than or equal to the value of the Start Mcast Address parameter. The range is an IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 239.255.255.255.
End Mcast Address Type (toGrpAddrType)

The End Mcast Address Type parameter specifies the IP protocol type for the multicast address of the end of the group range. The value is set to IPv4 and cannot be changed.

The Import Policy parameter specifies the routing policy applied to this IGMP interface. Specify a policy name that is no more than 32 characters long, or click on the Select button to choose a policy.
Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl)

The Last Member Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. Tune this value to modify the leave latency of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group. The range is 1 to 1024. The default is 1.
Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl)

The Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) parameter specifies the IGMP last member query interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. The IGMP last member query interval refers to the amount of time to reply to an IGMP query message that is sent in response to a leave group message. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 10.
Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps)

See Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Maximum Number of Groups (maxGroups)

The Maximum Number of Groups parameter specifies the maximum number of groups for which IGMP can have local receiver information based on received IGMP reports on the interface. The range is 0 to 16 000. The default is 0.
May 2009
188-3
188 IGMP parameters
Protocol Version (igmpVersion)

The Protocol Version parameter specifies the default version of the IGMP on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. The options are:
Version 1 Version 2 (default) Version 3 Proxying (igmpProxying)

The Proxying parameter specifies whether IGMP proxying is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP proxying refers to the processing of membership information on behalf of client systems and the reporting of the membership on their behalf. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Querier Forwarding (igmpQuerierForwarding)

The Querier Forwarding parameter specifies whether IGMP querier forwarding is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP querier forwarding refers to the promotion of detected IGMP queriers to receive all IP multicast data traffic. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval)

The Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the time period between IGMP query messages. Table 188-1 lists the default and range values for the parameter.
Table 188-1 Query Interval (seconds) parameter
Object OmniSwitch system or VLAN Other Default 125 125 Range 1 to 65 535 2 to 1024
Query Response Interval (seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl)

The Query Response Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum query response time, which is advertised in IGMPv2 queries. The range is 1 to 1023. The default is 10.
188-4
May 2009
188 IGMP parameters
Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl)

The Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) parameter specifies the IGMP query response interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. The query response interval refers to the amount of time to reply to an IGMP query message. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 100.
Querying (igmpQuerying)
The Querying parameter specifies whether IGMP querying is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or specified VLAN. IGMP querying refers to the requesting of the network's IGMP group membership information by sending IGMP queries. IGMP querying also involves participation in IGMP querier elections. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Robust Count (genRobustCount)

The Robust Count parameter sets the IGMP robustness variable on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. The robustness variable allows you to fine-tune a network that is expected to have high packet loss. The range is 1 to 7. The default is 2.
Robust Count (robustCount)

The Robust Count parameter allows you to tune for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to have high packet loss, you can increase the parameter value. The range is 2 to 10. The default is 2.
Router Timeout (seconds) (igmpRouterTimeout)

The Router Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the expiry time of IP multicast routers on the specified VLAN or on the system if no VLAN is specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to configure the parameter on the system or the specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 90.
Source Timeout (seconds) (igmpSourceTimeout)

The Source Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the expiry time of IP multicast sources on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IP multicast switching and routing must be enabled to set the parameter on the system or specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 30.
188 IGMP parameters
Spoofing (igmpSpoofing)
The Spoofing parameter specifies whether IGMP spoofing is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP spoofing refers to the replacing of a client MAC and IP address with the system MAC and IP address when proxying aggregated IGMP group membership information. The options are:
Disable (default) Enable Start Mcast Address (frGrpAddr)

The Start Mcast Address parameter specifies the start of the SSM group range. The range is an IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 224.0.1.0
Start Mcast Address Type (frGrpAddrType)

The Start Mcast Address Type parameter specifies the IP protocol type for the multicast address of the start of the SSM group range. The value is set to IPv4 and cannot be changed.
Static Multicast Group (staticGrp)

The Static Multicast Group parameter specifies the IP multicast group address. The range is an IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 224.0.1.0.
Static Source (staticSrcGrp)

The Static Source parameter specifies the IP address for the source sending multicast traffic to the group. The range is an IP address from 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Subnet Check (subnetCheck)

The Subnet Check parameter specifies whether to check for subnets on IGMP messages received on the interface. The options are:

When enabled, any IGMP packets that do not have a source address in the local subnet are dropped.
Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps)

See Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
188-6
May 2009
188 IGMP parameters
Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) (igmpUnsolicitedReportInterval)

The Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) parameter sets the value of the IGMP unsolicited report interval on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. The unsolicited report interval refers to the amount of time to proxy any changed IGMP membership state. The range is 1 to 65 635. The default is 1.
Zapping (igmpZapping)
The Zapping parameter specifies whether IGMP zapping is enabled on the specified VLAN or on the system when a VLAN is not specified. IGMP zapping refers to the processing of membership and source filter removals immediately without waiting for the protocol specified time period. This mode facilitates IP TV applications that need to change quickly between IP multicast groups. The options are:
May 2009
188-7
188 IGMP parameters
188-8
May 2009
189 MLD parameters
189.1 MLD parameters
189-2
May 2009
189-1
189 MLD parameters
189.1
MLD parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the MLD forms and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for MLD.
Configured Source (configSrcAddr)

The Configured Source parameter is used when static SSM translation is created for an MLD routing instance. The parameter specifies a unicast IPv6 address for the group source, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and d ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
End Multicast Address (toGrpAddr)

The End Multicast Address parameter is used when static SSM translation is created for an MLD routing instance. The parameter specifies an end multicast IPv6 address for the group range, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Group Address (groupAddress)

The Group Address parameter is used when a static multicast group is created for an MLD interface. The parameter specifies a multicast IPv6 address for the group, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and d ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Group Address One (groupAddress1)

The Group Address One parameter is used when static SSM translation is created for an MLD interface. The parameter specifies a start multicast IPv6 address for the group range, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Group Address Two (groupAddress2)

The Group Address Two parameter is used when static SSM translation is created for an MLD interface. The parameter specifies an end multicast IPv6 address for the group range, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
Group Source Address (groupSourceAddress)

The Group Source Address parameter is used when a static multicast group source is created for an MLD interface. The parameter specifies a unicast IPv6 address for the group source, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and d ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
189-2
May 2009
189 MLD parameters

The Import Policy parameter specifies the routing policy statement applied to an MLD interface. Specify a policy name between 0 to 32 characters long, or click on the Select button to choose a policy.
Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (lastMemberQueryInterval)

The Last Member Query Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of time to reply to an MLD query message that is sent in response to a leave group message. Use this value to modify the leave latency for an MLD routing instance. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group. The range is 0, or 1 to 1023. The default value of 0 indicates that an interval is not configured.
Maximum Number of Groups (maxGroups)

The Maximum Number of Groups parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast groups for which an MLD interface can have local receiver information based on received MLD reports on the interface. The range is 0, or 1 to 16 000. The default value of 0 indicates that a maximum value is not configured.
Maximum Response Time between Group Messages (seconds) (lastMembQueryIntvl)

The Maximum Response Time between Group Messages (seconds) parameter specifies a maximum response time for answering leave group messages, at an MLD interface level. The range is 0, or 1 to 1023. The default value of 0 indicates that a maximum value is not configured.
Maximum Response Time For MLDv2 (seconds) (queryResponseIntvl)

The Maximum Response Time For MLDv2 parameter specifies the maximum response time for answering general MLDv2 queries, at an MLD interface level. The range is 0, or 1 to 1023. The default value of 0 indicates that a maximum value is not configured.
Query interval (seconds) (queryInterval)

The Query interval (seconds) parameter specifies the frequency at which the MLD Host-Query packets are transmitted, for an MLD routing instance. The range is 2 to 1024. The default is 125.
Query interval (seconds) (queryInterval)

The Query interval (seconds) parameter specifies the time period between MLD query messages, for an MLD interface. The range is 0, or 2 to 1024. The default value of 0 indicates that an interval is not configured.
May 2009
189-3
189 MLD parameters
Query Response Interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval)

The Query Response Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the maximum query response time for Mldv2 queries, at an MLD routing instance level. The range is 1 to 1023. The default is 10.
Robust Count (robustCount)

The Robust Count parameter allows you to modify the expected packet loss for an MLD routing instance subnet. If a subnet is expected to have high packet loss, you can increase the parameter value. The range is 2 to 10. The default is 2.
Start Multicast Address (frGrpAddr)

The Start Multicast Address parameter is used when static SSM translation is created for an MLD routing instance. The parameter specifies a start multicast IPv6 address for the group range, in the form x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x or x:x:x:x:x:x.d.d.d.d, where x ranges from 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal) and ranges from 0 to 255 (decimal). There is no default.
189-4
May 2009
190 MSDP parameters
190.1 MSDP parameters
190-2
May 2009
190-1
190 MSDP parameters
190.1
MSDP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the MSDP forms and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for MSDP.
Data Encapsulation (encapsulation)

The Data Encapsulation parameter specifies whether or not to encapsulate multicast data received from MSDP register messages inside forwarded MSDP source active messages. The options are:
Enabled (Default) Disabled Default Peer (defaultPeer)

The Default Peer parameter specifies whether source-active messages from a peer will be accepted without the usual peer-reverse-path-forwarding (RPF) check. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (Default) IP Prefix (ipAddress)

The IP Prefix parameter specifies the IP address of the source from which the source active messages will be accepted. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Key
Local IP Address (localIpAddress)

The Local IP Address parameter specifies the IP address that is used by the local end of an MSDP session to communicate with MSDP peers. Outgoing connections use the parameter as the source of the TCP connection when they initiate connections with a peer. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask to be used along with the IP Prefix parameter to obtain the range of addresses from which the router can accept source active messages. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 24.
190-2
May 2009
190 MSDP parameters
Mode (mode)
The Mode parameter specifies whether or not a group of peers is configured in a full mesh topology. The options are:
Standard (Default) Mesh

When the Mesh option is selected, source-active messages received from a mesh group member are always accepted but are not flooded to other members of the same mesh group. The result is that the source-active messages are only flooded to non-mesh group peers or members of other mesh groups.
Name

The Peer Address parameter specifies an IPv4 address for the MSDP peer in dotted-decimal format.
Receive Message Interval (seconds) (receivingRateTime)

The Receive Message Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the period of time, in seconds, that messages specified in the Receive Message Rate parameter are processed during a TCP session. The parameter is configurable when the Receive Message Rate parameter is configured. The range is 1 to 600. The default is 0.
Receive Message Rate (receivingRate)

The Receive Message Rate parameter specifies the number of MSDP messages, including source active messages, that are read from a TCP session in the interval specified by the Receive Message Interval (seconds) parameter. When the number of MSDP packets defined in the Receive Message Threshold parameter have been processed, additional MSDP packets are no longer accepted from the TCP session until the number of seconds specified in the Receive Message Interval parameter have elapsed. The range is 10 to 10 000. The default is 0, which specifies that messages are not read from the TCP session.
Receive Message Threshold (receivingRateThreshold)

The Receive Message Threshold parameter specifies the number of MSDP messages that can be processed in a TCP session before the Receive Message Rate parameter is configured. This is useful during system startup and initialization. If the limit is exceeded, MSDP messages will not be accepted until the interval specified in Receive Message Interval has elapsed. The parameter is configurable when the Receive Message Rate parameter is configured. The range is 1 to 1 000 000. The default is 0, which specifies that messages are not read from the TCP session.
May 2009
190-3
190 MSDP parameters
RPF Lookup Sequence

See IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
SA Cache Lifetime (seconds) (sACacheLifetime)

The SA Cache Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies the lifetime, in seconds, given to SA Cache entries, from the time they are received to the time they expire if not refreshed. The range is 90 to 600. The default is 90.
SA Limit (maxActiveSources)
The SA Limit parameter specifies the maximum number of source active messages that will be accepted for an MSDP routing instance. By default, no limit is placed on the number of source active messages, which is specified by the default value of 1. A value of 0 specifies that no source active messages will be accepted. The range is 1 to 1 000 000.
Type
190-4
May 2009
191.1 IS-IS parameters
191-2
May 2009
191-1
191.1
IS-IS parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the IS-IS forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for IS-IS.
Advertise Only Passive Interfaces (passiveOnly)

The Advertise Only Passive Interfaces parameter specifies whether the ISIS protocol advertises only prefixes that belong to passive interfaces. The options are:
True False (default) Area ID (areaId)

The Area ID parameter specifies the area ID portion of a network SAP. This helps identify a point of connection to the network, such as a device interface. Addressing in IS-IS is based on network SAPs, and network entity titles, also called NET addresses. The NET address is exchanged in IS-IS and LSP hello PDUs to help determine routing and priorities for routing messages. The parameter format is XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx]XX.[xx], where XX or xx are bytes that indicate one authority and format ID or the area ID. The other portions of a NET address consist of the system ID of the device that contains the interface and the selector ID that contains zeros in a NET address. For level 1 IS-IS interfaces, neighbors may have different area IDs, but they must share at least one area ID. For level 2 IS-IS interfaces, neighbors may have different area IDs, but when they do not share at least one area ID in common, only level 2 neighbor and LSP information is exchanged. For level 1 and 2 IS-IS interfaces, neighbors may have different area IDs, but when they share at least one area ID, they become neighbors and exchange level 2 LSPs.

See BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
CSNP Authentication (csnpAuthentication)

The CSNP Authentication parameter specifies whether CSNP authentication is enabled. The options are:
191-2
May 2009
CSNP Interval (seconds) (csnpInterval)

The CSNP Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the complete sequence number PDUs are sent from the IS-IS interface. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is:
10 s for broadcast LAN interfaces 5 s for point-to-point links Description

Enable Authentication (enableAuthentication)

The Enable Authentication parameter specifies whether to secure IS-IS routing information between devices. The options are:

When authentication is enabled, any packets received on the IS-IS interface that do not match the authentication type or authentication key used on the interface are rejected.
Enable IPv4 (enableIPv4)

The Enable IPv4 parameter specifies whether IS-IS allows or generates IPv4 PDUs. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Enable IPv6 (enableIPv6)

The Enable IPv6 parameter specifies whether IS-IS allows or generates IPv6 PDUs. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Enable LDP Synchronization

See Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
External (externalPreference)
May 2009
191-3
Graceful Restart
See Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart)in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Hello Authentication (helloAuthentication)

The Hello Authentication parameter specifies whether hello authentication is enabled. The options are:
true (default) false Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)

The Hello Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, between hello PDU messages issued on the interface for this IS-IS level. The range is 1 to 20 000. The default is 9.
Hello Multiplier (helloMultiplier)

The Hello Multiplier parameter specifies the number of missing hello PDU messages before the adjacency between IS-IS devices is considered down. The range is 2 to 100. The default is 3.
Helper Mode
See Helper Mode (grHelperMode) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Internal (preference)
IPv6 Routing TLV type (ipv6RoutingTlvType)

The IPv6 Routing TLV type parameter specifies the TLV type for IPv6 routing. The parameter is configurable when the Enable IPv6 (enableIPv6) parameter is enabled. The options are:
Unspecified Native (default) MT
191-4
May 2009
IPv6 Unicast Multi-Topology (multiTopoIPv6Ucast)

The IPv6 Unicast Multi-Topology parameter specifies whether IPv6 unicast multi-topology is enabled. The parameter is available in the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later. The options are:
true false (default) Isis Default Route Tag (defaultRouteTag)

The Isis Default Route Tag specifies a 32-bit integer tag for the ISIS default route. The tag is used to apply an administrative policy. A value of 0 indicates that the tag has not been set. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Key
Level Capability (levelCapability)

The Level Capability parameter specifies the routing level for an instance of the IS-IS routing process. An IS-IS-enabled device and an IS-IS interface can operate at level 1, level 2, or both levels 1 and 2. Table 191-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 191-1 Level Capability parameter
Option Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 and 2 (default) Option description Device or interface operates at level 1 Device or interface operates at level 2 Device or interface can operate at level 1 and 2 Dependencies Only level 1 adjacencies are formed. Only level 2 adjacencies are formed. The device or interface runs separate SPF calculations for level 1 area routing and level 2 multi-area routing to create the IS-IS routing table.
LSP Initial Wait (seconds) (lspInitialWait)

The LSP Initial Wait (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the timer value that determines when to generate the first LSP in a series of LSPs. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 0. The LSP Second Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the generation of the second LSP. The LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the third, and all subsequent, LSPs. The LSPs are generated at increasing intervals based on the LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter.
May 2009
191-5
LSP Lifetime (seconds) (lspLifetime)

The LSP Lifetime (seconds) parameter specifies how long, in seconds, the device wants the LSP it originates to be considered valid by other devices in the domain. All LSPs are maintained in an LSP database until the parameter value is reached. If a routing update from the originating device for the LSP does not arrive within the parameter time, the LSP is removed from the LSP database. The range is 350 to 65 535. The default is 1200.
LSP Max Wait (seconds) (lspMaxWait)

The LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the timer that determines when to generate the first LSP in a series of LSPs. The LSP Second Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer that determines the generation of the second LSP. the LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer that determines the third, and all subsequent, LSPs. The LSPs are generated at increasing intervals based on the LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter. The range is 1 to 120. The default is 5.
LSP Pacing Interval (seconds) (lspPacingInterval)

The LSP Pacing Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval for all IS-IS levels, in seconds, between LSP PDUs that are sent from the IS-IS interface. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 100. When the parameter is set to 0, the IS-IS interface sends no LSPs.
LSP Second Wait (seconds) (lspSecondWait)

The LSP Initial Wait (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the timer value that determines when to generate the first LSP in a series of LSPs. The LSP Second Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the generation of the second LSP. the LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the third, and all subsequent, LSPs. The LSPs are generated at increasing intervals based on the LSP Max Wait (seconds) parameter. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 1.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask of the IP address configured using the Network parameter. This allows the aggregation of addresses for a specific IS-IS summary level to create route summaries, which are used to reduce the size of the link state database and the routing table, and to reduce the chance of route flapping. The range is 1 to 32 for an IPv4 address, and 1 to 128 for an IPv6 address. A value of 32 is typically reserved for an IPv4 system address, but is available for general use in IPv6. The IPv4 default is 24; the IPv6 default is 64.
Mesh Group (meshGroup)

The Mesh Group parameter specifies the numeric value of a mesh group to uniquely identify each mesh group. The Mesh Group parameter is configurable when the Mesh Group Status parameter value is Enabled. The range is 1 to 2 000 000 000. The default is 1.
191-6
May 2009
Mesh Group Status (meshGroupStatus)

The Mesh Group Status parameter specifies whether the interface is assigned to a mesh group. Mesh groups limit the amount of flooding when a new or changed LSP is advertised across an IS-IS area. Table 191-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 191-2 Mesh Group Status parameter
Option Disabled (default) Blocked Option description Removes the interface from the mesh group Prevents the interface from flooding LSPs Dependencies When an interface is blocked from flooding LSP information, careful planning is necessary to prevent isolated islands that do not receive updated LSPs. All devices in a mesh group should be fully meshed. All interfaces in the mesh group should be set to Enabled.
Enabled
Includes the interface in the mesh group
Metric (metric)
The Metric parameter specifies the metric, also known as the cost, used to identify this interface on this IS-IS level. The range is 0 to 16 777 215. The default is 0. To calculate the lowest cost to reach a destination, each interface on each level has a cost associated with using the interface. The cost is determined using the Metric parameter value. A lower value indicates a lower cost for using the interface.
Multicast Import
See Multicast Import (multicastImport) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Multi-Topology (multiTopology)
The Multi-Topology parameter specifies whether multi-topology is enabled. The parameter is available in the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later. The options are:
true false (default) Name

May 2009
191-7
Network (network)
The Network parameter specifies the aggregate IPv4 or IPv6 addresses for a specific IS-IS summary level. This allows the creation of route summaries, which are used to reduce the size of the link state database and the routing table, and to reduce the chance of route flapping. The host bits for a network address must be 0. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal notation.
Overload (setOverload)
The Overload parameter specifies whether the IS-IS-enabled device operates in an overload state before attempting to reestablish normal operations. The overload period is configured using the Overload Timeout (seconds) parameter. During normal operation, the device may enter an overload state because of resource issues. In the overload state, the device is only used if the destination is reachable by the device and is not used for other transit traffic. Table 191-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 191-3 Overload parameter
Option Enabled Option description Overload is enabled. Dependencies The Overload Timeout (seconds) parameter must be set to a value other than 0. When the Overload Timeout (seconds) parameter is set to 0, the overload state is maintained indefinitely.
Disabled (default)
Overload is disabled.
Overload On Boot (overloadOnBoot)

The Overload On Boot parameter specifies that, when the device is in an overload state, the device is used only if there is no other route to reach the destination. This parameter configures the IGP on boot in the overload state until the following occurs:
The Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) parameter value is reached The Overload On Boot parameter is set to Disabled
Table 191-4 describes the parameter options.
191-8
May 2009
191 IS-IS parameters Table 191-4 Overload On Boot parameter

Option Disabled (default) Enabled Option description Overload on boot is disabled. Overload on boot is enabled and the device is used only if there is no other route to reach the destination. Dependencies The Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) parameter must be set to a value other than 0.
Enabled Wait For BGP
Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) (overloadOnBootTimeout)

The Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the timeout value, in seconds, when the Overload On Boot parameter is set to Enabled. The options are:
0 (default) to represent indefinite 60 to 1800 Overload Timeout (seconds) (overloadTimeout)

The Overload Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the timeout value when the Overloading parameters are enabled. The options are:
0 (default) to represent indefinite 60 to 1800 Passive (passive)

The Passive parameter specifies whether to advertise the interface as an IS-IS interface without using the IS-IS protocol. Table 191-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 191-5 Passive parameter
Option false (default) true Option description The interface is advertised as an IS-IS interface. The interface ignores ingress IS-IS PDUs and transmits no IS-IS PDUs. Dependencies Service interfaces are set to true.
May 2009
191-9
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the priority of an interface when determining the preferred device used in a multi-access network. The range is 0 to 127. The default is 64. A higher number indicates a higher priority. When hello PDU messages are sent to other devices on the IS-IS level, the Priority parameter value is included. The device with the highest priority is designated as the preferred device. The designated device is responsible for sending LSPs to this network in the multi-access network.
PSNP Authentication (psnpAuthentication)

The PSNP Authentication parameter specifies whether PSNP authentication is enabled. The options are:
true (default) false Reference Bandwidth (referenceBandwidth)

The Reference Bandwidth parameter specifies the reference bandwidth that provides the basis of bandwidth relative costing. The range is 0 to 100 000 000 bps. The default is 0. When the parameter is set to 0, the reference bandwidth is not defined. To calculate the lowest cost to reach a specific destination, each configured level on each interface must have a cost. When the reference bandwidth is defined, the cost is calculated using the formula:
cost = reference-bandwidth bandwidth
Remove Key button

The Remove Key button deletes the MD5 key.
191-10
May 2009
Retransmit Interval (seconds) (retransmitInterval)

The Retransmit Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the minimum time between LSP PDU retransmissions on a point-to-point IS-IS link interface. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 5.
Route Tag (routeTag)

The Route Tag parameter specifies a 32-bit integer tag for the IP addresses of an ISIS interface. The tag is used to apply an administrative policy. A value of 0 indicates that the tag has not been set. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
SPF Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait)

The SPF Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the maximum interval between two consecutive SPF calculations. The timers determine when to perform the first, second, and all subsequent calculations. The SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the generation of the second SPF. The SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer that determines the third, and all subsequent, SPFs. The SPFs are generated at increasing intervals based on the SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter. The range is 10 to 100 000. The default is 1000.
SPF Max Wait (seconds) (spfMaxWait)

The SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the maximum interval between two consecutive SPF calculations. The timers determine when to perform the first, second, and all subsequent calculations. The SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the generation of the second SPF. The SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer that determines the third, and all subsequent, SPFs. The SPFs are generated at increasing intervals based on the SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter. The range is 10 to 120. The default is 10. For example, if the SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, the second calculation occurs at 2000 ms. Subsequent calculations start at 4000 ms, and run until the SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter value is reached.
SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait)

The SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies the interval between the first and second SPF calculations. After the second calculation, a formula is used to determine the time of subsequent calculations. The timers determine when to perform the first, second, and all subsequent calculations. The SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the generation of the second SPF. The SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter specifies the timer value that determines the third, and all subsequent, SPFs. The SPFs are generated at increasing intervals based on the SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter. The range is 10 to 100 000. The default is 1000. For example, if the parameter is set to 1000, the second calculation occurs at 2000 ms. Subsequent calculations start at 4000 ms, and run until the SPF Max Wait (seconds) parameter value is reached.
Strict Adjacency Check (strictAdjacencyCheck)

The Strict Adjacency Check parameter specifies whether IS-IS forms an adjacency between two routers that do not use the same IP version. When the parameter is enabled, the router IP versions must match for an adjacency to form.
Disabled (default) Enabled Summary Level (summaryLevel)

The Summary Level parameter specifies IS-IS summary level for which aggregate IPv4 addresses are to be created. Aggregate IPv4 address route summaries are used to reduce the size of the link state database and the IPv4 routing table, and to reduce the chance of route flapping. The options are:
Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 and 2 (default) Summary Route Tag (summaryRouteTag)

The Summary Route Tag parameter specifies a 32-bit integer tag for the ISIS summary route. This tag is used to apply an administrative policy. A value of 0 indicates that the tag has not been set. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
Traffic Engineering (trafficEngineering)

The Traffic Engineering parameter specifies whether traffic engineering is enabled and determines whether IGP shortcuts are required. The options are:

When the parameter is set to false, the device generates no metrics and ignores incoming metrics.
Type
Table 191-6 lists where to find more information about the Type parameter.
Parameter Type for Authentication Type for L3 interface See Type (authenticationType) in section 199.1 Type (interfaceType) in section 199.1
191-12
May 2009
Unicast Import
See Unicast Import (unicastImport) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Wide Metrics Only (wideMetricsOnly)

The Wide Metrics Only parameter specifies whether to only use wide metrics in LSPs to support traffic engineering. By default, the IS-IS protocol can generate two TLVs: one for adjacency and one for the IP prefix, also known as the narrow TLV. Wide metrics allow the inclusion of a second pair of TLVs. Table 191-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 191-7 Wide Metrics Only parameter
Option true false (default) Option description The device generates narrow and wide TLVs. The device generates only wide TLVs. Dependencies
May 2009
191-13
191-14
May 2009
192 MPLS parameters
192.1 MPLS parameters
192-2
May 2009
192-1
192 MPLS parameters
192.1
MPLS parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the MPLS forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu for MPLS in the network navigation tree.
Description
Enable (holdTimer)
The Enable parameter specifies whether the ingress NE waits before it programs the LSP data plane and signals to the service module that the LSP is operationally up. The parameter works in conjunction with the Value (seconds) parameter. Disabling the parameter sets the Value (seconds) parameter to 0. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Enable (resignalTimer)

The Enable parameter specifies whether to resignal LSPs at a regular interval. The parameter works in conjunction with the Value (min) parameter. The options are:

The following rules apply when the parameter is set to Enabled.
Only LSPs with CSPF enabled are resignaled. Only LSPs configure for make-before-break functionality are resignaled. After the device performs a resignal, the Value (min) parameter specifies the
interval, in minutes, before the next LSP resignal attempt. If the resignal timer expires because the new recorded hop list for an LSP has a better metric than the current recorded hop list, MPLS attempts to resignal the LSP using the make-before-break mechanism. If the attempt to resignal an LSP fails, the LSP continues to use the existing path and MPLS attempts to resignal the LSP when the timer expires. The Next Resignal parameter indicates the time remaining, in minutes, for the resignal timer to expire.
192-2
May 2009
192 MPLS parameters
Enable SRLG for FRR (enableSrlgFrr)

The Enable SRLG for FRR parameter specifies whether a Shared Risk Link Group constraint will be used in the computation of an FRR bypass or detour to be associated with any primary LSP path on the system. When the Enable SRLG for FRR parameter is enabled, the SRLG constraint will be used. The options are:
enabled not enabled (default) Fast Reroute (fastRerouteEnabled)

The Fast Reroute parameter specifies whether fast reroute is signaled for LSPs that use facility bypass. The options are:
true (default) false Groups Included (adminGroupInclude)

The Groups Included parameter specifies the MPLS administrative group that the MPLS interface belongs to, in a bitmap format. You can create these groups by choosing PoliciesMPLS Administration Groups. You can add or exclude groups from the Groups Included parameter by choosing the Admistrative Groups tab.
Hold Timer (seconds) (holdTimer)

The Hold timer (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that the ingress NE waits before it programs the LSP data plane and signals to the service module that the LSP is operationally up. The parameter is configurable when the Enable parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 10. The default is 1. A value of 0 means that the parameter is not configured.
Include Groups Assigned (adminGroupInclude)

The Include Groups Assigned parameter specifies the assigned MPLS administrative groups to include on an MPLS interface. You can create MPLS administrative groups by choosing PoliciesMPLS Administration Groups.
Include Groups Unassigned (adminGroupInclude)

The Include Groups Unassigned parameter specifies the unassigned MPLS administrative groups to include on an MPLS interface. You can create MPLS administrative groups by choosing PoliciesMPLS Administration Groups.
Resignal Timer (min) (resignalTimer)

The Resignal Timer (min) parameter specifies the interval, in minutes before another LSP resignal is performed. The range is 0, or 30 to 10 080. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is disabled.
May 2009
192-3
192 MPLS parameters
You can configure the parameter when the Enable parameter is set to Enabled. If the resignal timer expires because the new recorded hop list for an LSP has a better metric than the current recorded hop list, an attempt is made to resignal that LSP using the make-before-break mechanism. If the attempt to resignal an LSP fails, the LSP continues to use the existing path, and a resignal is attempted the next time that the timer expires. The Next Resignal parameter indicates the time remaining, in minutes, for the resignal timer to expire.
Strict (srlgStrict)
The Strict parameter specifies whether to associate the LSP with a bypass or signal detour if a bypass or detour satisfies all other constraints except the SRLG constraints. When the Strict parameter is enabled but a path that meets SRLG constraints is not found, then the bypass or detour is not set up. The Strict parameter can only be configured when the Enable SRLG for FRR parameter is enabled. The options for the Strict parameter are:
enabled not enabled (default) View the newly created MPLS path
The View the newly created MPLS path parameter specifies whether you want to view the configuration details of the newly created MPLS path using the MPLS Path form. The options are:
192-4
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
193.1 OSPF parameters
193-2
May 2009
193-1
193 OSPF parameters
193.1
OSPF parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the OSPF forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for OSPF.
Advertise Subnet (advertiseSubnet)

The Advertise Subnet parameter specifies whether to advertise the interface as a subnet route, including network number and netmask information. The parameter is configurable only for OSPFv2. The options are:

When the parameter is disabled, the interface is advertised as a host route.
Area ID (areaId)
The Area ID parameter specifies the context to create an OSPF area. An area is a collection of network segments within an AS that are grouped together. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The value 0.0.0.0 is reserved for the backbone area. There is no default value.
Authentication Type (authenticationType)

The Authentication Type parameter specifies the type of authentication used on the OSPFv2 interface. Table 193-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-1 Authentication Type parameter
Option No Authentication (default) Simple Password MD5-based Authentication Option description No authentication is used. Dependencies
A plain-text password is used for authentication. MD5 authentication is used as outlined in RFC1321. When you configure the option, you must configure the Key Index, Key, and Re-enter Key parameters.
193-2
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Autonomous System Border Router (isAutonomousSystemBorderRouter)

The Autonomous System Border Router parameter specifies that the device is configured as an ASBR. The options are:

ASBRs are used to export routes from the routing table manager into an instance of OSPF. After a device is configured as an ASBR, export policies in the OSPF domain are in effect.
Note The Autonomous System Border Router parameter is set to
Disabled by default and is read-only in an OSPFv2 routing instance of a VPRN.

Blackhole Range (rangeBlackhole)

The Blackhole Range parameter specifies whether to create a low priority blackhole route. The options are:

Routing loops may occur when addresses in an area or areas have no route by which to reach them. Enable the parameter to use low priority blackhole routes, which eliminates routing loops.
Boot Overload Enabled (bootOverloadAdmininstrativeState)

The Boot Overload Enabled parameter specifies that, when the device is in an overload state, the device is used only if there is no other route to reach the destination. When the parameter is enabled, the IGP is placed in the overload state at startup and remains in the overload state until one of the following occurs:
the Boot Overload Interval (seconds) parameter expires the Boot Overload Enabled parameter is set to disabled
Table 193-2 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
193-3
193 OSPF parameters Table 193-2 Boot Overload Enabled parameter

Option Disabled (default) Enabled Option description Overload on startup is disabled. Overload on startup is enabled and the device is used only if there is no other route to reach the destination. Dependencies The Boot Overload Interval (seconds) parameter must be set to a value greater than 0.
Boot Overload Interval (seconds) (bootOverloadInterval)

The Boot Overload Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, after which the overload state at startup is reset. The parameter is configurable when the Boot Overload Enabled parameter is enabled. The options are:
0 (default) to represent an indefinite interval 60 to 1800 Change Password button

You can use the Change Password button to change the text password used to validate OSPF messages between neighbors. The button is enabled when the Authentication Type parameter is set to the Simple Password option.
Configured MTU (bytes) (mtu)

The Configured MTU (bytes) parameter specifies, in bytes, the largest OSPF packet size that is handled by the interface. Table 193-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-3 Configured MTU (bytes) parameter
Option 0 (default) Option description The value of the MTU is determined from the configured port MTU value. Dependencies The MTU value for supported interfaces varies based on the interface port type to which the OSPF interface is bound. See the 5620 SAM User Guide for more information about default MTU values. The size includes the IP header information size, but does not include the underlying layer heading information size.
512 to 9198
The size, in bytes, of the MTU.
Default Cost (metric)

The Default Cost parameter specifies, in hops, the default route cost. You can configure the parameter when the Type parameter is set to Stub (No Type 5 External) or Totally Stub (No Summaries). The range is 0, or 1 to 65 535. The default is 0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
193-4
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Description (areaDescription)
Domain ID (domainId)
The Domain ID parameter specifies the domain ID associated with the OSPF instance on the router. The range is -1, or 1 to 31. The default is 1. If no value is set for the tmnxOspfAsbrDomainId parameter, the Domain ID parameter value is set to -1.
Enable LDP Synchronization

See Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Effect (effect)
The Effect parameter specifies whether to advertise the summarized range of IP addresses known by area border routers that fall within the IP address range identified by the Network and Mask parameters. Table 193-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-4 Effect parameter
Option Advertise Matching (default) Do Not Advertise Matching Option description The range of IP addresses is advertised to other OSPF areas. The range of IP addresses is not advertised to other OSPF areas. Dependencies
Exit Overflow Interval (exitOverflowInterval)

The Exit Overflow Interval parameter specifies one of the timers related to establishing limits on the number of non-default, AS-external LSAs entries that can be stored in the link state database. You can limit the number of non-default, AS-external LSA entries to protect the device from receiving an excessive number of external routes that use memory and CPU resources on the device. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 674. The default is 0. When the value is reached, the link state database is considered to be in an overflow state and the device withdraws any existing AS-external LSAs and does not originate any new ones. The Exit Overflow Interval and the External LSA Limit parameters must be set identically on all devices in the same OSPF area, unless the devices are in stub or not-so-stubby areas.
May 2009
193-5
193 OSPF parameters
External LSA Limit (externalLsdbLimit)

The External LSA Limit parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount of time that the device waits after reaching a link state database overflow state before non-default, AS-external LSAs are created and processed. The overflow state is determined using the Exit Overflow Interval parameter. The range is -1 to 2 147 483 674. The default is -1. The Exit Overflow Interval and the External LSA Limit parameters must be set identically on all devices in the same OSPF area, unless the devices are in stub or not-so-stubby areas.
External (externalPreference)
Graceful Restart
See Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)

The Hello Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, between OSPF hello messages that are issued on the OSPF interface or over the virtual link. The range is 1 to 32 767. The default is 10. Use the parameter and the Router Dead Interval (seconds) parameter to establish and maintain the health of adjacency between devices. You can increase the rate at which hello messages are sent to allow for faster detection of device failures. However, more processing is required to perform additional checks.
Helper Mode
See Helper Mode (grHelperMode) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
ID
See Area ID (areaId) in this section for the parameter description.
Ignore DN Bit (ignorDNBit)

The Ignore DN Bit parameter specifies whether to ignore the DN bit for OSPF LSA packets for this instance of OSPF on the router. When the parameter value is enabled, the DN bit for the OSPF LSA packets is ignored. When the parameter value is disabled the DN bit is not ignored. The options are:
193-6
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Initial Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateInitalWait)

The Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, when to generate the second LSA. The range is 10 to 600 000. The default is 5000. Use the Initial Wait (milliseconds), LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds), and Second Wait (milliseconds) parameters to specify the timers between generating the first, second, and subsequent LSAs. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, the first LSA occurs after 5000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, then the second LSA occurs after another 5000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 10 000 ms, then 20 000 ms, then 40 000 ms, and so on, until the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter is reached. Alcatel-Lucent recommends configuring the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter be a value equal to or greater than the LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) parameter value.
Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait)

The Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the initial interval before starting SPF calculations. Use the parameter and the SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) and Second Wait (milliseconds) parameters to control the first, second, and subsequent SPF calculations after a topology change. The range is 10 to 100 000. The default is 1000. Values must be entered in hundreds of ms. Any other increment is rejected. When subsequent SPF runs are required, the runs occur based on the an exponentially increasing interval, based on the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter following the initial run based on the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, the first SPF run occurs after 1000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, then the second SPF run occurs after another 1000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 2000 ms, then 4000 ms, then 8000 ms, and so on, until the Max Wait Time (milliseconds) parameter is reached. After a full interval with no SPF runs, the timer interval returns to the Initial Wait (milliseconds) value.
Interface Base Reference Cost (kbps) (ifBaseRefCost)

The Interface Base Reference Cost parameter specifies, in kbps, the bandwidth that is used as a reference when the default cost of interfaces based on link speed is determined. The default is 100 000 000, which is equivalent to 100 Gb/s. The range depends on the interface link speed. The following lists some of the default costs for interfaces based on various link speeds:
10 000 for 10 Mb/s 1000 for 100 Mb/s 100 for 1 Gb/s 10 for 10 Gb/s
May 2009
193-7
193 OSPF parameters
Internal (internalPreference)
Instance ID (instanceIndex)
The Instance ID parameter specifies an OSPF route instance. The parameter can be used to identify routes installed by that instance and advertised to neighboring nodes. If you do not specify an instance ID, only routes installed by the base routing instance are advertised to neighboring nodes. The range is 0 to 31. The default is 0. The Instance ID parameter is configurable on the 7750 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7710 SR, Release 5.0 and later.
Key (key)
The Key parameter specifies a unique MD5 key. The parameter is configurable when the Authentication Type parameter is set to MD5-based Authentication. The range is a string from 1 to 16 characters. There is no default.
Key Index (keyIndex)

The Key Index parameter specifies a unique identifier for an MD5 key. The parameter is configurable when the Authentication Type parameter is set to MD5-based Authentication. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 0.
Link State DB Type (lsdbType)

The Link State DB Type parameter specifies how LSAs are distributed by area border routers that fall within the IP address range identified by the Network and Mask parameters. Table 193-5 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-5 Link State DB Type parameter
Option Summary (default) NSSA Option description The range of IP addresses applies to summary LSAs. This applies even when the area is configured as an NSSA. The range of IP addresses applies to external routes (via type 7 LSAs) learned within NSSAs when routes are advertised to other areas as type 5 LSAs. Dependencies
LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) (lsaArrivalWait)

The LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the minimum delay between receipt of the same LSAs that are arriving from neighbors. The range is 0 to 600 000. The default is 1000.
193-8
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Alcatel-Lucent recommends configuring the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter be a value equal to or greater than the LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) parameter value.
LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateMaxWait)

The LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, when to generate the first LSA. The range is 10 to 600 000. The default is 5000. Use the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds), Initial Wait (milliseconds) and Second Wait (milliseconds) parameters to specify the timers between generating the first, second, and subsequent LSAs. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, the first LSA occurs after 5000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, then the second LSA occurs after another 5000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 10 000 ms, then 20 000 ms, then 40 000 ms, and so on, until the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter is reached. Alcatel-Lucent recommends configuring the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter be a value equal to or greater than the LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) parameter value.
Metric (metric)
The Metric parameter specifies the cost metric for the OSPF interface. This metric overrides the cost metric based on the speed of the underlying link. A higher number indicates a higher cost for using the interface. Table 193-6 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-6 Metric parameter
Option 0 (default) 1 to 65 535 Option description The cost of the interface Dependencies You cannot use the 0 option. A higher number indicates a higher cost for using the interface.
Multicast Import
See Multicast Import (multicastImport) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Name
May 2009
193-9
193 OSPF parameters
Network (network)
The Network parameter specifies the range of IP addresses that is required on an area border router to summarize or suppress route information to all other devices in the OSPF area. For OSPFv2, specify an IP address in dotted-decimal format. For OSPFv3, specify an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. Area border routers send summary LSAs to describe routes to other areas. To minimize the number of LSAs, use the parameter and the Prefix Length parameter to send reachability information to other devices in the OSPF area about the devices within the specified range.
Originate Default Route (originateDefault)

The Originate Default Route parameter specifies the type of link state advertisement that is generated by a device in an NSSA OSPF. the parameter is configurable when the Type parameter is set to NSSA (No Type 5 External) or NSSA (No Summaries). Table 193-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 193-7 Originate Default Route parameter
Option No Originate (default) Originate Type3 Originate Type7 Option description The NSSA area border router or ASBR does not originate a default route. The NSSA area border router or ASBR router originates a type 3 LSA. The NSSA area border router or ASBR originates a type 7 LSA. Dependencies When you set the Type parameter to NSSA (No Summaries), you should set the Originate Default Route parameter to Originate Type3. However, some older OSPF implementations may expect a type 7 LSA.
OSPF Router ID (ospfRouterId)

The OSPF Router ID parameter specifies the routing instance as the IP address of the managed router. The router ID uniquely identifies the device within an autonomous system and is used by OSPF in the routing table manager instance. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The 5620 SAM uses the system IP address when you specify the default router ID (0.0.0.0). You can only assign the default router ID to an OSPF instance that is the base instance. The OSPF Router ID parameter is configurable on the 7750 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7710 SR, Release 5.0 and later.
193-10
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Overload Enabled (overloadAdministrativeState)

The Overload Enabled parameter specifies the overload state of the local device. When the parameter is enabled, the device appears to be overloaded; it can participate in OSPF routing but is not used for transit traffic. Traffic destined for directly attached interfaces continues to reach the device. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the Overload Interval parameter is configurable.
Overload Interval (seconds) (overloadInterval)

The Overload Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, after which the overload state of the local device is reset. The parameter is configurable when the Overload Enabled parameter is set to enabled. The options are:
0 (default) to represent an indefinite interval 60 to 1800 Overload Stubs (overloadStubs)

The Overload Stubs parameter specifies whether OSPF stub networks are advertised with the maximum metric value when the system goes into overload state. The options are:

When the parameter is set to enabled, the system uses the maximum metric value. When the parameter is set to enabled and the router is in overload, all stub interfaces, including loopback and system interfaces, are advertised at the maximum metric.
Passive (isPassive)
The Passive parameter specifies whether the OSPF interface runs the OSPF protocol. The options are:

Disabled indicates that the OSPF interface is active. A passive OSPF interface is still considered an OSPF interface. When the parameter is enabled, the interface ignores ingress OSPF packets and does not transmit OSPF packets. Service interfaces are always considered passive.
May 2009
193-11
193 OSPF parameters
Password (authenticationKey)
The Password parameter specifies the plain-text password authentication string for the OSPFv2 interface. The parameter is configurable when the Authentication Type parameter is set to Simple Password. The range is a string of one to eight characters. There is not default.
Poll Interval (seconds) (pollInterval)

The Poll Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, the polling interval. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 120.

The Prefix Length parameter specifies a mask for the range of IP addresses that is used by an OSPF area border router to summarize or suppress route information. The range is 0 to 128. The default is 24. OSPF area border routers send summary LSAs to describe routes to other areas. To minimize the number of LSAs, the area border routers use the parameter and the Network parameter to send reachability information about the devices within the specified range to other devices in the OSPF area.
Priority (priority)
The Priority parameter specifies the priority of the OSPF interface to determine the designated device. The parameter is configurable when the Type parameter is set to broadcast. Table 193-8 describes the parameter options.
193-12
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters Table 193-8 Priority parameter

Option 0 1 (default) to 255 Option description The device cannot be the designated device. The priority of the device Dependencies A higher number indicates a higher priority.
Redistribute External Routes (nssaRedistribute)

The Redistribute External Routes parameter specifies whether to redistribute external routes into the NSSA or the ABR that exports routes into OSPF non-NSSAs. The parameter is configurable when the Type parameter is set to NSSA (No Type 5 External) or NSSA (No Summaries). The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Re-enter Key (key)

The Re-enter Key parameter specifies an unique MD5 key. The range is a string from 1 to 16 characters. The parameter is configurable when the Authentication Type parameter is set to MD5-based Authentication. The parameter value must match the Key parameter. There is no default.
Re-enter Password (authenticationKey)

The Re-enter Password parameter specifies the plain text password authentication string for the OSPF interface. The parameter is configurable when the Authentication Type parameter is set to Simple Password. The value must match the Password parameter. There is not default.
Retransmission Interval (seconds) (retransmissionInterval)

The Retransmission Interval (seconds) parameter specifies how long OSPF waits before retransmitting an unacknowledged LSA to an OSPF neighbor through an interface or across a virtual link. The parameter value should be greater than the value of the Transit Delay (seconds) parameter. The range is 0 to 1800. The default is 5.
RFC1583 Compatible (isRFC1583Compatible)

The RFC1583 Compatible parameter specifies whether OSPFv2 and external route calculations are done in compliance with RFC 1583 and earlier RFC documents. The options are:
May 2009
193-13
193 OSPF parameters
RFC 1583 and earlier RFCs use different methods to calculate summary and external route costs. To avoid routing problems in an OSPFv2 domain, all devices should use the same calculation methods. The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv3.
Router Dead Interval (seconds) (routerDeadInterval)

The Router Dead Interval (seconds) parameter specifies, in seconds, how long OSPF waits before a neighboring device is declared down. When no hello packets are received in the interval, the device is considered down. The parameter should be set to at least twice the value of the Hello Interval (seconds) parameter. The parameter value of both endpoints of the link must match. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 40 for an interface, or 60 for a virtual link. Use the parameter and the Hello Interval (seconds) parameter to establish and maintain the health of adjacency between devices. You can increase the rate at which hello messages are sent to allow faster detection of device failures. However, more processing is required to perform additional checks.
Second Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateSecondWait)

The Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, when to generate the third and subsequent LSAs. The range is 10 to 600 000. The default is 5000. Use the Initial Wait (milliseconds), LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) and Second Wait (milliseconds) parameters to specify the timers between generating the first, second, and subsequent LSAs. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, the first LSA occurs in 5000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 5000, then the second LSA occurs in 5000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 10 000 ms, then 20 000 ms, then 40 000 ms until the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter is reached. Alcatel-Lucent recommends configuring the LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter to a value equal to or greater than the LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) parameter.
Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait)

The Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the second and subsequent intervals to perform SPF calculations. Use the parameter and the SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) and Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameters to control the first, second, and subsequent SPF calculations after a topology change. The range is 10 to 100 000. The default is 1000. Values must be entered in 100s of ms. Any other increment is rejected.
193-14
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
When subsequent SPF runs are required, the runs occur based on the an exponentially increasing interval, based on the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter following the initial run based on the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, the first SPF run occurs in 1000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, then the second SPF run occurs in 1000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 2000 ms, then 4000 ms, then 8000 ms until the Max Wait Time (milliseconds) parameter is reached. After a full interval with no SPF runs, the timer interval returns to the Initial Wait (milliseconds) value.
SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) (spfMaxWait)

The SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the maximum interval between two SPF calculations. Use the parameter and the Initial Wait (milliseconds) and Second Wait (milliseconds) parameters to control the first, second, and subsequent SPF calculations after a topology change. The range is 10 to 120 000. The default is 10 000. Values must be entered in 100s of ms. Any other increment is rejected. When subsequent SPF runs are required, the runs occur based on the an exponentially increasing interval, based on the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter following the initial run based on the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter. For example, if the Initial Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, the first SPF run occurs in 1000 ms. If the Second Wait (milliseconds) parameter is set to 1000, then the second SPF run occurs in 1000 ms. The next run is an exponential increase to 2000 ms, then 4000 ms, then 8000 ms until the Max Wait Time (milliseconds) parameter is reached. After a full interval with no SPF runs, the timer interval returns to the Initial Wait (milliseconds) value.
Super-Backbone (superBackBone)
The Super-Backbone parameter specifies whether CE-PE functionality is required. The OSPF super-backbone indicates the type of LSA generated as a result of routes redistributed into OSPF. The options are:

When OSPF super-backbone is enabled, the redistributed routes are injected as summary, internal, or type 3 LSAs (internal). When the OSPF super backbone is disabled, the redistributed routes are injected as either external or type 5 LSAs (external).
Note The Super-Backbone parameter applies only to VPRN instances of OSPF.
May 2009
193-15
193 OSPF parameters
Suppress DN Bit (suppressDNBit)

The Suppress DN Bit parameter specifies whether to suppress the ability to set the DN bit for OSPF LSA packets. When the parameter value is set to enable, the DN bit for the OSPF LSA packets are not set. When the parameter value is set to disable, the OSPF router will follow the normal procedures to determine whether to set the DN bit. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Traffic Engineering Support (trafficEngineeringSupport)

The Traffic Engineering Support parameter specifies whether traffic engineering route calculations, based on device and link values, are enabled. The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv2 in VPRN or for OSPFv3 in general. The options are:
false true (default) Transit Area (transitAreaId)

The Transit Area parameter specifies the IP address of the far-end device that connects the backbone area with the area that has no physical connection to the backbone. See the Virtual Neighbor Router (Site) ID (virtualNeighborRouterId) parameter for more information.
Transit Delay (seconds) (transitDelay)

The Transit Delay (seconds) parameter specifies the estimated time, in seconds, to transmit an LSA on the OSPF interface or virtual link. The parameter value should be less than the value of the Retransmission Interval (seconds) parameter. The range is 0 to 1800. The default is 1.
Transmit Interval (transmitInterval)

The Transmit Interval parameter specifies, in milliseconds, the interval between LSA advertisements, to prevent the flooding of downstream routers with too many LSA packets. The range is 0 to 4 294 967. The default is 30.
Type (areaType)
The Type parameter specifies the type of OSPF area. Table 193-9 describes the parameter options.
193-16
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters Table 193-9 Type parameter

Option Backbone Option description The OSPF backbone area must be contiguous and all other areas must be connected to the backbone area. The backbone distributes routing information between areas. If it is not practical to connect an area to the backbone, the area border routers must be connected using a virtual link. A standard area is not an NSSA or a stub area. A stub area is a designated area that does not allow external route advertisements. Routers in a stub area do not maintain external routes. A single default route to an ABR replaces all external routes. An OSPF NSSA is similar to stub areas, however, an NSSA can flood externally learned routes to the entire OSPF domain using an ABR. External routes learned by OSPF routers in the NSSA are advertised as type 7 LSAs within the NSSA and are translated by ABRs into type 5 external route advertisements for distribution into other areas of the OSPF domain. Dependencies The backbone area is 0.0.0.0
Standard (All LSAs) (default) Stub (No Type 5 External) Totally Stub (No Summaries) NSSA (No Type 5 External) NSSA (No Summaries)
An area can be stub or NSSA, but not both at the same time.
The hierarchical design of OSPF areas allows a collection of networks to be grouped into a logical OSPF area. The topology of one area is concealed from the rest of the areas, which significantly reduces OSPF protocol traffic. Routing in the AS occurs on two levels, depending on whether the source and destination of a packet reside in the same area (intra-area routing) or different areas (inter-area routing). In intra-area routing, the packet is routed solely based on information that is obtained within the area; no routing information obtained from outside the area is used.
Unicast Import
See Unicast Import (unicastImport) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Version (version)
The Version parameter specifies whether the OSPF area uses OSPFv2 or OSPFv3. The options are:
2 (default) 3
May 2009
193-17
193 OSPF parameters
Virtual Neighbor Router (Site) ID (virtualNeighborRouterId)

The Virtual Neighbor Router (Site) ID parameter specifies the creation of virtual links using the IP address of the far-end device to connect a non-backbone OSPF area to the backbone OSPF area. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The device must be configured as an area border router. The device must be connected by a physical link to the device that is an area border router to the area that is physically connected to the backbone area. The backbone area in an OSPF AS must be contiguous and all other areas must be connected to the backbone area. This is not always possible because of topology issues. You can use virtual links to connect to the backbone through a non-backbone area. To configure virtual links, the router must be an ABR. Virtual links are identified by the router ID of the other endpoint, which must be another ABR. The two endpoint routers must be attached to a common area, which is called the transit area. The area through which you configure the virtual link must have full routing information. Transit areas pass traffic from an area adjacent to the backbone or to another area. The traffic does not originate in, nor is it destined for, the transit area. The transit area cannot be a stub area or an NSSA. Virtual links are part of the backbone, and behave as if they were unnumbered point-to-point networks between the two devices. A virtual link uses the intra-area routing of its transit area to forward packets. Virtual links are created when the shortest-path routes across the transit area are built.
VPN Domain ID (hex) (vpnDomainId)

The VPN Domain ID parameter specifies the OSPF VPN domain that is exchanged using BGP in the extended community attribute that is associated with a prefix. The parameter is only configurable when the VPN Domain Type (vpnDomainType) parameter is set to a value other than none. Specify a domain ID using three groups of four hexidecimal digits. The range is 14. The default is 0000.0000.0000.
Note The VPN Domain ID parameter applies only to VPRN instances of OSPF.
VPN Domain Type (vpnDomainType)

The VPN Domain Type parameter specifies the type of extended community attribute that is exchanged using BGP to carry the OSPF VPN domain ID. The options are:
none (default) type0005 type0105 type0205 type8005
193-18
May 2009
193 OSPF parameters
Note The VPN Domain Type parameter applies only to VPRN instances of OSPF.
VPN Tag (vpnTag)

The VPN Tag parameter specifies the route tag for an OSPF VPN on a PE router. This parameter is configured to prevent routing loops.
Note The VPN Tag parameter applies only to VPRN instances of
OSPF.
May 2009
193-19
193 OSPF parameters
193-20
May 2009
194 PIM parameters
194.1 PIM parameters
194-2
May 2009
194-1
194 PIM parameters
194.1
PIM parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the PIM forms, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for PIM.
Administrative State IPv4 (administrativeStateIpV4)

The Administrative State parameter specifies whether the IPv4-related object is administratively enabled. The options are:
Up (default) Down Administrative State IPv6 (administrativeStateIpV6)

Up (default) Down Apply To (applyTo)

The Apply To parameter specifies how PIM interfaces are created and removed. Table 194-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 194-1 Apply To parameter
Option IES Non-IES All None (default) Option description All PIM interfaces are IES interfaces. PIM removes all IES interfaces. PIM creates IES and non-IES interfaces. PIM removes all interfaces that are not manually created or modified.
Assert Period (assertPeriod)

The Assert Period parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, at which PIM assert messages are refreshed on an interface. The range is 1 to 300. The default is 60.
194-2
May 2009
194 PIM parameters
Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth)

The Bandwidth (kbps) parameter specifies the bandwidth in kbps for the level. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.

BSM Check Router Alert (bsmCheckRouterAlert)

The BSM Check Router Alert parameter specifies whether checking of the router alert option in a received bootstrap message is enabled. The options are:
true false (default) CBSR Address (bsrCandidateAddress)

The CBSR Address parameter specifies the IP address of the Candidate BSR. To participate in the bootstrap election, the router sends bootstrap messages that contain the router BSR address. The range is a unicast IP address from 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
CBSR Admin State (bsrCandidateAdminState)

The CBSR Admin State parameter specifies whether the router participates in the BSR election. When the parameter value is Up, the CBSR Address must be configured and the CBSR Priority parameter value must be non-zero, or bootstrap messages are not sent. The options are:
Down (default) Up CBSR Hash Mask Length (bsrCandidateHashMaskLength)

The CBSR Hash Mask Length parameter specifies the length of a mask that is to be logically ANDed with the group address before the hash function is called. All groups with the same hash map to the same RP. The CBSR Hash Mask Length maps one group or multiple groups to a RP. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 30.
CBSR Priority (bsrPriority)

The CBSR Priority parameter specifies whether the router is eligible to be a bootstrap router. If the value of this object is set to zero, the router does not participate in the bootstrap election. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 0.
May 2009
194-3
194 PIM parameters
C-RP Address (crpAddress)

The C-RP Address parameter specifies the Candidate Rendezvous Point IP address. This address is sent in the C-RP advertisements to the bootstrap router. The range is a unicast IP address from 0.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
C-RP Hold Time (seconds) (crpHoldTime)

The C-RP Hold Time (seconds) parameter specifies the amount of hold time, in seconds, of the candidate RP. It is used by the bootstrap router to time out the RP entries if it does not listen to another C-RP advertisement within the hold time specified by the C-RP Hold Time (seconds) parameter. The range is 5 to 255. The default is 150.
C-RP Priority (crpPriority)

The C-RP Priority parameter specifies the Candidate RP priority for becoming an RP. This value is used to elect RP for a group range. A value of 0 has the highest priority. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 192.
Data MDT Delay Interval (dataMdtDelayInterval)

The Data Mdt Delay Interval parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, before the PE router that is connected to the source switches traffic from the default MDT to the data MDT group. The range is 3 to 180. The default is 3.
Data MDT Prefix (dataMdtPrefix)

The Data Mdt Prefix parameter combines with the Data Mdt Prefix Length parameter to specify the range of SSM group addresses on which the router monitors traffic thresholds. Specify an IP address in dotted-decimal notation.
Data MDT Prefix Length (dataMdtPrefixLength)

The Data Mdt Prefix Length parameter combines with the Data Mdt Prefix parameter to specify the range of SSM group addresses on which the router monitors traffic thresholds. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 0.
Description
DR Priority (drPriority)
The DR Priority parameter specifies the designated router priority for the current interface. The configured DR Priority parameter is sent in PIM Hello messages and is used by routers to elect the DR. The DR election priority is a 32-bit unsigned number and the numerically larger priority takes precedence. The range is 1 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 1.
194 PIM parameters
ECMP Balancing Enabled (ecmpBalance)

The ECMP Balancing Enabled parameter specifies whether the multicast balancing of traffic over ECMP links is enabled or not. If the parameter is enabled, each and every multicast stream that needs to be forwarded over an ECMP link will be re-evaluated for the total multicast utilization. Re-evaluation will happen on the ECMP interface in question. The default is enabled.
Group IP Address (groupAddress)

The Group IP Address parameter specifies the multicast group IP address. Specify an IPv4 multicast address in dotted-decimal format, or an IPv6 multicast address in colon-hexadecimal format.
Group Prefix Length (groupPrefixLength)

The Group Prefix Length parameter specifies the length of the bit mask that is associated with the Group IP Address parameter. The range is 0 to 32. The default is 24.
Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval)

The Hello Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, at which PIM transmits Hello messages on the routing instance. The range is 0 to 255. The default is 30.
Hello Multiplier (helloMultiplier)

The Hello Multiplier parameter, combined with the Hello Interval (seconds) parameter, specifies the frequency at which hello messages are sent to neighboring routers. A neighboring router is declared down if it does not respond within a period of 3.5 times the set hello interval. This time ratio can be altered by specifying a hello interval that follows the formula of (hello-interval * hello-multiplier)/10. The range is 20 to 100. The default is 35.
Hold Time (minutes) (ecmpBalanceHoldTime)

The Hold Time (minutes) parameter specifies the hold time in minutes that applies after an interface has been added to the ECMP link. The range is 1 to 600. The default is 1.
May 2009
194-5
194 PIM parameters
Improved assert (improvedAssert)

The Improved assert parameter specifies whether improved assert processing on this interface is enabled. The PIM assert process establishes a forwarder for a LAN and requires interaction between the control and forwarding planes. The assert process starts when an outgoing interface receives data and prevents the continuous receipt of data on this interface, which could affect performance. If the parameter is enabled, PIM performs the assert process entirely on the control plane without interaction with the forwarding plane. The options are:
true (default) false Infinity For Threshold (infinityForThreshold)

The Infinity For Threshold parameter specifies whether an SPT switchover threshold is enabled. If the value of this parameter is false, the Threshold parameter is enabled. The Threshold parameter allows you to specify the traffic volume, in kbps, when the device switches from the shared tree to the source-specific tree. The options are:
true false (default) IPv4 Administrative State (administrativeStateIpV4)

Up (default) Down IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence

See IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
IPv6 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequenceIpV6)

The IPv6 RPF Lookup Sequence parameter allows you to indicate which IPv6 routing tables PIM and MDSP use for standard unicast traffic and multicast RPF lookups. When the parameter option is set to Both, PIM and MDSP perform RPF lookups in the unicast routing table first. The options are:
Multicast Route Table Unicast Route Table (default) Both
194-6
May 2009
194 PIM parameters
Lag Usage Optimization (lagUsageOptimize)

The Lag Usage Optimization parameter specifies whether the router should optimize use of the LAG so that traffic for a given multicast stream destined for an IP interface using the LAG is sent only to the forwarding address that owns the LAG link.When this parameter is set to False, traffic will be sent to all the forwarding addresses that own at least one link in the LAG. Changing the value of this parameter causes the PIM protocol to be restarted. The options are:
True False (default) Level ID (levelId)

The Level ID parameter specifies the priority of the multicast CAC. The range is 0 to 8. Level 1 has the highest priority; level 8 has the lowest priority. The default is 0.
Level (level)
The Level parameter specifies the level ID to use when the value of matches the actual number of ports down in a LAG. The range is 1 to 8. The default is 1.
Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps)

See Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the mask that, combined with the Group IP Address parameter, is used to obtain the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises to become the Candidate RP. The range is 4 to 32. The default is 24.
Max Groups (maxGroups)

The Max Groups parameter specifies the maximum number of multicast groups for the interface. The range is 0 to 1600. The default is 0.
MDT Default Group Address (mdtGroupIPAddress)

The MDT Default Group Address parameter specifies the default group address used for the multicast distribution tree. The parameter is applicable only when its value corresponds to a multicast tunnel interface for a VPRN. For all other interfaces, this object has a value of 0.0.0.0. For the MDT Default Group Address parameter, specify a multicast IP address in dotted decimal notation that is not in the SSM range. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 with the exclusion of the 232.0.0.0/8 range, which is reserved for SSM. The default is 0.0.0.0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
May 2009
194-7
194 PIM parameters
Multicast Senders (multiCastSenders)

The Multicast Senders parameter specifies subnet matching for the data packets coming on the routing instance from the multicast senders. The default value is Auto, which specifies that the subnet of a packet entering the interface must match the subnet of the host. If the subnets do not match, the interface drops the packet. If the interface is unnumbered, or the host is on a different subnet from that of the interface, this parameter should be set to Always, meaning that packets do not go through the regular subnet check and are not dropped. If, for broadcast interfaces, there are no multicast senders, the Multicast Senders parameter should be set to Never. The options are:
Auto (default) Always Never Non DR Attract Traffic (nonDrAttractTraffic)

The Non DR Attract Traffic parameter specifies whether the router should ignore the designated router state and attract traffic even when it is not the designated router. If the value is set to true, the DR state is ignored. If the value is set to false, the DR state is honored. The default is false.
Number of Ports Down (numberOfPortsDown)

The Number of Ports Down parameter specifies the number of ports that are down. The range is 0 to 8. The default is 0.
Operational DR Priority (stickyDRPriority)

The Operational DR Priority parameter specifies the DR priority value that PIM sends in PIM hello messages following the election of this interface as the DR. The parameter is configurable when the Sticky DR parameter is enabled. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 1024.
Pack Data MDT Join Tlv (dataMdtJoinTlvPack)

The Pack Data MDT Join Tlv parameter specifies whether the packing of MDT join TLVs is enabled. If multiple Join TLVs are available at one time, PIM packs the Join TLVs into a single UDP packet. The packing makes more efficient use of packet buffers and assists convergence. The options are:
194-8
May 2009
194 PIM parameters
Peer IP Address (peerIPAddress)

The Peer IP Address parameter configures a peer in the anycast RP. The parameter value specifies the RP candidacy address that is configured on the other node in the anycast RP. Ensure that the address is the same for all peers in the anycast RP for a given multicast group address range. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
Note Alcatel-Lucent recommends a maximum of 15 multicast
addresses for each anycast RP.
Policy 1 (policy1)
Policy 2 (policy2)
Policy 3 (policy3)
Policy 4 (policy4)
Policy 5 (policy5)
RP IP Address (anycastRpIPAddress)
The RP IP Address parameter configures a PIM anycast protocol instance for the RP. Anycast enables fast convergence when a PIM RP router fails by allowing receivers and sources to rendezvous at the closest RP. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
RP Override (rpOverride)
The RP Override parameter allows the overriding of the dynamic group-to-RP mappings that are learned by the router. When the parameter value is true, static group-to-RP mappings take precedence over dynamic mappings. The options are:
May 2009
194-9
194 PIM parameters
SSM Group IP Address (ssmGroupIPAddress)

The SSM Group IP Address parameter specifies the SSM Group IP address, that, combined with the SSM Group Mask parameter value, provides the range of multicast group addresses that are used for Source Specific Multicast. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0, which means that the parameter is not configured.
SSM Group Mask (ssmGroupMask)

The SSM Group Mask parameter specifies the mask which, combined with the SSM Group IP address, provides the range of multicast group addresses to be used for Source Specific Multicast. The range is 4 to 32. The default is 24.
Static Group IP Address (staticGroupIPAddress)

The Static Group IP Address parameter is combined with the Static Group Mask parameter to obtain the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises to be the Static RP. The value of the Static Group IP Address parameter is sent as the RP address. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0, which specifies that the parameter is not set.
Static Group Mask (staticGroupMask)

The Static Group Mask parameter specifies the mask that, combined with the Static Group IP Address parameter, is used to create the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises the intention to become the static Candidate RP. The range is 4 to 32. The default is 24.
Static RP IP Address (staticRPIPAddress)

The Static RP IP Address parameter specifies the static RP address for the multicast groups. Specify a unicast IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Static RP IP Address parameter. The range is 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Sticky DR (stickyDR)
The Sticky DR parameter specifies whether PIM uses the Operational DR Priority parameter value as the priority value in PIM hello messages that egress the interface. This action helps avoid forwarding delays during DR recovery after a period of DR unavailability. When the parameter is enabled on an interface, the device continues to act as the DR after the previous DR returns to service. The options are:
false (default) true Three Way Hello (threeWayHello)

The Three Way Hello parameter specifies support for three-way hello. Table 194-2 describes the parameter options.
194-10
May 2009
194 PIM parameters Table 194-2 Three Way Hello parameter

Option Disabled Enabled Enabled Backward Compatible Option description Specifies support for two-way hello. Specifies support for three-way hello on the 7750 SR Release 5.0. Specifies support for three-way hello on the 7750 SR Releases 5.0, 4.0 R3, 4.0 R2, 3.0 R11, and 3.0 R10. Dependencies
Threshold (threshold)
The Threshold parameter specifies the traffic volume, in kbps, when the router switches from the shared tree to the source-specific tree. The router attempts a switchover only when the traffic rate on the shared tree for the group exceeds the configured threshold. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 294. The default is 0.
Tracking Support (trackingSupport)

The Tracking Support parameter provides message-tracking support. If the value of this parameter is set to true, the T bit in the LAN Prune Delay option of the Hello Message is set to allow the router to disable Join message suppression. The options are:
true false (default) Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps)

See Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
May 2009
194-11
194 PIM parameters
194-12
May 2009
195 RIP parameters
195.1 RIP parameters
195-2
May 2009
195-1
195 RIP parameters
195.1
RIP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the RIP property form, and child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for RIP.
Check Zero (checkZero)

The Check Zero parameter specifies whether to check for a 0 value in fields that must have a value of 0 in the RIP version 1 (RIPv1) or version 2 (RIPv2) packets. Table 195-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 195-1 Check Zero parameter
Option false (default) Option description Disable mandatory checking for 0 in the mandatory RIP version packets. Enable mandatory checking for 0 in the mandatory RIP version packets. Dependencies Allows RIP packets that do not contain a mandatory 0 value in the mandatory 0 packet fields RIP packets, with non-0 values in mandatory 0 value fields are allowed
true
Description
Flush (timerFlush)
The Flush parameter specifies how long, in seconds, a route is maintained in the RIP database after it is declared invalid. If the value of the parameter is exceeded, the route is removed from the RIP database. The range is 1 to 1200. The default is 120. The Flush, Timeout, and Update parameters are used as timers to determine the rate of RIP route updates and how long the routes are maintained.
Inherit Value
See Inherit Value in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Key
195-2
May 2009
195 RIP parameters
Message Size (messageSize)

The Message Size parameter specifies the maximum number of RIP routes that sent in each RIP update message. The range is 25 to 255. The default is 25.
Metric In (metricIn)
The Metric In parameter specifies, in hops, the metric value that is added to routes that are received from a RIP neighbor. When you apply an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values that are set using calculations involving the Metric In and Metric Out parameter values. The range is 1 to 16. The default is 1. When a RIP route is received from a neighbor, the metric value 1 is added to the hop count. When a router receives a routing update with new or different destination information, the metric value increases by 1. The maximum number of hops in a path is 15. When a RIP routing update with a metric value of 15 is received, and the route is updated, increasing the value by 1 causes the metric to reach 16, which represents a value of infinity. The destination of the route is then considered unreachable. When you set the parameter to 16, routes learned from a neighbor on a given interface are advertised in RIP route updates with a metric of 16, which eliminates counting-to-infinity problems.
Metric Out (metricOut)

The Metric Out parameter specifies, in hops, the metric value that is assigned to routes that are exported into RIP and advertised to RIP neighbors. When you apply an export policy to a RIP configuration, the policy overrides the metric values determined using protocol-driven calculations involving the Metric In and Metric Out parameter values. The range is 1 to 16. The default is 1. When a RIP route is received from a neighbor, the metric value 1 is added to the hop count. When a router receives a routing update with new or different destination information, the metric value increases by 1. The maximum number of hops in a path is 15. When a RIP routing update with a metric of 15 is received, and the route is updated, increasing the value by 1 causes the metric to reach 16, which represents a value of infinity. The destination of the route is then considered unreachable. When you set the parameter to 16, routes learned from a neighbor on a given interface are advertised in RIP route updates with a metric of 16, which eliminates counting-to-infinity problems.
Name
195 RIP parameters
Preference
Propagate RIP Metric (propagateRipMetric)

The Propagate RIP Metric parameter specifies that the RIP metric is used to set the MP-BGP MED attribute when RIP is used as the CE-PE routing protocol in a VPRN. This allows the RIP metric to be exchanged between PE routers. This parameter only applies to a VPRN RIP routing instance. The options are:
True False (default) Receive (receive)

The Receive parameter specifies the type of RIP route updates that are accepted and processed. Table 195-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 195-2 Receive parameter
Option RIPv1 Option description Receive only version 1 RIP packets. The RIP instance listens for and accepts packets sent to the broadcast address. Receive only version 2 RIP packets. The RIP instance listens for and accepts packets sent to the broadcast and multicast (224.0.0.9) addresses. Receive either RIP version1 or version 2 packets. The RIP instance listens for and accepts packets sent to the broadcast and multicast (224.0.0.9) addresses. Do not receive RIP packets. Dependencies
RIPv2
Both (default)
None
Does not allow for RIP route updates
195-4
May 2009
195 RIP parameters
Select Locale (domain)

The Select Locale parameter specifies the type of port selected as the RIP interface. The options are:
Access Network (default) Send (send)

The Send parameter specifies the type of RIP route update messages that are sent to neighbors. Table 195-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 195-3 Send parameter
Option None Option description Do not send RIP messages Dependencies The RIP interface only listens for route updates and does not forward route updates to other RIP neighbors. The router only needs to listen for and send messages to the broadcast address.
RIPv1 Broadcast RIPv2 Broadcast (default) RIPv2 Multicast
Send only RIPv1 messages to the broadcast address. Send only RIPv2 messages to the broadcast address. Send only RIPv2 messages to the multicast address.
Split Horizon (splitHorizon)

The Split Horizon parameter specifies whether split horizon with poison-reverse is used to protect RIP from problems such as counting to infinity. Poison-reverse means that routes, which are learned from a neighbor using an interface, are advertised in updates out of the same interface but with the Metric Out parameter set to 16, which is equivalent to infinity. Table 195-4 describes the parameter options.
Table 195-4 Split Horizon parameter
Option true (default) false Option description Enables split horizon and poison-reverse Disables split horizon, which allows routes to be advertised on the same interface on which they were learned with the metric increased by the Metric In parameter value. Dependencies The Metric Out parameter should be set to 16.
May 2009
195-5
195 RIP parameters
Timeout (timerTimeout)
The Timeout parameter specifies, in seconds, how long the router waits before a route is declared invalid. The invalid route persists in the RIP database. The range is 1 to 1200. The default is 180. The Flush, Timeout, and Update parameters are used as timers to determine the rate of RIP route updates and how long the routes are maintained.
Type (inheritanceMask)
Update (timerUpdate)
The Update parameter specifies how often RIP updates are sent. The range is 1 to 600 s. The default is 30 s. The Flush, Timeout, and Update parameters are used as timers to determine the rate of RIP route updates and how long the routes are maintained.
195-6
May 2009
196 RSVP parameters
196.1 RSVP parameters
196-2
May 2009
196-1
196 RSVP parameters
196.1
RSVP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the RSVP property form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for the RSVP.

Description
Enable Refresh Bypass (enableRefreshBypass)

The Enable Refresh Bypass parameter specifies whether the refresh reduction capabilities over all bypass tunnels originating on the PLR node are enabled. Since a bypass tunnel may merge with the primary LSP path in a node downstream of the next hop, there is no direct interface between the PLR and the MP node. Therefore, it is possible that the latter will not accept summary refresh messages received over the bypass. When Enable Refresh Bypass is disabled, the summary refresh messages on the node for all primary LSPs over the bypass tunnels they are associated with are disabled. The options are enabled or disabled. The default is enabled.
Enable Refresh Reduction (enableRefreshReduction)

The Refresh Reduction parameter specifies whether or not the use of the RSVP overhead refresh reduction capabilities on this RSVP interface is enabled. This parameter must be enabled if you want to enable the Reliable Delivery parameter. The options are: enabled or disabled. The default is disabled.
Enable Reliable Delivery (enableReliableDelivery)

The Reliable Delivery parameter specifies whether reliable delivery of RSVP messages over the RSVP interface is enabled. This is a technique used to improve scalability, reliability and performance of the RSVP TE protocol. In this technique, a MESSAGE_ID object is defined to reduce refresh message processing overhead by allowing the receiver to more readily identify an unchanged message. When it is supported by both peers, an RSVP message is sent with a MESSAGE_ID object. The receiver acknowledges reception by sending back an acknowledge message. This technique is used to detect message loss and support reliable RSVP message delivery on a per hop basis. Note that this parameter is only valid when Refresh Reduction is enabled. The options are: enabled or disabled. The default is disabled.
196 RSVP parameters
Hello Interval (milliseconds) (helloInterval)

The Hello Interval (milliseconds) parameter specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between RSVP hello messages. The range is 0 to 60 000, in multiples of 1000. The default is 3000. RSVP hello message packets are used to detect the loss of RSVP connectivity with a neighboring device. Hello message packets detect the loss of neighbors more quickly than when the RSVP session times out based on the refresh interval. After the loss of (2 Keep Multiplier parameter + 1) consecutive hello message packets, the neighbor is declared to be in a down state.
Keep Multiplier (keepMultiplier)

The Keep Multiplier parameter specifies a value used by the RSVP to declare that a reservation or the neighbor is down. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 3.
Key
Max Burst (maxBurst)

The Max Burst parameter specifies the maximum number of messages that are sent during the specified interval. The range is 10 to 1000 in multiples of 10. The default is 650.
Message Pacing (msgPacing)

The Message Pacing parameter allows the node to send a fixed number of RSVP messages in bursts during preset intervals. Message Pacing can reduce the number of dropped messages in networks. The options are:
false (default) true Period (milliseconds) (period)

The Period (milliseconds) parameter specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between message bursts. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Rapid Retransmit Time (hundred-milliseconds) (rapidRetransmitTime)

The Rapid Retransmit Time (hundred-milliseconds) parameter specifies the value of the rapid retransmission interval, in units of hundred-milliseconds. This is used in the retransmission algorithm, which is based on an exponential backoff timer in order to handle unacknowledged message objects. The Rapid Retransmit Time must be smaller than the regular refresh interval, which is the Refresh Time (refreshTime) parameter. The range is 1 to 100. The default is 5.
May 2009
196-3
196 RSVP parameters
Rapid Retry Limit (rapidRetryLimit)

The Rapid Retry Limit parameter is used in the retransmission algorithm, which is based on an exponential backoff timer in order to handle unacknowledged message objects. A node will stop retransmission of unacknowledged RSVP messages whenever the updated backoff interval exceeds the value set for the Refresh Time (refreshTime) parameter, or the number of retransmissions reaches the value set for the Rapid Retry Limit, whichever comes first. The range is 1 to 6. The default is 3.
Refresh Time (refreshTime)

The Refresh Time parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, between the successive Path and Resv refresh messages. The range is 1 to 65 535. The default is 30. The RSVP declares the session down after it misses consecutive refresh messages based on the following formula:
((Keep Multiplier parameter + 0.5) 1.5 Refresh Time parameter)
Subscription Ratio (subscriptionRatio)

The Subscription Ratio parameter specifies the percentage of the link bandwidth that the RSVP can use for reservation. The range is 0 to 1000. The default is 100. The parameter sets a limit for the amount of over-subscription or under-subscription that is allowed on the interface. When the parameter is set to 0, no new sessions are permitted on this interface. If the parameter setting is exceeded, RSVP rejects the reservation.
196-4
May 2009
197.1 Static Routes parameters
197-2
May 2009
197-1
197.1
Static Routes parameters

This chapter describes the parameters on the Static Routes property form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for static routes.
Auto-Assign ID

Destination (destination)
The Destination parameter, in combination with the Prefix Length parameter, specifies the IP address of the far-end device in the static route. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format.
Disallow IGP
See Disallow IGP (disallowIgp) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Drop Count (cpeDropCount)

The Drop Count parameter specifies how many consecutive ping replies must be missed to declare the CPE down and to deactivate the associated static route. The range is 1-255 and the default is 3.
Enable CPE Check (enableCpe)

The Enable CPE parameter allows configuration of the CPE check parameters when it is enabled. The CPE check parameters are hidden when it is disabled. The default is disabled.
Interval (seconds) (cpeInterval)

The Interval (seconds) parameter specifies the interval, in seconds, between ICMP pings to the target CPE IP address. The default is 1.
197-2
May 2009
IP Address (targetIpAddress)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the device at the end of the static route. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or, if IPv6 is enabled, an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. There is no default. The IP Address parameter, in the context of a static route, specifies that:
for indirect static routes, the parameter is an IP address not directly connected to
a network configured on this device. The destination can be reachable using multiple paths. The static route remains valid as long as the IP address configured as the indirect address remains a valid entry in the routing table. for next hop static routes, the parameter is an IP address on the network side or the access side on this device. This IP address must be associated with a network that is directly connected to a network configured on this device.
Log (cpeEnableLog)
The Log parameter specifies whether to enable the logging of transitions between active and in-active, based on the CPE connectivity check. The default is Disabled.
Mask (mask)
The Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask of the far-end device of the static route. Use the parameter and the Destination parameter to specify the address of the far-end device.
Metric (metric)
The Metric parameter specifies the cost for the static route. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 1. On the OmniSwitch, the Metric parameter can only be modified when creating a static route. The parameter is used when you import the static route into other protocols, such as OSPF. When the metric is configured as 0, the metric configured in the protocol, for example, OSPF, applies. When there are multiple static routes with the same Preference parameter setting, but different Metric parameter settings, the lower-cost route based on the Metric parameter is used.
Multicast Capable Peers (multicastCapablePeers)

The Multicast Capable Peers parameter specifies whether multicast capable BGP peers are displayed. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Preference

Prefix Length
Static Route ID (id)

The Static Route ID parameter specifies the unique ID number for the static route. The parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is set to Disabled. The parameter must be unique. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is the next available 5620 SAM-generated ID.
Target IP Address (cpeAddress)

The Target IP Address parameter specifies the IP address of the target CPE device. When this object is configured, ICMP pings will be sent to this target IP address to determine CPE connectivity and whether this static route should be active. There is no default.
Type (type)
The Type parameter specifies the type of static route. Table 197-1 describes the parameter options.
Option Next Hop (default) Option description Specifies that the directly connected next hop IP address is used to reach the destination address set using the Destination parameter This is the only option available when configuring OmniSwitch static routes. Indirect Specifies that the route is indirect and that the next hop IP address is used to reach the destination. The configured IP Address parameter for static routes is not directly connected to a network configured on this device. The destination can be reachable using multiple paths. The static route remains valid as long as the IP Address parameter configured as the indirect address remains a valid entry in the routing table. Black Hole Specifies that the route is a black hole route. If the destination address on a packet matches this static route, the packet is discarded into the black hole route. Indirect static routes cannot use an IP address prefix or subnet mask to another indirect static route Dependencies When the next hop is across an unnumbered interface, you can configure the Unnumbered Interface parameter
Unnumbered Interface (interfaceName)

The Unnumbered Interface parameter specifies an IP interface that has been configured as an unnumbered interface. To conserve IP addresses, unnumbered interfaces can be configured. The address used when generating packets on this interface is the IP address.
197-4
May 2009
198 LDP parameters
198.1 LDP parameters
198-2
May 2009
198-1
198 LDP parameters
198.1
LDP parameters
This chapter describes the parameters on the LDP form, and the child forms launched from the right-click contextual menu options for LDPs.
Address Type (addressType)

The Address Type parameter specifies the transport address to be used when you set up the LDP TCP sessions. Table 198-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 198-1 Address Type parameter
Option interface Option description Uses the IP interface address to set up the LDP session between neighbors Dependencies Cannot be set when there are multiple interfaces between two neighbors because only one LDP session can be set up between two neighbors
system (default)
Uses the system IP address
Administrative State (autoAdminState)

The Administrative State parameter specifies whether the LDP tree discovery process starts or stops. When the Administrative State is In Service, the LDP tree discovery process starts, and performs checks periodically on previously discovered paths. When the Administrative State is Out Of Service, the LDP tree discovery process and periodic checking on the discovered paths stop. The options are:
In Service Out Of Service (default) Advertised Label (advertisedLabel)

The Advertised Label parameter specifies the label value that is advertised to the upstream peer device. The range is 32 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 4 294 967 295, which specifies that the ingress label is dynamically assigned. When the parameter is not configured, the advertised label is drawn from the label pool. When the configured label is not available, then the IP prefix is not advertised.
Description
198-2
May 2009
198 LDP parameters
Discovery Interval (Minutes) (autoDiscIntvl)

The Discovery Interval (minutes) parameter specifies the number of minutes before repeating the LDP tree discovery process. The range is 60 to 1440. The default is 60.
Discovery Timeout (Seconds) (autoTrTimeOut)

The Discovery Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the number of seconds before a LSP trace request will timeout during the tree discovery. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 30.
Enforce Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart)

The Enforce Graceful Restart parameter specifies whether the device acts as a graceful restart helper for LDP peers. The options are:
Disabled (default) Enabled Forwarding Class (forwardingClass)

See Forwarding Class in section 93.1 for the parameter description.
Hello Factor (helloFactor)

The Hello Factor parameter specifies for an interface the number of LDP hello messages that should be sent on an idle LDP session within the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The range is 1 to 14. The default is 3. LDP hello messages are used to discover neighbors and to detect loss of connectivity with neighbors.
Hello Factor (targettedHelloFactor)

The Hello Factor parameter specifies for a targeted peer the number of LDP hello messages that should be sent on an idle LDP session within the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The range is 1 to 44. The default is 3. LDP hello messages are used to discover neighbors and to detect loss of connectivity with neighbors.
Hello Timeout (seconds) (helloTimeout)

The Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies for an interface, in seconds, the interval to wait before a neighbor is declared down. The range is 2 to 65 535. The default is 15.
May 2009
198-3
198 LDP parameters
The Hello Factor parameter derives the hello interval. The Hello Factor parameter setting is local to the system and sent in the LDP hello messages to the neighbor. LDP hello messages are used to discover neighbors and to detect loss of connectivity with neighbors. The Hello Factor parameter setting cannot be less than three times the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The hold time can be configured globally or for each interface. When an LDP session is set up, the hold time is negotiated to the value that is lower for the two peers. After an operational value is agreed upon, the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter is used to derive the value of the Hello Factor parameter.
Hello Timeout (seconds) (targettedHelloTimeout)

The Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies for a targeted peer, in seconds, the interval to wait before a neighbor is declared down. The range is 2 to 65 535. The default is 45. The Hello Factor parameter derives the hello interval. The Hello Factor parameter setting is local to the system and sent in the hello messages to the neighbor. The Hello Factor parameter setting cannot be less than three times the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The hold time can be configured globally or for each interface. When an LDP session is set up, the hold time is negotiated to the value that is lower for the two peers. After an operational value is agreed upon, the Hello Timeout (seconds) parameter is used to derive the value of the Hello Factor parameter.
IP Prefix (ipPrefix)
The IP Prefix parameter specifies the IP address prefix for the configured FEC. The value is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. There is no default.
Keep-Alive Factor (keepAliveFactor)

The Keep-Alive Factor parameter specifies for an interface the number of keep-alive messages that should be sent on an idle LDP session in the Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The range is 1 to 29. The default is 3. Keep-alive messages are used to prevent the LDP session from timing out when no LDP traffic is being exchanged between devices.
Keep-Alive Factor (targettedKeepAliveFactor)

The Keep-Alive Factor parameter specifies for a targeted peer the number of keep-alive messages that are sent on an idle LDP session in the Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) parameter interval. The range is 1 to 39. The default is 4. Keep-alive messages are used to prevent the LDP session from timing out when no LDP traffic is being exchanged between devices.
198-4
May 2009
198 LDP parameters
Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) (keepAliveTimeout)

The Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies for an interface, in seconds, the interval that LDP waits before tearing down the session. The Keep-Alive Factor parameter derives the keep-alive interval. The range is 2 to 65 535. The default is 30. If no LDP messages are exchanged for the configured time interval, the LDP session is torn down. Keep-alive messages are used to prevent the LDP session from timing out when no LDP traffic is being exchanged between devices. The parameter setting is typically three times the Keep-Alive Factor parameter value. To maintain the session permanently, regardless of inactivity, set the parameter to 0. When LDP session is set up, the keep-alive timeout value is negotiated to the lower of the two peers. After an operational value is agreed upon, the Keep-Alive Factor parameter value is used to derive the value of the keep-alive interval.
Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) (targettedKeepAliveTimeout)

The Keep-Alive Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies for a targeted peer, in seconds, the interval that LDP waits before tearing down the session. The Keep-Alive Factor parameter derives the keep-alive interval. The range is 2 to 65 535. The default is 40. If no LDP messages are exchanged for the configured time interval, the LDP session is torn down. The parameter setting is usually three times the Keep-Alive Factor parameter value. To maintain the session permanently, regardless of inactivity, set the parameter to 0. When an LDP session is set up, the keep-alive timeout value is negotiated to the lower of the two peers. After an operational value is agreed upon, the Keep-Alive Factor parameter value is used to derive the value of the keep-alive interval.
Key
LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix)

The LDP Prefix parameter specifies the address prefix of the destination node for a testTargetType of router. This parameter is specified when test TargetType is ldpPrefix. The value is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. The default is 0.0.0.0.
LDP Prefix Length (prefixLen)

The LDP Prefix Length parameter specifies the Internet address prefix length for the LDP based LSP for the OAM LDP Tree discovery test. The value of this parameter is valid only when LDP Prefix parameter has been specified. The range is 0 to 2040. The default is 32.
May 2009
198-5
198 LDP parameters
Maximum Failures (maxFailures)

See Maximum Failures (maxFailures) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Maximum Paths (autoMaxPaths)

The Maximum Paths parameter specifies the maximum number of paths that can be discovered for a selected FEC IP Address. The range is 1 to 128. The default is 128.
Maximum Paths (maxPaths)

The Maximum Paths parameter specifies the maximum number of paths that can be discovered for the given LDP. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 128.
Maximum Recovery Time (seconds) (maximumRecoveryTime)

The Maximum Recovery Time (seconds) parameter specifies the local maximum recovery time, in seconds, after the detection of a graceful restart. When the neighbor LSR advertises a non-zero Recovery Time to indicate that the MPLS forwarding state is preserved, the local LSR retains the label-to-FEC bindings for the lesser of the parameter value and the advertised recovery time. The parameter is configurable when the Enforce Graceful Restart parameter is enabled. The range is 15 to 1800. The default is 120.
Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive)

See Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Minimum TTL Value

See Minimum TTL Value (minTTLValue) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Maximum TTL (autoTrMaxTtl)

See Maximum TTL (autoTrMaxTtl) in section 199.1 for the parameter description.
Neighbor Liveness Time (seconds) (neighborLivenessTime)

The Neighbor Liveness Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that the LSR compares with the FT reconnect timeout advertised by the neighbor. The lesser of the values determines how long the LSR retains label-to-FEC bindings after the detection of a graceful restart. If the LSR does not establish an LDP session with the neighbor before this time elapses, the bindings are considered stale and are deleted. The parameter is configurable when the Enforce Graceful Restart parameter is enabled. The range is 5 to 300. The default is 120.
198-6
May 2009
198 LDP parameters
NE Persistent (nePersistent)
See NE Persistent (nePersistent) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Next Hop (nextHopAddr)

The Next Hop parameter specifies the next hop of the LSP. The parameter is configurable when the Next Hop Type parameter is set to IP Address. The range is an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format. There is no default.
Next Hop Type (nextHopType)

The Next Hop Type parameter specifies the type of next hop. Table 198-2 describes the parameter options.
Table 198-2 Next Hop Type parameter
Option unspecified (default) IP Address Pop Option description Specifies that the next hop has not been configured Specifies that the next hop is an IP address Specifies that there is no next hop Dependencies You must change the default to one of the two valid options: IP Address or Pop. You must configure the Next Hop Address parameter.
Number of Test Packets (packetsToSend)

The Number of Test Packets parameter specifies the number of test packets sent. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Packet History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows)

Probe Interval (seconds) (packetInterval)

See Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.

The Peer Address parameter specifies the IP address of the targeted LDP peer. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format or an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. Specify a DNS address in the form of a string. For an LDP peer, specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format.
May 2009
198-7
198 LDP parameters
Prefer Tunnel-in-Tunnel (preferTunnelInTunnel)

The Prefer Tunnel-in-Tunnel parameter specifies whether LDP tunnel-in-tunnel is preferred over link-level LDP tunnel. The parameter is available on the 7750 SR, 7450 ESS, and 7710 SR, Release 5.0 and later. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Prefix Length (prefixLength)

The Prefix Length parameter specifies the IP-address bitmask for the configured FEC. The range is 1 to 32. The default is 0, which means that the bitmask is unspecified.
Probe Interval (Minutes) (autoProbeIntvl)

The Probe Interval parameter specifies the number of minutes to wait before repeating a probe on a discovered path The range is 1 to 60. The default is 1.
Probe Timeout (Seconds) (packetTimeout)

See Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout) in section 145.1 for the parameter description.
Probe Timeout (Minutes) (autoPrTimeOut)

The Probe Timeout parameter specifies the time-out value, in minutes, for a ping request during probing. Probe Timeout cannot be greater than the value of the Probe Interval (minutes) (autoProbeIntvl) parameter. The range is 1 to 3. The default is 1.
198 LDP parameters
Profile (profile)
See Profile (profile) in section 93.1 for the parameter description.
Remote Peer (peerAddress)

The Remote Peer parameter specifies the IP address of the targeted LDP peer to determine the address for MD5 authentication.
Retry Count (autoPrMaxFailures)

The Retry Count parameter specifies the maximum number of consecutive timeouts allowed before failing a path probe. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 3.
Retry Count (autoTrMaxFailures)

The Retry Count parameter specifies the maximum number of consecutive timeouts allowed before terminating an LSP trace request to a hop. The range is 1 to 10. The default is 3.
Return Code(returnCode)
See OAM diagnostics return codes in section 55.7 for the parameter description.
Retry Counter(retryCount)
The Retry Counter parameter specifies the maximum number of consecutive timeouts allowed before failing a path probe. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 3.
Swap Label (swapLabel)

The Swap Label parameter specifies the egress label associated with the next hop. The LSR switches the incoming label with the configured swap label. The range is 16 to 1 048 575, or 4 294 967 295, indicating that the parameter is disabled. The default is 4 294 967 295. The default action is for the LSR to pop the incoming label if the Next Hop parameters are unspecified. The parameter is configurable when the Next Hop Type parameter is set to IP Address.
Targeted Sessions Allowed (targettedSessions)

The Targeted Sessions Allowed parameter specifies whether to configure the router for T-LDP. Table 198-3 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
198-9
198 LDP parameters Table 198-3 Targeted Sessions Allowed parameter

Option true (default) Option description Enable T-LDP on the router. Targeted LDP sessions are used to distribute labels between non-directly connected peers. The discovery messages are sent to the specific peer, rather than to the multicast address. false Disable T-LDP. Dependencies

The Time Out parameter specifies the time-out value, in seconds, for an LSP trace request during tree discovery. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 30.
Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy)

See Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy) in section 134.1 for the parameter description.
Tree Trace (autoRowStatus)

The Tree Trace parameter specifies the configuration state of the LDP ECMP OAM trace tree. The options are:
Not Configured (default) Configured Unspecified Tunnel Down Damp Time (seconds) (tunnelDownDampTime)
The Tunnel Down Damp Time (seconds) parameter specifies how long, in seconds, an LDP waits before sending a tunnel down event to the route table manager. The range is 0 to 20. The default is 3. A value of 0 specifies that tunnel down event messages are not sent.
Tunneling Enabled (tunnelingEnabled)

The Tunneling Enabled parameter specifies whether tunneling of LDP over RSVP tunnels is enabled. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Type

198-10
May 2009
199.1 Common network navigation tree parameters
199-2
May 2009
199-1
199.1
Common network navigation tree parameters

This chapter describes the parameters that are common to the network navigation tree forms and child forms.
Action (action)
Included (default) Excluded Administrative State (administrativeState)

Up (default) Down Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast)

The Allow Directed Broadcasts parameter specifies whether the forwarding of directed broadcasts from the IP interface is enabled. A directed broadcast is a packet that is received on a local device interface destined for the subnet broadcast address of another IP interface. The parameter enables or disables the transmission of packets destined to the subnet broadcast address of the egress IP interface. The options are:

When enabled, a frame destined to the local subnet on this IP interface is sent as a subnet broadcast from this interface. When disabled (default) frames are not broadcast from this interface.
Caution Enabling the parameter allows direct broadcasts. Allowing direct broadcasts is a well-known mechanism used for denial-of-service attacks.
Auto-Assign ID (id)
199-2
May 2009

The BFD Enabled parameter specifies whether bi-directional forwarding detection is enabled for the interface. When the value is configured to true, the interface can establish BFD sessions and use a BFD for signaling. When the value is configured to false, the interface cannot use BFD. The options are:
True False (default) Broadcast (broadcast)

The Broadcast parameter specifies whether to allow SNTP broadcasts to be received on the IP interface. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat)

The Broadcast Address Format parameter specifies how to override the default broadcast address used by the IP interface when IP broadcasts are sourced on the IP interface. Table 199-1 describes the parameter options.
Table 199-1 Broadcast Address Format parameter
Option Host Ones (default) Option description Host Ones specifies that the local broadcast address used by the IP interface for this IP address is the subnet broadcast address. This is an IP address that corresponds to the local subnet specified by the IP address and Subnet Mask parameters with all the host bits set to binary 1. For example, for the subnet 10.10.16.0/20, the address would be 10.10.31.255. All Ones All Ones specifies that the broadcast address used by the IP interface for this IP address is 255.255.255.255, which is also known as the local broadcast. Dependencies
Cflowd Type (cflowdType)

The Cflowd Type parameter specifies whether to collect traffic flow samples through a device for analysis. This is also known as network performance statistics. The statistics are used for network planning and traffic engineering, capacity planning, security, and user profiling, performance monitoring, and SLA measurement. Table 199-2 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
199-3
199 Common network navigation tree parameters Table 199-2 Cflowd Type parameter
Option None (default) ACL Interface Option description Do not collect statistics on the network interface. Collect statistics associated with an ACL filter. Collect statistics associated with an IP interface. Dependencies
Class (rtrInterfaceClass)
The Class parameter specifies an IP interface as an unnumbered interface or an IP address as the numbered interface and then the IP address to be used for the numbered interface. To conserve IP addresses, unnumbered interfaces can be configured. The address used to generate packets on an unnumbered interface is the configured IP Address parameter. Table 199-3 describes the parameter options.
Table 199-3 Class parameter
Option Unnumbered Option description The interface to associate with the unnumbered IP address in dotted-decimal notation. The configured IP address must exist on the device. The IP address to associate with the numbered IP interface in dotted decimal notation. The configured IP address must exist on the device. Dependencies
Numbered (default)
Constraint Admin State (mCacConstAdminState)

The Constraint Admin State parameter specifies whether the constraints of the multicast CAC policy are administratively up. The options are:
Up (default) Down Description (description)

The Description parameter specifies a unique description for the routing instance interface or other routing object. The range is generally 0 to 80 characters. The range may vary depending on the configuration form. The default is generally an empty string.
199-4
May 2009
Disallow IGP (disallowIgp)

The Disallow IGP parameter specifies whether to allow or disallow the IGP next hop from being used. If Disallow IGP is set and no LSP qualifies as a next hop, the static route will become inactive. If Disallow IGP is not set and the LSPs far end is reachable using the IGP, the static route remains up, regardless of the LSP status. The options are:

When the parameter is set to true, and no tunnel qualifies as the next hop, the next hop to the indirect next hop address is not used. When the parameter is set to false, the indirect next hop address is used as the next hop of last resort.
Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId)

The Egress Filter ID parameter specifies the ID of the egress ACL. The ACL is used to prevent traffic from specified addresses from being forwarded from the interface.
Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState)

The Enable DHCP Relay parameter specifies the administrative state for DHCP relay. DHCP discover messages are broadcast packets that typically do not leave the IP subnet. DHCP relay agents are used to intercept the requests and forward them as unicast messages to a DHCP server. The options are:
Up Down (default) Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync)

The Enable LDP Synchronization parameter specifies whether IGP-LDP synchronization is enabled on all interfaces in the IS-IS or OSPF routing protocol. When the value is set to enable (default), during a failure, IGP will temporarily set the link cost to infinity to allow IGP and LDP to converge. Once the timer expires, the actual cost is restored. When the value is set to disabled, IGP and the LDP will converge independently. The options are:
enabled (default) disabled Family (family)

The Family parameter specifies the types of routing information that are distributed by a BGP instance. Table 199-4 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
199-5
199 Common network navigation tree parameters Table 199-4 Family parameter
Option L2 VPN Option description Enable L2 VPN. Dependencies Required to enable BGP Auto-discovery in LDP VPLS. Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP. Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP on the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP, and to routing policy entries Applies to routing policy entries Applies to routing policy entries on the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP, and to routing policy entries NEs that support IPv4 VPRN services require this option. The RD must be unique within the scope of the VPRN to allow overlap of the IP address prefixes in different VRFs. Applies to global-, peer-, and peer-group-level BGP, and to routing policy entries on the 7710 SR and 7750 SR, Release 5.0 and later NEs that support IPv6 VPRN services require this option. The RD must be unique within the scope of the VPRN to allow overlap of the IP address prefixes in different VRFs.
IPv4 (default) IPv6
Enable IPv4. Enable IPv6.
Multicast IPv4
Enable MP-BGP for the exchange of IPv4 multicast data. Enable the exchange of IPv4 unicast data. Enable the exchange of IPv6 unicast data.
Unicast IPv4 (default) Unicast IPv6
VPN IPv4
Enable MP-BGP for the exchange of IPv4 routes in VPRN services. The distributed information includes an RD and the IP address prefix. When both IPv4 and IPv6 VPRN services are enabled, the PE router uses the same 8-byte RD for both address families.
VPN IPv6
Enable MP-BGP for the exchange of IPv6 routes in VPRN services. The distributed information includes an RD and the IP address prefix. When both IPv4 and IPv6 VPRN services are enabled, the PE router uses the same 8-byte RD for both address families.
Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart)

The Graceful Restart parameter specifies whether to allow graceful restart for this routing instance. A graceful restart allows a router to restart or reload device software as it continues to forward data. The options are:

The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv2 in a VPRN.
Group IP Address
Table 199-5 lists where to find more information about the Group IP Address parameter.
199-6
May 2009
199 Common network navigation tree parameters Table 199-5 Group IP Address parameter
Parameter Group IP Address for the Candidate RP Group IP Address for SPT Switchover Threshold See Group IP Address (groupIPAddress) in this section Group IP Address (groupAddress) in this section
Group IP Address (groupAddress)

The Group IP Address parameter is the multicast group IP address that is associated with the spanning tree switchover threshold. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Group IP Address (groupIPAddress)

The Group IP Address parameter combines with the Mask (mask) parameter to obtain the range of multicast group addresses to which the router advertises to be the candidate RP. The value of the Group IP Address parameter is sent as the RP address. The range is an IP address from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default is 0.0.0.0.
Helper Mode (grHelperMode)

The Helper Mode parameter specifies whether the instance will assist in the graceful restart of another router instance. The parameter is configurable when the Graceful Restart parameter is set to true. The options are:
true (default for IS-IS) false (default for OSPF)

The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv2 in a VPRN.
IGP Inhibit (igpInhibit)

The IGP Inhibit parameter specifies whether the secondary IP address should not be recognized as a local interface by the running IGP. The options are:

The parameter is configurable when the Primary parameter is not enabled. When the parameter is enabled, OSPF and IS-IS are not used as passive interfaces, and are not advertised as internal IP interfaces into the IGP link state database. When the parameter is enabled, RIP does not use the secondary IP addresses as source for RIP updates.
May 2009
199-7
IGP Shortcut (igpShortcut)

The IGP Shortcut parameter specifies whether or to use Layer 2 tunnels as next hops for prefixes associated with the far-end termination point of the tunnel. The options for LDP are:
enabled disabled
When the parameter is enabled, IGP shortcuts associated with the tunnel resolve next hops.
Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId)

The Ingress Filter ID parameter specifies the ID of the ingress ACL. The ACL is used to prevent traffic from specified addresses from being sent to the interface.
Inherit Value
The Inherit Value parameter specifies whether to re-use an existing configuration setting for a parameter. The Inherit Value check boxes are located next to the parameters that can inherit a value from the parent object. For example, when you create a BGP peer group, you can inherit values set at the parent BGP global level. The options are:

When you choose the Disabled option, you can specify a new value for the parameter.
Interface Name (routerName)

The Interface Name parameter specifies the routing policy filter of label bindings based on matching bindings received from a neighbor or neighbors adjacent over the interface specified by the parameter. The parameter is configurable on the 7750 SR. The range is an interface name of 0 to 32 characters. The default is an empty string.
IP Address (primaryIpAddress)
The IP Address parameter specifies the IP address for the object. An IP address must be assigned to each IP interface. An IP address and a subnet mask create an IP prefix. The defined IP prefix must be unique within the context of the routing instance. The prefix must not overlap with other IP prefixes that are defined as local subnets on other IP interfaces in the same routing context within the device. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal format, or, if IPv6 is enabled, an IPv6 address in colon-hexadecimal format. There is no default.
199-8
May 2009
IPv4 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence)

The RPF Lookup Sequence parameter allows you to indicate which routing tables PIM and MDSP use for standard unicast traffic and multicast RPF lookups. When the parameter option is set to Both, PIM and MDSP perform RPF lookups in the unicast routing table first. The options are:
Multicast Route Table Unicast Route Table (default) Both IPv6 Allowed (ipv6Allowed)
The IPv6 Allowed parameter specifies whether an IPv6 addressing scheme is valid for the interface. The options are:
enabled disabled (default) Key (key)

The Key parameter specifies the authentication key that is used by routers to authenticate each other during a protocol session. The key value must consist of 7-bit ASCII characters. The parameter is configurable when the encryption type is MD5. There is no default. Table 199-8 lists the ranges for different protocols.
Table 199-6 Key parameter
Protocol BGP IS-IS LDP MSDP OSPF RIP RSVP Range (characters) 0 to 255 0 to 254 1 to 16 0 to 255 1 to 16 0 to 16 0 to 16
Lease Populate (leasePopulate)

The Lease Populate parameter specifies the number of DHCP lease state entries that are allowed for the IES or VPRN SAP. Enabling the parameter also enables DHCP snooping. The range is 0 to 8000. There is no default. Setting the parameter to 0 specifies that dynamic host lease state management for the interface is disabled. DHCP snooping on the SAP obtains the lease state information for a host from a DHCP ACK message that is sent by a DHCP server to the host. Entries in the DHCP lease state table remain valid for the duration of the IP address lease.
LDP (ldp)
The LDP parameter specifies whether the IGP short cut will use LDP tunnels as next hops for prefixes associated with the far-end termination point of the tunnel. This parameter is configurable when the static route Type parameter is set to indirect. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) LDP Synchronization Timer (ldpSyncTimer)

The LDP Synchronization Timer parameter specifies a time interval (seconds) used for IGP-LDP synchronization after a failure. The timer starts when the LDP session is up and running over the interface and the FEC bindings are exchanged. When the timer expires, the link cost is restored and re-advertised. IPG announces a new best hop that the LDP can use if the label binding for the neighbors FEC is available. This parameter can be set when the Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync) parameter is set to enabled. The range is 0 to 1800 seconds. The default is 0.
MAC Address (physicalAddress)

The MAC Address parameter specifies a 48-bit MAC address for the object in unicast MAC address format. Only one MAC address can be assigned to an IP interface. The default is 00-00-00-00-00-00.
Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth)

The Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter specifies the bandwidth pre-reserved for mandatory type BTV channels on a given interface. The Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter combines with the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter to establish the bandwidth assigned to traffic on an interface using a multicast CAC policy. Table 199-7 describes the parameter options.
Table 199-7 Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) parameter
Mandatory Bandwidth 0 1 (1 of 2) Unconstrained Bandwidth 0 1 Result No channels are allowed. All mandatory and optional channels are allowed.
199-10
May 2009
Mandatory Bandwidth Equal to the value in the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter Less than the value in the Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) parameter (2 of 2)
Unconstrained Bandwidth
Result All mandatory channels configured for the multicast CAC policy associated with the interface are allowed. Optional channels are not allowed. All mandatory channels configured for the multicast CAC policy associated with the interface are allowed. Optional channels are allowed depending on bandwidth availability.
The range is 1 to 22 147 483 647. The default is 1. When the Unconstrained Bandwidth parameter is set to either 1 or 0, the Mandatory Bandwidth parameter defaults to the same value. The Mandatory Bandwidth value must be less than or equal to the Unconstrained Bandwidth value.
Mask Reply (maskReply)

The Mask Reply parameter specifies whether to allow responses to ICMP mask requests on the interface. When a local device sends an ICMP mask request to the interface and the parameter is enabled, the router interface replies to the request. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Minimum TTL Value (minTTLValue)

The Minimum TTL Value parameter specifies the expected TTL value of a packet received from a valid neighbor to prevent BGP or LDP packet spoofing. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 0, which disables TTL.
Maximum TTL (autoTrMaxTtl)

The Maximum TTL Value parameter specifies maximum label time-to-live value for an LSP trace request during the tree discovery. The range is 1 to 255. The default is 30.
Multicast Import (multicastImport)

The Multicast Import parameter specifies whether IGP routes are submitted to the multicast routing table. The options are:

The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv3, or in a VPRN.
May 2009
199-11
The Name parameter specifies the name of the created object. The range is 1 to 32 characters. The default is generally an empty string.
Network Policy ID (networkPolicyId)

The Network Policy ID parameter specifies the ID of the network policy that is used to determine the priority and handling of traffic on the network port.
Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig)

The Number of Packet Too Big parameter specifies the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem)

The Number of Param Problem parameter specifies the number of ICMP Param Problem messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Param Problem (paramProblem) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects)

The Number of Redirects parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP Redirect messages that the interface issues in the time specified by the Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Redirects (redirects) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded)

The Number of Time Exceeded parameter specifies the number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages that the interface issues in the interval specified by the Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired)

The Number of TTL Expired parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP TTL Expired messages that the interface can issue in the time specified by the TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the TTL Expired (ttlExpired) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
199-12
May 2009
Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable)

The Number of Unreachables parameter specifies the maximum number of ICMP Unreachable messages that the interface can issue in the time specified by the Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Unreachables (unreachables) parameter is enabled. The range is 10 to 1000. The default is 100.
Packet Too Big (packetTooBig)

The Packet Too Big parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Packet Too Big messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) and Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) parameters.
Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime)

The Packet Too Big Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages specified by the Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Param Problem (paramProblem)

The Param Problem parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Packet Too Big messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem) and Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) parameters.
Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime)

The Param Problem Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages specified by the Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Param Problem (paramProblem) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
May 2009
199-13
Physical Address (physicalAddress)

The Physical Address parameter specifies a 48-bit MAC address for the static ARP network interface in the unicast MAC address format. Only one physical address can be assigned to an IP interface.
PIM RP Delayed Up Period (pimRPDelayedUpPeriod)

The PIM RP Delayed Up Period parameter specifies delay before a PIM is in service. The range is 0 to 300. The default is 0.
Policy 1 (policy1)
The Policy 1 and Policy 2 to Policy 5 parameters specify the names of import and export route policies used to determine which routes are sent to peers and which routes are advertised to peers. When multiple Policy 1 to Policy 5 parameters are specified, the policies are evaluated in the order in which they are specified. The first policy that matches is applied. Use the Select button next to the Policy 1 and Policy 2 to Policy 5 parameters to choose a policy from the list of policies. You must set the Apply Import Route Policy parameter to true to specify import route policies. You must set the Apply Export Route policy parameter to true to specify export route policies. For example, for RIP routing, import route policies determine which routes are accepted by RIP neighbors. Export route policies determine which routes are exported from the route table to RIP. For LDP routing, the import route policy filters are based on the received LDP label bindings. When the imported label bindings are received, filtering is based on additional parameters specified for the import route policy, including neighbors, interfaces, or the specified prefix list. For export route policy filters, label binding advertisements to other devices can be filtered based on a prefix list. For PIM routing, policies determine how the PIM join-prune messages, PIM register messages, and PIM bootstrap messages are filtered. For proxy neighbor discovery, policies determine the interfaces that respond to neighbor discovery queries intended for other interfaces.
Policy 2 (policy2)
See the Policy 1 (policy1) parameter in this section for more information.
Policy 3 (policy3)
Policy 4 (policy4)
199-14
May 2009
Policy 5 (policy5)
Preference (preference)
The Preference parameter specifies the preference of this route compared to:
routes that are advertised by other routing protocols routes to external sites, such as IS-IS external preferences
The lower the value, the higher the chance that the route is the active route. The default value for the parameter depends on the type of route that is being configured. The range is 0 or 1 to 255. Table 199-8 lists the default values for different route types.
Table 199-8 Preference parameter
Option description Directly attached Static route All BGP routes IS-IS level 1 internal routes IS-IS level 2 internal routes IS-IS level 1 external routes IS-IS level 2 external routes OSPF internal routes OSPF external routes RIP routes Default 0 5 170 15 18 160 165 10 150 100 Dependencies Cannot be configured Configurable
When you modify the preference of an existing static route, the preference metric value is not changed unless specified. Different protocols should not be configured with the same preference. If this occurs, the tie breaker is based on the default preference for each protocol, as listed in Table 199-8. If multiple routes are learned with an identical preference using the same protocol, the lowest-cost route is used.

When combined with an IP address value, the Prefix Length parameter specifies a local IP prefix. The defined IP prefix must be unique within the context of the routing instance. The prefix must not overlap with other existing IP prefixes that are defined as local subnets on other IP interfaces in the same routing context within the device or service. The range is 1 to 32 for an IPv4 address and 1 to 128 for an IPv6 address. A value of 32 is typically reserved for an IPv4 system address, but is available for general use in IPv6. The IPv4 default is 24; the IPv6 default is 64.
May 2009
199-15
Primary (isPrimary)
The Primary parameter specifies whether the IP address that is associated with the IP interface is an IP address from a set of actual interface addresses. For example, when VRRP sends advertisements to the network and the parameter is enabled, the primary IP address is used. The options are:
Enabled (default) Disabled Redirects (redirects)

The Redirects parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Redirect messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) and Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) parameters.
Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime)

The Redirects Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Redirect messages specified by the Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Redirects (redirects) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Router ID (routingInstanceId)
The Router ID parameter is an IP address that uniquely identifies the router within an AS. In protocols such as OSPF, routing information is exchanged between areas, which are groups of networks that share routing information. The parameter can be set to the same value as the loopback address. The value is used by both OSPF and BGP in the routing table manager instance. Specify an IPv4 address in dotted-decimal notation.
Server 1 (server1)
Server 2 (server2)
199-16
May 2009
Server 3 (server3)
Server 4 (server4)
Server 5 (server5)
Server 6 (server6)
Server 7 (server7)
Server 8 (server8)
Service ID (serviceID)
The Service ID parameter specifies a unique ID for the service. This parameter is configurable when the Auto-Assign ID parameter is disabled. The range is 1 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 0, which indicates that the parameter is not set.
Subnet Mask (netMask)

The Subnet Mask parameter specifies the subnet mask for an IP address. An IP address and a subnet mask create a local IP prefix. The defined IP prefix must be unique within the context of the routing instance. It cannot overlap with other existing IP prefixes defined as local subnets on other IP interfaces in the same routing context within the device. The range is 1 to 24, 31 and 32. The default is 32. Subnet mask 32 is reserved for system IP addresses. You can configure subnet mask 31 for interfaces that are used by routing protocols.
Tag (staticRouteTag)
The Tag parameter specifies an identifier for the static route. The range is 0 to 4 294 967 295. The default is 0.
May 2009
199-17
TE Metric (teMetric)
The TE Metric parameter specifies the particular traffic engineering metric for this interface. If the TE Metric parameter is enabled, then it may be used in CSPF computations of the LSP paths. If the TE Metric parameter is not enabled, then the native IGP parameter is used in CSPF computations of the LSP paths. The range is 0 to 16777216. The default is 0.
TE Metric Enabled (teMetricEnabled)

The TE Metric Enable parameter specifies whether the TE Metric is used for the purpose of the LSP path computation by CSPF. When this parameter is disabled, the IGP metric is used to compute the path of the LSP by CSPF. The options are:
Enabled Disabled (default) Time Exceeded (timeExceeded)

The Time Exceeded parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Time Exceeded messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) and Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) parameters.
Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime)

The Time Exceeded Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages specified by the Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.

The Timeout (seconds) parameter specifies the minimum time, in seconds, an ARP entry learned on the IP interface is stored in the ARP table. ARP entries are automatically refreshed when an ARP request or gratuitous ARP is detected from an IP host. Otherwise, the ARP entry is aged from the ARP table. The range is 0 to 65 535. The default is 14 400. When the parameter is set to 0, ARP aging is disabled.
Trusted (Trusted)
199-18
May 2009
199 Common network navigation tree parameters Table 199-9 Trusted parameter
Option false (default) true Option description The device discards the DHCP request. The device forwards the DHCP request. The device acting as the DHCP relay agent modifies the giaddr value to be equal to that of the ingress interface. Use this option when the Action parameter is set to Keep and the affected service is IES or VPRN.
TTL Expired (ttlExpired)

The TTL Expired parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues TTL Expired messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) and TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) parameters.
TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime)

The TTL Expired Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP TTL Expired messages specified by the Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the TTL Expired (ttlExpired) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
Type
Table 199-10 lists where to find more information about the Type parameter.
Parameter Type for Authentication Type for L3 interface See Type (authenticationType) in this section Type (interfaceType) in the section
Type (authenticationType)
The Type parameter specifies the type of authentication that is used for neighboring routers before a protocol session is set up. Table 199-11 describes the parameter options.
May 2009
199-19
199 Common network navigation tree parameters Table 199-11 Type parameter
Option none (default) md5 password Option description There is no authentication used before a protocol session is started. MD5 authentication is used between the devices involved in a protocol session. A password is used to authenticate devices involved in a protocol session. Dependencies This option is available only for RIP, IS-IS, and VRRP and requires an authentication string to pass between the devices in a protocol session. The authentication string is generally configured using the Password parameter or the Key parameter.
Type (interfaceType)
The Type parameter specifies the type of OSPF or IS-IS interface. Table 199-12 describes the parameter options.
Option Broadcast Point to Point Option description Maintains this interface as a broadcast network Maintains this interface as a point-to-point link Dependencies The default value depends on the type of interface. SONET channels default to Point to Point. Ethernet interfaces default to broadcast. Adjacency and network convergence are improved when interfaces are configured as broadcast. Point to point should be configured for two connected devices, even when the network is a broadcast medium, such as Ethernet.
Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth)

The Unconstrained Bandwidth parameter specifies the bandwidth assigned to BTV traffic on an interface using a multicast CAC policy. If the default value of 1 is set, then the value will be set to the physical bandwidth available for the interface. If a value of 0 is set, and if a multicast CAC policy is assigned to the interface, BTV traffic from that policy is not allowed on the interface. The range is 0 to 2 147 483 647. The default is 1.
Unicast Import (unicastImport)

The Unicast Import parameter specifies whether IGP routes are submitted to the unicast routing table. The options are:
True (default) False

The parameter is not configurable for OSPFv3, or in a VPRN.
199-20
May 2009
Unreachables (unreachables)
The Unreachables parameter specifies whether the rate at which the interface issues ICMP Unreachable messages is configurable. The options are:

When the parameter is enabled, the rate at which the messages are issued is controlled by the Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable) and Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) parameters.
Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime)

The Unreachables Time (seconds) parameter specifies the time, in seconds, during which the interface can issue the number of ICMP Unreachable messages specified by the Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable) parameter. The parameter is configurable when the Unreachables (unreachables) parameter is enabled. The range is 1 to 60. The default is 10.
May 2009
199-21
199-22
May 2009
Glossary
Numerics
10/100/1000Base-FX 100Base-T 10/100Base-TX 5620 NM A networking standard that supports data transfer rates of up to 1000 Mb/s over two optical fibers. A networking standard that supports data transfer rates of up to 100 Mb/s using standard twisted-pair telephone wire. A networking standard that supports data transfer rates of up to 100 Mb/s using two pairs of data-grade, twisted-pair telephone wire. 5620 Network Manager The 5620 NM provides advanced management of large, complex LAN/WAN networks, including hybrid circuit-switched, IP/MPLS, ATM, frame relay, and X.25 networks. The GUI operates on a Sun workstation. It can be used to configure databases, monitor network operation in real time, set up and manage paths, and perform diagnostics to isolate and manage problems on the network. With the addition of optional software modules, the 5620 NM can perform advanced management functions such as managing multivendor equipment, interfacing with UMS, and partitioning networks. 5620 SAM 5620 Service Aware Manager The 5620 SAM is the network manager portfolio of modules for the 7750 SR, 7710 SR, 7705 SAR, 7450 ESS, 7250 SAS, and Telco devices. 5620 SAM auxiliary server In a 5620 SAM system that is deployed using distributed server architecture, a 5620 SAM server instance on a dedicated station that accepts processing requests from, and is directed by, a 5620 SAM main server. A main server and one or more auxiliary servers that are in communication are collectively called a 5620 SAM server cluster.
May 2009 GL-1
Glossary
5620 SAM client 5620 SAM database
The 5620 SAM client provides a GUI to configure IP network elements. The 5620 SAM database stores network data-model objects and network configuration information.
5620 SAM main server A server instance in the 5620 SAM distributed server architecture that directs one or more 5620 SAM auxiliary servers and interacts with 5620 SAM clients. The term is meaningful only in the context of a distributed 5620 SAM server deployment; the term 5620 SAM server applies to a single server instance in a non-distributed 5620 SAM deployment. A main server and one or more auxiliary servers that are in communication are collectively called a 5620 SAM server cluster. 5620 SAM server The 5620 SAM server mediates between the 5620 SAM database, the 5620 SAM client, and the network. A 5620 SAM server may be a single server instance or, in a distributed server architecture, a server cluster that consists of one main server and one or more auxiliary servers. A logical grouping in a distributed 5620 SAM server configuration that consists of a 5620 SAM main server and the 5620 SAM auxiliary servers in communication with it. 5620 SAM Assurance The 5620 SAM-A provides service assurance functionality. 5620 SAM-E 5620 SAM Element Manager The 5620 SAM-E provides network element configuration and management functionality. 5620 SAM-O 5620 SAM Open Interfaces The 5620 SAM-O provides an XML interface for OSS applications to interact with the 5620 SAM. 5620 SAM-P Alcatel 5620 SAM Provisioning The 5620 SAM-P provides service provisioning functionality. 5750 SSC 5750 Subscriber Services Controller The 5750 SSC is a subscriber and service management solution that administers centralized, reliable, flexible control to deploy user-driven and user-centric triple play broadband services. 6over4 tunneling 6over4 tunneling is a network mechanism that is part of the transition from IPv4 usage to the adoption of IPv6. This mechanism allows the transmission of IPv6 packets through a multicast-enabled IPv4 network. 7250 Service Access Switch A CE L2/L3 switch that provides VLAN, bridging, and TDM backhauling functionality and supports MPLS, Ethernet, and circuit emulation.
5620 SAM server cluster 5620 SAM-A
7250 SAS
GL-2
May 2009
Glossary
7250 SAS-ES
7250 Service Access Switch-Enhanced Services The 7250 SAS-ES is physically identical to the standard 7250 SAS with the addition of two GigE uplink ports. The 7250 SAS-ES supports all features available in the 7250 SAS plus enhanced features such as H-QoS, resource reservation protocol with traffic engineering (RSVP-TE), MPLS fast reroute (FRR), and VPLS in a ring topology.
7250 SAS-ESA
7250 Service Access Switch Enhanced Services Advanced The 7250 SAS-ESA supports all of the features of the 7250 SAS-ES with the addition of dry contacts functionality. A connector on the back of the chassis can monitor the status of sensors connected to external co-located equipment. If the state of a sensor changes, an SNMP trap is sent to the 5620 SAM, which then raises an alarm. Based on how the alarm condition has been configured, the opening of a contact either raises or clears the alarm.
7301 ASAM
7301 Advanced Services Access Manager A high-bandwidth, multimedia-ready DSLAM that provides DSL-based high-speed data transmission between a residential subscriber host and an ATM network.
7450 ESS
7450 Ethernet Service Switch An Ethernet switch that enables the delivery of metro Ethernet services and high-density service-aware Ethernet aggregation over IP/MPLS-based networks.
7705 SAR
7705 Service Aggregation Router The 7705 SAR is a router that provides IP/MPLS and pseudowire capabilities in an aggregation platform.
7710 SR
7710 Service Router The 7710 SR is a 10-Gbyte version of the 7750 SR that provides granular lower-speed private data services with SLAs.
7750 SR
7750 Service Router The 7750 SR is a router that provides scalable, high-speed private data services with SLAs.
802.1ag
An IEEE standard specifies protocols, procedures, and managed objects to support transport fault management, including discovery and verification of a path, detection and isolation of connectivity faults for each Ethernet service instance. An IEEE standard that specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the STP. An IEEE standard to provide QoS in Ethernet networks. The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.
802.1D 802.1p
May 2009
GL-3
Glossary
802.1Q
An IEEE standard that defines the operation of VLAN bridges that permit the definition, operation, and administration of VLAN topologies within a bridged LAN infrastructure. An IEEE standard that defines the changes required for the operation of a MAC bridge to provide rapid reconfiguration capability. 802.1X is the IEEE standard for transmitting EAP authentication messages over a LAN. The EAP messages are encapsulated in Ethernet frames and transported from the client to be authenticated through the access point, which is typically an access port on an edge device, to the authentication device, which is typically a RADIUS server.
802.1w 802.1X
A
AAA authentication, authorization, and accounting The functions of security-based protocols, such as RADIUS, to ensure secure communications. AAL-5 ATM adaptation layer type 5 AAL-5 supports the conversion of VBR, delay-tolerant, connection-oriented traffic such as signaling and control data, and network management data. This traffic requires minimal sequencing and minimal error detection support. ABR area border router A router located on the border of one or more OSPF areas that connects those areas to the backbone network. The ABR is considered to be a member of the OSPF backbone and the attached areas. The router maintains routing tables that describe both the backbone topology and the topology of other areas. ACK acknowledge ACK represents an acknowledging signal that confirms the receipt of a data packet. ACL access control list An access control list, also known as a filter policy, is a template applied to a service or port to control ingress or egress network traffic based on IP and MAC matching criteria. Filters are applied to services to examine packets that enter or exit a SAP or network interface. An ACL policy can be used on multiple interfaces. The same filter can apply to ingress and egress traffic. active An active database or active server is the currently operating system. For example, the active server is the system that can read and write to the active database. Clients can connect to the active server to provision and view network elements. Auto Discovery
AD
GL-4
May 2009
Glossary
adjacency
An adjacency is the portion of the local routing information that pertains to the reachability of a single neighbor end system or intermediate system. A separate adjacency is created for each neighbor, and for each level of routing on a broadcast circuit. add/drop multiplexer A device installed at an intermediate point on a transmission line that enables new signals to be added in the line and existing signals to be dropped out of the line. Add/drop multiplexing can be done with optical or electrical signals.
ADM
alarm AMI
An alarm is a node-generated message created as a result of an event, such as an interface status change. alternate mark inversion A type of line encoding that prevents line capacitance charging. AMI uses alternate positive and negative pulses of the same amplitude to represent a binary 1 and a zero-amplitude state to represent a binary 0.
ANSI ANCP
American National Standards Institute access node control protocol ANCP is an IP-based protocol used in DSL networks. ANCP operates between the DSLAM and the 7750 SR or the 7450 ESS to provide SAP level rate management. ANCP is an extension of GSMP.
API
application programming interface An API is a set of programming functions and routines that provides an interface to the network for application programs. APIs translate high-level program code into low-level computer instructions that run the network. Thus, application programs (for example, word processors) can communicate with low-level programs handling network data traffic.
Apipe
A type of VLL service that provides a point-to-point ATM service between users who connect to 7750 SR nodes in an IP/MPLS network directly or through an ATM access network. One endpoint of an Apipe uses ATM encapsulation, and the other endpoint uses ATM or frame relay encapsulation. Also known as an ATM VLL service. automatic protection switching The capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working line and to switch automatically to a protection line to recover the traffic.
APS
AQP
application QoS policy An AQP defines the application policy rules (in terms of matches and actions) when actions that require application-awareness are to be performed against the traffic.
May 2009
GL-5
Glossary
area
In the OSPF protocol, network management and scalability can be simplified by partitioning a network into regions. These OSPF network regions are called areas. Each area, also called a routing sub-domain, maintains detailed routing information about its own internal composition, and also maintains routing information which allows it to reach other areas. address resolution protocol ARP is a TCP/IP protocol used to convert an IP address into a physical address, such as an Ethernet address.
ARP
AS
AS is expanded two ways: 1 autonomous system An AS is a collection of routers under one administrative entity that cooperates by using a common IGP (such as OSPF). AS is synonymous with the ISO term routing domain. Routing between autonomous systems is done with an inter-AS or interdomain EGP, such as BGP-4. 2 alarm surveillance AS is an application that receives, stores, displays, and manages real-time alarms. The AS tool consists of an IM to receive, filter, and store alarms; and a USM to display and manage alarm information.
ASAP MDA
any service, any port MDA An MDA that supports channelization down to the DS0 level and accepts one OC-3/STM-1 SFP module. The MDA is based on a programmable data path architecture that enables enhanced L1 and L2 data path functionality, such as ATM TM features, MDA-based channel/port queuing, or multilink applications, such as IMA and PPP.
ASBR
autonomous system boundary router In OSPF, an ASBR is a router that exchanges information with devices from other ASs. ASBRs are also used to import routing information about RIP, direct, or static routes from non-OSPF attached interfaces.
ASCII ATM
American Standard Code for Information Interchange asynchronous transfer mode A transport and switching mechanism that employs 53-byte cells as a basic unit of transfer. Information is routed through the network in the cell using addressing information contained in the header.
AU
administrative unit See AU-N.
AUG
administrative unit group One or more AUs that occupy fixed, defined positions in an STM payload.
GL-6
May 2009
Glossary
AU-N
administrative unit - level N A managed entity within the SDH structure that is the top of the STM-1 configuration hierarchy. AU-3 has the payload pointer for each payload envelope that is consolidated with the respective payload in one unit. An STM-1 frame has three payload envelopes; therefore, the frame has three AU-3 units. AU-4 applies to the entire STM-1 payload. The AU-4 structure is the only AU in an STM-1 frame.
autosigned
A method of automatically signing SSL and PKI certificates, rather than forcing the manually signing certificates each time there is an SSL or PKI transaction. See 5620 SAM auxiliary server.
auxiliary server
B
backpressure A technique for ensuring that a transmitting port does not send too much data to a receiving port at a given time. When the buffer capacity of a receiving port is exceeded, the port sends a jam message to the transmitting port to halt transmission. Backbone Core Bridge The VLAN component within a Backbone Edge Bridge that relays frames between Customer Backbone Ports and Provider Network Ports. bridging control protocol A protocol that configures, enables, and disables the bridge protocol modules on both ends of a point-to-point link. BEB BER Backbone Edge Bridge bit error rate The percentage of bits that have errors relative to the total number of bits received in a transmission. BERT bit error rate tester BERT is a device that determines the BER on a communication channel. BFD bi-directional forwarding detection BFD is a protocol to detect faults in the bi-directional path between two forwarding devices. BGP border gateway protocol BGP is an IETF standard EGP used to propagate routing information between autonomous systems.
BCB B-component BCP
May 2009
GL-7
Glossary
BGP-4
border gateway protocol 4 A BGP that supports CIDR addressing, which increases the number of available IP addresses.
binding B-MAC BOF
A collection of configuration parameters, including at least an IP address, associated with a DHCP client. DHCP servers manage bindings. Backbone or Provider MAC boot option file A file that specifies the runtime image, configuration files, and other operational parameters during system initialization.
BPDU
bridge protocol data unit BPDU is the frame used by LAN bridges that support 802.1D STP to communicate with each other.
bridge
Bridges connect two or more network segments which increases the network diameter. Bridges also help regulate traffic. They can send and receive transmissions but a bridge does not originate any traffic of its own other than a special Ethernet frame that allows it to communicate with other bridges. See BTV. broadband service aggregator A high-speed Ethernet aggregation device that supports hundreds of ports, tens of thousands of filter policies, and tens of thousands of queues to aggregate subscriber traffic. The 7450 ESS is a BSA.
broadcast TV BSA
BSM
bootstrap message A PIM message that CBSRs exchange during the BSR election process.
BSR
BSR is expanded two ways: 1 bootstrap router A BSR is a PIM router that manages RP and group information in a multicast network. 2 broadband service router A BSR terminates L2 access services and routes over IP/MPLS, supporting hundreds of ports and sophisticated QoS for services and for differentiating content and source. An example of a BSR is the 7750 SR.
B-TAG BTV
Backbone VLAN tag broadcast television The transmission of television signals that are available to all users. This television service is used on cable, satellite, and off-air systems. BTV is typically part of a triple play service offering.
B-VID
GL-8
Backbone VLAN Id
Glossary
B-VLAN B-VPLS B-VSI bundle
Backbone VLAN Backbone VPLS Backbone Virtual Switch Instance. Also referred to as a B-Site. A bundle consists of all baud channels of a packet handler access point interface to a particular connection-related function to which users are connected.
C
CAC CALEA Connection Admission Control communications assistance for law enforcement act CALEA is a United States federal law that enables the government to intercept wire and electronic communications and call-identifying information under certain circumstances -- in particular, when it is necessary in order to protect national security. CBP Customer Backbone Port A CBP is a Backbone Edge Bridge Port that can receive and transmit frames for multiple customers, and can translate or assign B-MAC, B-VID, and I-SID on the basis of the received I-SID. This is an I-tagged interface. In the context of SR PBB this is the B-Site port that is connected to the I-Site. CBR constant bit rate CBR is an ATM service category that is used to carry traffic characterized by a service bit rate specified by a constant value and an evenly-spaced cell stream. CBS committed burst size The CBS is the maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted at the link speed and that conform to the CIR. CBSR candidate bootstrap router A router that is configured as a potential BSR. If the current BSR fails, the CBSR participates in an automated BSR election process. CC continuity check A continuous flow of OAM cells generated by an ATM switch to check connectivity in the forward direction of a VCC or a VPC between two points in the network. CCA cross-connect adapter See VSM-CCA.
May 2009
GL-9
Glossary
CCAG
cross-connect aggregation group VSM-CCAs are placed in a CCAG. A CCAG provides a mechanism to aggregate multiple CCAs into one forwarding group. The CCAG uses conversation hashing to dynamically distribute cross-connect traffic to the active CCAs in the aggregation group. In the event that an active CCA fails or is removed from the group, the conversation hashing function will redistribute the traffic over the remaining active CCAs within the group. The conversation hashing mechanism for a CCAG is identical to that used by Ethernet LAGs.
CCM
continuity check message In a CFM enabled network, CCM is a multicast PDU transmitted periodically by a MEP to assure the continuity over the MA to which the transmitting MEP belongs.
CE
customer edge A device with the functionality needed on the customer premises to access provider-provisioned services.
certified directory
The certified directory contains image and configuration files that are certified by an authorized user as the default files for the switch. If the switch reboots, the switch reloads the files in the certified directory. See also working directory. circuit emulation service A device function that enables the encapsulation of TDM frames in protocol packets that are tunneled through a core network.
CES
cflowd
Enabling cflowd allows for the collection and analysis of traffic flow samples through a router. It is used for network planning and traffic engineering, capacity planning, security, application and user profiling, performance monitoring, and SLA measurement. connectivity fault management challenge handshake authorization protocol CHAP is a secure method for connecting to a system.
CFM CHAP
cHDLC
Cisco HDLC data encapsulation cHDLC is a Cisco variation of HDLC encapsulation, a bit-oriented synchronous data link layer protocol. HDLC specifies a data encapsulation method on synchronous serial links using frame characters and checksums. cHDLC also uses a control protocol to maintain serial link keepalives. You can only configure Cisco HDLC on IES SAPs.
child form
A child form is a form that is opened from another form. Typically, you must save the child form configuration, and also save or apply the changes from the parent. classless interdomain routing An address aggregation process that simplifies routing.
CIDR
GL-10
May 2009
Glossary
CIR
committed information rate The CIR is the guaranteed minimum rate of throughput between two end-user devices over a network under normal operating circumstances. This rate, measured in bits or kb/s, is used in congestion control procedures.
circuit
A circuit is a communications connection between two points. It has a line interface from which it transmits and receives data and signaling. A circuit is also known as a port, channel, or timeslot. An electronic circuit is one or more electronic components connected together to perform a specific function. Common and Internal Spanning Tree The CIST instance is the spanning tree calculated by the MSTP region IST and the network CST. The CIST is represented by the single spanning tree flat mode instance. By default, all VLANs are associated with the CIST until they are mapped to an MSTI. See STP flat mode.
CIST
CLEI
Common Language Equipment Identifier CLEI codes identify telecommunications equipment in networks. A The CLEI code uses a 10-character structure, as outlined in the Telcordia specification. These characters define equipment by specifying basic product type, features, source document, and associated drawings and versions. A CLEI code is unique to a specific piece of equipment and cannot be assigned to any other part.
CLI
command line interface A CLI is an interface that allows an operator to interact with the operating system of a device by typing commands and optional parameters at a command prompt. UNIX provides a CLI.
CLLI
Common Language Location Identifier A CLLI is a standardized, 11-character code used to identify the geographic location of a node.
CMA
compact media adapter Similar to an MDA, but smaller.
C-MAC CMAS
Customer MAC confederation member autonomous system A subdivision of an AS that is recognized only by other peers within the confederation. Within the confederation, a BGP peer treats only the peers in its CMAS as internal peers. Peers in different CMASs are external peers.
CMM
Chassis Management Module Switches that operate in a stack, in a primary or secondary management role.
May 2009
GL-11
Glossary
CNM
customer network manager A data integration system that integrates data from the fault, performance, order management, and provisioning systems of a service provider into a near real-time view for the enterprise customer.
CNM toolkit
The CNM toolkit is comprised of an Alcatel-Lucent servlet and related files that provide a simplified distributed interface to the 5620 SAM-O module. The servlet is invoked by CNM applications from a web browser. central office See NOC.
CO
combo port
A port that is shared between a 10/100/1000 RJ-45 copper connection and a fiber 1 Gb/s connection. The copper or fiber connection can be used, but not both at the same time. If the fiber connection fails, the copper connection automatically becomes active. Combo ports are also known as hybrid ports. In BGP, a confederation is an AS that has been subdivided into smaller ASs called CMASs. A confederation appears to be a single AS to other ASs and is recognized only by other confederation members. class of service CoS is the degree of importance assigned to traffic. There are standard and premium classes of services. During queuing and forwarding, service points give preferential treatment to traffic that originates on elements configured for premium CoS.
confederation
CoS
CPE
customer premises equipment Network equipment that resides on the customers premises.
CPM
control processing module A CPM is in a device such as the 7750 SR that uses hardware filters to perform traffic management and queuing functions to protect the control plane.
CPU CRC
central processing unit cyclic redundancy check CRC checks transmission errors applied to a block of information. CRC involves a bit string (computed from the data to transmit) associated with each transmitted block, and ensures the check on reception.
cron C-RP
A time-based scheduling service in UNIX and UNIX-like operating systems. candidate rendezvous point A router that is configured as a potential RP. If the current RP fails, the C-RP participates in an automated RP election process.
CSNP
complete sequence number PDU A PDU sent by a designated router to ensure database synchronization.
GL-12
May 2009
Glossary
CSPF
constrained shortest path first CSPF is a component of constraint-based routing that uses a TED to find the shortest path through an MPLS domain that meets established constraints. The ingress router determines the physical path for each LSP by applying the CSPF algorithm to the TED information. Input to the CSPF algorithm includes topology link-state information learned from the IGP, LSP administrative attributes, and network resource attributes that are carried by IGP extensions and stored in the TED. As CSPF considers each candidate node and link for a new LSP, it accepts or rejects a specific path component based on resource availability and whether selecting the component violates policy constraints. The output of the CSPF calculation is an explicit route that consists of a sequence of router addresses. The explicit route is passed to the signaling component, which establishes forwarding states in the routers along the LSP.
CST
Common Spanning Tree The CST is the overall network spanning tree topology resulting from STP, RSTP, and/or MSTP calculations to provide a single data path through the network.
CSU
channel service unit A CSU connects a digital phone line coming in from the phone company to network access equipment located on the customer premises. A CSU may also be built into the network interface of the network access equipment.
CSV
comma separated value CSV is a way of recording parameters and values in text format that separates values with commas.
customer
In the 5620 SAM, a customer is the entity that pays for a network service, such as an IES, a VPLS, or a VPRN. The service is a means of transport for the application content, such as HSI or VoIP, that the customer offers to end users. customer VLAN
CVLAN
D
DB data-MDT database data multicast distribution tree A data-MDT is a tunnel for high-bandwidth source traffic through the P-network to interested PE routers. Data-MDTs do not broadcast customer multicast traffic to all PE routers in a multicast domain. Data-MDTs are only supported for VPRN services. DCE data communication equipment A device that communicates with a DTE device in RS-232C communications.
Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01 Parameter Guide May 2009 GL-13
Glossary
demultiplexer de-mux DES
A device that separates signals that have been combined as a single signal by a multiplexer for transmission over a communications channel. See demultiplexer. data encryption standard An unclassified U.S. government-sanctioned encryption and decryption technology that uses 56-bit encryption, with 8-bit error detection.
device DHCP
A generic term for a network element such as a router, switch, or bridge. dynamic host configuration protocol An Internet protocol to automate the configuration of computers that use TCP/IP. The DHCP can be used to automatically assign IP addresses, deliver TCP/IP stack configuration parameters such as the subnet mask and default router, and provide other configuration information such as the addresses for printer, time, and news servers.
DHCP client DHCP relay DHCP relay agent
An Internet host that uses DHCP to obtain configuration parameters, such as a network address, from a DHCP server. DHCP relay allows a router to intercept a DHCP broadcast packet and forward the packet to a specific DHCP server. A router used to interconnect DHCP clients with a DHCP server that is connected to another LAN segment or network. A DHCP relay agent can also be used to insert client circuit information. A server that stores network addresses and delivers configuration parameters to DHCP clients. DHCP snooping provides network security by monitoring and analyzing DHCP messages from hosts outside the managed network that can cause traffic attacks within the managed network. DHCP snooping builds and maintains a binding table that contains information such as MAC addresses and IP addresses that correspond to the hosts that are connected from outside the managed network. Routing algorithm used by IS-IS and OSPF that uses the length of path to determine a shortest-path spanning tree. Sometimes also called SPF. data link connection identifier A DLCI is a 10-bit routing address of the virtual circuit at the UNI or the NNI that identifies a frame as being from a particular PVC. DLCIs are used to multiplex several PVCs over one physical link.
DHCP server DHCP snooping
Dijkstra DLCI
DNS
domain name system A system that translates host names to IP addresses. A DNS
GL-14
May 2009
Glossary
DoS
denial of service A type of attack on a network that involves flooding the network with dummy data packets to render the network incapable of transmitting legitimate traffic. A DNS
Dot1N DP
802.1 level N - See 802.1D, 802.1p, 802.1Q, 802.1w, and 802.1X. drop precedence Attribute of a packet which affects the probability of the packet being dropped within a CoS.
DR
designated router A DR is a PIM-enabled router that manages multicast stream delivery for a group of receiver hosts in a multicast network. DRs exchange information regarding multicast sources and dynamically adjust to changes in source availability.
DRR
deficit round robin A DRR scheduler is designed to address the limitations of WRR scheduling by implementing a scheduling algorithm that is based on the bytes sent on an egress link. The DRR scheduling algorithm maintains a quantum value that defines the total number of credits for each CoS queue and a credit counter that is decremented each time a byte is taken from the queue for transmission. The purpose of the credit counter is to track the use of bandwidth by a CoS queue relative to the amount of bandwidth that has been allocated to the queue.
DSAP DSCP
destination service access point differentiated services code point A six-bit value encoded in the type of service field of an IP packet header, which identifies CoS and the DP the packet receives.
DSL
digital subscriber line A DSL is a single twisted pair that supports full-duplex transmission at a bit rate of 160 kb/s (144 kb/s for 2B+D data, 12 kb/s for framing and error correction, and 4 kb/s for the embedded operation channel).
DSLAM
digital subscriber line access multiplexer A DSLAM is multiplexing equipment that a telecom operator uses to provide DSL services to end users.
DS-N
digital signal - level N A digital signaling rate of N Mb/s; for example, the DS-1 rate is 1.544 Mb/s.
May 2009
GL-15
Glossary
DSU
data service unit A DSU adapts the physical interface on a DTE device to a transmission facility such as T1 or E1. The DSU is also responsible for signal timing.
DTE
data terminal equipment A device that communicates with a DCE device in RS-232-C.
DU
downstream unsolicited An MPLS LDP technique, where LSRs distribute bindings to LSRs that have not explicitly requested them.
DVD
digital versatile disk An optical digital disk that stores up to 4.7 Gbytes of data. A DVD can be recorded on both sides and in dual layers.
DVD-ROM
digital versatile disk - read-only memory A read-only DVD that is used to store data and software, as well as audio and video content.
dynamic host
A host that is temporarily configured on the SAP. The 5620 SAM learns dynamic hosts when the DHCP lease populate function is enabled.
E
E1 E3 A European standard for high-speed voice and data transmission at 2.048 Mb/s. A wide-area digital transmission scheme used predominantly in Europe that carries data at a rate of 34.368 Mb/s. E3 lines can be leased for private use from common carriers. extensible authentication protocol EAP provides a generalized framework for different types of authentication methods. This allows access devices to hand off authentication packets to an authentication system, such as a RADIUS server, without knowing the authentication method used. EBGP exterior border gateway protocol A BGP session established between routers in different ASs. EBGPs communicate among different network domains. e-BGP ECMP See EBGP. equal-cost multipath routing Technique used by OSPF and IS-IS routing protocols to balance the load of Internet traffic.
EAP
GL-16
May 2009
Glossary
EDPS
event-driven processing server A server that is used by the 5750 SSC to access network equipment or mediate with other network management systems to access network equipment.
EGP
exterior gateway protocol A generic term for a routing protocol that is used to exchange routing information between two hosts in a network of ASs. An EGP is typically used between hosts on the Internet to share routing table information.
EIC
equipment ID code A character, or group of characters, used to identify or name equipment.
EIS
Enhanced Internet service EIS enhances the Internet service model by catering to the needs of QoS-sensitive applications by providing value-added Internet services that improve delivery performance.
EJB
Enterprise Java Beans Used to describe a session bean, which is a Java object tied into system services to provide session management functionality. EJB technology is the architecture on the server side for the Java 2 Platform, Enterprise Edition.
EMG
egress multicast group A group of destination SAPs that receives packets in a single transmission. The advantage of an EMG is the elimination of packet loopbacks to multiple SAPs.
EMS
element management system An application that manages one or more of a specific type of telecommunications network element.
encapsulation
Encapsulation is the addition of information to the beginning and end of data. Encapsulation is used by layered network protocols as data moves from one stack down to the next. Header and trailer information is added to the data at each layer. Encapsulation is also used to bridge connections between different types of networks. A type of VLL service that provides a point-to-point Ethernet service. One endpoint of an Epipe uses Ethernet encapsulation, and the other endpoint uses Ethernet, ATM, or frame relay encapsulation. Also known as an Ethernet VLL service. See RSM. A field in the Ethernet frame header that is used to indicate the version of Ethernet protocol. experimental field A field in an IP packet header that is reserved for experimental use.
Epipe
ESM EtherType EXP
May 2009
GL-17
Glossary
F
failover Failover is the process of changing the roles of a redundant system, for example, when the standby database takes over the role of a failed active database. A failover is irreversible. A LAN transmission standard that provides a data rate of 100 Mb/s. A fault is a failure or defect in a network, causing the network, or part of the network, to malfunction. flow control Flow control is the procedure that shuts down transmission when a receiving workstation is unable to store the data it is receiving. FCAPS FCAPS is the acronym for a broad categorization of network and service management activities that includes:
Fast Ethernet fault FC

FDL
fault management configuration management accounting/administration management performance management security management
Facilities Data Link Used in ESF to support the communication of network information in the form of in-service monitoring and diagnostics.
FEC
forwarding equivalency class A group of IP packets that are forwarded in the same manner, for example, over the same path, with the same forwarding treatment.
FIB
forwarding information base FIB is the set of information that represents the best forwarding information for a destination. A device derives FIB entries from the reachability information held in the RIB, which is subject to administrative routing.
FIC
frame ID code A field in a channel frame that identifies the position of the frame in the frame sequence.
flash memory
A rewritable memory chip that retains its content without power.
GL-18
May 2009
Glossary
forwarding class
A forwarding class, also called a CoS, provides to network elements a method to weigh the relative importance of one packet over another in a different forwarding class. Each forwarding class is important only in relation to other forwarding classes. Queues are created for a specific forwarding class to determine the manner in which the queue output is scheduled into the switch fabric and the type of parameters the queue accepts. The forwarding class of the packet, along with the in-profile or out-of-profile state, determines how the packet is queued and handled (the per-hop behavior at each hop along its path to a destination egress point).
Fpipe
A type of VLL service that provides a point-to-point frame relay service between users over an IP/MPLS network. Both endpoints of an Fpipe use frame relay encapsulation. An Fpipe connects users through frame relay PVCs. An Fpipe is also known as a frame relay VLL service. frame relay A standard for high-speed data communication that offers transmission speeds of at least 2.048 Mb/s. The main application of FR is LAN interconnection.
FR
FRF.5
Frame Relay/ATM PVC Network Interworking Implementation Agreement A standard that provides network interworking functionality, allowing frame relay users to communicate over an intermediate ATM network.
FT
fault tolerance or fault-tolerant Fault tolerance enables a system to continue operating properly in the event of the failure of some of its components. When the operating quality decreases at all, the decrease is proportional to the severity of the failure. TCP fault tolerance allows reliable two-way network communication using links that may be imperfect or overloaded. It does this by requiring the communication endpoints to expect packet loss, duplication, reordering and corruption, so that these conditions do not affect data integrity.
FTP
file transfer protocol FTP is the Internet standard client-server protocol for transferring files from one computer to another. FTP generally runs over TCP or UDP.
G
generic NE generic network element A non-Alcatel-Lucent network element that supports SNMPv2 or later and can be discovered and managed by the 5620 SAM. GIF graphics interchange format GIF is a graphics file format that supports up to 256 colors.
May 2009
GL-19
Glossary
Gig
gigabit Approximately 1 000 000 000 bits. The exact number is 230, or 1 073 741 824 bits. The term is used for both values.
Gig Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet GNE GR
See Gigabit Ethernet. An Ethernet interface with a peak data rate of 1000 Mb/s. See generic NE. graceful restart Many Internet routers implement a separation of control and forwarding functions. These routers can continue to forward data while the control software is restarted or reloaded. This function is called graceful restart. A successful graceful restart requires the use of a GR helper.
GRE
generic routing encapsulation A protocol for the encapsulation of an arbitrary network-layer protocol over another arbitrary network-layer protocol.
GR helper
graceful restart helper A GR helper is a neighboring router that is configured to cooperate during a graceful restart. The GR helper monitors the network topology for any changes and, if there are none, advertises that the router performing the graceful restart is still active.
GSMP
general switch management protocol GSMP is an ATM and TCP/IP protocol designed to control a label switch. This protocol allows a controller to establish and release connections across the switch. For example, adding and deleting leaves on a multicast connection, managing switch ports, and requesting configuration information and statistics. ANCP is an extension of GSMP.
GUI
graphical user interface A GUI is a computer user interface that incorporates graphics to make software easier to use.
GVRP
GARP VLAN registration protocol GVRP is a standards-based Layer 2 network protocol for automatic configuration of VLAN information on switches.
hybrid port
See combo port.
GL-20
May 2009
Glossary
H
HMAC key-hash message authentication code HMAC is a type of message authentication code that is calculated using MD5 and a secret key. It simultaneously verifies the data integrity and the authenticity of a message. The resulting algorithm is termed HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA-1. host A host is a device that has at least one static or dynamic IP address. The term generally applies to an end-user device, such as a PC, VoIP phone, or set-top box, rather than a node in a transport network. hierarchical quality of service HQoS provides the ability to perform rate limiting across multiple queues from multiple SAPs. HSI high-speed Internet access HSI is a broadband Internet access service that is typically part of a triple play service. HSMDA high scale Ethernet MDA The HSMDA is an MDA for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR platforms. The HSMDA extends subscriber and service density capabilities of first and second generation IOMs by adding an MDA level of ingress and egress queues, shapers, and schedulers. HTTP hypertext transfer protocol A set of rules for exchanging text, graphics, sound, video, and other multimedia files on the Web. HTTPS secure hypertext transfer protocol A protocol built into a Web browser that provides encryption and decryption of Web page requests and responses. Also known as HTTP over SSL. H-VPLS hierarchical virtual private LAN service
HQoS
I
IBGP interior border gateway protocol IBGP is a type of BGP used within a single AS. IBGP is a protocol for exchanging routing information between gateways within an autonomous network. The routing information can then be used by IP or other network protocols to specify how to route packets. IB-RCC In-Band Ring Control Connection
May 2009
GL-21
Glossary
ICMP
Internet control message protocol ICMP is a protocol that sends and receives the control and error messages used to manage the behavior of the TCP/IP stack. ICMP is defined in RFC 792.
I-component ID IEEE IES
An S-VLAN component with Provider Instance Port (PIP) identifier or identification Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet enhanced service IES is a routed connectivity service in which a host communicates with an IP router interface to send and receive Internet traffic. An IES has one or more logical IP router interfaces, each with a SAP that acts as the access point to the network. IES allows customer-facing IP interfaces to participate in the same routing instance that is used for core network routing. The IP addressing scheme for a customer must be unique among the provider addressing schemes in the network and possibly in the entire Internet. The usable IP address space may be limited. A portion of the service provider address is reserved for service IP provisioning and allows administration by a separate but subordinate address authority.
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force The IETF is the organization that manages the standards and specifications for IP and related protocols.
IGMP
Internet group management protocol IGMP is an IP extension that hosts use to report their multicast group membership to neighboring multicast routers.
IGMP snooping
IGMP snooping enables a device that relays an IGMP packet to read the IGMP message and thus identify hosts that are members of multicast groups. The device forwards the returning multicast packets to only the hosts in the multicast group. interior gateway protocol Generic term applied to any protocol used to propagate network reach and routing information within an AS.
IGP
ILMI
interim local management interface An interim standard defined by the ATM Forum that allows UNI management information to be exchanged between an end user and a public or private network, or between a public network and a private network, including setting and capturing physical layer, ATM layer, virtual path, and virtual circuit parameters on ATM interfaces. ILMI uses SNMP messages without UDP and IP, and organizes managed objects into four MIBs.
GL-22
May 2009
Glossary
IMA
inverse multiplexing over ATM A cell-based protocol where an ATM cell stream is inverse-multiplexed and de-multiplexed in a cyclical fashion among ATM-supporting paths to form a higher bandwidth logical link, where the logical link concept is referred to as an IMA group.
IME
interface management entity Software components that execute the ILMI protocol.
IMM
integrated media module In the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS architectures, a circuit board that uses the same chassis card slots as an IOM, but combines IOM 3 and high-bandwidth MDA functionality in one unit. The IMM does not accept plug-in MDAs because the MDA functionality is built into the unit.
I/O
input/output Connections between a system and its controlled devices (output) and incoming statuses (input).
I/O module IOM
See IOM. input/output module In the 7750 SR and 7450 ESS architectures, a circuit board that contains two independent data paths, with each path connected to an MDA. IOMs implement queuing and IP and MPLS functions. The IOM is available in several variants, such as the IOM 2 and IOM 3, that provide enhancements to the basic IOM functionality.
IP
Internet protocol IP is the network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is a connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol defined by the IETF.
IP precedence
A three-bit field in an IP packet header which is used to identify the level of service a packet receives in the network. IP precedence bits are the least significant bits in a DSCP value. Internet protocol control protocol A protocol that establishes and configures IP over PPP. Elements of IPCP include packet encapsulation, code fields, and timeouts.
IPCP
Ipipe
A type of VLL service that provides point-to-point IP connectivity and allows service interworking between different Layer 2 technologies. One endpoint of an Ipipe uses Ethernet encapsulation and the other endpoint uses Ethernet, ATM, frame relay, cHDLC, or PPP encapsulation. Also known as IP interworking VLL service.
May 2009
GL-23
Glossary
ISA-IPSEC
integrated services adapter - IP security The ISA-IPSEC is an MDA for the 7750 SR platform. The ISA-IPSEC acts as a concentrator gathering and terminating encrypted IPsec tunnels into an IES or VPRN service. This allows a service provider to offer a global VPRN service when the VPRN or IES end user node is on an uncontrolled or unsecure portion of the network.
IPTV IPv4
Internet-based television transmission Internet protocol version 4 The version of IP in use since the 1970s. IPv4 addresses are 32 bits. IPv4 headers vary in length and are at least 20 bytes.
IPv6
Internet protocol version 6 The version of IP that succeeds IPv4. IPv6 addresses are 128 bits. IPv6 headers are 40 bytes.
IPX
internetwork packet exchange The network-layer protocol in the NetWare operating system. It contains a network address and allows messages to be routed to a different network or subnet.
IS
intermediate system This term is used interchangeably with router.
ISA-AA
integrated services adapter - application assurance The ISA-AA is an MDA for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR platforms. As a resource adapter, there are no external interface ports on the ISA-AA. Any IOMs on a system in which the ISA-AA is installed are used to switch traffic internally to the ISA-AA.
ISO I-SID IS-IS
International Standards Organization I-component Service Instance Identifier intermediate system to intermediate system IS-IS is an ISO standard link-state routing protocol. Integrated IS-IS allows IS-IS to be used for route determination in IP networks.
ISO IST instance
International Standards Organization internal spanning tree instance The IST instance determines and maintains the CST topology between MSTP switches that belong to the same MSTP region. The IST is a CST that only applies to MSTP region switches while, at the same time, the IST represents the region as a single spanning tree bridge to the network CST.
I-TAG
Service Instance TAG This a tag with a Ethertype valued allocated for IEEE 802.1q Service Instance TAG type.
GL-24
May 2009
Glossary
ITU ITU-T I-VPLS I-VSI IWF
See ITU-T. International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector I-component VPLS (or I-SID VPLS) I-component Virtual Switch Instance. Also referred to as an I-Site. interworking function IWF provides seamless packet transmission between two protocol stacks. For example, IWF can connect an ATM endpoint with a frame relay endpoint using mappings between the two protocol stacks.
J
J0 byte The J0 byte refers to the numeric value for a SONET section trace to verify the physical connectivity of data links. The J0 byte traces the origin of an STS frame as it travels across a SONET network. The value for the J0 byte parameter is inserted continuously at the source and is checked against the value expected by the receiver. Once the data links have been verified, they can be grouped to form a single traffic engineering link. Java Authentication and Authorization Service A set of packages that enable services to authenticate and enforce access controls on users. Java An object-oriented programming language developed by Sun Microsystems for portable, interpretive code that supports interaction among disparate objects. Java Database Connectivity An application-programming interface that has the same characteristics as Open Database Connectivity, but is specifically designed for use by Java database applications. JMS Java Message Service JMS is an API that combines Java technology with enterprise messaging. The JMS API defines a common set of interfaces for creating applications for reliable asynchronous communication among components in a distributed computing environment, so that the applications are portable across different enterprise systems. JRMP Java remote method protocol A proprietary wire-level protocol designed by Sun Microsystems to transport Java RMI.
JAAS
JDBC
May 2009
GL-25
Glossary
K
keystore A Java security framework class that represents an in-memory collection of keys and trusted certificates.
L
L1 Layer 1 The physical layer of the OSI model that includes network hardware and physical cabling required to transmit raw bits and perform requests from the data link layer. L2 Layer 2 The data link or MAC layer of the OSI model. In networking, it is a communications protocol that contains the physical address of a client or server station that is inspected by a bridge or switch. L3 Layer 3 The network layer of the OSI model. In networking, it is a communications protocol that contains the logical address of a client or server station that is inspected by a router, which forwards the address through the network. L3 contains a type field so that traffic can be prioritized and forwarded based on the message type as well as the network destination. L2TP Layer 2 tunneling protocol L2TP allows L2 PDUs to tunnel through a network. LACP link aggregation control protocol LACP is used to detect whether all local members of a LAG are physically connected to the remote ports that are part of the far end of the LAG. LAG link aggregation group A LAG increases the bandwidth available between two nodes by grouping up to eight ports into one logical link. The aggregation of multiple physical links allows for load sharing and offers seamless redundancy. If one of the links fails, traffic is redistributed over the remaining links. Up to eight links can be supported in a single LAG, and up to 64 LAGs can be configured on a node. LAIS line alarm indication signal A SONET signal that indicates a general line fault. LAN local area network A LAN is a group of computers or associated devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server within a small geographic area, for example, within an office building.
GL-26 May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Glossary
Layer 2 Layer 3 LDP
See L2. See L3. label distribution protocol LDP is a signaling protocol used for MPLS path setup and teardown. An LDP is used by LSRs to indicate to other LSRs of the meaning of labels used to forward traffic. LDP is defined in RFC 3036.
LCP
link control protocol LCP is establishes, configures and tests data-link internet connections before establishing communications over a point to point link.
lease LED LER
For DHCP, the amount of time that a given IP address is valid for a computer. light-emitting diode label edge router An LER is a router at the edge of a service-provider network that forwards IP packets using LSPs.
level 1 and level 2 intermediate system
These systems deliver and receive NPDUs from other systems, and relay NPDUs from other source systems to other destination systems. Level 1 systems route directly to systems within their own area, and route towards a level 2 system. A level 2 systems route towards another destination area or another routing area. Level 2 systems constitute the IS-IS backbone area. link fragmentation and interleaving LFI interleaves high priority traffic within a stream of fragmented lower priority traffic. LFI helps avoid excessive delays to high priority, delay-sensitive traffic over a low-speed link.
LFI
LI
lawful intercept A method to monitor target subscriber voice and data communications over an IP network by authorized agencies.
LIC
location ID code A field in a SONET frame that identifies the location of an MDL.
LLC
logical link control LLC is the upper sublayer of the ISO model data link layer. LLC governs packet transmission as specified by IEEE 802.2.
LMI
local management interface LMI is a signaling standard that is used between routers and FR switches. LMI communication takes place between a router and the first FR switch in the signaling path and involves the exchange of keep-alive, addressing, and virtual-circuit status information.
May 2009
GL-27
Glossary
load balancing
Load balancing is the distribution of network traffic among the ports by a device so that no single port is overwhelmed, and network bandwidth is optimized. loss of clock A field in a SONET frame that indicates the loss of the line clock signal.
LOC
LOF
loss of frame A field in a SONET frame that indicates the loss of a line frame in the frame sequence.
LOS
loss of signal A field in a SONET frame that indicates the loss of line signaling.
LPS
learned port security A mechanism for authorizing source learning of MAC addresses on Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports.
LRDI
line remote defect indication A field in a channel frame that indicates a remote LOF, LOC, or LOS.
LSA
link state advertisement LSA describes the local state of a device or network, including the state of the devices interfaces and adjacencies. Each LSA is flooded throughout the routing domain. The collected LSAs of all devices and networks form the protocols topological database.
LSP
label switched path LSPs support MPLS functionality and allow network operators to perform traffic engineering. There are three types of LSPs:
static LSP
A static LSP specifies a static path. All devices that the LSP traverses must be configured manually with labels. No signaling is required. signaled (dynamic) LSP A signaled LSP is set up using a signaling protocol. The signaling protocol facilitates path selection and allows labels to be assigned from an ingress device to an egress device. Signaling is triggered by the ingress router; only the ingress router requires configuration. bypass-only LSP A bypass-only LSP has manually configured bypass tunnels on PLR nodes and is used exclusively for bypass protection. LSP path A LSP associated with an MPLS path. This path could be an actual route, or a configured route. A configured route can be primary, secondary, or standby. An LSP could have at most one actual route, one primary route, and multiple standby or secondary routes.
GL-28
May 2009
Glossary
LSR
label switched router An LSR is an MPLS node that runs MPLS control protocols and is capable of forwarding packets based on labels. An MPLS node may also be capable of forwarding native Layer 3 packets.
M
MA maintenance association MA is a set of MEPs, each configured with the same ID and Maintenance Domain (MD) level. MAC media access control MAC is a sublayer of the data link layer, defined in IEEE 802.2 specifications that accesses the LAN medium. The MAC layer handles the recognition and identification of individual network devices. Every computer and network node has a MAC address that is hardware-encoded. MAC pinning MAC pinning is a restriction on a MAC entry in the MAC forwarding table such that it cannot be relearned on another port within the lifetime of the entry. The entry can still age. management access filter A filter that specifies the type of management access and underlying connection protocol usage for an NE, as well as the IP addresses and ports that can access the device. MAID maintenance association ID A MAID is a an unique identifier for the MA in a AP is a secure enabled network. The MAID has two parts the maintenance domain name and the MA name. main server MAN See 5620 SAM main server. metropolitan area network A telecommunications network that covers a geographic area such as a city or suburb. mask A filter that selectively includes or excludes certain values. For example, when you define a database field, you can assign a mask that indicates the type of value for the field. Values that do not conform to the mask cannot be entered. maximum burst size MBS refers to the number of cells that can be sent at PCR and still conform to the SCR. MC multichassis A redundancy configuration that includes two peer NEs.
MAF
MBS
Glossary
MC APS MC LAG MC MLPPP
multi chassis automatic protection switching multi chassis link aggregation group multiclass MLPPP Fragmentation of packets of various priorities into multiple classes, allowing high-priority packets to be sent between fragments of lower priorities. See MLPPP.
MCM
MDA carrier module A hardware component of a 7450 ESS or 7750 SR that plugs into a card slot and accepts the installation of one or more MDAs.
MCS MCS Database
multi chassis synchronization multi chassis synchronization database This database contains the dynamic state information created on any of the nodes by any application using its services. The individual entries in the MCS Database are always paired by peering-relation, sync-tag and application-id. At any time, the given entry is related to the single redundant-pair objects (such as two saps on two different nodes), and hence stored in a local MCS Database of the respective nodes.
MD
maintenance domain An MD is a network or part of a network that is managed using CFM 802.1ag protocol. Each MD is provisioned with a set of MAs.
MD5
message digest 5 MD5 is a security algorithm that takes an input message of arbitrary length and produces as an output a 128-bit message digest of the input. MD5 is intended for digital signature applications, where a large file must be compressed securely before being encrypted.
MDA
media dependent adapter An MDA is a pluggable interface module that distributes traffic between the network and the system IOM. Also referred to as a daughter card.
MDCR
minimum desirable cell rate MDCR is equivalent to MIR.
MDI/MDIX
medium-dependent interface/medium-dependent interface crossed A type of Ethernet port connection that uses twisted-pair cabling, as specified in the IEEE 802.3 standard. Network adapter cards on computers and workstations generally connect to the network using RJ-45 interface ports that use pins 1 and 2 for transmit and pins 3 and 6 for receive. Uplink ports on hubs and switches use the same pin assignments. Normal ports on hubs and switches use the opposite pin assignment: pins 1 and 2 are used for receive and pins 3 and 6 are used for transmit. Such ports are called MDIX ports.
GL-30
May 2009
Glossary
MDL
message data link A data transmission path that is used to communicate identification or test signal information at the data link layer.
MDT
multicast distribution tree An MDT is a group of network paths in a multicast domain that originate at a common multicast source and terminate at CE devices.
MED
multi-exit discriminator An attribute that is used by an external AS to determine the preferred route into the AS that is advertising the attribute.
MEP
maintenance association end point In a CFM enabled network MEPs can be any SAP or SDP binding in a service and associated to a MA. A set of MEPs configured with the same MA ID defines a MA. CFM tests detect connectivity failures between any pair of local and remote MEPs in a MA.
menu bar
The menu bar is a tool on the GUI that organizes tasks across broad headings. You can perform functions on the application by selecting an action from the menu bar. more fragments bit A bit in an IP header that indicates the occurrence of data fragmentation and signals that at least one packet fragment follows. When a packet becomes fragmented, the MF bit in the current packet is set to 1. The MF bit is reset in the last packet of the fragmented datagram to indicate that there are no more fragments.
MF bit
MHF
MIP half function In a CFM enabled network MIP half-function objects allow MIPs to be recognized as MIPs on one MD level and MEPs on a higher level.
MIB
management information base A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using SNMP.
MIP
maintenance domain intermediate point In a CFM enabled network a MIP is an intermediate point between 2 MEPs and consists of 2 MHFs.
MIR
minimum information rate MIR is the minimum data transfer rate for a path, such as a frame relay, VPC, or VCC path.
mirror service
A mirror service is a type of service that copies the packets from a particular customer service to a destination outside the service for troubleshooting or surveillance purposes.
May 2009
GL-31
Glossary
MLD
multicast listener discovery protocol MLD is an asymmetric protocol used by IPv6 routers to discover the presence of nodes that wish to receive multicast packets on their directly-attached links, and to discover which multicast addresses are of interest to those neighboring nodes.
MLD snooping MLPPP
Multicast Listener Discovery snooping is essentially the IPv6 version of IGMP snooping. multilink PPP An aggregation of multiple physical links into a single logical bundle to improve bandwidth between two peer systems. See PPP.
MP-BGP
multiprotocol border gateway protocol An enhanced BGP that carries IP multicast routes. MP-BGP carries two sets of routes: one set for unicast routing and one set for multicast routing. The routes associated with multicast routing are used by PIM to build multicast data distribution trees.
MPLS
multiprotocol label switching MPLS is a technology in which forwarding decisions are based on fixed-length labels inserted between the data link layer and network layer headers to increase forwarding performance and flexibility in path selection.
MRP MRRU
Multiple Registration Protocol maximum received reconstructed unit MRRU is the maximum frame size that can be reconstructed from multilink fragments.
MSDP
multicast source discovery protocol MSDP allows PIM-SM domains to communicate with each other using their own RPs. MSDP also enables multiple RPs in a single PIM-SM domain to establish MDSP mesh-groups, and can be used between anycast RPs to synchronize information about the active sources being served by each anycast RP peer.
MSTI
multiple spanning tree instance An enhancement to the IEEE 802.1Q CST. An MSTI is a single spanning tree instance that represents a group of VLANs.
MSTP
multiple spanning tree protocol An RSTP that allows different spanning trees to co-exist on the same Ethernet switched network.
MTU
maximum transmission unit MTU is the largest unit of data that can be transmitted over a particular interface type in one packet. The MTU can change over a network.
GL-32
May 2009
Glossary
multicast CAC
Multicast Connection Admission Control Multicast CAC manages the amount of bandwidth consumed by BTV distribution services to avoid network congestion and maintain QoS standards. The multicast CAC function is supported on any IGMP and PIM interface, and in the case of BTV distribution, on VPLS SAPs and SDPs where IGMP snooping is enabled.
multicast routing
Multicast routing delivers source traffic to multiple receivers without any additional burden to the source or the receivers. Multicast packets are replicated in the network by routers that are enabled with PIM, which results in the efficient delivery of data to multiple receivers. Multicast routing is based on an arbitrary group of receivers that expresses an interest in receiving a particular data stream. The group does not have physical boundariesthe hosts can be located anywhere on the Internet. The hosts must join the group using IGMP in order to receive the data stream.
MVPLS
management virtual private LAN service An MVPLS is created to run RSTP and manage traffic on the associated VPLS. An MVPLS is required to remove topology loops when redundant spoke SDPs or L2 access interfaces have been created for HVPLS configurations. RSTP must be run on the redundant spoke SDPs or L2 access interfaces to block some of them from passing traffic. VPLS that have redundant spoke SDPs or L2 access interfaces that are managed by the MVPLS also have their traffic blocked appropriately.
MVR
multicast VLAN registration MVR allows a single multicast VLAN to be shared in a network while subscriber hosts remain in separate VLANs. This mechanism allows the continuous distribution of multicast streams in the multicast VLAN and bars hosts from receiving streams to which they are not entitled. MVR and IGMP snooping are used on 7250 SAS and Telco devices to provide multicast BTV services.
MVR by proxy MVRP MVR VPLS
A 7450 ESS feature that allows multicast VPLS traffic to be copied to an SAP other than the SAP from which the IGMP message originated. Multi-VLAN Registration Protocol Also known as a multicast VPLS, an MVR VPLS distributes multicast traffic through a network. An MVR VPLS also acts as a user VPLS when it contains SAPs that receive multicast traffic. MVR on VPLS allows multiple subscriber hosts to remain in separate VLANs while sharing a single multicast VPLS. The 7450 ESS uses MVR on VPLS and IGMP snooping to provide BTV services.
N
navigation tree The navigation tree displays a view of all managed equipment, services, and protocols, and allows you to navigate through these components.
May 2009
GL-33
Glossary
NE
network element A physical device in the network, such as a 7750 SR router, or a switch, such as the 7670 RSP.
NEBS
Network Equipment Building Standards The requirement for equipment deployed in a central office environment. Covers spatial, hardware, craftsperson interface, thermal, fire resistance, handling and transportation, earthquake and vibration, airborne contaminants, grounding, acoustical noise, illumination, electromagnetic compatibility, and electrostatic discharge requirements.
neighbor networkstation network topology
An adjacent system reachable by traversing a single sub-network by a PDU A UNIX platform where the 5620 SAM software runs. A network topology is the layout of a network, which can include the way in which elements in a network, such as nodes, are connected and how they communicate. National Institute of Standards and Technology Network Layer Reachability Information network management system A system that manages at least part of a network. An NMS is generally a reasonably powerful and well-equipped computer such as an engineering workstation. The NMS communicates with agents to help keep track of network statistics and resources.
NIST NLRI NMS
NNI
NNI is expanded two ways: 1 network-to-network interface An NNI is a standard interface between two ATM nodes or two frame relay nodes. An NNI is also a port that resides on a PE bridge or a transit bridge, and connects to a service provider network. 2 network node interface NNI is the interface between two ATM network nodes that operate under different administrative domains, such as a vendor ATM switch and an ATM switch from another vendor.
NOC
network operations center The group that is responsible for the configuration and monitoring of the network and service elements using network switching equipment and management systems.
GL-34
May 2009
Glossary
nrt-VBR
non real-time variable bit rate nrt-VBR is an ATM service category that guarantees low cell loss and low delay for applications, such as video and frame relay, which are characterized by an on/off source with known, predictable transmission patterns. During the on period, cells are transmitted at the peak information rate. No cells are transmitted during the off period. nrt-VBR allows statistical multiplexing gains using the traffic descriptors (PCR and SCR). It does not provide delay commitments.
NSR
Non-stop routing Non-stop routing prevents the outage of the control plane of a router due to the introduction of fault tolerance.
NSSA
not-so-stubby-area NSSA is an OSPF area type where OSPF propagates any external routes that it obtains from the AS.
NTP
network time protocol An Internet protocol that network devices use to synchronize their clocks.
O
OAM operations, administration, and maintenance A general term used to describe the costs, tasks involved, or other aspects of operating, administering, and managing a telecommunications network. The 5620 SAM provides a series of OAM tools to monitor and administer the network. OC-N Optical Carrier - level N An optical SONET signal carried at the speed of N, for example, OC-12 is a signal at 622.08 Mb/s. Option 82 ORF See Relay Information Option. outbound route filtering ORF is used to reduce the amount of time required to filter routes from a BGP peer. OS OS 6400 operating system OmniSwitch 6400 The Alcatel-Lucent OmniSwitch 6400 family is a set of stackable layer 2+ Gigabit Ethernet LAN switches. Up to eight switches can be stacked to form a single virtual chassis.
May 2009
GL-35
Glossary
OS 6850
OmniSwitch 6850 An advanced fixed configuration family of Ethernet switches. OS 6850 switches provide wire-rate Layer 2 forwarding and Layer 3 routing with advanced services. Up to eight switches can be stacked to form a single virtual chassis.
OS 6855
OmniSwitch 6855 The Alcatel-Lucent OmniSwitch 6400 family Ethernet hardened LAN switches are industrial grade, managed, Gigabit Ethernet switches designed to operate reliably in harsh electrical and severe temperature environments. The OS 6855 switch is not stackable.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection A reference model of protocols organized in seven layers. OSI standards and applications facilitate the interworking of equipment from different manufacturers.
OSPF
open shortest path first OSPF is an IETF standard link-state routing protocol used to determine the most direct path for a transmission in IP networks.
OSS
operations support system A network management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance and provisioning, in a service provider network.
OSSI
operations support system interface A set of APIs that allow OSSs to manipulate a well defined set of managed objects that are identified by management applications to automate operational procedures and allow flow-through provisioning.
OUI
organizationally unique identifier A three-octet field in a SNAP header that identifies an organization.
P
PAE port access entity A logical entity that supports the IEEE 802.1X protocol that is associated with a port. PAP password authentication protocol A protocol to communicate with a security server for a user authentication. PBB PBBN PBN Provider Backbone Bridge Provider Backbone Bridged Network Provider Bridge Network
GL-36
May 2009
Glossary
PC PCR
personal computer peak cell rate PCR is the cell rate, in cells per second, that the endpoint may never exceed.
PD
powered device Any device that uses a PoE data cable as the only source of power.
PDF
portable document format The file format in Adobe Acrobat document exchange technology.
PDH
plesiochronous digital hierarchy A technology used in telecommunications networks to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fiber optic and microwave radio systems.
PDU
protocol data unit A PDU is a message of a given protocol comprising payload and protocol-specific control information, typically contained in a header. PDUs pass over the protocol interfaces which exist between the layers of protocols, as indicated in the OSI model.
PE
provider edge The name of the device or set of devices at the edge of the provider network with the functionality that is needed to interface with the customer and with the MPLS network. A PE can be a router or a switch. All the MPLS tunnels are set up and terminated in the PE. All VPN functionalities reside in the PE.
PE bridge
An Ethernet switch that resides on the edge of the service provider network. The PE bridge interconnects customer networks with service provider networks. A switch is a PE bridge when the switch transports packets between a customer-facing port and a network port or between two customer-facing ports. power entry module per-hop behavior An IETF standard term for CoS plus DP.
PEM PHB
PHY
physical PHY refers to the physical layer, or L1 of the OSI model.
PID
protocol identification A two-octet field in a SNAP header that specifies the protocol type.
PIM
protocol independent multicast Multicast routing architecture that allows the addition of IP multicast routing on existing IP networks. PIM is unicast routing protocol independent and can be operated in two waysdense and sparse.
May 2009
GL-37
Glossary
PIM-SSM PIM-SM PIM snooping
PIM-Source Specific Multicast PIM sparse mode PIM snooping for VPLS allows a VPLS PE router to build multicast states by snooping PIM protocol packets that are sent over the VPLS. The VPLS PE then forwards multicast traffic based on the multicast states. Provider Instance Port A PIP is a Backbone Edge Bridge Port that can transmit or receive frames from one or multiple customers, adding or removing I-TAGs. In the context of SR PBB, it could be the I-Site port that is connected to the B-Site.
PIP
PIR
peak information rate The PIR is the peak data transfer rate for a path, such as a frame relay, VPC, VCC, or DE service path. The PIR is the PCR converted to kb/s.
PKI
public key infrastructure PKI represents the set of hardware, software, people, policies and procedures needed to create, manage, store, distribute, and revoke public key certificates based on public-key cryptography.
PLR
point-of-local-repair A functional NE in a path in which a manual bypass is implemented for a defective NE in the path.
PoE
power over Ethernet A technology that provides inline power directly from switch Ethernet ports. PDs such as IP phones, wireless LAN stations, Ethernet hubs, and other access points can be plugged directly into an Ethernet port. The Ethernet port provides both electrical power and data flow.
POS
packet over SONET A technology that allows IP packets to be sent directly over SONET/SDH frames.
PPP
point-to-point protocol PPP is a protocol for communication between two computers using a serial interface, typically a PC connected by phone line to a server. PPP uses IP. It is considered as a member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols.
prefix primary CMM
The first 64 bits of an IPv6 address that identify the network to which a host belongs. The IPv6 prefix is analogous to the IPv4 subnet mask. primary chassis management module When switches operate in a stack, one switch in the stack, known as the primary CMM, always performs the primary management role.
GL-38
May 2009
Glossary
PSE
power source equipment PSE provides power to a single link section. The PSE main functions include searching the PD, optionally classifying the PD, supplying power to the link section if the PD is detected, monitoring the power on the link section, and scaling power back to detect level when power is no longer requested or required.
pseudowire PSN
A mechanism that emulates the essential attributes of a service such as ATM, frame relay, or Ethernet over a PSN. packet-switched network A data-transmission network that uses the packet-switching technique. Unlike circuit switching, packet switching allocates multiplexing and switching resources only when data is present. There are public and private packet-switched networks.
PSNP
partial sequence number PDU A PDU that is sent by a router, which has established an adjacency with a neighboring router, to transmit link-state information to ensure synchronization of routing tables throughout the network.
PVC
permanent virtual circuit A PVC is an ATM end-to-end logical connection that extends between host interfaces on a network. A single PVC may pass through several ATM switching nodes.
PVP
permanent virtual path A permanent ATM connection that is used to carry one or more PVCs.
PVST
Per-VLAN spanning tree PVST maintains a spanning tree instance for each VLAN configured in the network to help load balance L2 traffic without causing spanning tree loops.
PW
See pseudowire.
Q
Q in Q Q in Q is a type of Ethernet encapsulation in which a second 802.1Q VLAN tag is added to an 802.1Q frame. Service providers can then use VLAN IDs to segregate customer services and still allow customers to assign their own VLAN IDs without the possibility of ID duplication. quality of service QoS is a term for the set of parameters and their values that determine the performance of a virtual circuit. A service level is typically described in terms of network delay, bandwidth, and jitter.
QoS
May 2009
GL-39
Glossary
R
RADIUS remote authentication dial-in user service A remote user authentication, authorization, and accounting protocol. RD route distinguisher An eight-byte BGP field that allows an operator to create a distinct route to a common IP address prefix. RED random early detection RED is an algorithm that detects and avoids traffic congestion in a PSN. Incoming congestion is detected by calculating the average queue size. If the gateway decides that the average queue size exceeds a predetermined threshold, it either randomly drops packets arriving at the gateway or sets a bit in the packet headers. The packet transmission rate is reduced until all the packets reach their destination. Relay Information Option The Relay Information Option is defined in RFC 3046 and allows a DHCP relay agent to append to the relayed DHCP request information that identifies where the originating DHCP request was sent. Also known as Option 82. See subscriber. request for comments A document that describes a technology specification. RFCs are used by the IETF and other standards bodies. RIB routing information base A router database that contains the routing information necessary for packet forwarding. ring group RIP A group of network devices that connect to each other in a ring topology for the efficient distribution of multicast or broadcast network traffic. routing information protocol RIP is a Bellman-Ford routing protocol based on distance vector algorithms that measure the shortest path between two points on a network in terms of the number of hops between those points. Various forms of RIP distribute routing information in IP, XNS, IPX, and VINES networks. See also OSPF. RJ-45 registered jack 45 A telephone connector that holds up to eight wires. RJ-45 plugs and sockets are used in Ethernet and Token Ring Type 3 devices.
residential subscriber RFC
GL-40
May 2009
Glossary
RMI
remote method invocation A standard from Sun Microsystems for distributed objects written in Java. RMI is a remote procedure call that allows Java objects (software components) stored in the network to be run remotely.
RMS
resource management server A server that tracks the use of services in a network by an end host. An RMS can enforce quotas, ensure that specific service levels are met, optimize resources, manage IP addresses, and generate real-time active session reports.
RNCV root bridge route flapping router
Ring Node Connectivity Verification The bridge with the highest priority ID, selected as the root in a spanning tree. A routing problem caused by network problems where an advertised route between two devices changes back and forth between two different paths. A router is an interface device that connects two networks. It maintains configuration tables and uses various network protocols to select cost-effective routes that move data between a source and destination device. Also called a device. A routing instance is the configuration of a router, including information such as protocols, interfaces, routing, and policies. A routing protocol is used to determine the correct route for packets within IP and IP/MPLS networks. rendezvous point An RP is a PIM-enabled router that is elected by PIM as a central distribution source for multicast groups in a multicast domain.
routing instance routing protocol RP
RPF
reverse path forwarding A mechanism used by PIM to forward multicast packets down a distribution tree.
RS-232-C
recommended standard - 232 - current The physical interface and protocol used to connect serial devices.
RSHG
residential split horizon group A type of SHG with dual-pass queue optimization. Downstream broadcast and multicast traffic are not supported. SAPs associated with an RSHG are lightweight SAPs.
RSM
residential subscriber management A versatile TPSDA model, sometimes called enhanced subscriber management, that supports a variety of delivery configurations, such as one VLAN per host, one VLAN per application, one VLAN for all applications, and one VLAN per service provider per application. See subscriber.
May 2009
GL-41
Glossary
RSTP
rapid spanning tree protocol RSTP is an enhanced version of STP, as defined in IEEE standard 802.1w-2001 and incorporated in IEEE standard 802.1D-2004. RSTP supersedes STP for standards conformance. RSTP provides faster automatic reconfiguration for route failures than STP by facilitating a rapid change in port roles.
RSVP
resource reservation protocol RSVP is a network-control protocol in the IP suite that is used for communicating application QoS requirements to intermediate transit nodes in a network. RSVP uses a soft-state mechanism to maintain path and reservation state in each node in the reservation path.
RSVP-TE
resource reservation protocol-traffic engineering RSVP-TE is a extension of RSVP that is described in RFC 3209. RSVP-TE allows the establishment of LSPs based on network constraints such as available bandwidth and explicit hops.
RT
route target In BGP/MPLS VPNs, an RT is an attribute that identifies a set of sites.
RTM
routing table manager An RTM is an application that operates in a multiprotocol network to create and maintain an RIB that contains all active static routes in the network. The RTM calculates the best routes from the RIB and stores the information in the FIB.
rt-VBR
real-time variable bit rate rt-VBR is a variant of the VBR service category available only for VPC paths and VCC paths. It allows statistical multiplexing gains using the traffic descriptors (PCR and SCR). The rt-VBR service provides delay commitments. rt-VBR supports variable bit rate traffic with sustained and peak traffic parameters that require strict delay control, such as packetized voice or video. An rt-VBR is an ATM service category that guarantees very low cell loss and very low delay for time-sensitive applications such as voice and video, which are characterized by unpredictable, bursty transmission patterns. rt-VBR is a variant of the VBR service category that is only available for VPC and VCC paths. nrt-VBR is the other variant of VBR available for these paths.
S
SAP service access point A SAP is a point of communication exchange between an application and the LLC or between layers of software.
GL-42
May 2009
Glossary
SAS
service assurance system SAS refers to the grouping of OAM diagnostic tests into test suites for end-to-end testing of customer services. SAS test suites can be scheduled. They can provide more network monitoring and troubleshooting capability than individual OAM activities.
SC
service component An SC is a customer service that is a component of a composite service.
SCP
SCP is expanded two ways: 1 secure copy protocol The SCP securely transfers files between local and remote hosts, or between two remote hosts, using SSH2. 2 service connection point An SCP is a type of connector endpoint in a composite service. It can be a SAP, service interface, or network port, depending on the device.
SCR
sustainable cell rate An upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM connection over time scales that are long relative to those for which the PCR is defined.
SDH
synchronous digital hierarchy SDH is a hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. SDH is a standard for communicating digital information over optical fiber and microwaves. SDH was developed to replace the PDH system for transporting large amounts of telephone and data traffic.
SDP
service distribution path The 5620 SAM uses this term interchangeably with service tunnel.
SDU
service data unit A SDU is a set of data that is sent by a user of the services of a given layer as specified in the OSI model, and is transmitted to a peer service user.
secondary CMM
secondary chassis management module When switches operate in a stack, one of the switches in the stack operates in a secondary management role. This switch serves as a backup, and is always ready to perform the primary management role if the primary CMM fails or is taken offline for any reason.
section
A section is a single fiber run that an NE or optical regenerator terminates. The main functions of the section layer are to properly format the SONET frames and to convert the electrical signals to optical signals.
May 2009
GL-43
Glossary
service tunnel
A service tunnel acts as a logical way of unidirectionally directing traffic from one device to another device. The service tunnel is provisioned to a specific encapsulation method, for example, GRE, and the services are mapped to the service tunnel. A set-top box is a type of residential subscriber end-user device that receives network traffic. An example of a set-top box is a consumer device that converts BTV IP data into video and audio signals for a television. small form factor pluggable A high-speed, compact, and hot-swappable optical modular transceiver.
set-top box
SFP
SHA
secure hash algorithm A NIST standard hash algorithm, also known as SHA-1.
SHCV
subscriber host connectivity verification A method of using periodic ARP requests and DHCP snooping to maintain connectivity state information for the subscriber hosts on a SAP.
SHG
split horizon group A group of SAPs or spoke SDPs. Members of the group cannot send traffic to each other.
SLA
service-level agreement An SLA is a service contract between a network service provider and a customer that guarantees a particular QoS level. SLAs specify criteria such as network availability and data delivery reliability.
SLOF
section loss of frame A field in a SONET channel frame that indicates the loss of a frame in the section frame sequence
SLOS
section loss of signal A field in a SONET channel frame that indicates the loss of section signaling.
SMTP
simple mail transfer protocol An application in the TCP/IP suite that manages the sending and receiving of e-mail messages.
SNAP
subnetwork access protocol An Internet protocol that operates between a network entity in the subnetwork and a network entity in the end system. The SNAP specifies a standard method of encapsulating IP datagrams and ARP messages on IEEE networks. The SNAP entity in the end system uses the subnetwork services and performs three key functions: data transfer, connection management, and QoS selection.
GL-44
May 2009
Glossary
sniffer SNMP
A sniffer is a software tool that is used to monitor and analyze network traffic for troubleshooting or surveillance purposes. simple network management protocol A protocol used for the transport of network management information between a network manager and a network element. SNMP is the most commonly used standard for interworking devices.
SNMP trap
An SNMP trap is an unsolicited notification that indicates that the SNMP agent on the node has detected a node event, and that the network management domain should be aware of the event. SNMP trap information typically includes alarm and status information, and standard SNMP messages. simple network time protocol A rudimentary version of NTP with only the features that devices commonly require.
SNTP
SOAP
simple object access protocol An XML-based protocol for the exchange of information in a decentralized, distributed environment.
Solaris SONET
The name for the UNIX operating system variant developed by Sun Microsystems. synchronous optical network SONET is an ANSI standard for fiber optic transmission of high-speed digital traffic. SONET allows internetworking of transmission products from multiple vendors and defines a physical interface, optical line rates known as OC signals, frame format, and an OAM protocol. The base rate is 51.84 Mb/s (OC-1), and higher rates are multiples of the base rate. SONET uses synchronous high-speed signals and provides easy access to low-speed signals by mapping them into VTs. SONET is a North American standard that is technically consistent with SDH, which is international.
S-PE SPF
switching PE node shortest path first SPF is an algorithm used by IS-IS and OSPF to make routing decisions based on the state of network links.
spoofing
A technique used to gain unauthorized access to devices, whereby the intruder sends messages using a source IP address that appears to come from a trusted host. shortest path tree SPT is an algorithm used by PIM to make routing decisions based on the state of network links.
SPT
May 2009
GL-45
Glossary
SRRP
subscriber routed redundancy protocol A set of functions and messaging protocols that allows a system to create a set of redundant gateway IP addresses shared by a local and a remote node.
SSAP SSH
source service access point secure shell The SSH protocol is used to protect communications between two hosts by encrypting a Telnet, FTP, or SCP connection between the nodes. Both ends of the connection are authenticated, and passwords are encrypted.
SSH2
SSH version 2 SSH2 is a more secure, efficient, and portable version of SSH that includes SCP. See SSH.
SSL
secure socket layer The SSL is a protocol developed by Netscape for transmitting private documents using the Internet. Many Web sites use the protocol to obtain confidential user information, such as credit card numbers. It is also used for data encryption, server authentication, and message integrity between 5620 SAM server and clients.
SSLF
section synchronization line failure A SONET alarm that indicates a failure of the frame synchronization for a section.
SSM
source-specific multicast An extension of PIM that enables a receiving client to obtain content directly from the source rather than from the shared RP.
standby
A standby database or standby server is the operating system not currently operating, but providing protection for the active system. For example, the standby server is a system that can read and write to the active database, however, it is in standby mode, and ignores events from the network. Clients cannot connect to the standby server. See static subscriber host. A host that is explicitly configured on a SAP rather than through a dynamic learning process. Statistics are the quantitative data collected by the 5620 SAM for entities such as equipment, network protocols, interfaces, and alarms. section terminating equipment SONET equipment that originates, accesses, modifies, or terminates section header information.
static host static subscriber host statistics STE
GL-46
May 2009
Glossary
STM
STM is expanded two ways: 1 service test manager A 5620 SAM facility that allows the manual creation and automatic generation of tests and test suites. STM tests and test suites can be run on demand or scheduled to run periodically on services and service transport components for SLA QoS validation and troubleshooting. 2 synchronous transfer mode The synchronous end-to-end transmission of data or voice containers in a network. STM is a component of SDH.
STM-N
synchronous transfer mode - level N An SDH signal carried at the speed of N, for example STM-4 is a signal at 622.08 Mb/s.
STP
spanning tree protocol The STP is specified in IEEE 802.1D. This protocol automatically ensures a loop-free topology in any interconnection of Ethernet LAN or WAN devices.
STP 1x1 mode STP flat mode
The STP 1x1 mode is an Alcatel-Lucent proprietary implementation of the STP that applies a single spanning tree instance per VLAN. The STP flat mode applies a single spanning tree instance per switch. In the STP flat mode, when you choose MSTP as the STP mode, you can configure MSTIs in addition to the CST instance. Each MSTI is mapped to a set of VLANs. Therefore, flat mode supports the forwarding of VLAN traffic over separate data paths. In strict priority scheduling, each CoS queue associated with the egress port is serviced in priority order from highest 7 to lowest 0. All traffic for a given CoS is transmitted before the scheduler proceeds to the next highest priority queue. The purpose of strict priority scheduling is to ensure lower latency and priority transmission of critical traffic by always transmitting higher priority traffic before lower priority traffic. synchronous transport signal The electrical equivalent of the SONET optical signal. In SDH, STS is known as STM.
strict priority
STS
subscriber subscriber host subscriber instance
In the 5620 SAM, a subscriber represents a unique identifier that associates a group of end-user devices with policies and resources. In the 5620 SAM, a subscriber host is an end device, such as a set-top box, that receives the network traffic. See also host. In the 5620 SAM, a subscriber instance refers to the instantiation of a specific subscriber and the associated policies on a device. A subscriber may have multiple subscriber instances in a network, but only one instance on a particular NE. service provider VLAN
SVLAN
May 2009
GL-47
Glossary
switch
Switches are Layer 2 devices that make it possible for several users to send information over a network at the same time without slowing each other down. Switches allow different nodes of a network to communicate directly with one another in an efficient manner.
switch fabric processor A processor that handles traffic passing through the switch fabric. switchover Switchover is the process of switching the roles of a redundant system, for example, switching the roles of an active and standby database. A switchover is reversible. synchronize SYN is a message that is sent by TCP during the initiation of a new connection to synchronize the TCP packet sequence numbers on the connecting computers. The SYN is acknowledged by a SYN/ACK from the responding computer. SYN/ACK synchronize acknowledged A SYN/ACK is a message that is sent by TCP during the initiation of a new connection in response to a synchronization attempt from another computer.
SYN
T
T1 TACACS+ A 1.544-Mb/s point-to-point dedicated digital circuit provided by the telephone companies in North America. terminal access controller access control system A remote user authentication, authorization, and accounting protocol. TAF time-average-factor Specifies a weight factor between the previous shared buffer average utilization and current shared buffer instantaneous utilization when a new shared buffer average utilization is calculated. TCN topology change notification A bridge uses TCN BPDUs to notify the root bridge about a detected topology change. TCP transmission control protocol TCP is a protocol used, along with the IP, to send data in the form of message units between computers over the Internet. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet. TDM time division multiplexing Multiplexing in which a separate periodic time interval is allocated to each tributary channel in a common aggregated channel.
GL-48
May 2009
Glossary
TED
traffic engineering database A TED is a database used by CSPF for storing route constraint information.
Telco
telephone company A company that provides local, or local and long distance telephone services.
Telnet
Telnet is an application in the TCP/IP suite that provides remote terminal connection service. It allows a user at one site to interact with a timesharing system at another site as though the user terminal directly connects to the remote system. Tiered architecture refers to the way in which the GUI and the network management components use a Java-based technology that provides distributed, secure, and scalable applications. This tiered architecture allows for scaling and fair load balancing, which improves performance. telecommunications and Internet converged services and protocols for advanced networking TISPAN is the ETSI core competence centre for all aspects of standardization for fixed and converged networks, including NGNs. TISPAN defines standards for service aspects, architectural aspects, protocol aspects, QoS support, security-related matters and mobility aspects within fixed networks to meet the business requirements and commercial objectives of the ETSI members. ETSI TISPAN writes the key standard specifications that define the fixed and converged networks and the NGN architecture.
tiered architecture
TISPAN
T-LDP
Targeted-Label Distribution Protocol An LDP session between indirect connect peers.
TLS
transparent LAN service The interconnection of LANs at different sites to appear as one LAN to users. TLS is used to transport subscriber VLAN traffic across a network while keeping traffic in each VLAN secure and separate from other subscriber VLANs. In the 7250 SAS and Telco devices, TLS is a mechanism that tags the encapsulated source Ethernet frames for transport across the provider network to the destination.
TLV
type length value Traffic engineering information is carried by signaling objects, for example, LDPs. The type, length, and values of this traffic engineering information is specified in the TLV.
May 2009
GL-49
Glossary
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network A TMN is an industry-standard model defined by the ITU-T for the layering of management functionality for telecommunications networks. TMN is a network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points in order to receive information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network. A TMN may use parts of the managed telecommunications network to provide for the TMN communications.
ToS
type of service An eight-bit field in an IP packet header that contains a three-bit IP precedence value or six-bit DSCP value. This value is used to identify the level of service that a packet receives in the network.
T-PE TPSDA
terminating PE node triple play service delivery architecture A model of service delivery for triple play that attempts to guarantee delay, jitter, and packet loss characteristics. TPSDA provides QoS customization for high-speed Internet data services with per-user bandwidth controls.
transit bridge
An Ethernet switch that resides inside the service provider network and provides a connection between multiple provider networks. The transit bridge uses the same SVLAN on two or more network ports. This SVLAN does not terminate on the switch; traffic ingressing on a network port is switched to other network ports. The same switch can also function as a both a PE bridge and a transit bridge. Triple play refers to the offering of voice, video and data applications over the same network connection. Triple play services are available through technologies that range from DSL to broadband wireless connections. time-to-live A field in an IP header that specifies the maximum number of hops for a data packet before the packet expires and is discarded.
triple play
TTL
TUG
tributary unit group A TUG consists of identical TUs. A multiplexing scheme that is used to assemble the TUs into a higher unit of bandwidth.
TU-N
tributary unit - level N The basic unit of an SDH payload, which includes management overheads and synchronization data. The TU consists of a virtual container and a TU pointer. It provides a unit of bandwidth that is required to convey a T1- or E1-framed carrier.
tunnel
A method of setting up a communication session between two or more points that hides the complexity of the underlying technologies.
GL-50
May 2009
Glossary
tuple
In programming languages, a tuple is an ordered set of values. The delimiter for each value is often a comma, depending on the rules of the particular language. As a data type, a tuple can be used to pass a string of parameters from one program to another.
U
UBR unspecified bit rate UBR is an ATM service category that is used for applications that do not require guarantees of low cell loss or low delay. Specifically, UBR does not include the notion of a per-connection negotiated bandwidth. No numerical commitments are made with respect to the cell loss ratio experienced by a UBR connection, or as to the cell transfer delay experienced by cells on the connection. UBR emulates the connectionless services provided by conventional bridged and routed data networks. It provides best effort delivery. UDP user datagram protocol A minimal transport protocol above the IP network layer that does not guarantee datagram delivery. The UDP is used by applications that do not require the level of service of TCP or that need to use communications services (for example, multicast or broadcast delivery) not available from TCP. UIC unit ID code A field in an MDL message that identifies the CSU or DSU of the originating equipment. UNI user-network interface UNI is an interface point between ATM end users and a private ATM switch, or between a private ATM switch and the public carrier ATM network. The physical and protocol specifications of the ATM Forum UNI documents define the standard for a connection between end stations and a local ATM network switch. A switch UNI is a port that resides on a PE bridge that connects to a customer network and carries customer traffic. The UNI may consist of a single port or a group of ports, and can accept tagged or untagged traffic. UNIX UNIX is a multi-user, multitasking operating system, which is used on mainframes, workstations, and PCs. UNIX is the basis of Solaris and SunOS, which are operating systems used by Sun workstations. uniform resource locator A VPLS that contains SAPs that receive multicast traffic from an MVR VPLS.
URL user VPLS
May 2009
GL-51
Glossary
USM
user service manager A GUI application for a management system. It usually performs as a manager towards an information manager application, although it may also connect directly with the managed system.
V
VACM view-based access control model A model of the access control subsystem of an SNMP engine, which defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights. VAS vendor-specific attribute An attribute that is set by a remote-server vendor to allow a vendor-specific extension of existing remote server attributes. VBR variable bit rate VBR is an ATM service category that provides guaranteed low cell loss and low delay for applications such as video and frame relay, and is characterized by an on/off source with known, predictable transmission patterns. During the on period, cells are transmitted at the peak information rate. No cells are transmitted during the off period. VBR supports VBR data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters. VBR is intended for applications that generate bursty traffic at a rate that varies with time. There are two service categories in VBR. The first is rt-VBR and is used by real-time applications. The second one is nrt-VBR and is intended for non-real-time applications. See also nrt-VBR and rt-VBR. VC virtual connection A technique ensuring that packets are delivered to the correct recipient in the same order as they were submitted. VCC virtual channel connection A VCC is the series of cross-connections used to traverse an ATM network end-to-end. This ATM concept describes a type of path through an ATM network, defined by its VPI and VCI values. VCCs represent a specific instance of a PVC, SPVC, or SVC. They are formed as a concatenation of one-hop connections that are cross-connected on workgroup switches. VCCs are unidirectional. They do not use bandwidth if there is no data to transmit.
GL-52
May 2009
Glossary
VCI
virtual channel identifier The VCI is part of the address of a VCC. The complete address of the VCC consists of the VCI and the VPI. A unique numerical tag as defined by a 16-bit field in the ATM cell header identifies a virtual channel, over which the cell is to travel. VCIs are assigned for one hop only; each switch cross-connects cells from one VC to the next, reassigning VCIs.
VINES virtual link
virtual networking system Virtual links connect separate elements of a backbone, and function as if they are unnumbered point-to-point networks between two devices. A virtual link uses the intra-area routing of its transit area (the non-backbone area that both devices share) to forward packets. virtual LAN A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical network segment but which share the same IP network number.
VLAN
VLAN stacking
VLAN stacking provides a mechanism to tunnel multiple customer VLANs through a service provider network using one or more stacked VLANs that use 802.1Q double-tagging or VLAN translation. VLAN stacking allows service providers to offer their customers TLS. This service is multipoint to support multiple customer sites or networks distributed over the edges of a service provider network. virtual leased line A virtual leased line is a type of VPN where IP is transported in a point-to-point manner. CPE devices are connected through nodes, and the nodes are connected to an IP tunnel.
VLL
VoD
video on demand An application that provides a specific, non-broadcast video stream to an end user. Triple play service sometimes includes VoD.
VoIP
voice over Internet protocol A telephone service that uses the Internet as a global telephone network. VoIP is typically part of a triple play service.
VPA
VLAN port assignment By default, all switch ports on an OmniSwitch are non-mobile ports that are manually assigned to a specific VLAN and can only belong to one VLAN at a time. When a port is defined as a mobile port, switch software compares traffic coming in on the port with configured VLAN rules. If any of the mobile port traffic matches any of the VLAN rules, the port and the matching traffic become a member of that VLAN.
May 2009
GL-53
Glossary
VPC
virtual path connection A VPC is a series of linked VPs that extend between the point where the VCI values are assigned and the point where those values are translated or removed. A VPC carries VCCs between sites. VPC traffic is carried on full ATM trunks. VPCs use physical bandwidth only when the end devices pass traffic over the network; they do not use bandwidth if there is no data to transmit. A VPC is a concatenation of VP links. The endpoints of a VPC are the points at which the ATM payload is passed to or received from the users of the ATM layer.
VPI
virtual path identifier The VPI is an 8-bit field in the ATM cell header that indicates the virtual path over which the cell should be routed. The VPI is assigned on connection setup by the devices at the two ends of a hop. Multihop VPC paths use multiple VPIs to go from source to destination. Each switch that the VPC traverses cross-connects the VPC from one port and VPI to another port and VPI.
VPLS
virtual private LAN service A VPLS is a type of VPN in which a number of sites are connected in a single bridged domain over an IP/MPLS network. Although the services may be from different locations, in a VPLS, they appear to be on the same LAN. When implemented with Layer 2 interfaces, this service is called VPLS. When implemented with Layer 3 interfaces, this service is called an IP-VPN
VPM
VLAN port membership Mobile ports on an OmniSwitch can join more than one VLAN. However, certain rules, such as MAC address rules, can limit port membership to one VLAN.
VPN
virtual private network A private network that is configured within a public network (a carrier network or the Internet) in order to take advantage of the economies of scale and management facilities of large networks. VPNs are used by enterprises to create WANs that span large geographic areas to provide site-to-site connections to branch offices and to allow mobile users to dial up their company LANs.
VPRN
virtual private routed network A network exhibiting at least some of the characteristics of a private network, even though it uses the resources of a public switched network.
VRF
virtual routing and forwarding A logical or virtual routing function with associated routing table that can be instantiated in a device capable of supporting IP VPN services.
GL-54
May 2009
Glossary
VRID
virtual router ID A number that is used with an IP address to uniquely identify the virtual router that is created using VRRP. Only one VRID can be used in a VLAN.
VRRP
virtual router redundancy protocol VRRP is a protocol to provide redundancy in statically defined routed networks, rather than in dynamically defined networks, such as RIP and OSPF. VRRP is an election protocol that dynamically assigns responsibility for one or more virtual router(s) to the VRRP router(s), allowing several routers on a multiaccess link to utilize the same virtual IP address. A VRRP router is configured to run the VRRP protocol in conjunction with one or more other routers.
VSI VSM-CCA
Virtual Switch Instance versatile service module cross-connect adapter The VSM-CCA is a new type of MDA for the 7450 ESS and 7750 SR platforms, designed to provide an extra set of egress and ingress forwarding paths through a set of virtual ports. This design eliminates the need for a physical port MAC address, cable, or other MDA specific components thus producing a less costly and more reliable adapter.
VT
virtual trunk An aggregation of ATM VCs. All connections on a VT map to a single VPC with a public network-assigned VPI.
VTG
virtual tributary group One or more virtual tributaries of the same rate that are bundled into an STS-1 payload.
VT-N
virtual tributary - level N A SONET format for mapping a lower-rate signal into a SONET payload; for example, VT1.5 is used to transport a DS-1 signal.
W
WAN wide-area network A geographically dispersed, long-haul telecommunications network that usually consists of backbone links. A WAN may be privately owned or leased. The term usually connotes the inclusion of public networks that are highly regulated, and provide superior reliability and resilience. WFQ weighted fair queuing Weighted fair queuing classifies all current traffic flows on an interface. Packets are sorted into flows based on a number of criteria such as MAC addresses, IP addresses, ports, priority codes (e.g., DiffServ, 802.11p), VLANs, and even DLCIs. These flows are then assigned to either a low-volume or high-volume queue. Interactive traffic, such as Telnet, is
Glossary
almost always placed in the low-volume queue, high-volume flows, such as FTP or HTTP, are placed in high-volume queues. The low-volume and high-volume queues are then serviced in a WRR manner, meaning that 20 low-volume packets might be processed for every high-volume packet. This type of queuing is weighted, yet allows each queue fair access to the interface. window A window is a form, panel of information, equipment drawing, or graphic that appears on a screen. A window commonly allows an operator to enter data and initiate functions, but some windows only display information. The 5620 SAM workflow is a defined series of tasks that describe how to install, configure, create, and manage services. The working directory contains image and configuration files that may or may not be the same as the files in the certified directory. The working directory is a holding place for new files. Files in the working directory must be tested before you commit them to the certified directory. You can save configuration changes to the working directory. See also certified directory. The working panel is a component of the 5620 SAM GUI that can include windows, drawings, and configuration forms. weighted random early detection WRED is a variation of RED, but instead of dropping packets randomly when there is high traffic congestion, the packets are dropped based on traffic priority. WRR weighted round robin This queuing technique creates a number of queues and allows a user to assign incoming traffic to each queue by some distinguishing factor. This could be service class, address, protocols, or any other number of factors. To ensure each queue is serviced fairly, the user defines a weighting for each queue. Like round robin queuing, the scheduler visits each queue in turn. However, the weighting impacts the number of packets released from each queue when it is visited. The primary problem with WRR is that it operates at the packet level. This means that if the queues contain packets of differing average lengths, the packet percentages wont be realized as bandwidth percentages. WTR wait to restore A period of time that must elapse after a failed working line has recovered before switching back to the working line from the protection line.
workflow working directory
working panel WRED
X
X.25 X.733 An ITU-T data communications protocol and interface for public packet-switched communication between a network user and the network. X.733 X.733 is the standard that describes the alarm reporting function.
GL-56 May 2009 Alcatel-Lucent 5620 Service Aware Manager, Release 6.1 R6 Parameter Guide 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01
Glossary
XML
extensible markup language XML defines the syntax to customize markup languages. The markup languages are used to create, manage, and transmit documents across the Web.
XNS
Xerox network standard The term for the suite of Internet protocols developed by researchers at Xerox Corporation.
Z
zone A portion of the namespace defined by the DNS protocol over which a system or organization has authority. The DNS namespace is a hierarchical concatenation of zone identifiers in a tree structure with the highest-level zone as the rightmost. A period serves as the separator between two zones in a namespace.
May 2009
GL-57
Glossary
GL-58
May 2009
Index
Numbers
5620 SAM GUI and OSS parameters, 68-2 5620 SAM User Security, 151-2, 151-6, 151-6, 151-7
A
Aal-5 Frame Aware (concatCellCellAal5Fr) Create VLL, 71-2 AAL5 Encapsulation (atmEncapsulation) Common Create Service, 79-2 Accept CoA (acceptAuthenticateChange) Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-2 Access (access) NE User Configuration, 157-2 Access (templateAccess) NE System Security, 162-2 Access Adapt Qos (accessAdaptQos) CCAG, 171-2 Access Algorithm (accessAlgorithm) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-2 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-2 Access Weight (accessAllocationWeight) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 Account Expiry (accountExpiryEnabled) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-2
Account Expiry (days) (accountValidityPeriod) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-2 Account Port (aaasRadAcctPort) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Accounting Enabled (accounting) Equipment navigation tree, 180-2 Accounting Enabled (accountingOn) Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Accounting Policy ID (accountingPolicyId) Common Create Service, 79-2 Equipment navigation tree, 180-2 Accounting Port (accountingPort) Administration, 167-2 Accounting Port (acctPort) 802_1x, 127-2 Accounting Statistic Data Retention Period (Days) (accStatsDataPartInt) Database, 146-2 Accounting Stats Failure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-2 Accounting Stats Pending Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-2 Accounting Stats Processed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-2 Accounting Stats Total Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-2 Accounting Type (accountingType) NE TACACS+ Authentication, 160-2
May 2009
IN-1
Index Action (action) Administrative State (autoadminState)
Action (action) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-2 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-2 Common Create Service, 79-2 Create VPRN, 72-2 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-2 NE Management Access Filter, 155-2 NE User Profiles, 156-2 Network navigation tree, 199-2 Routing, 123-2 Routing Instance, 184-2 Action (actionDisposition) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-2 Action (defaultAction) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-2 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Standard IP Filter, 113-2 ACL MAC Filter, 111-2, 112-2 Policies, 133-2 Action Type (isMoving) Copy/Move SAPs, 144-2 Active Hold Delay (100s of milliseconds) (activeHoldDelay) Create VLL, 71-2 Active Management IP (activeManagementIp) Router, 169-2 Active State (txActiveState) Common Create Service, 79-3 Active Sub-Group Selection Criteria (lacpSelCrit) LAG, 170-2 Active Timeout (activateTimeout) Shelf, 175-2 Actor Administration Key (actorAdminKey) LAG, 170-2 Add Hop Info (createHopEntries) Manage Tests, 134-2 Address (address) Administration, 167-2 Manage Customers, 82-2 Address and Control Field Compression (acfc) Channel, 179-2
IN-2 May 2009
Address ID (index) Common Create Service, 79-3 Create VPLS, 70-2 Address Type (addressType) LDP, 198-2 Admin BW Use Threshold (kbps) (adminBwUseThreshold) ingress multicast path, 120-2 Admin Concat Limit (maxAdminCells) Create VLL, 71-2 Admin Edge (portAdminEdge) Bridge, 185-2 Admin Password (adminPassword) NE Password Policy, 158-2 Admin State (adminState) TCP Key Chains, 153-2 Admin State (ingrPathMgmtAdminState) ingress multicast path, 120-2 Admin Status (adminStatus) Common Create Service, 79-3 Administration Status (adminStatus) Create IES, 73-2, 186-2 Create VPRN, 72-2 Administrative Accounting, 138-2 Administrative BW (kbps) ingress multicast path, 120-2 Administrative Mode (adminMode) Shelf, 175-2 Administrative MTU (pathMtu) Service Tunnels, 85-2 Administrative State (administrativeState) Administration, 167-2 Common Create Service, 79-3 Common Tools, 145-2 Equipment navigation tree, 180-2 Manage, 92-2 Manage Services, 80-2 Network navigation tree, 194-6, 199-2 Node redundancy, 87-2 Policies, 133-2 Administrative State (adminState) Application Assurance, 132-2 Administrative State (autoadminState) LDP, 198-2
Index Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState) Allocation Percent (poolClass8AllocPercent)
Administrative State (dot3OamAdminState) Physical Port and APS, 178-2 Administrative State (lpsAdminStatus) Bridge, 185-2 Administrative State IPv4 (administrativeStateIpV4) PIM, 194-2 Administrative State IPv6 (administrativeStateIpV6) PIM, 194-2 Administrative Status (adminStatus) Channel, 179-2 Administrative Version (adminVersion) IGMP, 188-2 Advanced Password Expiry Notification (days) (advancePasswdExpirNotification) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-2 Advertise Inactive Routes (advertiseInactiveRts) BGP, 187-2 Advertise Interval (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisAdvertiseInterval) Node redundancy, 87-2 Advertise Label (advertiseLabel) BGP, 187-2 Advertise Only Passive Interfaces (passiveOnly) IS-IS, 191-2 Advertise Subnet (advertiseSubnet) OSPF, 193-2 Advertised Label (advertisedLabel) LDP, 198-2 Advertised MTU Override (advertisedMtuOverride) Service Tunnels, 85-2 Advertised Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf) Routing, 123-2 Age (seconds) (age) Manage Services, 80-2 Manage Tests, 134-2 Aggregate Rate Limit (egressAggRateLimit) Common Create Service, 79-4 Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit) Common Create Service, 79-4
Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit) Common Create Service, 79-4 Aggregation (aggregation) Common Create Service, 79-4 Aggregator (aggregator) Routing Instance, 184-2 Aggregator AS (aggregator AS) Routing Instance, 184-2 Aggregator ID Zero (aggregatorIdZero) BGP, 187-2 Aggregator IP Address (aggregator IPAddress) Routing Instance, 184-2 Aging Enabled (agingEnabled) Create VPLS, 70-3 Alarm All Differences Policies, 133-3 Alarm deletion (isAlarmDeletionEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-2 Alarm Severity (externalAlarmSeverity) Shelf, 175-3 Alarm Total Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-2 All Instances (isAllInstances) Routing, 123-3 All Months (runAllMonths) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-2 All Weekdays (runAllDays) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-2 Allocation Percent (poolClass1AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-2 Allocation Percent (poolClass2AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-2 Allocation Percent (poolClass3AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-3 Allocation Percent (poolClass4AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-3 Allocation Percent (poolClass5AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-3 Allocation Percent (poolClass6AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-3 Allocation Percent (poolClass7AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-3 Allocation Percent (poolClass8AllocPercent) HSMDA Pools, 107-4
May 2009 IN-3
Index Allocation Weight (poolRoot1AllocWeight) Assert Period (assertPeriod)
Allocation Weight (poolRoot1AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-4 Allocation Weight (poolRoot2AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-4 Allocation Weight (poolRoot3AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-5 Allocation Weight (poolRoot4AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-5 Allocation Weight (poolRoot5AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-5 Allocation Weight (poolRoot6AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-5 Allocation Weight (poolRoot7AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-5 Allocation Weight (poolRoot8AllocWeight) HSMDA Pools, 107-6 Allow Binding Of Templates Not Associated With Any Subscriber Manage, 92-2 Allow Directed Broadcasts (directedBroadcast) Common Create Service, 79-5 Network navigation tree, 199-2 Allow Send Force Renews (allowSendForceRenews) Create VPRN, 72-3 Routing Instance, 184-3 Ancillary Path limit (mbps) (ancillaryPathLimit) ingress multicast path, 120-2 ANCP String (ancpKeyString) Common Create Service, 79-5 ANCP String (ancpkeyString) Create VLL, 71-3 Create VPLS, 70-3 ANCP String (ancpString) Manage Tests, 134-2 Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Answer Script manager, 135-2 Anti-Spoof Mac Address (antiSpoofMacAddr) Common Create Service, 79-6 Anti-Spoofing (antiSpoofing) Common Create Service, 79-5 Anycast RP Address (anycastRpIPAddress) PIM, 90-2
IN-4 May 2009
Anycast RP Type (anyCastRPType) PIM, 90-2 Application Create VLAN, 74-2 Application (application) Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Application Profile String (appProfileString) Create VPRN, 72-3 Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Apply Export Route Policies (vpnApplyExport) BGP, 187-3 Apply Import Route Policies (vpnApplyImport) BGP, 187-3 Apply Local Authentication Only (localAuthenticationOnly, 151-2 Apply Threshold To (thresholdPolicy) Size Constraint, 131-2 Apply To (applyTo) PIM, 194-2 Area ID (areaId) IS-IS, 191-2 OSPF, 193-2 ARP Populate (arpPopulate) Common Create Service, 79-6 ARP Reply Agent (arpReplyAgent) Create VPLS, 70-3 ARP Timeout (seconds) (arpTimeout) Create VPLS, 70-4 AS Override (overrideAS) BGP, 187-4 AS Path Ignore (pathIgnore) BGP, 187-4 As Set (asSet) Routing Instance, 184-3 ASO Characteristic Default Value (asoCharDefValue) Application Assurance, 132-2 ASO Characteristic Value (asoCharacteristicValue) Application Assurance, 132-2 Assert Period (assertPeriod) PIM, 194-2
Index Assigned Card Type (assignedChildType) Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel)
Assigned Card Type (assignedChildType) Card Slot, 176-2 Assigned Daughter Card Type (assignedChildType) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-3, 177-4 ATM Connection Type (connectionType) Create VLL, 71-3 ATM Interface Cell Format (atmInterfaceCellFormat) Equipment navigation tree, 180-2 ATM Interface ID (pvcConnection) Manage Tests, 134-2 ATM Minimum VPI Value (atmInterfaceMinimumVPIValue) Bundles, 174-2 Channel, 179-2 ATM OAM Alarm Cell Handling (atmOamAlarmCellHandling) Common Create Service, 79-7 ATM OAM Loopback Location ID (atmOamLoopbackLocationID) Router, 169-2 ATM OAM Loopback Period (atmOamLoopbackPeriod) Router, 169-2 ATM OAM Terminate (atmOamTerminate) Create VLL, 71-3 Attempts before e-mail (numAuthFailuresBeforeNotification) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-2 Attempts before lockout (numAuthFailuresBeforeLockout) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-3 Attribute Name (attributeName) Alarm Settings, 147-2 Authenticate (mobilePortAuthenticate) Physical Port and APS, 178-3 Authentication Key (authenticationKey) Node redundancy, 87-2 Authentication Order 1 (authOrder1) NE Password Policy, 158-2 RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication, 154-2
Authentication Order 2 (authOrder2) NE Password Policy, 158-2 RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication, 154-2 Authentication Order 3 (authOrder3) NE Password Policy, 158-2 RADIUS/TACACS+ User Authentication, 154-2 Authentication Port (aaasRadAuthPort) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Authentication Port (port) Administration, 167-2 Authentication Protocol (snmpAuthProtocol) NE User Configuration, 157-2 Authentication Type (authenticationType) OSPF, 193-2 Authorization Port (authPort) 802_1x, 127-2 auto (implicitDeletionRule) Alarm Settings, 147-2 Auto Backup Scheme (autoBackupScheme) NE Maintenance, 150-3 Auto Backup Threshold (operations) (autoBackupSchemeTreshold) NE Maintenance, 150-4 Auto Complete (forceAutoComplete) Manage FIB Entries, 91-2 Auto Created Interface Name (interfaceName) PIM, 90-2 Auto Edge (portAutoEdge) Bridge, 185-2 Auto Revert to Preferred (isMgmtIpAutoRevertive) Router, 169-3 Auto Save Scheme (autoSaveConfigScheme) NE Maintenance, 150-4 Auto Save Threshold (autoSaveConfigThreshold) NE Maintenance, 150-5 Auto Select Hop-less Path LSPs, 84-2 Auto Select Return Transport Tunnel (autoSelectReturnTunnel) Common Create Service, 79-8
May 2009
IN-5
Index Auto Select Transport Tunnel (autoSelectTunnel) BER Signal Degradation Threshold (lb2erSd)
Auto Select Transport Tunnel (autoSelectTunnel) Create VLL, 79-8 Auto Select Tunnels (autoSelectTunnel) Common Create Service, 79-8 Auto VLAN Containment (stpBridgeAutoVlanContainment) Bridge, 185-2 Auto-Activate After Successful File Transfer (isAutoActivate) NE Maintenance, 150-2 Auto-Assign ID Administration, 167-2 Common Create Service, 79-7 Create VLL, 71-4 Create VPLS, 70-4 Equipment navigation tree, 180-2 Manage, 92-2 Policies, 133-3 Auto-Assign ID (id) Common Tools, 145-2 Network navigation tree, 199-2 Auto-Generate LAG, 170-2 Auto-Generate ID Create VLL, 71-4 Auto-negotiate (autoNegotiate) Physical Port and APS, 178-3 Auto-Purge Scheme (purgeMode) NE Maintenance, 150-2 Auto-Reboot After Successful Activation (isAutoReboot) NE Maintenance, 150-4 Auto-Reboot After Successful Upgrade (isAutoReboot) NE Maintenance, 150-3 Automatic SDP Binding Creation (topologyAutoCompletion) Common Create Service, 79-7 Mirror service template, 81-2 automatic severity alterations (isSeverityAutoAlterable) Alarm Settings, 147-2
Automatically Assigned Urgency (autoAssignedUrgency) Alarm Settings, 147-3 Autonomous Address Creation (autonomous) Common Create Service, 79-7 Routing Instance, 184-3 Autonomous System (autonomousSystemNumber) Create VPRN, 72-3 Routing Instance, 88-2, 184-3 Autonomous System Border Router (isAutonomousSystemBorderRouter) OSPF, 193-3
B
Background Image (backgroundImage) Create Topology Group, 77-2 Backpressure (backPressure) Physical Port and APS, 178-3 Backup Address (backUpAddress) VRRP, 89-2 Backup Frequency (backupFrequency) Database, 146-2 Backup Hold Priority (backupHoldPriority) LSPs, 84-2 Backup Setup Priority (backupSetupPriority) LSPs, 84-2 Backup Type (fastRerouteBackupType) LSPs, 84-3 Backup Type (scheduledBackupType) Database, 146-2 Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth) Multicast CAC, 119-2 PIM, 194-3 Bandwidth Sharing (bandwidthSharing) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-2 Base Priority (priority) VRRP, 89-2 Begin Length (beginLength) Routing, 123-3 Begin Time (beginTime) TCP Key Chains, 153-2 BER Signal Degradation Threshold (lb2erSd) Physical Port and APS, 178-3
IN-6
May 2009
Index BER Signal Failure Threshold (lb2erSf) C-RP Hold Time (seconds) (crpHoldTime)
BER Signal Failure Threshold (lb2erSf) Physical Port and APS, 178-4 BFD Enabled (bfdEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-4 Network navigation tree, 191-2, 193-3, 194-3, 196-2, 197-2 BGP AS Path Action (pathAction) Routing, 123-3 BGP AS Path Name (asPathName) Routing, 123-3 BGP AS Prepend number (prependAs) Routing, 123-4 BGP Enabled (bgpEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-4 Routing Instance, 88-2, 184-3 BGP Local Preference (localPreference) Routing, 123-4 Bit Error Insertion Rate (bitErrorInsertionRate) Channel, 179-3 BITS Administrative State (bitsAdministrativeState) shelf, 175-3 BITS Interface Type (bitsInterfaceType) shelf, 175-3 Black Hole Rate (kbps) ingress multicast path, 120-3 Blackhole Range (rangeBlackhole) OSPF, 193-3 Boot Option File Mode (bootOptionFileBackupMode) NE Maintenance, 150-5 Boot Overload Enabled (bootOverloadAdmininstrativeState) OSPF, 193-3 Boot Overload Interval (seconds) (bootOverloadInterval) OSPF, 193-4 BPDU Translation (bpduTranslation) Common Create Service, 79-8 Bridge Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay) Create VPLS, 70-5 Bridge Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime) Create VPLS, 70-6
Bridge Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge) Create VPLS, 70-6 Bridge Max Hops (bridgeMaxHops) Bridge, 185-3 Create VPLS, 70-6 Broadcast (broadcast) Network navigation tree, 199-3, 199-3 Broadcast Address Format (bcastAddrFormat) Common Create Service, 79-9 Create VPLS, 70-6 Network navigation tree, 199-3 Broadcast Limit (kbps) Physical Port and APS, 178-4 Broadcast Limit (Pkts/s) (broadcastLimitInPkt) Physical Port and APS, 178-4 Broadcast Queue ID (broadcastQueueId) Access Ingress, 93-2 BSM Check Router Alert (bsmCheckRouterAlert) PIM, 194-3 Bundle ID (bundleId) Bundles, 174-2 Bundle MRRU (bytes) (bundleMRRU) Bundles, 174-3 Bundle Number (bundleNumber) Bundles, 174-3 Bundle Type (bundleType) Bundles, 174-3 BW (Mbps) (defaultLspBw) Service Tunnels, 85-2 BW Decision ingress multicast path, 120-3 BW Policy Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer) ingress multicast path, 120-3 Bypass Routing (bypassRouting) Manage Tests, 134-2
C
C-RP Address (crpAddress) PIM, 194-4 C-RP Hold Time (seconds) (crpHoldTime) PIM, 194-4
May 2009
IN-7
Index C-RP Priority (crpPriority) CIR (kbps) (lvl5Cir)
C-RP Priority (crpPriority) PIM, 194-4 C2 Byte (hex) (c2Byte) Channel, 179-3 Cable Length (cableLength) Physical Port and APS, 178-4 CBSR Address (bsrCandidateAddress) PIM, 194-3 CBSR Admin State (bsrCandidateAdminState) PIM, 194-3 CBSR Hash Mask Length (bsrCandidateHashMaskLength) PIM, 194-3 CBSR Priority (bsrPriority) PIM, 194-3 CC Id (ccId) CCAG, 171-2 CCA Rate (kbps) (ccaRate) CCAG, 171-2 CCA Rate Enabled (ccaRateEnabled) CCAG, 171-2 CCAG ID (ccagId) CCAG, 171-2 CCM Interval (ccmInterval) Manage Tests, 134-3 CCM Messages (ccEnable) Common Create Service, 79-9 Create VLL, 71-4 Manage Tests, 134-3 CDVT (cdvt) ATM QoS, 95-2 CE IP Address (ceInetAddress) Create VLL, 71-4 CFlash Backup Root Path (cflashBackupRoot) NE Maintenance, 150-5 CFlash Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot) NE Maintenance, 150-6 cflowd If Sample (cflowdIfSample) ACL IP Filter, 112-2 Cflowd Sample (cflowdSample) ACL IP Filter, 112-2 Cflowd Type (cflowdType) Network navigation tree, 199-3 CFM Opcode (cfmOpCodeOper) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-3
IN-8 May 2009
CFM Val 1 (cfmOpCodeValue1) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-3 CFM Val 2 (cfmOpCodeValue2) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-3 Change Current User To Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-2 Change Password button OSPF, 193-4 Channel (channel) Multicast Package, 117-2 Channel Framing (channelFraming) Channel, 179-3 Channel ID (channelID) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-4 Channel Number (channelNumber) Physical Port and APS, 178-5 Channel Role (apsChannelRole) Physical Port and APS, 178-5 Channel Type (portChannelType) Channel, 179-4 Channelized (channelized) Channel, 179-4 Check Zero (checkZero) RIP, 195-2 CIR (%) (cir) Network Queue, 99-2 Shared Queue, 100-2 CIR (kb/s) (cir) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-2 CIR (kbps) (cir) Policies, 133-3 Scheduler, 103-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl1Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl2Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl3Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl4Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl5Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2
Index CIR (kbps) (lvl6Cir) Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn)
CIR (kbps) (lvl6Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl7Cir) Port scheduler, 105-2 CIR (kbps) (lvl8Cir) Port scheduler, 105-3 CIR Adaptation (cirAdaptation) Network Queue, 99-2 Policies, 133-4 CIR Level (cirLevel) Policies, 133-4 Scheduler, 99-2 CIR Level (orphanCirLevel) Port scheduler, 105-3 CIR Level (portParentCirLevel) Policies, 133-5 CIR Weight (cirWeight) Policies, 133-5 Scheduler, 99-2 CIR Weight (orphanCirWeight) Port scheduler, 105-3 CIR Weight (portParentCirWeight) Policies, 133-5 Circuit ID (circuitId) Common Create Service, 79-9 Circuit Id (circuitId) Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Circuit Id Format(circuitIdFormat) Residential Subscriber, 129-2 Circuit-id Suboption (infoCircuitId) Create VPLS, 70-6 Class (channelClass) Multicast CAC, 119-2 Class (interfaceClass) Common Create Service, 79-10 Class (PortClass) Equipment navigation tree, 180-3 Class (rtrInterfaceClass) Network navigation tree, 199-4 Class Count (mlpppClassCount) Bundles, 174-3 Clear Alarm on Falling Threshold (clearAlarmOnFalling) Manage Tests, 134-3
Clear Force Switchover Create VPLS, 70-7 Cleared Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 clearing (if not self-clearing alarm) (isSeverityManualClearingEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-3 CLI Config File Mode (cliConfigFileBackupMode) NE Maintenance, 150-6 CLI Config Save Details (cliConfigSaveDetails) NE Maintenance, 150-6 CLI Debug Save Config File Mode (debugConfigFileBackupMode), 150-6 CLI Name Bridge, 185-3 Client Applications (clientApplications) Common Create Service, 79-11 Client Timeout (minutes) (guiTimeoutMinutes) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-3 Clock Mode (clock) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-4 Clock Mode (clockmode) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-4 Clock Source (channelClockSource) Channel, 174-3, 179-5 Clock Source (clockSource) Physical Port and APS, 178-6 Clp Change (concatCellClp) Create VLL, 71-4 CLP Tagging (AtmTdpCLPTagging) ATM QoS, 95-2 Cluster ID (clusterId) BGP, 187-4 Collect Accounting Statistics (accountingOn) Channel, 179-5 Common Create Service, 79-11 Mirror service template, 81-2 Physical Port and APS, 178-6
May 2009 IN-9
Index Collect Accounting Statistics (appCollectStats) Configured Primary Status (configPrimaryStatus)
Collect Accounting Statistics (appCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-2 Collect Accounting Statistics (appGrpCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-3 Collect Accounting Statistics (protCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-3 Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-3 Collect Accounting Statistics (subAppGrpCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-3 Collect Accounting Statistics (subProtCollectStats) Application Assurance, 132-4 Collection Interval (m) (collectionInterval) Accounting, 138-2 Collection Interval (pollingInterval) Server performance statistics, 139-3 Color (conformanceLevelType) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-2 Command Action (commandAction) Card Slot, 176-2 Command Prompt (CommandPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-2 Command Switch (commandSwitch) Physical Port and APS, 178-6 Command to Apply (versionMngt) Shelf, 175-4 Comment (comment) Script manager, 135-2 Committed Buffer Size (%) (cbs) Network Queue, 99-2 Committed Buffer Space (%) (cbs) ingress multicast path, 120-3 Committed Burst Size (%) (cbs) Shared Queue, 100-2 Committed Burst Size (KB) (committedBurstSize) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-2 Committed Burst Size (kb) (committedBurstSize) Policies, 133-6
IN-10 May 2009
Committed Rate (committedRate) LSPs, 84-3 Communication Protocol (cliCommunicationProtocol) Mediation, 149-2 Community (community) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-2 Community Action 1 (communityAction1) Routing, 123-4 Community Action 2 (communityAction2) Routing, 123-4 Community List Name (communityName) Routing, 123-5 Community Member (member) Routing, 123-5 Community Member (members) Routing, 123-5 Community Name (communityName) Routing, 123-5 Community Name 1 (communityName1) Routing, 123-5 Community Name 2 (communityName2) Routing, 123-5 Community String (community) Mediation, 149-2 Complexity (complexity) NE Password Policy, 158-3 Composite ID (compositeSvcId) Common Create Service, 79-11 Condition Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 Confederation Autonomous System (confederationAutonomousSystemNumber) Routing Instance, 88-3, 184-4 Configuration Mode (configurationMode) Policies, 133-6, 167-2 Configured IP MTU (Octets) (ipMtu) Common Create Service, 79-11 Configured MAC (macAddress) Equipment navigation tree, 180-3 Configured MTU (bytes) (mtu) OSPF, 193-4 Configured Primary Status (configPrimaryStatus) Routing instance, 184-4
Index Configured Source (configSrcAddr) Customer ID (subscriberId)
Configured Source (configSrcAddr) IGMP, 188-2 MLD, 189-2 Configured Source Type (srcAddrType) IGMP, 188-2 Confirm New Auth Password (snmpAuthPassword2) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Confirm New Priv Password (snmpPrivPassword2) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Confirm Password Administration, 167-3 Change Password, 152-2 NE Password Policy, 158-3 Confirm Password (password2) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Congestion Priority Threshold (congestPriorityThreshold) ingress multicast path, 120-4 Connect Retry Time (seconds) (connectRetryTime) BGP, 187-4 Connect Timeout (sec) (ftpConnectTimeout) Mediation, 149-2 Connection Type (portAdminConnectionType) Bridge, 185-3 Console Cannot Change Password (consoleCannotChangePassword) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Console Login Exec File (consoleLoginExecFile) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Console Login Exec File (templateConsoleLoginExecFile) NE System Security, 162-2 Console New Password At Login (consoleNewPasswordAtLogin) NE User Configuration, 157-3 Constraint Admin State (mCacConstAdminState) IGMP, 188-2 Network navigation tree, 199-4 Contact (contact) Manage Customers, 82-2
Content Type (contentType) Script manager, 135-2 Continue On Command Failure (continueOnCommandFailure) Script manager, 135-2 Continue on individual Failure Copy/Move SAPs, 144-2 Control Plane (sendControl) Manage Tests, 134-3 Control Word (controlWord) Create VLL, 71-5 Control Word (sdpBindControlWordBit) Create VPLS, 70-7 Controlled Port Control (paeAuthControlledPortControl) Physical Port and APS, 178-7 Cost (cost) Multicast Package, 117-2 Count Manage Tests, 134-3 Count (count) Manage Tests, 134-4 Cpm-Per-Peer-Queuing (cpmPerPeerQueuing) NE System Security, 162-2 CRC (crc) Channel, 179-5 CRC Precision (channelCRC) Channel, 179-5 Critical Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 CSNP Authentication (csnpAuthentication) IS-IS, 191-2 CSNP Interval (seconds) (csnpInterval) IS-IS, 191-3 Current Hop Limit (currentHopLimit) Common Create Service, 79-11 Routing Instance, 184-4 Current Mode (targetType) Copy/Move SAPs, 144-2 Custom Option Number (optionID) Residential Subscriber, 129-3 Customer ID Manage Tests, 134-4 Customer ID (subscriberId) Mirror service template, 81-2
May 2009 IN-11
Index Customer VLAN ID (custVlanID) Default FC Profile (defaultProfile)
Customer VLAN ID (custVlanID) Create VLAN, 74-3 Customer VLAN Tag (custVlanTag) Create VLAN, 74-3 CVLAN Treatment (cVlanTreatment) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-2
D
Damping (damping) BGP, 187-4 Damping Name (dampingName) Routing, 123-6 Damping Profile Name (damping) Routing, 123-6 Data Encapsulation (encapsulation) MSDP, 190-2 Data Mdt Delay Interval (dataMdtDelayInterval) PIM, 194-4 Data Mdt Prefix (dataMdtPrefix) PIM, 194-4 Data Mdt Prefix Length (dataMdtPrefixLength) PIM, 194-4 Data Pattern (pattern) Manage Tests, 134-4 Data Size (meptransmitLbmdataTlv) Manage Tests, 134-4 Daughter Card CLI Name (daughterCardDisplayedName) Bundles, 174-4 Day (maxLeaseDay) Routing Instance, 184-4 Day (minLeaseDay) Routing Instance, 184-5 Day (runDay) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-2 Days (days) Create VPRN, 72-5 Residential Subscriber, 129-3 Routing Instance, 184-5 Days (maxLeaseDay) Create VPRN, 72-5
Days (minLeaseDay) Create VPRN, 72-5 Days Before Expiration (aging) NE Password Policy, 158-3 Db Loss (dbLoss) Physical Port and APS, 178-8 DDM Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) Physical Port and APS, 178-8 De-escalation (deEscalationEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-4 de-escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityDeEscalationEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-4 Default Policies, 133-7 Default (isDefault) Accounting, 138-2 Default 802.1p (qosDefault8021p) Physical Port and APS, 178-8 Default Action (action) ACL IP Filter, 112-3 ACL MAC Filter, 111-2 Routing, 123-6 Default Action (defaultAction) Multicast CAC, 119-2 Default Bridged Disposition (defaultBridgeDisposition) Bridge, 185-3 Default Classification (qosPortDefaultClassification) Physical Port and APS, 178-8 Default Cost (metric) OSPF, 193-4 Default DSCP (qosPortDefaultDSCP) Physical Port and APS, 178-8 Default Element Manager URL (defaultEmUrl) Generic NE Profiles, 166-2 Default FC (defaultFc) Policies, 133-7 Default FC HSMDA Counter Override (bytes) (defaultFCHsmdaCntrOvr) Access Ingress, 93-2 Default FC Profile (defaultProfile) Network, 98-2
IN-12
May 2009
Index Default Filter Action (defaultAction) Destination ECID (destinationECID)
Default Filter Action (defaultAction) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-3 NE Management Access Filter, 155-2 Default Gateway IP Address (defaultGatewayIpAddr) Create VPLS, 70-7 Default Gateway MAC Address (defaultGatewayMacAddr) Create VPLS, 70-8 Default IGMP Disposition (defaultMulticastDisposition) Bridge, 185-4 Default Mesh VC ID (defaultMeshVcId) Common Create Service, 79-11 Default Number Of Bound Templated Objects To Pre-create (childTemplateDefaultUsages) Mirror service template, 81-2 Default Peer (defaultPeer) MSDP, 190-2 Default Profile Action (defaultAction) NE User Profiles, 156-2 Default Routed Disposition (defaultRoutedDisposition) Bridge, 185-4 Default Servicing Mode (servicingMode) Bridge, 185-5 Default Subscriber Id (defSubscriberIdString) Common Create Service, 79-12 Default Subscriber Identification Type (defSubcriberIdType) Common Create Service, 79-12 Default Value Script manager, 135-2 Default VC ID (defaultVcId) Create VLL, 71-5 Default VC ID (vcId) Common Create Service, 79-12 Default VLAN (vlan) Equipment navigation tree, 180-3 Default VLAN Enable (defaultVlanEnable) Physical Port and APS, 178-9 Default VLAN Restore (defaultVlanRestore) Physical Port and APS, 178-9
Default Weight (defaultWeight) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 Delay Time (seconds) (delayTime) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-2 Delayed Activation Timer (delayedActivateTimer) Shelf, 175-5 Delta in Use Limit (deltaInUseLimit) VRRP policy, 125-2 Deployment Mode (DeploymentMode) NE Maintenance, 150-6 Description Create VPLS, 70-8 Network, 168-2 Router, 169-3 Description (description) Administration, 167-3 Common Create Service, 79-12 Common Tools, 145-2 Equipment navigation tree, 180-3 Ethernet Services Policies, 122-2 Mediation, 149-2 Network navigation tree, 199-4 Node redundancy, 87-2 Policies, 133-8 Script manager, 135-3 Service Management, 92-2 Descriptor Type (descriptorType) ATM QoS, 95-2 Dest Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-2 7250 SAS andTelco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-2 Dest Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2) ACL IP Filter, 112-3 Destination (destination) Create VPRN, 72-5 Static Routes, 197-2 Destination Address (destinationIpAddr) Manage Tests, 134-4 Destination ECID (destinationECID) Channel, 179-5
May 2009
IN-13
Index Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) DiffServ Field (diffServField)
Destination IP (destinationIpAddress) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-2 7250 SAS andTelco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-2 ACL IP Filter, 112-3 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-4 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-2 Policies, 133-6 Destination IP Address (destinationIpAddress) Channel, 179-6 Destination IP Address (targetIpAddress) Manage Tests, 134-4 Destination IP Port (End) (destinationIpPortEnd) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-2 Destination IP Port (Start) (destinationIpPortStart) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-2 Destination MAC (destinationMacAddress) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-2 Access Ingress, 93-3 ACL MAC Filter, 111-2 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-4 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination MAC (mepTransmitLbmDestMac) Manage Tests, 134-4 Destination MAC Address (destinationMacAddress) Channel, 179-6 Destination Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-4, 165-4 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination Net Mask (destinationIpAddressFullMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination Node ID (tunnelSelectionTerminationSiteId) Common Create Service, 79-48 Destination Path Address (pathDest) Manage Tests, 134-5
IN-14 May 2009
Destination Port (destinationOperator, destinationPort1, destinationPort2) Policies, 133-8 Destination Port (destinationPort) Channel, 179-6 NE Management Access Filter, 155-3 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination Port Mask (destinationPortMask) NE Management Access Filter, 155-3 Destination Site ID (destinationNodeId) LSPs, 84-3 Service Tunnels, 85-2 Destination Slot (destinationSlot) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 Destination Type (destinationType) Manage Tests, 134-5 Detailed Text Alarm Settings, 147-4 Detect Remote Faults (remoteFaultDetection) Physical Port and APS, 178-9 Detection (mdiMdixCrossoverDetection) Physical Port and APS, 178-9 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (dhcpCidMaskPreNum) Residential Subscriber, 129-3 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (dhcpCidMaskPreStr) Residential Subscriber, 129-3 DHCP Circuit ID Mask Suffix Number (dhcpCidMaskSufNum) Residential Subscriber, 129-4 DHCP Circuit IDMask Suffix String (dhcpCidMaskSufStr) Residential Subscriber, 129-4 DHCP String (dhcpstring) Residential Subscriber, 129-4 Differential Timestamp Frequency (diffTimestampFrequency) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 Differentiated Services Code Point (dscp) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-3 DiffServ Field (diffServField) Manage Tests, 134-5
Index Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) Dot1p (dot1p)
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Event Suppression (ddmEventSuppression) Equipment navigation tree, 180-3 Direction (direction) Common Create Service, 79-12 Create VLL, 71-5 Manage Tests, 134-5 Direction (mepDirectionAccessInterfaces) Manage Tests, 134-5 Direction (mepDirectionSdpBindings) Manage Tests, 134-6 Disable AC Cookies(disableAcCookies) Residential Subscriber, 129-4 Disable Client Reflect (disableClientReflect) BGP, 187-5 Disable Extended Communities (disableExtComms) BGP, 187-5 Disable Fast External Failover (fastExtFailover) BGP, 187-6 Disable Paging Command (disablePagingCommand) Generic NE Profiles, 166-2 Disable Revert Time Create VLL, 71-5 Disable SHCV Hold Time (seconds) (disableSHCVHoldTime) Residential Subscriber, 129-4, 129-5 Disable SHCV Notification (disableSHCVNtf) Residential Subscriber, 129-5 Disable Standard Communities (disableComms) BGP, 187-6 Disallow IGP Network navigation tree, 199-5 Discard Unknown Destinations (discardUnknownDestinations) Create VPLS, 70-8 Discard Unknown Source (discardUnknownSource) Create VPLS, 70-8 Discovery Interval (autoDiscIntvl) LDP, 198-3
Discovery Rule Scan Interval (topologyScanInterval) Mediation, 149-3 Discovery Timeout (autoTrtimeOut) LDP, 198-3 Displayed Name Routing, 123-7 Displayed Name (displayedName) Administration, 167-3 Create VPLS, 70-8 Ethernet Services Policies, 122-2 Mediation, 149-3 Policies, 133-9, 145-2 Displayed Name (displayedName) Common Create Service, 79-13 Routing Instance, 184-5 Distribute (distribute) Administration, 167-3 Policies, 133-9, 145-2 Distribution Mode (distributionMode) Policies, 133-6, 145-2, 167-3 Divert (divert) Application Assurance, 132-4 DNS Name (dnsName) Manage Tests, 134-6 DNS Server Address (targetIpAddress) Manage Tests, 134-6 DNS Server Type (dnsServerType) Manage Tests, 134-6 Do Not Fragment (doNotFragment) Manage Tests, 134-6 documentation, v Domain (domain) Alarm Settings, 147-4 Domain ID (domainId) OSPF, 193-5 Dot1 Q Acceptable Frames (dot1qAcceptableFrameTypes) Physical Port and APS, 178-10 Dot1 Q Ethertype (dot1qEtype) Physical Port and APS, 178-10 Dot1p (dot1p) Access Egress, 184-5 Access Ingress, 93-3 Network, 98-3
May 2009 IN-15
Index dot1p (dot1p) E-mail Address (fromEmailAddress)
dot1p (dot1p) Access Egress, 94-3 Create VPRN, 72-6 Dot1p (dot1pValue) Access Ingress, 93-4 ACL MAC Filter, 111-2 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-5 Dot1p In Profile (dot1pInProfile) Network, 98-3 Dot1p Mask (dot1pMask) ACL MAC Filter, 111-3 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-5 Dot1p Out Profile (dot1pOutProfile) Network, 98-3 Down Count (downCount) Channel, 179-6 Down When Looped (tmnxPortEtherDownWhenLoopedEnabled) Physical Port and APS, 178-10 DR IP Address (drIPAddress) Manage Tests, 134-6 DR Priority (drPriority) PIM, 194-4 Drive (drive) File, 137-2 Drop Algorithm (transmitXType) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-2 Drop Count (keepAliveDropCount) Channel, 179-6 Drop Count(cpeDropCount) Network navigation tree, 197-2 Dropped Backpressure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 Dropped Duplicate Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 Dropped Full Resync Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-3 Dropped Not Managed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Dropped Out Of Sequence Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 DSAP (dsap) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Policies, 133-7
DSAP Mask (dsapMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Policies, 133-7 DSCP (dscp) 7250 SAS and Telco QoS, 109-3 Access Ingress, 184-5 ACL IP Filter, 112-3 Create VPRN, 72-6 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-5 Policies, 133-9 Dscp (dscp) Network, 98-3 Dscp In Profile (dscpInProfile) Network, 98-4 DSCP Out Profile (dscpOutProfile) Network, 98-5 DSCP Value (dscpValue) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-3 Dst Mask (destinationIpAddressMask) ACL IP Filter, 112-4 Policies, 133-10 Dst Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-2 ACL MAC Filter, 111-3 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Duplex (duplex) Physical Port and APS, 178-10 Duration (bertDuration) Channel, 179-6 Duration (minutes) (timer) Manage tests, 134-7 Dynamic Bypass LSPs, 84-3 Dynamic Cost (dynamicCosting) LAG, 170-3 Dynamic Topology Discovery (dynamicTopDiscAdminState) Common Create Service, 79-13 Create VPLS, 70-9
E
E-mail Address (fromEmailAddress) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-3
IN-16
May 2009
Index E-mail Subject (authFailureNotificationSubject) Enable (leasePopulate)
E-mail Subject (authFailureNotificationSubject) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-3 E-mail Subject (suspendedNotificationSubject) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-3 E-mail text (authFailureNotificationText) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 E-mail text (suspendedNotificationText) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 E-mail User Name (mailUserId) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 E-mail User Password (mailUserPasswd) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 Echo Interval(bfdEchoInterval) Create IES, 73-4, 186-2 Create VPRN, 72-7 ECMP Balancing Enabled (vRtrPimNgGenEcmpBalance) PIM, 194-5 ECMP Optimization Threshold (ecmpOptimizationThreshold) ingress multicast path, 120-4 Edge Capability Detection (autoEdge) Create VPLS, 70-9 Edge Port (rapidStart) Create VPLS, 70-9 Edit ATM button Channel, 179-6 Edit ILMI Link button Channel, 179-6 Edit PPP button Channel, 179-6 Edit Routing Policies Routing Instance, 88-3, 184-6 Effect (effect) OSPF, 193-5 Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (egressAggRateLimit) Residential Subscriber, 129-5 Egress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaEgressAggRateLimit) Residential Subscriber, 129-5 Egress Filter ID (egressFilterId) Common Create Service, 79-13 Network navigation tree, 199-5
Egress From-Subscriber Reserved CBS % (egressFromSubReservedCbs) ISA-AA, 172-2 Egress Interface Index (egressIfIndex) Manage Tests, 134-7 Egress Label (egressLabel) Common Create Service, 79-13 LSPs, 84-3 Egress Mark QinQ Top Bits Only (egressQinqMarkTopBitsOnly) Common Create Service, 79-13 Egress Percentage of Rate (%) (portEgrPoolPercentageRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Egress Percetage of Rate (Kbps) (mdaEgrNamedPoolPolicy) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Egress Policy ID (egressPolicyId) Common Create Service, 79-14 Egress Rate (Kbps) (egressRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Egress Scheduler Name (egressSchedulerName) Common Create Service, 79-14 Egress To-Subscriber Reserved (egressToSubReservedCbs) ISA-AA, 172-2 Egress Traffic Descriptor (egress) Channel, 179-7 Email (email) Manage Customers, 82-2 Emulated Server IP Address (emulatedServerAddr) Common Create Service, 79-14 Enable RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-2 Enable (holdTimer) MPLS, 192-2 Enable (ldpSyncTimerEnabled) Routing instance, 184-6 Enable (leasePopulate) Common Create Service, 79-14 Create VPLS, 70-10 Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-3
May 2009
IN-17
Index Enable (resignalTimer) Enable Refresh Reduction (Refresh Reduction)
Enable (resignalTimer) MPLS, 192-2 Enable 1x1 STP (enable 1x1Stp) Create VLAN, 74-3 Enable Accounting (isAccountingEnabled) Administration, 167-4 Enable Admin State (adminEnable) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Enable Authentication (enableAuthentication) Create VLAN, 74-3 IS-IS, 191-3 Enable Authorization (isAuthorizationEnabled) Administration, 167-4, 167-4 Enable Auto ACL Filters (autoFilter) Create VPLS, 70-10 Routing Instance, 88-3, 184-6 Enable Backup (enableBackup) NE Maintenance, 150-7 Enable CSPF (cspfEnabled) LSPs, 84-4 Enable DHCP Relay (administrativeState) Common Create Service, 79-14 Network navigation tree, 199-5 Routing Instance, 88-3 Enable DHCPv6 Relay (administrativeState) Common Create Service, 79-15 Enable Egress (egressEnabled) Create Mirror, 75-3 Enable Flat STP (enableFlatStp) Create VLAN, 74-3 Enable Forwarding (enableForwarding) Routing instance, 184-7 Enable Info Option (informationOption) Common Create Service, 79-15 Routing Instance, 88-4 Enable Ingress (ingressEnabled) Create Mirror, 75-3 Enable Inter AS VPRN (enableInterAsVprn) BGP, 187-7 Enable IP Address validation (enableClientIpAddressValidation) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 Enable IPv4 (enableIPv4) IS-IS, 191-3
IN-18 May 2009
Enable IPv6 (enableIPv6) IS-IS, 191-3 Enable LDP Synchronization (enableLdpSync) Network navigation tree, 199-5 Enable Lease Populate (leasePopulate) Create VPLS, 70-10 Enable Local Proxy (localProxy) Common Create Service, 79-15 Interface and interface IP address, 186-3 Enable Local Proxy ARP (proxyArpLocal) Common Create Service, 79-15 Interface and interface IP address, 186-3 Enable Login Command (writeAccessLoginCommand) Generic NE Profiles, 166-2 Enable Login Prompt (enablingWriteAccessLoginPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3 Enable Mobile-Tag (enableMobileTag) Create VLAN, 74-3 Enable Multicast Limit Mode (enableMulitcastLimitMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Enable Option 82 (informationOption) Common Create Service, 79-16 Routing Instance, 88-4 Enable Peer Tracking (enabledPeerTracking) BGP, 187-7 Enable Peer Tracking (enableRapidwithdrawal) BGP, 187-7 Enable Port ID Mirroring (enablePortId) Create Mirror, 75-3 Enable Port Mobility (enablePortMobility) Physical Port and APS, 178-11 Enable Power Capacitor Detection (capacitorDetect) Card Slot, 176-3 Enable Priority Disconnect (priorityDisconnect) Card Slot, 176-3 Enable Refresh Bypass (RefreshBypass) RSVP, 196-2 Enable Refresh Reduction (Refresh Reduction) RSVP, 196-2
Index Enable Reliable Delivery (ReliableDelivery) Error Threshold (dteLmiErrorThreshold)
Enable Reliable Delivery (ReliableDelivery) RSVP, 196-2 Enable Reply On PADT(enableReplyOnPadt) Residential Subscriber, 129-5 Enable Second Login (twoStepsLogin) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3 Enable SRLG (vRtrMplsLspPathSrlg) LSPs, 84-4 Enable SRLG for FRR (vRtrMplsGeneralSrlgFrr) MPLS, 192-3 Enable STP (enableStp) Create VLAN, 74-4 Enabled Network, 168-2 Enabled (statementEnabled) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-4 Encap Type (encapsulationType) Routing instance, 184-7 Encap Type (encapType) Equipment navigation tree, 180-4 Encap Type (Type) Node redundancy, 87-3 Encapsulation Tagging (encapTagging) Common Create Service, 79-16 Encapsulation Type (encapsulationType) Create Mirror, 75-3 Mirror service template, 81-3 Encapsulation Value (End VPI) Create VLL, 71-6 Encapsulation Value (Start VPI) Create VLL, 71-6 Encapsulation Value (VPI) Create VLL, 71-6 End Address (endAddress) Create VPRN, 72-8 ingress multicast path, 120-4 Multicast CAC, 119-3 Routing Instance, 184-7 End Date Time Range Entry Assignment, 143-2 End Mcast Address (toGrpAddr) IGMP, 188-3 End Mcast Address Type (toGrpAddrType) IGMP, 188-3
End Multicast Address (toGrpAddr) MLD, 189-2 End Point Class ID (mlpppEndPointIdClass) Bundles, 174-4 End Point ID (mlpppEndPointId) Bundles, 174-4 End Run Day (frequencySettingTo) Time of Day, 121-2 End Time (endDate) Time of Day, 121-2 End Time (endTime) TCP Key Chains, 153-2 End Time (endYear endMonth endDay endHour endMinute) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-3 Endpoint A Type (endPointAType) Create physical link, 78-2 Endpoint B Type (endPointBType) Create physical link, 78-2 Enforce Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart) LDP, 198-3 Enforce Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfMcastRoutes) Create VPRN, 72-8 Routing Instance, 184-7 Enforce Maximum Number Of Routes (enforceMaxNumberOfRoutes) Create VPRN, 72-8 Entity Type (testedEntityType) Manage Tests, 134-7 Entry ID (entryId) Routing, 123-7 Entry ID (id) Application Assurance, 132-4 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Policies, 133-10 Equipment ID Code (channelMDLEicString) Channel, 179-7 Error Indicator (errorIndicator) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3 Error Threshold (dceLmiErrorThreshold) Channel, 179-7 Error Threshold (dteLmiErrorThreshold) Channel, 179-7
May 2009 IN-19
Index escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityEscalationEnabled) File Transfer Type (fileTransferType)
escalation (defined by specific policy) (isSeverityEscalationEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-5 Escalation (escalationEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-5 Ether Type (ethernetType) Access Ingress, 93-4 ACL MAC Filter, 111-3 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Ethernet Service Name (ethernetServiceName) Create VLAN, 74-4 Ethertype Network, 168-2 Ethertype (ethertypeValue) Bridge, 185-5 Exclusive (exclusive) Routing Instance, 88-4, 184-7 Execute button Manage Tests, 134-7 Execution Command Timeout (freezeDetectTime) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3 Exit On Reject (authExitOnReject), 167-4 Exit on Reject (authExitOnReject) Administration, 167-4 Exit Overflow Interval (exitOverflowInterval) OSPF, 193-5 Expedite (expedite) Policies, 133-10 Explicit Path ingress multicast path, 120-4 Export Target AS Value (vrfExportTargetASValue) Create VPRN, 72-8 Export Target Community Value (vrfExportTargetCommunityValue) Create VPRN, 72-8 Export Target Extended Community Value (vrfExportTargetExtendedCommunityValue ) Create VPRN, 72-8 Export Target Format (vrfExportTargetFormat) Create VPRN, 72-9
Export Target IP Address (vrfExportTargetIpAddress) Create VPRN, 72-9 External (externalPreference) IS-IS, 191-3 OSPF, 193-6 External LSA Limit (externalLsdbLimit) OSPF, 193-6 External Timing Reference Administrative State (externalInIfAdminStatus) shelf, 175-5 External Timing Reference Impedance Type (externalInputImpedanceType) Shelf, 175-5 External Timing Reference Input Type (externalInIfType) Shelf, 175-5 External Timing Reference Output Type (externalOutIfType) Shelf, 175-5
F
Facility ID Code (channelMDLPfiString) Channel, 179-7 Falling Delay (seconds) ingress multicast path, 120-5 Falling Percent Reset (%) (fallingPercentReset) ingress multicast path, 120-5 Falling Threshold (fallingThreshold) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-2 Family (family) Network navigation tree, 199-5 Fast Reroute (fastRerouteEnabled) LSPs, 84-4 Fast Reroute(fastRerouteEnabled) MPLS, 192-3 Fast-leave (fastLeave) Create VPLS, 70-10 File Compression (compressionMode) NE Maintenance, 150-7 File ID (fileID) Accounting, 138-3 File Transfer Type (fileTransferType) Mediation, 149-3
IN-20
May 2009
Index Filter ID (id) Forwarding Profile (profile)
Filter ID (id) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-2 7250 SAS andTelco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Standard IP Filter, 113-2 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-3 ACL IP Filter, 112-4 ACL MAC Filter, 111-3 Telco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-2 First Network Element (nodeIdLow) Bundles, 174-4 Node redundancy, 87-3 Physical Port and APS, 178-12 First Run Execution Sequence (firstGroupExecutionSequence) Manage Tests, 134-7 First Time Login Password Change 5620 SAM User Security, 151-5 First Timing Reference Administrative State (firstTimingReferenceAdministrativeState) Shelf, 175-6 First Timing Reference Input (firstTimingReferenceInput) Shelf, 175-6 First Timing Reference Interface Type (firstTimingRefBitsInterfaceType) Shelf, 175-6 Flood (flood) Manage Tests, 134-8 Flow (flowControl) Physical Port and APS, 178-12 Flow Full High Watermark (flowFullHighMark) Application Assurance, 132-4, 132-4 Flow Label (flowLabel) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-6 Flow Set-up Direction (flowSetupDir) Application Assurance, 132-4 Flush (timerFlush) RIP, 195-2 Forbid IGMP Snooping (forbidIgmpSnooping) Physical Port and APS, 178-12
Force Autocompletion... button Manage FIB Entries, 91-2 Force DE value (forceDeValue) Access Egress, 94-3, 98-5 Force L2PT on Managed L2 Access Interface (sapTlsL2ptForceBoundary) Create VPLS, 70-11 Force Mode (forceMode) Shelf, 175-6 Force OAM (force) Manage Tests, 134-8 Force Switchover (svcEndPointForceSwitchOver) Create VPLS, 70-11 Force VLAN VC Forwarding Create VPLS, 70-11 Forward All Multicast Traffic (forwardAllMulticast) Physical Port and APS, 178-12 Forward Delay (seconds) (bridgeForwardDelay) Bridge, 185-5 Forward NH (nextHop) ACL IP Filter, 112-4 Forward NH Interface (nextHopInterfaceName) ACL IP Filter, 112-4 Forwarding Class (forwardingClass) Access Egress, 184-8 Access Ingress, 198-3 Create Mirror, 75-3 Create VPRN, 72-9 Manage Tests, 134-8 Mirror service template, 81-3 Network, 98-5 Policies, 133-11 Forwarding Class Name (fcName) ISA-AA, 172-2 Forwarding Classes (forwardingClass) Create Mirror, 75-4 Forwarding Profile (profile) Manage Tests, 145-4
May 2009
IN-21
Index Fragment (fragment) Group Address (groupAddress)
Fragment (fragment) ACL IP Filter, 112-5 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-7 Policies, 133-12 Fragment Threshold (bytes) (fragmentThreshold) Bundles, 174-4 Frame Base Accounting (egressFrameBaseAccounting) Common Create Service, 79-17 Frame Base Accounting(schedulerPolicyFrameBasedAc cnt) Residential Subscriber, 129-5 Scheduler, 103-3 Frame ID Code (channelMDLFicString) Channel, 179-8 Frame Type (frameType) ACL MAC Filter, 111-3 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-7 Framing (framing) Physical Port and APS, 178-12 Free Addresses Minimum Threshold (minFree) Create VPRN, 72-9 Routing Instance, 184-8 Frequency (frequency) Alarm Settings, 147-5 Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-3 Time of Day, 121-2 Frequency (frequencyType) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-4 Frequency Unit (backupFrequencyUnit) Database, 146-2 From IP Address (originatingNode) Manage Tests, 134-9 FRR (defaultLspFrr) Service Tunnels, 85-3 Full Enquiry Interval (dteLmiFullEnquiryInterval) Channel, 179-8 Full Node Resync on Max Trap Gap (fullNodeResyncOnMaxTrapGap) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3
G
Gateway IP Address (gatewayIpAddress) Common Create Service, 79-17 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 Gateway MAC Address (macAddress) Service Management, 92-2 General query interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) Create VPLS, 70-11 Generate Alarm on Rising Threshold (generateAlarmOnRising) Manage Tests, 134-9 Generate First (Base) Version Service template manager, 86-2 Generate Velocity Properties Service template manager, 86-2 Generator Number String (channelMDLGenString) Channel, 179-8 Generic NE Type (productName) Generic NE Profiles, 166-3 Graceful Restart (gracefulRestart) Network navigation tree, 199-6 Group (level1Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-2 Group (level2Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-3 Group (level3Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-3 Group (level4Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-3 Group (level5Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-3 Group (level6Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-3 Group (level7Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-4 Group (level8Group) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-4 Group Address (groupAddress) MLD, 189-2
IN-22
May 2009
Index Group Address (grpAddr) High Priority Reserved (highPriorityReserved)
Group Address (grpAddr) Create VPLS, 70-12 Group Address One (groupAddress1) MLD, 189-2 Group Address Two (groupAddress2) MLD, 189-2 Group IP Address (groupAddress) Network navigation tree, 199-7 PIM, 194-5, 194-9 Group IP Address (groupIPAddress) Network navigation tree, 199-7 Group Name Network, 168-2 Group Number (groupNumber) IPsec, 173-2 ISA-AA, 172-2 Physical Port and APS, 178-13 Group Prefix Length (groupPrefixLength) PIM, 194-5 Group Source Address (groupSourceAddress) MLD, 189-2 Group Tag (groupTag) Alarm Settings, 147-5 Groups Included (adminGroupInclude) MPLS, 192-3 GSMP Administrative State (gsmpAdministrativeState) Common Create Service, 79-17 Guarded Destination (guardingDestinationAddress) LSPs, 84-4 Guarding Lsp (guardingLsp) LSPs, 84-5 GVRP (gvrpTreatment) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-2
H
Half Life (halfLife) Routing, 123-7 Health Check (isPasswordHealthCheck) NE Password Policy, 158-4 Health Check Interval (passwordHealthCheckInterval) NE Password Policy, 158-4
Hello Authentication (helloAuthentication) IS-IS, 191-4 Hello Factor (helloFactor) LDP, 198-3 Hello Factor (targettedHelloFactor) LDP, 198-3 Hello Interval (milliseconds) (helloInterval) RSVP, 196-3 Hello Interval (seconds) (helloInterval) IS-IS, 191-4 OSPF, 193-6 PIM, 194-5 Hello Message Length (helloMessageLength) Service Tunnels, 85-3 Hello Multiplier (helloMultiplier) IS-IS, 191-4 PIM, 194-5 Hello Request Timeout (helloRequestTimeout) Service Tunnels, 85-3 Hello Time (helloTime) Service Tunnels, 85-3 Hello Time (seconds) (bridgeHelloTime) Bridge, 185-5 Hello Timeout (helloTimeout) LDP, 198-3 Hello Timeout (targettedHelloTimeout) LDP, 198-4 Helper Mode (grHelperMode) Network navigation tree, 199-7 High Bandwidth Alarm (mCastAlarm) ingress multicast path, 120-5 High Bandwidth Multicast Traffic Taps Group (mCastGroup) ingress multicast path, 120-6 High Bandwidth Source (mCastSource) ingress multicast path, 120-6 High MAC Range (lpsHiMacRange) Bridge, 185-6 High Priority Defect (mepHighestPrDefect) Manage Tests, 134-9 High Priority Reserved (%) (highPriority) Network Queue, 99-3 Shared Queue, 100-3 High Priority Reserved (highPriorityReserved) Policies, 133-12
May 2009 IN-23
Index High Priority Traffic (%) (highPriority) HSMDA Egress Profiling (hsmdaDot1pProfile)
High Priority Traffic (%) (highPriority) ingress multicast path, 120-6 High Slope WRED Slope, 101-2 High Watermark (%) (highWatermark) Create VPLS, 70-12 High Watermark (%) (mfibTableHighWatermark) Create VPLS, 70-12 history enabled (historyEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-5 Hold Clear (seconds) (holdClear) VRRP policy, 125-2 Hold Down time (holdDownTime) Service Tunnels, 85-3 Hold Multiplier (holdMultiplier) Common Create Service, 79-17 Create VPLS, 70-12 Hold Priority (holdPriority) LSPs, 84-5 Hold Set (seconds) (holdSet) VRRP policy, 125-2 Hold Time (100s of milliseconds) (multiChassisHoldTime) Node redundancy, 87-3 Hold Time (lacpHoldTimeDown) LAG, 170-4 Hold Time (minutes) (vRtrPimNgGenEcmpBalanceHoldTime) PIM, 194-5 Hold Time (seconds) (holdTime) BGP, 187-7 Hold Time Down (100s of ms) (holdTimeDown) Physical Port and APS, 178-13 Hold Time Down (holdTimeDown) Physical Port and APS, 178-13 Hold Time Up (100s of ms) (holdTimeUp) Physical Port and APS, 178-14 Hold Time Up (holdTimeUp) Physical Port and APS, 178-14 Hold Timer (seconds) (holdTimer) MPLS, 192-3 Home Directory (homeDirectory) NE User Configuration, 157-4
IN-24 May 2009
Home Directory (templateHomeDirectory) NE System Security, 162-2 Hop Address (hopAddress) VRRP policy, 125-2 Hop Index (index) LSPs, 84-5 Hop Limit (fastRerouteHopLimit) LSPs, 84-5 Hop Limit (hopLimit) LSPs, 84-5 Hop Type (type) MPLS Path, 83-2 Host IP Address (ipAddress) Create Mirror, 75-4 Host Limit (hostLimit) Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Host MAC Address (macAddress) Create Mirror, 75-4 Host Name (hostName) Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Hour (maxLeaseHour) Routing Instance, 184-8 Hour (minLeaseHour) Routing Instance, 184-8 Hour (runHour) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Hour Alignment Setting (alignmentInHour) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Hours (hours) Create VPRN, 72-10 Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Residential Subscriber Policies, 184-8 Hours (maxLeaseHour) Create VPRN, 72-10 Hours (minLeaseHour) Create VPRN, 72-10 HSMDA Broadcast Queue ID (hsmdaBroadcastQueueId) Access Ingress, 93-5 HSMDA Counter Override (hsmdaCntrOvr) Policies, 133-12 HSMDA Egress Profiling (hsmdaDot1pProfile) Policies, 133-12
Index HSMDA High Slope Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults)
HSMDA High Slope HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-2 HSMDA Low Slope HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-2 HSMDA Multicast Queue ID (hsmdaMulticastQueueId) Access Ingress, 93-5 HSMDA Packet Byte Offset (bytes) (hsmdaPacketOffset) Access Ingress, 93-5, 94-4 HSMDA Queue ID (hsmdaQueueId) Access Egress, 94-4 Access Ingress, 93-5
I
I/F MAC Address (interfaceMACAddress) Create VPLS, 70-13 IBGP MultiPath (ibpgMultipath) BGP, 187-8 ICMP Code (icmpCode) ACL IP Filter, 112-5 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-4 ICMP Type (icmpType) ACL IP Filter, 112-5 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-4 ID (id) Access Ingress, 93-5 Administration, 167-5 CFM 802.1ag, 126-2 Common Create Service, 79-17 Common Tools, 145-3, 145-4 Discovery Manager, 148-2 File, 137-2 Multicast Package, 117-2 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-8 Network, 98-6 Policies, 133-13 Service Management, 92-3 ID (lsp) Manage Tests, 134-9 ID (maintenanceAssociationId) Create VLL, 71-9 ID (mepID) Create VLL, 71-6
ID (mepId) Common Create Service, 79-18 Manage Tests, 134-9 ID (pathID) Service Tunnels, 85-3 ID (queueId) Access Egress, 94-4 Access Ingress, 93-6 ID (subscriberId) Common Create Service, 79-18 Manage Customers, 82-2 ID (tunnelID) Common Create Service, 79-18 Create VPLS, 70-12 Idle Cycle Flags (idleCycleFlags) Channel, 179-8 Idle Session Warning Message (idleSessionWarningMsg) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 IDP Prefix (idpPrefix) LDP, 198-5 IGMP Enabled (igmpEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-10 Routing Instance, 88-4, 184-8 IGMP Host Prefix List Name (igmpHostPrefixList) Routing, 123-7 IGMP Option (igmpOption) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 Multicast Package, 117-2 IGMP Snooping (igmpSnoopEnable) Bridge, 185-6 IGMP Version (igmpVersion) Create VPLS, 70-13 Ignor DN Bit (ignorDNBit) OSPF, 193-6 Ignor DN Bit (ignorDNbit) OSPF, 193-16 Ignore BPDU (mobilePortIgnoreBPDU) Physical Port and APS, 178-14 Ignore Probe Results (ignoreResults) Manage Tests, 134-10
May 2009
IN-25
Index Ignore Timestamps Ingress Label (ingressLabel)
Ignore Timestamps Discovery Manager, 148-2 Router, 169-3 IGP Inhibit (igpInhibit) Network navigation tree, 199-7 ILMI Link Vpi (ilmiLinkVpi) Channel, 179-8, 179-8 IMA Version (imaVersion) Bundles, 174-5 Image Root Path (cflashImageRoot) NE Maintenance, 150-7 Ime Type (requestedImeType) Channel, 179-9 implicit severity demotion (isSeverityImplicitDemotionEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-6 implicit severity promotion (isSeverityImplicitPromotionEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-6 Import Policy (importPolicy) Create VPLS, 70-13 IGMP, 188-3 MLD, 189-3 Import Target AS Value (vrfImportTargetASValue) Create VPRN, 72-10 Import Target Community Value (vrfImportTargetCommunityValue) Create VPRN, 72-10 Import Target Extended Community Value (vrfImportTargetExtendedCommunityValue ) Create VPRN, 72-10 Import Target Format (vrfImportTargetFormat) Create VPRN, 72-11 Import Target IP Address (vrfImportTargetIpAddress) Create VPRN, 72-11 Improved assert (improvedAssert) PIM, 194-6 In DSCP (inDscp) Access Egress, 94-4 Access Ingress, 93-6
In MDA Carrier Module Slot (inMCM) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 In Precedence (inPrecedence) Access Egress, 94-5 Access Ingress, 93-6 In Profile (inDot1p) Access Egress, 94-5 In Remark (inRemark) Access Ingress, 93-6 In Service Software Upgrade (isIssu) NE Maintenance, 150-7 Include ADSPEC in RSVP (addSpec) LSPs, 84-6 Include Falling Threshold Manage Tests, 134-10 Include Groups Assigned (adminGroupInclude) MPLS, 192-3 Include Groups Unassigned (adminGroupInclude) MPLS, 192-3 Incoming Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Indeterminate Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Infinity For Threshold (infinityForThreshold) PIM, 194-6, 194-11 Info Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Ingress Aggregate Rate Limit (kbps) (hsmdaIngressAggRateLimit) Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Ingress Bandwidth (Mb) (IngressBW) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-3 Ingress Filter ID (ingressFilterId) Common Create Service, 79-18 Network navigation tree, 199-8 Ingress Filtering (mobilePortIngFiltering) Physical Port and APS, 178-14 Ingress Label (ingressLabel) Common Create Service, 79-18 Create Mirror, 75-4 LSPs, 84-6
IN-26
May 2009
Index Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits) Interface ID (interfaceId)
Ingress Match QinQ Dot1P (ingressMatchQinqDot1pBits) Common Create Service, 79-18 Create IES, 73-5 Ingress Percentage of Rate (%) (portIngrPoolPercentageRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 Ingress Percentage of Rate (Kbps) (mdaIngrNamedPoolPolicy) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 Ingress Policy ID (ingressPolicyId) Common Create Service, 79-18 Ingress Rate (Mbps) (ingressRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 Ingress Scheduler Name (ingressSchedulerName) Common Create Service, 79-19 Ingress To-Subscriber Reserved (ingressReservedCbs) ISA-AA, 172-3 Ingress Traffic Descriptor (ingress) Channel, 179-9 Inherit Service ID Value Common Create Service, 79-19 Inherit Value Network navigation tree, 199-8 Inherit Value (inheritanceMask) Common Create Service, 79-19 Inherit Value (propertyInheritance) LSPs, 84-6 Inhibit Learning (inhibitLearning) Manage Services, 80-2 Manage Tests, 134-10 Init Delay (seconds) (initDelay) VRRP, 89-2 Initial Severity Assignment (autoAssignedSeverity) Alarm Settings, 147-6 Initial Time to Live (initialTimeToLive) Common Tools, 145-4 Initial Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateInitialWait) OSPF, 193-7 Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait) OSPF, 193-7
Initialize (paePortInitialize) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 Inner Encap Value (fwdSapInnerEncapValue) Policies, 133-13 Inner Encap Value (innerEncapValue) Mirror service template, 81-4 Inner Encap Value End Copy/Move SAPs, 144-2 Inner Encap Value Offset (innerEncapShiftOffset) Copy/Move SAPs, 144-2 Inner Encap Value Start Copy/Move SAPs, 144-3 Inner Encapsulation Value (innerEncapValue) Common Create Service, 79-19 Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Inner Encapsulation Value (VCI) (vci) Common Create Service, 79-19 Insert Hop MPLS Path, 83-2 Instance BPDU Switching (insBpduSwitching) Bridge, 185-6 Instance ID (instanceIndex) OSPF, 193-8 Routing, 123-8 Instance Index (id) Bridge, 185-6 Create VPLS, 70-14 Instance Name (mstInstanceName) Bridge, 185-6 Inter-Chassis Backup (isIcb) Create VLL, 71-7 Inter-Frame Gap (bytes) (interFrameGap) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 Interface Base Reference Cost (kbps) (ifBaseRefCost) OSPF, 193-7 Interface ID (id) Common Create Service, 79-19 Create VPLS, 70-14 Interface and interface IP address, 186-3 Interface ID (interfaceID) Routing Instance, 88-5, 184-9 Interface ID (interfaceId) Channel, 179-9
May 2009 IN-27
Index Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption) IP Address Pool Name (poolName)
Interface Id Option (relayItfIdOption) Common Create Service, 79-19 Interface Id String (dhcp6ItfIdString) Common Create Service, 79-20 Interface Mapping (atmInterfaceMapping) Channel, 179-9 Interface Name (interfaceName) LSPs, 84-6 Interface Name (routerName) Network navigation tree, 199-8 Interface Name (unnumberedInterfaceName) Common Create Service, 79-20 Intermediate Destination (interDestId) Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Intermediate Destination ID (interDestIdString) Create VPRN, 72-12 Residential Subscriber, 129-6 Intermediate Destination ID (intermediateDestId) Common Create Service, 79-20 Internal (internalPreference) OSPF, 193-8 Internal (preference) IS-IS, 191-4 Interval (collectionInterval) Alarm Settings, 147-6 Interval (seconds) Manage Tests, 134-10 Network navigation tree, 197-2 Interval (seconds) (interval) Manage Tests, 134-10 Remote Network Monitoring, 130-3 Interval for Echo Request (seconds) (interval) VRRP policy, 125-3 Interworking Type (interworking) Common Create Service, 79-20 Create VLL, 71-7 IP Address Manage Tests, 134-10 Ip Address (aaasIpAddress) Administration, 167-5 IP Address (address) Policies, 133-13
IP Address (destinationIpAddress) MPLS Path, 83-2 IP address (giIpAddress) Common Create Service, 79-21 IP Address (ipAddr) Common Create Service, 79-21 IP Address (ipAddress) 802_1x, 127-2 Common Create Service, 79-21, 79-22 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 Discovery Manager, 148-2 MPLS Path, 83-2 VPLS, 70-14 VRRP policy, 125-3 IP Address (IpAddressPointer) MPLS Path, 83-3 IP Address (primaryIpAddress) Network navigation tree, 199-8 IP Address (targetIpAddress) Common Create Service, 79-21 Static Routes, 197-3 IP Address (unnumberedIpAddress) Common Create Service, 79-22 IP Address 1(address1) Create VPRN, 72-12 Residential Subscriber, 129-7 Routing Instance, 184-9 Ip Address 2 (aaasIpAddress2) Administration, 167-5 IP Address 2 (address2) Create VPRN, 72-12 Residential Subscriber, 129-7 Routing Instance, 184-9 IP Address 3 (address3) Create VPRN, 72-12 Residential Subscriber, 129-7 Routing Instance, 184-9 IP Address 4 (address4) Create VPRN, 72-12 Residential Subscriber, 129-7 Routing Instance, 184-9 IP Address Pool Name (poolName) Residential Subscriber, 129-7
IN-28
May 2009
Index IP Address Prefix (ipAddrPrefix) Keep-Alive Factor (targettedKeepAliveFactor)
IP Address Prefix (ipAddrPrefix) Routing Instance, 184-10 IP Opt Mask (ipOptionMask) ACL IP Filter, 112-5 IP Option (ipOptionValue) ACL IP Filter, 112-5 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-8 IP Option Mask (ipOptionMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-9 IP Prefix (ipAddress) MSDP, 190-2 IP Prefix (ipPrefix) LDP, 198-4 IP Protocol (protocol) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-4 IP Protocol Number (ipProtocolNumber) Application Assurance, 132-5 IP Protocol Operator (ipProtocolNumberOperator) Application Assurance, 132-6 IPv6 Administrative Status (ipv6AdminstrativeStatus) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-9 IPv6 Allowed (ipv6Allowed) Common Create Service, 79-22 Network navigation tree, 199-9 IPv6 Prefix (prefix) Common Create Service, 79-22 Routing Instance, 184-10 IPv6 Routing TLV type (ipv6RoutingTlvType) IS-IS, 191-4 IPv6 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence) Network navigation tree, 194-6 IPv6 Unicast Multi-Topology (multiTopoIPv6Ucast) IS-IS, 191-5 Is Indirect (nextHopIndirectlyReachable) ACL IP Filter, 112-6 Is Root Catalogue (mainChannelCatalogue) Multicast Package, 117-3 IS-IS Enabled (isisEnabled) Routing Instance, 88-5, 184-10 ISA-AA MDA Role (aaMdaRole) ISA-AA, 172-3
Isis Default Route Tag (defaultRouteTag) IS-IS, 191-5 ISIS External Routes (isisExternal) Routing, 123-8 ISIS Route Level (isisRoutes) Routing, 123-8
J
J0 Byte (j0Byte) Physical Port and APS, 178-15 J0 String (j0String) Physical Port and APS, 178-16 J1 String (j1String) Channel, 179-9 Jitter Buffer (ms) (CemJitterBuffer) Create VLL, 71-8 Jumbo Frame Network, 168-2 Jumbo Frame (jumboFrame) Bridge, 185-7
K
Keep Alive (seconds) Channel, 179-9 Create VPLS, 70-14 Keep Alive (seconds) (keepAlive) BGP, 187-8 Keep Alive Interval (interval) Service Management, 92-3 Keep Alive Interval (Sec) (tmnxPortEtherDownWhenLoopedKeepAli ve) Physical Port and APS, 178-16 Keep Multiplier (keepMultiplier) RSVP, 196-3 Keep-Alive (seconds) Common Create Service, 79-22 Keep-alive Enabled (keepAliveOn) Service Tunnels, 85-4 Keep-Alive Factor (keepAliveFactor) LDP, 198-4 Keep-Alive Factor (targettedKeepAliveFactor) LDP, 198-4
May 2009
IN-29
Index Keep-Alive Polling Count (keepAlivePollCount) Last Run Execution Sequence (lastGroupExecutionSequence)
Keep-Alive Polling Count (keepAlivePollCount) Channel, 179-10 Keep-Alive Polling Frequency (seconds) (keepAlivePollFreq) Channel, 179-10 Keep-Alive Test Frequency (seconds) (keepAliveTestFreq) Channel, 179-10 Keep-Alive Timeout (keepAliveTimeout) LDP, 198-5 Keep-Alive Timeout (targettedKeepAliveTimeout) LDP, 198-5 Keepalive Interval (deciseconds) (keepAliveInterval) Node redundancy, 87-3 Key (authenticationKey) VRRP, 89-2 Key (key) Network navigation tree, 199-9 OSPF, 193-8 Key (sharedSecret) TCP Key Chains, 153-2 Key Direction (keyDirection) TCP Key Chains, 153-3 Key ID (keyId) TCP Key Chains, 153-3 Key Index (keyIndex) OSPF, 193-8
L
L2 Header (l2header) Common Create Service, 79-22 L2 Protocol Termination (l2ptTermination) Common Create Service, 79-23 L4 Load Balancing (l4LoadBalancing) Router, 169-3 Label Script manager, 135-3 Label Action (labelAction) LSPs, 84-6 Label TTL (labelTimeout) Manage Tests, 134-11
LACP Key (lacpKey) Node redundancy, 87-4 LACP Mode (lacpMode) LAG, 170-4 LACP System Priority (sysLacpSystemPriority) LAG, 170-4 Router, 169-3 LACP Transmit Interval (lacpTransmitInterval) LAG, 170-4 Node redundancy, 87-4 LACP Transmit Standby (lacpXmitStdby) LAG, 170-4 Node redundancy, 87-4 LAG ID (firstLagId) Node redundancy, 87-5 LAG ID (lagId) LAG, 170-5 Node redundancy, 87-4 Policies, 133-13 LAG ID (secondLagId) Node redundancy, 87-5 LAG link selection (macDestAddrHashing) Common Create Service, 79-23 Lag Usage Optimization (lagUsageOptimize) PIM, 194-7 Last Member Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopLastMember) Bridge, 185-7 Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl) IGMP, 188-3 Last Member Query Interval (seconds) (lastMemberQueryInterval) MLD, 189-3 Last Member Query Interval (tenths of seconds) (genLastMembQueryIntvl) IGMP, 188-3 Manage Services, 80-2 Last Run Execution Sequence (lastGroupExecutionSequence) Manage Tests, 134-11
IN-30
May 2009
Index LCP Keep Alive Hold Up Multiplier (lcpKaHoldUpMplier) Link State DB Type (lsdbType)
LCP Keep Alive Hold Up Multiplier (lcpKaHoldUpMplier) Residential Subscriber, 129-7 LCP Keep Alive Interval (lcpKaInterval) Residential Subscriber, 129-7 LDP Enabled (ldpEnabled) Routing Instance, 88-5, 184-10 Ldp Enabled (ldpEnabled) Service Tunnels, 85-4 LDP Prefix (ldpPrefix) Manage Tests, 134-11 LDP Prefix Length (ldpPrefixLen) Manage Tests, 134-11 LDP Prefix Length (prefixLen) Manage Tests, 134-11 LDP Synchronization Timer (ldpSyncTimer) Network navigation tree, 199-10 Routing Instance, 184-10 LDP(ldp) Network navigation tree, 199-10 Learning Enabled (learningEnabled) Create VPLS, 70-15 Learning Time Window (minutes) (lpsLearningWindowTime) Bridge, 185-7 Lease Populate (leasePopulate) Common Create Service, 79-23 Network navigation tree, 199-9 Lease Time (leaseTime) Common Create Service, 79-23 Lease Time RADIUS Override (proxyLTRadiusOverride) Common Create Service, 79-24 LER Use DSCP (lerUseDscp) Network, 98-6 Less Specific (lessSpecific) VRRP policy, 125-3 Level (level) PIM, 194-7 Policies, 133-14 Level (maintDomainLevel) CFM 802.1ag, 126-2 Level (orphanLevel) Port scheduler, 105-3
Level (portParentLevel) Policies, 133-14 Level Capability (levelCapability) IS-IS, 191-5 Level ID (levelId) PIM, 194-7 LI Local Save Allowed (liLocalSaveAdmin) Router, 169-4 LI Profile (liProfile) NE User Profiles, 156-3 Lifetime (seconds) (defaultLifetime) Common Create Service, 79-24 Routing Instance, 184-11 Lifetime (seconds) (preferredLifetime) Common Create Service, 79-24 Interface and interface IP address, 186-3 Lifetime (seconds) (validLifetime) Common Create Service, 79-24 Interface and interface IP address, 186-4 Lightweight Execution (sla) Manage Tests, 134-11 Limit Mac Move (limitMacMove) Create VPLS, 70-15 Limit Mac Move Level (limitMacMoveLevel) Create VPLS, 70-15 Limit of Echo Request Failures (dropCount) VRRP policy, 125-3 Line Buildout (lineBuildout) Physical Port and APS, 178-16 Line Code (lineCode) Physical Port and APS, 178-16 Line Impedance (lineImpedance) Physical Port and APS, 178-17 Line Length (lineLength) Physical Port and APS, 178-17 Link Activation Timer (linkActivationTimer) Bundles, 174-5 Link Deactivation Timer (linkDeactivationTimer) Bundles, 174-5 Link Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtLinkRateLimit) NE System Security, 162-2 Link State DB Type (lsdbType) OSPF, 193-8
May 2009
IN-31
Index Link Type (linkType) Low Slope
Link Type (linkType) Create VPLS, 70-15 LLF Enabled (llfEnabled) Create VLL, 71-8 LMI Mode (mode) Channel, 179-10 LMI Type (frDlcmiState) Channel, 179-10 Local Address (localAddress) BGP, 187-8 Common Create Service, 79-24 Create VPLS, 70-15 Local Age Time (seconds) (localAgeTime) Create VPLS, 70-16 Local AS (localAS) BGP, 187-9 Local AS Private (localASPrivate) BGP, 187-9 Local Channel ID (localChannelId) Channel, 179-11 Local ECID (cemLocalEcid) Create VLL, 71-9 Local ECID (localECID) Channel, 179-11 Local IP Address (localIpAddress) MSDP, 190-2 Local Port (localPort) Channel, 179-11 Local Preference (localPreference) BGP, 187-9 Local Preference Set (localPreferenceSet) Routing, 123-9 Locataion ID Code (channleMDLLicString) Channel, 179-11 Location (location) Router, 169-4 Location (scriptHomeDirectory) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Lockout Time (minutes) (lockoutMinutes) NE Password Policy, 158-4 Log Class (monitoredObjectClass) Log Records, 69-2 Log On Change (logOnChange) Alarm Settings, 147-7
Log On Deletion (logOnDeletion) Alarm Settings, 147-7 Log Only (ipv6MaxNumRoutesLogOnly) Create VPRN, 72-13 Log Only (maxNumberOfMcastRoutesLogOnly) Create VPRN, 72-14 Log Only (maxNumberOfRoutesLogOnly) Create VPRN, 72-14 Log(cpeEnableLog) Network navigation tree, 197-3 Loggable (loggable) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 Policies, 133-15 Login Prompt Optional (isLoginPromptOptional) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 Login Timeout (loginTimeout) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 Loop Detect (loopDetect) BGP, 187-9 Loop Respond (channelFEACLoopRespond) Channel, 179-11 Loopback (channelLoopback) Channel, 179-11 Loopback (loopback) Physical Port and APS, 178-18, 178-19 Loopback Enabled Routing Instance, 88-6 Loopback Enabled (loopbackEnabled) Routing Instance, 184-11 Loopback Location (hex) (loopbackLocation) Manage Tests, 134-12 Lost Connection Wait Interval (holdOnNeighborFailure) Node redundancy, 87-5 Low MAC Range (lpsLoMacRange) Bridge, 185-8 Low Priority Defect (lowPriorityDefect) Common Create Service, 79-25 Create VLL, 71-9 Manage Tests, 134-12 Low Slope WRED Slope, 101-2
IN-32
May 2009
Index Low Watermark (%) (lowWatermark) manual severity alterations (isSeverityManuallyAlterable)
Low Watermark (%) (lowWatermark) Create VPLS, 70-16 Low Watermark (%) (mfibTableLowWatermark) Create VPLS, 70-16 LSA Arrival Wait (milliseconds) (lsaArrivalWait) OSPF, 193-8 LSA Generate Max Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateMaxWait) OSPF, 193-9 LSP Exp (lspExp) Network, 98-6 LSP EXP In Profile (lspExpInProfile) Network, 98-6 LSP EXP Out Profile (lspExpOutProfile) Network, 98-6 LSP Initial Wait (seconds) (lspInitialWait) IS-IS, 191-5 LSP Lifetime (seconds) (lspLifetime) IS-IS, 191-6 LSP Max Wait (seconds) (lspMaxWait) IS-IS, 191-6 LSP Pacing Interval (seconds) (lspPacingInterval) IS-IS, 191-6 LSP Second Wait (seconds) (lspSecondWait) IS-IS, 191-6
M
MA ID (maintenanceAssociationId) Manage Tests, 134-12 MA ID (maintenanceDomainId) Create VLL, 71-9 MAC Address (lpsL2MacAddress) Bridge, 185-8 Physical Port and APS, 178-19 MAC Address (macAddr) Common Create Service, 79-25 MAC Address (macAddress) Common Create Service, 79-25 Manage Tests, 134-12 Service Management, 92-3 VRRP, 89-3
MAC Address (physicalAddress) Common Create Service, 79-25 Network navigation tree, 199-10 MAC Addtress (clientMacAddress) Residential Subscriber, 129-7 MAC Flush on fail (macFlushOnFail) Create VPLS, 70-17 MAC Monitoring (macMonitoring) Common Create Service, 79-26 MAC Pinning (macPinning) Create VPLS, 70-17 MAC Refresh Interval (macRefreshInterval) Create VLL, 71-9 Maintenance Association ID (maintenanceAssociationId) Common Create Service, 79-26 Maintenance Domain ID (maintenanaceDomainId) Common Create Service, 79-26 Manage Tests, 134-12 Major Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Make before Break (adaptive) LSPs, 84-7 Make FIB Entry Static... button Manage FIB Entries, 91-2 Managed Address Config (managedAddrConfigFlag) Common Create Service, 79-26 Routing Instance, 184-11 Management IP Selection (mgmtIpRule) Router, 169-4 Mandatory Bandwidth (kbps) (preRsvdMandatoryBandwidth) Create VPLS, 70-17 Network navigation tree, 199-10 manual (manualDeletionRule) Alarm Settings, 147-7 Manual Backup Directory (manualBackupDest) Database, 146-3 manual severity alterations (isSeverityManuallyAlterable) Alarm Settings, 147-7
May 2009
IN-33
Index Map Type (cVlanMapType) Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval)
Map Type (cVlanMapType) Create VLAN, 74-4 Mark DE bit (deMark) Access Egress, 94-5, 98-7 Mark DE bit1 as Out Of Profile (de1OutOfProfile) Access Ingress, 93-7 Mask (destinationMacAddressMask) Access Ingress, 93-7 Mask (dot1pMask) Access Ingress, 93-7 Mask (dscpMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-6 Mask (mask) Create VPRN, 72-14 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 IS-IS, 191-6 MSDP, 190-2 PIM, 194-7 Routing, 123-9 Static Routes, 197-3 VRRP policy, 125-3 Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) Access Ingress, 93-8 Mask (tosValueMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-6 Mask Bits (maskBits) Discovery Manager, 148-2 Mask Reply (maskReply) Common Create Service, 79-26 Network navigation tree, 199-11 Master Inherit Interval (masterIntervalInherit) VRRP, 89-3 Match Circuit ID (matchCircuitId) Common Create Service, 79-27 Match Destination IP Port Range (matchDestinationIpPort) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-6 Match Destination Port (matchDestinationPort) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-6 Match Source IP Port Range (matchSourceIpPort) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-6
IN-34 May 2009
Match Source Port (matchSourcePort) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Match String (matchString) NE User Profiles, 156-3 Match Type DHCP 1 (matchTypeDhcp1) Residential Subscriber, 129-8 Match Type DHCP 2 (matchTypeDhcp2) Residential Subscriber, 129-8 Match Type DHCP 3 (matchTypeDhcp3) Residential Subscriber, 129-8 Match Type DHCP 4 (matchTypeDhcp4) Residential Subscriber, 129-8 Match Type PPPoE 1 (matchTypePppoe1) Residential Subscriber, 129-8 Match Type PPPoE 2 (matchTypePppoe2) Residential Subscriber, 129-9 Match Type PPPoE 3 (matchTypePppoe3) Residential Subscriber, 129-9 MAX NE CPM IP Filter, 165-9 Max (Collective) Log Size (KB) (maxSize) Database, 146-3 Max Age (seconds) (bridgeMaxAge) Bridge, 185-8 Max Avg. (maxAverage) WRED Slope, 101-3 Max Bandwidth (kbps) (bandwidth) Multicast CAC, 119-3 max Burst (maxBurst) RSVP, 196-3 Max Concat Delay (maxDelay) Create VLL, 71-9 Max Depth (maxDepth) HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-3 Max Drop Count (maxDropCount) Service Tunnels, 85-4 Max Egress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxEgrBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-19 Max Groups (maxGroups) PIM, 194-7 Max Ingress BW (kbps) (qosPortMaxIngBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-19 Max Interval (seconds) (maxInterval) Common Create Service, 79-27 Routing Instance, 184-11
Index Max Jitter Expected (ms) (maxJitter) Maximum Inner Encap Value (maxInnerEncapValue)
Max Jitter Expected (ms) (maxJitter) Channel, 179-12 Max Log Entries Allowed (maxLogEntries) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Max Log Size (maxLogRecords) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-5 Max Log Size (records) (maxLogSize) Alarm Settings, 147-7 Max Number of Sessions (maxNumSessions) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 Max Prob. (maxProbability) HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-3 WRED Slope, 101-3 Max Req (paeAuthMaxReq) Physical Port and APS, 178-19 Max Suppression (maxSuppression) Routing, 123-9 Max Time Log Entries Kept (seconds) (maxTimeLogEntries) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Max Time Script Run (seconds) (maxTimeScriptRun) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-5 Max Vlan ID (maxVlanId) Create VPLS, 70-18 Max. Filtered MACs to Learn (lpsMaxFilteredMacNum) Bridge, 185-8 Max. MAC Addresses to Learn (lpsMaxMacNum) Bridge, 185-8 Max. number of groups (maxNbrGroups) Create VPLS, 70-18, 70-18 Max. Response interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval) Create VPLS, 70-18 Max. Response interval group queries (tenths of seconds) (lastMemberInterval) Create VPLS, 70-19 Max. VLAN Tag (max) Create VPLS, 70-19 Maximum Attempts (attemptsCount) NE Password Policy, 158-4
Maximum Attempts Time (minutes) (attemptsMinutes) NE Password Policy, 158-4 Maximum Backup Age (days) (maxBackupAge) NE Maintenance, 150-7 Maximum Bandwidth (Kbps) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Maximum BPDUs (PDUs/Hello interval) (stpMaxBPDUs) Create VPLS, 70-19 Maximum Buffer Space (%) (mbs) ingress multicast path, 120-6 Maximum Burst Size (%) (mbs) Network Queue, 99-3 Shared Queue, 100-3 Maximum Burst Size (KB) (maximumBurstSize) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-9 Maximum Burst Size (kb) (maximumBurstSize) Policies, 133-15 Maximum Concurrent Pings (maxConcurrentPings) Manage Tests, 134-12 Maximum Concurrent Traces (maxConcurrentTraces) Manage Tests, 134-13 Maximum Declined Addresses Stored (maxDeclined) Create VPRN, 72-15 Routing Instance, 184-11 Maximum Entries (maxEntries) Create VPLS, 70-19, 70-19 Maximum Failures (maxFailures) Common Tools, 145-4 Maximum Hop Manage Tests, 134-13 Maximum Host Lost Connectivity Rate (traps per second) (maxHostLostConnectivityRate) Residential Subscriber, 129-9 Maximum Inner Encap Value (maxInnerEncapValue) Node redundancy, 87-5
May 2009
IN-35
Index Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime) Member AS (memberAS)
Maximum Lease Time (maxLeaseTime) Create VPRN, 72-15, 72-19 Routing Instance, 184-12 Maximum Links (maximumLinks) Bundles, 174-5 Maximum Number of Equal Cost Routes Routing Instance, 88-6, 184-12 Maximum Number Of Equal Cost Routes (maxNumberOfEqualCostRoutes) Create VPRN, 72-15 Maximum Number of Groups (maxGroups) IGMP, 188-3 MLD, 189-3 Maximum Number of Hops (hopCount) Manage Tests, 134-13 Maximum Number Of IPV6 Routes (maxIPv6RouteNumber) Create VPRN, 72-15 Maximum Number of Leases (maxLeaseStates) Common Create Service, 79-27 Maximum Number Of Multicast Routes (maxNumberOfMcastRoutes) Create VPRN, 72-15 Maximum Number Of Routes (maxNumberOfRoutes) Create VPRN, 72-16 Maximum Outer Encap Value (maxOuterEncapValue) Node redundancy, 87-5 Maximum Path (maxPath) LDP, 198-6 Maximum Paths (autoMaxPaths) LDP, 198-6 Maximum Paths (maxPath) Manage Tests, 134-13 Maximum PDU Size (maxPduSize) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 Maximum Power (milliwatt) (powerMaximum) Physical Port and APS, 178-20 Maximum Power (Watts) (maxPower) Card Slot, 176-3 Maximum Queue Size (msec) (maxQueueSize) MLPPP egress QoS profile, 97-2
IN-36 May 2009
Maximum Rate (kbps) (maxRate) Port scheduler, 105-4 Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schedulerMaxRate) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-4 Maximum Rate (Mbps) (schOvrMaxRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-20 Maximum Recovery Time (seconds) (maximumRecoveryTime) LDP, 198-6 Maximum Response Time between Group Messages (seconds) (lastMembQueryIntvl) MLD, 189-3 Maximum Response Time For MLDv2 (seconds) (queryResponseIntvl) MLD, 189-3 Maximum Sessions Per Mac (maxsessionsPerMac) Residential Subscriber, 129-9 Maximum Time to Live (maxTimeToLive) LDP, 198-6 Manage Tests, 134-13 Maximum Trap Gap (maxTrapGap) Generic NE Profiles, 166-5 Maximum TTL(autoTrMaxTtl) Network navigation tree, 199-11 MBS (cells) (mbs) ATM QoS, 95-3 MDA Weight (mdaWeight) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 MDCR (kbps) (mdcr) ATM QoS, 95-3 MDL Message Type (channelMDLMessageType) Channel, 179-12 MDT Default Group Address (mdtGroupIPAddress) PIM, 194-7 MED Compare (medCompare) BGP, 187-10 MED Source (medSource) BGP, 187-10 MED Value (medValue) BGP, 187-11 Member AS (memberAS) Routing Instance, 88-6, 184-12
Index MEP Creation on Access Interface(autoMepCreationAccessInterface) Minutes (minLeaseTime)
MEP Creation on Access Interface(autoMepCreationAccessInterface) Manage Tests, 134-13 Mep Creation on all SDP Bindings (autoMepCreationSdbBindings) Manage Tests, 134-14 MEP ID (id) Manage Tests, 134-14 Mesh Group (meshGroup) IS-IS, 191-6 Mesh Group Status (meshGroupStatus) IS-IS, 191-7 Message Interval (milliseconds) (messageIntervalMilSec) VRRP, 89-3 Message Interval (seconds) (messageInterval) VRRP, 89-3 Message Pacing (msgPacing) RSVP, 196-3 Message Size (messageSize) RIP, 195-3 Metric (metric) Create VPRN, 72-16 IS-IS, 191-7 LSPs, 84-7 OSPF, 193-9 Service Tunnels, 85-4 Static Routes, 197-3 Metric Action (metricAction) Routing, 123-9 Metric In (metricIn) RIP, 195-3 Metric Out (metricOut) RIP, 195-3 Metric Value (metricValue) Routing, 123-10 MHF Creation (mhfCreation) Manage Tests, 134-14 Min AS Origination (seconds) (minASOrigination) BGP, 187-11 Min Interval (seconds) (minInterval) Common Create Service, 79-27 Routing Instance, 184-12
Min Vlan ID (minVlanId) Create VPLS, 70-19 Min. Route Advertisement (minRouteAdvertisement) BGP, 187-11 Min. VLAN Tag (min) Create VPLS, 70-19 Minimum Inner Encap Value (minInnerEncapValue) Node redundancy, 87-5 Minimum Lease Time (minLeaseTime) Create VPRN, 72-16 Routing Instance, 184-12 Minimum Length (minLength) NE Password Policy, 158-4 Minimum Links (minimumLinks) Bundles, 174-6 Minimum Outer Encap Value (minOuterEncapValue) Node redundancy, 87-5 Minimum Time Interval Between Full Node Resyncs (minTimeIntervalBetweenFullNodeResyncs ) Generic NE Profiles, 166-4 Minimum TTL Value (minTTLValue) Network navigation tree, 199-11 Minor Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-4 Minute (offerMinute) Create VPRN, 72-17 Minute (runMinute) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6 Minute Alignment Setting (alignmentInMinute) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6 Minutes (maxLeaseMinute) Routing Instance, 184-13 Minutes (maxLeaseTime) Create VPRN, 72-16 Minutes (minLeaseMinute) Routing Instance, 184-13 Minutes (minLeaseTime) Create VPRN, 72-17
May 2009
IN-37
Index Minutes (minutes) Multicast Group Prefix List Name (mcastGroupPrefixList)
Minutes (minutes) Create VPRN, 72-16 Residential Subscriber, 129-9 Routing Instance, 184-13 Minutes (offerMinute) Routing Instance, 184-13 MIR (%) (mir) MLPPP egress QoS profile, 97-2 MLD Enabled (mldEnabled) Routing Instance, 184-13 MLD version (mldVersion) Create VPLS, 70-19 MLPPP Class (mlpppClass) MLPPP egress QoS profile, 97-2 Mode (dot3OamMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-20 Mode (hybridMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-20 Mode (mode) Access Ingress, 93-8 Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 Equipment navigation tree, 180-6 MSDP, 190-3 Mode (mvrMode) Bridge, 185-9 Mode (portManualMode) Bridge, 185-9 Monitor Access Interface Operational State (monitorAccessInterfaceOper) Common Create Service, 79-27 Monitored Events (dceLmiMonitoredEvents) Channel, 179-14 Monitored Events (dTeLmiMonitoredEvents) Channel, 179-14 Monitored Object OID (monitoredObjectId) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-3 Monitored Status (enableStatus) Shelf, 175-6 Monitoring Period (monitoringPeriod) Residential Subscriber, 129-10 Month (runMonth) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6
Move Frequency (macMoveFrequency) Create VPLS, 70-20 MPLS Enabled (mplsEnabled) Routing Instance, 88-6, 184-13 Mrouter attached (mrouterAttached) Create VPLS, 70-20 MSDP Enabled (msdpEnabled) Routing Instance, 184-14 MTU (bytes) (mtuValue) Equipment navigation tree, 180-6 MTU (mtu) Common Create Service, 79-27 Routing Instance, 184-14 MTU (mtuValue) Common Create Service, 79-27 MTU (octets) (mtuValue) CCAG, 171-3 MTU End Size (octets) (mtuEndSize) Manage Tests, 134-14 MTU Start Size (octets) (mtuStartSize) Manage Tests, 134-14 MTU Step Size (octets) (mtuStepSize) Manage Tests, 134-15 Multi Hop (multiHop) BGP, 187-11 Multi Path (multiPath) BGP, 187-11 Multi-Topology (multiTopology) IS-IS, 191-7 Multicast (multicast) Access Ingress, 93-8 Multicast Address (address) Create VLAN, 74-4 Multicast Package, 117-3 Multicast Capable Peers (multicastCapablePeers) Create VPRN, 72-17 Static Routes, 197-3 Multicast Group (groupMcastAddress) Manage Tests, 134-15 Multicast Group IP Address (groupAddress) Manage Services, 80-2 Multicast Group Prefix List Name (mcastGroupPrefixList) Routing, 123-10
IN-38
May 2009
Index Multicast Import (multicastImport) Neighbor IP Address (neighborIpAddress)
Multicast Import (multicastImport) Network navigation tree, 199-11 Multicast Queue ID (multicastQueueId) Access Ingress, 93-9 Network Queue, 99-4 MultiCast Senders (multiCastSenders) PIM, 194-8 Multicast Source (sourceMcastAddress) Manage Tests, 134-15 Multicast Source IP Address (mcastSourceIpAddress) Routing, 123-10 Multiple Option (multipleOption) ACL IP Filter, 112-7 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-9 Multiplier (dot3OamMultiplier) Physical Port and APS, 178-21 Multiplier(bfdMultiplier) Create IES, 73-8, 186-4 Create VPRN, 72-17 MVR Admin Status (mvrEnable) Bridge, 185-9 MVR Source Interface (mvrSource) Bridge, 185-9
N
Name Service Tunnels, 85-4 Time of Day, 121-2 Name (aggregationSchedulerName) Manage Tests, 134-15 Name (bundleName) ingress multicast path, 120-6 Name (dispalyedName) Physical Port and APS, 178-21 Name (displayedName) Common Create Service, 79-28, 134-15 Create VPLS, 70-21 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Policies, 133-15 Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6 Service Management, 92-3 Name (dryContactName) Shelf, 175-6
Name (fileName) Accounting, 138-3 Name (ingrPathMgmtBwPolicyPointer) ingress multicast path, 120-7 Name (ingrPathMgmtPolicyPointer) ingress multicast path, 120-7 Name (maintAssocName) Manage Tests, 134-16 Name (name) NE Password Policy, 158-5 Name (packagePolicyPointer) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 Name (scriptName) Script manager, 135-3 Service template manager, 86-2 Name (siteName) Manage Tests, 134-16 Name (slopePolicy) Physical Port and APS, 178-21 Name (subscriberName) Common Create Service, 79-28 Manage Customers, 82-2 Manage Tests, 134-16 Name (testName) Manage Tests, 134-16 Name Format (maintAssocNameType) Manage Tests, 134-16 Name Type (maintDomainNameType) CFM 802.1ag, 126-2 NE Persistent (nePersistent) LDP, 198-7 Manage Tests, 134-16 NE Schedulable (neSchedulable) Manage Tests, 134-17 NE Type (neType) Script manager, 135-3 NE Version Information (neVersionInformation) Script manager, 135-3 Neighbor Address (multiChassisNeighborAddress) Node redundancy, 87-6 Neighbor IP Address (neighborIpAddress) Routing, 123-10
May 2009 IN-39
Index Neighbor Liveness Time (seconds) (neighborLivenessTime) Number of Backups (numBackupsToKeep)
Neighbor Liveness Time (seconds) (neighborLivenessTime) LDP, 198-6 Neighbor Prefix List Name (neighborPrefixList) Routing, 123-10 Neighbor Resolution (ngbrResolution) Common Create Service, 79-28 Netbios Node Type (netbiosNodeType) Residential Subscriber, 129-10 Routing Instance, 184-14 Netbios Node Type(netboisNodeType) Create VPRN, 72-17 Network (network) IS-IS, 191-8 OSPF, 193-10 Network Address (networkAddr) Application Assurance, 132-6 Network Address Operator (networkAddrOperator) Application Assurance, 132-6 Network Address Prefix Length (networkAddrPrefixLength) Application Assurance, 132-7 Network Element (sourceNodeId) MPLS Path, 83-3 Network Element Type (neType) Mediation, 149-3 Network Policy ID (networkPolicyId) Network navigation tree, 199-12 Network Port (networkPort) Application Assurance, 132-7 Network Port Operator (networkPortOperator) Application Assurance, 132-7 Network Queue Policy Name (networkQueuePolicyName) Physical Port and APS, 178-21 Network Queue Policy Name (queueId) Channel, 179-14 Network Weight (networkAllocationWeight) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 New Authentication Password (snmpAuthPassword) NE User Configuration, 157-4
New Password (password) Change Password, 152-2 New Privacy Password (snmpPrivPassword) NE User Configuration, 157-4 New Subscriber Identification (newSubscrIdent) Residential Subscriber, 129-10 Next Hop (nextHop) Routing, 123-10 Next Hop (nextHopAddr) LDP, 198-7 LSPs, 84-7 Next Hop Address (nextHopAddr) Manage Tests, 134-17 Next Hop Interface Address (nhAddress) Manage Tests, 134-17 Next Hop Interface Name (nhintfName) Manage Tests, 134-17 Next Hop Self (nextHopSelf) BGP, 187-11 Next Hop Type (nextHopType) LDP, 198-7 Routing, 123-11 No Expiry (preferredLifetimeNoExpiry) Common Create Service, 79-29, 79-29 Interface and interface IP address, 186-4 No Expiry (validLifetimeNoExpiry) Common Create Service, 79-29 Interface and interface IP address, 186-4 No Revert Create VLL, 71-10 Node Protect (nodeProtect) LSPs, 84-7 Non DR Attract Traffic (vRtrPimGenNonDrAttractTraffic) PIM, 194-8 Non-Subscriber Traffic Identification (nonSubTrafficIdent) Common Create Service, 79-29 Notes (notes) Create Physical Link, 78-2 Number of Archives (numArhcives) Database, 146-3 Number of Backups (numBackupsToKeep) NE Maintenance, 150-8
IN-40
May 2009
Index Number of Days (leaseTimeDays) Ongoing (onGoing)
Number of Days (leaseTimeDays) Common Create Service, 79-29 Number of Hours (leaseTimeHours) Common Create Service, 79-29 Number of Loopback Sent (mepTransmitLbmMessages) Manage Tests, 134-17 Number of Minutes (leaseTimeMinutes) Common Create Service, 79-30 Number of Packet Too Big (numberOfPacketTooBig) Common Create Service, 79-30 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Number of Param Problem (numberOfParamProblem) Common Create Service, 79-30 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Number of Ports Down (numberOfPortsDown) PIM, 194-8 Number of Ports Down (numberofPortsDown) VRRP policy, 125-4 Number of Redirects (numberOfRedirects) Common Create Service, 79-30 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Number of Secondary T2 Paths (numberOfSeondaryT2Paths) ingress multicast path, 120-7 Number of Seconds (leaseTimeSeconds) Common Create Service, 79-30 Number of Test Packets (packetsToSend) Common Tools, 145-4 LDP, 198-7 Number of Time Exceeded (numberOfTimeExceeded) Common Create Service, 79-30 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Number of Tries for Down State (atmOamRetryDown) Router, 169-4 Number of Tries for Up State (atmOamRetryUp) Router, 169-5
Number of TTL Expired (numberOfTtlExpired) Common Create Service, 79-31 Network navigation tree, 199-12 Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachable) Network navigation tree, 199-13 Number of Unreachables (numberOfUnreachables) Common Create Service, 79-31 Number of Varbind per PDU (numberOfVarPerPdu) Mediation, 149-4 Number to Keep (backupNumberOfSets) Database, 146-3 Number(optionNumber) Create VPRN, 72-18 Residential Subscriber, 129-10 Routing Instance, 184-15
O
OAM Administrative State (oamAdminState) Common Create Service, 79-31, 79-34 Create VPLS, 70-22 Object Type Alarm Settings, 147-8 Objects To Delete When Threshold Exceeded (# of objects) (rowsToDelete) Size Constraint, 131-2 Offer Time (offerTime) Routing Instance, 184-15 OLC State (olcstate) Common Create Service, 79-31 Discovery Manager, 148-3 Equipment navigation tree, 180-8 Old Password (password) Change Password, 152-2 On-Link Determination (onLink) Common Create Service, 79-31 Routing Instance, 184-15 Ongoing (onGoing) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6 Time of Day, 121-2
May 2009
IN-41
Index Operation Upon Failure (failToMode) Overload Enabled (overloadAdministrativeState)
Operation Upon Failure (failToMode) ISA-AA, 172-3 Operational DR Priority (stickyDRPriority) PIM, 194-8 Operational State (operationalState) Physical port and APS, 178-21 Operational State UP While Empty (operationalStateWhileEmpty) Common Create Service, 79-32 Option (option) Create VPRN, 72-19 Residential Subscriber, 129-11 Routing Instance, 184-15 Option 60 (dhcpOption60) Residential Subscriber, 129-11 Option number (optionNumber) Residential Subscriber, 129-11 Option Present (optionPresent) ACL IP Filter, 112-7 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-10 Option Protocol(protocol) Residential Subscriber, 129-11 Option Type (optionType) Residential Subscriber, 129-12 Option Value (optionValue) Residential Subscriber, 129-12 Order Service Tunnels, 85-4 Order (order) Alarm Settings, 147-8 Origin (origin) Routing, 123-11 Originate Default Route (originateDefault) OSPF, 193-10 Originating MEP (originatingMep) Manage Tests, 134-18 OSPF Area (area) Routing, 123-11 OSPF Area Set (areaSet) Routing, 123-11 OSPF Route Type (ospfRouteType) Routing, 123-12 OSPF Router ID (ospfRouterId) OSPF, 193-10
OSPF, RIP, or ISIS Tag (Hex) (tag) Routing, 123-12 OSPFv2 Enabled (ospfEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-20 Routing Instance, 88-7, 184-16 OSPFv3 Enabled (ospfv3Enabled) Create VPRN, 72-20 Routing Instance, 88-7, 184-16 Other Stateful Config (otherStatefulConfigFlag) Common Create Service, 79-32 Routing Instance, 184-16 Out DSCP (outDscp) Access Egress, 94-5 Access Ingress, 93-9 Out Precedence (outPrecedence) Access Egress, 94-5 Access Ingress, 93-9 Out Profile (outDot1p) Access Egress, 94-5 Out Remark (outRemark) Access Ingress, 93-9 Outer Encap Value (fwdSapOuterEncapValue) Policies, 133-16 Outer Encap Value (outerEncapValue) Mirror service template, 81-4 Outer Encap Value End Copy/Move SAPs, 144-3 Outer Encap Value Offset (outerEncapShiftOffset) Copy/Move SAPs, 144-3 Outer Encap Value Start Copy/Move SAPs, 144-3 Outer Encapsulation Value (outerEncapValue) Common Create Service, 79-32 Residential Subscriber, 129-12 Outer Encapsulation Value (VPI) (vpi) Common Create Service, 79-32 Overall Rate Limit (pps) (overallRateLimit) NE DoS Protection, 164-2 Overload (setOverload) IS-IS, 191-8 Overload Enabled (overloadAdministrativeState) OSPF, 193-11
IN-42
May 2009
Index Overload Interval (seconds) (overloadInterval) Passive (passive)
Overload Interval (seconds) (overloadInterval) OSPF, 193-11 Overload On Boot (overloadOnBoot) IS-IS, 191-8 Overload On Boot Timeout (seconds) (overloadOnBootTimeout) IS-IS, 191-9 Overload Stubs (overloadStubs) OSPF, 193-11 Overload Timeout (seconds) (overloadTimeout) IS-IS, 191-9 Override CIR Policies, 133-16 Override CIR Adaptation Policies, 133-16 Override Committed Burst Size Policies, 133-17 Override Global Timeout (guiTimeoutOverride) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-5 Override High Priority Reserved Policies, 133-17 Override Maximum Burst Size Policies, 133-17 Override PIR Policies, 133-17 Override PIR Adaptation Policies, 133-17 Override Port Average Overhead Policies, 133-18 Override Summed CIR Policies, 133-18 Overwrite existing (overwrite) Alarm Settings, 147-8 Owner (owner) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-3 VRRP, 89-4
P
Pack Data MDT Join Tlv (dataMdtJoinTlvPack) PIM, 194-8
Packet Byte Offset (hsmdaEgrPackByteOff) Policies, 133-13 Packet Byte Offset (hsmdaIngPackByteOff) Policies, 133-13 Packet History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows) Common Tools, 198-7 Packet Interval (seconds) (packetInterval) LDP, 198-7 Packet Rate Limit (pps) (packetRateLimit) NE DoS Protection, 164-2 Packet Size Manage Tests, 134-18 Packet Size (octets) (packetSize) Manage Tests, 134-18 Packet Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout) LDP, 198-8 Packet Too Big (packetTooBig) Common Create Service, 79-33 Network navigation tree, 199-13 Packet Too Big Time (seconds) (packetTooBigTime) Common Create Service, 79-33 Network navigation tree, 199-13 PADO Delay (100's of milliseconds) (padoDelay) Residential Subscriber, 129-12 Param Problem (paramProblem) Common Create Service, 79-33 Network navigation tree, 199-13 Param Problem Time (seconds) (paramProblemTime) Common Create Service, 79-33 Network navigation tree, 199-13 parameter guide 5620 SAM GUI and OSS parameters, 68-2 overview, 68-2 searching, 68-3 structure, 68-2 Parent Scheduler (nextSchedulerName) Scheduler, 103-3 Passive (isPassive) OSPF, 193-11 Passive (passive) BGP, 187-12 IS-IS, 191-9
May 2009 IN-43
Index Password (authenticationKey) Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack)
Password (authenticationKey) OSPF, 193-12 Password (password) 802_1x, 127-2 Administration, 167-5 NE User Configuration, 157-4 Residential Subscriber, 129-13 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-3 Password Expiry (days) (passwordValidityPeriod) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-6 Password Expiry (passwordExpiryEnabled) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-6 Password Never Expires (neverExpires) NE Password Policy, 158-5 Password Type (passwordType) Residential Subscriber, 129-12 Path Change (pathChanged) Common Tools, 145-5 Path Cost (pathCost) Create VPLS, 70-22 Path Cost (portPathCost) Bridge, 185-10 Path Cost (stpBridgePathCostMode) Bridge, 185-10 Path Destination Matching (TunnelDestinationMatching) LSPs, 84-7 Path ID (fwdSdpBindPathId) Policies, 133-18 Path ID (sdpBindingPathId) Common Create Service, 79-33 Manage Tests, 134-18 Path ID (spokeSdpBinding) Manage Tests, 134-19 Path Limit (mbps) (pathLimit) ingress multicast path, 120-7 Path Name (pathName) Routing, 123-12 Path Rate (Kb/s) (pathRate) CCAG, 171-3 Path Rate Enabled (pathRateEnabled) CCAG, 171-3 Path Rate Option (pathRateOption) CCAG, 171-3
IN-44 May 2009
Path Weight (%) (pathWeight) CCAG, 171-3 Pattern (bertPattern) Channel, 179-14 Pattern (pattern) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-3 Pattern Mask (patternMask) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-3 Payload Scrambling Enabled (isPayloadScramblingEnabled) Channel, 179-15 Payload Size (octets) (cemPayloadSize) Create VLL, 71-10 Payload Type (payloadType) Channel, 179-15 PCR (kbps) (pcr) ATM QoS, 95-3 Peak Rate (peakRate) LSPs, 84-8 Peer Address (peerAddress) BGP, 187-12 LDP, 198-7 MSDP, 190-3 Peer AS (peerAS) BGP, 187-12 Peer CE Address (ceInetAddress) Create VLL, 71-11 Peer IP Address (peerIPAddress) PIM, 194-9 Peer Type (peerType) BGP, 187-12 Percentage of Total pool (%) (mcastBufferPoolPercentage) ingress multicast path, 120-7 performance statistics See also accounting statistics Period (keepalivePeriod) Channel, 179-15 Period (milliseconds) (period) RSVP, 196-3 Periodic ATM OAM Loopback (periodicAtmOamLoopBack) Common Create Service, 79-34
Index Permit Merge (permitMerge) Policy Type (policyType)
Permit Merge (permitMerge) LSPs, 84-8 Persistent (persistent) LSPs, 84-8 Persistent SNMP Indices Router, 169-5 Phone Number (phoneNumber) Manage Customers, 82-2 Physical Address (physicalAddress) Common Create Service, 79-34 Network navigation tree, 199-14 PIM Enabled (pimEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-21 Routing Instance, 88-7, 184-16 PIM RP Delayed Up Period (pimRPDelayedUpPeriod) Network navigation tree, 199-14 PIM Snooping Enabled (pimSnpgEnabled) Common Create Service, 79-34 Ping Command Timeout (maxOSCommandExecutionTimeSeconds) Mediation, 149-4 Ping Interval (minutes) (pingScheduleMinutes) Mediation, 149-4 Ping Interval (seconds) (pingScheduleSeconds) Mediation, 149-4 Ping Reply (pingReply) VRRP, 89-4 PIR (%) (pir) Network Queue, 99-4 Shared Queue, 100-3 PIR (kb/s) (pir) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-10 PIR (kbps) (lvl1Pir) Port scheduler, 105-4 PIR (kbps) (lvl2Pir) Port scheduler, 105-4 PIR (kbps) (lvl3Pir) Port scheduler, 105-4 PIR (kbps) (lvl4Pir) Port scheduler, 105-4 PIR (kbps) (lvl5Pir) Port scheduler, 105-4 PIR (kbps) (lvl6Pir) Port scheduler, 105-5
PIR (kbps) (lvl7Pir) Port scheduler, 105-5 PIR (kbps) (lvl8Pir) Port scheduler, 105-5 PIR (kbps) (pir) Policies, 133-19 Scheduler, 103-3 PIR Adaptation (pirAdaptation) Network Queue, 99-4 Policies, 133-19 Polarity (polarity) Shelf, 175-7 Policed (policed) Access Ingress, 93-10 Policing (policing) ATM QoS, 95-3 Policy 1 (policy1) Network navigation tree, 199-14 Policy 2 (policy2) Network navigation tree, 199-14 Policy 3 (policy3) Network navigation tree, 199-14 Policy 4 (policy4) Network navigation tree, 199-14 Policy 5 (policy5) Network navigation tree, 199-15 Policy ID (id) Mediation, 149-4 MIB Statistics, 136-2 NE DoS Protection, 164-2 Policy Id (policyId) Size Constraint, 104-5, 131-2, 150-8 Policy Name button (networkQueuePolicyName) Daughter Card Slot, Control Processor, Flash Memory, and Switch Fabric Processor, 177-5 Policy Statement Name (policyStatementName) Routing, 123-12 Policy Status (enabled) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Policy Type (policyType) NE Maintenance, 150-8
May 2009
IN-45
Index Policy1 (policy1) Power State (adminStatus)
Policy1 (policy1) Common Create Service, 79-34 Poll Interval (seconds) (pollInterval) OSPF, 193-12 Polling Admin State (administrativeState) Mediation, 149-4 MIB Statistics, 136-2 Polling Interval (pollingInterval) Mediation, 149-5 MIB Statistics, 136-3 Residential Subscriber, 129-13 Polling Interval (seconds) (dceLmiPollingInterval) Channel, 179-15 Polling Interval (seconds) (dteLmiPollingInterval) Channel, 179-16 Polling Synchronization Time (pollingSyncTime) Administration, 167-5 Common Tools, 145-5 Pool Mode (poolMode) Card Slot, 176-4 Pool Name (displayedName) Create VPRN, 72-22 Routing Instance, 184-17 Pool Name (poolName) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 Port (aaasTacacsKey) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Port (port) Administration, 167-5 Interface and interface IP address, 186-5 RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-2 Port (portId) Common Create Service, 79-35 Port Average Overhead (%) (portAvgOverhead) Policies, 133-19 Port CLI Name (portDisplayedName) Physical Port and APS, 178-22 Port Framing (framing) Physical Port and APS, 178-22 Port ID (sapPortId) Manage Tests, 134-19
IN-46 May 2009
Port Maximum Power (MilliWatts) (portMaximumPower) Card Slot, 176-4 Port Name node redundancy, 87-6 Port Name (fwdSapPortName) Policies, 133-19 Port Number (portNum) Create VPLS, 70-22 Port Number String (channelMDLPortString) Channel, 179-16 Port Overall Rate Limit (pps) (cpmProtPortOverallRateLimit) NE System Security, 162-2 Port Parent (portParent) Policies, 133-20 Port Prefix String (nasPortPrefixString) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-2 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-3 Port Prefix Type (nasPortPrefixType) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-2 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-3 Port Suffix Type (nasPortSuffixType) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-3 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-3 Port Threshold (portThreshold) LAG, 170-5 Port Threshold Action (portThresholdAction) LAG, 170-5 Port Type (ds1PortType) Physical Port and APS, 178-22 Port Type (lagPortType) LAG, 170-6 Port Weight (portWeight) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2 Port/LAG Name node redundancy, 87-6 Positional Data Pattern (positionalPattern) Manage Tests, 134-19 Power Priority (powerPriority) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Power State (adminStatus) Card Slot, 176-4 Physical Port and APS, 178-23
Index PPPoE Access Method (pppoeAccessMethod) Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (primaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit)
PPPoE Access Method (pppoeAccessMethod) Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-3 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix Length (pppoeCidMaskPreNum) Residential Subscriber, 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Prefix String (pppoeCidMaskPreStr) Residential Subscriber, 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix Length (pppoeCidMaskSufNum) Residential Subscriber, 129-13 PPPoE Circuit ID Mask Suffix String (pppoeCidMaskSufStr) Residential Subscriber, 129-13 PPPoE MTU (mtu) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Pre Login Prompt (preLoginPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-5 Precedence (endpointPrecedence) Create VLL, 71-11 Precedence (precedence) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-3 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Policies, 133-20 Preempt Mode (preempt) VRRP, 89-4 Prefer Tunnel-in-Tunnel (preferTunnelInTunnel) LDP, 198-8 Preference (preference) Create VPRN, 72-22 LSPs, 84-8 Network navigation tree, 199-15 Preference Level ingress multicast path, 120-7 Prefix (prefix) Routing, 123-13 Prefix Address (pfxdPrefix) Common Create Service, 79-35 Prefix DUID (pfxdDUID) Common Create Service, 79-35 Prefix IAID (pfxIAID) Common Create Service, 79-35
Prefix Length (pfxdPrefLen) Common Create Service, 79-35 Prefix Length (prefixLength) Common Create Service, 79-35 Create VPLS, 70-22 LDP, 198-8 Network navigation tree, 199-15 OSPF, 193-12 Routing Instance, 88-8 Prefix Life Time (seconds) (pfxdPrefLifetime) Common Create Service, 79-35 Prefix Limit (prefixLimit) BGP, 187-13 Prefix List 1 (prefixList1) Routing, 123-13 Prefix List 2 (prefixList2) Routing, 123-13 Prefix List 3 (prefixList3) Routing, 123-13 Prefix List 4 (prefixList4) Routing, 123-13 Prefix List 5 (prefixList5) Routing, 123-13 Prefix List Name (prefixListName) Routing, 123-13 Prefix Option (pfxdAdminState) Common Create Service, 79-36 Prefix Valid Life Time (seconds) (pfxdValidLifetime) Common Create Service, 79-36 prefixLen (prefixLen) LDP, 198-5 Prepend Count (prependCount) Routing, 123-13 Primary (isPrimary) Common Create Service, 79-36, 79-36 Network navigation tree, 199-16 Primary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (primaryPerMcastPlaneLimit) Shelf, 175-7 Primary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (primaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit) Shelf, 175-7
May 2009
IN-47
Index Primary Path Limit (mbps) (primaryPathLimit) Profile Name (spanOfControlProfileName)
Primary Path Limit (mbps) (primaryPathLimit) ingress multicast path, 120-8 Primary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMovePrimaryPortsCumulativeFactor) Create VPLS, 70-22 Primary Script Administrative State (script1AdministrativeState) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Primary Script URL (script1Url) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Priority Time of Day, 121-3 Priority (actionPriority) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Priority (defaultFcPriority) Access Ingress, 93-10 Priority (dot1pValue) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 Priority (fixedPriority) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-3 Priority (portPriority) Bridge, 185-11 Priority (priority) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-3 Channel, 179-16 Create VPLS, 70-23, 70-23 IS-IS, 191-10 LAG, 170-6 OSPF, 193-12 Policies, 133-20 Service Management, 92-3 VRRP policy, 125-4 Priority (priority), bridge instance, Bridge, 185-11 Priority (priority), OoS, Bridge, 185-11 Priority Dscp (priorityMarkDscp) Common Create Service, 79-36 Create VPLS, 70-23 Priority Level for CCM Messages (ccmLtmPriority) Common Create Service, 79-36 Create VLL, 71-11 Manage Tests, 134-19
Priority Mapping (priorityMapMode) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-3 Priority Precedence (priorityMarkPrec) Common Create Service, 79-36 Create VPLS, 70-23 Priority Type (priorityMarkType) Common Create Service, 79-37 Create VPLS, 70-23 Priority Type (priorityType) VRRP policy, 125-4 Privacy Protocol (snmpPrivProtocol) NE User Configuration, 157-4 Probe Failure (probeFailure) Common Tools, 145-5 Probe Failure Reporting Threshold (probeFailureReportThreshold) Manage Tests, 134-19 Probe Failure Threshold (packetFailureThreshold) Common Tools, 145-5 Probe History Size (rows) (maxHistoryRows) Common Tools, 145-6 Probe Interval (seconds) (autoProbeIntvl) Common Tools, 145-6 Probe Interval(prefixLength) LDP, 198-8 Probe Timeout (seconds) (packetTimeout) Common Tools, 145-6 Probe Timeout(prefixLength) LDP, 198-8 Probes per Hop (probesPerHop) Manage Tests, 134-20 Probes to be Issued (probesToBeIssued) Manage Tests, 134-20 Profile (profile) Access Ingress, 93-11 Network, 98-7 Profile ID (id) Policies, 133-20 Profile ID (scopeOfCommandProfileId) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-6 Profile Name (scopeOfCommandProfileName), 151-6 Profile Name (spanOfControlProfileName), 151-6
IN-48
May 2009
Index Profiled Traffic only (profiledTrafficOnly) Q3 (qosPortUrgentPriorityWeight)
Profiled Traffic only (profiledTrafficOnly) Common Create Service, 79-37 Propagate RIP Metric (propagateRipMetric) RIP, 195-4 Protected Mac Address (protectedMac) Create VPLS, 70-24 Protection Administrative State (cpmProtDropUncfgdProtocolMsg) NE System Security, 162-3 Protection Type (bundleProtectedType) Bundles, 174-6 Protocol (protocol) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-3 ACL IP Filter, 112-8 Administration, 167-5 Channel, 179-16 Policies, 133-20 Routing, 123-14 VRRP policy, 125-4 Protocol (stpProtocol) Bridge, 185-11 Protocol Field Compression (pfc) Channel, 179-16 Protocol Name (aaasProtocol) administration, 167-7 Protocol Operator (protocolOperator) Application Assurance, 132-7 Protocol Version (igmpVersion) IGMP, 188-4 Manage Services, 80-3 Protocol Version (requestedVersion) Channel, 179-17 Proxy ARP Policy 1 (policy1) Common Create Service, 79-37 Proxy Arp Policy 1 (proxyArpPolicy1) Interface and interface IP address, 186-6 Proxy Arp Policy 2 (proxyArpPolicy2) Interface and interface IP address, 186-6 Proxy Arp Policy 3 (proxyArpPolicy3) Interface and interface IP address, 186-6 Proxy Arp Policy 4 (proxyArpPolicy4) Interface and interface IP address, 186-6 Proxy Arp Policy 5 (proxyArpPolicy5) Interface and interface IP address, 186-6
Proxying (igmpProxying) IGMP, 188-4 Manage Services, 80-3 PSNP Authentication (psnpAuthentication) IS-IS, 191-10 Purge Mode (purgeMode) Database, 146-3
Q
Q in Q Ethertype (qinqEtype) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q0 (qosConfigLowPriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-11 Q0 (qosPortCOS0MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q0 (qosPortCOS0MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q0 (qosPortLowPriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q1 (qosConfigMediumPriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-11 Q1 (qosPortCOS1MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q1 (qosPortCOS1MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-23 Q1 (qosPortMediumPriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q2 (qosConfigHighPriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q2 (qosPortCOS2MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q2 (qosPortCOS2MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q2 (qosPortHighPriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q3 (qosConfigUrgentPriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q3 (qosPortCOS3MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q3 (qosPortCOS3MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q3 (qosPortUrgentPriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-24
May 2009
IN-49
Index Q4 (qosConfigQ4PriorityWeight) RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes)
Q4 (qosConfigQ4PriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q4 (qosPortCOS4MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q4 (qosPortCOS4MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q4 (qosPortQ4PriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q5 (qosConfigQ5PriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q5 (qosPortCOS5MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q5 (qosPortCOS5MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-24 Q5 (qosPortQ5PriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q6 (qosConfigQ6PriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q6 (qosPortCOS6MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q6 (qosPortCOS6MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q6 (qosPortQ6PriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q7 (qosConfigQ7PriorityWeight) Bridge, 185-12 Q7 (qosPortCOS7MaxBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q7 (qosPortCOS7MinBW) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Q7 (qosPortQ7PriorityWeight) Physical Port and APS, 178-25 QoS Status (qosEnabled) Bridge, 185-12 Physical Port and APS, 178-25 Querier Forwarding (igmpQuerierForwarding) IGMP, 188-4 Manage Services, 80-3 Query Interval (seconds) (genQueryInterval) Create VPLS, 70-24 IGMP, 188-4 Manage Services, 80-3 Query Interval (seconds) (igmpSnoopQuery) Bridge, 185-13
Query interval (seconds) (queryInterval) MLD, 189-3, 189-3 Query Response Interval (seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl) IGMP, 188-4 Query Response Interval (seconds) (queryResponseInterval) MLD, 189-4 Query Response Interval (tenths of seconds) (genQueryResponseIntvl) IGMP, 188-5 Manage Services, 80-3 Query source address (querySrcAddress) Create VPLS, 70-24 Query Source IP Zero Network, 168-3 Query Source IP Zero (querySourceIpZero) Bridge, 185-13 Query-interval (seconds) (queryInterval) Create VPLS, 70-24 Querying (igmpQuerying) IGMP, 188-5 Manage Services, 80-4 Querytime (seconds) (mvrQuerytime) Bridge, 185-13 Question Script manager, 135-3 Queue Algorithm (queueAlgorithmType) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-3 Queue ID (id) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-10 Queue ID (queueId) Network Queue, 99-4 Policies, 133-22 Queue MBS (bytes) (queueMbs) HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-3 Quiet Period (paeAuthQuietPeriod) Physical Port and APS, 178-25
R
RADIUS Attributes (radiusAttributes) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-3 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-4
IN-50
May 2009
Index RADIUS Server Policy Name (radiusServerPolicyName) Re-enter Password (authenticationKey)
RADIUS Server Policy Name (radiusServerPolicyName) Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Rapid (Rapid) Manage Tests, 134-20 Rapid Retransmit Time (hundred-millisecond) RSVP, 196-3 Rapid Retry Limit RSVP, 196-4 Rate (Mbps) (group1Rate) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (group2Rate) HSMDA Scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (level1Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (level2Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (level3Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (level4Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-5 Rate (Mbps) (level5Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-6 Rate (Mbps) (level6Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-6 Rate (Mbps) (level7Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-6 Rate (Mbps) (level8Rate) HSMDA scheduler, 106-6 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass1Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-26 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass2Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-26 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass3Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass4Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass5Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass6Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-27 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass7Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-28 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrClass8Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-28
Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp1Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-28 Rate (Mbps) (schOvrGrp2Rate) Physical Port and APS, 178-28 Rate (portEgrShaperRate) Physical Port and APS, 178-28 Rate Adjustment (egrRateAdjustment) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Rate Adjustment(ingRateAdjustment) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Rate Exceeded Raises Alarm (rateExceededRaisesAlarm) Residential Subscriber, 129-16 Rate Modification (egrRateModificationType) Residential Subscriber, 129-14 Rate Modification (ingRateModificationType) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Modification Scheduler (egrRateModSchedObPointer) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Modification Scheduler (ingRateModSchedObPointer) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Monitor (kbps) (egrRateMonitor) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Monitor (kbps) (ingRateMonitor) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Monitor Notification (egrRateMonitorNtf) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Monitor Notification (ingRateMonitorNtf) Residential Subscriber, 129-15 Rate Reduction (kbps) (egrRateReduction) Residential Subscriber, 129-16 Rate Reduction (kbps) (ingRateReduction) Residential Subscriber, 129-16 Re-Authenticate when DHCP lease expired (reAuthenticate) Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-4 Re-enter Key (key) OSPF, 193-13 Re-enter Password (authenticationKey) OSPF, 193-13
May 2009
IN-51
Index Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime) Remark Dot1p (remarkDot1p)
Reachable Time (milliseconds) (reachableTime) Common Create Service, 79-37 Routing Instance, 184-17 Read Login Prompt (readLoginPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-5 Read Password Prompt (readPasswordPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-5 Read Policy ID (readMediationPolicyId) Discovery Manager, 148-3 Read Timeout (sec) (ftpReadTimeout) Mediation, 149-5 Reason for change Alarm Settings, 147-8 Reassembly Timeout (msec) (reassemblyTimeout) MLPPP ingress QoS profile, 96-2 Reauth Enabled(paeAuthReAuthEnabled) Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Reauth Period (paeAuthReAuthPeriod) Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Reauthenticate Control (paePortReauthenticate) Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Reboot button (reboot) Equipment navigation tree, 180-8 Receive (receive) RIP, 195-4 Receive Interval (bfdrxInterval) Common Create Service, 79-38 Receive Interval(bfdrxInterval) Create IES, 73-11, 186-6 Create VPRN, 72-23 Receive Message Interval (seconds) (receivingRateTime) MSDP, 190-3 Receive Message Rate (receivingRate) MSDP, 190-3 Receive Message Threshold (receivingRateThreshold) MSDP, 190-3 Receive Notification (polAlarm) NE DoS Protection, 164-2 Receive Option (receiveTcpOptionNumber) TCP Key Chains, 153-3
IN-52 May 2009
Received Remote Loopback Requests (dot3OamLoopbackIgnoreRx) Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Record Actual Path (record) LSPs, 84-8, 84-8 Record Actual Route (recordRoute) LSPs, 84-9 Record Label (recordLabel) LSPs, 84-9 Red Diff Delay (milliseconds) (redDiffDelay) Bundles, 174-6 Red Diff Delay Action (redDiffDelayAction) Bundles, 174-6 Redirect URL (redirectURL) Policies, 133-22 Redirects (redirects) Common Create Service, 79-38 Network navigation tree, 199-16 Redirects Time (seconds) (redirectsTime) Common Create Service, 79-38 Network navigation tree, 199-16 Redistribute External Routes (nssaRedistribute) OSPF, 193-13 Redundant Synchronization Mode Router, 169-5 Reference Bandwidth (referenceBandwidth) IS-IS, 191-10 Reforwarding Policy (infoAction) Create VPLS, 70-24 Refresh Time (refreshTime) RSVP, 196-4 Region Name (regionName) Bridge, 185-13 Create VPLS, 70-25 Region Revision (regionRevision) Bridge, 185-14 Create VPLS, 70-25 Regular Expression (regularExpression) Routing, 123-14 Remark (egressRemark) Network, 98-7 Remark Dot1p (remarkDot1p) ACL IP Filter, 112-9
Index Remark DSCP (remarkDscp) Restrict to Home (isRestrictedToHome)
Remark DSCP (remarkDscp) ACL IP Filter, 112-9 Remark DSCP Mask (remarkDscpMask) ACL IP Filter, 112-9 Remote Age Time (seconds) (remoteAgeTime) Create VPLS, 70-25 Remote ECID (cemRemoteEcid) Create VLL, 71-11 Remote ID (infoRemoteId) Common Create Service, 79-38 Remote ID (remoteID) Residential Subscriber, 129-16 Remote ID String (remoteIdString) Common Create Service, 79-38 Remote IP Address (remoteIpAddress) Service Management, 92-3 Remote MAC Address (cemRemoteMacAddr) Create VLL, 71-12 Remote Peer (peerAddress) LDP, 198-9, 198-9 Remote Proxy ARP (proxyArp) Common Create Service, 79-39 Interface and interface IP address, 186-7 Remote Site ID (remoteSourceSiteId) Create Mirror, 75-5 Remote-id Suboption (infoRemoteId) Create VPLS, 70-25 Remove Card button (removeCard) Card Slot, 176-4 Remove Key button IS-IS, 191-10 Remove oldest Subscriber Host (removeOldestHostOn) Residential Subscriber, 129-16 Remove Private AS (removePrivateAS) BGP, 187-13 Repeated Runs (repeatedRuns) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-6 Reply Control (replyControl) Manage Tests, 134-20 Reply Type (replyType) Manage Tests, 134-20 Reply via Control Plane (replyViaControlPlane) Manage Tests, 134-21
Report Alarms (reportAlarmBits) Channel, 179-17 Physical Port and APS, 178-29 Report source address (reportSrcAddress) Create VPLS, 70-25 Request Timeout (requestTimeout) 802_1x, 127-3 Reserve Administrator Login (reserveAdminEnabled) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-5 Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) (fastRerouteBandwidth) LSPs, 84-9 Reserved CBS (%) (mcastBufferPoolResvCbsPercentage) ingress multicast path, 120-8 Reserved CBS (%) (reservedCBS) Named Buffer Pools, 108-2, 108-3 Reserved CBS% (reservedCbs) Equipment navigation tree, 180-8 Reset Command (resetCommand) Generic NE Profiles, 166-5 Residential (residential) Create VPLS, 70-25 Resignal (resignal) LSPs, 84-9 Resignal Timer (min) (resignalTimer) MPLS, 192-3 Resource Group ID Router, 169-5 Respond to Remote Loop Signal (remoteLoopRespondConfig) Channel, 179-18 Response Address (responseIpAddr) Manage Tests, 134-21 Response Time (seconds) (igmpSnoopResponse) Bridge, 185-14 Restore Keep-Alive Defaults Channel, 179-18 Restrict Protected Source (restrictProtectedSource) Create VPLS, 70-26, 70-26 Restrict to Home (isRestrictedToHome) NE User Configuration, 157-4
May 2009 IN-53
Index Restrict Unprotected Destination (restrictUnprotectedDestination) RIP Enabled (ripEnabled)
Restrict Unprotected Destination (restrictUnprotectedDestination) Create VPLS, 70-26 Restricted Role (portRestrictedRole) Bridge, 185-14 Restricted TCN (portRestrictedTcn) Bridge, 185-14 Restricted to Home Directory (templateRestrictedToHomeDirectory) NE System Security, 162-3 Result Location (resultHomeDirectory) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-7 Resync button (triggerResync) Equipment navigation tree, 180-8 Retention (hours) (retentionInterval) File, 137-2 Retransmission Interval (seconds) (retransmissionInterval) OSPF, 193-13 Retransmit Interval (seconds) (retransmitInterval) IS-IS, 191-11 Retransmit Time (milliseconds) (retransmitTime) Common Create Service, 79-39 Routing Instance, 184-17 Retries (aaasRetries) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Retry (snmpRetry) Mediation, 149-5 Retry Attempts (retryAttempts) 802_1x, 127-3 Administration, 167-7 RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-3 Retry Count (autoTrMaxFailures) LDP, 198-9 Retry Count (retryCount) LDP, 198-9 Retry Counter (retryCount) Manage Tests, 134-21 Retry Interval (retryFrequency) NE Maintenance, 150-8 Retry Limit (retryLimit) LSPs, 84-9
Retry Scheme (retryScheme) NE Maintenance, 150-8 Retry Threshold (retryThreshold) NE Maintenance, 150-9 Retry Timeout (macMoveRetryTimeout) Create VPLS, 70-26 Retry Timeout (Sec) Physical Port and APS, 178-31, 178-31 Retry Timer (seconds) (retryTimer) LSPs, 84-9 Return Code (returnCode) LDP, 198-9 Return LSP (returnLsp) Manage Tests, 134-21 Return Tunnel (returnTunnel) Manage Tests, 134-21 Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTranspor tPreference) Common Create Service, 79-39 Return Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference Report Alarm (cemReportAlarm) Create VLL, 71-12 Return Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionReturnTunnelTranspor tPreference) Common Create Service, 79-39 Mirror service template, 81-4 Reuse (reuse) Routing, 123-15 Revert Time (second) (revertTime) Create VLL, 71-12 Create VPLS, 70-27 Revertion Mode (revertMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-31 RFC1583 Compatible (isRFC1583Compatible) OSPF, 193-13 Ring Group Type (groupMode) Network, 168-3 RIP Enabled (ripEnabled) Create VPRN, 72-24 Routing Instance, 88-8, 184-18
IN-54
May 2009
Index Rising Threshold (risingThreshold) Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute)
Rising Threshold (risingThreshold) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-3 Robust Count (genRobustCount) IGMP, 188-5 Manage Services, 80-4 Robust Count (robustCount) IGMP, 188-5 MLD, 189-4 Robust count (robustCount) Create VPLS, 70-27 Robustness (packets) (igmpSnoopRobustness) Bridge, 185-15 Role Name (roleName), 151-7 Rollover (minutes) (collectionInterval) File, 137-3 Root Parent (poolClass1Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass2Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass3Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass4Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass5Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass6Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass7Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Root Parent (poolClass8Parent) HSMDA Pools, 107-7 Route Distinguisher Type (routeDistinguisherType) Create VPRN, 72-24 Route Origin (origin) Routing, 123-15 Route Preference (preference) Routing, 123-16 Route Tag (routeTag) IS-IS, 191-11 Router Dead Interval (seconds) (routerDeadInterval) OSPF, 193-14 Router ID (routerID) Create VPRN, 72-24
Router ID (routerId) Router, 169-6 Router ID (routingInstanceId) Network navigation tree, 199-16 Router Instance (routerType) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-3 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-4 Router Timeout (seconds) (igmpRouterTimeout) IGMP, 188-5 Manage Services, 80-4 Routing Instance (routingInstanceFor) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-11 Routing Policy Name (policyStatementName) Create VPLS, 70-27 RP Override (rpOverride) PIM, 194-9 RPF Lookup Sequence (rpfLookupSequence) Network navigation tree, 199-9 RSVP Enabled (rsvpEnabled) Routing Instance, 88-9, 184-18 RSVP Reserve Style (rsvpStyle) LSPs, 84-9 RTP Heather (cemUseRtpHeader) Create VLL, 71-13 Run Every (runDay) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-7 Run Every (runMonth) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-8 Run Every (runWeek) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-8 Run Every Day (runEveryDay) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-8 Run Every Days Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-9 Run Every Days (runEveryDays) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-9 Run Every Hour (runEveryHour) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-9 Run Every Hours Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-9 Run Every Hours (runEveryHours) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-9 Run Every Minute (runEveryMinute) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-10
May 2009 IN-55
Index Run Every Minutes Scheduled Save Frequency (scheduledSaveConfigFrequency)
Run Every Minutes Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-10 Run Every Minutes (runEveryMinutes) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-10 Run Every Month (runEveryMonth) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-10 Run Every Months Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-10 Run Every Months (runEveryMonths) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-11 Run Every Second (runEverySecond) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-11 Run Every Seconds Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-11 Run Every Seconds (runEverySeconds) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-11 Run Every Week (runEveryWeek) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-11 Run Every Weeks (runWeek) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12
S
SA Cache Lifetime (seconds) (sACacheLifetime) MSDP, 190-4 SA Limit (maxActiveSources) MSDP, 190-4 SAM-O Events Enabled Administration, 167-7 Log Records, 140-2, 145-7 Sample Type (sampleType) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-4 Samples Aggregation (samplesAggregation) Channel, 179-18 SAP ID (sapId) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 SAP or Binding (sapOrBinding) Common Create Service, 79-40 Manage Tests, 134-21 Save AOS Network Directory (saveNetworkDir) NE maintenance, 150-9 Save Certify Directory (saveCertifyDir) NE maintenance, 150-9
IN-56 May 2009
Save Details (saveConfigDetails) NE Maintenance, 150-9 Saved Slot NI Number (savedSlotNINumber) Card Slot, 176-4 Schedule Enabled (isScheduleEnabled) Database, 146-4 Schedule Enabled (pingScheduleEnabled) Mediation, 149-5 Scheduled Backup Directory (schedBackupDest) Database, 146-4 Scheduled Backup Interval (scheduledBackupFrequency) NE Maintenance, 150-10 Scheduled Backup Scheme (scheduledBackupScheme) NE Maintenance, 150-10 Scheduled Backup Sync Time (scheduledBackupSyncTime) NE Maintenance, 150-10 Scheduled Backup Threshold (operations) (scheduledBackupTreshold) NE Maintenance, 150-11 Scheduled Polling (resyncState) Router, 169-6 Scheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-5 Scheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-5 Scheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-5 Scheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-5 Scheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-5 Scheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Scheduled Save Frequency (scheduledSaveConfigFrequency) NE Maintenance, 150-11
Index Scheduled Save Scheme (scheduledSaveConfigScheme) Secret Key Algorithm (algorithm)
Scheduled Save Scheme (scheduledSaveConfigScheme) NE Maintenance, 150-11 Scheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Scheduled Task Description (description) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12 Scheduled Task Name (displayedName) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12 Scheduler button Policies, 133-22 Scheduler Name (aggregationSchedulerName) Manage Customers, 82-2 Scope (scope) Policies, 133-22 Scramble (scramble) Channel, 179-18 Script ID (id) Script manager, 135-3 Service template manager, 86-2 Script Version (mtosi_version) Script manager, 135-3 Search by TIme Of Day Entry Type Time Range Entry Assignment, 143-2 searching mechanisms, 68-3 Second (maxLeaseSecond) Create VPRN, 72-24 Routing Instance, 184-18 Second (minLeaseSecond) Routing Instance, 184-18 Second (offerSecond) Create VPRN, 184-18 Second Network Element (apsBundleHighNodeDn) Bundles, 174-6 Second Network Element (nodeIdHigh) Node redundancy, 87-6 Physical Port and APS, 178-31 Second Timing Reference Administrative State (secondTimingReferenceAdministrativeStat e) Shelf, 175-7, 175-8 Second Timing Reference Input (secondTimingReferenceInput) Shelf, 175-8
Second Timing Reference Interface Type (secondTimingRefBitsInterfaceType) Shelf, 175-8 Second Wait (milliseconds) (lsaGenerateSecondWait) OSPF, 193-14 Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait) OSPF, 193-14 Secondary DNS IP Address (secondary DnsAddress) Common Create Service, 79-40 Secondary Multicast Bandwidth (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastPlaneLimit) Shelf, 175-8 Secondary Multicast Bandwidth for Dual-SFM Mode (mbps) (secondaryPerMcastDualPlaneLimit) Shelf, 175-8 Secondary Path limit (mbps) (secondaryPathLimit) ingress multicast path, 120-8 Secondary Ports Cumulative Factor (macMovePrimaryPortsCumulativeFactor) Create VPLS, 70-27 Secondary Script Administrative State (script2AdministrativeState) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Secondary Script URL (script2Url) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Seconds (minLeaseSecond) Create VPRN, 72-24 Seconds (offerSecond) Create VPRN, 72-25 Seconds (seconds) Create VPRN, 72-24 Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Routing Instance, 184-18 Secret (aaasRadKey) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Secret (aaasTacacsKey) NE AOS security authentication, 161-2 Secret Key Algorithm (algorithm) TCP Key Chains, 153-3
May 2009
IN-57
Index Secret Name (secret) Set Local Loopback (dot3OamLoopbackLocalStatus)
Secret Name (secret) Administration, 167-7 RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-4 Security Model (SnmpSecurityModel) Mediation, 149-6 Select Assignment Scope (scope) Manage Customers, 82-3 Select Locale (domain) RIP, 195-5 Send (send) RIP, 195-5 Send Advertisement (sendAdvertisement) Common Create Service, 79-40 Routing Instance, 184-18 Send Option (sendTcpOptionNumber) TCP Key Chains, 153-4 Send queries (sendQueries) Create VPLS, 70-28 Send via Control Plane (sendControl) Manage Tests, 134-22 Separate LI Administration (liSeparateAdmin) Router, 169-6 Server 1 (server1) Common Create Service, 79-40 Network navigation tree, 199-16 Routing Instance, 88-9 Server 1 (server1IpAddress) Create IES, 73-12 Server 2 (server2IpAddress) Create IES, 73-12 Server 3 (server3IpAddress) Create IES, 73-12 Server 4 (server4IpAddress) Create IES, 73-13 Server Index (serverIndex) 802_1x, 127-3 Server IP Address (address) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-4 Server Name (displayedName) Common Create Service, 79-41 Routing Instance, 184-19 Server Name (outGoingServerMail) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-7 Server Timeout (paeAuthServerTimeout) Physical Port and APS, 178-31
IN-58 May 2009
Server Type (serverType) 802_1x, 127-3 Servers Enabled (enableServers) NE System Security, 162-3 Service Access Multi-Point ID (sapId) Create VLAN, 74-5 Service Category (ServiceCategory) ATM QoS, 95-4 Service Description Template, 92-3 Service Id NE CPM IP Filter, 165-11 Service ID (serviceID) Common Create Service, 79-41 Network navigation tree, 199-17 Service ID (serviceId) Manage Tests, 134-22 Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Service Model (serviceModel) Common Create Service, 79-41 Service Name Manage Tests, 134-22 Service Name (displayedName) Mirror service template, 81-4 Service Name (serviceName) Common Create Service, 79-42 Service Tier (tier) Common Create Service, 79-42 Service Type Copy/Move SAPs, 144-3 Servicing Mode (qosPortServicingMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-31 Session ID Format (sessionIDFormat) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-4 Session Limit (ifSessionLimit) Create IES, 73-14 Create VPRN, 72-25 Session Limit per SAP (SapSessionLimit) Create IES, 73-14 Create VPRN, 72-26 Set Default VLAN to VPLS Tag (defaultVlan) Common Create Service, 79-42 Set Local Loopback (dot3OamLoopbackLocalStatus) Physical Port and APS, 178-32
Index Set Remote Loopback (dot3Actions) Slice Size (sliceSize)
Set Remote Loopback (dot3Actions) Physical Port and APS, 178-32 Set to Local Edit Only upon finding of differences (localEditDifferences) Policies, 133-23 Set to Sync with Global upon finding of no differences (globalSyncNonDifferences) Policies, 133-23 Setup Priority (setupPriority) LSPs, 84-10 Severity (associatedSeverity) Alarm Settings, 147-8 Severity Alterable (isSeverityAlterable) Alarm Settings, 147-9 severity demotion (isSeverityManualDemotionEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-9 severity promotion (isSeverityManualPromotionEnabled) Alarm Settings, 147-10 Shaper Rate (shaperRate) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-4 Shaping (shaping) ATM QoS, 95-4 Share Resources (shared) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-7 SHCV Action (shcvAction) Common Create Service, 79-42 SHCV Enabled Common Create Service, 79-43 SHCV Interval (minutes) (shcvInterval) Common Create Service, 79-43 SHCV Source (shcvSource) Common Create Service, 79-43 SHCV Source IP Address (shcvSourceIpAddress) Common Create Service, 79-44 SHCV Source MAC Address (shcvSourceMacAddress) Common Create Service, 79-44 Short Sequence (shortSequence) Bundles, 174-7 Show created object Script manager, 86-2
Show Only Compatible Channels Bundles, 174-7 Show Only Compatible Ports LAG, 170-7 Shut Down button (shutDown) Equipment navigation tree, 180-8 Signal Mode (signalMode) Channel, 179-18 Signaling (signallingType) Service Tunnels, 85-5 Single Connection (singleConnection) Administration, 167-7 Single Fiber (singleFiber) Physical Port and APS, 178-33 SIR (kbps) (sir) ATM QoS, 95-5 Site ID Common Tools, 145-7 Manage Tests, 70-8, 71-15 Site ID (siteId) Mirror service template, 81-4 Site ID(firstSiteId) Node redundancy, 87-7, 87-7 Site ID(nodeId) LSPs, 84-10 Site ID(siteID) Manage, 79-44 Site Type (mirrorSiteType) Mirror service template, 81-5 Size (entries) (size) Create VPLS, 70-28 Size (octets) (packetSize) Manage Tests, 134-22 SLA Profile String Analyze Profile Assignment, 142-2 SLA Profile String (displayedName) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 SLA Profile String (slaProfileString) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Slave to Partner (lacpSelCritSlaveToPartner) LAG, 170-7 Slice Size (sliceSize) Create Mirror, 75-5 Mirror service template, 81-5
May 2009
IN-59
Index Slope Policy (slope) Source MAC Address (sourceMacAddress)
Slope Policy (slope) Equipment navigation tree, 180-9 Slot Router, 169-7 Slot Priority (slotPriority) Card Slot, 176-5 SNAP OUI (snapOui) Access Ingress, 93-11 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-11 Snap Oui (snapOui) ACL MAC Filter, 111-4 SNAP PID (snapPid) Access Ingress, 93-11 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-11 Snap Pid (snapPid) ACL MAC Filter, 111-4 SNMP Community String (snmpCommunityName) Create VPRN, 72-26 Snooping (snooping) Common Create Service, 79-44 Create VPLS, 70-29 Routing Instance, 88-9 SONET Section Trace Mode (sonetSectionTraceMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-33 Source Address (sourceAddress) 802_1x, 127-3 Administration, 167-7 RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-4 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-5 Source Address (sourceIpAddress) Node redundancy, 87-7 Source Address (srcAddr) Create VPLS, 70-29 Manage Tests, 134-23 Source Address (srcAddress) ingress multicast path, 120-8 Source Address Termination (ipOrInterfaceIndex) Create VPRN, 72-26 Router Instance, 88-10, 184-19
Source Administrative State (sourceAdministrativeState) Create Mirror, 75-5 Mirror service template, 81-5 Source IP (sourceIpAddress) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-4 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Standard IP Filter, 113-2 ACL IP Filter, 112-9 Administration, 167-8 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Policies, 133-23 Source IP Address (firstSiteSourceIpAddress) node redundancy, 87-7, 87-7, 87-10 Node redundancy, 87-10 node redundancy, 87-7, 87-7, 87-10 Source IP Address (sourceAddress) Common Create Service, 79-44 Source IP Address (sourceIPAddr) Router Instance, 88-10, 184-19 Source IP Address (sourceIpAddress) LSPs, 84-10 Manage Tests, 134-23 Source IP Application (sourceIPApplication) Router Instance, 88-10, 184-19 Source IP Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) Administration, 167-8 Source IP Port (End) (sourceIpPortEnd) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Source IP Port (Start) (sourceIpPortStart) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Source MAC (sourceMacAddress) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-3 Access Ingress, 93-12 ACL MAC Filter, 111-4 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-12 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Source MAC Address (sourceMacAddress) Manage Tests, 134-23
IN-60
May 2009
Index Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) SSM Group Mask (ssmGroupMask)
Source Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-12 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Source Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-8 Source Mask (sourcePortMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-12 Source Net Mask (sourceIpAddressFullMask) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9 Source Port (sourceOperator, sourcePort1, sourcePort2) ACL IP Filter, 112-9 Policies, 133-23 Source Port (sourcePort) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-12 OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9 Source Port ID (sourcePortName) NE Management Access Filter, 155-4 Source Port Type (portType) NE Management Access Filter, 155-4 Source Site ID Manage Tests, 134-23 Source Site ID (siteId) Service Tunnels, 85-5 Source Site ID (sourceNodeId) LSPs, 84-10 Source Slot (sourceSlot) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9 Source Timeout (seconds) (igmpSourceTimeout) IGMP, 188-5 Manage Services, 80-4 Source VLAN (sourceVlan) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9 Specify Site MPLS Path, 83-3 Speed (maxSpeed) Equipment navigation tree, 180-9 SPF Initial Wait (milliseconds) (spfInitialWait) IS-IS, 191-11 SPF Max Wait (milliseconds) (spfMaxWait) OSPF, 193-15 SPF Max Wait (seconds) (spfMaxWait) IS-IS, 191-11
SPF Second Wait (milliseconds) (spfSecondWait) IS-IS, 191-11 Split Horizon (splitHorizon) RIP, 195-5 Spoofing (igmpSpoofing) IGMP, 188-6 Manage Services, 80-4 Squelch (isSquelched) Alarm Settings, 147-10 Src Mask (sourceIpAddressMask) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-4 7250 SAS and Telco ACL IGMP Filter, 115-3 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Standard IP Filter, 113-2 ACL IP Filter, 112-10 Policies, 133-24 Src Mask (sourceMacAddressMask) 7250 SAS and Telco ACL MAC Filter, 116-3 ACL MAC Filter, 111-4 NE CPM IP Filter, 165-12 SRRP ID (srrpId) Service Management, 92-4 SSAP (ssap) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-13 Policies, 133-24 SSAP Mask (ssapMask) NE CPM IP Filter, 165-13 Policies, 133-24 SSH (sshServerVersion) NE System Security, 162-3 SSH Reply (sshReply) VRRP, 89-5 SSH Session Router, 169-6 SSH2 Server Port (sshCommunicationPort) Mediation, 149-6 SSM Group IP Address (ssmGroupIPAddress) PIM, 194-10 SSM Group Mask (ssmGroupMask) PIM, 194-10
May 2009
IN-61
Index Stale Routes Time (staleRoutesTime) Subnet Check (subnetCheck)
Stale Routes Time (staleRoutesTime) BGP, 187-14 Stand-down Duration Multiplier (trapLossStandDownPeriod) Mediation, 149-7 Stand-down Full Resync Tolerance Interval Time (seconds) (trapLossResyncToleranceTime) Mediation, 149-6 Standby Forwarding (standByFwding) VRRP, 89-5 Start Address (startAddress) Create VPRN, 72-28 ingress multicast path, 120-8 Multicast CAC, 119-3 Routing Instance, 184-20 Start Avg. (startAverage) WRED Slope, 101-3 Start Date Time Range Entry Assignment, 143-2 Start Depth (startDepth) HSMDA WRED Slope, 102-3 Start Mcast Address (frGrpAddr) IGMP, 188-6 Start Mcast Address Type (frGrpAddrType) IGMP, 188-6 Start Multicast Address (frGrpAddr) MLD, 189-4 Start Run Day (frequencySettingFrom) Time of Day, 121-3 Start Time (backupStartTime) Database, 146-4 Start Time (startDate) Time of Day, 121-3 Start Up Alarm (startupAlarm) Remote Network Monitoring, 130-4 Starting Network Element MPLS Path, 83-3 State (state) Script manager, 86-3, 135-4 Statement (statement) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-7 Static Group IP Address (staticGroupIPAddress) PIM, 90-3, 194-10
IN-62 May 2009
Static Group Mask (staticGroupMask) PIM, 90-3, 194-10 Static Multicast Group (staticGrp) IGMP, 188-6 Static Route ID (id) Create VPRN, 72-27 Static Routes, 197-4 Static Route Tag (staticRouteTag) Routing, 123-16 Static RP IP Address (staticRPIPAddress) PIM, 194-10 Static Source (staticSrcGrp) IGMP, 188-6 Statistics Type Statistics Records, 140-2 Status (lpsLearningWinTimeWithStaticConversio n) Bridge, 185-15 Sticky DR (stickyDR) PIM, 194-10 Storage Drive - Backup (backupPath) File, 137-3 STP (stpBpduTreatment) Ethernet Services Policies, 122-3 STP Mode (rstpProtocol) Create VPLS, 70-29 STP Mode (stpBridgeMode) Bridge, 185-15 Strategy (generationStrategy) Manage Tests, 134-23 Strict (vRtrMplsGeneralSrlgFrrStrict) MPLS, 192-4 Strict Adjacency Check (strictAdjacencyCheck) IS-IS, 191-12 Strings from Option (stringFromOption) Residential Subscriber, 129-17 Strip Label (stripLabel) routing instance, 184-21 Sub-Group ID (subGroupId) LAG, 170-7 Subnet Check (subnetCheck) IGMP, 188-6
Index Subnet Mask (netMask) Sync Tag Config Level (firstSiteSyncTagConfigLevel)
Subnet Mask (netMask) Network navigation tree, 199-17 Subnet Mask (netMaskInt) Common Create Service, 79-45 Subnet Mask (subNetMask) VRRP, 89-5 Subrate CSU Mode Channel, 179-18 Subrate Range (subrateRange) Channel, 179-19 Subscriber Authentication Policy Common Create Service, 79-45 Subscriber ID (subscriberID) Service Management, 92-4 Subscriber ID (subscriberIdString) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber ID Alias (subscrAlias) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber Ident String (subscriberIdent) Manage Tests, 134-23 Subscriber Identification (displayedName) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber Identification (subscriberIdent) Common Create Service, 79-45 Subscriber Identification (subscrIdent) Create VPRN, 72-28 Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber Identification String Analyze Profile Assignment, 142-2 Subscriber Identification String (subscriberIdent) Create Mirror, 75-6 Subscriber Limit (subscriberLimit) Common Create Service, 79-45 Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subcsrProfileString) Create VPRN, 72-28 Subscriber Mapped Profile String (subscrProfileString) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subcsrProfileString) Create VPRN, 72-28
Subscriber Mapped SLA Profile String (subscrProfileString) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber name (displayedName) Application Assurance, 132-7 Subscriber Profile String Analyze Profile Assignment, 142-2 Subscriber Profile String (displayedName) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscriber Profile String (subscriberProfileString) Residential Subscriber, 129-18 Subscription Ratio (subscriptionRatio) RSVP, 196-4 Summary Level (summaryLevel) IS-IS, 191-12 Summary Only (summaryOnly) Routing Instance, 184-21 Summary Route Tag (summaryRouteTag) IS-IS, 191-12 Summed CIR Policies, 133-24 Summed CIR (summedCir) Scheduler, 103-4 Super VLAN Uplink Interface (superVlanUplink) Bridge, 185-16 Super-Backbone (superBackBone) OSPF, 193-15 Supplemental Timeout (paeAuthSuppTimeout) Physical Port and APS, 178-33 Supports Trap Restoration Logs (supportsTrapRestorationLogs) Generic NE Profiles, 166-6 Supports Trap Sequence Number (supportsTrapSeqNumber) Generic NE Profiles, 166-6 Suppress (suppress) Routing, 123-16 Swap Label (swapLabel) LDP, 198-9 Sync Tag Config Level (firstSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) node redundancy, 87-8
May 2009
IN-63
Index Sync Tag Config Level (secondSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) Template Description
Sync Tag Config Level (secondSiteSyncTagConfigLevel) node redundancy, 87-8 Synchronization Tag (tag) node redundancy, 87-8 Synchronize (syncTo) Administration, 167-8 Policies, 133-24, 145-7 Synchronize IGMP (igmp) node redundancy, 87-9 Synchronize IGMP-Snooping (igmpSnooping) node redundancy, 87-9, 87-9 Synchronize MC Ring (mcRing) node redundancy, 87-9 Synchronize SRRP (srrp) node redundancy, 87-9 Synchronize Subscriber Management (subscriberManagement) node redundancy, 87-10 Sys Object Id (sysObjectId) Generic NE Profiles Profiles, 166-6 System ID (Loopback Ip Address) (systemAddress) Manage Tests, 134-24 Router, 169-7 System ID (siteID) Common Create Service, 79-45, 79-45 System ID (systemId) Node redundancy, 87-10 Residential Subscriber, 129-19 System Priority (systemPriority) Node redundancy, 87-10 System Reserve (%) (poolSystemReserve) HSMDA Pools, 107-7
T
Table size (entries) (mfibTableSize) Create VPLS, 70-30 Tag (staticRouteTag) Network navigation tree, 199-17 Target AS Value (vrfTargetASValue) Create VPRN, 72-28
Target Community Value (vrfTargetCommunityValue) Create VPRN, 72-29 Target Extended Community Value (vrfTargetExtendedCommunityValue) Create VPRN, 72-29 Target Format (vrfTargetFormat) Create VPRN, 72-29 Target IP Address (targetIpAddress) Manage Tests, 134-24 Target IP Address (tmnxOamPingCtlTgtAddress) Network navigation tree, 197-4 Target IP Address (vrfTargetIpAddress) Create VPRN, 72-29 Target MAC (mepTransmitLtmTargetMacAddress) Manage Tests, 134-24 Target MAC Address (targetMacAddress) Manage Services, 80-5 Manage Tests, 134-24 Target Type (targetType) Manage Tests, 134-24 Target Type (testTargetType) Common Tools, 145-7 Targeted Sessions Allowed (targettedSessions) LDP, 198-9 TCP Ack (tcpAck) ACL IP Filter, 112-10 TCP Syn (tcpSyn) ACL IP Filter, 112-10 TE Metric Network navigation tree, 199-18, 199-18 Telnet Port (telnetPort) Generic NE Profiles, 166-6 Telnet Reply (telnetReply) VRRP, 89-5 Telnet Session button Equipment navigation tree, 180-9 Temperature Threshold (Celsius) (temperatureThreshold) Card Slot, 176-5 Template Description Mirror service template, 81-5
IN-64
May 2009
Index Templated Object Categories (configuredClassCategories) Timeout (seconds)
Templated Object Categories (configuredClassCategories) Service template manager, 86-3 Templated Object Class Name (configuredClass) Service template manager, 86-3 Terminating Port Displayed Name (terminatingPortDisplayedName) Common Create Service, 79-45 Manage Services, 80-5 Terminating Port ID Mirror service template, 81-5 Terminating Port ID (terminatingPortId) Common Create Service, 79-45 Tertiary Script Administrative State (script3AdministrativeState) Residential Subscriber, 129-19 Tertiary Script URL (script3Url) Residential Subscriber, 129-19 Test Completion (trapGenerationPolicy) Common Tools, 145-8 Test Failure (trapGenerationPolicy) Common Tools, 145-8 Test Failure Threshold (testFailureThreshold) Common Tools, 145-8 Test Member (testMember) Bundles, 174-7 Test Message (testEmailMessage) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-8 Test Pattern (testPattern) Bundles, 174-7 Tested Entity Status Affected by Results (sasValidator) Manage Tests, 134-25 Third Timing Reference Input (thirdTimingReferenceInput) Shelf, 175-9 Three Way Hello (threeWayHello) PIM, 194-10 Threshold (# of objects) (rowThreshold) Size Constraint, 131-2 Threshold (%) (ipv6MaxNumRoutesThresHold) Create VPRN, 72-30
Threshold (%) (midRouteMcastThreshold) Create VPRN, 72-30 Threshold (%) (midRouteThreshold) Create VPRN, 72-30 Threshold Reporting State 5620 SAM User Security, 151-8 Threshold Reporting State (thresholdReportingState) Log Records, 140-2, 145-9 Threshold Value (thresholdValue) Manage Tests, 134-25 Through Length (throughLength) Routing, 123-16 Tier (tier) Scheduler, 103-4 Time Alignment Setting Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12 Time Average Factor (weight) (timeAverageFactor) WRED Slope, 101-4 Time Exceeded (timeExceeded) Common Create Service, 79-46 Network navigation tree, 199-18 Time Exceeded Time (seconds) (timeExceededTime) Common Create Service, 79-46 Network navigation tree, 199-18 Time Of Day Entry Policy Type Time Range Entry Assignment, 143-2 Time Out (aaasTimeOut) Administration, 167-8 Time Out (seconds) (timeOut) LDP, 198-10 Time Range Entry Container Type Time Range Entry Assignment, 143-3 Time Slots (timeSlotBits) Equipment navigation tree, 180-10 Time To Live (timeToLive) Common Tools, 145-9 Time To Wait (milliseconds) (waitMillSec) Manage Tests, 134-25 Timeout (seconds) Manage tests, 134-25 Manage Tests, 134-26
May 2009
IN-65
Index timeout (seconds) Trusted (trusted)
timeout (seconds) Mediation, 149-7 Timeout (seconds) (timeOut) Common Create Service, 79-46 Manage tests, 134-26 Network navigation tree, 199-18 Timeout (seconds) (timeout) Manage tests, 134-26 Timeout (seconds) (timeoutSeconds) Administration, 167-8 RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-4 Timeout (timerTimeout) RIP, 195-6 Timeout for Echo Request (seconds) (timeout) VRRP policy, 125-4 TLS Admin Status (tlsEnabled) Bridge, 185-16 TLS Mode (tlsMode) Bridge, 185-16 TLS Uplink Interface (tlsUplink) Bridge, 185-16 Tolerance (seconds) (tolerance) TCP Key Chains, 153-4 TOS (tos) 7250 SAS andTelco ACL Extended IP Filter, 114-4 ToS Precedence (tosValue) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9 Trace Tree (LdpTraceTree) Routing, 123-17 Traceroute Reply (traceRouteReply) VRRP, 89-5 Tracking Support (trackingSupport) PIM, 194-11 Traffic Class (QosTrafficClassEntry) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-4 Traffic Engineering (trafficEngineering) IS-IS, 191-12 Traffic Engineering Support (trafficEngineeringSupport) OSPF, 193-16 Transit Area (transitAreaId) OSPF, 193-16 Transit Delay (seconds) (transitDelay) OSPF, 193-16
IN-66 May 2009
Translation (vlanTranslation) Common Create Service, 79-46 Translation ID (vlanTranslationId) Common Create Service, 79-46 Transmit Interval (dot2OamInterval) Physical Port and APS, 178-33 Transmit Interval (transmitInterval) OSPF, 193-16 Transmit Interval(bfdtxInterval) Create IES, 73-14, 186-7 Create VPRN, 72-29 Transport (AutoBindTransport) Create VPRN, 72-31 Transport Preference (transportPreference) Manage Tests, 134-26 Transport Type (transportPreference) Common Create Service, 79-47, 79-47 Mirror service template, 81-5 Trap Destination Re-enable Time Interval (trapDestinationReenableTimeInterval) Generic NE Profiles, 166-6 Trap Dropped Raises Alarm (trapDroppedRaisesAlarm) Residential Subscriber, 129-19 Trap Generation (trapGenerationPolicy) Manage Tests, 134-26 Trap Threshold (lpsLearnTrapThreshold) Bridge, 185-16 Tree Trace (LdptreeTrace) LDP, 198-10 Triggered Re-evaluation of Route Policies (manualPolicyTrigger) Routing, 123-17 Trust Ports (trustPorts) Bridge, 185-17 Trusted (isTrusted) Common Create Service, 79-47 Routing Instance, 88-11, 184-21 Trusted (qosPortTrusted) Physical Port and APS, 178-34 Trusted (Trusted) Routing Instance, 88-11 Trusted (trusted) Common Create Service, 79-47 Network navigation tree, 199-18
Index TTL (ltrTtl) Type 1 Assigned Value (type1AssignedValue)
TTL (ltrTtl) Manage Tests, 134-27 TTL Expired (ttlExpired) Common Create Service, 79-48 Network navigation tree, 199-19 TTL Expired Time (seconds) (ttlExpiredTime) Common Create Service, 79-48 Network navigation tree, 199-19 Tunnel Auto-Selection Transport Preference (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPrefer ence) Common Create Service, 79-48 Tunnel Down Damp Time (seconds) (tunnelDownDampTime) LDP, 198-10 Tunnel Source Site ID (fromNodeId) Mirror service template, 81-6 Tunnel Transport (tunnelAutoselectionTunnelTransportPrefer ence) Common Create Service, 79-49 Mirror service template, 81-6 Tunnel Type (tunnelType) Service Tunnels, 85-5 Tunneling (dot3OamTunneling) Physical Port and APS, 178-34 Tunneling Enabled (tunnelingEnabled) LDP, 198-10 Turn Up button (turnUp) Equipment navigation tree, 180-10 TX Hold Count (insBridgeTxHoldCount) Bridge, 185-17 Tx Period (paeAuthTxPeriod) Physical Port and APS, 178-34 Txq 0 (txq0) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-4 Txq 1 (txq1) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-4 Txq 2 (txq2) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5 Txq 3 (txq3) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5 Txq 4 (txq4) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5
Txq 5 (txq5) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5 Txq 6 (txq6) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5 Txq 7 (txq7) 7250 SAS andTelco QoS, 109-5 Type Service template manager, 86-3 Type (accessType) Physical Port and APS, 178-35 Type (areaType) OSPF, 193-16 Type (authenticationType) Network navigation tree, 199-19 VRRP, 89-6 Type (channelType) Multicast CAC, 119-3 Type (ds3Type) Physical Port and APS, 178-35 Type (interfaceType) Network Navigation Tree, 199-20 Type (nodeCardinality) Physical Port and APS, 178-35 Type (optionType) Create VPRN, 72-32 Residential Subscriber, 129-19 Routing Instance, 184-22 Type (recordType) Accounting, 138-3 Type (type) Create VPRN, 72-32 LSPs, 84-10 Manage Tests, 134-27 Remote Network Monitoring, 130-4 Routing, 123-17 Static Routes, 197-4 Type (vprnType) Create VPRN, 72-32 Type 0 Administrative Value (type0AdministrativeValue) Create VPRN, 72-33 Type 0 Assigned Value (type0AssignedValue) Create VPRN, 72-33 Type 1 Assigned Value (type1AssignedValue) Create VPRN, 72-33
May 2009 IN-67
Index Type 1 IP Address (type1IpAddress) Use as source (giIpAddressAsSrc)
Type 1 IP Address (type1IpAddress) Create VPRN, 72-33 Type of Service (tosValue) OmniSwitch QoS, 110-9
U
Unconstrained Bandwidth (kbps) (unconstrainedBandwidth) Create VPLS, 70-30 Network navigation tree, 199-20 Underlying Transport (underlyingTransport) Service Tunnels, 85-5 Unicast Import (unicastImport) Network navigation tree, 199-20 Unit ID Code (channelMDLUnitString) Channel, 179-19 Units (units) Residential Subscriber, 129-19 Unknown Queue ID (unknownQueueId) Access Ingress, 93-12 Unlimited Concurrent Pings (unlimitedConcurrentPings) Manage Tests, 134-27 Unlimited Concurrent Traces (unlimitedConcurrentTraces) Manage Tests, 134-27 Unmanaged - Description (unmanagedEndpointBDescription) Create Physical Link, 78-2 Unmanaged - Management Address (unmanagedEndpointBIPAddr) Create Physical Link, 78-3 Unmanaged - Name (unmanagedEndpointB) Create Physical Link, 78-3 Unnumbered Interface (interfaceName) Static Routes, 197-4 Unnumbered Reference (referenceType) Interface and interface IP address, 186-7 Unnumbered Type (unnumberedReferenceType) Common Create Service, 79-49 Interface and interface IP address, 186-8
Unreachables (unreachables) Common Create Service, 79-49 Network navigation tree, 199-21 Unreachables Time (seconds) (unreachablesTime) Common Create Service, 79-50 Network navigation tree, 199-21 Unscheduled Polling Stats Pending Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 Unscheduled Polling Stats Processed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 Unscheduled Polling Stats Total Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 Unscheduled Resync Failure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Unscheduled Resync Processed Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Unscheduled Resync Received Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Unscheduled Stats Failure Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 Unsolicited Report Interval (seconds) (igmpUnsolicitedReportInterval) IGMP, 188-7 Manage Services, 80-5 Up Count (upCount) Channel, 179-19 Update (timerUpdate) RIP, 195-6 Update Test Result Status (updateResultStatus) Manage Tests, 134-28 Upper Ring Adjacency (adjacentToUpperRing) Bridge, 185-17 Usage (usage) Discovery Manager, 148-3 Use as source (giIpAddressAsSrc) Common Create Service, 79-50
IN-68
May 2009
Index Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (topologyAutoCompletion) VC ID (vcId)
Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (topologyAutoCompletion) Mirror service template, 81-6 Use Bandwidth-Reserved Paths (useBwReservedPath) Common Create Service, 79-50 Use Component Package Policy (useComponentPackagePolicy) Create VPLS, 70-31 Use Direct Map as Default (useDirectMapAsDefault) Residential Subscriber, 129-20 Use GI Address (useGiAddress) Create VPRN, 72-33 Residential Subscriber, 129-20 Routing Instance, 184-22 Use Latest Version (useLatestVersion) Script manager, 135-4 Use Local Tunnel (useLocalTunnel) Manage Tests, 134-28 Use Multipoint Shared Queue (multipointSharedQueueOn) Residential Subscriber, 129-20 Use Multipoint Shared Queue (usesMultipointShared) Common Create Service, 79-50 Use Next Hop (isNextHopEnabled) Routing, 123-18 Use Pool From Client (usePoolFromClient) Create VPRN, 72-34 Use Remote Tunnel (useRemoteTunnel) Manage Tests, 134-28 Use SAP ID as Subscriber ID (subIdIsSapId) Common Create Service, 79-50 Use Shared Queue (sharedQueueOn) Common Create Service, 79-51 Residential Subscriber, 129-20 Used Heap Memory Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-6 Used Non Heap Memory Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 user documentation, v User End Time (endDate) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12
User Group (defaultSystemGroupAttributePtr) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-8 User Group (groupName) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-8, 151-8 User Group State (userGroupPointer) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-9 User Name (displayedName) NE User Configuration, 157-5 User Name (userName) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-9 Mediation, 149-7 Residential Subscriber, 129-20 User Name Format (userNameFormat) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 Subscriber Authentication Policy, 163-5 User Password (cliPassword) Mediation, 149-8 User Password (password) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-9 User Standard Account Attribute (useStdAcctAttrib) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-5 User Start Time (startDate) Schedules and Scheduled Tasks, 141-12 User State (state) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-9
V
Valid Client IP Address (validClientIpAddress) 5620 SAM User Security, 151-9 Value Routing, 123-18 Value (minutes) (updateInterval) RADIUS Based Accounting, 128-5 Value (optionValue) Create VPRN, 72-34 Routing Instance, 184-22 Value (value) MPLS Administration Groups, 124-2 VC ID (fwdSdpBindVcId) Policies, 133-24 VC ID (vcId) Common Create Service, 79-51 Common Service Management, 92-4
May 2009
IN-69
Index VC Type (svcVcType) VPLS Tag (vplsTag)
VC Type (svcVcType) Common Create Service, 79-51 VC Type (VcType) Service Tunnels, 85-6 VC Type (vcType) Common Create Service, 79-51 Create VLL, 71-16 VC's Label Time Live (vcLabelTtl) Manage Tests, 134-28 Vendor Specific Options (vendorIncludeOptions) Common Create Service, 79-51 Vendor String (vendorOptionString) Common Create Service, 79-52 Version (version) Create VPRN, 72-34 OSPF, 193-17 View Dependencies button (getDependencyCount) Equipment navigation tree, 180-10 View Shelf Router, 169-7 View the newly created Dynamic Lsp LSPs, 84-11, 84-11 View the newly created interface LAG, 170-8 View the newly created MPLS path MPLS, 192-4 View the newly created Network Interface Interface and interface IP address, 186-8 View the newly created tunnel Service Tunnels, 85-6 Violation (lpsViolationOption) Bridge, 185-17 Virtual Neighbor Router (Site) ID (virtualNeighborRouterId) OSPF, 193-18 Virtual Router ID (vrId) VRRP, 89-6 Virtual Router ID (vRtrID) Manage Tests, 134-29 VLAN Drop Enable(mepTransmitLbmVlanDropEnable) Manage Tests, 134-29
VLAN for all Services (Bridged) (vlanAllServicesBridged) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN for all Services (Routed) (vlanAllServicesRouted) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN ID (switchingInstanceId) Bridge, 185-17 VLAN ID (vlanId) Manage Tests, 134-29 VLAN per ISP per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerISPPerServiceBridged) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN per ISP per Service (Routed) (vlanPerISPPerServiceRouted) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN per Service (Bridged) (vlanPerServiceBridged) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN per Service (Routed) (vlanPerServiceRouted) Residential Subscriber, 129-21 VLAN per Subscriber (Bridged) (vlanPerSubscrBridged) Residential Subscriber, 129-22 VLAN per Subscriber (Routed) (vlanPerSubscrRouted) Residential Subscriber, 129-22 VLAN Priority (mepTransmitLbmVlanPriority) Manage Tests, 134-29 VLAN Priority Tag (vpt) Policies, 133-24 VLAN Tagging Create VLAN, 74-5 VLAN VC Tag (vlanVcTag) Manage, 92-4 Service Tunnels, 85-6 VPLS Mode (L2 Access Interface) (vplsMode) Create VPLS, 70-31 VPLS Mode (Node or Network Element) Router, 169-7 VPLS Tag (vplsTag) Create VPLS, 70-31
IN-70
May 2009
Index VPN Domain ID (hex) (vpnDomainId) Zapping (igmpZapping)
VPN Domain ID (hex) (vpnDomainId) OSPF, 193-18 VPN Domain Type (vpnDomainType) OSPF, 193-18 VPN Tag (vpnTag) OSPF, 193-19 VRF Target Type (vrfTargetType) Create VPRN, 72-34 VRRP Type (vrrpType) VRRP, 89-6
W
Wait To Restore (seconds) (waitToRestore) Physical Port and APS, 178-35 Warning Periodic Threshold Server performance statistics, 139-7 Weight (%) (weight) MLPPP egress QoS profile, 97-3 Weight (level1Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level2Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level3Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level4Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level5Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level6Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-7 Weight (level7Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-8 Weight (level8Weight) HSMDA scheduler, 106-8 Weight (orphanWeight) Port scheduler, 105-5 Weight (portParentWeight) Policies, 133-25 Weight (schOvrClass1WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass2WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-36 Weight (schOvrClass3WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-36
Weight (schOvrClass4WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass5WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass6WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass7WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-37 Weight (schOvrClass8WtInGp) Physical Port and APS, 178-37 Weight (weight) Policies, 133-25 What type of interface would you like to create? Interface and interface IP address, 186-8 Manage Services, 80-5 Wide Metrics Only (wideMetricsOnly) IS-IS, 191-13 Write Login Prompt (writeLoginPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-6 Write Password Prompt (writePasswordPrompt) Generic NE Profiles, 166-7 Write Policy ID (writeMediationPolicyId) Discovery Manager, 148-3
X
Xgig Mode (networkMode) Physical Port and APS, 178-37
Y
Yellow Diff Delay (milliseconds) (yellowDiffDelay) Bundles, 174-7
Z
Zapping (igmpZapping) IGMP, 188-7 Manage Services, 80-5
May 2009
IN-71
Index
IN-72
May 2009
Customer documentation and product support
Customer documentation
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/myaccess
Product manuals and documentation updates are available at alcatel-lucent.com. If you are a new user and require access to this service, please contact your Alcatel-Lucent sales representative.
Technical Support
http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support
Documentation feedback
documentation.feedback@alcatel-lucent.com
2008-2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved. 3HE 04240 AAAC Ed. 01

3he04240aaactqzza01 v1 Alcatel-Lucent 5620

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

3he04240aaactqzza01 v1 Alcatel-Lucent 5620

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Alcatel-Lucent 5620

SERVICE AWARE MANAGER | RELEASE 6.1

When printed by Alcatel-Lucent, this document is printed on recycled paper.

About this document

The 5620 SAM Parameter Guide provides:

About related documentation

Procedure 2 To find the 5620 SAM user documentation

Multiple PDF document search

Procedure 3 To search multiple PDF files for a common term

Conventions used in this guide

Procedures with options or substeps

Example of options in a procedure

You must perform this step.

Example of substeps in a procedure

You must perform this step.

may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious performance problems.

may, or will, cause service interruption.

Note Notes provides information that is, or may be, of special

5620 SAM Parameter Guide overview

Application menu parameters

Create menu parameters

71 Create VLL parameters

72 Create VPRN parameters

73 Create IES parameters

74 Create VLAN parameters

75 Create Mirror parameters

76 Create Service From Template parameters

Create Service From Template parameters........................................ 76-2

77 Create Topology Group parameters

78 Create Physical Link parameters

79 Common Create menu parameters

Manage menu parameters

81 Manage Mirror Service Templates parameters

82 Manage Customers parameters

83 Manage MPLS Paths parameters

84 Manage LSPs parameters

85 Manage Service Tunnels parameters

86 Manage Service Templates parameters

87 Manage node redundancy parameters

88 Routing Instance parameters

90 Virtual Anycast RP parameters

91 Manage FIB Entries parameters

92 Common Manage menu parameters

Policies menu parameters

94 Access Egress parameters

95 ATM QoS parameters

96 MLPPP Ingress QoS Profile parameters

97 MLPPP Egress QoS Profile parameters

99 Network Queue parameters

100 Shared Queue parameters

101 WRED Slope parameters

102 HSMDA WRED Slope parameters

103 Scheduler parameters

104 BGP Auto-discovery Policy parameters

105 Port scheduler parameters

106 HSMDA Scheduler parameters

Weight Weight Weight Weight

(level5Weight)............................................................ (level6Weight)............................................................ (level7Weight)............................................................ (level8Weight)............................................................

106-7 106-7 106-8 106-8

107 HSMDA Pool parameters

108 Named Buffer Pool parameters

109 7250 SAS and Telco QoS parameters